Source document: https://docs-lawep.s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/1698848823058.pdf (New Zealand)
Reprint as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Public Act 1989 No 80 Date of assent 29 September 1989 Commencement see section 1(2) Contents Title 1 Short Title and commencement Part 1AA Early childhood and compulsory education: statement of National Education and Learning Priorities Minister may issue statement of National Education and Learning Priorities Part 1 Rights to primary and secondary education Interpretation Transitional, savings, and related provisions Right to free primary and secondary education Restriction on attendance at certain schools [Repealed] Enrolment of international students Certain international students may enrol at State schools as of right Fees for international students 1A 2 2A 3 3A 4 4A 4B Note Page 39 39 39 40 47 47 47 47 49 49 Changes authorised by subpart 2 of Part 2 of the Legislation Act 2012 have been made in this official reprint.
Note 4 at the end of this reprint provides a list of the amendments incorporated.

This Act is administered by the Ministry of Education.
1 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 4C 4D 4E 5 5A 5B 5C 6 7 7A 7B 8 9 10 Minister may exempt certain international students from payment of fees Boards to reimburse the Crown for expenditure in respect of international students Courses for international students Restrictions on enrolment at primary school Cohort entry policy Determining term start dates under cohort entry policy Adoption or revocation of cohort entry policy Restrictions on enrolment at secondary school Additional restrictions on enrolment at correspondence school Certain domestic students may be required to pay fees for tuition from correspondence schools Fees for evening classes, etc Equal rights to primary and secondary education Special education Right of reconsideration Part 2 Enrolment schemes, and suspension, expulsion, and exclusion of students 11 Limitations on enrolment at certain primary schools [Repealed] Enrolment schemes Purpose and principles Interpretation Content of enrolment scheme Effect of home zone How a school defines its home zone How to select applicants who live outside home zone Instructions and guidelines on operation of enrolment schemes Process for developing and adopting enrolment scheme Proposed enrolment schemes to be approved by Secretary Development of enrolment scheme by Secretary Information about school’s enrolment scheme Commencement of enrolment scheme End of enrolment scheme Amendment of enrolment scheme 11A 11B 11C 11D 11E 11F 11G 11H 11I 11IA 11J 11K 11L 11M 11MA Making minor amendments to
 enrolment schemes Pre-enrolment in schools with enrolment schemes 11N Enrolment may be annulled if based on false information or 11O temporary residence 11OA Review of student’s enrolment 11P 11PA Secretary may direct board to enrol applicant Annual review of enrolment scheme Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 11PB 11Q 12 Enrolment schemes of certain State schools Obligation to report to
 Parliament on enrolment schemes Enrolment schemes for certain other schools [Repealed] 17A 17B 17C 17D 18 Standing-down, suspension, exclusion, and expulsion of students Purpose Principal may stand-down or suspend students Board’s powers when suspended student younger than 16 Secretary’s powers when excluded student younger than 16 Board’s powers when suspended student 16 or older Duties of principal when student stood-down or suspended Who may attend board meeting concerning suspensions Effect of suspension on school register Re-enrolment of excluded or expelled student Notice requirements for stand-downs, suspensions, exclusions, and expulsions 18AA Secretary may make rules 18A 19 Recommendation that student should attend particular school Principal may preclude student for health reasons Part 3 Enrolment and attendance of students 20 21 22 22A New Zealand citizens and residents between 6 and 16 to go to school Long term exemptions from enrolment Secretary may exempt from enrolment Secretary may exempt from enrolment persons placed in residence or programme under Oranga Tamariki Act 1989 Effect of exemption Penalty for failure to enrol Students required to enrol must attend school Release from tuition on religious or cultural grounds 23 24 25 25A 25AA Release from tuition in specified parts of health curriculum 25B 26 27 28 Release from school Exemption from attendance Principal may exempt from attendance for short period Secretary may require
 parents of certain children to enrol them at correspondence school Penalty for irregular attendance Employment of school-age children Ensuring attendance of students Nature of secondary-tertiary programme Provider group for secondary-tertiary programme Secretary may enter into agreement with provider group Provider group plan for secondary-tertiary programme 29 30 31 31A 31B 31C 31D Education Act
92 93 94 94 95 95 96 98 98 99 100 3 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 31E 31F 31G 31H 31I 31J 31K 31L 32 33 34 35 Report to Secretary by provider group Recognition as lead provider of secondary-tertiary programme Lead provider to co-ordinate secondary-tertiary programme Government policies or priorities Entry into secondary-tertiary programme Provider group or lead provider to notify student and parents about any school attendance requirement Withdrawal from secondary-tertiary programme International students and secondary-tertiary programmes Hearings of proceedings may be private Evidence of school roll, etc Burden of proof on parents Fines to be paid to board or sponsor (as applicable) Registration of private schools 35A 35AA Suspensions and expulsions of students from private schools to be Provisional and full registration of private schools 35B 35C 35D 35E 35F 35G notified to Secretary [Repealed] Secretary may require application for registration of school Criteria for registration as private school Criteria for registration as private school Suitable premises Additional and substituted premises to be approved Tuition standards Managers to be fit and proper persons 100 100 101 101 102 102 103 103 103 103 104 104 104 105 105 105 106 106 106 106 Statement of National Education and Learning Priorities 35GA Manager must have regard to statement of National Education and 107 Learning Priorities Managers to advise Secretary of private school ceasing operation 35H Managers must advise Secretary of
 school ceasing operation Review of private schools registered under section 35A 35I Review of schools registered under section 35A Actions by Secretary in regard to schools registered under section 35A 35J 35K 35L 35M Secretary’s actions in regard to schools registered under section 35A Suspension of registration if welfare of students may be at risk Duration of suspension Process for cancellation of registration 35N Grants for private schools Grants for private schools 108 108 109 110 110 110 111 4
 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 35O 35P 35Q Record-keeping in relation to grants to private schools Providing accounts to Secretary Suspensions and expulsions from private schools Suspensions and expulsions of students from private schools to be notified to Secretary 35R Offences in relation to operation of private schools Offences in relation to private schools Powers of entry and inspection 35S Entry where private school suspected of being unregistered Part 4 Specialist Education Services Board [Repealed] Interpretation [Repealed] Board continued for purposes of this Part [Repealed] Membership of Board [Repealed] Function of Board [Repealed] Board responsible to Minister [Repealed] Powers of Board [Repealed] Part 5 Early Childhood Development Board [Repealed] Interpretation [Repealed] Board continued for purposes of this Part [Repealed] Membership of Board [Repealed] Function of Board [Repealed] Board responsible to Minister [Repealed] Powers of Board [Repealed] Part 6 Parent Advocacy Council [Repealed] Interpretation [Repealed] Parent Advocacy Council [Repealed] Membership of Council [Repealed] Criteria for appointing members [Repealed] Function of Council [Repealed] Council may refuse to act in certain cases [Repealed] Powers of Council [Repealed] Procedure where Council takes matter up [Repealed] Council may decide not to proceed with matter [Repealed] Council to give reasons [Repealed] 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 58 59 Procedure where matter deserves action [Repealed] Power to obtain information [Repealed] Part 7 Control and management of State schools 60 Interpretation Curriculum and performance Curriculum statements and national performance measures Consultation about treatment of health curriculum School charter Procedural requirements of
 preparing or updating school charter Effect of school charter When school charter or updated charter takes effect Board must make copies of school charter available Effect of charter [Repealed] Secretary may require board to get specialist support [Repealed] Staff [Repealed] Length of school year Terms Holidays Exceptions in particular cases 60A 60B 61 62 63 63A 63B 64 64A 65 65A 65B 65C 65D 65DA Multiple timetable arrangements 65E 65F 65G 65H 66 66A 66B Emergencies Application of provisions Minister to act by means of instructions Application of Crown Entities Act 2004 [Repealed] Delegations [Repealed] No delegation of power to borrow [Repealed] Application of new acquisition of securities, borrowing, guarantees, indemnities, and derivative transactions rules [Repealed] Restrictions on borrowing [Repealed] Restrictions on giving of guarantees and indemnities [Repealed] Restrictions on use of derivatives [Repealed] Gifts [Repealed] Real property [Repealed] Occupancy of property and buildings [Repealed] Minister may declare land to be no longer needed for educational purposes [Repealed] Leases and licences granted by boards [Repealed] Other agreements to occupy school land or buildings [Repealed] Courses, work experience, and visits outside school premises Off-site locations for schools 67 67A 67B 68 69 70 70A 70B 70C 71 71A 132
130 130 130 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 132 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Land no longer needed for educational purposes Minister may declare land to be no longer needed for educational purposes Communities of learning Community of learning approved by Minister Secretary may enter agreement with community of learning Community of learning that has agreement with Secretary must also prepare plan Report to Secretary by community of learning Performance review of community of learning Powers and functions of principals Appointment of
 principals Role of principal Guidance and counselling Enrolment records 71B 71C 72 73 74 75 75A 76 77 77A Regulations 78 Regulations relating to control and management of schools Powers of entry and inspection 78A 78B 78C Powers of entry and inspection Entry where private school suspected of being unregistered [Repealed] Police vetting of non-teaching staff Police vetting of non-teaching and unregistered employees at schools 78CA Police vetting of contractors and their employees who work at 78CB schools Police vet must be obtained before person has unsupervised access to students Further Police vets to be obtained under this Part every 3 years 78CC 78CD Procedures relating to Police vets Risk management schemes School risk management scheme School risk management scheme fees Regulations relating to school risk management scheme Former school risk management schemes Part 7A Interventions in schools Purpose of Part Application of interventions Requirement to provide information 78D 78E 78F 78G 78H 78I 78J 133 133 134 134 135 135 135 135 136 136 137 137 138 139 139 139 139 140 140 141 141 142 142 142 144 7 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Specialist help Action plans 78K 78L 78LA Case conference Specialist audit 78LB 78LC Performance notice 78LD Appointment of additional trustee by Minister Amendment and revocation of notices 78LE Limited statutory manager 78M 78N Dissolution of board and appointment of commissioner 78NA No compensation for loss of
 office 78O 78P 78Q 78R 78S 78T Commissioners Commissioner sets date for election of trustees Protection of limited statutory managers and commissioners Annual review of interventions Application of interventions to State integrated schools Application of interventions to Kura Kaupapa Maori Part 8 Financial matters, assets, and property 79 80 81 Grants for boards or sponsors No transfer between grants [Repealed] Payment of teacher salaries from sources other than grants [Repealed] Grants for correspondence
 schools Management of financial management system [Repealed] Annual financial statements [Repealed] Responsibility for financial statements [Repealed] Audit report on financial statements [Repealed] Financial statements to be included in annual report [Repealed] Financial year [Repealed] Annual reports Audit 81A 81B 82 83 84 85 86 87 87A 87AB Annual report to be made available 87B 87C 88 88A 89 90 91 Report on performance of schools’ sector Annual financial statements of boards Payment of travel costs and attendance fees Rent for teachers’ residences Payroll service Application of Public Finance Act 1989 [Repealed] Transitional arrangements for payment of teacher salaries [Repealed] Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 8A Payment of teacher salaries, limitations on staffing, and powers of Secretary to employ teachers and create positions Interpretation Application Payment of salaries Salaries of teachers at certain schools to be paid by the Crown Agreements to move from central payment of teacher salaries [Repealed] Payment of salaries of certain teachers out of grants [Repealed] Restrictions on payment of salaries of regular teachers by boards of payrolled schools Payment of salaries of relieving teachers and employment-based trainee teachers Limitations on staffing Limitations on appointment and
 employment of regular teachers at payrolled schools Secretary may grant exemptions in individual cases Boards to comply with limitations Reduction in grants where limitations not complied with Staffing levels for 1992 Application period may be extended 91A 91B 91C 91D 91E 91F 91G 91H 91I 91J 91K 91L 91M Application period may be extended Powers of Secretary to employ teachers and create positions 91N 91O Power of Secretary to employ teachers Employment-based trainee teaching positions Part 9 School boards 92 93
 94 94A 94B 94C 95 96 97 Interpretation Requirement for board of trustees State schools and special institutions to have boards of trustees Constitution of boards Constitution of boards of State schools Proprietors of State integrated schools may vary number of trustees they appoint Boards may alter their own constitutions Limitations on co-option and appointment of trustees [Repealed] Composition of boards of special institutions Parent representatives Staff and student representatives 159 160 160 161 161 161 161 162 162 163 163 163 163 164 164 164 168 168 169 170 172 172 173 174 9 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 98 98A 98B 98C Boards of newly established schools Minister may approve alternative constitution in certain cases Consequences of approval of alternative constitution Actions of boards not to be questioned for informality in membership Co-opted and appointed trustees 99 100 Criteria for selecting co-opted and appointed trustees Limitations on co-option and appointment of trustees Elections of trustees Elections of trustees Staggered elections for parent representatives 101 101A 101AB Election not to be held when school under notice of closure Consultation requirements for staggered elections of parent 101B representatives Provisions relating to board with staggered election cycle where commissioner appointed Validation and invalidation of elections of boards 101D 101C 102 Term of office Term of office of trustees Eligibility to be trustee
 103 103A 103B Certain persons ineligible to be trustees Financial interests that disqualify persons from being trustees Requirements before appointment Casual vacancies on boards 104 105 105A Minister may approve alternative constitution in certain cases When casual vacancies arise Filling casual vacancies of elected trustees 106 107 108 109 109A [Repealed] Commissioner may be appointed if board inactive or trustees too few [Repealed] Minister may dissolve board for cause, and direct appointment of
 commissioner [Repealed] Consultation with proprietors of integrated school [Repealed] Commissioners [Repealed] Provisions relating to board with staggered election cycle where commissioner appointed [Repealed] Combining and splitting boards Boards may combine 110 110A Minister may combine boards at establishment 111 112 Restrictions on combining Minister may split combined board 10 174 175 176 176 177 177 178 180 181 181 181 182 183 184 186 187 188 189 190 190 191 191 191 191 191 192 193 193 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 112A 113 114 115 116 116A 117 118 119 Splitting boards that were combined at establishment Property held in trust Allocation of employees after combined board split Transfer of assets of split combined board Each school to be represented on combined board Appointment of principal of combined board [Repealed] Miscellaneous provisions Other provisions applying to boards Regulations about board elections Savings Part 10 Teacher registration [Repealed] 120 Interpretation [Repealed] Restrictions on appointment and employment of teaching staff [Repealed] 120A 120B 120C Restrictions on appointment of teachers [Repealed] Restrictions on continued employment of teachers [Repealed] Restrictions on activities of teachers whose practising certificate or limited authority to teach subject to interim suspension [Repealed] Teacher registration [Repealed] 121 122 123 124 124A 124B 125 Applications for registration as teacher [Repealed] Full
 registration [Repealed] Provisional registration [Repealed] Registration of experienced teachers [Repealed] Determining whether or not training satisfactory [Repealed] Determining good character and fitness to be teacher [Repealed] Determining whether or not employment satisfactorily completed [Repealed] Appeals from decisions of Teachers Council [Repealed] Expiry of teacher registration [Repealed] Voluntary deregistration [Repealed] Teachers Council to keep register [Repealed] 126 127 127A 128 128A Matching of
 register information and information about payment 129 129A 130 of teacher salaries at payrolled schools [Repealed] Cancellation of registration as teacher and cancellation of limited authority to teach [Repealed] Reclassification of teacher’s registration [Repealed] Practising certificates [Repealed] 194 194 197 198 198 199 199 199 199 200 200 200 200 200 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 202 202 202 202 202 11 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Limited authority to teach [Repealed] 130A 130B 130C 130D 130E 130F 130G 130H 131 132 133 134 135 135A 136 137 138 138A 138B 139 Purpose of limited authority to teach [Repealed] Limited authority to teach [Repealed] Determining character and likely teaching ability [Repealed] Appeals from decisions [Repealed] Period of authorisation [Repealed] Teachers Council to keep list [Repealed] Cancellation of authorisation [Repealed] Fees and costs [Repealed] Teacher Registration Board [Repealed] Teacher Registration Board [Repealed] Membership of Registration Board [Repealed] Certain people ineligible to be members [Repealed] Co-opted members [Repealed] Powers of Registration Board [Repealed] Teachers Council may disclose certain information [Repealed] Teachers Council may charge fees and impose costs [Repealed] Offences [Repealed] Council to notify cancellations [Repealed] Notification of convictions [Repealed] Notification by certain employers [Repealed] Transitional provisions [Repealed] Part 10A New Zealand
 Teachers Council [Repealed] 139AA Purpose of Part [Repealed] 139AB Interpretation [Repealed] Teachers Council [Repealed] 139AC New Zealand Teachers Council established [Repealed] 139AD Composition of Teachers Council [Repealed] 139AE Functions of Teachers Council [Repealed] 139AF Powers of Teachers Council [Repealed] 139AG Ministerial directions [Repealed] 139AH Advisory groups [Repealed] 139AI Code of ethics [Repealed] 139AJ Teachers Council to make rules [Repealed] 139AJA Delegations [Repealed] 139AJB Chief
 executive [Repealed] Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 139AJC Superannuation [Repealed] Mandatory reporting [Repealed] 139AK Mandatory reporting of dismissals and resignations [Repealed] 139AL Mandatory reporting of complaints received about former employees [Repealed] 139AM Mandatory reporting of possible serious misconduct [Repealed] 139AN Mandatory reporting of failure to reach required level of competence [Repealed] 139AO Offence to fail to report [Repealed] 139AP Mandatory reporting of convictions [Repealed] Disciplinary functions [Repealed] 139AQ Disciplinary bodies [Repealed] 139AR Complaints of misconduct [Repealed] 139AS Complaints and reports relating to teacher conduct [Repealed] 139AT Powers of Complaints Assessment Committee [Repealed] 139AU Interim suspension until matter about or involving possible serious misconduct concluded [Repealed] 139AUADuration of interim suspension [Repealed] 139AV Investigation by Complaints Assessment Committee of reports of convictions [Repealed] 139AW Powers of Disciplinary Tribunal [Repealed] 139AX Evidence at hearings [Repealed] 139AY Powers of Disciplinary Tribunal in relation to witnesses [Repealed] 139AZ Offences [Repealed] 139AZA Privileges and immunities [Repealed] 139AZB Appeals [Repealed] Review of competence [Repealed] Investigation of mandatory reports about competence
 [Repealed] 139AZC Complaints about competence [Repealed] 139AZC A 139AZC B Powers of Teachers Council after finding required level of competence not attained [Repealed] 206 206 206 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 208 208 208 208 208 208 208 208 209 209 209 209 139AZD Teachers Council must co-ordinate Police vetting [Repealed] 209 Police vetting [Repealed] 13 Education Act 1989 Part 11 Miscellaneous Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 139A No corporal punishment in early childhood services or registered schools
 139AB No seclusion at or on behalf of registered school or early childhood service 139AC Limits on use of physical restraint in schools 139AD Rules on physical restraint 139AE Guidelines on physical restraint 139AAASurrender and retention of property 139AAB Searches of clothing and bags or other containers 139AAC Restrictions on searches under section 139AAB 139AADLimitations on sections 139AAA and 139AAB 139AAE Prohibitions on searches by contractors 139AAF Refusal to reveal, produce, or surrender item 139AAGPower to search storage containers not affected 139AAHRules about surrender and retention of property and searches 139AAI Guidelines about surrender and retention of property and searches 139B 139C 139D 139E 140 141 Building Act 2004 Offence of insulting, abusing, or intimidating staff School transport Bonds for trainee teachers Initial appointment of primary teachers [Repealed] Consequential amendments to Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975 [Repealed] Other consequential amendments, repeals, revocations, and savings Education boards and secondary schools councils abolished Department of Education abolished Secretary may require information for proper administration of Act Purpose of sections 144C to 144E Regulations about school hostels Inspection of hostels Authorised person for purpose of section 144D 142 143 144 144A 144B 144C 144D 144E Part 12 Establishment of schools 145AAAPurpose of Part 145 146 146A 147 148 149 150 151 Interpretation
 Minister may establish schools Single sex schools Names of State schools Normal schools, etc Intermediate departments Contributing schools Provision of education at composite schools Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Correspondence schools Minister may change class of school Closure of schools 152 153 154 154A Minister may redesignate, or remove
 designation from, schools 155 155A 155B 155C 155D Kura Kaupapa Maori Te Aho Matua Te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua Application of section 155 Provisions applying to Kura Kaupapa Maori established before commencement of Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 Acknowledgment of adoption of Te Aho Matua Protection of term Kura Kaupapa Maori Designated character schools 155E 155F 156 156AA Process for establishing designated character schools 156A Minister may merge schools 156AB Election or appointment of boards of continuing schools 156AC Alternative constitutions for continuing schools Restrictions on mergers in certain cases 156B Property held in trust 156C Consultations 157 Community education forums 157A Provision by one board of tuition for students enrolled at school 158 administered by another Part 12A Partnership schools kura hourua 158A Interpretation Approval and operation of partnership schools kura hourua 158B Minister may approve sponsors 158C Minister must appoint advisory group Partnership school contracts 158D Complaints 158E Prohibitions on operation of partnership schools kura hourua 158F Sponsor’s duties 158G Sponsor to control management of partnership school kura hourua 158H School rules 158I Sponsor’s power to delegate 158J Annual financial statements of partnership schools kura hourua 158K Partnership school kura hourua may participate in school risk 158L management scheme 158M Intervention in partnership school kura hourua by Secretary
 Enrolment in partnership schools kura hourua 158N Enrolment in partnership schools kura hourua Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 158O 158P Equal rights to primary and secondary education in partnership schools kura hourua Special education in partnership schools kura hourua 158Q Multiple timetable arrangements in partnership schools kura Multiple timetable
 arrangements hourua Exclusions 158R 158S Secretary’s powers when student younger than 16 is excluded from partnership school kura hourua Re-enrolment by partnership school kura hourua of student excluded or expelled Courses and visits 253 254 254 255 256 158T Courses and visits outside partnership school kura hourua premises 257 Application of Act to partnership schools kura hourua 158U 158V Application of this Act to partnership schools kura hourua Application of Education (Stand-Down, Suspension, Exclusion, and Expulsion) Rules 1999 to partnership schools kura hourua Application of other Acts to partnership schools kura hourua 158W Application of New Zealand Bill of Rights Act 1990 to partnership 158X 158Y 158Z schools kura hourua Application of Privacy Act 1993 to partnership schools kura hourua Official Information Act 1982 not to apply to partnership schools kura hourua Application of State Sector Act 1988 to institutions sponsoring partnership schools kura hourua 158ZA Application of Ombudsmen Act 1975 to institutions sponsoring partnership schools kura hourua Part 13 General provisions relating to tertiary education Interpretation 159AAAObject of provisions relating to tertiary education 159 159AA Tertiary education strategy 159AB Importance of tertiary education strategy 159AC Revocation and replacement or amendment of tertiary education strategy 159AD Roles within tertiary education sector 159AE Ministry may hold and disseminate information 159AF Secretary
 may delegate certain powers and functions to Commission 257 258 259 259 259 259 260 260 261 268 269 269 269 269 270 16 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A Tertiary Education Commission Preliminary provisions 159A 159ABA Outline of framework for planning, funding, and monitoring in Purpose of Part 159B 159C 159D 159E tertiary education sector Definition of organisation Establishment of Commission Establishment of Commission Composition of Commission Charging Functions of Commission
 159F 159FA Offers of employment in equivalent positions for Careers New Functions of Commission Zealand employees 159FB Effect of offers on certain agreements and entitlements 159FC No compensation for technical redundancy of employees of Careers New Zealand Principles guiding how Commission operates 159FD Repeal of sections 159FA to 159FD 159G 159H Minister may review performance of Commission [Repealed] 159I 159J 159K 159KA Chief executive 159KB Responsibilities of chief executive 159KBA Monitoring and reporting function of chief executive in relation to Delegation of functions or powers of Minister Minister may direct Commission Application of Commerce Act 1986 institutions 159KC Declaration of interests 159KD Superannuation 159KE Statement of intent 159KEA Statement of performance expectations 159KF Annual report 159KG Certain powers must not be delegated Funding mechanisms 159L Minister determines design of funding mechanisms 159M Restrictions on design of funding mechanisms 159N 159O Funding mechanisms consistent with quality assurance principle Commission to implement funding mechanisms Requirements for, and content of, proposed plans 159P 159Q Requirements for proposed plans Exemption from certain requirements for proposed plans Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 159R 159S Content of, and processes for submitting,
 proposed plans prescribed by Commission Commission may exempt organisation from complying with certain matters Submitting proposed plan 159T Who must submit proposed plan 159U 159V 159W Submitting combined proposed plan Exemption from requirement to submit proposed plan Frequency of submitting proposed plans Preparing and consulting on proposed plans 159X Preparing and consulting on proposed plans Assessment of proposed plans and giving of funding approval 159Y 159YA Commission’s assessment of proposed plans,
 giving of funding Criteria for assessing proposed plans approval, and payment of funding 159YB Commission may decline to assess proposed plan 159YC Conditions on receiving funding under section 159YA 159YD Accountability for funding received under section 159YA Expiry of funding approval 159YE Expiry of funding approval 159YF Effect of expiry of funding approval Suspension or revocation of funding given under section 159YA 159YG Commission may suspend or revoke funding given under section 159YA 159YH Extending suspension of funding 159YI Effect of suspending or revoking funding given under section 159YA 159YJ Review of decision by delegate to suspend or revoke funding given under section 159YA Amending or replacing plans 159YK Organisation may seek approval for significant amendment, or replacement, of plan 159YL Effect of significant amendment or replacement of plan under section 159YK 159YM Commission may make significant amendment to plan 159YN Effect of significant amendment made to plan under section 159YM 159YO Summary of plans 159Z Profiles must be publicly available [Repealed] Plan summary 18 285 286 286 286 286 287 287 287 288 289 289 290 291 291 291 292 293 293 293 294 295 295 295 296 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Funding by Commission [Repealed] 159ZA Minister must determine design of funding mechanisms [Repealed] 159ZB Approval of profiles for funding purposes [Repealed] Funding under this Part other than via plans 159ZC Funding
 other than via plans 159ZD Conditions on funding received under section 159ZC 159ZE Accountability for funding received under section 159ZC 159ZF Commission may suspend or revoke funding given under section 159ZC 159ZG Extending suspension of funding 159ZH Review of decision made by delegate to suspend or revoke funding under section 159ZC Part 14 Establishment and disestablishment of tertiary institutions 160 161 162 163 164 Object Academic freedom Establishment of institutions Constitution of institutions
 Disestablishment of institutions Part 15 Administration of tertiary institutions 164A Interpretation Councils 165 166 167 Institutions to be governed by councils Incorporation Affixing of council’s common seal Constitution of councils Constitutions of councils of existing institutions [Repealed] Constitutions of councils of new institutions Amendment of constitution Constitution to provide for membership of council Membership of council Certain people disqualified from appointment 168 169 170 170A 171 171A 171B Matters to be considered when appointing members 171C Statutes relating to appointment of members by councils of institutions Limitations on number of occasions on which people may be appointed as members of councils 171D 171E Membership of more than 1 council 296 296 296 296 297 298 299 299 299 300 300 302 302 304 304 305 305 306 306 307 307 307 307 308 309 310 310 19 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 171F 172 173 174 175 176 176A 176B 176C 176D 176E 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 184A 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 Certain acts and proceedings not invalidated by defects Transitional provisions relating to an institution’s first council [Repealed] Term of office Vacation of office Disclosure of interest Casual vacancies Individual duties of members of councils Accountability for individual duties Removal of members Process for removal Application of Local Authorities (Members’ Interests) Act 1968 Chairperson and deputy chairperson Meetings of
 councils Fees and allowances Functions and duties of councils Functions of councils Duties of councils Determination of policy Personal liability Charters [Repealed] Each institution to have charter [Repealed] Interim arrangements for charters [Repealed] Consultations [Repealed] Consideration of proposed charter or amendment [Repealed] Power of Minister to initiate amendment of charter [Repealed] Approval of charter or amendment [Repealed] What happens if institution has no charter [Repealed] Mandatory
 requirements for charter [Repealed] Charter to be available for inspection [Repealed] Profiles [Repealed] 191A Each institution to have a profile [Repealed] Powers of institutions and councils 192 193 194 195 Powers of institutions Powers of councils Statutes Trust property 195A Criteria for risk assessment of institutions Institutions at risk Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Institutions to provide information if required 195B 195C Minister may appoint Crown observer 195D Minister may dissolve council and appoint commissioner 195DA Protection of commissioners 195E Powers and functions of commissioner 195F Minister to appoint advisory committee 195G Review of operation of sections 195A to 195F Chief executive and staff 196 197 198 Duties of chief executive Delegation by chief executive Transitional provisions for employment of staff Bulk funding [Repealed] 199 Grants to institutions [Repealed] Finance 200 201 201A 201B 202 203 Bank accounts Proper accounts to be kept How institutions may use income and capital Gifts Application of money Institutions are Crown entities Miscellaneous provisions 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 Transfer of assets and liabilities on commencement Taxes and duties in relation to property of existing institutions Transfer of Crown assets and liabilities to
 institutions Provisions relating to transfer of land Title to land Land certification Maori land claims District Land Registrar to register necessary memorial Resumption of land on recommendations of Waitangi Tribunal Resumption of land to be effected under Public Works Act 1981 Resumption of Wahi Tapu Orders in Council relating to transfer of assets and liabilities Interpretation relating to transfer of assets and liabilities Effect of disestablishment Taxes and duties where disestablished institution
 incorporated into other institution Taxes and duties in other cases Annual report 219 220 220A Minister may require related entities to prepare statements or reports Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 221 222 Annual report to be available for inspection Delegation by council Part 15A Special provisions relating to polytechnics Polytechnic councils 222AA Constitution of polytechnic councils 222AB Statutes relating to appointment of members by polytechnic councils [Repealed] 222AC Membership of more than one polytechnic council [Repealed] 222AD Matters to be considered when appointments made 222AE Term of office [Repealed] 222AF Reappointment and re-election 222AG Chairperson and deputy chairperson 222AH Duties of members of polytechnic councils [Repealed] 222AI Accountability for individual duties [Repealed] 222AJ Removal of members 222AK Process for removal Combination of polytechnic councils 222AL Voluntary combination of councils 222AM Constitution of combined councils 222AN Effect of combination 222AO Dissolution of combined council 222AP Effect of dissolution 222AQ Initial membership of polytechnic councils after dissolution of combined council Combined academic boards 222AR Polytechnic councils may establish combined academic boards Interventions Specialist help Performance improvement plans Crown
 manager Protection of Crown managers Powers may be used concurrently Polytechnic council may request intervention Part 16 Programmes and students Programmes Enrolment of students Records relating to students Secretary may require information Disclosure of enrolment information by institutions 222A 222B 222C 222D 222E 222F 223 224 225 226 226A Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act
372 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 226B 227 227A Ministerial direction to institutions relating to compulsory student Offences concerning information requests Fees for domestic students 228 228A 229 services fees Fees for international students Tertiary institutions to give prospective students information about fees Fees payable to associations of students [Repealed] Part 16A Membership of associations of tertiary students 229A Membership of students association voluntary 229B 229C 229CA Students association membership fees 229D Undue influence Complaints Sections 229A to 229CA apply to private training establishments Part 17 Education Review Office [Repealed] 230 231 Review of institutions [Repealed] Powers of Chief Review Officer [Repealed] Part 18 Private training establishments Interpretation 232 Interpretation Programmes and training schemes in which international students enrolled Requirements that private training establishments must comply with before enrolling international students Exemptions Requirement to be registered before providing approved programmes or training schemes Applications for registration Applications for registration of private training establishments Authority may verify identity of governing members of private training establishment Determination of application Grant or refusal of application Criteria for determining whether governing member of private training establishment is fit and proper person 232A 232B 232C 232D 232E 233 233A 375 376 377 379 382 383 383
 383 383 384 385 385 385 386 386 387 388 388 389 389 391 23 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Conditions and other requirements of registration 233B 233C Conditions of registration Annual fee Cancellation and lapse of registration 233D 233E 234 234A Cancellation of registration Effect of cancellation Lapse of registration Fees for domestic students Fees for domestic students must not exceed maximums set in conditions of funding Information that must be given to prospective students 234B
 Information that private training establishments must give prospective students Protection of student fees 234C 234D 234E 235 235A 235B 235C Interpretation Application of rules relating to student fee protection Student fees must be deposited with independent trustee Refund entitlements of domestic students Refund entitlements of international students Refund requirements set by Gazette notice Rules apply if students withdraw because of programme or training scheme closure 235D Ministerial direction to registered private training establishments relating to compulsory student services fees Information sharing with other government departments 235E 235F Private training establishment to notify immigration officer if student withdraws from programme or training scheme Disclosure of enrolment information by private training establishments Offences concerning information requests 236 236AA Conditions on registration [Repealed] 236A Duties of private training establishments to maintain student records Student records 236AB Refund requirements set by Gazette notice [Repealed] 236B Establishment to notify immigration officer if student withdraws from course [Repealed] Fees for domestic students must not exceed maximums set in conditions of funding [Repealed] Cancellation of registration [Repealed] Notice [Repealed] 236C 237 238 24 392 392 393 394 394 396 396 397 398 398 399 400 401 401 402 403 403 406 406 407 407 408 408 408 408 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act
 1989 238A 238B 238C Grants to private training establishments [Repealed] Disclosure of enrolment information by private training establishments [Repealed] Offences concerning information requests [Repealed] Part 18A International students Code Interpretation 238D 238E Signatories to code may enrol persons as international students 238EA Obligation on provider to enrol person as international student 238F 238FA Appointment of code administrator 238FB Code administrator may issue compliance notices 238FC
 Signatory providers to comply with compliance notices 238G 238H 238I 238J 238K 238L 238M Rules of International Student Contract Dispute Resolution Sanctions Export education levy Purpose and administration of export education levy International Student Contract Dispute Resolution Scheme Cap of $200,000 on amount that can be required to be paid District Court to enforce DRS Scheme Part 19 Vice-Chancellors Committee 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 Definitions Establishment of Committee Functions of Committee Powers of Committee Devolution of certain property Taxes and duties in relation to Vice-Chancellors Committee General saving of statutes, etc, of University of New Zealand Part 20 New Zealand Qualifications Authority Interpretation 246 Interpretation Functions of Qualifications Authority 246A 247 Functions of Authority Certain functions of Authority in relation to entrance to universities New Zealand Qualifications Framework 248 New Zealand Qualifications Framework 408 408 408 409 410 410 410 412 412 413 413 414 415 417 417 418 418 419 419 419 420 421 421 423 423 424 425 426 25 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Directory of Assessment Standards 248A 248B Directory of Assessment Standards Standard-setting bodies Approval of programmes 249 249A Approval of programmes Conditions on programme approvals Accreditation to provide approved programmes 250 250A 250B 250C Withdrawal of accreditation Accreditation to provide approved programmes Conditions on
 accreditation Lapse of accreditation Training schemes and consents to assess against standards Application for training scheme approval 251 251A Conditions of training scheme approval 251B Withdrawal of training scheme approval 251C Lapse of training scheme approval Consent to assess against standards 252 252A 252B When a consent expires or ceases to have effect Consent to assess against standards Conditions Rules 253 Rules Functions and powers of Authority in relation to universities 253A Exercise of certain
 powers of Authority by Vice-Chancellors Committee Granting of awards 253B Powers of Authority in granting of awards Use of certain terms in name of registered establishment 253C Minister may consent to registered establishments using certain terms in their names Fees 254 Fees Enforcement powers of Authority Power to obtain information Chief executive [Repealed] 254A 254B 254C Membership of Government Superannuation Fund [Repealed] 254D Employees transferring from other government employment [Repealed] 26 426 427 427 428 429 430 430 431 431 432 432 433 433 434 434 435 438 439 439 440 441 442 442 442 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 254E 255 255A Taxation [Repealed] Compliance notices Powers of entry and inspection Research 256 Research Provisions relating to continuation, constitution, and operation of New Zealand Qualifications Authority Continuation of New Zealand Qualifications Authority Constitution Chief executive Delegation by Authority 256A 256B 256C 256D 256E Membership of Government Superannuation Fund 256F 256G 257 258 258A 259 259A Child care allowances Taxation Entrance to universities [Repealed] Approval of courses [Repealed] Conditions on course approvals [Repealed] Accreditation to provide approved courses [Repealed] Conditions on accreditation to provide approved courses [Repealed] Exercise of certain powers of Authority [Repealed] Only accredited institutions to provide approved courses [Repealed] Notice [Repealed] Awards for
 approved nationally recognised courses [Repealed] Applications for consents by Authority [Repealed] 262 263 264 264A Minister may consent to registered establishments using certain 260 261 265 266 267 268 269 269A 270 271 272 272A 272B 273 terms in their names [Repealed] Examination and assessment [Repealed] Fees [Repealed] Saving of certain statutes, etc, of University of New Zealand [Repealed] Powers of Minister [Repealed] Part 21 Education New Zealand Education New Zealand established Interpretation
 Functions International education strategy Membership of board of Education New Zealand Special advisers to the board International education stakeholder advisory committee Chief executive Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 273I 274 274A 274B 275 276 277 278 279 273A 273B 273C 273D 273E 273F 273G 273H Minister may dismiss Board where non-compliance not rectified Responsibilities of chief executive Superannuation Contents of documents [Repealed] Amendments to documents [Repealed] Revocation of documents [Repealed] Board to comply with document of accountability [Repealed] Non-compliance with document [Repealed] [Repealed] Minister to publish certain documents and directions [Repealed] Application of Part 2 of Commerce Act 1986 Transfer of Ministry employees to Education New Zealand No compensation for technical redundancy of employees of Education New Zealand Trust Power of Secretary to obtain information [Repealed] Powers of Board [Repealed] Transitional provisions relating to Education and Training Support Agency [Repealed] Part 22 Careers New Zealand Interpretation [Repealed] Careers New Zealand is service for purposes of this Part [Repealed] Functions of Service [Repealed] Continuation of Board [Repealed] Duties of Board [Repealed] Charter of Service [Repealed] 280 281 282 283 283A Minister may require Board to
 negotiate document of accountability [Repealed] 283B Minister may prepare document where no agreement reached [Repealed] Contents of statement of intent [Repealed] Amendments to documents [Repealed] Revocation of documents [Repealed] Board to comply with document of accountability [Repealed] Non-compliance with document [Repealed] 283C 283D 283E 283F 283G 283H Minister may dismiss Board where non-compliance not rectified [Repealed] Minister to publish certain documents and directions [Repealed]
 Communication of government policy to the Board [Repealed] Power of Secretary to obtain information [Repealed] Powers of Board [Repealed] Child care allowances [Repealed] Chief executive [Repealed] 283I 284 285 286 286A 286B Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 286C Membership of Government Superannuation Fund [Repealed] 286D Employees transferring from Ministry and education boards [Repealed] Board may not delegate power to appoint general manager [Repealed] Delegations to general manager [Repealed] Taxation [Repealed] Part 23 Tertiary Research Board [Repealed] Definitions [Repealed] Establishment of Board [Repealed] Constitution of Board [Repealed] Functions of Board [Repealed] Powers of Board [Repealed] Part 24 Miscellaneous provisions Offences relating to use of certain terms Offences relating to false representations Liability of body corporate and directors in respect of false representations Offence to issue false qualifications and falsify records Offence to fail to comply with section 236A (student records) Offence to provide or advertise cheating services Offences relating to enrolment of international students and registration of private training establishments Offence to contravene requirements in section 234E relating to student fees Injunctions and orders of High Court Transitional provisions
 consequential on repeal of Adult Education Act 1963 Taxes and duties in relation to property of former National Council of Adult Education Transitional provisions consequential on repeal of Trades Certification Act 1966 Taxes and duties in relation to property of former New Zealand Trades Certification Board Transitional provisions consequential on repeal of Universities Act 1961 Taxes and duties in relation to certain property of former University Grants Committee Transitional provisions consequential on repeal of
 Vocational Awards Act 1979 286E 286F 286G 287 288 289 290 291 292 292A 292B 292C 292D 292E 292F 292G 292H Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 299A 299B 300 301 301A 302 303 304 305 306 306A 307 Transitional and savings provisions relating to councils of tertiary institutions consequential on enactment of Education Amendment Act 2015 Transitional and savings provisions relating to other matters consequential on enactment of Education Amendment Act 2015 Taxes and duties in relation to property of former Authority for Advanced Vocational Awards Regulations Change of names of education entities Part 25 Student allowances and administration of student loans Interpretation Student allowances Student Allowance Appeal Authority Appeals Procedures to be prescribed Disclosure of enrolment information by secondary schools Recipients of allowances or student loans, and other persons, may be required to provide information 307AAASuspension or refusal for not providing information 307AA Offences concerning allowances and student loans 307AB Allowances identified by Gazette notice 307AC Bonded scholarships 307A Use of student allowance information for purposes of Social Security Act 1964 Recovery of debts 307B 307C Ministry may carry out information matching of student loan 307D information [Repealed] Details of academic performance Part 26
 Early childhood education and care Interpretation Overview Interpretation Meaning of early childhood education and care centre Funding Funding of certain early childhood services and certificated playgroups Grants to licence-exempt centres [Repealed] Reporting requirements if grant paid to licence-exempt centre [Repealed] Loans to licensed early childhood services 308 309 310 311 311A 311B 312 30 474 475 475 476 476 477 478 480 481 482 483 483 485 486 487 487 487 489 490 490 491 491 493 495 496 496 496
 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 313 314 315 Administration and curriculum Administrative requirements Curriculum framework Licensing and certification provisions Service providers operating early childhood education and care centres to be licensed 315AA Police vetting of contractors and their employees who work at early childhood services [Repealed] 315AB Internal procedures relating to Police vets [Repealed] 315A Payment of fees for attendance of children at kindergartens [Repealed] Certain service providers may be licensed Regulations relating to licensing Requirements for licensed home-based education and care service Playgroups may be certificated Regulations relating to certification of playgroups 316 317 317A 318 319 319AA Application of Legislation Act 2012 to certain material incorporated by reference Powers of entry and inspection Parent’s right of entry Powers of entry and inspection without warrant Powers of entry and inspection with warrant Police vetting of employees Police vetting of non-teaching and unregistered employees at licensed early childhood services Police vetting of contractors and their employees who work at licensed early childhood services Police vet must be obtained before person has unsupervised access to children 319A 319B 319C 319D 319E 319F 319FA Procedures relating to Police vets under section 319D or 319E Police vetting of household members for home-based services 319FB Police vetting of adult members of household
 where licensed home-based education and care service provided 319FC When Police vet under section 319FB must be obtained 319FD Procedures relating to Police vets under section 319FB Service provider to obtain further Police vets under this Part every 3 years 319FE Further Police vets to be obtained every 3 years Miscellaneous 319G 319H Offence of insulting, abusing, or intimidating staff Offence of obstructing power of entry 496 497 498 499 499 499 499 499 501 501 502 503 503 504 505 506 506 506 507 507
 507 507 508 508 508 31 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 319I 319J Payment of fees for attendance of children at kindergartens Centres situated on property owned by, or leased to, the Crown Transitional provisions Existing early childhood centres deemed to be licensed Existing chartered care arrangers deemed to be licensed 319K 319L 319M Funding conditions during transitional period 319N 319O Existing regulations preserved Licence-exempt centres may continue Part 27 Recognition and funding of other services Interpretation Grants to educational bodies Educational bodies to keep accounts Part 28 Review of educational services Interpretation Educational services to which this Part applies Chief Review Officer to perform certain functions Review officers Powers of entry and inspection Review officers to prove identity Provisions concerning students with enrolment exemption Functions of Chief Review Officer Review officers Powers of review officers for purposes of sections 328A to 328D Review officers to prove identity before acting under section 328C Provisions concerning hostels Functions of Chief Review Officer Review officers Powers of review officers for purposes of sections 328E to 328H Review officers to prove identity before acting under section 328G Part 29 Learning Media Limited [Repealed] Interpretation [Repealed] Incorporation of company [Repealed] Principal objective of company [Repealed] Crown shareholding [Repealed] Application of
 Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956 [Repealed] Application of Public Finance Act 1989 [Repealed] 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 328A 328B 328C 328D 328E 328F 328G 328H Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 Auditor [Repealed] Application of Companies Act 1955 [Repealed] Personnel policy [Repealed]
 Equal employment opportunities programme [Repealed] Consultation with State Services Commissioner [Repealed] Existing rights, assets, liabilities, and debts [Repealed] Part 30 National student numbers Purpose Interpretation Assigning national student numbers Use of national student numbers Person may use or disclose own national student number Offences Regulations Part 31 Teacher registration 348 Interpretation Restrictions on appointment and employment of teaching staff 349 350 350A 351 Restrictions on appointment of teachers Restrictions on continued employment of teachers Special provision for chief executive of correspondence school Restrictions on activities of teachers whose practising certificate or limited authority to teach is subject to interim suspension Teacher registration Applications for registration as teacher Registration Determining whether training satisfactory Determining good character and fitness to be teacher Appeals from decisions of Education Council Cancellation of registration as teacher Voluntary deregistration Education Council to keep register of people registered as teachers Matching of register information and information about payment of teacher salaries at payrolled schools Practising certificates Cancellation of practising certificate Determining whether employment satisfactorily completed Fees and costs for registration and practising certificates Limited authority to teach Purpose of limited authority to teach Limited authority
 to teach Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Cancellation of limited authority to teach Determining character or fitness to hold limited authority to teach Appeals from decisions Period of authorisation Education Council to keep list of persons who have limited authority to teach Fees and costs for
 granting limited authority to teach Miscellaneous provisions Education Council may disclose certain information Offences Periods of registration before commencement of this section Part 32 Education Council Purpose of Part Purpose of Education Council Interpretation Education Council Education Council of Aotearoa New Zealand established Composition of Education Council Duties of members of Education Council Functions of Education Council Powers of Education Council Ministerial powers Reports Advisory boards Code of conduct Education Council to make rules Delegations Chief executive and employees Superannuation Mandatory reporting Mandatory reporting of dismissals and resignations Mandatory reporting of complaints received about former employees Mandatory reporting of possible serious misconduct Mandatory reporting of failure to reach required level of competence Offence of failing to report Mandatory reporting of convictions Disciplinary functions Disciplinary bodies Complaints about conduct Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 Complaints and reports relating to teacher conduct Powers of Complaints Assessment Committee Interim suspension until matter
 about or involving possible serious misconduct concluded Duration of interim suspension Powers of Disciplinary Tribunal Evidence at Disciplinary Tribunal hearings Powers of Disciplinary Tribunal in relation to witnesses Offences Privileges and immunities Appeals from decisions of disciplinary bodies Review of competence 410AA Competence Authority 410 411 Complaints about competence Investigation by Education Council of mandatory reports relating to competence and referral to Competence Authority for decision
 Powers of Competence Authority after finding required level of competence not attained Appeals from decisions of Competence Authority 412 412A 413 Education Council must co-ordinate Police vetting Police vetting Part 33 State integrated schools 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 Interpretation Part to bind the Crown Conditional integration Preservation of special character of State integrated schools State integrated schools part of State system Procedure for establishing, disestablishing, merging, and closing State integrated schools Application to negotiate integration Applications relating to proposed schools Negotiation of integration agreements Integration agreements Other matters that may be included in integration agreements Integration agreements: machinery matters Effective date of integration agreement Notification of integration agreement Minister may require information to be provided Cancellation of integration agreement Cancellation by Minister Cancellation by proprietor Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 Cancellation by agreement between parties Mergers Closure of State integrated school Notification of cancellation or of closing of State integrated school Disposal of assets on cancellation of integration agreement or closing of State
 integrated school Repayment of moneys advanced Moneys to be paid into Crown Bank Account Certain assets remain vested in proprietors Restriction on cancellation of integration agreement or closure of State integrated schools Compensation 440 Administration of State integrated schools Administration 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 Enrolment, conditions of attendance, and instruction of students at State integrated schools Free education Preference of
 enrolment Participation in general school programmes Instruction of students Religious observances and religious instruction School transport assistance Attendance dues Withdrawal and reinstatement of right to charge attendance dues Consequences of failure to pay attendance dues Accounts for attendance dues Financial contributions Restrictions on fund-raising Accounts of money raised under section 451 Fund-raising Use of school office Proprietors of State integrated schools Powers and responsibilities of proprietors Decision-making criteria for proprietors Consequences of failure to arrange insurance Proprietors not to question curriculum or teaching methods Leases of land Assistance to proprietors Proprietors unable to meet obligations Appointment and employment of teachers 463 Requirements in respect of appointments of teachers Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 Religious instruction: appointments to special positions relating to character of State integrated school Effect of religious instruction requirements in advertisements Restrictions on requirement for teacher to take part in religious instruction Other special positions Selection for appointment Requirements in respect of appointments Employment for special purposes Appointment of teachers on integration
 Other employees No compensation for determination of employment General provisions Grants to private schools before integration Relationship between this Part and other Parts and other enactments Regulations relating to State integrated schools Schedule 1 Transitional, savings, and related provisions Schedule 2 Administrative provisions applying to Board continued by section 37 [Repealed] Schedule 3 Administrative provisions applying to Board continued by section 43 [Repealed] Schedule 4 Administrative
 provisions applying to Parent Advocacy Council [Repealed] Schedule 5 Specified institutions Schedule 5A Application of Crown Entities Act 2004 to school boards of trustees Schedule 6 Boards of trustees 586 587 587 588 588 588 589 589 590 590 591 591 591 593 596 596 596 597 599 601 37 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Schedule 7 New Zealand Teachers Council and members [Repealed] Schedule 8 Consequential amendments to Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975 Schedule 9 Consequential amendments to Education Act 1964 Schedule 10 Other consequential amendments Schedule 11 Consequential repeals Schedule 12 Consequential revocations Schedule 13 Existing institutions Schedule 13A Application of Crown Entities Act 2004 to tertiary education institutions Schedule 14 Administrative provisions applying to Vice-Chancellors Committee Schedule 15 Administrative provisions applying to New Zealand Qualifications Authority [Repealed] Schedule 16 Administrative provisions applying to the Agency continued by section 270 [Repealed] Schedule 17 Administrative provisions applying to the Service continued by section 279 [Repealed] Schedule 18 Administrative provisions applying to Tertiary Research Board [Repealed] 617 618 619 620 621 623 625 626 628 631 631 631 631 38 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 1AA s 1A Schedule 19 Transitional and savings provisions relating to councils of tertiary institutions Schedule 20 Transitional and savings
 provisions relating to other matters Schedule 21 Governance provisions of Education Council 632 635 639 An Act to reform the administration of education 1 (1) (2) Short Title and commencement This Act may be cited as the Education Act 1989.
Except as otherwise provided in this Act, this Act comes into force on 1 Octo- ber 1989.

Part 1AA Early childhood and compulsory education: statement of National Education and Learning Priorities Part 1AA: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 4 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
1A Minister may issue statement of National Education and Learning Priorities (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, issue a statement of National Edu- cation and Learning Priorities for the early childhood and compulsory educa- tion sectors.
(2) A statement issued under this section— (a) must be consistent with the objectives set out in subsection (3); and (b) may include statements of the diversity of education provision; and (c) must specify the date on which it comes into effect; and (d) remains in effect for a period of 5 years unless earlier withdrawn or re- placed by notice in the Gazette; and (e) must be published on an Internet site maintained by the Ministry.
(3) The objectives of the system for education and learning that is provided for in the specified Parts (that is, early childhood and compulsory education) are— (a) (b) to focus on helping each child and young person to attain educational achievement to the best of his or her potential; and to promote the development, in each child and young person, of the fol- lowing abilities and attributes: 39 Part 1 s 2 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (i) (ii) (iii) resilience, determination, confidence, and creative and critical thinking: good social skills and the ability to form good relationships: participation in community life and fulfilment of civic and social responsibilities: (iv) preparedness for work; and (c) to instil in each child and young person an appreciation of the import- ance of the following: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) the inclusion within society of different groups and persons with different personal characteristics: the diversity of society: cultural knowledge, identity, and the different official languages: the Treaty of Waitangi and te reo Māori.
(4) Before issuing a statement under this section, the Minister must consult with those stakeholders in the early childhood and compulsory education sectors that he or she considers ought to be consulted.

(5) Minor changes to a statement issued under this section— (a) may be made without fulfilling the consultation requirements in subsec- tion (4); and (b) do not, for the purposes of subsection (2)(d), constitute a withdrawal or replacement of the statement being changed.
(6) A statement issued under this section is neither a legislative instrument nor a disallowable instrument for the purposes of the Legislation Act 2012, and does not have to be presented to the House of Representatives under section 41 of that Act.

Except as provided in subsection (2)(a), the objectives in subsection (3) do not affect or limit the way in which any person is required to exercise a power or perform a function under a specified Part.
In this section, specified Parts means this Part, Parts 2 to 3A, Parts 7 to 9, Parts 11 to 12A, Part 26, and Part 33.

Section 1A: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 4 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Part 1 Rights to primary and secondary education Interpretation In this Part, and Parts 2, 3, and 11, unless the context otherwise requires,— board means a board of trustees constituted under Part 9; and,— (7) (8) 2 (1) 40 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) Education Act 1989 Part 1 s 2 in relation to a school, means the school’s board; and in relation to a principal, means the board of the principal’s school Chief Review Officer means the chief executive of the Education Review Office composite school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) correspondence school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) crime involving dishonesty has the same meaning as in section 2(1) of the Crimes Act 1961 criteria for registration, in relation to a private school or proposed private school, means the criteria set out in section 35C doctor means a health practitioner who is, or is deemed to be, registered with the Medical Council of New Zealand continued by section 114(1)(a) of the Health Practitioners Competence Assurance Act 2003 as a practitioner of the profession of medicine domestic student, at any time, means a person who is then— (a) (b) (c) a New Zealand citizen; or the holder of a residence class visa granted under the Immigration Act 2009 who satisfies the criteria (if any) prescribed by regulations made under subsection (4); or a person of a class or description of persons required by the Minister, by notice in the Gazette, to be treated as if they are not international stu- dents enrolment scheme means a
 scheme adopted (and not since abandoned) under section 11H or developed under section 11IA; and includes any amendments to the scheme that have been adopted under section 11M government training establishment has the same meaning as it has in section 159 hostel means a boarding establishment used mainly or solely for the accommo- dation of students enrolled at a registered school industry training organisation has the same meaning as in section 2 of the Industry Training and Apprenticeships Act 1992 institution has the same meaning as it has in section 159 integration means the conditions and procedures on and by which a private school may become established as part of the State system of education.
and remain part of that system, on a basis that preserves and safeguards the special character of the education that the school provides, and integrated has a cor- responding meaning intermediate school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) 41 Part 1 s 2 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 international student, at any time, means a person who is not then a domestic student lead provider means a provider of secondary-tertiary programmes that is recognised by the Minister by notice in the Gazette under section 31F as a lead provider managers of a private school means all the people who control and manage the school, whether or not they have a proprietary interest in it Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being re- sponsible for the administration of this Part, and Parts 2, 3, and 11 Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part, and Parts 2, 3, and 11 overcrowding, in relation to a school, means the attendance at the school of more students than its site or facilities can reasonably be expected to take parent, in relation to any person, means a person who is the person’s mother, father, or guardian participating student means a student undertaking a secondary-tertiary pro- gramme who is enrolled in any of the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) a secondary school: a composite school: a school that is registered under section 35A, other than a school regis- tered under that section only as a primary school: a special school that is a relevant school within the meaning of section 246 partnership school contract means a contract for the operation of a partner- ship school kura hourua entered into under section 158D and, in relation to a sponsor, means the partnership school contract to which the sponsor is a party partnership school kura hourua means a school in respect of which— (a) (b) the
 Minister has approved a sponsor under section 158B; and a partnership school contract is in force primary partnership school kura hourua means a partnership school kura hourua designated as a primary partnership school kura hourua by notice under section 158B primary school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) principal means the chief executive of a State school; and, in relation to a school, a person enrolled at the school, or the enrolment of a person at a school, means the principal of the school 42 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 1 s 2 provider group means a group of providers of secondary-tertiary programmes that is recognised by the Minister by notice in the Gazette under section 31B as a provider group registered establishment has the same meaning as it has in section 159 registered school means a school that is a State school, a State integrated school, a partnership school kura hourua, or a school registered under section 35A review officer has the same meaning as it has in section 323 secondary component, in relation to a secondary-tertiary programme, means the portion of the programme that consists of participation in secondary educa- tion, whether or not provided by the school in which the participating student is enrolled secondary school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) secondary-tertiary programme has the meaning given to it in section 31A Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry serious criminal activity means any offence involving fraud, violence, or harm to children, any sexual offence, or any crime involving dishonesty special education means education or help from a special school, special class, special clinic, or special service sponsor means a body approved by the Minister under section 158B to operate a partnership school kura hourua State integrated school means a school that— (a) (b) provides education with a special character; and has been established as a State integrated school under
 section 421 State school means a school that is a primary school, a composite school, a secondary school, or a special school student, in relation to a school or institution, means a person enrolled at the school or institution tertiary component, in relation to a secondary-tertiary programme, means the portion of the programme that consists of the participating student’s apprentice- ship training (as defined in section 13C of the Industry Training and Appren- ticeships Act 1992), or participation in tertiary education that— (a) is provided by any 1 or more of the following: (i) (ii) a board of a secondary school, a composite school, or a special school that is a relevant school within the meaning of section 246: the managers of a school registered under section 35A, other than a school registered under that section only as a primary school: (iii) a government training establishment: 43 Part 1 s 2 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (iv) (v) an institution: a registered establishment; and (b) may include work experience (other than work experience obtained by a student under section 71) as part of the programme that is approved by the provider of the secondary or tertiary component of the programme walking distance, in relation to travel between a person’s residence and a school,— (a) where there is no public transport that the person can conveniently use, means the distance (measured along the most direct route by public road, public footpath, or combination of both) between the residence and the school; and (b) where in both directions there is public transport that the person can con- veniently use, means the sum of the following distances (each measured along the most direct route by public road, public footpath, or combin- ation of both) or, where the sum is greater in one direction than the other, the greater sum: (i) (ii) the distance between the residence and the place where public transport must first be taken (or, as the case may be, finally be
 left); and the distance between the school and the place where public trans- port must finally be left (or, as the case may be, first be taken); and (iii) every intermediate distance between one element of public trans- port and another In this Part, and Parts 2 and 3, unless the context otherwise requires, a special school, special class, special clinic, or special service means a school, class, clinic, or service established under section 98(1) of the Education Act 1964 as a special school, special class, special clinic, or special service respectively.
[Repealed] The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations prescribing criteria that the holder of a residence class visa granted under the Immigration Act 2009 must satisfy in order to fulfil the requirements of paragraph (b) of the definition of domestic student in subsection (1).
(2) (3) (4) (5) The explanatory note of regulations made under subsection (4) must indicate that— (a) (b) they are a confirmable instrument under section 47B of the Legislation Act 2012; and they are revoked at a time stated in the note, unless earlier confirmed by an Act of Parliament; and 44 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 1 s 2 (c) the stated time is the applicable deadline under section 47C(1)(a) or (b) of that Act.
(6) [Repealed] Section 2(1) assisted student: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 4(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 2(1) composite school: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 15(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 2(1) correspondence school: replaced, on 1 January 1990, by section 15(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).
Section 2(1) crime involving dishonesty: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Educa- tion Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 2(1) criteria for registration: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 2(1) doctor: replaced, on 18 September 2004, by section 175(1) of the Health Practitioners Competence Assurance Act 2003 (2003 No 48).
Section 2(1) domestic student: replaced, at 2 am on 29 November 2010, by section 406(1) of the Immigration Act 2009 (2009 No 51).

Section 2(1) domestic student paragraph (c): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 4(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 2(1) enrolment scheme: replaced, on 19 December 1998, by section 2 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 2(1) enrolment scheme: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 5(2) of the Education (Up- date) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 2(1) enrolment scheme: amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 26(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 2(1) exempt student: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 4(1) of the Education Amend- ment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 2(1) foreign student: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 4(1) of the Education Amend- ment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 2(1) government training establishment: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 2(1) hostel: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 3 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 2(1) industry training organisation: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
Section 2(1) industry training organisation: amended, on 23 April 2014, by section 23 of the Indus- try Training and Apprenticeships Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 16).

Section 2(1) institution: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 2(1) integration: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 5(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 2(1) intermediate school: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 15(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 2(1) international student: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 4(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 2(1) lead provider: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amend- ment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
45 Part 1 s 2 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 2(1) managers of a private school: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Edu- cation Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 2(1) Minister: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 2(1) Ministry: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
Section 2(1) overcrowding: inserted, on 20 June 1991, by section 6(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Section 2(1) participating student: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 2(1) partnership school contract: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 4(1) of the Educa- tion Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
Section 2(1) partnership school kura hourua: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 4(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 2(1) primary partnership school kura hourua: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 4(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 2(1) primary school: replaced, on 1 January 1990, by section 15(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).
Section 2(1) principal: replaced, on 13 June 2013, by section 4(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 2(1) provider group: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amend- ment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 2(1) registered establishment: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Educa- tion Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
Section 2(1) registered school: replaced, on 13 June 2013, by section 4(3) of the Education Amend- ment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 2(1) registered school: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 5(3) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 2(1) review officer: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amend- ment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
Section 2(1) secondary component: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 2(1) secondary school: replaced, on 1 January 1990, by section 15(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 2(1) secondary-tertiary programme: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
Section 2(1) serious criminal activity: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 2(1) sponsor: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 4(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 2(1) State integrated school: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 5(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 2(1) State school: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 4(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 2(1) tertiary component: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 2(1) tertiary component: amended, on 23 April 2014, by section 23 of the Industry Training and Apprenticeships Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 16).
46 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 1 s 4 Section 2(2): replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 4(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 2(3): repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 4(4) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 2(4): inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 4(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Section 2(4): amended, at 2 am on 29 November 2010, by section 406(1) of the Immigration Act 2009 (2009 No 51).

Section 2(5): replaced, on 1 January 2016, by section 14 of the Legislation (Confirmable Instru- ments) Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 120).

Section 2(6): repealed, on 1 January 2016, by section 14 of the Legislation (Confirmable Instru- ments) Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 120).
2A Transitional, savings, and related provisions The transitional, savings, and related provisions set out in Schedule 1 have ef- fect according to their terms.

Section 3: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 6 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
3 Right to free primary and secondary education Except as provided in this Act, every person who is not an international student is entitled to free enrolment and free education at any State school or partner- ship school kura hourua during the period beginning on the person’s fifth birth- day and ending on 1 January after the person’s 19th birthday.

Compare: 1964 No 135 ss 75(2), 85(1) Section 3: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 7 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 3: amended, on 13 June 2013, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 3: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

3A Restriction on attendance at certain schools [Repealed] Section 3A: repealed, on 25 October 2001, by section 4 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
4 (1) Enrolment of international students Subject to section 4A(3), an international student— (a) (b) shall not be enrolled at a State school without the board’s consent; and shall not be enrolled in special education without the consent of the per- son or body administering the institution or service concerned.
(2) Subject to section 4B and to subsections (3) and (4) of this section, once enrol- led at a State school or in special education an international student has the 47 Part 1 s 4 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) (4) same rights to remain enrolled, and to tuition, at the school as a domestic stu- dent.
Except as provided in subsection (5), no international student may be enrolled at a State school if the student’s enrolment has the effect that a domestic stu- dent who is entitled to enrol there and has applied for enrolment is not able to be enrolled.
Except as provided in subsection (5), no international student may be enrolled in any subject, course, or programme at a State school if the student’s enrol- ment has the effect that a domestic student who is entitled to enrol in the sub- ject, course, or programme and has applied for enrolment in it is not able to be enrolled in it.
(5) Although domestic students may not be able to be enrolled, an international student may be enrolled at a State school, or in any subject, course, or pro- gramme at a State school, if the enrolment is in a vacant place— (a) (b) that the board established for international students; and the continued availability of which is dependent on the fees payable by international students enrolled in it.
(6) [Repealed] (7) As soon as is practicable after an international student is enrolled at a State school, the principal shall give the Secretary written notice of— (a) (b) the student’s name, age, and nationality; and the day on which the student began (or will begin) to receive tuition at the school.
(8) Notwithstanding anything in this section or section 4B, with the consent of the principal, an international student may, during a period of not more than 28 consecutive days (or any longer period the Secretary approves for any particu- lar student), receive tuition at or from a State school— (a) without the consent of the board; and (b) without paying the amount required by section 4B;— but in that case the student shall not be counted for the purpose of calculating or ascertaining the school’s entitlement to teachers or funding.
Section 4: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 3(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 4 heading: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 6(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4(1): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 6(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4(1)(b): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Section 4(2): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 6(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

48 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 1 s 4B Section 4(3): replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 6(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4(4): replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 6(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4(5): replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 6(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 4(6): repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 6(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4(7): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 6(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4(8): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 6(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
4A Certain international students may enrol at State schools as of right (1) The Minister may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, declare inter- national students of a specified kind or description to be entitled to enrol at State schools.

(2) A notice may be unconditional, or subject to conditions specified in it.
(3) Subject to— (a) (b) the conditions (if any) specified in the notice; and section 4B,— an international student of a kind or description for the time being specified in a notice under subsection (1) has the same rights to enrolment and tuition at State schools as a domestic student.

Section 4A: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 3(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
Section 4A heading: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 7(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4A(1): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 7(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4A(3): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 7(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Fees for international students Subject to section 4(8), no international student shall receive tuition in any sub- ject, course, or programme at a State school unless there has been paid to the board an amount fixed by the board that is not less than the sum of the follow- ing amounts: (a) (b) the board’s best estimate of the cost to the board (including the appropri- ate proportion of the board’s administrative and other general costs) of providing tuition in the subject, course, or programme for 1 student: an amount that is in the board’s opinion an appropriate reflection of the use made by 1 student receiving tuition in the subject, course, or pro- gramme of the board’s capital facilities: 4B (1) 49 Part 1 s 4B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (c) the amount (if any) prescribed under section 4D for a student receiving tuition at a State school in the subject, course, or programme: (d) all other fees (if any) prescribed by the board.
(2) Nothing in subsection (1) prevents a board’s accepting by instalments any amount required by that subsection to be paid; but subject to section 4(8), no international student shall at any time continue to receive tuition in any subject, course, or programme at a State school unless the sum of the following amounts is less than the sum of the instalments paid up to that time: (a) (b) (c) the board’s best estimate of the cost to the board (including the appropri- ate proportion of the board’s administrative and other general costs and the appropriate proportion of any initial or start-up costs of the subject, course, or programme) of providing tuition in the subject, course, or pro- gramme for 1 student up to that time: an amount that is in the board’s opinion an appropriate reflection of the use made by 1 student receiving tuition in the subject, course, or pro- gramme of the board’s capital facilities: the appropriate proportion of the amount (if any) prescribed under sec- tion 4D for a student receiving tuition at a State school in the subject, course, or programme: (d) all other fees (if any) prescribed by the board.
(3) Where an international student has after 31 December 1989 received tuition in a subject, course, or programme at a State school without paying the full amount required by subsection (1) in respect of the subject, course, or pro- gramme, the board may, in any court of competent jurisdiction, recover the un- derpayment from the student (or, as the case requires, a parent of the student), as a debt due to the board.
(4) In any year, the amount of any grant for a board in respect of a school it admin- isters may be reduced from what it would otherwise have been by any amount by which (in the Secretary’s opinion), by virtue of the fact that the full amount required by subsection (1) in respect of a subject, course, or programme at the school in which an international student was enrolled has not been paid to the board, the student’s education has been subsidised by money appropriated by Parliament.
(5) No grant shall be reduced under subsection (4) unless the Secretary has given the board concerned written notice of the circumstances taken into account when the proposed reduction was decided on.
(6) Where a board disputes that a grant should be reduced under subsection (4), or disputes the amount by which it should so be reduced, the following provisions shall apply: (a) the board may, within 28 days of getting notice from the Secretary under subsection (5), by written notice to the Secretary giving the name and 50 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 1 s 4B (b) (c) address of a proposed arbitrator, require the dispute to be settled by arbi- tration: if, within 14 days of getting the board’s notice, the Secretary has agreed an arbitrator with the board, the agreed arbitrator shall settle the dispute: if, within 14 days of getting the board’s notice, the Secretary has not agreed an arbitrator with the board, an arbitrator appointed jointly by the Secretary and the arbitrator originally proposed by the board shall settle the dispute: (d) the arbitrator’s decision is final.
(7) Where at any time an international student withdraws from a subject, course, or programme at a State school, the board may refund to the person who paid (in respect of the student’s enrolment in the subject, course, or programme) the amount of the fees referred to in subsection (1) (or the sum of any instalments paid in respect of those fees) any amount it thinks appropriate not exceeding the extent (if any) by which the amount paid exceeds the sum of the following amounts: (a) (b) (c) the board’s best estimate of the cost to the board (including the appropri- ate proportion of the board’s administrative and other general costs and the appropriate proportion of any initial or start-up costs of the subject, course, or programme) of providing tuition in the subject, course, or pro- gramme for 1 student up to that time: an amount that is in the board’s opinion an appropriate reflection of the use made by 1 student receiving tuition in the subject, course, or pro- gramme of the board’s capital facilities: the appropriate proportion of the amount (if any) prescribed under sec- tion 4D for a student receiving tuition at a State school in the subject, course, or programme: (d) all other fees (if any) prescribed by the board.
Section 4B: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 3(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 4B heading: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 8(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4B(1): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 8(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4B(2): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 8(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 4B(3): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 8(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4B(4): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 8(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4B(7): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 8(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
51 Part 1 s 4C Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 4C Minister may exempt certain international students from payment of fees The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, exempt international students of a particular kind or description from the payment of all or a specified proportion or amount of the amount required by section 4B to be paid; and that section shall have effect accordingly.
Section 4C: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 3(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 4C heading: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 9(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4C: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 9(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
4D Boards to reimburse the Crown for expenditure in respect of international students (1) Before 1 July in every year, the Minister shall, by notice in the Gazette, set fees to be paid by boards in respect of international students enrolled at State schools in the following year.
(2) Fees may be set in respect of all or any of the following: (a) (b) (c) all State schools, State schools of a specified kind or description, or spe- cified State schools: all international students, or international students of a specified kind or description: all subjects, courses, and programmes; subjects, courses, and pro- grammes of a specified kind or description; or specified subjects, cour- ses, or programmes.
(3) Within 28 days of the first day in any year on which an international student enrolled at a State school attends the school, the board shall pay to the Secre- tary the appropriate fee (if any) prescribed under subsection (1).
(3A) The Minister may pay to the proprietors of a State integrated school whose board has paid a fee under this section a portion of that fee, as determined in accordance with a formula prescribed under subsection (3B), for the purpose of reimbursing the proprietors for that part of the levy associated with the use of capital assets owned by the proprietors.
(3B) The Minister must, by notice in the Gazette, prescribe a formula for the pay- ment of money under subsection (3A), and may prescribe different formulae to apply to different schools or classes of school.
If before 1 July in any year the Minister has not set under subsection (1) fees to be paid by boards in respect of international students enrolled at State schools in the following year, there shall be deemed to have been set under that subsec- tion the fees set (or deemed to have been set) in the year before.

Section 4D: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 3(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
(4) 52 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 1 s 5 Section 4D heading: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 10(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4D(1): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 10(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4D(2)(b): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 10(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 4D(3): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 10(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4D(3A): inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 4D(3A): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 8 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 4D(3B): inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 4D(4): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 10(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
4E Courses for international students (1) The board of a State school or the managers of a school registered under sec- tion 35A must not establish, or permit any student to enrol or continue to be enrolled in, any class, course, or programme, intended exclusively or mainly for international students, unless the class, course, or programme is for the time being approved by the New Zealand Qualifications Authority.
(2) The New Zealand Qualifications Authority must not approve a class, course, or programme under subsection (1) unless satisfied on reasonable grounds that— (a) (b) the school has or will have adequate staff, equipment, and premises to provide it; and the standard of instruction provided in it will be no lower than the stand- ard that would be expected in any similar class, course, or programme for domestic students.
Section 4E: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 4E heading: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 11(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 4E(1): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 11(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
5 (1) Restrictions on enrolment at primary school The following persons must not be enrolled or continue to be enrolled at a pri- mary school or in a class below form 3 at a composite school: (a) (b) (c) a child under 5, unless subsection (2) applies: a child who turned 14 in a previous year: a child who, in the opinion of the Secretary,— (i) has completed the work of form 2; or 53 Part 1 s 5A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ii) has completed the work equivalent to form 2.
(2) A child under 5 may be enrolled or continue to be enrolled at a primary school or in a class below form 3 at a composite school if— (a) (b) the school has adopted a cohort entry policy; and the child is enrolled or continues to be enrolled according to that policy.

(3) A child under 5 who is enrolled under subsection (2) is entitled to free enrol- ment and free education in accordance with section 3.
Section 5: replaced, on 3 July 2017, by section 9 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

5A Cohort entry policy (1) A State school, State integrated school, or partnership school kura hourua may adopt or revoke a cohort entry policy if the school consults and gives notice in accordance with section 5C.
(2) A cohort entry policy must— (a) (b) apply to all children aged 4 or 5 who have not previously enrolled in a registered school or an enrolling community of online learning; and provide that a child may only be enrolled on a term start date determined in accordance with section 5B.
(3) Despite a school having a cohort entry policy in place, a child may be enrolled on a date that is later than the date determined under the policy if the later date— (a) (b) is a term start date; and otherwise complies with this Act.

(4) In this section and section 5B, a term start date for a school means, in relation to a term, the first day in that term that the school is open for instruction.
Section 5A: inserted, on 3 July 2017, by section 10 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

5B Determining term start dates under cohort entry policy (1) If a school has a cohort entry policy in place, the term start date on which a child may be enrolled in the school must be determined in accordance with this section.

(2) A child whose fifth birthday is on or after a mid-term and before the next mid- term, may not be enrolled until the term start date of that next term.
The Minister may, before 1 July in any year, prescribe the mid-term dates for the next year.

If the Minister has not prescribed mid-term dates for a year, the same mid-term dates as the year before will apply.

Section 5B: inserted, on 3 July 2017, by section 10 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
(3) (4) 54 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 1 s 7 5C Adoption or revocation of cohort entry policy (1) When developing a proposed cohort entry policy for a school, a board must take all reasonable steps to discover and consider the views of the following persons about the policy and whether it is generally acceptable: (a) (b) (c) (d) parents of students at the school: employees of the board at the school: early childhood services in the local community: parents of prospective students of the school.
(2) When considering whether to revoke a cohort entry policy, a board must take all reasonable steps to discover and consider the views of the persons described in subsection (1) as to whether the policy should be revoked.

(3) A board must take all reasonable steps to give notice of at least 1 term to the Secretary and the persons described in subsection (1) before a cohort entry pol- icy takes effect or ceases to have effect.
Section 5C: inserted, on 3 July 2017, by section 10 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

6 Restrictions on enrolment at secondary school No person who, in the opinion of the Secretary,— (a) (b) has not completed the work of form 2; and has not completed work equivalent to the work of form 2,— shall in any year be or continue to be enrolled at a secondary school, or in a class above form 2 at a composite school, unless the person turned 13 before 1 April in the previous year.
Compare: 1964 No 135 s 85(1) 7 (1) Additional restrictions on enrolment at correspondence school The Minister may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, fix criteria for enrolment in early childhood, primary, and secondary classes at correspond- ence school; and different criteria may be fixed for all or any of the following: (a) (b) (c) different correspondence schools: correspondence schools of different classes or descriptions: early childhood, primary, and secondary classes at correspondence school.
(2) No person shall be enrolled at a correspondence school unless— (a) (b) the board is satisfied that the person’s enrolment meets criteria then fixed under subsection (1); or the person is entitled under section 3 to free education at a State school, and the Secretary has directed the board to enrol the person.
55 Part 1 s 7A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) (4) The Secretary shall not direct the board of a correspondence school to enrol a person unless satisfied that the person cannot conveniently attend any State school (being a school offering education at the level, and in the subjects, re- quired by the person’s parents or, as the case requires, the person) that is not a correspondence school.
If satisfied that a person who is enrolled at a correspondence school pursuant to a direction under subsection (2)(b) can conveniently attend a State school (be- ing a school offering education at the level, and in the subjects, required by the person’s parents or, as the case requires, the person) that is not a correspond- ence school, the Secretary may notify the board of the fact; and in that case the board shall cancel the person’s enrolment unless the board is satisfied that the person’s enrolment meets criteria then fixed under subsection (1).
(5) If satisfied that— (a) (b) a person’s enrolment at a correspondence school does not meet criteria then fixed under subsection (1); and there is not in force in respect of the person a direction under subsection (2)(b) relating to the school,— the board shall cancel the enrolment.

(6) (7) The board of a correspondence school may delegate to the principal the task of being satisfied that enrolments meet or do not meet criteria specified under subsection (1).
Every person lawfully enrolled at a correspondence school immediately before the commencement of this Act who is entitled under section 3 to free education at a State school shall be deemed to have been so enrolled pursuant to a direc- tion given under subsection (2)(b) on that commencement.
Compare: 1964 No 135 s 110 7A Certain domestic students may be required to pay fees for tuition from correspondence schools (1) No— (a) domestic student who has turned 16 and is not enrolled full-time at a registered school; or (ab) domestic student enrolled at a school registered under section 35A; or (b) domestic student for whom a current certificate under section 21(1) is held,— shall be or continue to be enrolled in a course, class, or programme at a corres- pondence school unless there has been paid to the board the appropriate fee (if any) for the time being prescribed by the board with the Minister’s consent.
(2) Nothing in subsection (1) gives any person a right to enrol at or receive tuition from a correspondence school.

56 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 1 s 9 Section 7A: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 7A heading: amended, on 23 July 1990, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 7A(1)(a): replaced, on 23 July 1990, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Section 7A(1)(a): amended, on 1 January 1993, by section 5(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 7A(1)(ab): replaced, on 13 June 2013, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
7B Fees for evening classes, etc The board of a State school may refuse to allow any person to attend classes at the school— (a) (b) usually held outside normal school hours; and open to people not enrolled full-time at the school,— unless there have been paid to the board the fees (if any) prescribed by the board for attendance at those classes.

Section 7B: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).
8 (1) Equal rights to primary and secondary education Except as provided in this Part, people who have special educational needs (whether because of disability or otherwise) have the same rights to enrol and receive education at State schools as people who do not.

(2) Nothing in subsection (1) affects or limits the effect of Part 2 (which relates to enrolment schemes and the suspension, expulsion, and exclusion of students).

(3) Subsections (1) and (2) come into force on 1 January 1990.
9 (1) Compare: 1964 No 135 s 112A Special education If satisfied that a person under 21 should have special education, the Secretary shall— (a) (b) agree with the person’s parents that the person should be enrolled, or di- rect them to enrol the person, at a particular State school, special school, special class, or special clinic; or agree with the person’s parents that the person should have, or direct them to ensure that the person has, education or help from a special ser- vice.
(2) Notwithstanding anything in this Act that relates to enrolment schemes, or in the enrolment scheme of any school, but subject to the rest of Part 2 (which relates to the suspension, expulsion, and exclusion of students), where there has been an agreement or direction under subsection (1), the person concerned 57 Part 1 s 9 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 shall be allowed to enrol at the State school, special school, special class, or special clinic, concerned or (as the case requires) to have education or help from the special service concerned.
(3) Subject to section 10(4), where a direction has been given under subsection (1) in respect of a person, a parent who, more than 1 month after it was given, fails or refuses to comply with it commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to the penalty prescribed for failing to comply with section 20(1) (which relates to enrolling children at school).
(4) No person shall be or continue to be enrolled at a special school, special class, or special clinic, or have or continue to have education or help from a special service, except pursuant to an agreement or direction under subsection (1).
(5) Notwithstanding anything in section 5 or section 6,— (a) (b) a child under 5 may be or continue to be enrolled at a primary school, or in a class below form 3 at a composite school; and a person under 21 who turned 14 in any year may in any later year be or continue to be enrolled at a primary school, or in a class below form 3 at a composite school; and (c) a person under 21 who, in the opinion of the Secretary,— (i) (ii) has not completed the work of form 2; and has not completed work equivalent to the work of form 2,— may be or continue to be enrolled at a secondary school, or in a class above form 2 at a composite school; and (d) a person under 21 may be or continue to be enrolled at a secondary school, or in a class above form 2 at a composite school, on or after 1 January after the person’s 19th birthday,— pursuant to an agreement or direction under subsection (1).
Subsections (1) to (5) come into force on 1 January 1990.

The provisions set out in Schedule 1 shall have effect during the period com- mencing on the commencement of this Act and ending with 31 December 1989.

Schedule 1 shall expire and be deemed to have been repealed with the close of 31 December 1989.

Section 9(2): amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 26(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
Section 9(3): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

Section 9 compare note: repealed, on 20 May 2010, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
(6) (7) (8) 58 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 1 s 10 10 (1) Right of reconsideration Subject to paragraphs (p) and (q) of subsection (6), any person’s parent may, in accordance with this section, require the reconsideration of— (a) (b) any direction under subsection (1) of section 9 relating to the person; or if the person is not an international student, the Secretary’s refusal to come to an agreement under that subsection relating to the person.
(2) A requirement under subsection (1) shall be made to the Secretary in writing within 1 month of the direction or refusal concerned.
(3) Subject to subsection (5), where a requirement under subsection (1) is made in respect of a direction given by the Secretary,— (a) the direction shall not take effect— (i) until the Secretary has reconsidered and confirmed it; or (ii) where a requirement is made under subsection (4)(c), until that re- quirement has been considered by an arbitrator and the parent concerned has been told of the arbitrator’s decision; and (b) no offence is committed under section 9(3) for so long as the direction has not taken effect.
(4) Where a requirement is made under subsection (1), the following provisions apply: (a) if the requirement relates to a direction, the Secretary shall reconsider it and then— (i) (ii) confirm it, or cancel it and issue another, or cancel it and refuse to issue another, as seems appropriate; and notify the parent concerned in writing of the result of the recon- sideration and the reasons for it: (b) if the requirement relates to a refusal, the Secretary shall reconsider whether or not the matter concerned should be agreed, and then— (i) (ii) agree or refuse to agree to the matter with the parent concerned, as seems appropriate; and notify the parent concerned in writing of the result of the recon- sideration and the reasons for it: (c) a parent who is dissatisfied with the result of the reconsideration may, by notice in writing to the Secretary, require the result to be sent to an arbi- trator.
(5) Where— (a) a requirement has been made under subsection (4)(c) in respect of the re- sult of the reconsideration by the Secretary of a direction under section 9(1); and 59 Part 1 s 10 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) 1 month after the Secretary notified the parent concerned of the name of a person to represent the Secretary in the appointment of an arbitrator, the Secretary’s representative and a nominee of the parent have not ap- pointed an arbitrator,— the direction shall forthwith take effect, and section 9(2) shall have effect ac- cordingly.
(6) Where a parent makes a requirement under subsection (4)(c), the following provisions apply: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) the Secretary shall forthwith give the parent the names of 3 people: each person shall, in the opinion of the Secretary, have experience in or expert knowledge of special education, but shall not be an employee of the Ministry, or an employee or trustee of a board: within 14 days of being given the names, the parent shall tell the Secre- tary— (i) (ii) which one of the people is acceptable; or that none of them is acceptable, and the name of some other per- son who is: if within 14 days of being given the names the parent tells the Secretary that one of the people is acceptable, the person concerned shall be the arbitrator: if within 14 days of being given the names the parent does not comply with paragraph (c), the Secretary shall choose one of the 3 people to be the arbitrator: if within 14 days of being given the names the parent tells the Secretary that none of the people is acceptable, and the name of some other person who is, the Secretary shall forthwith accept or reject the other person: if the Secretary accepts the other person, the other person shall be the ar- bitrator: if the Secretary rejects the other person, the Secretary shall forthwith tell the other person the name of a person to act as the Secretary’s agent in choosing an arbitrator; and the other person and the Secretary’s agent shall, as soon as is possible, choose the arbitrator: once it is known who the arbitrator is, the Secretary shall give the arbi- trator a copy of all the relevant documents: the arbitrator shall give the parent notice in writing that— (i) (ii) the arbitrator has been appointed; and the parent may make written submissions: on getting written submissions from the parent or 21 days after notifying the parent (whichever comes first), the arbitrator shall tell the parent and the Secretary when and where the arbitrator will hear the matter: 60 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act
 1989 Part 1 s 10 (l) (m) (ma) the parent (or a nominee), a representative of the parent, the Secretary (or a nominee), and a representative of the Secretary may take part in the hearing, and may require the child or other person concerned to be pro- duced: except as provided in this subsection, the arbitrator shall decide how the hearing proceeds: if, at the hearing, the parent of the person concerned produces evidence about the person that was not available to the Secretary when the Secre- tary reconsidered the relevant direction or refusal to come to an agree- ment under section 9(1),— (i) (ii) the arbitrator may not consider that evidence and must refer the case back to the Secretary: the Secretary must reconsider the decision that was the subject of the arbitration, and subsection (4) applies to the Secretary’s deci- sion under this subparagraph with any necessary modifications: subject to paragraph (ma), after the hearing the arbitrator shall either confirm the Secretary’s decision or direct the Secretary to make some decision that the Secretary could have made but did not: the Secretary shall comply with any order made: a parent has no right to require the reconsideration or reference to an ar- bitrator of a decision the Secretary has made pursuant to an arbitrator’s direction: if the arbitrator confirms a decision of the Secretary to refuse to come to an agreement under section 9(1), no parent has a right to require the re- consideration or reference to an arbitrator of a further refusal made in re- spect of the same child or person within 12 months of the confirmation of the decision.
(n) (o) (p) (q) (7) Subsections (1) to (6) come into force on 1 January 1990.

Section 10(1)(b): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 12 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 10(3)(b): amended, on 23 July 1990, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 10(6)(b): amended, on 28 February 2002, pursuant to section 95(1) of the Education Stand- ards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 10(6)(ma): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 4(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 10(6)(n): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 4(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 10 compare note: repealed, on 20 May 2010, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
61 Part 2 s 11 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Part 2 Enrolment schemes, and suspension, expulsion, and exclusion of students 11 Limitations on enrolment at certain primary schools [Repealed] Section 11: repealed, on 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Enrolment schemes Heading: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
11A Purpose and principles (1) The purpose of the enrolment scheme of a State school is— (a) (b) (c) to avoid overcrowding, or the likelihood of overcrowding, at the school; and to ensure that the selection of applicants for enrolment at the school is carried out in a fair and transparent manner; and to enable the Secretary to make the best use of existing networks of State schools.
(2) In achieving its purpose, the enrolment scheme of every State school must, as far as possible, ensure that— (a) (b) the scheme does not exclude local students; and no more students are excluded from the school than is necessary to avoid overcrowding at the school.

Section 11A: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
11B Interpretation In sections 11C to 11PB, unless the context otherwise requires,— give notice means to publish a notice in a daily or community newspaper cir- culating in the area served by the school reasonably convenient school means a State school that a reasonable person living in the area in which the school is situated would judge to be reasonably convenient for a particular student, taking into account such factors as the age of the student, the distance to be travelled, the time likely to be spent in travel, the reasonably available modes of travel, common public transport routes, and relevant traffic hazards.
The meaning may vary as between different schools depending on such matters as— (a) whether the school is a single sex or co-educational school: 62 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 2 s 11D (b) whether the school is an ordinary State school, a Kura Kaupapa Maori, a designated character school, a State integrated school, or a special school: (c) whether the school is a primary, intermediate, secondary, composite, or area school special programme means a programme, or a programme of a type, that the Secretary has, by notice in the Gazette, approved as a special programme, and— (a) that provides— (i) special education; or (ii) Maori language immersion classes; or (iii) any other type of specialised education to overcome educational disadvantage; or (b) that is a programme— (i) (ii) (iii) that takes a significantly different approach in order to address particular student needs; and that would not be viable unless it could draw from a catchment area beyond the school’s home zone; and to which entry is determined by an organisation or process that is independent of the school.
Section 11B: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 11B reasonably convenient school paragraph (b): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 12 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
11C Content of enrolment scheme (1) A school’s enrolment scheme must— (a) (b) (c) define a home zone for the school; and set out the pre-enrolment procedures for selecting applicants who live outside the home zone; and identify any special programmes offered by the school and the criteria on which students will be accepted onto any special programme.

(2) The procedures described in subsection (1)(b) must be consistent with section 11F and any relevant instructions issued by the Secretary under section 11G.
Section 11C: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

11D Effect of home zone (1) Subject to the provisions of this Act, a person who lives in the home zone of a school that has an enrolment scheme is entitled at any time to enrol at that school.
63 Part 2 s 11E Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) An applicant for enrolment at a school with an enrolment scheme who lives outside the school’s home zone is entitled to enrol at the school only— (a) (b) if he or she is offered a place at the school in accordance with the pro- cedure set out in the enrolment scheme; or if the Secretary has agreed or directed under section 9, or directed under section 11P, section 16, section 17D, or section 18A, that the student be enrolled at the school; or (c) if— (i) (ii) the student has been excluded or expelled from another school (school A); and the principal of the school at which the student wishes to enrol agrees, by arrangement with the principal of school A, to enrol the student; and (iii) the Secretary endorses the proposal.
Section 11D: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 11D(2)(b): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 5 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 11D(2)(c): inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 5 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
11E How a school defines its home zone (1) A State school’s home zone must be defined by geographic boundaries, and must be described in such a way that any given address is either within or out- side the home zone.
(2) A school’s home zone— (a) must be an area for which the school is a reasonably convenient school for a student living in that area to attend; and (b) may exclude any area for which another school is also a reasonably con- venient school for a student living in that area to attend; and (c) may exclude any area that it is desirable to exclude for the purpose of allowing the Secretary to make best use of the existing network of State schools in the area.
Section 11E: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 11E(2)(c): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 8 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
11F How to select applicants who live outside home zone (1) The order of priority in which applicants who live outside a school’s home zone are to be offered places at the school is as follows: 64 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 2 s 11F (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) first priority must be given to any applicant who is accepted for enrol- ment in a special programme run by the school: second priority must be given to any applicant who is the sibling of a current student of the school: third priority must be given to any student who is the sibling of a former student of the school: fourth priority must be given to any applicant who is a child of a former student of the school: fifth priority must be given to any applicant who is either a child of an employee of the board of the school or a child of a member of the board of the school: (f) sixth priority must be given to all other applicants.
(2) If there are more applicants in the second, third, fourth, fifth, or sixth priority groups than there are places available, selection within the priority group must be by ballot conducted in accordance with instructions issued by the Secretary under section 11G.
(3) For the purposes of this section, child A is the sibling of child B if— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) both children share a common parent; or a parent of child A is married to, or in a civil union with, a parent of child B; or a parent of child A was married to, or in a civil union with, a parent of child B at the time when child B’s parent died; or a parent of child A is the de facto partner of a parent of child B; or both children live in the same household and, in recognition of family obligations, are treated by the adults of that household as if they were siblings; or the Secretary, by written notice to the school, advises that child A is to be treated as the sibling of child B.
If 2 or more siblings apply for places at a school at the same level, the applica- tions of those siblings must be dealt with as a single application for the purpose of the ballot.

Every application for enrolment at a school with an enrolment scheme must be processed by the school in accordance with the enrolment scheme, and may not be declined on technical grounds or on any other ground that would be incon- sistent with the purpose and principles set out in section 11A.
Section 11F: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 11F(1)(d): replaced, on 21 December 2010, by section 6(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 11F(1)(e): replaced, on 21 December 2010, by section 6(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
65 (4) (5) Part 2 s 11G Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 11F(1)(f): inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 6(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 11F(2): amended, on 21 December 2010, by section 6(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 11F(3)(b): amended, on 26 April 2005, by section 7 of the Relationships (Statutory Referen- ces) Act 2005 (2005 No 3).
Section 11F(3)(c): amended, on 26 April 2005, by section 7 of the Relationships (Statutory Referen- ces) Act 2005 (2005 No 3).

Section 11F(3)(d): replaced, on 26 April 2005, by section 7 of the Relationships (Statutory Referen- ces) Act 2005 (2005 No 3).
11G Instructions and guidelines on operation of enrolment schemes (1) The Secretary may issue instructions to State schools that have enrolment schemes about the following matters: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) the procedures for holding ballots: the dates on which ballots are to be held: the establishment and maintenance of waiting lists: the information to be given to applicants who live outside the school’s home zone: any other matter that the Secretary considers necessary for ensuring the fair, transparent, and efficient operation of enrolment schemes.
(2) Instructions issued under subsection (1)— (a) must be complied with by schools; and (b) may apply to all or specified schools or classes of school; and (c) must be notified in the Gazette, either in full, or by a notice outlining the content of the instructions and saying where a copy can be obtained, and the date on which the instructions take effect; and (d) may be amended or revoked, in which case notice of the amendment or revocation must be given in the Gazette, as described in paragraph (c).
(3) The Secretary may issue guidelines to State schools about any or all of the fol- lowing matters: (a) (b) (c) the basis on which the Secretary’s powers in relation to enrolment schemes may be exercised (including, in particular, the power in section 11P(2)(a) relating to the determination of whether an applicant lives within a home zone or outside it): the kinds of amendments to enrolment schemes that are minor amend- ments for the purpose of section 11MA, or the criteria for deciding what is a minor amendment, or both: the manner in which schools must conduct reviews under section 11OA (which relates to the review of a student’s enrolment).
Section 11G: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

66 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 2 s 11I Section 11G(3): replaced, on 25 October 2001, by section 6 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
11H Process for developing and adopting enrolment scheme (1) If the Secretary gives a written notice to a State school that there is, or is likely to be, overcrowding at the school, the board of the school must develop an en- rolment scheme for the school.

(2) A board may not begin developing an enrolment scheme unless it has received a written notice of the type referred to in subsection (1).
(3) When developing a proposed enrolment scheme, a board must consult with whatever persons and organisations it considers appropriate and, in particular, must take all reasonable steps to discover and consider the views of— (a) (b) (c) (d) the parents of students at the school; and the people living in the area for which the school is a reasonably con- venient school; and the students and prospective students of the school (depending on their age and maturity); and the boards of other schools that could be affected by the proposed enrol- ment scheme.
(4) In addition to the consultation required by subsection (3),— (a) (b) the board of a Kura Kaupapa Maori must consult with the persons and organisations that the board believes have an interest in fostering the school’s adherence to Te Aho Matua and any special characteristics set out in the school’s charter: the board of a designated character school must consult with those per- sons and organisations that the board believes have an interest in foster- ing the aims, purposes, and objectives that constitute the school’s differ- ent character: (c) the board of a State integrated school must consult with the school’s pro- prietors.
(5) If the Secretary approves a proposed enrolment scheme for a State school, the school’s board must pass a resolution adopting the scheme as soon as practic- able.

Section 11H: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 11H(4)(c): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 13 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
11I (1) Proposed enrolment schemes to be approved by Secretary The Secretary may approve the proposed enrolment scheme of a State school only if he or she is satisfied that— 67 Part 2 s 11IA Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) the scheme complies, as far as possible, with the purpose and principles of enrolment schemes as set out in section 11A; and the definition of the school’s home zone in the enrolment scheme en- sures that students can attend a reasonably convenient school; and the boundaries of the school’s home zone overlap or are contiguous with the boundaries of the home zone of any adjacent State school that has an enrolment scheme; and the scheme promotes the best use of the network of State schools in the area; and the procedures for determining which applicants who live outside the home zone will be offered places at the school comply with section 11F and any instructions issued under section 11G; and (f) the board has carried out adequate consultation under section 11H.
(2) If a board and the Secretary are unable to reach agreement about the content of the school’s enrolment scheme or proposed enrolment scheme, the Secretary may require the board to amend the scheme or proposed scheme in the manner required by the Secretary.
(3) A board that receives a requirement under subsection (2) must, as soon as prac- ticable, change its enrolment scheme or proposed enrolment scheme to give ef- fect to the Secretary’s requirement, and the board need not obtain separate ap- proval from the Secretary for the change.

Section 11I: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
11IA Development of enrolment scheme by Secretary (1) If a board receives a notice under section 11H(1) and if an enrolment scheme is not developed by it within a reasonable period, the Secretary may develop an enrolment scheme for the school.

(2) In developing an enrolment scheme, the Secretary must— (a) follow the process set out in section 11H(3) and (4) as if he or she was the board; and (b) be satisfied of the matters listed in section 11I(1).
(3) A board must implement an enrolment scheme developed under this section.

The Secretary must specify, in the enrolment scheme, the date on which the scheme commences.

Section 11K(1) and (2) does not apply to an enrolment scheme made under this section.

Section 11IA: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 14 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
(4) (5) 68 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 2 s 11K 11J Information about school’s enrolment scheme (1) When the board of a State school adopts an enrolment scheme or implements an enrolment scheme developed under section 11IA, it must give notice of the fact that it has adopted an enrolment scheme, and the notice must include— (a) (b) a general description of the school’s home zone; and information about where copies of the enrolment scheme may be viewed and obtained.
(2) Each year, the board of a school that has an enrolment scheme must give notice of— (a) (b) (c) the likely number of out-of-zone places; and the significant pre-enrolment dates and procedures; and the date or dates on which any ballot will be held.
(3) The following must be available for inspection at the school at all reasonable times: (a) (b) (c) (d) a copy of the school’s current enrolment scheme: a copy of the results of the most recent ballot for places at the school: a copy of the waiting list for places at the school: if it is available, information about the matters listed in subsection (2).

Section 11J: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
Section 11J(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 15 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

11K Commencement of enrolment scheme (1) An enrolment scheme for a primary school commences on the date 3 months after the day of its adoption, or on a later date specified in the scheme.
(2) An enrolment scheme for a secondary or composite school commences on 1 January in the year following the year in which it was adopted, or on a later date specified in the scheme and agreed to by the Secretary.

(2A) An enrolment scheme developed under section 11IA commences on the date specified in the scheme.
(3) Despite subsections (1) and (2), the Secretary may, on application by a board, authorise the early commencement of an enrolment scheme if he or she con- siders that early commencement is appropriate.

(4) If the Secretary gives authorisation for early commencement after the board has given notice of the enrolment scheme, the board must give notice showing the revised date on which the scheme will commence.
Section 11K: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

69 Part 2 s 11L Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 11K(2A): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 16 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

11L End of enrolment scheme (1) The board of a school may by resolution, in accordance with this section, aban- don an enrolment scheme, in which case the scheme ends on the date specified in the resolution.
(2) A board may not resolve to abandon an enrolment scheme unless it has re- ceived written notice from the Secretary authorising it to do so.

(3) The Secretary may at any time, by notice in writing, require the board of a State school to abandon its enrolment scheme on the grounds that the Secretary is satisfied that there is not, or is not likely to be, overcrowding at the school if the enrolment scheme is abandoned; and the board must resolve at its next meeting to abandon the scheme.
(4) When a board abandons an enrolment scheme, it must— (a) notify the Secretary of the date on which the enrolment scheme ended or will end; and (b) give notice of the date on which the scheme ended or will end.

Section 11L: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

11M Amendment of enrolment scheme (1) The board of a State school that has adopted an enrolment scheme or imple- mented an enrolment scheme under section 11IA may amend it.
(2) A board must not amend a scheme unless it is satisfied that an enrolment scheme is still necessary in order to avoid overcrowding, or the likelihood of overcrowding, at the school.

If the board of a State school (school A) adopts or amends an enrolment scheme, the Secretary may require the board of any nearby State school that also has an enrolment scheme to develop a proposed amendment to its enrol- ment scheme in order to take into account the effect of school A’s scheme.
Sections 11A to 11L apply to an amendment and a proposed amendment to an enrolment scheme as if it were an enrolment scheme or a proposed enrolment scheme (as the case may be).

Section 11M: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 11M(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 17 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 11M(3): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 9 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
(3) (4) 70 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 2 s 11N 11MA Making minor amendments to enrolment schemes (1) A State school that wishes to make a minor amendment to its enrolment scheme may make it using the procedure set out in subsection (2) instead of going through the process set out in sections 11H to 11J.
(2) In order to make a minor amendment to its enrolment scheme under this sec- tion, a school must— (a) (b) (c) apply to the Secretary for confirmation that the proposed amendment is minor; and on receiving confirmation from the Secretary, give notice of the pro- posed amendment; and forward to the Secretary any written comments or queries received by the school regarding the proposed amendment; and (d) adopt the amendment by resolution of the school’s board.
(3) A school may not adopt an amendment under subsection (2)(d) unless— (a) (b) at least 1 month has passed since notice of the proposal was given; and the Secretary has, after that time, given approval for the amendment to be incorporated.
(4) At any time before the amendment is incorporated into the enrolment scheme, the Secretary may advise the school that the proposed amendment is not minor, in which case the school may not adopt the amendment without going through the process set out in sections 11H to 11J.

Section 11MA: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 7 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
11N Pre-enrolment in schools with enrolment schemes (1) (2) The board of a State school may apply the pre-enrolment procedures of an en- rolment scheme at any time after notice has been given of the scheme under section 11J(1), even if the scheme has not yet commenced.
In the case of applications by applicants who will be subject to a ballot, the board must notify each applicant, in writing, of— (a) when and how the ballot will be held; and (b) when and how applicants will be advised of the results of the ballot; and (c) the rights and responsibilities of applicants after the ballot.
(3) The board must give written notice to every applicant whose application is de- clined of— (a) (b) the reason why the application has been declined; and the Secretary’s powers under section 11P(2).

(4) The board must give written notice to every applicant whose name was inclu- ded in a ballot of the outcome of the ballot as it relates to the applicant.
71 Part 2 s 11O Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 11N: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
11O Enrolment may be annulled if based on false information or temporary residence (1) The board of a State school that has an enrolment scheme may, subject to sub- section (4), annul the enrolment of a student if the board believes on reasonable grounds that the student’s enrolment or pre-enrolment form falsely claimed, for the purpose of securing enrolment, that— (a) (b) the student was living in the school’s home zone when the student enrol- led at the school; or the student was entitled to a particular priority in the ballot for places (for example, by falsely claiming the applicant to be the sibling (as de- fined in section 11F(3)) of an existing student).
(1A) The board of a State school that has an enrolment scheme may, subject to sub- section (4), annul the enrolment of a student if, following a review under sec- tion 11OA, the board determines that the student has used a temporary resi- dence for the purpose of gaining enrolment at the school.
(2) (3) (4) The address given in a student’s pre-enrolment form as the address where the student lives will be taken to be the address at which the student is living on enrolment, unless the board is notified otherwise.

The board may annul the enrolment of any student, or may refuse an applica- tion for enrolment by any person, who claimed or claims priority in a ballot as a sibling of a student whose enrolment the board has annulled under this sec- tion.
If the board annuls an enrolment under any of subsections (1), (1A), or (3), the annulment takes effect 1 month from the date on which the board decides to annul the enrolment.

(5) A board that annuls the enrolment of a student must immediately— (a) (b) advise the student’s parents, in writing, of the date of annulment and the date on which it takes effect; and advise the Secretary of the name of the student and the date of annul- ment.
Section 11O: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 11O heading: amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 8(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 11O(1A): inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 8(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 11O(4): replaced, on 25 October 2001, by section 8(3) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 11O(5): replaced, on 25 October 2001, by section 8(3) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
72 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 2 s 11P 11OA Review of student’s enrolment (1) The board of a State school that has an enrolment scheme may issue the parents of a student enrolled at the school with a review notice under this section if— (a) (b) (c) the student was enrolled at the school on the grounds that he or she lived in the school’s home zone; and the student has, since enrolling at the school, moved out of the school’s home zone; and the board believes on reasonable grounds that the student has used a temporary residence within the school’s home zone for the purpose of gaining enrolment at the school.
(2) On receipt of a review notice, a parent who wishes to rebut the board’s view may make submissions to the board in whatever manner he or she considers appropriate, and the board must, in accordance with any guidelines issued under section 11G(3)(c), give the parent every reasonable opportunity to ex- plain the situation.
(3) The board may exercise its power under section 11O(1A) to annul the student’s enrolment if, no earlier than 10 school days after the date on which the review notice was sent, the board determines that the student has used a temporary residence within the school’s home zone for the purpose of gaining enrolment at the school.
(4) Every review notice must— (a) (b) (c) be in writing; and be sent by any 1 or more of post, fax, or email to the student’s parents; and advise the parents of the effect of the notice, and explain what the pa- rents may do next.

Section 11OA: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 9 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
11P Secretary may direct board to enrol applicant (1) (2) The Secretary may direct the board of any State school (including the board of the school at which the student was enrolled) to enrol a student whose enrol- ment has been annulled under section 11O.
The Secretary may direct the board of a State school to enrol an applicant whose application for enrolment it has declined if he or she is satisfied that— (a) (b) the board has declined the application on the ground that the applicant is not living in the school’s home zone, but in fact he or she is living in the zone; or not giving a direction would be so disadvantageous to the applicant that overriding the enrolment scheme is justified.
73 Part 2 s 11PA Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2A) The power in subsection (2)(b) may only be exercised in exceptional circum- stances.

(3) (4) The Secretary must not give a direction about a person under subsection (1) or subsection (2)(b) unless he or she has taken all reasonable steps to consult the person’s parents, the board of the proposed school, and (if appropriate, having regard to the age and maturity of the person) the person.
The Secretary may not direct the board of a Kura Kaupapa Maori, a designated character school, or a State integrated school to enrol a person under this sec- tion unless the person’s parents agree, and accept the special character of that school.

(5) A board must comply with a direction under this section, and the direction overrides the provisions of any enrolment scheme the school may have in place.

Section 11P: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
Section 11P(2): replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 18(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 11P(2A): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 18(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 11P(4): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 18(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
11PA Annual review of enrolment scheme (1) The board of a State school that has an enrolment scheme in place on 1 Febru- ary in any year must, before 1 May of that year,— (a) (b) review the operation of the enrolment scheme, having regard to the pur- pose and principles of enrolment schemes; and ask the Secretary whether he or she agrees with the board’s view about the continuing need for a scheme to prevent overcrowding, or the likeli- hood of overcrowding, at the school.
The Secretary may exempt a board for any period not exceeding 3 years from the obligation to conduct an annual review if the Secretary considers that com- pliance is unnecessary.

The Secretary may at any time rescind an exemption given under subsection (2), and may require the board to conduct a review of its enrolment scheme within a period specified by the Secretary.

Section 11PA: inserted, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
(2) (3) 11PB Enrolment schemes of certain State schools (1) Sections 11A to 11PA apply to Kura Kaupapa Maori, designated character schools, State integrated schools, State schools that are accredited as enrolling 74 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 2 s 11PB communities of online learning, and special schools, and to their enrolment schemes, subject to the following modifications: (a) (b) all references to overcrowding or the likelihood of overcrowding must be read as if they were references to there being, or being likely to be, more applicants for enrolments at the school than there are places avail- able; and the enrolment scheme need not define a home zone for the school, nor provide for balloting of applicants who live outside any home zone, but must accord priority to applicants for whom the school is a reasonably convenient school; and (c) section 11J is modified as follows: (i) (ii) subsection (1) applies as if paragraph (a) read “a general descrip- tion of the enrolment scheme”; and subsection (2) applies as if paragraphs (a) to (c) were replaced with the words “the likely number of places available and the sig- nificant pre-enrolment dates and procedures that will apply”; and (iii) subsection (3)(b) does not apply; and (ca) in the case of an enrolling community of online learning operated by a State school, the application of the sections must not result in inconsist- ency with conditions set by the Minister under section 35X; and (d) (e) (f) in the case of a Kura Kaupapa Maori, the application of the sections must not result in inconsistency with section 156; and in the case of a designated character school, the application of the sec- tions must not result in inconsistency with the school’s charter or section 156; and in the case of a State integrated school, the application of the sections must not result in inconsistency with the school’s integration agreement or Part 33.
(2) Sections 11A to 11PA do not apply to any State school of a type specified by the Secretary by notice in the Gazette.

Section 11PB: inserted, on 8 July 2000, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 11PB(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 19(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 11PB(1)(ca): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 19(2) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 11PB(1)(d): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 19(3) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 11PB(1)(f): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 19(4)(a) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 11PB(1)(f): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 19(4)(b) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
75 Part 2 s 11Q Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 11Q Obligation to report to Parliament on enrolment schemes (1) The annual report on the schools sector that is laid before the House of Repre- sentatives by the Minister of Education in accordance with section 87B must include a statement signed by the Secretary that— (a) (b) (c) (d) lists the schools that have an enrolment scheme in place; and states the period for which each scheme has been in place; and notes the schools where adjacent schools have schemes in place; and outlines any plans included in the Ministry’s property development or other programmes to address the pressures on capacity in areas where a number of adjacent schools have enrolment schemes in place, including development plans to manage school population changes to maximise (to the extent it is reasonable and practicable to do so) the opportunity for students to attend a reasonably convenient State school.
(2) In this section, an enrolment scheme is in place once it has been notified in ac- cordance with section 11J.

Section 11Q: replaced, on 19 December 1998, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 11Q(1): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 11Q(1): amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
Section 11Q(2): amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 26(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

12 Enrolment schemes for certain other schools [Repealed] Section 12: repealed, on 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Standing-down, suspension, exclusion, and expulsion of students Heading: inserted, on 12 July 1999, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
13 Purpose The purpose of the provisions of this Act concerning the standing-down, sus- pension, exclusion, or expulsion of a student from a State school is to— (a) provide a range of responses for cases of varying degrees of seriousness; and (b) minimise the disruption to a student’s attendance at school and facilitate the return of the student to school when that is appropriate; and (c) ensure that individual cases are dealt with in accordance with the prin- ciples of natural justice.
76 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 2 s 15 Section 13: replaced, on 12 July 1999, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
14 (1) Principal may stand-down or suspend students The principal of a State school may stand-down or suspend a student if satis- fied on reasonable grounds that— (a) (b) the student’s gross misconduct or continual disobedience is a harmful or dangerous example to other students at the school; or because of the student’s behaviour, it is likely that the student, or other students at the school, will be seriously harmed if the student is not stood-down or suspended.
(2) A stand-down may be for 1 or more specified periods, and— (a) (b) (c) (d) the period or periods may not exceed 5 school days in any one term: a student may be stood-down more than once in the same year but for not more than 10 school days in total in that year: in calculating the period of a stand-down, the day on which the student was stood-down, and any day on which the student would not have had to attend school in any event, must not be counted: the principal may lift the stand-down at any time before it is due to ex- pire.
(3) If a student has been stood-down or suspended, the following provisions apply in relation to the student’s attendance at the school: (a) (b) (c) the principal may require the student to attend the school if the principal reasonably considers the student’s attendance is appropriate for the pur- poses of section 17A: the principal must allow the student to attend the school if the student’s parents request that the student be permitted to attend the school and the principal considers the request is reasonable: otherwise the student does not have to, and is not permitted to, attend the school while stood-down or suspended.
Section 14: replaced, on 12 July 1999, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 14(1)(b): amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
15 (1) Board’s powers when suspended student younger than 16 If a student younger than 16 has been suspended from a State school, the school’s board may— (a) lift the suspension at any time before it expires, either unconditionally or subject to any reasonable conditions the board wants to make: 77 Part 2 s 16 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) (c) extend the suspension conditionally for a reasonable period determined by the board when extending the suspension, in which case subsection (2) applies: if the circumstances of the case justify the most serious response, ex- clude the student from the school by extending the suspension and re- quiring the student to be enrolled at another school.
If the board extends a suspension conditionally, the board must impose reason- able conditions aimed at facilitating the return of the student to school and must take appropriate steps to facilitate the return of the student to school.
If a student fails to comply with any condition imposed under this section in respect of the lifting or extension of his or her suspension, the principal may request the board to reconsider the action it took under this section in that case and the board may confirm or reverse its earlier decisions or may modify its earlier decisions by taking any action specified in any of paragraphs (a) to (c) of subsection (1).
If the board has not sooner lifted or extended it or excluded the student under subsection (1)(c), the suspension of a student younger than 16 ceases to have effect— (a) (b) at the close of the seventh school day after the day of the suspension; or if the suspension occurs within 7 school days before the end of a term, at the close of the tenth calendar day after the day of the suspension.
If the board of a State school excludes the student under subsection (1)(c), the principal must try to arrange for the student to attend another school (which school is a suitable school that the student can reasonably conveniently attend).

If the principal is unable, by the tenth school day after the day of the board’s decision to exclude a student, to arrange for the student to attend another school, the principal must tell the Secretary what steps the principal took in try- ing to do so.
Section 15: replaced, on 12 July 1999, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Secretary’s powers when excluded student younger than 16 If the Secretary is satisfied that the board of a State school has excluded a stu- dent who is younger than 16 from the school under section 15(1)(c), and that the principal has not arranged for the student to attend another school, the Sec- retary must either,— (a) (b) if satisfied that it is not inappropriate for the student to return to the school from which the student has been excluded, lift the exclusion; or arrange for and, if necessary, direct the board of any other State school (that is not a State integrated school) to enrol the student at the other school; or (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 16 (1) 78 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 2 s 17 (ba) (c) arrange for and, if necessary, direct the sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua to enrol the student at the partnership school kura hourua; or direct a parent of the student to enrol the student at a correspondence school.
(2) The Secretary may not give a direction under subsection (1)(b) or lift an exclu- sion under subsection (1)(a) unless the Secretary has also made all reasonable attempts to consult the student, the student’s parents, the board, and any other person or organisation that, in the opinion of the Secretary, may be interested in, or able to advise on or help with, the student’s education or welfare.
(2A) The Secretary may not give a direction under subsection (1)(ba) unless— (a) (b) the student’s parents agree to the direction; and the Secretary has made all reasonable attempts to consult the student, the sponsor, and any other person or organisation that, in the opinion of the Secretary, may be interested in, or be able to advise on or help with, the student’s education or welfare.
(3) If the board of the school from which the student has been excluded also con- trols another school, the Secretary (in exercising the power conferred by sub- section (1)(b)) may direct the board to enrol the student at that other school.

(4) A board must comply with a direction under subsection (1)(b), and the direc- tion overrides the provisions of any enrolment scheme the school may have in place.
(5) A sponsor must comply with a direction under subsection (1)(ba), and the di- rection overrides any enrolment process the partnership school kura hourua may have in place.

Section 16: replaced, on 12 July 1999, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 16(1)(b): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 20(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 16(1)(ba): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 7(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 16(2A): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 7(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 16(5): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 7(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
17 (1) Board’s powers when suspended student 16 or older If a student who is 16 or older has been suspended from a State school, the board may— (a) lift the suspension at any time before it expires, either unconditionally or subject to any reasonable conditions it wants to make; or 79 Part 2 s 17A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) (3) (4) (b) extend the suspension conditionally for a reasonable period determined by the board when extending the suspension, in which case subsection (2) applies; or (c) expel the student.
If the board extends a suspension conditionally, the board must impose reason- able conditions aimed at facilitating the return of the student to school, and must take steps to facilitate the return of the student to school.
If a student fails to comply with any condition imposed under this section in respect of the lifting or extension of his or her suspension, the principal may request the board to reconsider the action it took under this section in that case and the board may confirm or reverse its earlier decisions or may modify its earlier decisions by taking any action specified in subsection (1)(a) to (c).
If the board has not sooner lifted or extended it or expelled the student under subsection (1)(c), the suspension of a student who is 16 or older ceases to have effect— (a) (b) at the close of the seventh school day after the day of the suspension; or if the suspension occurs within 7 school days before the end of a term, at the close of the tenth calendar day after the day of the suspension.

Section 17: replaced, on 12 July 1999, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 17(3): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 21 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

17A Duties of principal when student stood-down or suspended (1) When a student is stood-down or suspended from a State school, the principal must take all reasonable steps to ensure that the student has the guidance and counselling that are reasonable and practicable in all the circumstances of the stand-down or suspension.
(2) (3) If a student’s suspension is subject to conditions (whether under section 15 or section 17), the principal must take all reasonable steps to ensure that an appro- priate educational programme is provided to the student.

The purpose of the programme referred to in subsection (2) is to facilitate the return of a student to school and to minimise the educational disadvantages that occur from absence from school.
Section 17A: inserted, on 12 July 1999, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
17B Who may attend board meeting concerning suspensions If a student has been suspended, the student, the student’s parents, and their representatives are entitled to attend at least 1 meeting of the board and speak at that meeting, and to have their views considered by the board before it de- cides whether to lift or extend the suspension or exclude or expel the student (whether under section 15 or section 17).
80 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 2 s 17D Sections 17B: inserted, on 12 July 1999, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
17C Effect of suspension on school register (1) (2) The name of a student younger than 16 who has been suspended from a school under section 14 or excluded from a school under section 15(1)(c) must stay on the school’s register until the earliest of the following days: (a) (b) the day the student is enrolled at another registered school: the day the student is given an exemption under section 21 or section 22.
The name of a student who has turned 16 and is suspended from a school under section 14 must stay on the register of the school until the earliest of the fol- lowing days: (a) (b) (c) (d) the day on which the student is enrolled at another registered school: the day on which the student is expelled from the school: the day on which the student leaves school: 1 January after the student’s 19th birthday.
(3) Subsection (2) applies to a student who is younger than 16 when suspended from a school under section 14 or excluded from a school under section 15(1)(c), and turns 16 while subject to the suspension or exclusion.

Sections 17C: inserted, on 12 July 1999, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
17D Re-enrolment of excluded or expelled student (1) (2) (3) The board of a State school from which a student has ever been excluded or expelled (whether under section 15 or section 17) may refuse to enrol the stu- dent at the school (unless, in the case of an exclusion, the Secretary has lifted the exclusion under section 16(1)(a)).
Subject to sections 16(1)(b) and 158R(1)(b), the board of a State school may refuse to enrol a student who is for the time being excluded or expelled (wheth- er under section 15 or 17) from another State school or a partnership school kura hourua.
The Secretary may, in the case of a student who has turned 16, direct the board of another State school (that is not a State integrated school) to enrol a student at the school if— (a) (b) the student has been expelled from a State school under section 17; and the Secretary has made all reasonable attempts to consult the student, the student’s parents, the board, and any other person or organisation that, in the opinion of the Secretary, may be interested in, or able to advise on or help with, the student’s education or welfare.
(3A) The Secretary may, in the case of a student who has turned 16, direct the spon- sor of a partnership school kura hourua to enrol the student at the school if— 81 Part 2 s 18 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) (c) the student has been expelled from a State school under section 17; and the student’s parents agree to the enrolment; and the Secretary has made all reasonable attempts to consult the student, the sponsor, and any other person or organisation that, in the opinion of the Secretary, may be interested in, or be able to advise on or help with, the student’s education or welfare.
(4) A board must comply with a direction under subsection (3), and the direction overrides the provisions of any enrolment scheme the school may have in place.

(5) A sponsor must comply with a direction under subsection (3A), and the direc- tion overrides any enrolment process the partnership school kura hourua may have in place.

Sections 17D: inserted, on 12 July 1999, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 17D(2): replaced, on 13 June 2013, by section 8(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 17D(3): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 23 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 17D(3)(a): amended, on 13 June 2013, by section 8(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 17D(3A): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 8(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
Section 17D(5): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 8(4) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
Notice requirements for stand-downs, suspensions, exclusions, and expulsions Immediately after a student is stood-down under section 14, the principal must tell the Secretary and (except in the case of a student who has turned 20) a parent of the student— (a) (b) (c) that the student has been stood-down; and the reasons for the principal’s decision; and the period for which the student has been stood-down.
Immediately after a student is suspended under section 14, the principal must tell the board, the Secretary, and (except in the case of a student who has turned 20) a parent of the student— (a) (b) that the student has been suspended; and the reasons for the principal’s decision.
Immediately after a board lifts a suspension, extends a suspension, excludes a student, or expels a student (whether under section 15 or section 17), the board must tell the Secretary and (except in the case of a student who has turned 20) a parent of the student— 18 (1) (2) (3) 82 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 2 s 18AA (a) that the suspension has been lifted or extended, and the period of the ex- tension (if any), or that the student has been excluded or expelled; and (b) the reasons for the board’s decision.
Section 18: replaced, on 12 July 1999, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
18AA Secretary may make rules (1) The Secretary may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, make rules (which must not be inconsistent with this Act) regulating the practice and pro- cedure to be followed by boards, principals, students, parents of students, and other persons under sections 14 to 18, including (without limitation) rules— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) setting out procedural requirements to be followed when a proposed stand-down, suspension, exclusion, or expulsion is to be considered or decided: specifying who should be consulted about the circumstances of a stand- down, suspension, exclusion, or expulsion: setting out the steps to be taken by the principal and board, respectively, when a student has been stood-down, suspended, excluded, or expelled: specifying the notices to be given when a decision not to lift a suspen- sion, or a decision to extend a suspension or expel a student, is made; and specifying the particulars to be set out in each notice: specifying time limits within which specified things are to be done, and the reports that are to be produced and the persons who are to produce them: providing reasonable measures (which must not be inconsistent with the Privacy Act 1993) to protect the privacy of individuals: providing for such other matters as the Secretary considers desirable in the interests of natural justice.
(2) Before making any rules under this section, the Secretary must— (a) (b) publish in the Gazette, and in such newspapers as the Secretary con- siders appropriate, a notice of his or her intention to make the rules; and give interested persons a reasonable time to make representations about the proposed rules; and (c) consult such persons and groups as the Secretary considers appropriate.
(3) (4) If there is any conflict between rules made under this section and the provi- sions of clause 40 of Schedule 6, the rules override clause 40.

Rules made under this section are a legislative instrument and a disallowable instrument for the purposes of the Legislation Act 2012 and must be presented to the House of Representatives under section 41 of that Act.

Section 18AA: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 8 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
83 Part 2 s 18A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 18AA(3): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 24 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 18AA(4): replaced, on 5 August 2013, by section 77(3) of the Legislation Act 2012 (2012 No 119).
18A Recommendation that student should attend particular school (1) The Secretary may, on the recommendation of the chief executive of the de- partment for the time being responsible for the administration of the Oranga Tamariki Act 1989, direct the board of a State school to enrol at the school any person; and in that case the board must do so.
(2) No direction may be given under subsection (1) unless the Secretary has taken all reasonable steps to consult— (a) (b) (c) the person’s parents; and the board of the school concerned; and the chief executive of the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Oranga Tamariki Act 1989, and any other per- son or organisation that, in the Secretary’s opinion, may be interested in, or able to advise on or help with, the person’s education or welfare.
(3) A board must comply with a direction under subsection (1), and the direction overrides the provisions of any enrolment scheme the school may have in place.

Section 18A: replaced, on 1 October 1999, by section 13 of the Department of Child, Youth and Fam- ily Services Act 1999 (1999 No 82).

Section 18A(1): amended, on 14 July 2017, by section 149 of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families (Oranga Tamariki) Legislation Act 2017 (2017 No 31).
Section 18A(1): amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 18A(2)(c): amended, on 14 July 2017, by section 149 of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families (Oranga Tamariki) Legislation Act 2017 (2017 No 31).

Section 18A(3): replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 26(4) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
19 Principal may preclude student for health reasons (1) A principal of a State school who believes on reasonable grounds that a stu- dent— (a) is not clean enough to keep attending the school; or (b) may have a communicable disease (within the meaning of the Health Act 1956),— may preclude the student from the school.
(2) Forthwith after precluding a student from school under subsection (1), the prin- cipal shall make all reasonable efforts to tell— (a) the board; and 84 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 2 s 19 (b) (c) either the student (in the case of a student who has turned 20) or the stu- dent’s parents (in every other case); and in the case of a student precluded under subsection (1)(b), the Medical Officer of Health,— that the student has been precluded, and why.
(3) Where a student has been precluded from a State school for being not clean enough, the board shall have the matter looked into; and shall either cancel the preclusion or confirm that the student should stay precluded until the principal is satisfied that the student is clean enough to go back to school.
(4) Where a student has been precluded from a State school on suspicion of having a communicable disease, the board shall have the matter looked into; and shall either cancel the preclusion or confirm that the student should stay precluded until the board has received a certificate from a doctor stating that the student is well enough to go back to school.
(5) Where any person is charged with an offence against section 29 (which relates to ensuring the attendance of students at school)— (a) it is a defence to the charge if it is proved that— (i) (ii) the student did not attend because precluded for having a commu- nicable disease; and the time for which the student did not attend was no longer than was necessary for the board to cancel the preclusion or the student to get well enough to go back to school (as the case may be); and (b) except to the extent set out in paragraph (a), it is not a defence to the charge that the student did not attend because precluded under subsec- tion (1).
(6) No principal or board is liable for any act done or omitted— (a) in good faith; and (b) with reasonable care; and (c) in pursuance or intended pursuance of a power or duty given or imposed by this section.

Compare: 1964 No 135 s 193B Section 19 heading: amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 9 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 19(1): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 9(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 19(2): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 9(b) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 19(2): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 9(c) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 19(2)(c): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 9(c) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
85 Part 3 s 20 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 19(3): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 9(c) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 19(3): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 9(d) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 19(4): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 9(c) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 19(4): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 9(d) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 19(5)(a)(i): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 9(c) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 19(5)(a)(ii): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 9(d) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 19(5)(b): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 9(c) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Part 3 Enrolment and attendance of students 20 (1) New Zealand citizens and residents between 6 and 16 to go to school Except as provided in this Act, every person who is not an international student is required to be enrolled at a registered school at all times during the period beginning on the person’s sixth birthday and ending on the person’s 16th birth- day.
(2) Before a child’s seventh birthday, the child is not required to be enrolled at any school more than 3 kilometres walking distance from the child’s residence.

Compare: 1964 No 135 ss 108, 109 Section 20 heading: amended, on 1 January 1993, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 20(1): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 13 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 20(1): amended, on 1 January 1993, by section 5(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
21 Long term exemptions from enrolment (1) An employee of the Ministry designated by the Secretary for the purpose (in this section and section 26 referred to as a designated officer) may, by certifi- cate given to a person’s parent, exempt the person from the requirements of section 20,— (a) (b) on the parent’s application; and if satisfied that the person— (i) will be taught at least as regularly and well as in a registered school; or 86 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 21 (ii) in the case of a person who would otherwise be likely to need spe- cial education, will be taught at least as regularly and well as in a special class or clinic or by a special service.
(2) A certificate under subsection (1) continues in force until it is revoked or ex- pires under this section.

(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) If a designated officer refuses to grant a certificate under subsection (1), the ap- plicant parent may appeal to the Secretary who, after considering a report on the matter from the Chief Review Officer, shall confirm the refusal or grant a certificate.

The Secretary’s decision is final.

Every certificate under subsection (1) or subsection (3) shall state why it was given.
Subject to subsection (7), the Secretary may at any time revoke a certificate under subsection (1) or subsection (3).

The Secretary shall not revoke a certificate under subsection (1) or subsection (3), unless, after having— (a) made reasonable efforts to get all the relevant information; and (b) considered a report on the matter from the Chief Review Officer,— the Secretary is not satisfied of whichever of the grounds specified in subsec- tion (1)(b) the certificate was originally granted on.
(8) If the Secretary thinks any person exempted under subsection (1) would be bet- ter off getting special education, the Secretary may revoke the certificate and issue a direction under section 9.

(8A) A certificate for the time being in force under subsection (1) or subsection (3) expires when the person to whom it applies turns 16 or enrols at a registered school, whichever happens first.
(9) Every certificate of exemption under section 111 of the Education Act 1964 that was in force on 30 September 1989 shall be deemed to have been gran- ted— (a) on the ground specified in subsection (1)(b)(i) if it was in fact granted— (i) before 20 July 1987, under section 111(4)(a) of the Education Act 1964; or (ii) after 19 July 1987, under section 111(3)(a) of that Act; and (b) on the ground specified in subsection (1)(b)(ii) if it was in fact granted— (i) before 20 July 1987, under section 111(4)(b) of the Education Act 1964; or (ii) after 19 July 1987, under section 111(3)(b) of that Act;— and may be revoked under this section accordingly.
87 Part 3 s 22 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 21(2): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 10(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 21(6): amended, on 23 July 1990, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 21(8A): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 10(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 21(9): inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 8 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 21 compare note: repealed, on 20 May 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Secretary may exempt from enrolment Subject to subsection (2), the Secretary may, by certificate given to the parent of a person who has turned 15, exempt the person from the requirements of section 20— (a) (b) on the parent’s application; and if satisfied that, on the basis of— (i) (ii) (iii) the person’s educational problems; and the person’s conduct; and the benefit (if any) the person is likely to get from available schools,— it is sensible to do so.
The Secretary shall not exempt under subsection (1) any person who has nei- ther completed the work of form 2 nor enrolled for a class above form 2.

The Secretary shall tell the chief executive of the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Oranga Tamariki Act 1989 the name and address of every person exempted under subsection (1).

If satisfied that it is in the best interests of any person to do so, the Secretary may revoke the person’s certificate under subsection (1).
Compare: 1964 No 135 s 112 Section 22(1): amended, on 1 January 1993, by section 5(3) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 22(3): amended, on 14 July 2017, by section 149 of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families (Oranga Tamariki) Legislation Act 2017 (2017 No 31).

Section 22(3): amended, on 1 October 1999, by section 13 of the Department of Child, Youth and Family Services Act 1999 (1999 No 82).
22 (1) (2) (3) (4) 22A Secretary may exempt from enrolment persons placed in residence or programme under Oranga Tamariki Act 1989 (1) On an application from the chief executive of the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Oranga Tamariki Act 1989, the Secre- tary may, by a certificate given to the chief executive of that department, ex- 88 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 23 empt a person from the requirements of section 20 if satisfied that the require- ments set out in subsection (2) have been met.
(2) The requirements referred to in subsection (1) are that the person— (a) has been placed— (i) (ii) in a residence established under section 364 of the Oranga Tamar- iki Act 1989; or in a residential programme instituted by, and operated under con- tract with, the chief executive of that department where the person would otherwise be in a residence established under section 364 of that Act; and (b) will receive education services appropriate to the person’s needs.
(3) The Secretary may at any time revoke a certificate granted under subsection (1)— (a) (b) (c) on notification by the chief executive of the department for the time be- ing responsible for the administration of the Oranga Tamariki Act 1989 that the person exempted has been released from a residence other than for a temporary period; or if the Secretary is no longer satisfied that the person exempted meets the requirements of subsection (2); or at the request of the chief executive of that department and if satisfied that an exemption from section 20 is no longer required.
(4) A certificate under subsection (1) continues in force until revoked under this section.

Section 22A: replaced, on 1 October 1999, by section 13 of the Department of Child, Youth and Fam- ily Services Act 1999 (1999 No 82).

Section 22A heading: amended, on 14 July 2017, by section 149 of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families (Oranga Tamariki) Legislation Act 2017 (2017 No 31).
Section 22A(1): amended, on 14 July 2017, by section 149 of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families (Oranga Tamariki) Legislation Act 2017 (2017 No 31).

Section 22A(2)(a)(i): amended, on 14 July 2017, by section 149 of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families (Oranga Tamariki) Legislation Act 2017 (2017 No 31).

Section 22A(3)(a): amended, on 14 July 2017, by section 149 of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families (Oranga Tamariki) Legislation Act 2017 (2017 No 31).
23 Effect of exemption For so long as a certificate under section 21 or section 22 continues in force— (a) (b) the exempted person does not have to be enrolled at any school; and no person has to have the exempted person enrolled at any school.

Section 23 compare note: repealed, on 20 May 2010, by section 12 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
89 Part 3 s 24 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 24 Penalty for failure to enrol (1) Where the parent of a person required by this Act to be enrolled at a registered school fails or refuses to ensure that the person is enrolled at a registered school, the parent commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding $3,000.

(2) The payment of a fine in respect of a conviction for an offence against subsec- tion (1) is not a bar to proceedings for a further such offence.
25 (1) (2) (3) Compare: 1964 No 135 s 116 Section 24(1): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

Section 24(1): amended, on 17 December 2008, by section 4 of the Education (National Standards) Amendment Act 2008 (2008 No 108).
Students required to enrol must attend school Except as provided in this Act, every student of a registered school who fits in- to either or both of the following categories is required to attend the school whenever it is open: (a) a student who is required by section 20 to be enrolled at a registered school: (b) a student who is aged 4 or 5 and is enrolled at a registered school.
Every board and every sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that students who are required by subsection (1) to attend the school whenever it is open do so.

For the purposes of this section, a student attends a school on any day if, on the day,— (a) (b) it has been open for instruction for 4 hours or more; and the student has been present for 4 hours or more when it was open for instruction.
(3A) Despite subsections (1) to (3), if a child is aged 4 or 5 and is enrolled at a regis- tered school,— (a) the child’s parents, the principal, and the Secretary may agree a plan to help the transition of the child to school, depending on the particular needs of the child; and (b) the child is required to attend school in accordance with the plan.
(4) Nothing in subsections (1) to (3) applies to a participating student who is enrol- led at a registered school for the purposes of the secondary component of his or her secondary-tertiary programme, but he or she must attend the school for any portion of the programme as notified by the provider group or lead provider under section 31J.

(5) Nothing in subsections (1) to (3) applies to an affected student.
90 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 25A (6) An affected student must attend school for the whole of the time period (or periods) each day during which the student’s timetable is running.

(7) A board or a sponsor that is running a multiple timetable arrangement must take all reasonable steps to ensure that an affected student attends the school for the whole of the time period (or periods) each day during which the stu- dent’s timetable is running.
(8) In this section,— affected student means a student who is required to attend school in accord- ance with a multiple timetable arrangement multiple timetable arrangement means an arrangement under which more than 1 timetable is run on the same day (whether consecutively or concurrent- ly).

Compare: 1964 No 135 s 117 Section 25(1): replaced, on 3 July 2017, by section 30(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 25(2): amended, on 13 June 2013, by section 9(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 25(3A): inserted, on 3 July 2017, by section 30(3) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 25(4): replaced, on 21 December 2010, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 25(5): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 9(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
Section 25(6): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 9(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 25(7): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 9(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 25(8): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 9(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
25A Release from tuition on religious or cultural grounds (1) A student aged 16 and above, or the parent of a student aged under 16, may ask the principal to release the student from tuition in a particular class or subject.

(1A) A request under subsection (1) must be made in writing, and at least 24 hours before the start of the tuition.

(1B) This section applies only to students enrolled at a State school that is not a State integrated school.
(2) Unless satisfied that— (a) (b) the parent or student (as the case may be) has asked because of sincerely held religious or cultural views; and the student will be adequately supervised (whether within or outside the school) during the tuition,— the principal shall not release the student.
91 Part 3 s 25AA Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) Upon receiving a request from a parent under subsection (1), the principal must, before agreeing to release the student, take all reasonable steps to find out the student’s views on the matter.
(4) Subject to subsection (2), the principal shall release the student from the tuition and (if the student is to be supervised outside the school) let the student leave the school during the tuition unless satisfied, in the light of— (a) the student’s age, maturity, and ability to formulate and express views; and (b) any views the student has expressed,— that it is inappropriate to do so.

(5) Nothing in this section limits or affects section 79 of the Education Act 1964.
Section 25A: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 6(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 25A(1): replaced, on 25 October 2001, by section 10(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 25A(1A): inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 10(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 25A(1B): inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 10(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 25A(1B): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 31 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 25A(2)(a): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 10(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 25A(3): replaced, on 25 October 2001, by section 10(3) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
25AA Release from tuition in specified parts of health curriculum (1) The parent of a student enrolled at any State school may ask the principal in writing to ensure that the student is excluded from tuition in specified parts of the health curriculum related to sexuality education and, on receipt of such a request, the principal must ensure that— (a) (b) the student is excluded from the relevant tuition; and the student is supervised during that tuition.
(2) Nothing in subsection (1) requires a principal to ensure that a student who is to be excluded from tuition in specified parts of the health curriculum related to sexuality education is excluded at any other time while a teacher deals with a question raised by another student that relates to the specified part of the cur- riculum.

Section 25AA: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 11(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
25B Release from school The principal of a State school— 92 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 26 (a) may, if satisfied that— (i) (ii) a student will receive outside the school tuition acceptable to the principal; and releasing the student would not result in a contravention of section 25(2),— release the student from attendance at the school, for a period or periods agreed with a parent of the student, to receive the tuition (and, where ap- propriate, travel between the school and the place where the tuition is to be given): (b) may, if satisfied that— (i) (ii) a student has, on any day on which the school was open for in- struction, been present at the school for 4 hours or more; and there are good reasons for the student to leave before the school closes on that day,— let the student leave early on that day.
Section 25B: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 6(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
26 Exemption from attendance (1) A designated officer (as defined in section 21(1)) may, by certificate given to a student’s parent, exempt the student (entirely or partly) from attending a school— (a) (b) on the parent’s application; and if satisfied that— (i) (ii) the student is under 10, and the walking distance between the stu- dent’s residence and the school is more than 3 kilometres; or the walking distance between the student’s residence and the school is more than 5 kilometres; or (iii) it is sensible to exempt the student for some other reason.
If a designated officer refuses to grant a certificate under subsection (1), the ap- plicant parent may appeal to the Secretary who, after considering a report on the matter from the Chief Review Officer, shall confirm the refusal or grant a certificate.

The Secretary’s decision is final.


Subject to subsections (6) and (7), a certificate under subsection (1) shall spe- cify the day on which it expires; and until it expires or is cancelled, the stu- dent’s parent is not subject to section 20 in respect of the student.

Every certificate under subsection (1) shall state the grounds on which it was granted.
(2) (3) (4) (5) 93 Part 3 s 27 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (6) No certificate granted under subsection (1)(b)(iii) shall specify an expiry day more than 7 school days after the day it is granted.

(7) No other certificate under subsection (1) shall specify an expiry day more than 1 year after the day it is granted.

(8) Where a certificate under subsection (1) expires, a designated officer may, sub- ject to that subsection, issue another in its place.
(9) The Secretary may at any time cancel a certificate under subsection (1).

Compare: 1964 No 135 s 118 27 (1) (2) (3) (4) 28 Principal may exempt from attendance for short period If satisfied that a student’s absence was or will be justified, the principal of the school may exempt the student from attending the school for a period of no more than 5 school days.
The parent of a student exempted under subsection (1) is not subject to section 25 in respect of the student for the period to which the exemption relates.

In the absence of evidence to the contrary, a certificate from the principal of a school that— (a) (b) a student was absent from the school for any period; and the principal is not satisfied that the absence was justified,— is proof that the student was absent for that period without being exempted under subsection (1).
For the purposes of subsection (3), judicial notice shall be taken of the appoint- ment and signature of every principal.
Compare: 1964 No 135 s 118(9) Secretary may require parents of certain children to enrol them at correspondence school (1) The Secretary, by notice in writing to the parent of a student— (a) who has a certificate of exemption for the student under subparagraph (i) or subparagraph (ii) of section 26(1)(b); or (b) who has been directed under section 16(1)(c) to enrol the student at a correspondence school,— may call on the parent to have the student enrolled at a correspondence school specified in the notice, and ensure that the student does the work of the course in which the student is enrolled.
(2) Enrolment under subsection (1) shall be— (a) (b) for the period of exemption, in the case of a student exempted under sec- tion 26(1)(b); and until the student turns 16, or for a shorter period specified in the notice, in every other case.
94 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 30 (3) A parent who fails to comply with a notice under subsection (1) to have a stu- dent enrolled at a correspondence school commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding the maximum fine provided for in section 24(1) (which relates to the failure to enrol at a registered school).

Compare: 1969 No 135 s 119 Section 28(1)(b): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 4 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
Section 28(2)(b): amended, on 1 January 1993, by section 5(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 28(3): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).
29 (1) Penalty for irregular attendance Every parent of a person who,— (a) while enrolled at a registered school, does not attend as provided in sec- tion 25; or (b) while enrolled at a correspondence school, does not do the work of the course in which the student is enrolled,— commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding an amount calculated at the rate of $30 for every school day for which the offence has occurred.
(2) Notwithstanding subsection (1), a fine imposed for an offence against that sub- section shall not exceed $300 for a first offence against the subsection (or sec- tion 120(1) of the Education Act 1964), or $3,000 for a second or subsequent offence.

(3) The imposition of a penalty under this section does not affect or restrict the op- eration of any provision of the Oranga Tamariki Act 1989.
Compare: 1964 No 135ss 119(2), 120 Section 29(1): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

Section 29(1): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 13 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 29(1): amended, on 17 December 2008, by section 5(1) of the Education (National Stand- ards) Amendment Act 2008 (2008 No 108).
Section 29(2): amended, on 17 December 2008, by section 5(2)(a) of the Education (National Stand- ards) Amendment Act 2008 (2008 No 108).

Section 29(2): amended, on 17 December 2008, by section 5(2)(b) of the Education (National Stand- ards) Amendment Act 2008 (2008 No 108).

Section 29(3): amended, on 14 July 2017, by section 149 of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families (Oranga Tamariki) Legislation Act 2017 (2017 No 31).
30 Employment of school-age children (1) No person shall employ any person who has not turned 16 at any time— (a) within school hours; or 95 Part 3 s 31 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ab) (b) (c) in the case of a person who is a student participating in a secondary-terti- ary programme, when the employment interferes with the person’s abili- ty to undertake the secondary-tertiary programme; or in the case of a person enrolled at a correspondence school, when the employment interferes with the person’s ability to do the work of the course in which the student is enrolled; or in the case of a person who has been granted a certificate of exemption under section 21, when the employment interferes with the person’s abil- ity to be taught as well and regularly as in a registered school; or (d) if the employment then— (i) (ia) (ii) prevents or interferes with the person’s attendance at school; or in the case of a person who is a participating student, interferes with the person’s ability to undertake his or her secondary-tertiary programme; or in the case of a person enrolled at a correspondence school, inter- feres with the person’s ability to do the work of the course in which the person is enrolled,— unless there has been produced to the employer a certificate of exemption, or other satisfactory evidence that the person is exempted (otherwise than under section 21(1)) from enrolment at any school.
(2) Every person who— (a) being a parent of any other person, permits the other person to be em- ployed contrary to subsection (1); or (b) employs any other person in contravention of the subsection,— commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding $1,000.

Compare: 1964 No 135 ss 121, 122 Section 30(1): amended, on 1 January 1993, by section 5(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
Section 30(1)(ab): inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 8(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 30(1)(d)(ia): inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 8(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 30(2): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

31 Ensuring attendance of students (1) Any board may appoint any person to be an attendance officer for the schools or institutions it administers.
(1A) A sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua may appoint any person to be an attendance officer for the school.

96 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 31 (2) A person may be appointed an attendance officer by 2 or more boards or spon- sors, or a board and a sponsor jointly.

(3) Every board shall, by any means it thinks appropriate, take all reasonable steps to ensure the attendance of students enrolled at its school or schools (or institu- tion or institutions).
(3A) Every sponsor must, by any means the sponsor thinks appropriate, take all reasonable steps to ensure the attendance of students enrolled at its school.
(4) An attendance officer, on producing a distinctive badge or other evidence of appointment, or a constable may at any time detain any person who appears to have turned 5 and not to have turned 16, and who is not then at school, and question the person as to the person’s name and address, the school (if any) at which the person is enrolled and its address, and the reason for the person’s ab- sence from school.
(5) If not satisfied by the person’s answers that the person has a good reason for not being at school, the attendance officer or constable— (a) may take the person to the person’s home, or to the school at which the officer thinks the person is enrolled.
(b) [Repealed] (6) A person who, after an attendance officer has produced evidence of appoint- ment, obstructs or interferes with the officer in the exercise of powers under this section, commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not ex- ceeding $1,000.
(7) Any attendance officer, a sponsor, a principal, the Secretary, or any person ap- pointed by a board, a sponsor, or the Secretary for the purpose may file charg- ing documents, conduct prosecutions, and take any other proceedings, under this Part.
(8) A certificate sealed by a board showing that a person named in it is appointed for any purpose under this section is sufficient evidence of the matters speci- fied in the certificate; and the authenticity of, and validity of the affixing of, a board’s seal shall not in any proceedings under this Part be inquired into or dis- puted.
(8A) A certificate signed on behalf of a sponsor showing that a person named in it is appointed for any purpose under this section is sufficient evidence of the mat- ters specified in the certificate; and the authenticity or authority of any signa- ture on behalf of a sponsor may not in any proceedings under this Part of this Act be inquired into or disputed.
(9) This section applies to a participating student only in relation to any portion of his or her secondary-tertiary programme during which he or she is required to attend school, as notified by the provider group or lead provider under section 31J.

97 Part 3 s 31A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (10) This section applies to an affected student (within the meaning of section 25(8)) only in relation to the time period (or periods) each day during which his or her timetable is running.
Compare: 1964 No 135 s 123 Section 31(1A): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 10(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 31(2): amended, on 13 June 2013, by section 10(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 31(3A): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 10(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 31(4): amended, on 1 October 2008, pursuant to section 116(a)(ii) of the Policing Act 2008 (2008 No 72).
Section 31(4): amended, on 1 January 1993, by section 5(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 31(5): amended, on 1 October 2008, pursuant to section 116(a)(ii) of the Policing Act 2008 (2008 No 72).

Section 31(5)(b): repealed, on 1 January 1992, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 31(6): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).
Section 31(7): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

Section 31(7): amended, on 13 June 2013, by section 10(4)(a) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 31(7): amended, on 13 June 2013, by section 10(4)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 31(7): amended, on 17 December 2008, by section 6 of the Education (National Standards) Amendment Act 2008 (2008 No 108).
Section 31(8A): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 10(5) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 31(9): inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 9 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 31(10): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 10(6) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
31A Nature of secondary-tertiary programme A secondary-tertiary programme means a full-time programme for a partici- pating student that— (a) (b) consists of a secondary component and a tertiary component; and is co-ordinated by a provider group or a lead provider.

Section 31A: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
31B Provider group for secondary-tertiary programme The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, recognise as a provider group of secondary-tertiary programmes a group of organisations that consists of— (1) 98 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 31C (a) any 1 or more of the following: (i) (ia) (ii) a board of a secondary school, a composite school, or a special school that is a relevant school within the meaning of section 246: a sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua, other than a part- nership school kura hourua that is only a primary partnership school kura hourua: a body corporate that is the manager of a school registered under section 35A, other than a school registered under that section only as a primary school; and (b) any 1 or more of the following: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) a government training establishment: an industry training organisation: an institution: a registered establishment.
(2) (3) Each member of a provider group is jointly and severally liable with the other members of the group in respect of the group’s obligations and responsibilities.

Each member of a provider group must take all reasonable steps to work in a co-operative manner with the other members of the group.

Section 31B: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
Section 31B(1)(a)(ia): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

31C Secretary may enter into agreement with provider group (1) A provider group may co-ordinate a secondary-tertiary programme, if the pro- vider group has entered into a written agreement with the Secretary in relation to the programme.
(2) The matters that an agreement under subsection (1) may provide for, in relation to a secondary-tertiary programme, may include (without limitation) any 1 or more of the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) its organisation and operation: its curriculum, courses, and any qualification resulting from it: selection of students to participate in it: clarification of responsibility for the welfare and educational perform- ance of participating students: pastoral care and career guidance for participating students: its funding, and the responsibility of specific members of the provider group in relation to that funding: (g) the maximum number of students that may participate in it.
99 Part 3 s 31D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) (4) The Secretary and the provider group may agree at any time to cancel or vary an agreement under subsection (1).

The Secretary or the provider group may cancel an agreement under subsection (1) by giving at least 6 months’ notice in writing to the provider group or the Secretary (as the case may be).

Section 31C: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
31D Provider group plan for secondary-tertiary programme (1) A provider group must— (a) prepare and maintain a plan that contains short-term and long-term goals for each secondary-tertiary programme that it co-ordinates; and (b) provide the Secretary with a copy of the plan.

(2) A provider group that alters any plan provided to the Secretary under subsec- tion (1)(b) must provide the Secretary with a copy of the changed plan as soon as practicable.
Section 31D: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

31E Report to Secretary by provider group (1) A provider group must report at least annually to the Secretary regarding its performance and progress.

(2) The Secretary may, by notice in the Gazette, specify the format, or content, or both, required for reports that are to be made under subsection (1).
Section 31E: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
31F Recognition as lead provider of secondary-tertiary programme The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, recognise as a lead provider of sec- ondary-tertiary programmes any of the following: a board of a secondary school, a composite school, or a special school that is a relevant school within the meaning of section 246: a sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua, other than a partnership school kura hourua that is only a primary partnership school kura hour- ua: a body corporate that is the manager of a school registered under section 35A, other than a school registered under that section only as a primary school: a government training establishment: an industry training organisation: an institution: (a) (ab) (b) (c) (d) (e) 100 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 31H (f) a registered establishment.
Section 31F: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 31F(ab): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 12 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
31G Lead provider to co-ordinate secondary-tertiary programme (1) A lead provider may co-ordinate a secondary-tertiary programme, if the lead provider has made an arrangement for the safety, welfare, and educational pro- grammes of participating students that is— (a) (b) agreed to by the Secretary; or in a form approved by the Secretary.
(2) Any of the following may provide a secondary component or a tertiary compo- nent of a secondary-tertiary programme, after making an arrangement as speci- fied in subsection (1) with the lead provider of the programme: (a) (ab) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) a board of a secondary school, a composite school, or a special school that is a relevant school within the meaning of section 246: a sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua, other than a partnership school kura hourua that is only a primary partnership school kura hour- ua: the managers of a school registered under section 35A, other than a school registered under that section only as a primary school: a government training establishment: an institution: a registered establishment: an employer providing work experience under the programme.
(3) The Secretary may withdraw his or her agreement under subsection (1)(a), or his or her approval under subsection (1)(b), by giving at least 6 months’ notice in writing to the lead provider.

Section 31G: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 31G(2)(ab): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 13 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
31H Government policies or priorities (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, publish government policies, or priorities, or both that apply in relation to any 1 or more of the following: (a) (b) (c) secondary-tertiary programmes: provider groups, or specified types of provider groups: lead providers, or specified types of lead providers.
101 Part 3 s 31I Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) The Minister may, by written notice to a provider group or lead provider, issue a government policy or priority that applies in relation to the group or provider.

(3) A provider group or lead provider must take all reasonable steps to comply with any government policy or priority— (a) (b) published under subsection (1); or notified under subsection (2).
(4) In this section, comply means to give effect to the government policy or priori- ty or to have regard to the government policy or priority, as the context re- quires.

Section 31H: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
31I Entry into secondary-tertiary programme (1) A student who is enrolled in any of the following may apply to a provider group or lead provider for his or her entry into a secondary-tertiary programme: (a) (b) (ba) (c) (d) a secondary school: a composite school: a partnership school kura hourua, other than a partnership school kura hourua that is only a primary partnership school kura hourua: a school that is registered under section 35A, other than a school regis- tered under that section only as a primary school: a special school that is a relevant school within the meaning of section 246.
(2) Approval for a student’s entry into a secondary-tertiary programme is at the discretion of the provider group or lead provider.

Section 31I: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 31I(1)(ba): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
31J Provider group or lead provider to notify student and parents about any school attendance requirement The provider group or lead provider co-ordinating a participating student’s sec- ondary-tertiary programme must take all reasonable steps to notify the student and his or her parents in writing about any portion of the programme during which the student’s participation in the programme requires his or her attend- ance at school.
Section 31J: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

102 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 33 31K Withdrawal from secondary-tertiary programme (1) A participating student may withdraw from his or her secondary-tertiary pro- gramme at any time.
(2) A provider group or lead provider (as the case may be) may withdraw its ap- proval for a student’s participation in a secondary-tertiary programme after consulting with the student.

Section 31K: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
31L International students and secondary-tertiary programmes A provider group or lead provider must not approve the entry of an internation- al student into a secondary-tertiary programme if to do so would result in the provider excluding from entry to the programme any domestic student who has applied for entry into the programme and is otherwise eligible to participate in the programme.

Section 31L: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
Section 31L heading: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 14(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 31L: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 14(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 31L: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 14(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

32 Hearings of proceedings may be private If the District Court Judge concerned so orders, proceedings under this Part shall be held with closed doors.
33 (1) Compare: 1964 No 135 s 124 Evidence of school roll, etc In any proceedings under this Act, a certificate by a principal as to any of the following matters is, in the absence of proof to the contrary, proof of the matter stated: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) the enrolment of a person: the days on which a school was open during any period: the days on which a student attended a school during any period: a student’s age: the name and address of a student’s parent.
(2) Judicial notice shall be taken of the signature and appointment of a principal on a certificate under subsection (1).
Compare: 1964 No 135 s 125 103 Part 3 s 34 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 34 Burden of proof on parents In proceedings under this Part of this Act, the burden of proving any of the fol- lowing matters in relation to a person is on the person’s parent: (a) (b) (c) the enrolment of the person at a school: the person’s attendance at a school: the person’s exemption from enrolment or attendance at a school.
Compare: 1964 No 135 s 126 35 Fines to be paid to board or sponsor (as applicable) Every fine recovered under this Part must be paid to the board or sponsor (as applicable) on whose behalf the proceedings concerned were commenced.

Section 35: replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 5 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Registration of private schools Heading: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
35A Provisional and full registration of private schools (1) (2) The managers of an unregistered or proposed private school must apply to the Secretary, on a form provided by the Secretary for the purpose, for its provi- sional registration as a primary, secondary, or special private school, or as a school of 2 or all of those descriptions.
The Secretary must provisionally register a school in respect of which an appli- cation is made under subsection (1) as a school of the description or descrip- tions concerned if he or she is satisfied that the school or proposed school meets or is likely to meet the criteria for registration as a private school.
(3) Provisional registration of a school or proposed school continues— (a) (b) for 12 months (unless it is revoked earlier); or until the expiry of any period specified by the Secretary under subsec- tion (4).
(4) The Secretary may renew the provisional registration of a school only once, for a period specified by the Secretary, if he or she is satisfied that— (a) (b) exceptional circumstances exist in relation to the school; and the school is likely to meet the criteria for registration as a private school in that period.

The Secretary may request a further review, in addition to the review under section 35I(2), of a school that has its provisional registration renewed under subsection (4).
The Secretary must fully register a school as a school of the description or de- scriptions concerned if he or she is satisfied, having considered any report (5) (6) 104 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 35C under section 35I(4) in relation to a review under section 35I(2) or (3) (as the case may be), that a provisionally registered school meets the criteria for regis- tration as a private school.
Section 35A: replaced, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

35AA Suspensions and expulsions of students from private schools to be notified to Secretary [Repealed] Section 35AA: repealed, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
35B Secretary may require application for registration of school The Secretary may require the managers of a school that is not registered under section 35A to apply for its registration under that section if he or she considers that the school is operating as a school, whether or not certificates of exemp- tion under section 21 are held in respect of all or any of the students being taught there.
Section 35B: replaced, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Criteria for registration as private school Heading: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
35C Criteria for registration as private school The criteria for registration as a private school under section 35A are that the school— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) has premises that are suitable, as described in section 35D; and usually provides tuition for 9 or more students who are of or over the age of 5 years but are under the age of 16 years; and has staffing that is suitable to the age range and level of its students, the curriculum taught at the school, and the size of the school; and has equipment that is suitable for the curriculum being delivered or to be delivered at the school; and has a curriculum for teaching, learning, and assessment and makes de- tails of the curriculum and its programme for delivery available for pa- rents; and has suitable tuition standards, as described in section 35F; and has managers who are fit and proper persons (as described in section 35G) to be managers of a private school.
Section 35C: replaced, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

105 Part 3 s 35D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 35D Suitable premises (1) (2) Suitable premises for a school registered under section 35A are premises that are suitable for a school of its description and the number of students at the school.
Subsection (1) applies to all premises used by the school for the regular deliv- ery of courses, whether or not the managers of the school own or lease the premises for the school.

Section 35D: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
35E Additional and substituted premises to be approved (1) (2) The managers of a school registered under section 35A must, in the circum- stances set out in subsection (2), notify the Secretary and obtain his or her ap- proval before using new premises for the regular delivery of courses.
The circumstances are that the managers of the school propose that the school is to occupy— (a) (b) premises that are in addition to its current premises; or different premises that are to replace the premises currently occupied by the school.

(3) When considering whether to grant approval of premises under subsection (1), the Secretary must consider whether the premises are suitable, as described in section 35D.
Section 35E: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

35F Tuition standards (1) (2) Tuition of a suitable standard at a school registered under section 35A must in- clude giving students tuition of a standard no lower than that of the tuition given to students enrolled at State schools of the same class levels.

In assessing the standard of tuition, the mode of curriculum delivery and the regularity of instruction must be considered.
Section 35F: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
35G Managers to be fit and proper persons (1) In assessing whether a person who is a manager of a school is a fit and proper person to be a manager of a school registered under section 35A, the following matters must be taken into account: any conviction for a serious criminal activity: any health problems that may affect the person’s ability to comply with his or her obligations towards the school and its students: (a) (b) 106 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 35GA (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) any adjudication of bankruptcy under the Insolvency Act 2006 or the In- solvency Act 1967, or prohibition from being a director or promoter of, or being concerned or taking part in the management of, a company under any of sections 382, 383, 385, and 386A of the Companies Act 1993: any previous cancellation under this Act or section 186 of the Education Act 1964 of the registration of a school of which the person was a man- ager: any serious breach of the person’s statutory duties as manager of a school registered under section 35A of this Act or section 186 of the Education Act 1964: any conviction for an offence under section 35R: all other relevant matters.
(2) If the manager of a school is— (a) (b) a company, the assessment under subsection (1) applies to its directors: an incorporated society or an incorporated trust board, the assessment under subsection (1) applies to its members.

(3) When the management of a school registered under section 35A changes in its entirety or is transferred to a new entity, the new managers must give notice to the Secretary and an assessment under subsection (1) must be made of the new managers of the school.
Section 35G: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Statement of National Education and Learning Priorities Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 35 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
35GA Manager must have regard to statement of National Education and Learning Priorities The manager of a school registered under section 35A must,— (a) (b) in operating the school, have regard to any statement of National Educa- tion and Learning Priorities; and ensure that, in developing and delivering the curriculum, the school’s principal and staff have regard to any statement of National Education and Learning Priorities.
Section 35GA: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 35 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

107 Part 3 s 35H Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Managers to advise Secretary of private school ceasing operation Heading: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
35H Managers must advise Secretary of school ceasing operation The managers of a school registered under section 35A that is about to cease to operate as a school must inform the Secretary— (a) (b) that the school will cease to operate as a school; and of the date on which the school will cease to operate as a school.

Section 35H: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
Review of private schools registered under section 35A Heading: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

35I Review of schools registered under section 35A (1) As soon as practicable after provisionally registering a school or proposed school under section 35A(2), the Secretary must inform the Chief Review Offi- cer of the provisional registration.
(2) The Chief Review Officer must ensure that a review officer reviews any school that is provisionally registered under section 35A(2) either— (a) between 6 and 12 months after the provisional registration of the school or proposed school; or (b) earlier, by agreement with its managers.
(3) (4) (5) (6) The Chief Review Officer must ensure that a review officer conducts a further review of a school that has had its provisional registration renewed under sec- tion 35A(4), when the further review is requested by the Secretary under sec- tion 35A(5).

The Chief Review Officer must ensure that a review officer who conducts a re- view under subsection (2) or (3) prepares a written report in relation to the re- view and gives copies of it to the Secretary and the school’s manager.
The Chief Review Officer must ensure that a school, while registered under section 35A(6), is reviewed in accordance with Part 28.

The Chief Review Officer must also ensure that the review officer who con- ducts a review under subsection (5)— (a) (b) prepares a written report on the review; and gives copies of it to the Secretary and the school’s principal (or other chief executive) and managers.
(7) A review officer’s written report on a review under this section must also in- clude— 108 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 35J (a) (b) information as to whether the school meets the criteria for registration as a private school; and information as to the areas in which improvement is required, if it does not meet the criteria.

Section 35I: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
Actions by Secretary in regard to schools registered under section 35A Heading: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
35J Secretary’s actions in regard to schools registered under section 35A (1) The Secretary may take action in regard to a school registered under section 35A if— (a) (b) (c) (d) he or she considers that the school is not meeting all or any of the cri- teria for registration as a private school; or a review conducted under section 35I indicates that the school does not, or is not likely to, meet all or any of the criteria for registration as a pri- vate school; or the managers of the school have breached or are breaching their statuto- ry duties in relation to the school under this or any other enactment; or he or she has reasonable grounds to believe that serious criminal activity is occurring in the school.
(2) If the Secretary is satisfied that any 1 or more of the grounds set out in subsec- tion (1) exist in relation to a school registered under section 35A, he or she may do any 1 or more of the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) issue the school’s managers with a notice to comply: require the managers of a school to inform parents of the students at the school that the school is not meeting the criteria for registration as a pri- vate school: impose conditions on the school’s registration: impose a requirement or requirements under any 1 or more of para- graphs (a) to (c), and suspend the school’s registration: (e) cancel the school’s registration under section 35M.
(3) Any action taken by the Secretary under subsection (2)— (a) must be proportionate to the seriousness of the school’s situation; and (b) is in addition to any fine incurred or other penalty imposed under section 35R or under any other enactment.

Section 35J: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
109 Part 3 s 35K Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 35K Suspension of registration if welfare of students may be at risk The Secretary may at any time suspend the registration of a school registered under section 35A if he or she has reasonable grounds to believe that the wel- fare of the students at the school is at risk, and— (a) (b) that it is unlikely that the risk can be managed by any practicable means other than by suspension of the registration; or that, although the risk could be managed by means other than by suspen- sion of the registration, the amount of time necessary to do so is likely, in the opinion of the Secretary, to be excessive.
Section 35K: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

35L Duration of suspension (1) Suspension under section 35J(2)(d) continues until the Secretary— (a) is satisfied that the managers of the school have complied with all re- quirements imposed by him or her under any of paragraphs (a) to (c) of section 35J(2); or (b) cancels the school’s registration under section 35M.
(2) Suspension under section 35K continues until the Secretary— (a) (b) is satisfied that the welfare of the students at the school is no longer at risk; or cancels the school’s registration under section 35M, after taking action under section 35J(2).

Section 35L: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
35M Process for cancellation of registration (1) The Secretary may cancel the registration of a school if, following an action by him or her taken under any of paragraphs (a) to (d) of section 35J(2),— (a) the school— (i) (ii) does not improve sufficiently to meet the criteria for registration under section 35A; and is not likely to do so, in the opinion of the Secretary, within a fur- ther reasonable time; or (b) the managers of the school are continuing in breach of their statutory duties in relation to the school; or (c) serious criminal activity continues to occur in the school.
(2) Before cancelling a school’s registration under subsection (1), the Secretary must— 110 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 35O (a) (b) (c) take reasonable steps to obtain and consider any relevant information, including any report by a review officer; and give written notice to the managers of the school that he or she is consid- ering cancelling the school’s registration, and give reasons; and give the managers of the school a reasonable opportunity to respond to the notice.
Section 35M: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Grants for private schools Heading: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

35N Grants for private schools (1) (2) The Minister may make grants to the managers of schools registered under sec- tion 35A out of money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose.
The Minister must determine the amount of each grant made under subsection (1).

(3) A grant may be made unconditionally, or subject to conditions determined by the Minister.

(4) The managers of a school to which a grant is made subject to conditions must take all reasonable steps to ensure that the conditions are complied with.

Section 35N: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
35O Record-keeping in relation to grants to private schools (1) The managers of a school to which a grant has been made unconditionally under section 35N must ensure that records are kept— (a) in respect of the year in which the grant was made and the year after; and (b) in a manner approved by the Minister.
(2) The records must— (a) (b) show fully and correctly all the managers’ financial transactions, assets, liabilities, and funds; and be available for inspection at all reasonable times by any employee of the Ministry approved by the Secretary for the purpose.
(3) The managers of a school to which a grant under section 35N has been made subject to conditions must ensure that all necessary records are kept— (a) in respect of the year in which the grant was made and the year after; and (b) in a manner approved by the Minister.
111 Part 3 s 35P Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (4) The records must— (a) show fully and fairly— (i) any of the managers’ financial transactions, assets, liabilities, and funds, that relate to or are or were affected by the making of the grants; and (ii) that the conditions have been complied with; and (b) be available for inspection at all reasonable times by any employee of the Ministry approved by the Secretary for the purpose.
(5) For the purposes of this section and section 35P, the financial year of a school’s managers ends— (a) (b) at the close of the day specified by the Minister for the purpose; or at the close of 30 June, if the Minister has not specified a day for the pur- pose.

Section 35O: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
35P Providing accounts to Secretary As soon as practicable after the end of each financial year during which a school’s managers are required by section 35O to keep records, they must— (a) (b) have prepared an income and expenditure account, showing all financial transactions for the year records of which are required to be kept; and have the account audited by a qualified auditor (within the meaning of section 35 of the Financial Reporting Act 2013); and (c) give the Secretary copies of the account and the audit report on it.
Section 35P: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 35P(b): amended, on 1 July 2015, by section 17 of the Financial Reporting Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 64).

Suspensions and expulsions from private schools Heading: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
35Q Suspensions and expulsions of students from private schools to be notified to Secretary (1) Immediately after a student has been suspended from attendance at, or expelled from, a school registered under section 35A, the school’s principal or head teacher must give the Secretary— (a) written notice of— (i) the student’s name and last known address; and 112 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 3 s 35R (ii) the day on which the student was suspended or expelled or, if the student was first suspended and later expelled, the days on which the student was suspended and expelled, and the length of the sus- pension; and (b) a written statement of the reasons for the student’s suspension or expul- sion.
(2) Unless the student is within a reasonable time reinstated at the school or enrol- led at some other registered school, the Secretary must (if the student is young- er than 16) and may (if the student is 16 or older)— (a) (b) (c) arrange for the student to be enrolled at some other reasonably conveni- ent registered school that the student can attend; or direct the board of a State school that is not a State integrated school to enrol the student at the school; and, in that case, the board must do so; or direct a parent of the student to have the student enrolled at a corres- pondence school.
(3) The Secretary must not give a direction under subsection (2) unless he or she has also made all reasonable attempts to consult the student, the student’s pa- rents, the board, and any other person or organisation that, in the opinion of the Secretary, may be interested in, or able to advise on or help with, the student’s education or welfare.

(4) A direction under subsection (2)(b) overrides section 11M.
(5) To the extent that there is any inconsistency between this section and a contract of enrolment at the school, this section prevails.

Section 35Q: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 35Q(2)(b): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 36(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Offences in relation to private schools Heading: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

35R Offences in relation to operation of private schools (1) A manager of a private school that is not registered under section 35A commits an offence if it operates as a school.
(2) A manager of a private school that is registered under section 35A as a school of a particular description or descriptions commits an offence if the school op- erates as a school of another description or of other descriptions.

(3) The managers of a private school that is registered under section 35A commit an offence if the school ceases to operate before the managers tell the Secretary that it will cease to operate.
113 Part 3 s 35S Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (4) A person who commits an offence under this section is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding $200 for every day or part of a day on which the offence took place.

Section 35R: inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 35R(4): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).
Powers of entry and inspection Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 37 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

35S Entry where private school suspected of being unregistered (1) A person who holds an authorisation under section 78A(2), and who has reasonable cause to believe that any premises are being used as a private school in contravention of section 35R, may apply for a warrant to enter the premises.
(2) An application for a warrant must be in writing, on oath, and be made to a Dis- trict Court Judge, Justice of the Peace, or Registrar or Deputy Registrar of any court.

(3) A warrant may be issued on an application under subsection (1) if the person issuing it is satisfied that there is reasonable cause to believe that the premises are being used as a private school in contravention of section 35R.
(4) A warrant issued under subsection (3) must contain— (a) (b) (c) (d) a reference to this section; and the full name of the person authorised; and a description of the premises concerned; and the date on which it was issued and the date on which it expires.
(5) A warrant issued under subsection (3) must authorise the person named in it, at any reasonable time within 4 weeks of the date on which it is issued, to enter and inspect the premises described in the warrant to ascertain whether those premises are being used as a private school in contravention of section 35R.
(6) A person acting under a warrant under subsection (3) must retain the warrant and must show it, along with evidence of identity, to the occupier of the prem- ises concerned— (a) on first entering the premises; and (b) whenever subsequently reasonably required to do so by that occupier.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 78B Section 35S: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 37 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
114 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 4 s 41 Part 4 Specialist Education Services Board [Repealed] Part 4: repealed, on 28 February 2002, by section 86(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

36 Interpretation [Repealed] Section 36: repealed, on 28 February 2002, by section 86(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
37 Board continued for purposes of this Part [Repealed] Section 37: repealed, on 28 February 2002, by section 86(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

38 Membership of Board [Repealed] Section 38: repealed, on 28 February 2002, by section 86(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

39 Function of Board [Repealed] Section 39: repealed, on 28 February 2002, by section 86(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
40 Board responsible to Minister [Repealed] Section 40: repealed, on 28 February 2002, by section 86(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

41 Powers of Board [Repealed] Section 41: repealed, on 28 February 2002, by section 86(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Part 5 Early Childhood Development Board [Repealed] Part 5: repealed, on 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) of the Education (Disestablishment of Early Child- hood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).
115 Part 5 s 42 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 42 Interpretation [Repealed] Section 42: repealed, on 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) of the Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

43 Board continued for purposes of this Part [Repealed] Section 43: repealed, on 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) of the Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).
44 Membership of Board [Repealed] Section 44: repealed, on 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) of the Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

45 Function of Board [Repealed] Section 45: repealed, on 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) of the Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).
46 Board responsible to Minister [Repealed] Section 46: repealed, on 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) of the Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

47 Powers of Board [Repealed] Section 47: repealed, on 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) of the Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).
Part 6 Parent Advocacy Council [Repealed] Part 6: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

48 Interpretation [Repealed] Section 48: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

49 Parent Advocacy Council [Repealed] Section 49: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).
116 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 6 s 58 50 Membership of Council [Repealed] Section 50: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

51 Criteria for appointing members [Repealed] Section 51: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).
52 Function of Council [Repealed] Section 52: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

53 Council may refuse to act in certain cases [Repealed] Section 53: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

54 Powers of Council [Repealed] Section 54: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).
55 Procedure where Council takes matter up [Repealed] Section 55: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

56 Council may decide not to proceed with matter [Repealed] Section 56: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

57 Council to give reasons [Repealed] Section 57: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).
58 Procedure where matter deserves action [Repealed] Section 58: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

117 Part 6 s 59 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 59 Power to obtain information [Repealed] Section 59: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).
Part 7 Control and management of State schools 60 Interpretation In this Part, Part 7A, and Part 8, unless the context otherwise requires,— board means a board of trustees constituted under Part 9; and (a) (b) in relation to a school, means the school’s board; and in relation to a principal, means the board of the principal’s school charter means a charter of aims, purposes, and objectives that has been ap- proved for a school under this Part; and, in relation to a school, means the school’s charter (or, where it has no charter in fact, the charter it is deemed by section 61(12) to have) community of learning means a community of learning approved by the Min- ister in accordance with section 71C half-day, in relation to a school, means a period of 2 hours or more during which the school is open for instruction Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being re- sponsible for the administration of this Part Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part parent means a parent within the meaning of section 92 school means a State school within the meaning of section 2 Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry unsupervised access to students, in relation to a school, means access to any student on the school’s premises that is not access by, or supervised by, or otherwise observed by, or able to be directed (if necessary) by, any 1 or more of the following: (a) (b) a registered teacher or holder of a limited authority to teach: an employee of the school on whom a satisfactory Police vet has been conducted within the last 3 years: (c) a parent of the student.
Section 60: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 16(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

118 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7 s 60A Section 60 assisted student: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 15(1) of the Education Amend- ment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 60 board paragraph (a): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 16(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Section 60 board staff: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 39(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 60 Chief Review Officer: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 39(1) of the Education (Up- date) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 60 community of learning: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 39(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 60 domestic student: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 39(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 60 exempt student: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 15(1) of the Education Amend- ment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 60 foreign student: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 15(1) of the Education Amend- ment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 60 half-day: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 6 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
Section 60 international student: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 39(1) of the Education (Up- date) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 60 Minister: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(3) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 60 Ministry: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(3) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
Section 60 national curriculum objective: repealed, on 1 January 1992, by section 9(2) of the Edu- cation Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 60 national education guidelines: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 39(1) of the Educa- tion (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 60 review officer: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 39(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 60 Secretary: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(3) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 60 Teachers Council: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 39(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 60 unsupervised access to students: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 16(5) of the Edu- cation Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Curriculum and performance Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 40 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
60A Curriculum statements and national performance measures (1) The Minister may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, publish (in their entirety, or by way of a general description and an indication of where the full text can be obtained) all or any of the following: (a) national education goals, which are— 119 Part 7 s 60A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (i) statements of desirable achievements by the school system, or by an element of the school system; and (ii) statements of government policy objectives for the school system: (aa) foundation curriculum policy statements, which are statements of pol- icy concerning teaching, learning, and assessment that are made for the purposes of underpinning and giving direction to— (i) the way in which curriculum and assessment responsibilities are to be managed in schools: (ii) national curriculum statements and locally developed curriculum: (b) national curriculum statements, which are statements of— (i) (ii) (iii) the areas of knowledge and understanding to be covered by stu- dents; and the skills to be developed by students; and desirable levels of knowledge, understanding, and skill, to be ach- ieved by students,— during the years of schooling: (ba) national standards, which are standards, in regard to matters such as literacy and numeracy, that are applicable to all students of a particular age or in a particular year of schooling: (c) national administration guidelines, which are guidelines relating to school administration and which may (without limitation)— (i) (ii) set out statements of desirable codes or principles of conduct or administration for specified kinds or descriptions of person or body, including guidelines for the purpose of section 61: set out requirements relating to planning and reporting includ- ing— (A) (B) (C) scope and content areas, where appropriate: the timeframe for the annual update of the school charter: broad requirements relating to schools’ consultation with parents, staff, school proprietors (in the case of
 integrated schools) and school communities, and the broad require- ments to ensure that boards take all reasonable steps to dis- cover and consider the views and concerns of Maori com- munities living in the geographical area the school serves, in the development of a school charter: (D) variations from the framework for school planning and re- porting for certain schools or classes of schools, based on school performance: (iii) communicate the Government’s policy objectives: 120 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7 s 60B (iv) set out transitional provisions for the purposes of national admin- istration guidelines.
(2) Without limiting the generality of subsection (1), a notice relating to a national curriculum statement may— (a) (b) specify different commencement dates for different provisions or differ- ent purposes, which dates may differ according to the class or designa- tion of a school, the group or year level of students attending a school, or any combination of such classes, designations, groups, or levels: specify a transitional period during which a board may elect to comply with an existing curriculum statement or the new curriculum statement, and specify a date on which a board must begin complying with the new curriculum statement.
(c) [Repealed] Section 60A: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 9(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 60A heading: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 41(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 60A(1): amended, on 25 June 1993, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

Section 60A(1)(a): replaced, on 25 October 2001, by section 12(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 60A(1)(aa): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 19(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 60A(1)(b): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 41(3) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 60A(1)(b): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 41(4) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 60A(1)(ba): inserted, on 17 December 2008, by section 8 of the Education (National Stand- ards) Amendment Act 2008 (2008 No 108).
Section 60A(1)(c): replaced, on 25 October 2001, by section 12(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 60A(1)(c)(i): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 60A(2): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 19(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 60A(2)(c): repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 41(6) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
60B Consultation about treatment of health curriculum (1) The board of every State school must, at least once in every 2 years, and after consultation with the school community, adopt a statement on the delivery of the health curriculum.
(2) In this section,— school community means,— 121 Part 7 s 61 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) (c) in the case of a State integrated school, the parents of students enrolled at the school, and the school’s proprietors: in the case of any other State school, the parents of students enrolled at the school: in every case, any other person whom the board considers is part of the school community for the purpose of this section statement on the delivery of the health curriculum means a written state- ment of how the school will implement the health education components of the relevant national curriculum statements.
(3) The purpose of the consultation required by subsection (1) is to— (a) (b) (c) inform the school community about the content of the health curriculum; and ascertain the wishes of the school community regarding the way in which the health curriculum should be implemented, given the views, beliefs, and customs of the members of that community; and determine, in broad terms, the health education needs of the students at the school.
(4) A board may adopt any method of consultation that it considers will best ach- ieve the purpose set out in subsection (3), but it may not adopt a statement on the delivery of the health curriculum until it has— (a) (b) prepared the statement in draft; and given members of the school community an adequate opportunity to comment on the draft statement; and (c) considered any comments received.

Section 60B: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 13(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 60B school community paragraph (a): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 42 of the Edu- cation (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

61 (1) (2) School charter Every board must, for each school it administers, prepare and maintain a school charter.
The purpose of a school charter is to establish the mission, aims, objectives, di- rections, and targets of the board that will give effect to the Government’s na- tional education guidelines and the board’s priorities, and provide a base against which the board’s actual performance can later be assessed.
(3) A school charter must contain the following sections: (a) a section that includes— 122 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7 s 61 (i) (ii) the aim of developing, for the school, policies and practices that reflect New Zealand’s cultural diversity and the unique position of the Maori culture; and the aim of ensuring that all reasonable steps are taken to provide instruction in tikanga Maori (Maori culture) and te reo Maori (the Maori language) for full-time students whose parents ask for it: (b) a long-term strategic planning section that— (i) (ii) (iii) establishes the board’s aims and purposes; and establishes for the next 3 to 5 years the board’s aims, objectives, directions, and priorities for intended student outcomes, the school’s performance, and use of resources; and includes any aims or objectives that designate the school’s special characteristics or its special character (within the meaning of this Act): (c) an annually updated section that— (i) (ii) establishes for the relevant year the board’s aims, directions, ob- jectives, priorities, and targets relating to intended student out- comes, the school’s performance, and use of resources; and sets targets for the key activities and achievement of objectives for the year.
(4) A school charter must include the board’s aims, objectives, directions, prior- ities, and targets in the following categories: (a) (b) (c) student achievement, including the assessment of students against any national standard published under section 60A(1)(ba): the board’s activities aimed at meeting both general government policy objectives for all schools, being policy objectives set out or referred to in national education guidelines, and specific policy objectives applying to that school: the management of the school’s and board’s capability, resources, assets, and liabilities, including its human resources, finances, property, and other ownership matters: (d) other matters of interest to the public that the Minister may determine.
(5) A school charter must— (a) contain all annual or long-term plans the board is required to have or has prepared for its own purposes; or (b) contain a summary of each plan or a reference to it.

Section 61: replaced, on 25 October 2001, by section 14 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 61(2): amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
123 Part 7 s 62 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 61(4)(a): amended, on 17 December 2008, by section 9 of the Education (National Stand- ards) Amendment Act 2008 (2008 No 108).

62 (1) Procedural requirements of preparing or updating school charter The board must provide the Secretary with a copy of its first school charter and every updated or amended school charter.

(2) A school charter must be prepared and updated annually in accordance with na- tional administration guidelines.
(3) A board must amend its school charter as soon as practicable after it becomes aware of any information contained in the charter that is false or misleading in a material particular.

Section 62: replaced, on 25 October 2001, by section 14 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 62(1): amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 62(2): amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
Section 62(3): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
63 Effect of school charter A school charter has effect as an undertaking by the board to the Minister to take all reasonable steps (not inconsistent with any enactment, or the general law of New Zealand) to ensure that— (a) (b) the school is managed, organised, conducted, and administered for the purposes set out in the school charter; and the school, and its students and community, achieve the aims and object- ives set out in the school charter.
Section 63: replaced, on 25 October 2001, by section 14 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 63(a): amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

63A When school charter or updated charter takes effect (1) When the Secretary receives a school charter or updated school charter, the Secretary must consider whether the charter has been developed or updated in accordance with the requirements of this Act and the national administration guidelines.
(2) Unless it takes effect on a different date under subsection (5), a new or updated school charter takes effect on the 25th working day after the date that the Sec- retary receives it.
(3) If, before the first or updated school charter takes effect, the Secretary deter- mines that it was not developed or updated in accordance with the Act or is in- 124 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7 s 65A consistent with the Act or the national administration guidelines, the Secretary must notify the board of the matters in the school charter to be resolved.
(4) The Secretary must then negotiate with the board to resolve the matters con- cerned and, if the board and the Secretary are unable to reach agreement about the content of the school charter or updated school charter, the Secretary may require the board to amend the charter or updated charter.
(5) If the Secretary issues a notice under subsection (3), the school charter or up- dated charter takes effect— (a) (b) on the date agreed by the Secretary and the board; or on the date the Secretary determines to be the commencement date for his or her amendments.

Section 63A: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 14 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
63B Board must make copies of school charter available Once a school charter or updated school charter takes effect, the board must make the charter available.

Section 63B: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 14 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

64 Effect of charter [Repealed] Section 64: repealed, on 25 October 2001, by section 14 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
64A Secretary may require board to get specialist support [Repealed] Section 64A: repealed, on 25 October 2001, by section 22 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

65 Staff [Repealed] Section 65: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 44 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
65A Length of school year (1) (2) The Minister may, before 1 July in any year, prescribe the number of half-days on which schools must be open during the next year; and different numbers may be prescribed for schools of different classes or descriptions.

Except as provided in this Act, every board shall ensure that each school it ad- ministers is in every year open for instruction on the number of half-days re- quired under subsection (1).
125 Part 7 s 65B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2A) If, because of a strike or lockout, a school is not open for instruction on any half-day, the school is, for the purposes of subsection (2), deemed to be open for instruction on that half-day.
(3) Where the Minister has not in fact prescribed for a school a number under sub- section (1) in respect of any year, the Minister shall be deemed to have pre- scribed in respect of the year the number prescribed (or deemed under this sub- section to have been prescribed) for the school for the year before.

Section 65A: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Section 65A(2): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 17 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 65A(2A): inserted, on 6 April 2004, by section 6 of the State Sector Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 15).
65B Terms (1) (2) The Minister may, before 1 July in any year, prescribe (by reference to specific dates, specified days, the number of half-days prescribed under section 65A, or any 2 or more of those means)— (a) (b) the terms that schools must observe during the next year; or a means for ascertaining or determining those terms.
Every board must ensure that each school it administers is open for instruction for 1 half-day that finishes at or before noon and 1 half-day that starts at or after noon on every day during the terms prescribed, ascertained, or determined under subsection (1).
(3) However, a board may vary the time at which any 1 or more half-days take place (for example, by starting a second half-day before noon) if the board— (a) (b) (c) has adequately consulted parents, staff, the local community, and any other person who the board considers may be affected, about the pro- posed variation and it is generally acceptable; and is satisfied that the adoption of the proposal will not result in the stu- dents of the school spending less time in school than other students in comparable schools and other local schools; and has taken all reasonable steps to notify students and parents in writing of the board’s final decision on the proposed variation.
(3A) A board may also vary the time at which any 1 or more half-days take place without satisfying the requirements in subsection (3)(a) if— the variation is made for operational reasons; and the variation applies for no more than 2 days; and the board has not made a variation under this subsection during the pre- vious 6 weeks.
(a) (b) (c) 126 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7 s 65C (3B) A student enrolled at a State school must comply with section 25 even if the school’s board varies the time of any 1 or more half-days.

(3C) On any day, a school is not open for instruction at all if it is open for less than 1 half-day.

(3D) To avoid doubt, if a school opens on any day for only 1 half-day, that half-day may be counted towards the number of half-days prescribed by the Minister under section 65A(1).
(4) Where the Minister has not in fact prescribed terms, or a means of ascertaining or determining them, under subsection (1) in respect of any year, the Minister shall be deemed to have prescribed in respect of the year the terms or means prescribed (or deemed under this subsection to have been prescribed) in respect of the year before.

Section 65B: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Section 65B(1): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 18 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 65B(2): replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 8 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 65B(3): replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 8 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 65B(3A): inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 8 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
Section 65B(3B): inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 8 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 65B(3C): inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 8 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 65B(3D): inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 8 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
65C Holidays (1) Subject to subsection (2), every board must ensure that every school it adminis- ters is closed on— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Saturdays, Sundays, New Year’s Day, 2 January, Waitangi Day, Good Friday, Easter Monday, Easter Tuesday, Anzac Day, the Sovereign’s birthday, Labour Day, Christmas Day, Boxing Day; and the day observed as anniversary day in the locality in which the school is situated; and if 1 January falls on a Friday, the following Monday; and if 1 January falls on a Saturday or a Sunday, the following Monday and Tuesday; and if Waitangi Day or Anzac Day falls on a Saturday or a Sunday, the fol- lowing Monday.
127 Part 7 s 65D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) (3) The Minister may at any time prescribe the circumstances in which boards may open the schools they administer or any of them on Saturdays or Sundays; and schools may be open accordingly.
The Minister may, before 1 July in any year, prescribe days during the next year (in addition to those specified in subsection (1)) on which boards may close the schools they administer, or any of them; and, subject to section 65A, schools may be closed accordingly.
(4) Where the Minister has not in fact prescribed days under subsection (1) in re- spect of any year, the Minister shall be deemed to have prescribed in respect of the year the days prescribed (or deemed under this subsection to have been pre- scribed) in respect of the year before.

(5) The Minister may at any time prescribe the circumstances in which boards may close the schools they administer or any of them; and, subject to section 65A, schools may be closed accordingly.
Section 65C: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 65C(1): replaced, on 1 January 2014, by section 8 of the Holidays (Full Recognition of Wai- tangi Day and ANZAC Day) Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 19).

65D Exceptions in particular cases The Minister may authorise a board to open any specified school it administers for fewer half-days in any year than required by section 65A(2); and schools may be closed accordingly.
The Minister may authorise a board to open and close any specified school it administers in accordance with terms and holidays (specified by the Minister) that differ from those otherwise required by this Act to be observed; and, sub- ject to any terms and conditions specified by the Minister when giving the au- thority, schools may be open and closed accordingly.
[Repealed] [Repealed] [Repealed] [Repealed] Section 65D: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 65D(3): repealed, on 29 October 2016, by section 9 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 65D(4): repealed, on 29 October 2016, by section 9 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 65D(5): repealed, on 29 October 2016, by section 9 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
Section 65D(6): repealed, on 29 October 2016, by section 9 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 128 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7 s 65F 65DA Multiple timetable arrangements (1) The Minister may authorise a board to run a multiple timetable arrangement for a specified period at a specified school if— (a) (b) the Minister is satisfied that the board has adequately consulted parents, staff, and the local community about the proposed multiple timetable ar- rangement; and the Minister considers that the proposed multiple timetable arrangement is appropriate in the circumstances.
(2) An authorisation under subsection (1) must be given either unconditionally or subject to any conditions that the Minister considers appropriate.

(3) A board must take all reasonable steps to notify every affected student and his or her parents in writing of— (a) (b) a multiple timetable arrangement authorised under subsection (1); and the time periods for each day during which the affected student’s timeta- ble will run.
(4) In this section, affected student and multiple timetable arrangement have the meanings given by section 25(8).

Section 65DA: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 15 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

65E Emergencies (1) Notwithstanding anything in this Part, a board may at any time, because of epi- demic, flood, fire, or other emergency, close a school it administers.
(2) If satisfied that the closure for instruction of any school during any period dur- ing which it was otherwise required by this Part to be open was necessary be- cause of epidemic, flood, fire, or other emergency, the Secretary may, by writ- ten notice to the board, reduce the number of half-days for which the school would otherwise be required by section 65A to be open for instruction; and the school may be open and closed for instruction accordingly.
Section 65E: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

65F Application of provisions (1) (2) The powers conferred on the Minister by sections 65A to 65E may be exer- cised in respect of all schools, schools of a particular class or description, or specified schools.

Sections 65A to 65E shall have effect as if special schools, special classes, spe- cial clinics, and special services are State schools.
Section 65F: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

129 Part 7 s 65G Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 65G Minister to act by means of instructions (1) (2) Except as provided in subsection (2), the powers of the Minister under sections 65A to 65F shall be exercised only by written instruction signed by the Minis- ter.
The Minister may delegate to the Secretary the Minister’s powers under section 65D(2); but if the Minister does so— (a) (b) the Secretary shall exercise the powers in respect of individual schools only; and the delegation shall not limit or affect the exercise of the powers by the Minister.

Section 65G: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
65H Application of Crown Entities Act 2004 [Repealed] Section 65H: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

66 Delegations [Repealed] Section 66: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

66A No delegation of power to borrow [Repealed] Section 66A: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
66B Application of new acquisition of securities, borrowing, guarantees, indemnities, and derivative transactions rules [Repealed] Section 66B: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

67 Restrictions on borrowing [Repealed] Section 67: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
67A Restrictions on giving of guarantees and indemnities [Repealed] Section 67A: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

130 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7 s 71 67B Restrictions on use of derivatives [Repealed] Section 67A: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
68 Gifts [Repealed] Section 68: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

69 Real property [Repealed] Section 69: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

70 Occupancy of property and buildings [Repealed] Section 70: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
70A Minister may declare land to be no longer needed for educational purposes [Repealed] Section 70A: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

70B Leases and licences granted by boards [Repealed] Section 70B: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
70C Other agreements to occupy school land or buildings [Repealed] Section 70C: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 45 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
71 (1) Courses, work experience, and visits outside school premises Except as provided in this section, a board may authorise any students to— (a) (b) undertake courses of education; or obtain work experience; or (c) make visits;— outside the school premises; and where the board has done so, a student shall be deemed to be attending the school while undertaking the course, obtaining the experience, or making the visit.
131 Part 7 s 71A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) (3) Except in accordance with conditions for the time being prescribed by the Min- ister in that behalf by notice in the Gazette no principal, teacher, or occupier of a workplace shall allow a student to go into, or remain in, a workplace to get work experience.
Subject to subsection (4), a student who is in a workplace (other than an under- taking within the meaning of the Factories and Commercial Premises Act 1981) to get work experience is deemed to be employed there; and every enact- ment, and collective agreement, (to the extent that it relates to the safety, health, and welfare of workers) applies to the student and the occupier of the workplace accordingly.
(4) Subsection (3) does not— (a) (b) (c) (d) entitle a student to be paid; or require a student to join or belong to a union; or entitle a student to enter or remain in a workplace; or require any person to pay any levy, fee, or charge, of any kind.

Compare: 1964 No 135 s 117A Section 71 heading: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 46 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 71(3): amended, on 2 October 2000, by section 240 of the Employment Relations Act 2000 (2000 No 24).
71A Off-site locations for schools (1) (2) (3) This section applies to the use of off-site locations by schools to provide educa- tion to 1 or more students on a long-term or full-time basis.

The Minister may, by written notice to the board of a school, approve the use of an off-site location by the school.
The Minister may issue a notice under subsection (2) only if he or she is satis- fied that the board and the owner or occupier of the off-site location have both agreed to that use and the terms of that use.

(4) Except as provided in subsection (2), a school must not— (a) (b) use an off-site location; or host an off-site location for another school.
(5) In any case, following notice of approval being given and before any use is made of the off-site location, the board must enter into a written agreement with the Secretary that sets out— (a) who is responsible for the education provided at the off-site location: (b) who is responsible for the welfare and safety of the students at that loca- tion: (c) the terms agreed on any other matter the Secretary considers relevant in the particular case.
132 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7 s 71C (6) Off-site location means any premises outside the premises of the school that is to use the off-site location for the purpose described in subsection (1).

Section 71A: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 47 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Land no longer needed for educational purposes Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 48 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
71B Minister may declare land to be no longer needed for educational purposes (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, declare any land of the Crown to be no longer needed for educational purposes.

(2) On publication of a notice under subsection (1), any land referred to in the no- tice that was, immediately before publication of the notice, held for a purpose set out in subsection (3), ceases to be held and may be disposed of as land no longer required for a public work.
(3) Subsection (2) applies to land held— (a) (b) (c) for education or educational purposes; or for, or for the purposes of, a school or other educational institution (whether or not any particular school or institution); or for any purpose related to or connected with a school or other education- al institution (whether or not any particular school or institution); or (d) for any similar purpose.

Section 71B: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 48 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Communities of learning Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 48 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

71C Community of learning approved by Minister (1) The Minister may approve a community of learning for the purpose of the community entering an agreement under section 72.
(2) A community of learning must consist of a group of 2 or more State or State integrated schools but may also include 1 or more of the following: (a) (b) (c) licensed early childhood services (as defined in section 309): certificated playgroups: tertiary education organisations (which has the same meaning as organ- isation in section 159B(1)).
(3) The Minister may approve a community of learning only if the Minister is satisfied that— 133 Part 7 s 72 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) the purpose of the group is to come together for the purpose of raising achievement for children and young people; and the membership of the group that will form the community is appropri- ate having regard to that purpose.

Section 71C: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 48 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
72 (1) (2) Secretary may enter agreement with community of learning The Secretary and the members of a community of learning approved by the Minister may enter a community of learning agreement.
The matters that a community of learning agreement may provide for include (without limitation) any or all of the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) the activities that the community of learning will undertake: the commitments of individual members of the group in carrying out the activities: any resources that may be provided to carry out the activities: any data collection requirements related to the activities: the format and content of the plans and annual reports required under sections 73 and 74.
(3) Each member is jointly and severally liable for the obligations and responsibil- ities of the community of learning set out in the agreement.

(4) A member that proposes to withdraw from a community of learning agreement must give the Secretary notice in writing of the withdrawal.
(5) The Secretary must, by notice in the Gazette, list the members of each commu- nity of learning that have entered into a community of learning agreement with the Secretary and update the list to record any changes to membership of the community.

Section 72: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 48 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
73 Community of learning that has agreement with Secretary must also prepare plan (1) A community of learning that has a community of learning agreement with the Secretary must— (a) prepare and maintain a plan to cover a period agreed to by the Secretary; and (b) provide the Secretary with a copy of the plan.

(2) The plan must have particular regard to any statement of National Education and Learning Priorities issued under section 1A.
(3) A community of learning that changes a plan provided to the Secretary must provide the Secretary with a copy of the changed plan as soon as practicable.

134 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7 s 76 Section 73: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 48 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
74 Report to Secretary by community of learning A community of learning that has a community of learning agreement with the Secretary must report annually to the Secretary regarding— (a) (b) its performance and progress in relation to the activities it has agreed to undertake; and the use of any resources provided to or by the community of learning in accordance with the agreement to carry out the activities.
Section 74: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 48 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

75 Performance review of community of learning The Chief Review Officer may review the performance of a community of learning under Part 28.

Section 75: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 48 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Powers and functions of principals Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 48 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
75A Appointment of principals (1) (2) The powers conferred on a board by section 65 include the power to appoint a principal.

Two or more boards may appoint 1 person to be the principal of 2 or more schools administered by the boards.

(3) A combined board (as defined in section 92) may appoint 1 person to be the principal of 2 or more schools administered by the board.

Section 75A: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 10 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
76 Role of principal (1) A school’s principal is the board’s chief executive in relation to the school’s control and management.

(2) Except to the extent that any enactment, or the general law of New Zealand, provides otherwise, the principal— (a) (b) shall comply with the board’s general policy directions; and subject to paragraph (a), has complete discretion to manage as the princi- pal thinks fit the school’s day-to-day administration.
Section 76 heading: replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 11 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
135 Part 7 s 77 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 77 Guidance and counselling The principal of a State school shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that— (a) (ab) students get good guidance and counselling; and students in form 1 and above are provided with appropriate career edu- cation and guidance that is designed to prepare them to join the work- force or undertake further education or training when they leave school; and (b) a student’s parents are told of matters that, in the principal’s opinion,— (i) (ii) are preventing or slowing the student’s progress through the school; or are harming the student’s relationships with teachers or other stu- dents.
Compare: 1964 No 135 s 193A Section 77(ab): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 49 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

77A Enrolment records (1) The principal of a registered school must ensure that an enrolment record in such form and containing such information as may be specified under subsec- tion (3) is kept for each student who is enrolled at the school.
(2) When a student moves from one registered school to another registered school, the principal of the first school must take reasonable steps to send the student’s enrolment record to the principal of the second school.
(3) The Secretary may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, make rules set- ting out administrative and procedural requirements relating to enrolment re- cords, including (without limitation) rules— (a) (b) (c) (d) setting out the duties of principals concerning enrolment records and the information contained in enrolment records: requiring principals to inform students and parents about enrolment re- cords and the use and distribution of enrolment records, and specifying the particulars about which students and parents are to be informed: specifying the form and content of enrolment records: specifying exceptions to particular requirements of the rules.
(4) A principal of a registered school must comply with rules for the time being in force under subsection (3).

In this section, principal, in relation to a partnership school kura hourua, means the person to whom the sponsor of the school has assigned the role of managing enrolment records.

In subsection (5), partnership school kura hourua and sponsor have the meanings given by section 2(1).
(5) (6) 136 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7 s 78A Section 77A: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 23 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 77A(5): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 17 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 77A(6): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 17 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
Regulations Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 50 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

78 (1) Regulations relating to control and management of schools Subject to the provisions of this Act and any other enactment, the Governor- General may from time to time make regulations providing for the control, management, organisation, conduct, and administration of schools.

(2) Different provision may be made for schools of different classes or descrip- tions.
(3) (4) Regulations made under this section may give powers to, or impose duties on, boards, principals, or both.

Regulations made under this section prescribing a course of study shall not re- strict the method by or manner in which any subject forming part of the course is to be taught, except to the extent necessary to ensure that the teaching of the subject is consistent with the general aims of the course.
Compare: 1964 No 135 ss 59, 76 Powers of entry and inspection Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 51 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
78A Powers of entry and inspection (1) Any person holding an authorisation under subsection (2) may, at any reason- able time,— (a) (b) (c) enter and inspect any registered school: inspect, photocopy, print out, or copy onto disk any documents (whether held in electronic or paper form) that the person believes on reasonable grounds to be those of the board, manager, or sponsor of the school: remove any document described in paragraph (b), whether in its original form or as an electronic or paper copy.
(1A) If any original documents are removed from a school under subsection (1)(c), the person who removes the documents must— (a) leave at the school a list of the documents removed; and 137 Part 7 s 78B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) return the documents, or a copy of them, to the school as soon as practic- able unless to do so would prejudice any investigation being or to be car- ried out by the Ministry.
(2) The Secretary may authorise in writing any person to exercise the powers in subsection (1).

(3) Every written authorisation under subsection (2) shall contain— (a) (b) (c) a reference to this section; and the full name of the person authorised; and a statement of the powers conferred on that person by this section.
(4) Every person exercising any power under subsection (1) shall possess the ap- propriate written authorisation, and evidence of identity, and shall produce them to the person in charge of the premises concerned (or, as the case may be, the person having possession or control of the books, records, or accounts con- cerned)— (a) on first entering the premises; and (b) whenever subsequently reasonably required to do so by the person in charge.
(5) For the purposes of this section, inspection, in relation to any school, in- cludes— (a) access to the written and recorded work of students enrolled there; and (b) meeting and talking with students enrolled there.

Section 78A: replaced, on 23 July 1990, by section 19(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 78A(1): replaced, on 19 December 1998, by section 24(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 78A(1)(b): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 12 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 78A(1A): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 24(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 78A(2): replaced, on 19 December 1998, by section 24(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 78A(4): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 24(2)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 78A(4): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 24(2)(b) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

78B Entry where private school suspected of being unregistered [Repealed] Section 78B: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 53 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
138 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7 s 78CC Police vetting of non-teaching staff Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 54 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
78C Police vetting of non-teaching and unregistered employees at schools The board of a State school, or the management of a school registered under section 35A, must obtain a Police vet of every person— (a) whom the board or the management appoints, or intends to appoint, to a position at the school; and (b) who is to work at the school during normal school hours; and (c) who is not a registered teacher or holder of a limited authority to teach.
Section 78C: replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 21 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

78CA Police vetting of contractors and their employees who work at schools (1) The board of a State school, or the management of a school registered under section 35A, must obtain a Police vet of every contractor, or the employee of a contractor, who has, or is likely to have, unsupervised access to students at the school during normal school hours.
(2) In this section, contractor means a person who, under contract (other than an employment contract), works at a school.

Section 78CA: replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 21 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

78CB Police vet must be obtained before person has unsupervised access to students (1) A Police vet required under section 78C or 78CA must be obtained before the person has, or is likely to have, unsupervised access to students at the school during normal school hours.
(2) The board of a State school, or the management of a school registered under section 35A, that is required under section 78C to obtain a Police vet of a per- son must apply for the vet no later than 2 weeks after the person begins work at the school.

Section 78CB: replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 21 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
78CC Further Police vets to be obtained under this Part every 3 years (1) The board of a State school, or the management of a school registered under section 35A, must obtain a further Police vet of every person on whom a Police vet has already been obtained under this Part by that board or management, as the case may be, and who still works at the school.
139 Part 7 s 78CD Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) A further Police vet required under subsection (1) must be obtained on or about every third anniversary of any Police vet that has been previously conducted on the person.
(3) The requirement for a further Police vet under this section does not apply to a person on whom a Police vet under section 78C or 78CA would not be required if he or she were about to be appointed to a position at the school or to work at the school at the time that the further Police vet would otherwise be required.

Section 78CC: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 21 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
78CD Procedures relating to Police vets The board of a State school, or the management of a school registered under section 35A, that applies for a Police vet of a person— (a) must ensure that strict confidentiality is observed for Police vets; and (b) must not take adverse action in relation to a person who is the subject of a Police vet until— (i) (ii) the person has validated the information contained in the vet; or the person has been given a reasonable opportunity to validate the information, but has failed to do so within a reasonable period.
Section 78CD: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 21 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Risk management schemes Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 55 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
78D School risk management scheme (1) In this section, and in sections 78E and 78F,— participating school board— (a) means the board of a State school; and (b) (c) includes a commissioner appointed in place of a board; but does not include a board of a State school or a commissioner if that party has been a participant but, with the Minister’s approval, has withdrawn from and is not for the time being a participant in a school risk manage- ment scheme school risk management scheme means the school risk management scheme for the time being having effect under this section.
(2) The Minister may, in accordance with this section, establish a school risk man- agement scheme for the purpose of indemnifying participating school boards— against accidental loss or damage to property of the board: for any other purpose authorised by regulations made under section 78F.
(a) (b) 140 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7 s 78F (3) An indemnity under the school risk management scheme must be given in a form and contain terms and conditions authorised by regulations made under this Act.

(4) A participating school board is liable to pay to the Crown the annual fee set under sections 78E.
(5) The Minister may at any time, on giving reasonable notice to all participating school boards, discontinue a school risk management scheme and direct the Secretary to wind up the scheme.

(6) Until a school risk management scheme is established under subsection (2 ), the deed signed by the Minister on 24 December 1999 entitled Ministry of Edu- cation—Risk Management Scheme for School Contents constitutes the school risk management scheme.
Section 78D: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 19 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

78E School risk management scheme fees (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) In respect of each year in which a school risk management scheme has effect, the Minister must, by notice in the Gazette, set the amount of the annual fee payable by a participating school board or the rate at which the amount is to be assessed.
The purpose of the annual fee is to recover the administration, insurance, and claims costs of the scheme.

The Secretary must deduct the fee from grants made to the board under section 79.

The Secretary must establish a separate bank account for the purposes of this section, and— (a) (b) all fees deducted under subsection (3) must be paid into the account; and the Secretary may authorise payments to be made from the account for the purposes of administering the scheme.
If the school risk management scheme is discontinued, the money held in the separate account after the scheme has been wound up must be paid into a Crown Bank Account in accordance with any directions of the Secretary to the Treasury.

Section 78E: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 19 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 78E(5): amended, on 25 January 2005, pursuant to section 65R(3) of the Public Finance Act 1989 (1989 No 44).
78F Regulations relating to school risk management scheme The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations for all or any of the following purposes: 141 Part 7 s 78G Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) providing for the form of legal instrument by which a school risk man- agement scheme may be established: defining accidental loss or damage and other terms for the purposes of the regulations and the legal instrument: setting out the scope of the indemnity that may be given by the Crown, including any exclusions: setting out the procedure for lodging claims and their determination: listing the kinds of costs that the Crown may deduct from money pay- able under the scheme to a participating school board: providing for the manner in which the parties may withdraw from the scheme: providing for the manner in which the legal instrument may be varied, replaced, or terminated.
Section 78F: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 19 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

78G Former school risk management schemes (1) The scheme referred to in section 78D(6), and all former schemes established for similar purposes by or on behalf of the Minister in 1991 or subsequent years, must be treated as if they were authorised by this section when executed.
(2) All levies collected from school boards for the purposes of a scheme to which this section applies, and payments made from those fees, must be treated as having been collected or paid under the authority of this section.

Section 78G: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 19 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Part 7A Interventions in schools Part 7A: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
78H Purpose of Part The purpose of this Part is to provide for a range of interventions that may be used to address concerns about or risks to the operation of individual schools or to the welfare or educational performance of their students.

Section 78H: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 78H: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 56 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
78I Application of interventions (1) The interventions in schools that are available are as follows: 142 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7A s 78I (a) (b) (c) (ca) (cb) (cc) (cd) (d) (e) (f) a requirement by the Secretary for information: a requirement by the Secretary for a board to engage specialist help: a requirement by the Secretary for a board to prepare and carry out an action plan: a requirement by the Secretary that the board attend a case conference to enable a particular issue or issues to be discussed and actions to be agreed: a requirement by the Secretary that the board engage an appropriately qualified person to undertake a specialist audit of any aspect of the school’s affairs: the issuing by the Secretary to the board of a performance notice requir- ing the board to carry out a specified action by a specified date: the appointment by the Minister of a trustee (who may be the presiding trustee) to the board for a specified period of time: the appointment by the Secretary, at the direction of the Minister, of a limited statutory manager: the dissolution of a board by the Minister, and the appointment of a com- missioner: the dissolution of a board by the Secretary, and the appointment of a commissioner.
(1A) The Secretary may apply any of the interventions described in subsection (1)(a) to (cc) to a school if he or she has reasonable grounds for concern about the operation of the school, or the welfare, or educational performance of its stu- dents.
(2) (3) The Minister or Secretary (as the case may be) may apply any of the interven- tions described in subsection (1)(cd) to (e) to a school if he or she has reason- able grounds to believe that there is a risk to the operation of the school, or to the welfare or educational performance of its students.
The Minister or Secretary (as the case may be) may apply any of the interven- tions described in subsection (1) to a school if either of the following requests an intervention: (a) (b) the board of the school: in the case of a State integrated school, the school’s proprietors.
(4) When applying an intervention, the Minister or Secretary (as the case may be) must apply whichever intervention he or she considers is reasonable to deal with the risk without intervening more than necessary in the affairs of the school.

(5) The application of any one intervention does not preclude the application of any other intervention, either simultaneously or at any other time.
143 Part 7A s 78J Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 78I: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 78I(1)(ca): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 57(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 78I(1)(cb): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 57(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 78I(1)(cc): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 57(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 78I(1)(cd): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 57(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 78I(1A): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 57(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 78I(2): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 57(3) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 78I(3)(b): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 57(4) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

78J Requirement to provide information (1) The Secretary may, by written notice to the board of a school, require the board to provide specified information— (a) (b) (c) as at a given time or times; or at specified intervals; or both.

(1A) The Secretary may also require, in the notice, that an analysis of the specified information be provided.
(2) [Repealed] (3) A board that receives a notice under subsection (1) must provide the Secretary with the information required and an analysis of the information (if this has been sought)— (a) by the time or times, or at the intervals, or both, as specified in the no- tice; and (b) in the form (if any) required by the Secretary.

(4) [Repealed] Section 78J: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 78J(1)(a): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 58(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 78J(1A): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 58(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 78J(2): repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 58(3) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 78J(3): replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 58(4) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
144 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7A s 78L Section 78J(4): repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 58(5) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

78K Specialist help (1) The Secretary may, by written notice to the board of a school, require the board to engage specified specialist help.

(2) A notice given under subsection (1) must identify particular persons or organ- isations, or types of persons or organisations, whom the board must engage.
(2A) The Secretary may also require, in the notice, that the board provide to him or her a report or reports (for example, a progress report and a final report) on the specialist help— (a) (b) (c) by the specified time or times; or at the specified intervals; or both.
(3) A board that receives a notice under subsection (1) must— (a) (b) (c) engage the specialist help as soon as practicable; and pay the fees and reasonable expenses of any person or organisation en- gaged to provide specialist help, unless the Secretary determines other- wise; and provide a report or reports to the Secretary at the time or times, or inter- vals, specified in the notice.
(4) [Repealed] Section 78K: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 78K(2A): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 59(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 78K(3): replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 59(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 78K(4): repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 59(3) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
78L Action plans (1) The Secretary may, by written notice to the board of a school, require the board to prepare and carry out an action plan, and every such notice must specify— (a) (b) (c) the matters that the action plan must address; and the outcomes sought; and the time within which a draft action plan must be prepared.
(2) A board that receives a notice under subsection (1) must comply with it by pre- paring a draft action plan within the time specified in the notice and presenting it to the Secretary for approval.
145 Part 7A s 78LA Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) The Secretary may negotiate with the board over the draft action plan in order to reach an agreed plan but, if after a reasonable period the board and Secretary have not reached agreement over the content of the action plan, the Secretary may give notice to the board that he or she will approve a particular version of the plan.
(4) When the Secretary has approved an action plan, the board— (a) must implement it in accordance with its terms, unless or until the Secre- tary directs otherwise; and (b) must make the plan available as if it were part of the school’s charter.

Section 78L: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

78LA Case conference (1) The Secretary may, by written notice to the board of a school, require the board to attend a case conference on a specified date.
(2) The notice must specify the issue or issues to be discussed.

(3) A board that receives a notice under subsection (1) must attend the case confer- ence.

(4) (5) The Secretary may invite any person to attend the case conference, if the Secre- tary considers that the person’s presence at the conference is desirable.
If the case conference results in the parties reaching agreement on any action or actions to address any issue or issues, the agreement— (a) must be recorded in writing; and (b) is binding on the parties.
(6) If the Secretary and the board are not able to agree on an action or actions to address any issue or issues, the Secretary may, by written notice to the board,— (a) (b) require it to take a particular action or actions; and require it to provide to him or her a report or reports (for example, a pro- gress report and a final report) on the action or actions taken— (i) (ii) as at a given time or times; or at specified intervals; or (iii) both.
(7) A board that receives a notice under subsection (6) must,— (a) (b) in relation to a requirement to take a particular action or actions, take the action or actions as soon as practicable; and if the notice includes a requirement to report to the Secretary, provide a report or reports at the time or times, or intervals, specified in the notice.

Section 78LA: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 61 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
146 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 78LB Specialist audit Education Act 1989 Part 7A s 78LC (1) The Secretary may, by written notice to the board of a school, require the board to engage an appropriately qualified person to undertake a specialist audit of any aspect of the school’s affairs.

(2) A notice given under subsection (1) must identify particular persons or organ- isations, or types of persons or organisations, whom the board must engage.
(3) The Secretary may also require, in the notice, that the board provide to him or her a report or reports (for example, a progress report and a final report) on the audit— (a) (b) (c) as at a given time or times; or at specified intervals; or both.
(4) A board that receives a notice under subsection (1) must— (a) (b) (c) undertake the audit as soon as practicable; and pay the fees and reasonable expenses of any person or organisation en- gaged to undertake the audit, unless the Secretary determines otherwise; and provide a report or reports to the Secretary at the time or times, or inter- vals, specified in the notice.

Section 78LB: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 61 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
78LC Performance notice (1) (2) The Secretary may, by written notice to the board of a school, issue a perform- ance notice requiring the board to carry out a specified action by a specified date.

The Secretary may also require, in the notice, that the board provide to him or her a report or reports (for example, a progress report and a final report) on the action taken— (a) (b) (c) as at a given time or times; or at specified intervals; or both.
(3) A board that receives a notice under subsection (1) must— (a) (b) take the action by the date specified in the notice; and provide a report or reports to the Secretary at the time or times, or inter- vals, specified in the notice.

Section 78LC: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 61 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
147 Part 7A s 78LD Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 78LD Appointment of additional trustee by Minister (1) The Minister may, by written notice to the board of a school, appoint an addi- tional trustee of the board, and the Minister may also appoint that trustee as the presiding trustee.

(2) The notice must specify a period of time for which the appointment is made.

(3) A person who is ineligible to be a trustee under section 103 may not be appoin- ted under this section.
Section 78LD: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 61 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

78LE Amendment and revocation of notices (1) The Secretary may at any time, by giving written notice to a board, amend or revoke a notice given by him or her under this Part.

(2) The amendment or revocation takes effect on the date specified in the notice.

Section 78LE: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 61 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
78M Limited statutory manager (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, direct the Secretary to appoint a limited statutory manager for the board of a school.
(2) A notice under subsection (1) must specify— (a) (b) (c) any functions, powers, and duties of the board (whether statutory or otherwise) that are to be vested in the limited statutory manager; and any matters on which the limited statutory manager may or must advise the board; and any conditions attaching to the exercise of the powers by the board or by the limited statutory manager.
(3) Upon publication of the Gazette notice, the Secretary must, by notice to the board,— (a) (b) appoint a person to be the limited statutory manager for the board; and state the date on which the appointment takes effect.

(3A) A notice under subsection (3) appointing a person to be the limited statutory manager for the board may refer to the person appointed— (a) (b) by his or her own name; and as being of a named body corporate.
(4) On and from the date on which his or her appointment takes effect,— (a) any functions, powers, or duties of the board specified in a notice under subsection (1) vest in the limited statutory manager; and 148 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7A s 78N (b) the board must take into consideration advice given by the limited statu- tory manager on any matter on which he or she is obliged to give advice; and (c) any conditions specified in the notice apply.
(5) (6) The board must pay the fees and expenses of a limited statutory manager ap- pointed for it, unless the Secretary determines otherwise.

The Minister may at any time, by notice in the Gazette, amend a notice under subsection (1), and the amendment takes effect on and from the date given in the notice.
(7) When the Minister is satisfied that the appointment of the limited statutory manager is no longer required, he or she must revoke the notice under subsec- tion (1), in which case the appointment terminates from the date of the revoca- tion.

Section 78M: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 78M(3A): inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 22 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Section 78M(5): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 62 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

78N Dissolution of board and appointment of commissioner (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, dissolve the board of a school and direct the Secretary to appoint a commissioner to replace that board.
(2) On publication of a notice under subsection (1), the Secretary must, by notice in the Gazette, appoint a commissioner for the school, and state the date on which the appointment takes effect.
(3) The Secretary may, by notice in the Gazette, dissolve the board of a school and appoint a commissioner in its place, as from a specified date, if any of the fol- lowing applies: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) the board has not held a meeting during the previous 3 months: so many casual vacancies have arisen that there is no longer any member of the board who is eligible to preside at meetings of the board: the result of an election of trustees is that the board has fewer than 3 trustees elected by parents: an election of trustees has not been held as required by this Act: it is impossible or impracticable to discover the results of an election of trustees.
(4) A notice under subsection (2) or (3) appointing a commissioner for a school may refer to the person appointed— (a) (b) by his or her own name; and as being of a named body corporate.

149 Part 7A s 78NA Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 78N: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 78N(4): inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 23 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
78NA No compensation for loss of office (1) A trustee is not entitled to any compensation or other payment or benefit relat- ing to his or her ceasing for any reason to hold office as a trustee.

(2) A board must ensure, to the extent that it is reasonably able to do so, that each of its Crown entity subsidiaries does not pay directors of the subsidiary any compensation or other payment or benefit, on any basis, for ceasing for any reason to hold office.
(3) However, subsections (4) and (5) apply to a person who is entitled, at the com- mencement of this section under any contract or arrangement, to any compen- sation or other payment or benefit relating to his or her ceasing for any reason to hold office.

(4) (5) The entitlement is not affected by the enactment of this section.

The entitlement is cancelled on the date of reappointment of the trustee or director or of the member to the committee (if any).
Section 78NA: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 78NA(2): amended, on 18 July 2013, by section 42 of the Crown Entities Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 51).

78O Commissioners (1) A commissioner appointed under section 78N has all the functions, powers, and duties of the board that he or she is appointed to replace.
(2) Anything that, if done by or on behalf of the board, must be done by affixing the board’s seal, or by the signature of 2 or more trustees, or both, may be done by the signature of the commissioner.

(3) The remuneration of the commissioner must be determined by the Secretary and paid for out of funds of the board, unless the Secretary determines other- wise.

Section 78O: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 78O(3): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 63 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

78P Commissioner sets date for election of trustees (1) In the case of a commissioner appointed under section 78N(2), when the Secre- tary is satisfied that a commissioner is no longer required for the school, the commissioner must appoint a date for the election of trustees.
150 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 7A s 78S (2) In the case of a commissioner appointed under section 78N(3), when the Secre- tary is satisfied that an election of trustees will produce a functioning board, the commissioner must appoint a date for the election of trustees.

(3) A commissioner’s appointment ends 7 days after the date that he or she has set for the election of trustees.
Section 78P: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

78Q Protection of limited statutory managers and commissioners No limited statutory manager, and no commissioner, is personally liable for any act done or omitted by him or her, or for any loss arising out of any act done or omitted by him or her, if the act or omission was in good faith and occurred in the course of carrying out his or her functions.
Section 78Q: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

78R Annual review of interventions Within 1 year of the date of a notice under any of sections 78J(1), 78K(1), 78L(1), 78LA, 78LB, 78LC, 78LD, 78M(1), or 78N(1) or (3), the Secretary must review the operation of the intervention commenced by each notice, and after that must review the operation of the intervention annually.
Section 78R: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 78R: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 64 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
78S Application of interventions to State integrated schools (1) (2) The Secretary must, if practicable, consult with the proprietors of a State inte- grated school before appointing a limited statutory manager or commissioner for the school, and must have regard to any recommendations made by the pro- prietors.
If the Secretary considers that it is not practicable to consult with the proprie- tors before making an appointment, the Secretary must consult with the pro- prietors after making the appointment and must consider whether, in light of any recommendations made by the proprietors, a different person should be ap- pointed in place of the original appointee.

Section 78S: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 78S heading: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 65(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 78S(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 65(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
151 Part 7A s 78T Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 78T Application of interventions to Kura Kaupapa Maori (1) (2) 79 (1) (2) Before applying any of the interventions in this Part to a Kura Kaupapa Maori, the Secretary must consult with te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua (as defined in sec- tion 155B).

Subsection (1) applies only to Kura Kaupapa Maori that are required by their charters to operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua.
Section 78T: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 20 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Part 8 Financial matters, assets, and property Part 8 heading: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 66 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Grants for boards or sponsors Subject to subsection (2), in each financial year, boards and sponsors must be paid, out of public money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose, such grants and supplementary grants, of such amounts, as the Minister determines.
In determining the amount of any grant, the Minister shall take no account of foreign students (other than students exempted under section 4A(1)) enrolled or likely to be enrolled at any school or institution administered by the board, or operated by the sponsor, concerned.

(3) A supplementary grant is paid subject to the condition that it will be used for the purposes set out in the grant, and a board or sponsor that receives a supple- mentary grant must use it for those purposes only.
Section 79: replaced, on 8 August 1991, by section 5(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

Section 79 heading: amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 13(1) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 79(1): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 13(2) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 79(1): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 21(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 79(2): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 13(3) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 79(3): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 13(4) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 79(3): inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 21(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

80 No transfer between grants [Repealed] Section 80: repealed, on 8 August 1991, by section 5(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).
152 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 8 s 84 81 Payment of teacher salaries from sources other than grants [Repealed] Section 81: repealed, on 8 August 1991, by section 5(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).
81A Grants for correspondence schools Notwithstanding sections 79 to 81,— (a) (b) (c) the board of a correspondence school shall in each financial year be paid, out of money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose, a single grant of an amount determined by the Minister: any part of such a grant may be used for the payment of teacher salaries: the board shall not out of money that is not part of such a grant pay any part (or all) of a teacher’s salary, or pay to the Crown any part (or all) of a teacher’s salary paid by the Crown, except— (i) (ii) with the Minister’s consent; and in accordance with any conditions subject to which the consent was given: (d) the Minister shall withhold consent under paragraph (c) unless satisfied that special circumstances applying to the school make it inappropriate for the Minister to do so.
Section 81A: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 20 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

81B Management of financial management system [Repealed] Section 81B: repealed, on 25 October 2001, by section 22 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

82 Annual financial statements [Repealed] Section 82: repealed, on 21 December 1992, by section 42 of the Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).
83 Responsibility for financial statements [Repealed] Section 83: repealed, on 21 December 1992, by section 42 of the Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).

84 Audit report on financial statements [Repealed] Section 84: repealed, on 21 December 1992, by section 42 of the Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).
153 Part 8 s 85 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 85 Financial statements to be included in annual report [Repealed] Section 85: repealed, on 21 December 1992, by section 42 of the Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).

86 Financial year [Repealed] Section 86: repealed, on 21 December 1992, by section 42 of the Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).
87 Annual reports (1) As soon as is practicable after the end of every financial year, and in any event no later than a day fixed by the Secretary, every board shall give the Secretary an annual report in accordance with this section.
(2) A report given under subsection (1) must include— (a) (b) (c) (ca) the names of all the board’s elected trustees, appointed trustees, and co- opted trustees; and the date on which each trustee goes out of office; and the auditor’s report in accordance with section 87A; and in respect of the board or, in the case of a Crown entity group, for each Crown entity in the group,— (i) (ii) (iii) the total value of the remuneration (other than compensation and other benefits referred to in subparagraph (v)) paid or payable to the trustees in their capacity as trustees from the board (or entities in the group, as the case may be), during that financial year; and the total value of the remuneration (other than compensation, and other benefits referred to in subparagraph (v)) paid or payable to the committee members in their capacity as committee members from the board (or entities in the group, as the case may be) dur- ing that financial year (except that this paragraph does not apply to trustees whose remuneration is disclosed under subparagraph (i)); and the number of employees (other than principals of the school) to whom, during the financial year, remuneration (other than com- pensation and other benefits referred to in subparagraph (v)) was paid or payable in their capacity as employees, the total value of which is or exceeds $100,000 per annum, and the number of those employees in brackets of $10,000; and (iv) a report, presented in the manner required by the Minister by no- tice in the Gazette, on the total
 remuneration (including benefits, any compensation, ex gratia payments, any other payments, and 154 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 8 s 87 any other consideration paid or payable in the school principal’s capacity as an employee) paid to a principal of the school; and (v) the total value of any compensation or other benefits paid or pay- able to persons who ceased to be trustees, committee members, or employees during the financial year in relation to that cessation and the number of
 persons to whom all or part of that total was payable; and (d) (e) the board’s annual financial statements; and a statement in which schools provide an analysis of any variance be- tween the school’s performance and the relevant aims, objectives, direc- tions, priorities, or targets set out in the school charter: (3) The annual financial statements must be prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice, audited as required by section 87A, and include all of the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) a statement of the financial position of the board as at its balance date: a statement of financial performance reflecting the revenue and expenses of the board for the financial year: if required by generally accepted accounting practice, a statement of cash flows reflecting cash flows of the board for the financial year: a statement of the commitments of the board as at the balance date: a statement of the contingent liabilities of the board as at the balance date: a statement of accounting policies: such other statements as are necessary to fairly reflect the financial oper- ations of the board for the financial year and its financial position at the end of the financial year: any other statements that the Secretary determines in consultation with the Auditor-General: in relation to each statement required by paragraphs (a) to (c) and, if ap- propriate, by paragraph (g), budgeted figures for the financial year: in relation to each statement required by paragraphs (a) to (c), paragraph (d), and paragraph (e) and, if appropriate, by paragraph (g), comparative actual figures for the previous financial year.
(3AA) The annual financial statements in the annual report must be in the form (if any) determined by the Secretary after consultation with the Auditor-General.

(3A) In addition, a board that is a parent in a Crown entity group must, to the extent required to do so by generally accepted accounting practice, prepare consoli- dated financial statements in relation to the group for that financial year.
155 Part 8 s 87 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 The annual financial statements must be accompanied by a statement of re- sponsibility that complies with section 155 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 but that is signed by the chair of the board and principal instead of 2 members.

In subsection (2), trustee and employee include a person who was a trustee or employee at any time during the applicable financial year but who is no longer a trustee or employee.
The requirements of this section and section 87A as to annual financial state- ments also apply to a Crown entity subsidiary of a board as if the subsidiary were a board and with all necessary modifications.

Subsection (2)(ca)(iv) and (v) applies in respect of each financial year that ends on or after 31 December 2004.

The rest of the amendments made to this section by Schedule 6 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 apply as provided in section 198 of that Act.
Section 87(1): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 23(1)(a) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 87(2): inserted, on 8 July 2000, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 87(2)(b): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 23(1)(b) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 87(2)(c): replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
Section 87(2)(ca): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 87(2)(d): inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 23(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 87(2)(e): inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 23(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 87(3): inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 23(3) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 87(3): amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 87(3AA): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 87(3A): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 87(4): replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
Section 87(5): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 87(6): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 87(7): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 87(8): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) 156 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 87A Audit Education Act 1989 Part 8 s 87C (1) (2) Each board must submit its annual financial statements to the Auditor-General within 90 days after the end of each financial year.

The Auditor-General must audit the financial statements and provide an audit report on them to the board.

Section 87A: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
87AB Annual report to be made available A board must ensure that its annual report is available to the public on an Inter- net site maintained by or on behalf of the board.

Section 87AB: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 69 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
87B Report on performance of schools’ sector (1) The Minister of Education must in each year, not later than 30 September, pre- pare and present to the House of Representatives a report on the performance of the schools’ sector in the immediately preceding financial year ending on 31 December.
(2) The report must include information on— (a) (b) (c) the performance of the schools’ sector in the supply of outputs: the management performance in the schools’ sector, including the quali- ty of the management systems and practices in the schools’ sector and the management of all the assets used in the schools’ sector: the effectiveness of the schools’ sector in terms of educational achieve- ment.
(3) The report— (a) must relate to all of the schools owned by the Crown; and (b) may relate to other schools.

Section 87B: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

87C Annual financial statements of boards (1) A board must provide its audited annual financial statements to the Secretary no later than 31 May in the year after the previous financial year.
(2) (3) The Minister must make available (including, without limitation, by electronic means) to a member of Parliament on request from that member of Parliament any statement provided to the Secretary under subsection (1).

The statement must be made available not later than 1 month after the request was received by the Minister.

Section 87C: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
157 Part 8 s 88 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 87C(2): replaced, on 13 June 2013, by section 18 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 87C(3): replaced, on 13 June 2013, by section 18 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

88 (1) (2) (3) Payment of travel costs and attendance fees The Minister may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, fix a scale of maximum fees and payments to be made to trustees.
Subject to subsection (3), every trustee may be paid, out of the board’s funds and in accordance with the scale, travel costs and attendance fees fixed by the board.

In determining the attendance fees paid to trustees, a board shall have regard both to loss of income and to the cost of child care.
88A Rent for teachers’ residences (1) A teacher who is provided with a teacher’s residence in respect of his or her teaching position must pay rent in accordance with a scheme prescribed by the Minister and notified in the Gazette.

(2) Until a rental scheme under subsection (1) takes effect, rents for teachers’ resi- dences must be determined in accordance with the scheme operating immedi- ately before subsection (1) comes into force.
Section 88A: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 9 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

89 (1) Payroll service The Secretary must ensure that a payroll service is established and maintained to provide for the payment of employees of boards who are employed in the education service.

(2) A board must use the payroll service unless the Secretary directs otherwise.
(3) A board required by subsection (2) to use the payroll service must— (a) keep all records that are necessary to enable the board to use the service; and (b) provide those records to the Secretary on request.

Section 89: replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 14 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

90 Application of Public Finance Act 1989 [Repealed] Section 90: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
158 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 8A s 91A 91 Transitional arrangements for payment of teacher salaries [Repealed] Section 91: repealed, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(4)(a) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

Part 8A Payment of teacher salaries, limitations on staffing, and powers of Secretary to employ teachers and create positions Part 8A: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).
Part 8A heading: amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 15 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
91A Interpretation (1) In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— application period means the period commencing on the commencement of the Education Amendment Act 1992, and ending with 31 December 2018 (as from time to time extended under section 91M(1)) board means a board of trustees constituted under Part 9; and, in relation to a school, means the school’s board employment-based trainee teacher means a person who is undertaking an ini- tial teacher education programme that includes a period of employment by a board employment-based trainee teaching position means a position established by the Secretary under section 91O(1) initial teacher education programme means a training programme recog- nised by the Education Council as suitable for people who want to teach Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being re- sponsible for the administration of this Part Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part payrolled school means a school to which section 91C applies regular teacher means a teacher who is not a relieving teacher or an employ- ment-based trainee teacher relieving teacher, at any time, means a teacher employed at that time by a board to undertake some or all of the duties of a regular teacher who, at that time, is absent from work but remains employed (on salary) by the board school means an institution that is— (a) a State school within the meaning of section 2; or 159 Part 8A s 91B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) a special institution within the meaning of section 92 Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry teacher includes the principal of a school, and any deputy or associate princi- pal (however described) of a school.
(2) [Repealed] Section 91A: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

Section 91A(1) application period: the application period is extended to 31 December 2018, on 1 November 2015, by clause 3 of the Education (Extension of Application Period) Order 2015 (LI 2015/191).

Section 91A(1) employment-based trainee teacher: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 16(1) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
Section 91A(1) employment-based trainee teaching position: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by sec- tion 16(1) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 91A(1) initial teacher education programme: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 16(1) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 91A(1) regular teacher: amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 16(2) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
Section 91A(2): repealed, on 15 July 1998, by section 2(2)(a) of the Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

91B Application Section 91C applies to every school other than— (a) (b) a school established under section 152 as a correspondence school.

[Repealed] Section 91B: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

Section 91B(b): repealed, on 8 July 2000, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
Payment of salaries Heading: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

91C Salaries of teachers at certain schools to be paid by the Crown Notwithstanding anything in Part 8, the Secretary shall cause to be paid out of public money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose the salaries (in re- spect of employment during the application period) of all regular teachers em- ployed at payrolled schools.
Section 91C: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

Section 91C: amended, on 15 July 1998, by section 2(2)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

160 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 8A s 91G 91D Agreements to move from central payment of teacher salaries [Repealed] Section 91D: repealed, on 8 July 2000, by section 8 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
91E Payment of salaries of certain teachers out of grants [Repealed] Section 91E: repealed, on 15 July 1998, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).
91F Restrictions on payment of salaries of regular teachers by boards of payrolled schools No board shall pay all or any part of the salary of a regular teacher in respect of employment during the application period at a payrolled school it administers unless— (a) (b) [Repealed] the Minister has consented to the payment, and the board complies with any conditions subject to which the consent was given.
Section 91F: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

Section 91F(a): repealed, on 15 July 1998, by section 2(2)(c) of the Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

91G Payment of salaries of relieving teachers and employment-based trainee teachers (1) (2) (3) Except as provided in subsection (3), boards shall pay the salaries of relieving teachers and employment-based trainee teachers employed at schools they ad- minister.
The Governor-General may from time to time, by Order in Council, declare any circumstances to be circumstances in which the employment of a relieving teacher or an employment-based trainee teacher justifies the central payment of the teacher’s salary, either— (a) (b) immediately; or after employment for an initial period (specified in the order) of con- secutive school days on which the school at which the teacher is em- ployed is open for instruction.
The Secretary shall cause the salary of a relieving teacher or an employment- based trainee teacher to be paid out of public money appropriated by Parlia- ment for the purpose if (and only if), by virtue of an order under subsection (2), the employment to which the payment relates justifies the central payment of the salary.

Section 91G: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).
161 Part 8A s 91H Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 91G heading: replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 17(1) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 91G(1): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 17(2) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 91G(2): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 17(3) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
Section 91G(3): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 17(4) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Limitations on staffing Heading: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).
91H Limitations on appointment and employment of regular teachers at payrolled schools (1) For the purpose of limiting the financial liability of the Crown arising out of its obligation under section 91C to pay the salaries of all regular teachers em- ployed at payrolled schools, the Governor-General shall in every year, by Order in Council, prescribe limitations on the number of regular teachers who may be employed at payrolled schools during the next year.
(2) An order under subsection (1) may do any 1 or more of the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) apply different limitations to different types of school, or to particular schools: impose limitations on the numbers of particular types of teachers who may be employed: set out 1 or more mechanisms by which the applicable limitations are calculated: specify circumstances in which the Secretary may exempt any school or type of school from a limitation, and any conditions applying to such an exemption.
Section 91H: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

Section 91H(1): amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 9(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 91H(2): replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 9(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
91I Secretary may grant exemptions in individual cases The Secretary may, in the circumstances and in accordance with any conditions specified in an order under section 91H(1), by written notice to a board— (a) exempt the board, to any extent specified in the notice, from any limita- tion prescribed by the order in relation to a school the board administers; or (b) amend or revoke any notice under this section;— 162 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 8A s 91M and the board may appoint and employ teachers at the school accordingly.
Section 91I: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

Section 91I: amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
91J Boards to comply with limitations Subject to section 91I, the board of a school in relation to which a limitation is prescribed by an order under section 91H(1) shall ensure that the appointment and employment of teachers at the school is at all times during the application period in accordance with the limitation.

Section 91J: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).
91K Reduction in grants where limitations not complied with In determining for the purposes of section 79 the amount of any grant payable to a board in respect of a school, the Minister— (a) shall have regard to the extent to which the Secretary has (by virtue of this Part) caused to be paid to teachers employed at the school salaries greater in total than the salaries that would have been payable if the board had complied with sections 91G(1), 91J, and 91L(1); and (b) may, after consulting the board, determine for the grant an amount that is (to that extent or some lesser extent) less than it would otherwise have been.
Section 91K: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

91L Staffing levels for 1992 (1) (2) Subject to subsection (2), the board of a payrolled school shall ensure that at all times before 1 January 1993 there are not employed at the school more regular teachers of any grade than the number of regular teachers of that grade em- ployed there at the close of 18 November 1992.
The Secretary may, by written notice to a payrolled school’s board, authorise an increase in the number of regular teachers of any grade to be employed at the school in 1992; and teachers may be employed at the school accordingly.

Section 91L: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

Application period may be extended Heading: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).
91M Application period may be extended (1) Subject to subsection (2), the Governor-General may from time to time, by Order in Council, extend the application period to a day specified in the order.

163 Part 8A s 91N Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) No order shall be made under subsection (1) after the application period (as from time to time extended) has expired.

Section 91M: inserted, on 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).
Powers of Secretary to employ teachers and create positions Heading: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 18 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

91N Power of Secretary to employ teachers (1) (2) (3) The Secretary may, in his or her discretion, employ any person to work in a school as a teacher.

In applying any Order in Council under this Part limiting the number of teach- ers who may be employed at a school, teachers employed under this section are not to be counted.
The provisions of Parts 10 and 10A apply in relation to persons employed as teachers under this section as if the Secretary were a school board and with any other necessary modifications.

Section 91N: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 24 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
91O Employment-based trainee teaching positions (1) On receipt of a request from the board of a school, the Secretary may, by writ- ten notice to the board, establish an employment-based trainee teaching pos- ition for the school.

(2) Despite any provision to the contrary in this Act or in the State Sector Act 1988, the board of a school for which an employment-based trainee teaching position has been established may appoint only an employment-based trainee teacher to the position.
Section 91O: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 19 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
Part 9 School boards Interpretation In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— adult student means a student who has turned 20 board means a board of trustees constituted under this Part; and,— (a) in relation to a school or institution, means the board of the school or in- stitution; and (b) in relation to a trustee, means the board of which the trustee is a member 92 (1) 164 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 92 board staff, in relation to a board on any day, means the people who, on the day, are not students enrolled full-time at a school or institution administered by the board, and who— (a) on the day have taken up a permanent appointment to a position in the employment of the board, or a position (at a school or institution admin- istered by the board) in the employment of a body established under this Act or the Education Act 1964, or of the Secretary; or (b) during the period of 2 months ending with that day, have been continu- ously employed in 1 or more such positions casual vacancy means a vacancy in the membership of a board arising under section 104 combined board means a board that administers more than 1 school or institu- tion commissioner means a person for the time being appointed under this Act or the School Trustees Act 1989 to act in place of a board; and, in relation to a board, means a commissioner appointed to act in its place composite school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) correspondence school has the same meaning as in section 145(1)
 election year means a year divisible by 3 household does not include hostel immediate caregiver, subject to subsection (3),— (a) (b) (c) in relation to a student who usually lives in a household that includes the student’s father or mother but not both, but also includes the spouse or partner of the father or mother, means the spouse or partner; and in relation to a student who usually lives in a household that includes the student’s father or mother and no spouse or partner of the father or moth- er, but also
 includes a person who has turned 20 and has a day-to-day responsibility for the student clearly greater than that of any other per- son, means that person; and in relation to a student who usually lives in a household that does not in- clude the student’s father or the student’s mother, means any member of the household who has turned 20 and has a day-to-day responsibility for the student clearly greater than that of any other person institution,— (a) (b) (c) in relation to a lone board that administers a special institution, means that institution; and in relation to a combined board that administers special institutions, means those institutions or any of them; and in relation to a trustee of a lone board that administers a special institu- tion, means that institution; and 165 Part 9 s 92 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (d) in relation to a trustee of a combined board that administers special insti- tutions, means those institutions or any of them integrated has the same meaning as in section 2(1) intermediate school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) lone board means a board that administers only 1 school or institution Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being re- sponsible for the administration of this Part Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part parent, in relation to any person, means a person who is the person’s father, mother, guardian, or immediate caregiver partner, in the phrase “spouse or partner” and in related contexts, means civil union partner or de facto partner primary school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) principal, in relation to a school or institution, means the principal or other chief executive of the school or institution; and except in section 94(1)(c) in- cludes an acting principal
 Review Office means the Education Review Office secondary school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry special institution means an institution that is— (a) (b) (c) for the time being specified in Schedule 5; or a correspondence school; or an institution (other than an institution that is part of a school) situated in a health camp, an institution under the control of the chief executive of the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Oranga Tamariki Act 1989, or a hospital care institution within the meaning of section 58(4) of the Health and Disability Services (Safety) Act 2001) State school means an institution that is a primary school, a composite school, or a secondary school; and,— (a) (b) (c) in relation to a lone board that administers a school, means that school; and in relation to a combined board that administers schools, means those schools or any of them; and in relation to a trustee of a lone board that administers a school, means that school; and 166 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 92 (d) in relation to a trustee of a combined board that administers schools, means those schools or any of them trustee means a member of a board; and, in relation to a board, a school, or an institution, means a member of the board, or the board of the school or institu- tion.
(2) [Repealed] (3) Notwithstanding subsection (1), for the purposes of this Part, a student who— (a) (b) (c) usually lives in a household that includes the student’s father and moth- er; or usually spends approximately equal time in 2 or more households; or does not usually live in a household,— has no immediate caregiver.
(4) The Governor-General may from time to time, by Order in Council, amend Schedule 5 by— (a) (b) (c) adding the name of an institution to it; or omitting the name of an institution from it; or substituting for the name of an institution any different name.

Compare: 1989 No 3 s 2 Section 92(1) board: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 24(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Section 92(1) composite school: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 92(1) correspondence school: replaced, on 1 January 1990, by section 15(3) of the Educa- tion Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 92(1) immediate caregiver paragraph (a): amended, on 26 April 2005, by section 7 of the Relationships (Statutory References) Act 2005 (2005 No 3).
Section 92(1) immediate caregiver paragraph (b): amended, on 26 April 2005, by section 7 of the Relationships (Statutory References) Act 2005 (2005 No 3).

Section 92(1) integrated: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 72(5) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 92(1) intermediate school: replaced, on 1 January 1990, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).
Section 92(1) Minister: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(4) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 92(1) Ministry: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(4) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 92(1) partner: inserted, on 26 April 2005, by section 7 of the Relationships (Statutory Refer- ences) Act 2005 (2005 No 3).
Section 92(1) primary school: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 92(1) principal: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 24(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

167 Part 9 s 93 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 92(1) secondary school: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).
Section 92(1) Secretary: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(4) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 92(1) special institution paragraph (c): amended, on 14 July 2017, by section 149 of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families (Oranga Tamariki) Legislation Act 2017 (2017 No 31).

Section 92(1) special institution paragraph (c): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 24(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Section 92(1) special institution paragraph (c): amended, on 1 October 2002, by section 58(1) of the Health and Disability Services (Safety) Act 2001 (2001 No 93).

Section 92(1) special institution paragraph (c): amended, on 1 October 1999, by section 13 of the Department of Child, Youth and Family Services Act 1999 (1999 No 82).

Section 92(1) spouse: repealed, on 26 April 2005, by section 7 of the Relationships (Statutory Refer- ences) Act 2005 (2005 No 3).
Section 92(1) State school: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 24(4) of the Education Amend- ment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 92(2): repealed, on 1 January 1990, by section 15(5)(g) of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Requirement for board of trustees Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 73 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
93 (1) State schools and special institutions to have boards of trustees Except as provided in this Act, there shall be 1 board of trustees for every State school.

(2) Whether or not it is a State school, every special institution shall have 1 board of trustees.

(3) Notwithstanding subsections (1) and (2), a school or institution does not have to have a board of trustees while a commissioner holds office to act in place of its board of trustees.
(4) Every board of trustees constituted under the School Trustees Act 1989 shall be deemed to have been constituted under this Act too.

Compare: 1989 No 3 s 4 Section 93 heading: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 74 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Constitution of boards Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 75 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Constitution of boards of State schools Subject to sections 94A, 94B, 95(1), and 100, the board of a State school shall comprise— (a) no more than 7 and no fewer than 3 parent representatives; and 94 (1) 168 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 94A (b) (c) the principal of the school or, in the case of a combined board, the prin- cipal or principals of the schools administered by the board; and except where the principal is the only member of the school staff, 1 staff representative; and (d) a number (determined by the board) of trustees either— (i) (ii) co-opted by the board; or appointed by bodies corporate approved by the board for the pur- pose; and (e) (f) in the case of a board that administers any State integrated school, not more than 4 trustees appointed by the school’s proprietors; and in the case of a board that administers a school where students are enrol- led full-time in classes above form 3, 1 student representative.
(2) Notwithstanding subsection (1), but subject to section 95(1), except to the ex- tent that a board has decided otherwise, it shall have— (a) 6 parent representatives, in the case of a board that administers more than 2 schools; and (b) 5 parent representatives, in every other case.

Section 94: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 13 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
Section 94(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 76(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 94(1)(b): replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 11 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 94(1)(b): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 20 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 94(1)(e): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 76(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
94A Proprietors of State integrated schools may vary number of trustees they appoint (1) Notwithstanding section 94(1), except as provided in this section, a board that administers any State integrated school must have 4 trustees appointed by the school’s proprietors.

(2) The proprietors of a State integrated school may, by written notice to the board, consent to a reduction in the number of trustees the proprietors are entitled to appoint to the board.
(3) Every notice under subsection (2) shall either— (a) specify that it is to take effect on the occurrence of the earlier of the fol- lowing events: (i) the going out of office under section 102(8) of trustees of the board: 169 Part 9 s 94B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ii) the appointment under section 78N(2) of a commissioner to act in the board’s place; or (b) specify a day on which it is to take effect, and contain the dismissal (with effect on that day) of enough trustees appointed by the proprietors to give effect to the reduction consented to.
(4) The proprietors of a State integrated school may, by written notice to the board, require an increase (to no more than 4) in the number of trustees the proprietors are entitled to appoint to the board.

(5) A notice under subsection (4) shall take effect on the occurrence of the earlier of the following events: (a) (b) the going out of office under section 102(8) of trustees of the board: the appointment under section 78N(2) of a commissioner to act in the board’s place.
Section 94A: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 13 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 94A heading: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 77(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 94A(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 77(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 94A(2): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 77(3) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 94A(2): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 26(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 94A(3)(a)(ii): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 94A(4): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 77(4) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 94A(4): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 26(b) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 94A(5)(b): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
94B Boards may alter their own constitutions (1) A board may from time to time, in accordance with this section, decide— (a) (b) (c) (d) to increase to no more than 7 the number of trustees who are parent rep- resentatives: to decrease to no fewer than 3 the number of trustees who are parent rep- resentatives: to approve a body corporate for the purpose of appointing a specified number of trustees to the board: to modify an approval under paragraph (c) by increasing the number of trustees a body corporate may appoint to the board: 170 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 94B (e) (f) (g) (h) in its absolute discretion, and without giving reasons, to modify an ap- proval under paragraph (c) by reducing the number of trustees a body corporate may appoint to the board: in its absolute discretion, and without giving reasons, to withdraw an ap- proval under paragraph (c).
[Repealed] [Repealed] (2) (3) Every decision under subsection (1) shall be made by the board by resolution passed at a meeting of the board open to all parents of students enrolled at the school or schools administered by the board.
Before making a decision under subsection (1), a board shall take reasonable steps to ensure that the parents of students enrolled at the school or schools ad- ministered by the board have reasonable notice of— (a) (b) (c) the time, day, and place of the meeting of the board at which the decision is to be made; and the nature of the decision; and the fact that they have a right to attend the meeting.
(4) Where a board decides to decrease the number of trustees who are parent repre- sentatives,— (a) (b) no parent representative shall go out of office; but no casual vacancy for a parent representative shall be filled unless the occurrence of the vacancy has reduced the number of parent representa- tives on the board to fewer than the decreased number decided by the board.
(5) Where a board decides to decrease the number of trustees who are parent repre- sentatives to a number that is not more than the total number of— (a) (b) co-opted trustees for the time being holding office; and trustees capable of being appointed pursuant to approvals under subsec- tion (1)(c),— all co-opted trustees shall then go out of office as if they had resigned.
(6) If, when any co-opted trustees have gone out of office under subsection (5) the number of trustees on the board concerned who are parent representatives is not more than the number of trustees capable of being appointed pursuant to approvals under subsection (1)(c),— (a) the approvals under subsection (1)(c) of the organisations by whom they may be appointed shall, starting with the most recent and continuing suc- cessively to the least recent, be deemed to have been withdrawn; and 171 Part 9 s 94C Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) all trustees appointed by an organisation whose approval has been deemed to have been withdrawn shall then go out of office as if they had resigned,— until the number of trustees who are parent representatives is more than the number of trustees capable of being appointed pursuant to approvals under sub- section (1)(c).
(7) (8) [Repealed] Every vacancy on a board caused by a decision to increase the number of mem- bers who are parent representatives shall be filled by election under section 105 as if it is a casual vacancy; but is not capable of being filled by selection.

(9) A board that makes a decision under subsection (1) shall ensure that, as soon as is practicable after making it, the Secretary is given written notice of the nature of the decision and the day on which it was made.
Section 94B: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 13 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 94B(1)(g): repealed, on 8 July 2000, by section 12(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 94B(1)(h): repealed, on 8 July 2000, by section 12(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 94B(7): repealed, on 8 July 2000, by section 12(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
Section 94B(8): amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 15(5) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 94B(8): amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 12(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

94C Limitations on co-option and appointment of trustees [Repealed] Section 94C: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 78 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
95 (1) Composition of boards of special institutions The composition of the board of a special institution shall be determined by the Minister by notice in the Gazette.

(2) A notice under subsection (1)— (a) may apply to a specified institution or institutions, or to institutions of a specified class or description: (b) subject to subsection (3), may revoke or amend any other such notice.

(3) No trustee shall go out of office by reason only of the amendment or revocation of a notice under subsection (1).
(4) One board may administer a number of special institutions.

Compare: 1989 No 3 s 6 172 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 96 Section 95 heading: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 79 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
96 (1) Parent representatives The parent representatives on the lone board of an intermediate school shall be elected by people who are— (a) parents of students (other than adult students)— (i) (ii) enrolled full-time at the school when the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplementary roll) closes; or likely to be enrolled full-time at the school in the year after the year the election is held; or (b) adult students (other than adult students who are also parents of students so enrolled) enrolled full-time at the school when the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplementary roll) closes.
(2) The parent representatives on the lone board of any other State school shall be elected by people who are— (a) (b) parents of students (other than adult students) enrolled full-time at the school when the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplementary roll) closes; or adult students (other than adult students who are also parents of students so enrolled) enrolled full-time at the school when the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplementary roll) closes.
(3) The parent representatives on the combined board of 2 or more State schools shall be elected by people who are— (a) (b) (c) parents of students (other than adult students) enrolled full-time at a school that the board administers when the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplementary roll) closes; or parents of students (other than adult students) likely to be enrolled full- time at an intermediate school that the board administers in the year after the year the election is held; or adult students (other than adult students who are also parents of students so enrolled) enrolled full-time at a school administered by the board when the roll for the election closes.
Compare: 1989 No 3 s 5(2), (3) Section 96(1): amended, on 1 January 1992, by section 14(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 96(1): amended, on 1 January 1992, by section 14(b) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 96(2): amended, on 1 January 1992, by section 14(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
173 Part 9 s 97 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 96(2): amended, on 1 January 1992, by section 14(b) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 96(3): amended, on 1 January 1992, by section 14(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 96(3): amended, on 1 January 1992, by section 14(b) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
97 Staff and student representatives (1) A staff representative on a board shall be a person (other than the principal) who, on the day on which the roll for the election (or, where there is a supple- mentary roll, the supplementary roll) closes, is a member of the board staff, elected by people (other than principals) who are members of the board staff on that day.
(2) A student representative on a board shall be a person who, on the day on which the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplemen- tary roll) closes, is a student (other than an adult student) enrolled full-time in a class in form 3 or above at a school or institution administered by the board, elected by students (other than adult students) enrolled full-time in a class in form 3 or above at a school or institution administered by the board.
Compare: 1989 No 3 s 5(4), (6) Section 97(2): amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 13 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
98 Boards of newly established schools (1) Despite section 94, the trustees of the board of a newly established State school are,— (a) at the option of the Minister,— (i) (ii) 5 people appointed by the Minister; or 5 people elected by the parents of students (other than adult stu- dents) likely to be enrolled at the school in the year it opens or the next year; and (b) (c) the principal or principal designate (if any); and not more than 4 people co-opted by the board.
(2) Subsection (1) continues to apply to the membership of the board until the trustees go out of office under subsection (3).
(3) A trustee appointed, elected, or co-opted under subsection (1) goes out of office— (a) (b) at the close of the day before the date on which the trustees who have been elected under section 101 take office under section 102; or at the close of the day before the date on which the trustees who have been elected, appointed, or co-opted in accordance with a notice issued under section 98A take office.
174 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 98A (4) Subject to section 103, any trustee appointed, elected, or co-opted under sub- section (1) is eligible to be appointed, elected, or co-opted as a trustee.

Section 98: replaced, on 13 June 2013, by section 19 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 98(3)(b): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 80 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
98A Minister may approve alternative constitution in certain cases (1) (2) (3) The Minister may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, approve an alter- native constitution under this section for the board of a State school, or a com- bined board of State schools.

The Minister may not approve an alternative constitution for a board unless the Minister has reasonable cause to believe that an alternative constitution is in the best interests of the school or schools governed by the board.
Subject to subsections (2) and (4), the Minister may not approve an alternative constitution unless— (a) 1 of the following applies: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) the Chief Review Officer (as defined in section 2(1)), in a written report, recommends that the Minister consider devising an alterna- tive constitution; or 20% or more of the parents of children enrolled at the school or schools have requested an alternative constitution; or the board (or if a board has been replaced by a commissioner, that commissioner) has requested an alternative constitution; or the Minister has required the board to have an alternative constitu- tion under section 110(1D) or 110A(3); and (b) the Minister has consulted such persons or organisations as the Minister considers appropriate.
(4) Subsection (3) does not apply if— (a) (b) (c) the alternative constitution is the successor constitution for a board that was appointed or elected under section 98(1); or the alternative constitution is approved for a combined board before the date specified in a notice under section 110(1); or the alternative constitution is for the board of a continuing school and the Minister has given notice under section 156A(4)(b).
(5) In the case of a State integrated school, the Minister must consult the proprietor of the school when conducting the consultation required under subsection (3)(b).

(6) A constitution approved under this section applies instead of a constitution under section 94.

175 Part 9 s 98B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 98A: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 81 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
98B Consequences of approval of alternative constitution (1) If an alternative constitution is approved under section 98A(1), the notice made under that section must establish a board comprising 1 or more persons who are to be elected or appointed as trustees in the manner specified in the notice, and the notice may (without limitation)— (a) (b) (c) (d) set out a procedure for any election, appointment, or co-option of trustees: set out the manner in which vacancies are to be filled: provide for the appointment of returning officers and set out their func- tions: set out other formal and procedural provisions for the purposes of any election, appointment, or co-option of trustees.
(2) While a notice under section 98A(1) that approves an alternative constitution is in force, sections 94, 94A, 94B, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 101, 102, 104, and 105 do not apply in respect of the board concerned and the schools governed by it.
(3) In their application to a board that has an alternative constitution under section 98A, the other sections and any schedules of this Act relating to boards must be read subject to (and subject also to all modifications necessary to give effect to) section 98A and to this section.

Section 98B: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 81 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
98C Actions of boards not to be questioned for informality in membership The powers of a board are not affected by— (a) (b) (c) (d) any vacancy in its membership; or the discovery of any error or defect in the election, appointment, or co- option of any trustee; or the fact that any elected, appointed, or co-opted trustee acted as a trustee while he or she was a person who may not (under section 103(1)) be- come an elected, appointed, or co-opted trustee; or the fact that a person continued acting as a trustee after the person’s office as a trustee became vacant or (in the case of a person whose elec- tion as a trustee has been declared invalid under section 101D or by a court) before the person’s election was declared invalid.
Section 98C: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 81 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

176 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 100 Co-opted and appointed trustees Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 81 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
99 (1) Criteria for selecting co-opted and appointed trustees It is desirable, so far as is reasonably practicable,— (a) that every board should reflect— (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) the ethnic and socio-economic diversity of the student body of the school or institution; and the fact that approximately half the population of New Zealand is male and half female; and the character of the school or schools, or institution, it adminis- ters; and the character of the community (whether geographical or other- wise) served by the school or schools, or institution, it adminis- ters; and (b) that every board should have available from within its membership ex- pertise and experience in management.
(2) A board or person, when co-opting or appointing trustees, shall have regard to subsection (1).

Compare: 1989 No 3 s 9 Section 99(1): replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 15 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
100 Limitations on co-option and appointment of trustees (1) A board must not co-opt a trustee if the effect of the co-option would be that the total number of trustees co-opted by the board or appointed was equal to or greater than the total number of parent representatives.
(2) A board must not exercise its powers under section 94B(1)(c) or (d) if doing so could result in the board having a number of parent representatives that was not greater than the total number of trustees co-opted by the board or appointed.

(3) No more than 1 non-permanently appointed member of the board staff may be co-opted to the board at any one time.

Section 100: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 82 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
177 Part 9 s 101 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Elections of trustees Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 82 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

101 Elections of trustees (1) (2) (3) Before 1 September in every year, the board of a State school or of a special institution, that is required to have a student representative, must fix a day in September in that year for the holding of an election for a student representa- tive.
The board of a school or institution to which subsection (1) applies must hold an election of any student representative on the day fixed for that purpose under subsection (1).

Subject to subsection (5), in every election year a board shall hold 1 or more elections of other elected trustees.
(4) Elections under subsection (3) must be held,— (a) in the case of a school that is not a correspondence school,— (i) (ii) on a date fixed by the board that is within the range of dates for those elections in that election year that is specified by the Minis- ter by notice in the Gazette; or if the Minister has not, by notice in the Gazette published on or by 31 October in any year, specified a range of dates for those elec- tions in that election year, on a date fixed by the board that is within the range of dates for those elections in the previous elec- tion year; and (b) in the case of a correspondence school, on the second Tuesday in July, unless the board, before 1 April in that year, fixes an earlier date for the election (being a date after 1 April).
(4A) The notice referred to in subsection (4)(a) may specify different ranges of dates, for elections under subsection (3), for boards that have, and for schools that have not, adopted staggered election cycles under section 101A.
(5) If— (a) the first elections of trustees for the board of a school established or inte- grated after the commencement of this section; or (b) elections under section 78P— are held after 30 April in the year before an election year and before 31 De- cember in the election year, the board shall not hold an election (or, as the case requires, another election) under subsection (3) in the election year.
(6) Notwithstanding anything in sections 94 to 98, where there are to be held (pur- suant to subsection (3) or section 78P, or in respect of a newly established or integrated school or institution) both— 178 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 101 (a) (b) an election of 1 or more parent representatives on a board; and an election of 1 or more staff representatives on the board,— no person may both stand or vote in one of the elections and stand or vote in the other.
Subject to subsections (8) and (8A), the first elections for and first meetings of boards of schools and institutions established or integrated after the commence- ment of this Act shall be held on days fixed by the Minister by notice in the Gazette.

The days fixed by the Minister under subsection (7) for the first elections for and first meeting of the board of a school integrated after the commencement of this Act shall be days before the day on which the integration of the school takes effect.
If the Minister approves an alternative constitution for a newly established school under section 98A, subsection (7) does not apply and the first elections (if any) for, and the first meeting of, the board of such a school must be held in accordance with a notice under section 98A.
The first elections (if any) for and first meeting of the board of a special institu- tion (being a special institution that was established before the commencement of this section but that had not had a first election or meeting before that com- mencement) shall be held on a day or days specified by the Minister by notice in the Gazette.
(7) (8) (8A) (9) (10) This section is subject to section 101A (which provides for the election of some parent representatives at the mid-point of an election cycle under this sec- tion), and to section 101AB (which provides that elections are not to be held when a school is under notice of closure).

Compare: 1989 No 3 s 11 Section 101(1): replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 14(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
Section 101(2): replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 14(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 101(4): replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 12 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 101(4)(a): replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 26(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 101(4A): inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 26(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Section 101(5): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 83(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 101(5)(b): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 101(6): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 101(7): amended, on 13 June 2013, by section 20(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
179 Part 9 s 101A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 101(8A): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 20(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 101(8A): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 83(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 101(10): inserted, on 8 July 2000, by section 14(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
Section 101(10): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 26(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

101A Staggered elections for parent representatives (1) This section and section 101B apply to the election of trustees who are parent representatives.
(2) A board may decide, in accordance with this section, to adopt a staggered elec- tion cycle in which half the number of its parent representatives are elected at an election held at a mid-term election, and the remainder are elected at an election held in an election year.
(3) For the purposes of subsection (2), if there is an odd number of parent repre- sentatives on the board, half the number of its parent representatives means the highest whole number less than half the total number of parent representa- tives.
(4) A board that has decided to adopt a staggered election cycle must— (a) (b) hold a mid-term election in the month that is 18 months after the month in which the election in the preceding election year was held; and conduct every mid-term election in accordance with the provisions of this Part and any regulations under this Act relating to the election of trustees (modified as necessary to give effect to this section and section 101B).
If the board’s decision under subsection (2) is made at a time when the next election due to be held is in an election year, the board must ensure that at that election the nomination forms and voting papers indicate which nominees are standing for 18 months and which are standing for 3 years.
If the board’s decision under subsection (2) is made within 18 months after an election in an election year, the board must decide which of its parent represen- tatives will stand down at the mid-term election; and that decision must be by consensus of the parent representatives or, if consensus cannot be reached, by ballot of all the parent representatives.
Every parent representative who, in accordance with subsection (6), is to stand down at a mid-term election, goes out of office at the close of the day before the day on which the successor takes office following the election.

(5) (6) (7) (8) A board that has a staggered election cycle may decide to revert to holding elections only in election years.

In that case, at the next election held in an election year, all the parent representatives go out of office in accordance with section 102(8).
180 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 101C Section 101A: inserted, on 8 July 2000, by section 15 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
101AB Election not to be held when school under notice of closure Nothing in this Act requires or permits the board of any school or special insti- tution to hold an election for a student representative or other elected trustee if the date for the election calculated in accordance with section 101 or 101A (as the case may be) is after the date of any notice in the Gazette that, in accord- ance with section 154(2), specifies a day for the school’s closure.
Section 101AB: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 27 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

101B Consultation requirements for staggered elections of parent representatives (1) (2) Every decision under section 101A(2) must be made by the board by resolution passed at a meeting of the board open to all parents of students enrolled at the school or schools administered by the board.
Before making a decision under section 101A(2), a board must take reasonable steps to ensure that the parents of students enrolled at the school or schools ad- ministered by the board have reasonable notice of— (a) (b) (c) the time, day, and place of the meeting of the board at which the decision is to be made; and the nature of the decision; and the fact that they have a right to attend the meeting.

Section 101B: inserted, on 8 July 2000, by section 15 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
101C Provisions relating to board with staggered election cycle where commissioner appointed (1) This section applies if a commissioner has been appointed in place of a board that has, or has decided to have, a staggered election cycle, and the commis- sioner has appointed a date under section 78P for the holding of elections of trustees for a new board.
(2) Despite anything in section 102, the nomination forms and voting forms for the election must show which nominees are standing only until the next election, and which are standing until the election after the next election.

(3) Despite anything in section 102, trustees who are elected only until the next election go out of office at the close of the day before the day on which the successor takes office following the election.
(4) If the date that the commissioner has appointed under section 78P is a date that is within 6 months before the date on which an election is due to be held, the board does not have to hold an election on that date and this section applies as if that election were not due to be held.

181 Part 9 s 101D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 101C: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 84 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
101D Validation and invalidation of elections of boards (1) Subsection (2) applies if— (a) anything required to be done in connection with an election under this Act— (i) (ii) has been done after the time it is required to be done; or has not been done at all; or (iii) has been done irregularly; and (b) the Minister thinks the lateness, omission, or irregularity could not ma- terially have affected the result of the election.
(2) If this subsection applies, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, validate the lateness, omission, or irregularity.

(3) Where anything required to be done in connection with an election under this Act cannot be done at or by the time at or by which it is required to be done, the Minister may, at any time, by notice in the Gazette, extend the time for do- ing it.
(4) Subsection (5) applies if there occurs in connection with an election under this Act— (a) (b) any lateness, omission, or irregularity that is capable of being validated under this section, but which the Minister thinks would be improper or undesirable to validate; or any other irregularity that the Minister thinks could materially have affected the result of the election.
(5) If this subsection applies to an election, the Minister may at any time within 60 days of the election, by notice in the Gazette,— (a) (b) (c) declare the election invalid; and require a new election to be held on a day specified in the notice; and declare that the trustees holding office on the date of the invalid election remain in office until the close of the day before the day on which the new trustees take office.
Section 101D: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 84 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

182 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 102 Term of office of trustees Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 84 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

102 Term of office (1) (2) Elected trustees take office 7 days after their election, unless otherwise provi- ded in this section.
Trustees elected for a board replacing a commissioner take office when the commissioner’s appointment ends.

(3) [Repealed] (4) No trustee shall be co-opted until the board has a vacancy for a co-opted trustee; and a co-opted trustee shall take office when co-opted.

(5) A trustee appointed when the board has a vacancy for a trustee appointed by the body or person concerned takes office on appointment.
(6) Within 6 months before an appointed trustee’s term of office expires, the per- son or body by whom or which the trustee was appointed (or the successor to that person or body) may appoint a trustee to succeed that trustee (or reappoint that trustee); but— (a) (b) the newly appointed trustee shall not take office until the day on which elected trustees take office under subsection (1); and if on that day the person or body concerned is no longer entitled to ap- point a successor to the trustee holding office when the newly appointed trustee was appointed, the newly appointed trustee’s appointment shall be deemed to have been void.
(7) A trustee elected under section 101(2) shall go out of office 7 days after the day on which a further election under the said section 101(2) is held at the school or schools concerned.

(8) Subject to subsection (9), all elected trustees (other than a trustee elected under section 101(2)) holding office at the close of the day before the day on which trustees take office under subsection (1) shall then go out of office.
(8A) Subject to subsection (9), the appointment or co-option of a trustee may be for a term not exceeding 3 years.

(9) If— (a) (b) the first elections of trustees for a board; or elections under section 78P,— are held in an election year before 1 May, no trustee shall go out of office under subsection (8) or subsection (8A) in the election year.
(10) A board may, when co-opting a trustee, specify a term of office for the trustee; and in that case— 183 Part 9 s 103 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) if the term expires before the trustee goes out of office under subsection (8A), the trustee shall then go out of office; but (b) otherwise the trustee shall go out of office under that subsection.

(11) This section is subject to sections 101A and 104.
Compare: 1989 No 3 s 12 Section 102(1): replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 13(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 102(2): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 28 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 102(3): repealed, on 17 May 2006, by section 13(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 102(6): amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 16(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
Section 102(6)(a): amended, on 15 December 1994, by section 3(2)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148).

Section 102(7): amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 16(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 102(8): amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 16(3)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 108(8): amended, on 15 December 1994, by section 3(2)(c) of the Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148).
Section 102(8A): inserted, on 8 July 2000, by section 16(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 102(9): amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 16(3)(c) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 102(9): amended, on 15 December 1994, by section 3(2)(d) of the Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148).

Section 102(9)(b): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 102(10)(a): amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 16(3)(d) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 102(11): amended, on 8 July 2000, by section 16(3)(e) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Eligibility to be trustee Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 85 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
103 Certain persons ineligible to be trustees (1) A person who— [Repealed] [Repealed] is an undischarged bankrupt; or is prohibited from being a director or promoter of, or being concerned or taking part in the management of, an incorporated or unincorporated (a) (b) (c) (d) 184 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 103 body under the Companies Act 1993, or the Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013, or the Takeovers Act 1993; or (da) [Repealed] (db) is ineligible to be a trustee under section 103A(2); or (dc) (dd) (de) is subject to a property order under the Protection of Personal and Prop- erty Rights Act 1988; or is a person in respect of whom a personal order has been made under that Act that reflects adversely on the person’s— (i) (ii) competence to manage his or her own affairs in relation to his or her property; or capacity to make or to communicate decisions relating to any par- ticular aspect or aspects of his or her personal care and welfare; or is a person who has been convicted of an offence punishable by impris- onment for a term of 2 years or more, or who has been sentenced to im- prisonment for any other offence, unless that person has obtained a par- don, served the sentence, or otherwise suffered the penalty imposed on the person; or (e) is not a New Zealand citizen, and is— (i) (ii) a person to whom section 15 or 16 of the Immigration Act 2009 applies; or a person obliged by or under that Act or any other enactment to leave New Zealand immediately by or within a specified time (be- ing a time that, when specified, was less than 12 months); or (iii) treated for the purposes of that Act as being unlawfully in New Zealand— may not become an elected, appointed, or co-opted trustee.
(2) [Repealed] (2A) [Repealed] (3) Any permanently appointed member of the board staff may, if otherwise eli- gible for election, be elected as a staff representative; but no permanently ap- pointed member of the board staff may be otherwise elected to the board or be appointed or co-opted on to the board.

(4) A non-permanently appointed member of the board staff may, if otherwise eli- gible, be elected, appointed, or co-opted on to the board.
(5) No person who has been appointed returning officer for an election of trustees is eligible to be nominated as a candidate in the election.

Compare: 1989 No 3 s 13 Section 103(1)(a): repealed, on 8 July 2000, by section 17 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
185 Part 9 s 103A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 103(1)(b): repealed, on 10 September 2008, by section 4(2) of the Disability (United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities) Act 2008 (2008 No 64).

Section 103(1)(c): replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 103(1)(d): replaced, on 25 October 2006, by section 25 of the Securities Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 46).
Section 103(1)(d): amended, on 1 December 2014, by section 150 of the Financial Markets (Repeals and Amendments) Act 2013 (2013 No 70).

Section 103(1)(da): repealed, on 17 May 2006, by section 14(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 103(1)(db): replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 103(1)(dc): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
Section 103(1)(dd): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 103(1)(de): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 103(1)(e): replaced, at 2 am on 29 November 2010, by section 406(1) of the Immigration Act 2009 (2009 No 51).

Section 103(2): repealed, on 8 July 2000, by section 17 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
Section 103(2A): repealed, on 17 May 2006, by section 14(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 103(3): replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 14(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 103(4): replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 14(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
103A Financial interests that disqualify persons from being trustees (1) In this section,— contract, in relation to a board,— (a) means a contract made by any person directly with the board; and (b) (c) includes any relationship with the board that is intended to constitute a contract but is not an enforceable contract; but does not include any contract for the employment of any person as an officer or employee of the board company means a company incorporated under the Companies Act 1993 or any former Companies Act or a society incorporated under the Industrial and Provident Societies Act 1908 or any former Industrial and Provident Societies Act subcontract, in relation to any contract made by a board,— (a) means a subcontract made with the contractor under that contract, or with another subcontractor, to do any work or perform any service or 186 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 103B supply any goods or do any other act to which the head contract relates; and (b) includes any subsidiary transaction relating to any such contract or sub- contract.
(2) A person is not capable of being a trustee of a board or a member of a commit- tee of a board, if the total of all payments made or to be made by or on behalf of the board in respect of all contracts made by it in which that person is con- cerned or interested exceeds in any financial year— (a) the amount determined for the purpose by the Secretary, in consultation with the Auditor-General, by notice in the Gazette; or (b) in the absence of an amount determined under paragraph (a), $25,000.
(3) For the purposes of subsection (2), a trustee or a member of a committee of a board is deemed to be concerned or interested in a contract made by a board with a company, if— (a) (b) the trustee owns, whether directly or through a nominee, 10% or more of the issued capital of the company or of any other company controlling that company; or the trustee is the managing director or the general manager (by whatever names they are called) of the company.
(4) For the purposes of this section, a company is deemed to control another com- pany if it owns 50% or more of the issued capital of that other company or is able to control the exercise of 50% or more of the total voting powers exercisa- ble by all the members of that other company.
(5) Despite anything in this section,— (a) (b) a person is not disqualified under this section if the Secretary approves the contract at the request of the board, whether or not the contract is al- ready entered into; and the Secretary may, by notice in the Gazette, issue guidelines setting out the basis on which applications for approval under paragraph (a) will be considered.

Section 103A: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 16 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
103B Requirements before appointment Before a person is elected, co-opted, or appointed as a trustee, the person must confirm to the board that he or she is, to the best of his or her knowledge, eli- gible to be a trustee, having regard to the grounds of ineligibility in section 103 or section 103A.

Section 103B: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
Section 103B: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 86 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

187 Part 9 s 104 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Casual vacancies on boards Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 87 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
104 When casual vacancies arise (1) When an elected, appointed, or co-opted trustee— (a) (b) (c) (d) dies; or resigns by written notice to the board; or without the prior leave of the board, is absent from 3 consecutive meet- ings of the board; or becomes a person who (in terms of section 103(1)) may not become an elected, appointed, or co-opted trustee,— the trustee’s office becomes vacant.
(1A) If a property order is made in respect of a trustee under section 30 of the Pro- tection of Personal and Property Rights Act 1988 (which relates to temporary orders),— (a) subsection (1)(d) does not apply to the trustee by virtue only of the mak- ing of that order; but (b) while the order remains in force, the trustee is deemed to have been granted leave of absence by the board and is not capable of acting as a trustee during that period.
(2) When a trustee elected by the board staff ceases to be a member of the board staff, the trustee’s office becomes vacant.

(3) On any day when— (a) (b) already 1 co-opted trustee is a member of the board staff; and a second co-opted trustee becomes a member of the board staff,— the second trustee’s office becomes vacant.

(4) When the board of a State integrated school receives a written notice from the school’s proprietors dismissing any trustee appointed by them, the trustee’s office becomes vacant.
(5) When a trustee elected by students ceases to be enrolled full-time at the school or institution, the trustee’s office becomes vacant.

(6) If— (a) at any election of trustees fewer persons are elected than there are vacan- cies to be filled; and (b) the board is not then dissolved,— every unfilled vacancy is a casual vacancy, and shall be deemed to have arisen on the day on which the elected trustees take office.
Compare: 1989 No 3 s 14 188 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 105 Section 104(1A): inserted, on 10 September 2008, by section 4(3) of the Disability (United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities) Act 2008 (2008 No 64).

Section 104(4): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 88 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 104(6): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 28 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
105 Filling casual vacancies of elected trustees (1) (2) Subject to subsections (2) to (9), every casual vacancy for an elected trustee shall be filled by the election of a trustee, in the same manner as that in which the vacating trustee was elected, for the residue of the vacating trustee’s term.
If no nominations are received for the election of a trustee by students, or no trustee is elected at such an election, the vacancy shall not be filled until the next election required to be held by section 101(2) or section 78P.

(3) Where a casual vacancy for an elected trustee occurs during any period of 6 months commencing on 1 October in a year before an election year, the board may, not later than 28 days after it occurs, resolve not to fill it; and in that case it shall not be filled.
(4) When a casual vacancy for an elected trustee occurs at any other time, the board must resolve, within 8 weeks of the vacancy occurring, whether to— (a) (b) hold an election to fill the vacancy; or fill the vacancy by selection.

(4A) [Repealed] (5) If the board resolves to fill the vacancy by selection it must, within 14 days of the resolution, publish a notice in a newspaper circulating in the area stating that there is a vacancy and that the board proposes to fill it by selection.
(6) A board may not resolve to fill a casual vacancy by selection if the effect would be that the number of elected parent representatives on the board is less than, or equal to, the number of parent representatives on the board who have not been elected.
(7) Despite resolving to fill a vacancy by selection, the board must hold an election to fill the vacancy if, within 28 days of the publication of the notice referred to in subsection (5), a total of at least 10% of the people entitled to vote in an election for trustees advises the board, in writing, that they wish the vacancy to be filled by an election.
(8) An election to fill a casual vacancy for an elected trustee must be held,— (a) if the board resolved under subsection (4)(a) to hold an election, on the 15th Friday after the date on which the vacancy occurred, or on any earlier date fixed by the board at least 6 weeks before the election date; or 189 Part 9 s 105A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) if the board holds an election as a result of a request under subsection (7), on the tenth Friday after receiving the request, or on any earlier date fixed by the board at least 6 weeks before the election date.
(9) If the board resolved under subsection (4) to fill a casual vacancy by selection, then, once the last date for lodging a request under subsection (7) has passed, the board must select a person within 6 weeks of that date, and the person se- lected takes office on the day of selection by the board.
(10) This Act applies to a trustee selected under this section to fill a casual vacancy of an elected trustee as if the person had been elected, and every reference to an elected trustee (except in subsection (6)) includes a reference to a trustee so se- lected.

Section 105 heading: amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 15(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 105(1): amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 15(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 105(2): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 105(3): amended, on 15 December 1994, by section 3(3) of the Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148).

Section 105(4): replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 105(4A): repealed, on 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 105(5): replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 105(6): replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 105(7): replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 105(8): replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 105(9): inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 105(10): inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

105A Minister may approve alternative constitution in certain cases [Repealed] Section 105A: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 89(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
106 Commissioner may be appointed if board inactive or trustees too few [Repealed] Section 106: repealed, on 25 October 2001, by section 22 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

190 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 110 107 Minister may dissolve board for cause, and direct appointment of commissioner [Repealed] Section 107: repealed, on 25 October 2001, by section 22 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
108 Consultation with proprietors of integrated school [Repealed] Section 108: repealed, on 25 October 2001, by section 22 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

109 Commissioners [Repealed] Section 109: repealed, on 25 October 2001, by section 22 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
109A Provisions relating to board with staggered election cycle where commissioner appointed [Repealed] Section 109A: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 89(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Combining and splitting boards Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 89(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
110 Boards may combine (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, establish a single board (a com- bined board) to administer a number of schools or institutions, with effect from a date specified in the notice.
(1A) The Minister may establish a combined board if the restrictions in section 111 are met and the Minister— (a) (b) is satisfied of the matters in subsection (1B); or has reasonable cause to believe the circumstances in subsection (1C) exist and has consulted— (i) (ii) the boards concerned; and in the case of a State integrated school, the proprietor of that school.
(1B) For the purposes of subsection (1A)(a), the matters are that— (a) each of the boards concerned has made reasonable efforts to consult the parents of students (other than adult students) enrolled full-time at its schools or institutions about combining with the other boards; and 191 Part 9 s 110A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) the consultation that has taken place has been adequate in all the circum- stances; and (c) the proposed combined board is appropriate in all the circumstances.
(1C) For the purposes of subsection (1A)(b), the circumstances are that the Minister must have reasonable cause to believe that— (a) there are serious problems with the governance of 1 or more of the schools or institutions concerned; and (b) those problems could be addressed by the combined board.

(1D) When establishing a combined board for 4 or more schools, the Minister may require the combined board to have an alternative constitution.
(2) Subject to subsection (3), this Act shall apply to a combined board as if— (a) the board had been in existence immediately before the day on which the notice establishing it was published; and (b) every trustee had resigned on that day.

(3) Until the day specified in the notice establishing a combined board,— (a) (b) it shall have no powers, functions, duties, or rights; and the existing boards shall continue in existence as if the combined board had not been established.
(4) On the day specified in the notice establishing a combined board, all rights, assets, liabilities, and debts of the existing boards shall become rights, assets, liabilities, and debts of the combined board.

Section 110(1): replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 90 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 110(1A): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 90 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 110(1B): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 90 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 110(1C): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 90 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 110(1D): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 90 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 110(3)(b): amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 16(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 110(4): amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 16(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

110A Minister may combine boards at establishment (1) A Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, establish a combined board for 2 or more schools that are newly established under section 146.

(2) The combined board is the board of a newly established school for the pur- poses of section 98.
192 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 112 (3) When establishing a combined board of 4 or more schools, the Minister may require the combined board to have an alternative constitution.

Section 110A: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 29 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 110A(3): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 91 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
111 Restrictions on combining (1) No board that administers a special institution may combine with a board that does not.

(2) [Repealed] (3) No board that administers a State integrated school may combine with a board that does not.

(4) No board that administers a State integrated school may combine with any other board unless all the schools they administer have the same proprietors.
(5) A board of a designated character school may only combine with a board of another designated character school and only if both schools have substantially the same aims, purposes, and objectives (that are required to be specified under section 156).

(6) A board of a Kura Kaupapa Māori may only combine with another board of a Kura Kaupapa Māori.

Section 111(2): repealed, on 8 July 2000, by section 21 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
Section 111(3): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 92(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 111(4): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 92(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 111(5): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 92(3) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 111(6): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 92(3) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
112 Minister may split combined board (1) (2) (3) If satisfied, after consulting the Review Office and the board concerned, that in all the circumstances it is appropriate for a combined board to be split, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, establish 2 or more boards for the schools or institutions the combined board administers, with effect on a date specified in the notice.
If any of the boards established by a notice under subsection (1) is a combined board, the notice shall specify the schools or institutions it is to administer.

Subject to subsection (4) and section 112A, this Act shall apply to a board es- tablished by a notice under subsection (1) as if— 193 Part 9 s 112A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) the board had been in existence immediately before the day on which the notice was published; and (b) every trustee had resigned on the day.
(4) Until the day specified in a notice under subsection (1) establishing 2 or more boards,— (a) (b) the boards established shall have no powers, functions, duties, or rights; and the combined board they replace shall continue in existence as if they had not been established.

Section 112(3): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 30 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
112A Splitting boards that were combined at establishment (1) A Minister who, under section 112(1), is splitting a board that was combined under section 110A at establishment for 2 or more schools may designate 1 of the boards established under section 112(1) as being identical to the board that was established under section 110A, except that it need not be a combined board.
(2) A board that is designated under subsection (1) is to be treated, for the pur- poses of section 98, as if it were the board of a newly established school.

(3) This section overrides section 112(3)(b) and (4)(a).

Section 112A: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
113 Property held in trust (1) Where any property is, on the day a notice under section 112(1) is published, held in trust by the combined board of the schools or institutions to which the notice relates, the following provisions apply: (a) (b) (c) (d) the board shall, within 28 days of the day specified in the notice, notify Public Trust of the existence and nature of the trust; and Public Trust shall forthwith notify the Secretary: Public Trust shall take all reasonable steps to try to consult the board, within 70 days of the day specified in the notice, as to— (i) (ii) how the property should vest; and the extent (if any) to which the trust should otherwise be modi- fied: on the 70th day after the day specified in the notice the property shall vest in Public Trust: as soon as is practicable after becoming aware that the property has ves- ted, Public Trust, after consulting the boards established by the notice, as to— 194 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 113 (i) (ii) how the property should vest; and the extent (if any) to which the trust concerned should otherwise be modified,— shall devise and send to the Solicitor-General a scheme to modify the trust.
(2) Where any property is, on the day a notice under section 112(1) is published, held in trust for the combined board of the schools or institutions to which the notice relates (otherwise than by the board), the following provisions apply: (a) (b) (c) (d) the person who holds the property shall, within 28 days of the day speci- fied in the notice, notify Public Trust of the existence and nature of the trust; and Public Trust shall forthwith notify the Secretary: Public Trust shall take all reasonable steps to try to consult the person, within 70 days of the day specified in the notice, as to— (i) (ii) which of the boards established by the notice the property (or any part of it) should be held for; and if more than 1, how; and the extent (if any) to which the trust should otherwise be modi- fied: on the 70th day after the day specified in the notice the property shall vest in Public Trust: as soon as is practicable after becoming aware that the property has ves- ted, Public Trust, after consulting the boards established by the notice, as to— (i) (ii) whether all or any of the property should be held for them and if so which of it, which of them, and in what proportions; and the extent (if any) to which the trust should otherwise be modi- fied,— Public Trust shall devise and send to the Solicitor-General a scheme to modify the trust.
(3) Where, on the day a notice under section 112(1) is published, any trust (being a trust established by an enactment, instrument, or will, that requires or requests the trustees to consult, notify, or act only with the approval or concurrence of, a combined board of the schools or institutions to which a notice under section 112(1) relates) exists, the following provisions apply: (a) (b) the trustees may apply to Public Trust for directions as to which boards established by the notice should act (jointly or severally) in place of the combined board; and in that case Public Trust shall devise and send to the Solicitor-General draft directions to the trustees; and the trustees shall not take any action for which consultation, notification, approval, or concurrence, is required or requested except in accordance with— (i) directions approved under this section; or 195 Part 9 s 113 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ii) directions given by the Solicitor-General in circumstances that ap- pear to constitute an emergency; or (iii) the Charitable Trusts Act 1957.
(4) Within 90 days (or any longer period the Solicitor-General and Public Trust in any case, before the expiration of that period, agree) of being notified of a scheme or draft directions under this section, the Solicitor-General may, by written notice to Public Trust,— (a) (b) (c) approve the scheme or directions (as originally notified by Public Trust, or with amendments agreed by Public Trust); or suggest amendments to the scheme or directions; or direct that the scheme should not proceed, or that the directions should not be given; and in that case the matter shall be dealt with under the Charitable Trusts Act 1957.
(5) If within 90 days (or any longer period agreed under subsection (4)) of being notified of a scheme or draft directions under this section, the Solicitor-General does not under that subsection approve the scheme or directions, or direct that the scheme or directions should not proceed, the Solicitor-General shall be deemed to have approved the scheme or directions.
(6) If the Solicitor-General approves a scheme under this section, Public Trust shall, in accordance with it,— (a) (b) by notice in the Gazette, modify the trust concerned; and take all steps necessary to effect any necessary transfers of the property concerned.

(7) If the Solicitor-General approves any draft directions under this section,— (a) (b) Public Trust shall give them to the trustees concerned; and they shall have effect according to their tenor.
(8) Every scheme, draft direction, and suggested and agreed amendment, under this section shall be such that, in the opinion of Public Trust or the Solicitor- General (as the case may be),— (a) (b) it best gives effect to the intentions of the testator, settlor, or other person or body by whom or which the trust concerned was established; and subject to paragraph (a), it effects the minimum change necessary to enable the trust concerned to operate satisfactorily in the light of— (i) (ii) the splitting of the former combined board; and the establishment of the new boards concerned; and (iii) any transfers of property effected or to be effected.
(9) The reasonable costs of Public Trust in acting under this section shall be paid out of money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose.

Compare: 1989 No 3 s 19 196 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 114 Section 113(1)(a): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 113(1)(b): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).
Section 113(1)(c): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 113(1)(d): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 113(2)(a): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 113(2)(b): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).
Section 113(2)(c): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 113(2)(d): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 113(3)(a): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 113(4): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).
Section 113(4)(a): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 113(6): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 113(7)(a): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 113(8): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).
Section 113(9): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).
114 Allocation of employees after combined board split Every notice under section 112(1) shall specify one of the boards it establishes as the residual employer of the employees of the combined board to which it relates; and— (a) (b) subject to paragraph (b), the people who were, immediately before the day specified in the notice, employees of the combined board shall on that day become employees of the board specified; and their service in the employment of the combined board shall be treated for all purposes as service in the employment of the board specified; and before that day, the Secretary may, by written notice to any employee of the combined board, specify one of the boards the notice establishes as the board by which the employee is to become employed; and in that case, if the employee is still employed by the combined board immedi- ately before that day,— 197 Part 9 s 115 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (i) (ii) the employee shall on that day become an employee of the board specified; and the employee’s service in the employment of the combined board shall be treated for all purposes as service in the employment of the board specified.
Compare: 1989 No 3 s 21 115 Transfer of assets of split combined board (1) Subject to sections 113 and 114,— (a) (b) all rights, assets, liabilities and debts that a combined board split by a notice under section 112 had immediately before the day specified in the notice shall be deemed to have become rights, assets, liabilities, and debts of the boards established by the notice; and any property that, immediately before it became an asset of a board under this section, was subject to a trust, shall vest in the board subject to the trust.
(2) Subject to sections 113 and 114, if any dispute arises as to whether any right, asset, liability, or debt has, under subsection (1), become a right, asset, liability, or debt of one board or another, the dispute shall be referred to the Secretary; and (a) the Secretary shall attempt by mediation to bring the parties to the dis- pute to an agreement; but (b) where, in the Secretary’s opinion, further mediation is unlikely to ach- ieve agreement, the Secretary shall determine the dispute, and the deter- mination shall be final.
Compare: 1989 No 3 s 22 116 Each school to be represented on combined board (1) In an election for parent representatives on a combined board,— (a) (b) each candidate shall be nominated in respect of 1 school or institution the board administers; and the highest polling candidate nominated in respect of each school or in- stitution shall become a trustee, regardless of the votes cast for the other candidates.
(2) [Repealed] Section 116(1)(a): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 31(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 116(2): repealed, on 19 December 1998, by section 31(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

198 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 9 s 119 116A Appointment of principal of combined board [Repealed] Section 116A: repealed, on 29 October 2016, by section 21 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
Miscellaneous provisions Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 93 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

117 Other provisions applying to boards The provisions set out in Schedule 6 apply to boards.
Compare: 1989 No 3 s 18 118 Regulations about board elections (1) Subject to section 116, the Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations prescribing either or both of the following matters: (a) (b) the manner in which elections of trustees are to be held: subject to subsection (3), the manner in which returning officers are to be appointed for the purpose of the election of trustees.
(2) Regulations made under this Act may— (a) (b) (c) provide for persons forbidden by section 101(6) to participate in 2 elec- tions to choose the election in which they prefer to stand, vote, or both; and provide for persons who do not exercise their choice within the time or in the manner provided for to be restricted to standing, voting, or both, in only 1 election; and require a person who has chosen or been restricted to 1 election to con- tinue to be restricted to elections of the kind concerned if elections are later held to fill casual vacancies.
(3) No person who has been nominated for election to a board is eligible to be ap- pointed returning officer for the election.

Compare: 1989 No 3 s 20 Section 118 heading: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 94 of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
119 Savings Every reference in any— (a) (b) Act, regulation, or other enactment; or contract, agreement, deed, instrument, application, lease, licence, notice, award, or other document entered into, made, granted, given, or exe- cuted before 18 May 1989,— 199 Part 10 s 120 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 to the school committee, committee of management, or board of governors of a primary, secondary, composite, or special school shall be read as a reference to the school’s board.
Compare: 1989 No 3 s 22(3)(b) Part 10 Teacher registration [Repealed] Part 10: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

120 Interpretation [Repealed] Section 120: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Restrictions on appointment and employment of teaching staff Heading: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
[Repealed] 120A Restrictions on appointment of teachers [Repealed] Section 120A: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

120B Restrictions on continued employment of teachers [Repealed] Section 120B: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
120C Restrictions on activities of teachers whose practising certificate or limited authority to teach subject to interim suspension [Repealed] Section 120C: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Teacher registration [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
121 Applications for registration as teacher [Repealed] Section 121: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

200 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 122 Full registration [Repealed] Education Act 1989 Part 10 s 127A Section 122: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

123 Provisional registration [Repealed] Section 123: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
124 Registration of experienced teachers [Repealed] Section 124: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

124A Determining whether or not training satisfactory [Repealed] Section 124A: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

124B Determining good character and fitness to be teacher [Repealed] Section 124B: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
125 Determining whether or not employment satisfactorily completed [Repealed] Section 125: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

126 Appeals from decisions of Teachers Council [Repealed] Section 126: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

127 Expiry of teacher registration [Repealed] Section 127: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
127A Voluntary deregistration [Repealed] Section 127A: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

201 Part 10 s 128 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 128 Teachers Council to keep register [Repealed] Section 128: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
128A Matching of register information and information about payment of teacher salaries at payrolled schools [Repealed] Section 128A: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

129 Cancellation of registration as teacher and cancellation of limited authority to teach [Repealed] Section 129: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
129A Reclassification of teacher’s registration [Repealed] Section 129A: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

130 Practising certificates [Repealed] Section 130: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Limited authority to teach [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
130A Purpose of limited authority to teach [Repealed] Section 130A: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

130B Limited authority to teach [Repealed] Section 130B: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

130C Determining character and likely teaching ability [Repealed] Section 130C: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
202 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 10 s 133 130D Appeals from decisions [Repealed] Section 130D: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

130E Period of authorisation [Repealed] Section 130E: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

130F Teachers Council to keep list [Repealed] Section 130F: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
130G Cancellation of authorisation [Repealed] Section 130G: repealed, on 1 September 2004, by section 32 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

130H Fees and costs [Repealed] Section 130H: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Teacher Registration Board [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 1 February 2002, by section 33 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
131 Teacher Registration Board [Repealed] Section 131: repealed, on 1 February 2002, by section 33 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

132 Membership of Registration Board [Repealed] Section 132: repealed, on 1 February 2002, by section 33 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

133 Certain people ineligible to be members [Repealed] Section 133: repealed, on 1 February 2002, by section 33 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
203 Part 10 s 134 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 134 Co-opted members [Repealed] Section 134: repealed, on 1 February 2002, by section 33 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

135 Powers of Registration Board [Repealed] Section 135: repealed, on 1 February 2002, by section 33 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
135A Teachers Council may disclose certain information [Repealed] Section 135A: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

136 Teachers Council may charge fees and impose costs [Repealed] Section 136: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

137 Offences [Repealed] Section 137: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
138 Council to notify cancellations [Repealed] Section 138: repealed, on 1 September 2004, by section 35 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

138A Notification of convictions [Repealed] Section 138A: repealed, on 1 September 2004, by section 36 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

138B Notification by certain employers [Repealed] Section 138B: repealed, on 1 September 2004, by section 36 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
139 Transitional provisions [Repealed] Section 139: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

204 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 10A s 139AG Part 10A New Zealand Teachers Council [Repealed] Part 10A: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AA Purpose of Part [Repealed] Section 139AA: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
139AB Interpretation [Repealed] Section 139AB: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Teachers Council [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AC New Zealand Teachers Council established [Repealed] Section 139AC: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
139AD Composition of Teachers Council [Repealed] Section 139AD: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AE Functions of Teachers Council [Repealed] Section 139AE: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AF Powers of Teachers Council [Repealed] Section 139AF: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
139AG Ministerial directions [Repealed] Section 139AG: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

205 Part 10A s 139AH Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 139AH Advisory groups [Repealed] Section 139AH: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AI Code of ethics [Repealed] Section 139AI: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
139AJ Teachers Council to make rules [Repealed] Section 139AJ: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AJA Delegations [Repealed] Section 139AJA: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AJB Chief executive [Repealed] Section 139AJB: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
139AJC Superannuation [Repealed] Section 139AJC: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Mandatory reporting [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AK Mandatory reporting of dismissals and resignations [Repealed] Section 139AK: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
139AL Mandatory reporting of complaints received about former employees [Repealed] Section 139AL: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

206 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 10A s 139AT 139AM Mandatory reporting of possible serious misconduct [Repealed] Section 139AM: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
139AN Mandatory reporting of failure to reach required level of competence [Repealed] Section 139AN: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AO Offence to fail to report [Repealed] Section 139AO: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AP Mandatory reporting of convictions [Repealed] Section 139AP: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Disciplinary functions [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AQ Disciplinary bodies [Repealed] Section 139AQ: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AR Complaints of misconduct [Repealed] Section 139AR: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
139AS Complaints and reports relating to teacher conduct [Repealed] Section 139AS: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AT Powers of Complaints Assessment Committee [Repealed] Section 139AT: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
207 Part 10A s 139AU Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 139AU Interim suspension until matter about or involving possible serious misconduct concluded [Repealed] Section 139AU: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AUA Duration of interim suspension [Repealed] Section 139AUA: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
139AV Investigation by Complaints Assessment Committee of reports of convictions [Repealed] Section 139AV: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AW Powers of Disciplinary Tribunal [Repealed] Section 139AW: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AX Evidence at hearings [Repealed] Section 139AX: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
139AY Powers of Disciplinary Tribunal in relation to witnesses [Repealed] Section 139AY: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AZ Offences [Repealed] Section 139AZ: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AZA Privileges and immunities [Repealed] Section 139AZA: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
208 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 139AZB Appeals [Repealed] Education Act 1989 Part 11 s 139A Section 139AZB: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Review of competence [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AZC Complaints about competence [Repealed] Section 139AZC: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
139AZCA Investigation of mandatory reports about competence [Repealed] Section 139AZCA: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

139AZCB Powers of Teachers Council after finding required level of competence not attained [Repealed] Section 139AZCB: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Police vetting [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
139AZD Teachers Council must co-ordinate Police vetting [Repealed] Section 139AZD: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Part 11 Miscellaneous 139A No corporal punishment in early childhood services or registered schools (1) No person who— (a) (b) is employed by a board (within the meaning of section 2(1)) at or in re- spect of a school or institution administered by the board; or is employed by the managers of a school registered under section 35A at or in respect of the school; or 209 Part 11 s 139A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ba) (c) (d) is employed by the sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua at or in respect of the school; or is employed at an early childhood service (as defined in section 309); or owns, manages, or controls an early childhood service (as so defined),— shall use force, by way of correction or punishment, towards any student or child enrolled at or attending the school, institution, or service.
(2) No person who is supervising or controlling— (a) (b) on behalf of a board (within the meaning of section 2(1)) any student en- rolled at or attending a school or institution administered by the board; or on behalf of the managers of a school registered under section 35A any student enrolled at or attending the school; or (ba) on behalf of a sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua any student enrolled at or attending the school; or (c) on behalf of the service provider of an early childhood service (as de- fined in section 309) any child enrolled at or attending the service,— shall use force, by way of correction or punishment, towards the student or child.
Section 139A: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 28(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 139A heading: amended, on 1 December 2008, by section 26(1) of the Education Amend- ment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 139A(1): amended, on 1 December 2008, by section 26(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 139A(1): amended, on 21 June 2007, by section 6(2) of the Crimes (Substituted Section 59) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 18).
Section 139A(1)(b): amended, on 21 December 2010, by section 27(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 139A(1)(ba): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 27(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 139A(1)(c): replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 26(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 139A(1)(d): replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 26(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 139A(2): amended, on 21 June 2007, by section 6(2) of the Crimes (Substituted Section 59) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 18).

Section 139A(2)(b): amended, on 21 December 2010, by section 27(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 139A(2)(ba): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 27(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 139A(2)(c): replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 26(4) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
210 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 11 s 139AC 139AB No seclusion at or on behalf of registered school or early childhood service (1) A person to whom this section applies must not seclude any student or child who is enrolled at or attending a registered school or an early childhood ser- vice.
(2) This section applies to a teacher or any other person who is— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) employed by a board; or employed by the managers of a school registered under section 35A; or employed by the sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua; or employed or engaged by the service provider of an early childhood ser- vice; or providing education or care to children attending an early childhood ser- vice; or (f) supervising or controlling any student or child on behalf of— (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) a board; or the managers of a school registered under section 35A; or the sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua; or the service provider of an early childhood service.
(3) In this section,— early childhood service has the meaning given to it by section 309 seclude, in relation to a student or child, means to place the student or child involuntarily alone in a room from which he or she cannot freely exit or from which the student or child believes that he or she cannot freely exit service provider has the meaning given to it by section 309.

Section 139AB: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 96 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
139AC Limits on use of physical restraint in schools (1) A teacher or authorised staff member must not physically restrain a student un- less— (a) (b) the teacher or staff member reasonably believes that the safety of the stu- dent or of any other person is at serious and imminent risk; and the physical restraint is reasonable and proportionate in the circumstan- ces.
(2) In this section and in sections 139AD and 139AE,— authorised staff member means an employee of a registered school who is authorised by the employer to use physical restraint in accordance with this section employer means— 211 Part 11 s 139AD Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) (c) a board: the managers of a school registered under section 35A: the sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua physically restrain, in relation to a student, means to use physical force to pre- vent, restrict, or subdue the movement of the student’s body or part of the stu- dent’s body teacher means a person who holds a teaching position (as defined in section 348) at a registered school.
Section 139AC: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 96 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

139AD Rules on physical restraint (1) The Secretary must make rules prescribing the practice and procedure to be fol- lowed by employers, principals, teachers, and authorised staff members in rela- tion to physical restraint.
(2) The rules must include— (a) (b) requirements to keep written records on the use of physical restraint, in- cluding requirements to notify, monitor, and report on the use of physical restraint; and a procedure for authorising staff members to use physical restraint in ac- cordance with section 139AC.
(3) Rules made under this section are disallowable instruments, but not legislative instruments, for the purposes of the Legislation Act 2012 and must be presen- ted to the House of Representatives under section 41 of that Act.

Section 139AD: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 96 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

139AE Guidelines on physical restraint (1) The Secretary must, by notice in the Gazette, issue guidelines on the use of physical restraint in registered schools.
(2) The guidelines must include— (a) (b) best practice examples for the use of physical restraint; and other examples of best practice in behaviour management.

(3) Employers, principals, teachers, and authorised staff members must have re- gard to the guidelines.

Section 139AE: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 96 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
139AAA Surrender and retention of property This section applies if a teacher or an authorised staff member has reasonable grounds to believe that a student has hidden or in clear view on or about the (1) 212 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 11 s 139AAA student’s person, or in any bag or other container under the student’s control, an item that is likely to— (a) (b) endanger the safety of any person; or detrimentally affect the learning environment.
(2) (3) If this section applies, the teacher or authorised staff member may require the student to produce and surrender the item.

If the item is stored on a computer or other electronic device, the teacher or authorised staff member may require the student— (a) (b) to reveal the item: to surrender the computer or other electronic device on which the item is stored.
(4) A teacher or an authorised staff member may do either or both of the following to an item surrendered under this section: (a) (b) retain the item for a reasonable period: dispose of the item (if appropriate).

(5) A teacher or an authorised staff member may retain a computer or other elec- tronic device surrendered under subsection (3)(b) for a reasonable period.

(6) If an item or a computer or other electronic device is retained under this sec- tion, it must be stored in an appropriate manner.
(7) At the end of any period of retention, any computer or other electronic device, or any item that is not disposed of under subsection (4)(b), must be— (a) (b) returned to the student; or passed to another person or agency, as appropriate.

(8) A teacher or an authorised staff member who exercises a power under this sec- tion must comply with any rules made under section 139AAH.
(9) In this section and sections 139AAB to 139AAI, unless the context otherwise requires,— authorised staff member means an employee of a board who is authorised by that board,— (a) when used in this section, to exercise powers under this section; and (b) when used in section 139AAB, to exercise powers under that section item includes information stored in electronic form student includes a person under the supervision of a teacher, whether or not the person is enrolled at the school at which the teacher is employed teacher means a person employed at a State school in a teaching position (within the meaning of section 120).
(10) An authorisation referred to in the definition of authorised staff member in sub- section (9) must be in writing and may be subject to conditions.

213 Part 11 s 139AAB Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 139AAA: inserted, on 1 January 2014, by section 28 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
139AAB Searches of clothing and bags or other containers (1) This section applies if— (a) (b) a teacher or an authorised staff member has reasonable grounds to be- lieve that a student has on or about the student’s person, or in any bag or other container under the student’s control, a harmful item; and the teacher or authorised staff member has required the student to produce and surrender the harmful item under section 139AAA and the student has refused to produce and surrender it.
(2) If this section applies, the teacher or authorised staff member may do any of the following: (a) (b) require the student to remove any outer clothing, except where the stu- dent has no other clothing, or only underclothing, under that outer cloth- ing: require the student to remove any head covering, gloves, footwear, or socks: (c) require the student to surrender the bag or other container.
(3) (4) The teacher or authorised staff member may search any clothing or footwear removed, and any bag or other container surrendered, under subsection (2).

If, during a search under this section, the teacher or authorised staff member finds a harmful item or an item that is likely to detrimentally affect the learning environment, the item may be seized by the teacher or authorised staff member and section 139AAA(4) to (7) apply with any necessary modifications.
(5) A teacher or an authorised staff member who exercises a power under this sec- tion must comply with any rules made under section 139AAH.

(6) In this section, section 139AAD, and section 139AAF,— harmful item means an item that a teacher or an authorised staff member has reasonable grounds to believe poses an immediate threat to the physical or emotional safety of any person outer clothing includes, without limitation, any coat, jacket, jumper, or cardi- gan socks does not include tights or stockings.
Section 139AAB: inserted, on 1 January 2014, by section 28 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

139AAC Restrictions on searches under section 139AAB (1) A teacher or an authorised staff member who carries out a search under section 139AAB must carry out the search with decency and sensitivity and in a man- 214 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 11 s 139AAD ner that affords the student the greatest degree of privacy and dignity consistent with the purpose of the search.
(2) Unless impracticable, a search under section 139AAB must be carried out— (a) (b) by a teacher or an authorised staff member who is of the same sex as the student; and in the presence of the student and another teacher or authorised staff member who is of the same sex as the student.

(3) Unless impracticable, a search under section 139AAB must not be carried out in the view of any person other than the person carrying out the search, the stu- dent, and another teacher or authorised staff member.
(4) A teacher or an authorised staff member who carries out a search under section 139AAB must— (a) return any clothing or footwear removed and any bag or other container surrendered as soon as the search is completed; and (b) keep a written record of any items seized under section 139AAB(4).

Section 139AAC: inserted, on 1 January 2014, by section 28 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
139AAD Limitations on sections 139AAA and 139AAB (1) Nothing in section 139AAA or 139AAB permits a teacher or staff member— (a) (b) (c) to search any student; or to use physical force against a student; or to require a student to provide a bodily sample (but a teacher or staff member may encourage a student to participate in a voluntary drug treat- ment programme that involves testing of bodily samples).
(2) Nothing in section 139AAA or 139AAB permits a teacher or an authorised staff member to have a dog with him or her for the purpose of exercising a power under that section.
(3) The powers set out in sections 139AAA and 139AAB may not be exercised in relation to 2 or more students together unless the teacher or authorised staff member has reasonable grounds to believe that each student has an item speci- fied in section 139AAA(1) or a harmful item on or about his or her person, or in any bag or other container under his or her control.

(4) Nothing in subsection (1) limits or affects sections 15 and 17 of this Act or sections 41, 48, and 59 of the Crimes Act 1961.
(5) In this section,— rub-down search means a search in which the person conducting the search— (a) runs or pats his or her hand over the body of the person being searched, whether outside or inside the clothing of the person being searched: 215 Part 11 s 139AAE Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) inserts his or her hand inside any pocket or pouch in the clothing of the person being searched search, in relation to a student, includes— (a) (b) a strip search; and a rub-down search strip search means a search where the person conducting the search requires the person being searched to— (a) remove any of the latter person’s clothing other than outer clothing, head covering, gloves, footwear, or socks; or (b) raise, lower, or open all or any part of the latter person’s clothing.
Section 139AAD: inserted, on 1 January 2014, by section 28 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

139AAE Prohibitions on searches by contractors (1) A contractor may not— (a) (b) exercise any power in section 139AAA or 139AAB; or search a student.
(2) However, a contractor may bring a dog that is trained for the purpose of search- ing to a school and use the dog for the purpose of searching school property (including lockers, desks, or other receptacles provided to students for storage purposes).

(3) In this section, contractor has the meaning given by section 78CA(2).

Section 139AAE: inserted, on 1 January 2014, by section 28 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
139AAF Refusal to reveal, produce, or surrender item (1) (2) If a student refuses to reveal, produce, or surrender an item or computer or other electronic device under section 139AAA(2) or (3), a teacher or an author- ised staff member may take any disciplinary steps, or steps to manage the stu- dent’s behaviour, that the teacher or authorised staff member considers reason- able.
If a student refuses to remove any outer clothing, head covering, gloves, foot- wear, or socks or to surrender a bag or other container under section 139AAB(2), a teacher or an authorised staff member may take any disciplinary steps, or steps to manage the student’s behaviour, that the teacher or authorised staff member considers reasonable.

Section 139AAF: inserted, on 1 January 2014, by section 28 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
139AAG Power to search storage containers not affected Nothing in section 139AAA or 139AAB limits or affects any power to search any locker, desk, or other receptacle provided to students for storage purposes.

216 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 11 s 139B Section 139AAG: inserted, on 1 January 2014, by section 28 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
139AAH Rules about surrender and retention of property and searches (1) The Secretary must make rules (which must be consistent with this Act) regu- lating the practice and procedure to be followed by boards, principals, teachers, and authorised staff members under sections 139AAA to 139AAF, including, without limitation, rules— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) providing for the keeping of written records relating to the use of the powers under section 139AAA; and prescribing requirements relating to the keeping of written records under section 139AAB; and prescribing the procedure for authorising staff members to exercise powers or carry out functions under sections 139AAA to 139AAI; and specifying the circumstances in which items may be disposed of under section 139AAA(4)(b); and setting out requirements for the storage of items and computers and other electronic devices under section 139AAA(6); and making provision for the return of items and computers and other elec- tronic devices under section 139AAA(7)(a).
(2) Rules made under this section are a legislative instrument and a disallowable instrument for the purposes of the Legislation Act 2012 and must be presented to the House of Representatives under section 41 of that Act.

Section 139AAH: inserted, on 1 January 2014, by section 28 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
139AAI Guidelines about surrender and retention of property and searches (1) (2) The Secretary must issue guidelines for the exercise of powers and carrying out of functions under sections 139AAA to 139AAH.

Boards, principals, teachers, and authorised staff members must have regard to guidelines issued under subsection (1).

Section 139AAI: inserted, on 1 January 2014, by section 28 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
139B Building Act 2004 (1) Where any person making an inspection under this Act believes that any build- ing or sitework does not comply with the Building Act 2004, that person shall by notice in writing give to the appropriate territorial authority details of the respects in which the building or sitework is believed not to comply.

(2) For the purposes of this section, the terms building, sitework, and territorial authority, have the meanings ascribed to them by the Building Act 2004.
Section 139B: inserted, on 1 July 1992, by section 92(1) of the Building Act 1991 (1991 No 150).

217 Part 11 s 139C Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 139B heading: amended, on 31 March 2005, by section 414 of the Building Act 2004 (2004 No 72).

Section 139B(1): amended, on 31 March 2005, by section 414 of the Building Act 2004 (2004 No 72).

Section 139B(2): amended, on 31 March 2005, by section 414 of the Building Act 2004 (2004 No 72).
139C Offence of insulting, abusing, or intimidating staff (1) Every person commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not ex- ceeding $1,000, who intentionally insults, abuses, or intimidates a teacher or member of staff of a registered school— (a) within the presence or hearing of any student of the school; and (b) while on school premises, or in any other place where students of the school are assembled for school purposes.
(2) However, no student of the school may be charged with an offence under sub- section (1).

Compare: 1964 No 135 s 195 Section 139C: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 139C(1): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 22 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 139C(1): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).
139D School transport (1) The Secretary for Education may assist in the provision of school transport by doing any of the following: (a) (b) (c) paying schools to provide school transport to their students: arranging transport providers to provide school transport: contributing to the cost of parents providing school transport.
(2) In this section,— school means registered schools, early childhood services (as defined in sec- tion 120), and certified playgroups school transport means the transport of students to and from school, to and from any educational activity approved by the Secretary, or both.

Compare: 1964 No 135 ss 201A–201D Section 139D: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
139E Bonds for trainee teachers (1) The Minister may enter into an agreement under this section with any person who undertakes teacher training.
(2) The agreement must provide for— 218 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 11 s 143 (a) (b) payment by the Minister to the person of an amount of money on condi- tion that the person will work in New Zealand as a teacher, on comple- tion of the teacher training, for a specified period; and an undertaking by the person that, if he or she defaults on the condition, he or she will repay (in full or on a pro-rata basis, as determined under the agreement) the amount paid under the agreement.
(3) The Minister may require that the agreement be signed by a guarantor for the person, in which case the guarantor is jointly and severally liable with the per- son under the agreement.

(4) [Repealed] Compare: 1964 No 135 s 197 Section 139E: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 139E(4): repealed, on 20 September 2007, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 52).
140 Initial appointment of primary teachers [Repealed] Section 140: repealed, on 19 December 1998, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

141 Consequential amendments to Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975 [Repealed] Section 141: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 97 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
142 Other consequential amendments, repeals, revocations, and savings (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) The provisions of the Education Act 1964 specified in Schedule 9 are hereby consequentially amended in the manner indicated in it.

The enactments specified in Schedule 10 are hereby consequentially amended in the manner indicated in it.

The enactments specified in Schedule 11 are hereby consequentially repealed.

The regulations specified in Schedule 12 are hereby consequentially revoked.
The repeal by subsection (3) of section 12 of the Education Amendment Act 1932–33 does not affect the proviso to section 2 of the Wellington College and Girls’ High School Act 1887.

143 Education boards and secondary schools councils abolished (1) Every education board and secondary schools council established, or deemed to have been established, under the Education Act 1964 is hereby abolished.
(2) All rights, assets, liabilities, and debts that an education board or secondary schools council had immediately before the commencement of this section 219 Part 11 s 144 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 shall be deemed to have become rights, assets, liabilities, and debts of the Min- ister.
(3) [Repealed] (4) Notwithstanding subsection (2), where rights and liabilities under a contract of an education board or secondary schools council have become rights and liabil- ities of the Minister, the Minister may, by notice in writing to the other party or parties to the contract and to the board or boards concerned, declare the board or boards to be successors to the education board or secondary schools council in relation to the contract; and in that case, all the Minister’s rights and liabil- ities under the contract shall be deemed to have become rights and liabilities of the board or boards.
(5) For the avoidance of doubt, it is hereby declared that the Minister may, without further authority than this section, give or transfer to, or vest in, the board of a school formerly administered by an education board or secondary schools council any asset (including land)— (a) formerly owned by the education board or secondary schools council; and (b) vested in the Minister by subsection (2),— unincumbered, or subject to any incumbrance.
Section 143(3): repealed, on 21 April 2005, by section 67(1) of the Public Records Act 2005 (2005 No 40).

Section 143(5): inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 29 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

144 Department of Education abolished (1) The Department of Education that existed immediately before the commence- ment of this Part is hereby abolished.
(2) All references in— (a) (b) any Act, regulation, or other enactment, passed, made or enacted before the commencement of this Part; or any contract, agreement, deed, instrument, application, licence, notice, or other document entered into, made, granted, given, or executed before that commencement,— to the Department of Education, or to the Director-General or Director of Edu- cation, shall be read, respectively, as references to the Ministry or the Secre- tary.
144A Secretary may require information for proper administration of Act (1) The Secretary may, by written notice to— (a) the board of any State school (within the meaning of section 2(1)); or (ab) the sponsor of any partnership school kura hourua; or 220 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 11 s 144A (b) the service provider who operates any licensed early childhood service (within the meaning of section 309) or any certificated playgroup; or (c) the managers of any school registered under section 35A,— require the board, sponsor, service provider, or managers to give the Secretary, within a time specified in the notice, any information specified in the notice; and the board, sponsor, service provider, or managers shall within that time give the Secretary in writing all information so required that is reasonably necessary or desirable for the Secretary to have for the proper administration of this Act.
(1A) Information required by the Secretary under this section that identifies indi- viduals may be used only for the following purposes: (a) (b) statistical purposes: ensuring that institutions and students receive relevant resourcing: (c) monitoring, and ensuring students’ rights in respect of, enrolment and at- tendance.
(2) For the purposes of the provisions of this Act relating to the registration and inspection of private schools, the following information is relevant to the ques- tion of whether or not a school meets the criteria for registration as a private school: (a) (b) information that is required under subsection (1) to be given to the Sec- retary; and information that is reasonably necessary or desirable for the Secretary to have for the proper administration of this Act.
Section 144A: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 30 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 144A heading: amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 38(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 144A(1): amended, on 13 June 2013, by section 29(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 144A(1): amended, on 1 December 2008, by section 57 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 144A(1): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 38(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 144A(1)(ab): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 29(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 144A(1)(b): replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 57 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 144A(1)(c): amended, on 21 December 2010, by section 28(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
Section 144A(1A): inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 38(3) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 144A(2): replaced, on 21 December 2010, by section 28(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

221 Part 11 s 144B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 144B Purpose of sections 144C to 144E The purpose of sections 144C to 144E is to help ensure the safety of students who board at hostels.
Section 144B: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 39 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
144C Regulations about school hostels (1) The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations for all or any of the following purposes: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) adopting minimum standards that apply to hostel premises and facilities: adopting codes of practice relating to the management of hostels: prescribing offences for failing to comply with minimum standards or codes of practice adopted by regulations, and providing for a penalty on conviction for any such offence to be a fine not exceeding $10,000: providing for exemptions from the application of minimum standards or codes of practice: prescribing a system of licensing for hostels, which may include provi- sions— (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) providing for different sorts of licences: setting out the conditions to be met before a licence may be issued: prescribing the circumstances in which conditions may be im- posed on a licence: setting out the conditions or type of conditions that may attach to a licence: prohibiting students from boarding at an unlicensed hostel: prohibiting the payment of a boarding bursary, or any government subsidy relating to the cost of boarding at a hostel, in respect of a student boarding at an unlicensed hostel: (vii) prescribing offences for failure to comply with all or any licence conditions, and providing for a penalty on conviction for any such offence to be a fine not exceeding $10,000: (viii) providing for the suspension or cancellation of any licence: (ix) (x) establishing a licensing body: prescribing fees
 payable on application for, or renewal of, a licence, and for the return or refund of any fees in specified cir- cumstances: (f) establishing a complaints procedure relating to complaints by students, parents, boards, or sponsors about hostels: 222 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 11 s 144D (g) providing for any other matters necessary or expedient for giving effect to the purpose described in section 144B.
(2) Regulations made under subsection (1) may relate to all hostels, individual hos- tels, hostels of specified classes, or parts of hostels.

Section 144C: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 39 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 144C(1)(a): amended, on 5 August 2013, by section 77(3) of the Legislation Act 2012 (2012 No 119).

Section 144C(1)(b): amended, on 5 August 2013, by section 77(3) of the Legislation Act 2012 (2012 No 119).
Section 144C(1)(c): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

Section 144C(1)(e)(vii): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

Section 144C(1)(f): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 23 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
144D Inspection of hostels (1) An authorised person may at any reasonable time do any or all of the follow- ing: (a) (b) (c) enter any hostel premises and inspect the premises and facilities: inspect, and make and remove copies of, any information relating to the management of the hostel: require any person at a hostel to make or provide statements, in whatever form or manner is reasonable in the circumstances, about any matter re- lating to the safety of students who board at the hostel.
(2) An authorised person may exercise the powers in subsection (1) only for the purpose of monitoring compliance with minimum standards, codes of practice, licences, or licence conditions.
(3) (4) The person in charge (or apparent charge) of the hostel must, if an authorised person requests it, co-operate in allowing the authorised person access to the premises, facilities, and information relating to the management of the hostel, including assisting the authorised person to copy (in usable form) any informa- tion required for the inspection.
The person in charge (or apparent charge) of a hostel commits an offence and is liable upon conviction to a fine not exceeding $5,000 if he or she fails, without reasonable excuse, to comply with subsection (3).
(5) An authorised person may not enter or inspect the room or sleeping area of a student accommodated at the hostel unless— (a) the authorised person believes on reasonable grounds that entry or in- spection is necessary for a purpose specified in subsection (2); and 223 Part 11 s 144E Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) prior notice of the inspection is given to the student, and the purpose of the inspection is explained; and (c) the student is present during the inspection.
Section 144D: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 39 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 144D(4): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

144E Authorised person for purpose of section 144D (1) The Minister may, by notice in writing, appoint any person as an authorised person for the purpose of exercising the powers in section 144D.
(2) An authorisation under subsection (1) must state— (a) (b) (c) the name of the authorised person; and the powers that he or she may exercise under section 144D; and the date on which the authorisation was given, and the date (if any) on which it expires.
(3) When an authorised person is exercising powers under section 144D, he or she must carry a copy of his or her authorisation, and must show it,— (a) (b) on entering a hostel to be inspected, to the person in charge, or apparent charge, of the hostel; and if the authorised person wishes to speak to any person in connection with the inspection, to that person.

Section 144E: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 39 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Part 12 Establishment of schools Part 12: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).
145AAA Purpose of Part The purpose of this Part is to— (a) (b) (c) enable the provision of a schooling network that assists parents to meet their obligations to enrol their children at school; and assist the efficient and effective use of the government’s investment in schooling; and recognise the role of diversity in the provision of schooling, including the provision of Māori medium education.
Section 145AAA: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 99 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
224 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 145 Interpretation Education Act 1989 Part 12 s 145 (1) In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— board means a board of trustees constituted under Part 9; and, in relation to a State school, means the school’s board composite school means a school established under section 146 as a composite school correspondence school means a school for the time being designated under section 152(1) as a correspondence school intermediate department means a department established under section 149 intermediate school means a school established under section 146 as an inter- mediate school Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being re- sponsible for the administration of this Part Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part primary school means a school established under section 146 as a primary school or an intermediate school secondary school means a school established under section 146 as a secondary school Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry single sex school means a school maintained wholly or principally for students of one sex; and includes a school declared by notice under section 146A to be a boys’ school or a girls’ school State integrated school has the same meaning as in section 2(1) State school means a school that is a primary, composite, or secondary school teachers college means a college established under section 106 of the Educa- tion Act 1964.
(2) For the purposes of this Act,— (aa) every school— (i) (ii) (iii) that was, or is deemed by this subsection to have been, established under section 146; and that immediately before the commencement of the Education Amendment Act 1991 was a secondary school; and at which no male students (or female students) were enrolled in 1990,— shall be deemed to have been established as a girls’ school (or a boys’ school) under section 146: 225 Part 12 s 146 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) every school other than a composite school that was, on 31 December 1989, a primary school within the meaning of section 2(1) of the Educa- tion Act 1964 shall be deemed to have been established under section 146 as a primary school: every school other than a composite school that was, on 31 December 1989, a secondary school within the meaning of section 2(1) of the Edu- cation Act 1964 shall be deemed to have been established under section 146 as a secondary school: every department that was, on 31 December 1989, an intermediate de- partment within the meaning of section 2(1) of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed to have been established under section 149 as an inter- mediate department: every school other than a composite school that was, on 31 December 1989, an intermediate school within the meaning of section 2(1) of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed to have been established under sec- tion 146 as an intermediate school: every school that was, on 31 December 1989, a composite school within the meaning of section 2(1) of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed to have been established under section 146 as a composite school.
Section 145: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 145(1) community education convener: repealed, on 20 June 1991, by section 11(3) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Section 145(1) correspondence school: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 33 of the Educa- tion Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 145(1) integrated school: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 100(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 145(1) Minister: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(5) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 145(1) Ministry: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(5) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
Section 145(1) single sex school: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 40 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 145(1) State integrated school: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 100(3) of the Educa- tion (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 145(2)(aa): inserted, on 20 June 1991, by section 9(3) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).
146 Minister may establish schools (1) Subject to section 157 and to subsection (2), the Minister may by notice in the Gazette— (a) (ab) describing the place where the school is to be located; and in the case of a secondary school, specifying whether it is a boys’ school, a girls’ school, or a co-educational school; and 226 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12 s 146A (b) specifying a name for the school,— establish a new school.
(1A) A decision to establish a school under subsection (1) is in the Minister’s abso- lute discretion.

(2) Every new school established under this section shall be established as a pri- mary, intermediate, secondary, or composite school; and the notice establishing it shall specify which class of school it is.
(3) A notice under subsection (1) establishing a new school may specify the class levels for which education may be given at the school and may provide for dif- ferent class levels to be phased in over a specified period or periods.

(4) A notice under subsection (1) establishing a new primary school may designate the school as a contributing school.

Section 146: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).
Section 146(1)(ab): inserted, on 20 June 1991, by section 9(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Section 146(1A): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 101 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 146(3): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 34 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 146(4): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 34 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
146A Single sex schools (1) (2) (3) Subject to section 157, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, declare any school to be a boys’ school, a girls’ school, or a co-educational school.

The declaration shall come into effect on the day 5 months after the first day of August after the notice is published.
Subject to section 157(2), the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, limit, in relation to a specified single sex school,— (a) (b) in the case of a boys’ school, the number of girls who may enrol at it, or the proportion of the total roll of the school that may be girls: in the case of a girls’ school, the number of boys who may enrol at it, or the proportion of the total roll of the school that may be boys.
(4) In setting limits on a school under subsection (3), the Minister must have re- gard to the necessity of safeguarding the single-sex nature of the school.

Section 146A: inserted, on 20 June 1991, by section 9(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Section 146A(1): amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 146A(3): inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 41 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
227 Part 12 s 147 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 146A(4): inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 41 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

147 Names of State schools (1) (2) (3) Subject to subsections (2) and (4), the name of a State school established after 31 December 1989 shall be the name specified in the notice establishing it.
Subject to subsection (4), the name of a State school whose class has been changed under section 153 shall be the name specified in the last notice chang- ing its class.

Subject to subsections (2) and (4), the name of a State school established be- fore 1 January 1990 shall be the name it had on 1 December 1989.

(4) With the Secretary’s written consent, the board of a State school may, subject to section 156AA(3)(a)(i), by resolution, change the school’s name.
(5) The Secretary shall not withhold consent to the change of a State school’s name unless satisfied that the proposed new or amended name is inappropriate.

Section 147: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 147(4): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 102 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 147(5): amended, on 1 January 1992, by section 21 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
148 Normal schools, etc (1) Subject to section 157, the Minister may by notice in the Gazette— (a) (b) designate 1 or more specified primary schools as normal or model schools for providers of pre-service teacher education: designate within a specified primary school a normal or model school, or model class, for providers of pre-service teacher education: (c) revoke any designation under this section.

(2) Nothing in subsection (1) applies to a State integrated school.
Every school that was on 31 December 1989 designated a normal or model school under section 72 of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed to have been designated a normal school under this section.

Every normal or model school, or model class, that was on 31 December 1989 designated within a primary school under section 72 of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed so to have been designated under this Act.
Compare: 1964 No 135 s 72 Section 148: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 148(1)(a): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 35 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 148(1)(b): amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 35 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
(3) (4) 228 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12 s 150 Section 148(2): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 103 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
149 Intermediate departments Subject to section 157, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette,— (a) establish an intermediate department— (i) (ii) within a composite school that is not a State integrated school; or to form part of a secondary school that is not a State integrated school; or (b) disestablish any intermediate department.

Compare: 1964 No 135 s 73 Section 149: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).
Section 149(a)(i): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 104(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 149(a)(ii): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 104(2) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

150 Contributing schools (1) Subject to section 157, and to Part 33, the Minister shall from time to time de- termine which primary schools are to be contributing schools.
(2) Where the Minister determines that a primary school is to be or cease to be a contributing school, the Minister shall give the board of the primary school written notice of the determination.
(3) Subject to subsection (4), while a primary school is a contributing school, the board shall limit the education given at the school to the education described in the syllabus for— (a) classes not higher than standard 4; and (b) where the Minister so allows in a notice under subsection (2), classes not higher than form 1.
(4) (5) (6) If satisfied that there are enrolled at a contributing school students whose edu- cation at the school is wholly or in part bilingual, the Minister may, by written notice to the board specifying the languages concerned, permit the board to give education to such students in accordance with conditions specified in the notice.
Every school that was on 31 December 1989 a contributing school of any other school under section 74 of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed so to have been designated under subsection (1).

This section applies to a school designated as a contributing school under sec- tion 146(4) as if the school had become a contributing school under subsection (1) and the Minister had given the school’s board the appropriate notice under subsection (2).
229 Part 12 s 151 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (7) In determining that a school should be or should cease to be a contributing school, the Minister may provide for the provision of education at specified class levels to be phased in or phased out (as the case may require) over a spe- cified period or periods.

Compare: 1964 No 135 s 74 Section 150: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).
Section 150(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 105 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 150(1): amended, on 20 June 1991, by section 10(1)(a) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Section 150(2): amended, on 20 June 1991, by section 10(1)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Section 150(6): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 150(7): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

151 Provision of education at composite schools Subject to section 157, and to Part 33, the Minister may from time to time, by written notice to the board of a composite school, require the board to provide education for the class levels specified in the notice; and the board must pro- vide education at the school accordingly.
Section 151: replaced, on 19 December 1998, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 151: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 106 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
152 Correspondence schools (1) Subject to subsection (2), the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette,— (a) when establishing the school, or at any other time, designate a State school that is not an integrated school as a correspondence school; or (b) at any time, remove a designation under paragraph (a).
(2) (3) The Minister shall not designate a school as a correspondence school, or cancel a designation as a correspondence school, without having regard to the educa- tion of people unable conveniently to get tuition from a suitable State school that is not a correspondence school.
Subject to sections 102(7) and 104, where an existing State school is designa- ted as a correspondence school, its board shall continue in office as constituted until a day specified by the Minister in the notice in the Gazette under section 95(1) determining the composition of its board, but shall go out of office on that day.

(4) With the consent of the Minister, a correspondence school may provide early childhood education.
230 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12 s 153 (5) The school that was, immediately before the commencement of the Education Amendment Act 1989, a correspondence school shall be deemed to have been— (a) (b) established under section 146 as a composite school; and designated under subsection (1) as a correspondence school.

Compare: 1964 No 135 s 105 Section 152: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).
153 Minister may change class of school (1) Subject to section 157, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette,— (a) (b) (c) (d) declare a composite school to be a primary, intermediate, or secondary school; or declare a primary, intermediate, or secondary school to be a composite school; or declare an intermediate school to be a primary or secondary school; or declare a primary or secondary school to be an intermediate school.
(1A) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, specify the class levels for which education must be given at a school (whether it is an existing school or a school whose class has been changed under subsection (1)) and provide for class levels to be phased in over a specified period or periods.
(1B) A decision to change the class of a school under subsection (1) or to specify class levels (and, if relevant, to provide for the phasing in of these) under sub- section (1A) is in the Minister’s absolute discretion.

(2) Nothing in subsection (1) applies to a State integrated school.
(3) A notice under subsection (1), shall specify a day (not earlier than the end of the term after the term during which the notice is published) on which it is to take effect; and the school shall become a school of the class concerned, and cease to be a school of the class it was, on the day specified.
(4) Subject to sections 102(7) and 104, where an existing State school becomes a school of a different class, its board shall continue in office as constituted until the close of the seventh day after the first election following its change of class.

Section 153: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 153(1A): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 38(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 153(1B): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 108(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 153(2): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 108(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 153(4): amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 11(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
231 Part 12 s 154 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 154 Closure of schools (1) (2) (2A) Subject to section 157, and to section 438, where, after consulting the board of a State school, the Minister is satisfied that it should be closed, the Minister may, by written notice to the board, ask the board if it has any arguments in favour of the school’s staying open.
The Minister may, after considering all arguments (if any) received from the board within 28 days after it got notice under subsection (1), by notice in the Gazette specifying a day on which the school will close, close the school; and the school shall cease to be established on the day specified.
If the board of a State school at any time advises or indicates to the Minister in writing that it agrees to or does not oppose the proposed closure of the school, the Minister may (despite anything in subsection (1) or subsection (2) and re- gardless of whether the Minister has formally begun or completed the neces- sary consultation under subsection (1)) close the school by notice under sub- section (2) at any time on or after receiving the board’s written advice.
(2B) A decision to close a school under subsection (2) is in the Minister’s absolute discretion.

(3) Where a school is closed under this section,— (a) (b) its board shall thereupon be deemed to have been dissolved; and all assets, liabilities, and debts that the board had immediately before dissolution shall be deemed to have become assets, liabilities, and debts of the Minister.
(3A) Without limiting the rights or privileges conferred on the Minister by subsec- tion (3)(b), the following provisions apply to property that was, immediately before dissolution, held by the board in trust for the benefit of the school: (a) (b) the Minister may at any time apply to Public Trust to devise a scheme to modify the trust for the benefit of another school: if the Minister applies under paragraph (a) to Public Trust, subsections (2) to (7) of section 156C apply with any necessary modifications (as if the property were property to which that section applies).
(4) A school that has been closed may not be reopened, except by being establish- ed again under this Act.

Section 154: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 154(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 109(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 154(2A): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 39(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 154(2B): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 109(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 154(3A): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 39(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

232 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12 s 154A Section 154(3A)(a): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).
Section 154(3A)(b): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).
154A Minister may redesignate, or remove designation from, schools (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, and after consultation with the board of the affected school, do any of the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) designate a State school that is not a Kura Kaupapa Maori or a designa- ted character school as a Kura Kaupapa Maori or a designated character school: remove the designation of a Kura Kaupapa Maori and redesignate it as a designated character school: remove the designation of a designated character school and redesignate it as a Kura Kaupapa Maori: remove the designation of a Kura Kaupapa Maori or a designated char- acter school while keeping the school established as a State school.
(2) The designation or removal of designation of a school under this section takes effect on the date specified in the notice under subsection (1) and, on and from that date,— (a) (b) (c) (d) section 156 applies to a school that is designated as a Kura Kaupapa Maori; and section 156 applies to a school that is designated as a designated charac- ter school; and section 156 ceases to apply to a school that has its designation as a Kura Kaupapa Maori removed; and section 156 ceases to apply to a school that has its designation as a des- ignated character school removed.
(3) (4) The notice under subsection (1) may prescribe a new name for the redesignated school.

Section 156 applies in respect of a school that is, or is to be, redesignated as a Kura Kaupapa Maori in the same way as it would apply if the school were be- ing established as a Kura Kaupapa Maori.

(5) No school may have its designation as a Kura Kaupapa Maori removed unless the Minister has first consulted with te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua (as identified under section 155B).
(6) No State school may be designated as a Kura Kaupapa Maori unless the Minis- ter has first consulted with te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua on the ability of the school to operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua (as defined in section 155A).
233 Part 12 s 155 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (7) Section 156 applies in respect of a school that is, or is to be, redesignated as a designated character school in the same way as it would apply if the school were being established as a designated character school.

Section 154A: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 154A(2)(a): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 110(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 154A(2)(c): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 110(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 154(4): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 110(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
155 Kura Kaupapa Maori When establishing a State school as a designated character school under sec- tions 156 and 156AA, the Minister may also designate that designated charac- ter school as a Kura Kaupapa Māori.

Section 155: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 111 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

155A Te Aho Matua (1) (2) (3) Te Aho Matua is a statement that sets out an approach to teaching and learning that applies to schools designated under section 155.
The official version of Te Aho Matua is the statement (including any gazetted amendments) in te reo Maori that is— (a) (b) prepared by te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua (as defined in section 155B); and published in the Gazette under the authority of the Minister.

The Minister may from time to time authorise the reprinting of all, or the amendment of any part, of Te Aho Matua in the Gazette, but only if asked to do so by te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua.
(4) When all, or an amendment to any part, of Te Aho Matua is published in the Gazette, the Minister must ensure that an explanation in English of Te Aho Ma- tua, or of the amendment (as the case may be), is published in the same Gaz- ette.

(5) The explanation must be one that te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua has approved as being an accurate interpretation of the meaning of the Maori text.

Section 155A: inserted, on 17 July 1999, by section 3 of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).
155B Te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua Te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua is the body commonly known as Te Runanga Nui o Nga Kura Kaupapa Maori o Aotearoa, being the most suitable to be responsible for determining the content of Te Aho Matua, and for ensuring that it is not changed to the detriment of Maori.

234 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12 s 155E Section 155B: inserted, on 17 July 1999, by section 3 of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).
155C Application of section 155 After the commencement of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999, the Minister may establish a school as a Kura Kaupapa Maori only in ac- cordance with section 155 as substituted by that Act.

Section 155C: inserted, on 17 July 1999, by section 3 of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).
155D Provisions applying to Kura Kaupapa Maori established before commencement of Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1) In this section and section 155E,— existing Kura means a Kura Kaupapa Maori established under section 155 be- fore the commencement of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 new section 155 means section 155 as substituted by the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999.
(2) After the commencement of this section, existing Kura remain established as Kura Kaupapa Maori even if they would not be entitled to be established under new section 155.

(3) (4) (5) Section 156(6)(a)(i), (8), and (10) applies to all existing Kura.
In relation to an existing Kura other than one acknowledged under section 155E, the Minister may from time to time, after consultation with the board of the Kura, by notice in the Gazette, amend— (a) (b) the aims, purposes, and objectives of the Kura; or the constitution of the board.
In relation to an existing Kura other than one acknowledged under section 155E, the board of the Kura may refuse to enrol any person whose parents do not accept that the school operates in accordance with the school’s aims, pur- poses, and objectives.

Section 155D: inserted, on 17 July 1999, by section 3 of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).

Section 155D(3): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 112 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
155E Acknowledgment of adoption of Te Aho Matua (1) The Minister may from time to time, after consultation with the board of an existing Kura, by notice in the Gazette, acknowledge that the Kura operates in accordance with Te Aho Matua, and must, in the notice,— (a) replace the aims, purposes, and objectives of the Kura by a statement that the school will operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua (as re- ferred to in section 156AA(3)(a)(ii)); and 235 Part 12 s 155F Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) summarise any special characteristics of the school (as referred to in sec- tion 156AA(3)(a)(iii)).
(2) On publication of a notice under subsection (1), the Kura becomes subject to all the relevant provisions of section 156.

Section 155E: inserted, on 17 July 1999, by section 3 of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).

Section 155E(1)(a): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 113(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 155E(1)(b): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 113(2) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 155E(2): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 113(3) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

155F Protection of term Kura Kaupapa Maori (1) No registered school may use the term Kura Kaupapa Maori in its name unless the school is established under section 156.

(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to a registered school that, immediately before the commencement of this section, is not established under section 155 but uses the term Kura Kaupapa Maori in its name.
Section 155F: inserted, on 17 July 1999, by section 3 of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).

Section 155F(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 114 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

156 Designated character schools (1) When establishing a State school, the Minister may designate the school as a designated character school.

(2) (3) (4) The Minister must do so in accordance with this section and section 156AA.
The Minister may in the Minister’s absolute discretion refuse to establish a des- ignated character school.
The Minister may not establish a school as a designated character school unless satisfied that, if the school is established,— (a) for a school that will also be designated a Kura Kaupapa Māori under section 155,— (i) (ii) te reo Māori will be the principal language of instruction at the school; and the school will operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua (as de- fined in section 155A): (b) for any other type of designated character school, the school will have a character that is in some specific way or ways different from the charac- ter of ordinary State schools (its different character): 236 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12 s 156AA (c) (d) for any designated character school, it is desirable for students whose pa- rents want them to do so to get such an education: for any designated character school, students at the school will get an education of a kind that differs significantly from the education they would get at an ordinary State school.
(5) The Minister may not also designate a designated character school as a Kura Kaupapa Māori unless he or she has first consulted te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua on the ability of the school to operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua.
(6) The board of a designated character school must ensure,— (a) for a Kura Kaupapa Māori, that— (i) te reo Māori is the principal language of instruction at the school; and (ii) the school operates in accordance with Te Aho Matua: (b) for any other type of designated character school, that— (i) the aims, purposes, and objectives of the school’s different charac- ter are set out in the school’s strategic plan under Schedule 6; and (ii) the school operates consistently with its different character.
(7) A designated character school that is a Kura Kaupapa Māori may have other special characteristics that give it a particular character (its special character- istics).

(8) The Secretary must from time to time, by written notice to a designated charac- ter school, fix a maximum roll of the school, and the board must ensure that the number of students enrolled at the school is not more than the maximum roll.
(9) A board of a designated character school may refuse to enrol students whose parents do not accept,— (a) (b) for a Kura Kaupapa Māori, that the school operates in accordance with Te Aho Matua: for any other type of designated character school, that the school oper- ates consistently with its different character.

(10) Except as provided in this section and section 11PB, this Act and the Education Act 1964 apply to every designated character school as if it were not a designa- ted character school.
Section 156: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 115 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

156AA Process for establishing designated character schools (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette when establishing a State school, designate the school as a designated character school (see section 156) and (if applicable) also designate a school as a Kura Kaupapa Māori (see section 155).
237 Part 12 s 156A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) Before doing so, the Minister must be satisfied of the matters in section 156(4) and have undertaken consultation under section 156(5) (as relevant in each case).
(3) The notice establishing a designated character school must,— (a) for a Kura Kaupapa Māori,— (i) (ii) specify the name of the school, which must at all times begin with the words “Te Kura Kaupapa Māori o”; and state that the school will operate in accordance with Te Aho Ma- tua; and (iii) summarise any other special characteristics of the school: (b) (c) for any other type of designated character school, describe the different character of the school (as defined in section 156(4)(b)): for any designated character school, state the constitution of the school’s board.
(4) The Minister may from time to time, after consultation with the board of a des- ignated character school, by notice in the Gazette,— (a) for a Kura Kaupapa Māori,— (i) amend the name of the school (but not so as to omit the words “Te Kura Kaupapa Māori o”): (ii) amend the summary of special characteristics of the school: (b) (c) for any other type of designated character school, amend the description of the different character of the school: for any designated character school, amend the statement of the constitu- tion of the board.
Section 156AA: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 115 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
156A Minister may merge schools (1) Subject to sections 156B and 157, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, merge 1 or more State schools (merging schools) that are not State integrated schools with another State school (the continuing school) that is not a State in- tegrated school, if the Minister is satisfied that— (a) (b) (c) each board of a school concerned has made reasonable efforts to consult the parents of students (other than adult students) enrolled full-time at the school about the proposed merger; and the consultation that has taken place has been adequate in all the circum- stances; and the creation of a single school by the proposed merger is appropriate in the circumstances.
238 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12 s 156AB (1A) A decision to merge a school under subsection (1) is in the Minister’s absolute discretion.
(2) A notice under subsection (1) takes effect on a day (not earlier than the end of the term after the term during which the notice is published) specified in the notice, and has effect as follows: (a) (b) the merging schools are part of the continuing school: if the continuing school and each merging school are not already admin- istered by a single board,— (i) (ii) the board of each merging school is dissolved; and all rights, assets, liabilities, and debts of each merging school are vested in the board of the continuing school: (c) the continuing school is a school of the class specified in the notice and provides education for the student class levels specified in the notice.
(3) A notice under subsection (1) does not affect the name of the continuing school.
(4) Before a notice under subsection (1) takes effect, the Minister must give notice in the Gazette of whether— (a) during the period between a date specified in the notice and the date on which new trustees take office following an election (the interim period), the board of the continuing school is to be— (i) the board of the continuing school plus co-opted trustees repre- senting each merging school (a continuing board); or (ii) a board appointed by the Minister (an appointed board); or (b) the board of the continuing school is to have an alternative constitution approved under section 98A.
Section 156A: replaced, on 13 June 2013, by section 30 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 156A(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 116(1)(a) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 156A(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 116(1)(b) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 156A(1A): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 116(2) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 156A(4)(b): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 116(3) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
156AB Election or appointment of boards of continuing schools (1) If the notice under section 156A(4) provides that the board of the continuing school is to be a continuing board,— (a) the board of the continuing school must, within 28 days after the date of that notice, co-opt at least 1 trustee in respect of each of the merging 239 Part 12 s 156AB Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 schools so that each merging school is represented on the continuing board; and (b) (c) each of those co-opted trustees holds office until the end of the interim period (unless replaced earlier); and section 100 (which limits the co-option and appointment of trustees) does not apply to trustees co-opted for an interim period.
(2) If the notice under section 156A(4) provides that the board of the continuing school is to be an appointed board,— (a) (b) the notice must specify the constitution of the appointed board during the interim period, including how many trustees (if any) the board may co-opt; and the Minister is not bound by section 94 in determining the constitution of the appointed board.
(3) When a board is appointed by the Minister,— (a) (b) the trustees of the continuing school go out of office at the close of the day before the start of the interim period; and the trustees of the appointed board take office on the date of the start of the interim period.
(4) A continuing board or an appointed board may make decisions and exercise powers during the interim period both for the purposes of the continuing school before the merger and for the purpose of providing and preparing for the con- tinuing school after the merger has taken effect.
(5) Unless the board of the continuing school was (immediately before the merger took effect) a combined board established under section 110, an appointed board or a continuing board that replaces it must hold elections for a new board on a day that is not later than 3 months after the date the merger takes effect.
If an appointed board or a continuing board is required by subsection (5) to hold elections for a new board, all its elected, appointed, and co-opted trustees holding office immediately before the election day go out of office on the close of the day before the date on which the newly elected trustees are to take office.
If the merger takes effect after 31 October in the year before an election year and before 31 December in that election year, a board that is required to hold an election under subsection (5) does not have to hold the election until the next election year.

Section 156AB: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 30 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 156AB(1)(c): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 117 of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
(6) (7) 240 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12 s 156C 156AC Alternative constitutions for continuing schools (1) (2) (3) If a notice under section 156A(4) provides that the board of the continuing school is to have an alternative constitution approved under section 98A, the notice must specify the date on which the alternative constitution is to take ef- fect.

The date in subsection (1) must be before the date that the notice under section 156A(1) takes effect.
The trustees of the continuing school go out of office at the close of the day before the date specified under subsection (1).

(4) A board established under section 98A may make decisions and exercise powers both for the purposes of the continuing school before the merger and for the purpose of providing and preparing for the continuing school after the merger has taken effect.

Section 156AC: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 30 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
Section 156AC(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 118 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 156AC(4): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 118 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
156B Restrictions on mergers in certain cases (1) A Kura Kaupapa Maori established after the commencement of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 may not merge or be merged with an- other Kura Kaupapa Maori or other school unless the schools involved in the merger— (a) (b) operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua; and use te reo Maori as the principal language of instruction.
(2) Any other Kura Kaupapa Maori may merge with another school only if both schools use te reo Maori as the principal language of instruction and have the same aims, purposes, and objectives.
(3) A designated character school may not merge or be merged with another desig- nated character or other school unless the schools involved in the merger have the same aims, purposes, and objectives, being the aims, purposes, and object- ives that constitute the way in which the character of each school is different from the character of ordinary State schools.

Section 156B: replaced, on 17 July 1999, by section 4 of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).
156C Property held in trust (1) This section applies to any property that, immediately before 2 or more schools merged under section 156A, was held in trust— (a) by the board of 1 (or more) of those schools; or 241 Part 12 s 156C Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) for the benefit of— (i) (ii) 1 (or more) of those schools; or the students or former students of 1 (or more) of those schools,— by any other person or body.
(2) All property to which this section applies continues to be subject to the trust concerned; but the person or body in whom it is vested may at any time apply to Public Trust to devise a scheme to modify the trust in the light of the merger of the schools concerned.
(3) If satisfied that adequate arrangements have been made to meet the costs of do- ing so, Public Trust shall— (a) (b) in consultation with the board concerned, devise; and notify the Solicitor-General of,— a scheme to modify any trust in respect of which Public Trust has received an application under this section.
(4) Where Public Trust notifies the Solicitor-General of a scheme under this sec- tion,— (a) the Solicitor-General may, by written notice to Public Trust,— (i) (ii) (iii) approve the scheme (as originally notified by Public Trust or with amendments agreed by Public Trust after consultation with the board concerned); or suggest amendments to it; or direct that it should not proceed; and (b) if the Solicitor-General directs that it should not proceed, the matter may be dealt with under the Charitable Trusts Act 1957.
(5) If, within 90 days of being notified of a scheme under this section, the Solici- tor-General does not suggest amendments to it or direct that it should not pro- ceed, the Solicitor-General shall be deemed to have approved it.

(6) Where the Solicitor-General approves a scheme notified under this section, the trust concerned shall have effect accordingly.
(7) The Solicitor-General shall not approve a scheme under this section unless satisfied that— (a) (b) it modifies the trust concerned so as best to give effect to the intentions of the testator, settlor, or other person or body by whom or which the trust was established; and subject to paragraph (a), it effects the minimum change necessary to enable the trust to operate successfully in the light of the merger of the schools concerned.
Section 156C: inserted, on 25 June 1993, by section 12 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

242 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12 s 157 Section 156C(2): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 156C(3): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 156C(4): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).
Section 156C(4)(a): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).

Section 156C(4)(a)(i): amended, on 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) of the Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100).
157 Consultations (1) (2) [Repealed] The Minister shall not— (aa) (ab) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) declare a school to be a boys’ school, a girls’ school, or a co-educational school under section 146A(1); or set limits by notice under section 146A(3) on the number of girls who may attend a boys’ school, or boys who may attend a girls’ school; or designate a primary school as a normal or model school under section 148(1)(a); or designate a normal or model school or model class within a primary school under section 148(1)(b); or revoke under paragraph (c) of subsection (1) of section 148 a designa- tion under that subsection; or establish or disestablish an intermediate department under section 149; or determine under section 150(1) that a particular school is to be or cease to be a contributing school; or limit under section 151 the education given at a composite school; or change under section 153(1) the class of a school— without consulting the board of the school concerned.
(3) The Minister shall not— (a) (aa) (b) (c) establish a school under section 146(1); or declare a school to be a boys’ school, a girls’ school, or a co-educational school under section 146A(1); or establish or disestablish an intermediate department under section 149; or determine under section 150(1) that a primary school is to be or cease to be a contributing school; or (d) limit under section 151 the education given at a composite school; or 243 Part 12 s 157A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (e) (f) (fa) change under section 153(1) the class of a school; or close a school under section 154; or redesignate, or remove a designation from, a school under section 154A; or (g) merge any school or schools with another under section 156A,— unless subsection (3A) applies, without first consulting the boards of all State schools whose rolls might, in the opinion of the Minister, be affected if the Minister takes that action.
(3A) Subsection (3)(f) and (g) does not apply if the relevant boards have already been consulted on a closure or merger option as part of a review of the provi- sion of schooling in a particular area.

(4) [Repealed] Section 157: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 157(1): repealed, on 20 June 1991, by section 11(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).
Section 157(2)(aa): inserted, on 20 June 1991, by section 9(4) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Section 157(2)(ab): inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 42 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 157(2)(e): amended, on 20 June 1991, by section 10(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Section 157(3): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 119(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 157(3)(aa): inserted, on 20 June 1991, by section 9(5) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Section 157(3)(c): replaced, on 20 June 1991, by section 10(3) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Section 157(3)(f): replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 23 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 157(3)(fa): inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 41 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 157(3)(g): inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 23 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 157(3A): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 119(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 157(4): repealed, on 20 June 1991, by section 11(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).
157A Community education forums The Minister may at any time appoint a person to— (a) convene within a specified area public meetings relating to any action the Minister proposes to consider taking under this Part; and (b) advise the Minister on the views expressed at the meetings;— 244 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12 s 158 and in that case the Minister may refuse to consider whether or not to take the action without— (c) giving the person reasonable time to convene the meetings and advise the Minister; and (d) considering any advice the person gives the Minister in that time.
Section 157A: inserted, on 20 June 1991, by section 11(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

158 Provision by one board of tuition for students enrolled at school administered by another (1) By agreement between the boards or sponsors concerned, students enrolled at a specified school may receive tuition at or from another specified school.
(1A) Despite section 79, the board or sponsor of the specified school at which the students are enrolled may pay the board or sponsor of the specified school giv- ing the tuition for that tuition.
(2) If satisfied that facilities at a State school were provided or constructed for the use of students enrolled at several State schools, the Minister may, by written notice to the school’s board, require the board (in accordance with arrange- ments specified in the notice) to do either or both of the following: (a) (b) allow the board of another State school to use the facilities for the tuition of students enrolled at the other school: provide in or by means of those facilities tuition for students enrolled at another State school.
(3) A notice under subsection (2) shall provide for the making of payments by the board of the school at which the students required to be provided with tuition are enrolled to the board of the school whose facilities are to be used; and pay- ments shall, notwithstanding section 79, be made in accordance with the provi- sions of the notice.

(3A) In subsections (1) and (1A), specified school means a State school or a partner- ship school kura hourua.
(4) [Repealed] Section 158: inserted, on 1 January 1990, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

Section 158(1): replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 24(1) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 158(1A): inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 24(1) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 158(3A): inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 24(2) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
Section 158(4): repealed, on 19 December 1998, by section 41(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

245 Part 12A s 158A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Part 12A Partnership schools kura hourua Part 12A: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158A Interpretation In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— body— (a) means a body corporate, corporation sole, or limited partnership; and (b) includes an institution or a related entity (as defined in section 164A) composite partnership school kura hourua means a partnership school kura hourua designated as a composite partnership school kura hourua by notice under section 158B institution has the meaning given by section 159(1) partnership school contract has the meaning given by section 2(1) primary partnership school kura hourua has the meaning given by section 2(1) secondary partnership school kura hourua means a partnership school kura hourua designated as a secondary partnership school kura hourua by notice under section 158B sponsor has the meaning given by section 2(1).
Section 158A: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 158A body: replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 25(1) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 158A institution: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 25(2) of the Education Legis- lation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Approval and operation of partnership schools kura hourua Heading: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158B Minister may approve sponsors (1) (2) The Minister may by notice in the Gazette approve a body to be a sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua.

The Minister has absolute discretion to refuse to approve a body to be a spon- sor under subsection (1).
(3) A notice under subsection (1) must include— (a) (b) (c) the name of the sponsor; and the place where the school is to be located; and the name of the school; and 246 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12A s 158C (d) whether the school is to be a primary, secondary, or composite partner- ship school kura hourua; and (e) (f) the class levels for which education may be given at the school; and any religious, philosophical, or other distinguishing characteristic of the school; and (g) whether all or any (and if so, which) class levels of the school are to be single-sex.
(4) A notice under subsection (1) may provide for different class levels to be phased in over a specified period or specified periods.

Section 158B: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158C Minister must appoint advisory group (1) The Minister must appoint an advisory group, consisting of at least 5, but no more than 9, members, for the purpose of advising the Minister in relation to— (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (a) (b) the approval of sponsors under section 158B; and the educational performance of partnership schools kura hourua.

The members of the advisory group must be appointed by the Minister, on terms and conditions to be determined by the Minister, by written notice to each member.
The Minister may define and vary the terms of reference of the advisory group as the Minister thinks fit.

The advisory group must comply with any terms of reference determined by the Minister under subsection (3).

The advisory group may determine its own procedure.
Every member of an advisory group appointed under subsection (1) is en- titled— (a) (b) to receive remuneration not within paragraph (b) for services as a mem- ber of the advisory group at a rate and of a kind determined by the Min- ister in accordance with the fees framework; and in accordance with the fees framework, to be reimbursed for actual and reasonable travelling and other expenses incurred in carrying out his or her duties as a member of the advisory group.
(7) For the purposes of subsection (6), fees framework means the framework de- termined by the Government from time to time for the classification and remu- neration of statutory and other bodies in which the Crown has an interest.

Section 158C: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 158C(1): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 26 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
247 Part 12A s 158D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 158D Partnership school contracts (1) The Minister may from time to time, in the name and on behalf of the Crown, enter into a contract with a sponsor for the operation, by that sponsor, of a part- nership school kura hourua.

(2) A partnership school contract must be for a fixed term.
(3) A partnership school contract must provide for— (a) objectives and performance standards for the sponsor in relation to the operation of the school; and (b) reporting requirements of the sponsor in relation to— (i) (ii) the objectives and performance standards of the sponsor under the contract; and relevant national standards published under section any 60A(1)(ba); and (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) the maximum roll of the school; and the number or percentage of teaching positions (within the meaning of section 120) that must be filled by people holding a practising certificate or limited authority to teach; and the curriculum to be taught at the school; and the qualifications to be offered by the school (if it is a secondary or com- posite partnership school kura hourua); and a procedure for the independent review of complaints against the school; and powers of intervention in the school by the Minister and the Secretary; and the termination of the contract for breach of contract; and the obligations of the sponsor, in the event of the termination or expiry of the contract, to co-operate with the Minister and to comply with any instructions issued by the Minister in order to ensure the orderly and ef- ficient transfer of the operation of the school.
(4) A partnership school contract may contain other provisions, as agreed between the Minister and the sponsor, that are not inconsistent with— (a) (b) this Act; or any regulations made under this Act.

Section 158D: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 158D(3)(d): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
248 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 158E Complaints Education Act 1989 Part 12A s 158G (1) A person who refers a complaint about a sponsor to the Ombudsman may refer a complaint to a reviewer in respect of the same matter.

(2) Subsection (1) applies— (a) (b) irrespective of whether or not the Ombudsman’s investigation is com- plete at the time of the referral to the reviewer; and if that investigation is complete at the time of the referral to the reviewer, irrespective of the outcome of that investigation.
(3) A person who refers a complaint to a reviewer about a matter that is within the jurisdiction of the Ombudsman may refer a complaint to the Ombudsman in re- spect of the same matter.

(4) Subsection (3) applies— (5) (6) (a) (b) irrespective of whether or not the reviewer’s investigation is complete at the time of the referral to the Ombudsman; and if that investigation is complete at the time of the referral to the Om- budsman, irrespective of the outcome of that investigation.
Subsection (3) is subject to section 17 of the Ombudsmen Act 1975.

In this section,— Ombudsman means an Ombudsman appointed under the Ombudsmen Act 1975 reviewer means the person or body responsible under a partnership school con- tract for the independent review of complaints against a partnership school kura hourua.

Section 158E: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158F Prohibitions on operation of partnership schools kura hourua (1) A body that is not approved to be a sponsor under section 158B may not oper- ate or purport to operate a partnership school kura hourua.

(2) A sponsor may not operate a partnership school kura hourua unless there is in place a partnership school contract between the Minister and the sponsor.

Section 158F: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158G Sponsor’s duties A sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua must— (a) (b) provide a safe physical and emotional environment for students; and ensure that the school delivers a curriculum that is in line with any foun- dation curriculum policy statements published under section 60A(1)(aa); and 249 Part 12A s 158H Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ba) ensure that in the development and delivery of the curriculum, the school has regard to any statement of National Education and Learning Prior- ities issued by the Minister under section 1A.
(c) (d) (e) assign the functions of the principal under the sections specified in sec- tion 158U(1) to an appropriately qualified person or to appropriately qualified persons; and assign the role of supervising teaching practice to an appropriately quali- fied person; and at intervals specified in the partnership school contract, inform parents of— (i) (ii) the progress of their children at the school; and any barriers to progress.
Section 158G: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 158G(ba): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 121 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
158H Sponsor to control management of partnership school kura hourua (1) A sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua must perform the sponsor’s functions and exercise the sponsor’s powers in such a way as to ensure that every student at the school is able to attain his or her highest possible standard in educational achievement.

(2) A sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua has complete discretion to con- trol the management of the school as the sponsor thinks fit.
(3) Subsection (2) is subject to any enactment, the general law of New Zealand, and the partnership school contract.

Section 158H: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

158I School rules (1) A sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua may make any rules the sponsor thinks necessary or desirable for the control and management of the school.
(2) Subsection (1) is subject to any enactment, the general law of New Zealand, and the partnership school contract.

Section 158I: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

158J Sponsor’s power to delegate (1) A sponsor may delegate any of the functions or powers of the sponsor under this Act, either generally or specifically, to any person or group of persons.

(2) A delegation under this section must be in writing.
(3) The sponsor must not delegate the general power of delegation.

250 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12A s 158K (4) The sponsor must not delegate the functions of the sponsor in sections 13 to 18 (as applied by section 158U, with the exception of sections 16 and 17D) and any rules made under section 18AA (as applied by section 158V) to the person to whom the sponsor has assigned the functions of the principal in those sec- tions and rules.
(5) A delegate to whom any functions or powers of a sponsor are delegated may,— (a) unless the delegation provides otherwise, perform the function or exer- cise the power in the same manner, subject to the same restrictions, and with the same effect as if the delegate were the sponsor; and (b) delegate the function or power only— (i) (ii) with the prior written consent of the sponsor; and subject to the same restrictions and with the same effect as if the subdelegate were the delegate.
(6) A delegate who purports to perform a function or exercise a power under a delegation— (a) is, in the absence of proof to the contrary, presumed to do so in accord- ance with the terms of that delegation; and (b) must produce evidence of his or her authority to do so, if reasonably re- quested to do so.
(7) No delegation in accordance with this Act— (a) (b) affects or prevents the performance of any function or the exercise of any power by the sponsor; or affects the responsibility of the sponsor for the actions of any delegate acting under the delegation; or (c) is affected by any change in the constitution of the sponsor.

(8) A delegation may be revoked at will by written notice to the delegate.
(9) A delegation under subsection (5)(b) may be revoked at will by written notice of the delegate to the subdelegate.

Section 158J: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158K Annual financial statements of partnership schools kura hourua (1) On a date specified in the partnership school contract, a sponsor of a partner- ship school kura hourua must give to the Secretary annual financial statements relating to the school for the year ending on a date specified in the contract.

(2) (3) The financial statements must be prepared in accordance with the partnership school contract.
The financial statements must have been audited by a qualified auditor (within the meaning of section 35 of the Financial Reporting Act 2013).

251 Part 12A s 158L Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 158K: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 158K(3): amended, on 1 July 2015, by section 17 of the Financial Reporting Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 64).
158L Partnership school kura hourua may participate in school risk management scheme (1) A sponsor may, with the consent of the Secretary, participate in a school risk management scheme established under section 78D(2).

(2) Sections 78D to 78G, any regulations made under section 78F, and any legal instrument by which a school risk management scheme is established apply to any sponsor that participates in the scheme as if it were a participating school board.
Section 158L: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158M Intervention in partnership school kura hourua by Secretary (1) This section applies if the Secretary has reasonable grounds to believe— (a) that— (i) there exists in respect of a partnership school kura hourua an emergency affecting the education or welfare of its students; or (ii) there is an imminent threat of such an emergency; and (b) that the sponsor of the school is unwilling or unable to immediately deal with that emergency or, as the case requires, that threat to the satisfaction of the Secretary.
(2) If this section applies, the Secretary may take over the management of the school from the sponsor for any period that the Secretary considers necessary in order to deal with the emergency or threatened emergency, and for that pur- pose the Secretary— (a) has and may exercise and perform, in respect of the school, all of the powers and functions that would otherwise be exercisable or performed by the sponsor: (b) has all other powers necessary or desirable.
If the Secretary takes over the management of a school under this section, the Secretary must immediately give written notice to the sponsor of that action, and of the reasons for that action.
This section applies despite anything in any partnership school contract, and nothing in this section limits or affects— (a) (b) any other right or remedy available to the Secretary or the Crown, whether under any partnership school contract or otherwise; or any liability of the sponsor under the partnership school contract or otherwise.
(3) (4) 252 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12A s 158O (5) Neither the Secretary, nor the Crown, nor any other person acting by or under the authority of the Secretary is under any civil or criminal liability for any- thing the Secretary or any such person may do or fail to do in the course of the exercise or performance or intended exercise or performance of any powers or functions under this section, unless it is shown that the Secretary or that other person acted, or failed to act, in bad faith.
Section 158M: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Enrolment in partnership schools kura hourua Heading: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158N Enrolment in partnership schools kura hourua (1) If a partnership school kura hourua receives more applications than there are places at the school, the order of priority in which applicants are to be offered places at the school is as follows: (a) (b) first priority must be given to any applicant who is the sibling of a cur- rent student of the school: second priority must be given to any applicant who is the sibling of a former student of the school: (c) third priority must be given to all other applicants.
(2) (3) If there are more applicants in any of the priority groups than there are places available, selection within the priority group must be by ballot.

If 2 or more siblings apply for places at the school at the same time, the appli- cations of those siblings must be dealt with as a single application for the pur- poses of the ballot.
(3A) A student who is enrolled in a partnership school kura hourua whose sponsor is an institution is not, by reason only of the student’s enrolment in the partner- ship school kura hourua, also enrolled in the institution.

(4) In this section, sibling has the meaning given by section 11F(3).

Section 158N: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
Section 158N(1)(b): amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 27(1) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 158N(3A): inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 27(2) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
158O Equal rights to primary and secondary education in partnership schools kura hourua (1) People who have special educational needs (whether because of disability or otherwise) have the same rights to enrol and receive education at partnership schools kura hourua as people who do not.
253 Part 12A s 158P Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) Nothing in subsection (1) affects or limits— (a) those provisions of Part 2 and this Part that relate to the suspension, ex- pulsion, and exclusion of students from partnership schools kura hourua; and (b) section 158N (enrolment in partnership schools kura hourua).

Section 158O: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158P Special education in partnership schools kura hourua Despite sections 5 and 6 (as applied by section 158U), if the Secretary and the person’s parents agree,— (a) (b) (c) a person with special educational needs who is under 21 and who turns 14 in any year may, in any later year, be or continue to be enrolled at a primary partnership school kura hourua, or in a class below form 3 at a composite partnership school kura hourua; and a person under 21 with special educational needs may be or continue to be enrolled at a secondary partnership school kura hourua, or in a class above form 2 at a composite partnership school kura hourua, who, in the opinion of the Secretary,— (i) (ii) has not completed the work of form 2; and has not completed work equivalent to the work of form 2; and a person under 21 with special educational needs may be or continue to be enrolled at a secondary partnership school kura hourua, or in a class above form 2 at a composite partnership school kura hourua, on or after 1 January after the person’s 19th birthday.
Section 158P: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Multiple timetable arrangements Heading: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

158Q Multiple timetable arrangements in partnership schools kura hourua (1) A sponsor may run a multiple timetable arrangement at a partnership school kura hourua for a specified period if the sponsor is satisfied that the arrange- ment is appropriate in the circumstances.
(2) A sponsor must take all reasonable steps to notify every affected student and his or her parents in writing of— the multiple timetable arrangement; and the time periods for each day during which the affected student’s timeta- ble will run.

(a) (b) 254 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12A s 158R (3) In this section, affected student and multiple timetable arrangement have the meanings given by section 25(8).
Section 158Q: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Exclusions Heading: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158R Secretary’s powers when student younger than 16 is excluded from partnership school kura hourua (1) If the Secretary is satisfied that the sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua has excluded a student who is younger than 16 from the school under section 15(1)(c) (as applied by section 158U), and that no person to whom the sponsor has assigned the functions of the principal under section 15(5) (as so applied) has arranged for the student to attend another school, the Secretary must,— (a) (b) (c) (d) if satisfied that it is appropriate for the student to return to the school from which the student has been excluded, lift the exclusion; or arrange for and, if necessary, direct the board of a State school (that is not a State integrated school) to enrol the student at the State school; or arrange for and, if necessary, direct a sponsor of another partnership school kura hourua to enrol the student at the other school; or direct a parent of the student to enrol the student at a correspondence school.
(2) The Secretary may not give a direction under subsection (1)(b), or lift an exclu- sion under subsection (1)(a), unless the Secretary has also made all reasonable attempts to consult the student, the student’s parents, the board, and any other person or organisation that, in the opinion of the Secretary, may be interested in, or be able to advise on or help with, the student’s education or welfare.
(3) The Secretary may not give a direction under subsection (1)(c) unless— (a) (b) the student’s parents agree; and the Secretary has made all reasonable attempts to consult the student, the sponsor, and any other person or organisation that, in the opinion of the Secretary, may be interested in, or be able to advise on or help with, the student’s education or welfare.
(4) If the sponsor of the school from which the student has been excluded is also the sponsor of another school, the Secretary (in exercising the power conferred by subsection (1)(c)) may direct the sponsor to enrol the student at that other school.

(5) A board must comply with a direction under subsection (1)(b), and the direc- tion overrides the provisions of any enrolment scheme the school may have in place.
255 Part 12A s 158S Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (6) A sponsor must comply with a direction under subsection (1)(c), and the direc- tion overrides the provisions of any enrolment scheme the school may have in place.

Section 158R: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 158R(1)(b): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 122(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
158S Re-enrolment by partnership school kura hourua of student excluded or expelled (1) (2) (3) The sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua from which a student has ever been excluded or expelled (whether under section 15 or 17 as applied by sec- tion 158U) may refuse to enrol the student at the school (unless, in the case of an exclusion, the Secretary has lifted the exclusion under section 158R(1)(a)).
Subject to sections 16(1)(ba) and 158R(1)(c), the sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua may refuse to enrol a student who is for the time being ex- cluded or expelled (whether under section 15 or 17 as applied by section 158U) from a State school or another partnership school kura hourua.
The Secretary may, in the case of a student who has turned 16, direct the spon- sor of another partnership school kura hourua to enrol the student at the school if— (a) (b) (c) the student has been expelled from a partnership school kura hourua under section 17 (as so applied); and the student’s parents agree to the enrolment; and the Secretary has made all reasonable attempts to consult the student, the sponsor, and any other person or organisation that, in the opinion of the Secretary, may be interested in, or be able to advise on or help with, the student’s education or welfare.
(4) The Secretary may, in the case of a student who has turned 16, direct the board of a State school to enrol the student at the school if— (a) (b) the student has been expelled from a partnership school kura hourua under section 17 (as so applied); and the Secretary has made all reasonable attempts to consult the student, the student’s parents, the board, and any other person or organisation that, in the opinion of the Secretary, may be interested in, or be able to advise on or help with, the student’s education or welfare.
Section 158S: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

256 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12A s 158U Courses and visits Heading: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158T Courses and visits outside partnership school kura hourua premises A sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua may authorise any students to do any of the following outside the school premises: (a) (b) undertake courses of education; or obtain work experience; or (c) make visits.

Section 158T: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
Application of Act to partnership schools kura hourua Heading: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

158U Application of this Act to partnership schools kura hourua (1) (2) Sections 4 to 6, 13 to 15, 17 to 17C, 18 to 19, 25A (except subsection (1B)), 25AA, 25B, 27, 33, 78C to 78CD, 139AC to 139AE, and 139AAA to 139AAI (except section 139AAE(1)(a)) apply to partnership schools kura hourua with any necessary modifications.
In their application to partnership schools kura hourua under subsection (1), sections 4 to 6, 13 to 15, 17 to 17C, 18 to 19, 25A (except subsection (1B)), 25AA, 25B, 27, 33, 78C to 78CD, 139AC to 139AE, and 139AAA to 139AAI (except section 139AAE(1)(a)) must be read as if— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) any references to a State school were references to a partnership school kura hourua; and any references to a board or a board of a State school were references to a sponsor; and any references to a principal were references to the person or persons to whom a sponsor has assigned the function or functions of the principal under the section in question; and any references to a primary school were references to a primary partner- ship school kura hourua; and any references to a secondary school were references to a secondary partnership school kura hourua; and any references to a composite school were references to a composite partnership school kura hourua.
(3) In its application to partnership schools kura hourua under subsection (1), sec- tion 17B must also be read as if the reference to a meeting of the board were a reference to a meeting with the sponsor.
257 Part 12A s 158V Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (4) (5) In its application to partnership schools kura hourua under subsection (1), sec- tion 25AA must also be read as if references to the health curriculum were ref- erences to the health curriculum delivered by a partnership school kura hourua.
In their application to partnership schools kura hourua under subsection (1), sections 139AAA to 139AAI must also be read as if the definition of teacher in section 139AAA(9) were replaced with the following definition: teacher means— (a) (b) a person holding a teaching position (within the meaning of section 348) at a partnership school kura hourua; or a person to whom the sponsor of the partnership school kura hourua has assigned any of the functions of the principal.
Section 158U: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 158U(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 123(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 158U(2): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 123(2) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 158U(5) teacher paragraph (a): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 123(3) of the Educa- tion (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
158V Application of Education (Stand-Down, Suspension, Exclusion, and Expulsion) Rules 1999 to partnership schools kura hourua (1) (2) The Education (Stand-Down, Suspension, Exclusion, and Expulsion) Rules 1999 (except rule 3) apply to partnership schools kura hourua with any neces- sary modifications.
In their application to partnership schools kura hourua under subsection (1), the Education (Stand-Down, Suspension, Exclusion, and Expulsion) Rules 1999 must be read as if— (a) (b) (c) any references to a State school were references to a partnership school kura hourua; and any references to a board or a board of a State school were references to a sponsor; and any references to a principal were references to the person to whom a sponsor has assigned the function or functions of the principal under the rules.
Section 158V: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

258 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 12A s 158Z Application of other Acts to partnership schools kura hourua Heading: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158W Application of New Zealand Bill of Rights Act 1990 to partnership schools kura hourua Section 3(b) of the New Zealand Bill of Rights Act 1990 applies to the follow- ing persons when performing functions under this Act or in relation to a part- nership school contract: (a) (b) a sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua: a person employed by a sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua in a position at the school: (c) a person who works at a partnership school kura hourua under contract.
Section 158W: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

158X Application of Privacy Act 1993 to partnership schools kura hourua When performing functions under this Act or a partnership school contract, a sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua is to be treated as a public sector agency for the purposes of sections 35 and 36 of the Privacy Act 1993.

Section 158X: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
158Y Official Information Act 1982 not to apply to partnership schools kura hourua (1) The Official Information Act 1982 does not apply to a sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua when the sponsor is performing functions under this Act or a partnership school contract.

(2) However, if the sponsor is an institution, the Official Information Act 1982 ap- plies unless the institution is performing its functions as a sponsor under this Act or a partnership school contract.
Section 158Y: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 158Y(2): inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 28 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

158Z Application of State Sector Act 1988 to institutions sponsoring partnership schools kura hourua The State Sector Act 1988 does not apply to an institution that is a sponsor if the institution is performing its functions as a sponsor under this Act or a part- nership school contract.
Section 158Z: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 29 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

259 Part 12A s 158ZA Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 158ZA Application of Ombudsmen Act 1975 to institutions sponsoring partnership schools kura hourua (1) This section applies to an institution that is a sponsor if the institution is per- forming its functions as a sponsor under this Act or a partnership school con- tract.
(2) For the purposes of the Ombudsmen Act 1975, the institution— (a) (b) is a sponsor; and is not an institution (see Ombudsmen Act 1975, Schedule 1, Part 2).

Section 158ZA: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 29 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Part 13 General provisions relating to tertiary education Part 13: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 35 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Part 13 heading: replaced, on 1 January 2003, by section 5 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
159AAA Object of provisions relating to tertiary education (1) The object of this Part, Parts 13A to 18, and Part 19 (which relate to tertiary education), and of the provisions of Parts 18A and 20 to 24 that relate to terti- ary education, is to foster and develop a tertiary education system that— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) fosters, in ways that are consistent with the efficient use of national re- sources, high quality learning and research outcomes, equity of access, and innovation; and contributes to the development of cultural and intellectual life in New Zealand; and responds to the needs of learners, stakeholders, and the nation, in order to foster a skilled and knowledgeable population over time; and contributes to the sustainable economic and social development of the nation; and strengthens New Zealand’s knowledge base and enhances the contribu- tion of New Zealand’s research capabilities to national economic devel- opment, innovation, international competitiveness, and the attainment of social and environmental goals; and provides for a diversity of teaching and research that fosters, throughout the system, the achievement of international standards of learning and, as relevant, scholarship.
In making decisions under this Part, Parts 13A to 18, and Part 19, and under the provisions of Parts 18A and 20 to 24 that relate to tertiary education, the Minis- ter, the Commission, and the Qualifications Authority must take into account (2) 260 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13 s 159 the objects specified in subsection (1), so far as is practicable in the circum- stances.
Section 159AAA: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 6 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 159AAA(2): amended, on 1 July 2017, by section 124 of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
159 Interpretation (1) In this Part and Part 13A to Part 24, and in Schedules 13 to 17, unless the con- text otherwise requires,— academic year means a period of 12 months commencing on 1 January accreditation means an accreditation granted by the Qualifications Authority under section 250 approved programme means a programme approved by the Qualifications Authority under section 249 approved programme or training scheme means an approved programme or approved training scheme approved training scheme means a training scheme approved by the Qualifi- cations Authority under section 251 award means— (a) (b) (c) a certificate, diploma, degree, or other qualification that is listed on the Qualifications Framework; or a certificate or other document granted in recognition of a student’s ach- ievement and completion of a training scheme; or a certificate granted in recognition of a student’s achievement in scholar- ship examinations at secondary education chief executive, in relation to an institution, means the person who, by whatev- er name the person is called, is the chief executive of the institution and in- cludes a person for the time being performing the duties of the chief executive of the institution college of education means, subject to subsection (3), a body referred to in section 162(1)(b) or a body established as a college of education under section 162(2) combined council means a body constituted under section 222AM Commission means the Tertiary Education Commission established under sec- tion 159C constituents, in relation to an institution, means the people who (by virtue of section 163) constitute it council, in relation to an institution, means the body that governs the institution in accordance with section 165 261 Part 13 s 159 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 designated polytechnic,— (a) after 28 February 2010 and before 1 May 2010, means a polytechnic designated for the purposes of Part 15A by the Governor-General by Order in Council: (b) on or after 1 May 2010, means any
 polytechnic domestic student, at any time, means a person who is then— (a) (b) (c) a New Zealand citizen; or the holder of a residence class visa granted under the Immigration Act 2009 who satisfies the criteria (if any) prescribed by regulations made under subsection (4); or a person of a class or description of persons required by the Minister, by notice in the Gazette, to be treated as if they are not international stu- dents enrol includes admit and enrolment and enrolled have corresponding mean- ings equivalent full-time student formula means the formula of that name that is based on the student workload that would normally be carried out by a full- time student in a single academic year existing institution means— (a) (b) a body specified in Part 1 or Part 2 of Schedule 13; or a body that was established immediately before the day on which the Education Amendment Act 1990 received the Royal assent, or is estab- lished on or after that day and before 1 January 1991, as a polytechnic, institute of technology, technical institute or community college under the Education Act 1964 existing non-university institution means an existing institution other than a body specified in Part 1 of Schedule 13 functions, except where the expression occurs in a provision setting out the functions of a body, includes duties funding approval means a decision made by the Commission under section 159YA to fund (in whole or in part) some or all of the tertiary education pro- grammes and activities described in an organisation’s proposed plan under sec- tion 159P(d)(i) and (ii) give public notice means to publish a notice in the Gazette that— (a) (b) gives notice of the fact that something has been made, approved, or done; and includes information about how or where the public can see and obtain a copy of the thing that has been made, approved, or done government training establishment means any establishment that is— 262 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13 s
 159 (a) (b) (c) a Crown entity (within the meaning of section 10 of the Crown Entities Act 2004) for the time being approved by the Minister for the purposes of this definition; or a department (within the meaning of the Public Finance Act 1989) for the time being approved by the Minister for the purposes of this defin- ition; or the New Zealand Defence Force constituted by section 11(1) of the De- fence Act 1990; or (d) the New Zealand Police grant, in relation to an award, includes confer and issue industry training organisation means a body corporate for the time being recognised under section 5 or section 8(1) of the Industry Training and Appren- ticeships Act 1992 institution means— (a) (b) a college of education; or a polytechnic; or (ba) a specialist college; or (c) (d) a university; or a wananga international student has the meaning given in section 2(1) land includes any legal or equitable estate or interest in, or right, power or privilege over, or in connection with, land Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being re- sponsible for the administration of this Part Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part personal property includes money plan means a plan in relation to which funding approval has been given polytechnic means, subject to
 subsection (3),— (a) a body that was established immediately before the day on which the Education Amendment Act 1990 received the Royal assent, or is estab- lished on or after that day and before 1 January 1991, as a polytechnic, institute of technology, technical institute or community college under the Education Act 1964; or (b) a body established as a polytechnic under section 162(2) polytechnic council— (a) means the council of a polytechnic; and 263 Part 13 s 159 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14
 July 2017 (b) includes a combined council private training establishment means an establishment, other than an institu- tion, that provides post-school education or vocational training proceeding means any legal or administrative proceeding, and includes an ar- bitration programme, in relation to an institution within the meaning of section 249(1), means a programme of study or training leading to a qualification listed on the Qualifications Framework proposed plan means a proposed plan in relation to which an organisation is seeking funding approval Qualifications Authority means the New Zealand Qualifications Authority es- tablished by Part 20 Qualifications Framework means the framework referred to in section 248 reconstitution day,— (a) in relation to a polytechnic designated for the purposes of Part 15A by the Governor-General by Order in Council, means the day on which the order comes into force: (b) in relation to any other polytechnic, means 1 May 2010 Regional Employment and Access Council means a council of that name es- tablished under section 7 of the Access Training Scheme Act 1988 registered establishment means a private training establishment that has been granted registration by the Qualifications Authority under Part 18, other than a registration that has been cancelled Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry specialist college means, subject to subsection (3), a body established as a spe- cialist college under section 162(2) staff, in relation to an institution, does not include the chief executive of the institution student member, in relation to the council of an institution, means a member of that council referred to in section 171(2)(e) tertiary education provider means all or any of the following, but does not include an industry training organisation: an institution: a registered establishment: a government training establishment: any other person or body that provides, or proposes to provide, tertiary education and that is funded
 through non-departmental output classes from Vote Education (for example, community education providers) (a) (b) (c) (d) 264 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13 s 159 tertiary education strategy means the latest strategy document issued under section 159AA training scheme means study or training that— (a) (b) leads to an award; but does not, of itself, lead to an award of a qualification listed on the Quali- fications Framework university means, subject to subsection (3), a body referred to in section 162(1)(a) or a body established as a university under section 162(2) University Grants Committee means the University Grants Committee estab- lished under Part 1 of the Universities Act 1961 Vice-Chancellor, in relation to a university, means the chief executive of the university, by whatever name called Vice-Chancellors Committee means the New Zealand Vice-Chancellors Com- mittee established by Part 19 wananga means, subject to subsection (3), a body established as a wananga under section 162(2).
(2) In the absence of proof to the contrary,— (a) (b) a certificate signed by the chief executive of the Ministry of Foreign Af- fairs and Trade that on a specified day, or for a specified period, a speci- fied person was or was not, or will or will not be, in New Zealand to study under an assistance programme administered by the New Zealand Government; or a certificate signed by the Secretary that on a specified day, or for a spe- cified period, a specified person was or was not, or will or will not be, in New Zealand to study under an exchange programme approved by the New Zealand Government,— is, for the purposes of the definitions of assisted student and exempt student in subsection (1), conclusive evidence of the matter certified; and judicial notice shall be taken of the signature on any such certificate of the chief executive or (as the case may be) the Secretary.
(3) (4) The definitions of the terms college of education, polytechnic, specialist col- lege, university and wananga do not apply for the purposes of subsections (1), (2), and (4) of section 162.

The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations prescribing criteria that the holder of a residence class visa granted under the Immigration Act 2009 must satisfy in order to fulfil the requirements of paragraph (b) of the definition of domestic student in subsection (1).
(5) The explanatory note of regulations made under subsection (4) must indicate that— 265 Part 13 s 159 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) (c) they are a confirmable instrument under section 47B of the Legislation Act 2012; and they are revoked at a time stated in the note, unless earlier confirmed by an Act of Parliament; and the stated time is the applicable deadline under section 47C(1)(a) or (b) of that Act.
(6) [Repealed] Section 159: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 35 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 159(1): amended, on 1 January 2003, by section 7(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 159(1) accreditation: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 159(1) approval: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(1) of the Education Amend- ment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 159(1) approved nationally recognised course: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 159(1) approved programme: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(2) of the Educa- tion Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 159(1) approved programme or training scheme: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 159(1) approved training scheme: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 159(1) assisted student: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 159(1) association: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 7(5) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Section 159(1) association of students: repealed, on 8 July 2000, by section 26(6) of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Section 159(1) award: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 159(1) charter: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(1) of the Education (Tertiary Re- forms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
Section 159(1) Chief Review Officer: repealed, on 25 June 1993, by section 26(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

Section 159(1) combined council: inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 4 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

Section 159(1) Commission: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 7(3) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Section 159(1) constituents: inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 4 of the Education (Poly- technics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

Section 159(1) course of study or training: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 159(1) designated polytechnic: inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 4 of the Educa- tion (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
Section 159(1) domestic student: replaced, at 2 am on 29 November 2010, by section 406(1) of the Immigration Act 2009 (2009 No 51).

266 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13 s 159 Section 159(1) domestic student: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 159(1) exempt student: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 159(1) foreign student: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 159(1) funding approval: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(2) of the Education (Ter- tiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159(1) give public notice: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 7(3) of the Education (Ter- tiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Section 159(1) government training establishment: replaced, on 25 June 1993, by section 13(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

Section 159(1) government training establishment paragraph (a): amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 159(1) industry training organisation: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 7(3) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Section 159(1) industry training organisation: amended, on 23 April 2014, by section 23 of the Industry Training and Apprenticeships Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 16).

Section 159(1) institution paragraph (ba): inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 7(4) of the Educa- tion (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 159(1) international student: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(2) of the Educa- tion Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 159(1) Minister: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(5) of the Education Amendment Act No (4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 159(1) Ministry: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(5) of the Education Amendment Act No (4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 159(1) nationally recognised award: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 159(1) New Zealand apprenticeship committee: repealed, on 20 May 2010, by section 44 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 159(1) plan: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159(1) polytechnic council: inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 4 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
Section 159(1) profile: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(1) of the Education (Tertiary Re- forms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159(1) programme: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(2) of the Education Amend- ment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 159(1) proposed plan: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(2) of the Education (Terti- ary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
Section 159(1) Qualifications Framework: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 159(1) reconstitution day: inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 4 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

Section 159(1) specialist college: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 7(3) of the Education (Ter- tiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Section 159(1) statement of tertiary education priorities: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

267 Part 13 s 159AA Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 159(1) tertiary education provider: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 7(3) of the Edu- cation (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Section 159(1) tertiary education strategy: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 7(3) of the Edu- cation (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 159(1) tertiary education strategy: amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(3) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159(1) training scheme: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 17(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 159(2)(a): amended, on 1 July 1993, pursuant to section 9(2) of the Foreign Affairs Amend- ment Act 1993 (1993 No 48).

Section 159(3): amended, on 1 January 2003, by section 7(6) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 159(4): inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 7(7) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 159(4): amended, at 2 am on 29 November 2010, by section 406(1) of the Immigration Act 2009 (2009 No 51).
Section 159(5): replaced, on 1 January 2016, by section 14 of the Legislation (Confirmable Instru- ments) Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 120).

Section 159(6): repealed, on 1 January 2016, by section 14 of the Legislation (Confirmable Instru- ments) Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 120).
159AA Tertiary education strategy (1) The Minister must, from time to time, issue a tertiary education strategy that sets out— (a) (b) the Government’s long-term strategic direction for tertiary education; and the Government’s current and medium-term priorities for tertiary educa- tion.
(2) The part of the tertiary education strategy that sets out the Government’s long- term strategic direction for tertiary education must address the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) economic goals: social goals: environmental goals: the development aspirations of Maori and other population groups.

(3) Before issuing a tertiary education strategy, the Minister must consult with— (a) those stakeholders in the tertiary education sector that he or she con- siders ought to be consulted; and (b) the Commission.
(4) As soon as practicable after issuing a tertiary education strategy, the Minister must give public notice of it.

Section 159AA: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 7 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
268 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13 s 159AE 159AB Importance of tertiary education strategy In exercising their functions under this Act or any other enactment, the Com- mission and the Qualifications Authority must have regard to the tertiary edu- cation strategy.

Section 159AB: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 8 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Section 159AB: amended, on 1 July 2017, by section 126 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

159AC Revocation and replacement or amendment of tertiary education strategy (1) (2) The Minister may, at any time, revoke and replace, or amend, a tertiary educa- tion strategy.
Before revoking and replacing, or significantly amending, a tertiary education strategy, the Minister must consult with— (a) those stakeholders in the tertiary education sector that he or she con- siders ought to be consulted; and (b) the Commission.

(3) As soon as practicable after revoking and replacing, or significantly amending, a tertiary education strategy, the Minister must give public notice of the revoca- tion and replacement, or amendment.
(4) An amendment forms part of the tertiary education strategy it amends.

Section 159AC: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159AD Roles within tertiary education sector (1) (2) The Ministry is the Minister’s principal policy adviser on tertiary education matters.
The Qualifications Authority (or, in the case of universities, the New Zealand Vice-Chancellors Committee) is the body primarily responsible for quality as- surance matters in the tertiary education sector.

(3) This section is for the avoidance of doubt.

Section 159AD: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 8 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 159AD(1): replaced, on 21 December 2010, by section 29 of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
159AE Ministry may hold and disseminate information Any information collected and held by the Commission or the Qualifications Authority may be held by the Ministry on behalf of the relevant agency and be disclosed by the Ministry to— (a) the agency on whose behalf it is held; and 269 Part 13 s 159AF Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) any other person or agency that is entitled to receive it.
Section 159AE: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 8 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 159AE: amended, on 1 July 2017, by section 127 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
159AF Secretary may delegate certain powers and functions to Commission (1) The Secretary may delegate to the Commission any powers or functions of the Secretary under regulations made pursuant to section 303 or section 306 or sec- tion 307 (which relate to student allowances).

(2) A delegation under this section— (a) must be in writing; and (b) may not include a power to further delegate any power or function; and (c) may be revoked at any time by notice in writing.
(3) (4) The Commission may exercise any powers or functions delegated to it under this section in the same manner and with the same effect as if the powers or functions had been conferred on the Commission directly, rather than by dele- gation.

If the Commission purports to act under a delegation under this section, the Commission is presumed, in the absence of proof to the contrary, to be acting in accordance with the terms of the delegation.
Section 159AF: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 8 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Part 13A Tertiary Education Commission Part 13A: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Preliminary provisions Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
159A Purpose of Part The purpose of this Part is to establish— (a) (b) a Tertiary Education Commission (the Commission); and a framework for planning, funding, and monitoring in the tertiary educa- tion sector that primarily, but not exclusively, relates to funding organ- isations via plans.

Section 159A: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 12 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
270 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159B 159ABA Outline of framework for planning, funding, and monitoring in tertiary education sector (1) This section— (a) sets out a general outline of the framework for planning, funding, and monitoring in the tertiary education sector; and (b) is by way of explanation only.

(2) (3) If any other section in this Act conflicts with this section, the other section pre- vails.
The following steps describe, in general terms, how the framework for plan- ning, funding, and monitoring in the tertiary education sector works: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) the Minister determines the design of funding mechanisms and whether funding under those mechanisms is via plans: the Commission develops the details of how to implement funding mechanisms: the Commission issues guidance on what must be contained in proposed plans: the Commission identifies criteria for assessing proposed plans: an organisation prepares a proposed plan— (i) in consultation with the stakeholders the organisation considers ought to be consulted and any other persons specified by the Commission; and (ii) in a manner consistent with the Commission’s guidance: the organisation submits its proposed plan to the Commission: the Commission applies assessment criteria to the proposed plan and de- cides whether or not to give funding approval: if the proposed plan is given funding approval, the Commission deter- mines the amount of funding payable to the organisation by applying the appropriate funding mechanism: if an organisation’s proposed plan receives funding approval, the Com- mission monitors the organisation’s performance to determine if it is achieving, or has achieved, the outcomes it has specified in its plan.
Section 159ABA: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 12 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159B Definition of organisation (1) In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires, organisation means— (a) (b) a tertiary education provider: an industry training organisation: 271 Part 13A s 159C Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (c) a person or body that provides tertiary education-related services and is identified in accordance with subsection (2) as an organisation for the purposes of this Part.
(2) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, identify organisations for the pur- pose of this Part, and may do so by describing a type of person or body that is an organisation, or by naming individual persons or bodies as organisations.

Section 159B: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Establishment of Commission Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159C Establishment of Commission (1) A Tertiary Education Commission is established.

(2) (3) (4) (5) The Commission is owned by the Crown.

The Commission is a Crown entity for the purposes of section 7 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

The Crown Entities Act 2004 applies to the Commission except to the extent that this Act expressly provides otherwise.
The members of the Commission are the board for the purposes of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

Section 159C: replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159D Composition of Commission (1) The Commission comprises at least 6, but not more than 9, members appointed in accordance with section 28(1)(a) of the Crown Entities Act 2004 after con- sultation with the Minister of Maori Affairs.
(2) At least 2 months before appointing a member, the Minister must advertise his or her intention to appoint a member and must seek responses from interested persons.

(3) Subsection (2) does not apply if the Minister appoints as a member a person who, immediately before the appointment, was a member of the Transition Ter- tiary Education Commission.
(4) When appointing members of the Commission, the Minister must have regard to the need for its members to collectively have a breadth of experience and expertise, and depth of knowledge, regarding areas of the tertiary education sector.

(5) Subsection (4) does not limit section 29 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

Section 159D: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
272 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159F Section 159D(1): amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 159D(2): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 13 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159D(4): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
Section 159D(5): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159E Charging (1) The Commission may charge a commercial rate for any goods and services that it provides under section 159F(1)(bc) to (bg).

(2) However, the Commission may not charge a commercial rate for any other goods and services that it provides unless the Minister approves.

Section 159E: replaced, on 1 July 2017, by section 128(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Functions of Commission Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
159F Functions of Commission (1) The functions of the Commission are— (a) to give effect to the tertiary education strategy by— (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) prescribing and publishing guidance on the content of, and pro- cesses associated with seeking funding approval for, proposed plans; and prescribing and publishing guidance on the criteria the Commis- sion will use to assess proposed plans; and assessing proposed plans and deciding whether they will receive funding approval by applying the relevant assessment criteria; and determining the amount of funding payable to organisations by applying the appropriate funding mechanisms; and allocating funding to organisations that have plans; and allocating funding to organisations that are not required to have plans in order to receive funding; and (vii) prescribing what plan summaries must contain for the purposes of public inspection; and (viii) building the capability of organisations; and (b) to provide advice to the Minister on the activities and performance of tertiary education organisations and the tertiary education sector general- ly; and 273 Part 13A s 159F Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ba) to develop details of how to implement funding mechanisms; and (bb) to implement funding mechanisms; and (bc) (bd) to establish and maintain a database of information about occupations and about post-compulsory education and training: to make that information available to the public and to institutions, pri- vate training establishments, students, and other interested bodies and persons: (be) to provide— (i) (ii) training and assistance to persons who advise about occupations; and career advice and associated counselling relating to post-compul- sory education and training: (bf) to liaise with, and monitor the needs of, institutions, private training es- tablishments, students and other bodies and persons with respect to— (i) (ii) information, training, and advice relating to occupations; and career advice and associated counselling relating to
 post-compul- sory education and training: to provide support services for the purpose of promoting transition edu- cation that prepares students for employment, or further education and training, or both: to provide advice to the Minister on the implementation of policy and on the operational implications of new policy initiatives; and to monitor the performance of organisations that receive funding from the Commission including by measuring performance against specified outcomes; and to undertake any functions that the Minister directs the Commission to undertake under section 159J; and to undertake any functions delegated to the Commission, including (without limitation) functions relating to the funding of organisations other than under section 159YA or 159ZC; and to undertake any other function given by this Act, the Industry Training Act 1992, the Modern Apprenticeship Training Act 2000, or any other enactment.
(bg) (c) (d) (da) (e) (f) (g) [Repealed] In addition, the Commission may provide information and other tertiary-related services to the Crown, provided that these functions are consistent with the Commission’s statement of intent and are consistent with, and do not displace, any of its functions under subsection (1).

Section 159F: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
(2) 274 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159FA Section 159F(1)(a): replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(1) of the Education (Tertiary Re- forms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159F(1)(b): replaced, on 21 December 2010, by section 30(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 159F(1)(ba): inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(3) of the Education (Tertiary Re- forms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
Section 159F(1)(bb): inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(3) of the Education (Tertiary Re- forms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159F(1)(bc): inserted, on 1 July 2017, by section 129(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 159F(1)(bd): inserted, on 1 July 2017, by section 129(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 159F(1)(be): inserted, on 1 July 2017, by section 129(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 159F(1)(bf): inserted, on 1 July 2017, by section 129(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 159F(1)(bg): inserted, on 1 July 2017, by section 129(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 159F(1)(c): replaced, on 21 December 2010, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
Section 159F(1)(d): replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(4) of the Education (Tertiary Re- forms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159F(1)(da): inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(4) of the Education (Tertiary Re- forms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159F(1)(e): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(5) of the Education (Tertiary Re- forms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
Section 159F(1)(g): repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159FA Offers of employment in equivalent positions for Careers New Zealand employees (1) During the period beginning on 1 June 2017 and ending with the close of 30 June 2017, the Commission must offer employment in an equivalent position to every person who is an employee of Careers New Zealand (other than the chief executive) immediately before the commencement of this section.
(2) (3) The terms and conditions of an offer must be equivalent to those applying to the relevant employee immediately before the offer.
In this section, employment in an equivalent position means employment that is— (a) (b) (c) in substantially the same position; and in the same general locality; and on terms and conditions that are no less favourable than those applying to the employee immediately before the date the offer of employment is made to that employee; and 275 Part 13A s 159FB Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (d) on terms that treat the period of service with Careers New Zealand (and every other period of service recognised by Careers New Zealand as continuous service) as if it were continuous service with the Commis- sion.
Compare: 1988 No 20 s 61D(3), (5); 1989 No 80 ss 274A, 274B Section 159FA: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 130 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
159FB Effect of offers on certain agreements and entitlements (1) If a person accepts an offer,— (a) nothing in this Act or any other enactment— (i) (ii) binds the person to a collective agreement; or entitles the person to be bound by or enforce a collective agree- ment: (b) the change of employer does not constitute new employment for the pur- poses of— (i) (ii) enrolling in a KiwiSaver scheme under the KiwiSaver Act 2006: determining any entitlements under the Holidays Act 2003.
(2) Subsection (1)(a) does not apply to a collective agreement to the extent that the parties agree otherwise.

Section 159FB: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 130 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
159FC No compensation for technical redundancy of employees of Careers New Zealand (1) An employee of Careers New Zealand is not entitled to receive any payment or other benefit on the ground that— (a) (b) the employee’s position in Careers New Zealand has ceased to exist; or the employee declines to accept an offer of employment in an equivalent position.
(2) This section overrides— (a) (b) Part 6A of the Employment Relations Act 2000; and any employee protection provision in any relevant employment agree- ment.

Section 159FC: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 130 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

159FD Repeal of sections 159FA to 159FD Sections 159FA to 159FC are repealed on 1 January 2018.

This section is repealed on 2 January 2018.


(1) (2) 276 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159I Section 159FD: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 130 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
159G Principles guiding how Commission operates In performing its functions, the Commission must, in addition to complying with section 159AB,— (a) comply with any direction of the Minister given under section 103 of the Crown Entities Act 2004; and (b) work closely with the stakeholders of tertiary education providers and industry training organisations; and (c) work closely with tertiary education providers and industry training or- ganisations.
Section 159G: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 159G(a): amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159H Minister may review performance of Commission [Repealed] Section 159H: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
159I Delegation of functions or powers of Minister (1) The Minister may, either generally or specifically, delegate to the Commission all or any of the Minister’s functions and powers under this Act (other than those referred to in section 159L) or any other Act, including functions or powers delegated to the Minister under this Act or any other Act.

(2) A delegation under this section must be in writing.

(3) No delegation under this section may include the power to delegate under this section.
(4) The power of the Minister to delegate under this section— (a) (b) is subject to any prohibitions, restrictions, or conditions contained in any other Act in relation to the delegation of the Minister’s functions or powers; but does not limit any power of delegation conferred on the Minister by any other Act.
(5) Subject to any general or special directions given, or conditions imposed, by the Minister, the Commission may exercise any functions or powers delegated to the Commission under this section in the same manner and with the same effect as if they had been conferred on the Commission directly by this section and not by delegation.
277 Part 13A s 159J Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (6) If the Commission purports to act under any delegation under this section, the Commission is, in the absence of proof to the contrary, presumed to be acting in accordance with the terms of the delegation.

(7) A delegation does not affect or prevent the exercise of any function or power by the Minister, or affect the responsibility of the Minister for the actions of any person acting under the delegation.
Section 159I: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 159I(1): replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 15 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159J Minister may direct Commission (1) (2) (3) [Repealed] [Repealed] Every direction under section 103 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 must be con- sistent with the tertiary education strategy and the functions of the Commis- sion.
(3A) The Minister may, in accordance with section 112 of the Crown Entities Act 2004, direct the Commission to undertake additional functions that are consis- tent with the Commission’s objectives.

The Minister may not direct the Commission to provide or deny funding under section 159YA or 159ZC to any specified organisation.
[Repealed] If the Minister gives a direction to the Commission, the Commission must in- clude in its annual report for every year to which the direction relates a report on how the Commission has responded to it.

Section 159J: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 159J(1): repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
Section 159J(2): repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 159J(3): amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 159J(3A): inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 16(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159J(4): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 16(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
Section 159J(4): amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 159J(5): repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 159J(6): replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
(4) (5) (6) 278 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159KC 159K Application of Commerce Act 1986 Despite section 6 of the Commerce Act 1986, nothing in that Act applies to the Commission except to the extent that the Commission engages in supplying goods and services for which it charges.

Section 159K: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
159KA Chief executive (1) (2) (3) (4) The Commission must appoint a chief executive in accordance with section 117 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

The chief executive must not be a member of the Commission.

The Commission must act independently when appointing the chief executive.

The Commission must monitor and evaluate the performance of the chief executive.

Section 159KA: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
159KB Responsibilities of chief executive The chief executive must— (a) (b) ensure the efficient and effective administration of the affairs of the Commission; and act in accordance with lawful policies and directions given to him or her by the Commission.

Section 159KB: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
159KBA Monitoring and reporting function of chief executive in relation to institutions The chief executive of the Commission— (a) must, on an ongoing basis, monitor institutions that receive funding under this Part in order to assess whether the operation or long-term via- bility of any of those institutions is at risk; and (b) may report from time to time to the Minister on the outcome of that monitoring.
Section 159KBA: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 17 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159KC Declaration of interests (1) A person who is proposed to be appointed as chief executive must declare any interests (within the meaning of that term in section 10 of the Crown Entities Act 2004) to the Commission before accepting appointment to the position of chief executive.
279 Part 13A s 159KD Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) If the chief executive has any direct or indirect interest in any transaction or other matter listed in section 62 of the Crown Entities Act 2004, he or she must disclose that interest to the Commission.

Section 159KC: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
159KD Superannuation (1) Any person who, immediately before becoming an employee of the Commis- sion, is a contributor to the Government Superannuation Fund under Part 2 or Part 2A of the Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956 is deemed, for the purpose of that Act, to be employed in the Government service so long as he or she continues to be an employee of the Commission.
(2) (3) (4) The Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956 applies to the person in all re- spects as if the person’s service as an employee of the Commission were Gov- ernment service.

Subsection (1) does not entitle a person to become a contributor to the Govern- ment Superannuation Fund if the person has ceased to be a contributor.

For the purpose of applying the Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956, the chief executive of the Commission is the controlling authority.
Section 159KD: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
159KE Statement of intent (1) The Commission must include the following information in its statement of in- tent: (a) a general description of the things that the Commission proposes to do, achieve, or work towards during the period covered by the statement of intent, which— (i) must be consistent with the tertiary education strategy and the Commission’s functions; and (ii) must include a summary of the nature and scope of the Commis- sion’s proposed operations; and (iii) may cover both financial and non-financial matters; and a general description of the Commission’s proposed strategies and activ- ities for giving effect to, or achieving, the things referred to in paragraph (a), including a list of the intended principal activities of the Commis- sion and how they relate to the things referred to in paragraph (a); and [Repealed] a general description of the manner in which the Commission proposes to operate and, in particular,— (b) (c) (d) 280 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159KEA (i) which other persons or bodies engaged in similar or related work it proposes to liaise with, and how it proposes to liaise with those other persons or bodies; and (ii) what capability it needs to do its work, and how it will develop that capability; and (iii) how it proposes to manage its risks.
(e) [Repealed] (2) (3) (4) The Commission need not include in its statement of intent the information re- quired in section 141(1) and (2)(a) to (c) of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

[Repealed] The Minister may, in relation to the Commission, exercise his or her powers under section 147(1) of the Crown Entities Act 2004 as if that section included a reference to subsection (1)(a); and that section applies accordingly.
Section 159KE: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 159KE(1)(a)(i): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 18 of the Education (Tertiary Re- forms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159KE(1)(c): repealed, on 1 July 2014, by section 72 of the Crown Entities Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 51).

Section 159KE(1)(d)(iii): amended, on 1 July 2014, by section 72 of the Crown Entities Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 51).
Section 159KE(1)(e): repealed, on 1 July 2014, by section 72 of the Crown Entities Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 51).

Section 159KE(2): amended, on 1 July 2014, by section 72 of the Crown Entities Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 51).

Section 159KE(3): repealed, on 1 July 2014, by section 72 of the Crown Entities Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 51).

Section 159KE(4): amended, on 1 July 2014, by section 72 of the Crown Entities Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 51).
159KEA Statement of performance expectations (1) (2) The statement of performance expectations that the Commission is required to provide to its responsible Minister under section 149I of the Crown Entities Act 2004— (a) must be consistent with the tertiary education strategy; and (b) may relate to more than 1 financial year.
The grouping of outputs in the statement of performance expectations must be done so that, in the case of outputs funded by appropriation, a group of outputs does not contain outputs funded from more than 1 appropriation in the Esti- mates.

Section 159KEA: inserted, on 1 July 2014, by section 72 of the Crown Entities Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 51).
281 Part 13A s 159KF Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 159KF Annual report (1) The Commission must include in its annual report a description of how the Commission is monitoring, and how it will report on, progress in giving effect to the tertiary education strategy.

(2) This section does not limit section 151 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

Section 159KF: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
Section 159KF(1): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 19 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159KG Certain powers must not be delegated (1) The Commission must not delegate any of the following powers: (a) (b) the power to appoint a chief executive; or any other power that the Minister specifies by notice in writing to the Commission.

(2) This section applies despite section 73 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.
Section 159KG: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Funding mechanisms Heading: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amend- ment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159L Minister determines design of funding mechanisms (1) The Minister must, from time to time, determine the design of the funding mechanisms that the Commission must use to fund organisations.
(2) Without limiting subsection (1), in making a determination under that subsec- tion, the Minister must— (a) identify the general form and essential components of each funding mechanism; and (b) indicate which of the funding mechanisms relates to— (i) (ii) funding to be paid by the Commission under section 159YA (re- lating to funding organisations via plans); and funding to be paid by the Commission under section 159ZC (relat- ing to funding organisations under this Part other than via plans); and (iii) other types of funding (if any).
(3) Without limiting subsection (1), in making a determination under that subsec- tion, the Minister may— (a) specify the amount of money, or the proportion of an amount of money, available under any particular funding mechanism; and 282 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159N (b) (c) (d) provide for funding to different groups of organisations or types of or- ganisation; and provide for different versions of, or modifications to, a funding mechan- ism when applying it to different groups of organisations or types of or- ganisation; and specify conditions that the Commission must attach to funding that is provided under any funding mechanism including, without limitation, conditions setting limits on the fees that an organisation may charge do- mestic students; and (e) provide for funding that targets particular groups of students.
Section 159L: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159M Restrictions on design of funding mechanisms In determining a design for a funding mechanism under section 159L, the Min- ister may not— (a) (b) identify a specified organisation or organisations to which funding is to be provided or denied under any funding mechanism; or specify conditions under section 159L(3)(d) that set limits on the fees that organisations may charge domestic students until— (i) the Minister has published a notice in the Gazette that— (A) (B) (C) (D) states that the Minister proposes to specify conditions of that kind; and sets out the proposed conditions; and invites submissions on the proposed conditions; and specifies the date by which submissions must be received, which must be a date no later than 21 days after the date of the Gazette notice; and (ii) the date by which submissions must be received has passed.
Section 159M: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159M(b): replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 30 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

159N Funding mechanisms consistent with quality assurance principle Every funding mechanism must be consistent with the principle that receiving public funds is dependent on an organisation meeting the quality assurance re- quirements in this Act.
Section 159N: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

283 Part 13A s 159O Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 159O Commission to implement funding mechanisms The Commission must— (a) develop the details of how to implement the Minister’s determination of the design of funding mechanisms under section 159L; and (b) implement the funding mechanisms.
Section 159O: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Requirements for, and content of, proposed plans Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159P Requirements for proposed plans A proposed plan must— (a) (b) (c) (d) describe how an organisation will give effect to the Government’s cur- rent and medium-term priorities as described in the tertiary education strategy; and describe how an organisation will address the needs of its stakeholders (including, without limitation, students enrolled with the organisation); and describe an organisation’s mission and role for the term of the plan; and set out a description of all— (i) (ii) tertiary education programmes run by the organisation for which the organisation is seeking funding under section 159YA and spe- cify the amount of funding sought in relation to those pro- grammes; and activities (including, without limitation, programmes and initia- tives that will be undertaken by the organisation in order to build its capability) for which the organisation is seeking funding under section 159YA and specify the amount of funding sought in rela- tion to those activities; and (e) describe an organisation’s proposed outcomes (including, without limita- tion, in relation to the tertiary education programmes and activities de- scribed in paragraph (d)(i) and (ii) in relation to which funding is sought) and the performance indicators that the organisation will use to measure whether those outcomes have been achieved; and (f) set out a description of all tertiary education programmes run by the or- ganisation other than those in relation to which funding is sought.
Section 159P: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

284 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159R 159Q Exemption from certain requirements for proposed plans (1) (2) (3) The Commission may, by notice in writing, exempt an organisation from hav- ing to comply with the requirements in section 159P(f).

The Commission may not exercise the power in subsection (1) in relation to an institution.
Before exempting an organisation under subsection (1), the Commission must consider— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) the amount of funding sought by the organisation; and the amount of funding already received by the organisation; and the type and size of the organisation; and the effective operation of the tertiary education system; and the Government’s current and medium-term priorities as described in the tertiary education strategy; and (f) any other matters the Commission considers relevant.
Section 159Q: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159R Content of, and processes for submitting, proposed plans prescribed by Commission (1) The Commission must prescribe and give public notice of— (a) (b) (c) the content of organisations’ proposed plans (being the particular matters that proposed plans must address or include in order to meet the require- ments in section 159P); and the kinds of background or supplementary information that the Commis- sion requires an organisation to provide in relation to a proposed plan; and the timetable and process for the submission of proposed plans to the Commission.
(2) When prescribing matters under subsection (1), the Commission may in- clude— (a) (b) standard content, as well as different content applying to different organ- isations, groups of organisations, or types of organisation; and different information, timetables, and processes for different organisa- tions, groups of organisations, or types of organisation.

(3) Notices given under subsection (1) may be— (a) (b) given at different times; and amended by the Commission.
(4) The Commission must give public notice of a significant amendment made under subsection (3)(b).

285 Part 13A s 159S Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 159R: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159S Commission may exempt organisation from complying with certain matters The Commission may, by notice in writing, exempt an organisation from com- plying with any of the matters it has prescribed under section 159R(1).

Section 159S: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Submitting proposed plan Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159T Who must submit proposed plan (1) An organisation that is seeking funding from the Commission under a funding mechanism that provides for funding via plans must submit a proposed plan.

(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to an organisation that is exempt under section 159U.

Section 159T: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159U Exemption from requirement to submit proposed plan (1) (2) (3) The Commission may, by notice in writing, exempt an organisation, a group of organisations, or a type of organisation that is seeking funding under a funding mechanism that provides for funding via plans from the requirement, in section 159T(1), to submit a proposed plan.

The Commission may not exercise the power in subsection (1) in relation to an institution.
The Commission may exempt an organisation, a group of organisations, or a type of organisation under subsection (1) for a specified period that the Com- mission considers appropriate.

Section 159U: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159V Frequency of submitting proposed plans An organisation that is required to submit a proposed plan must submit a pro- posed plan to the Commission— (a) (b) at least once every 3 years; or if the Commission directs, at more frequent intervals specified by the Commission.

Section 159V: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
286 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159Y 159W Submitting combined proposed plan The Commission may permit more than 1 organisation to prepare and submit a combined proposed plan if the Commission considers it appropriate.

Section 159W: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
Preparing and consulting on proposed plans Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159X Preparing and consulting on proposed plans (1) An organisation that is required to submit a proposed plan must prepare the proposed plan in accordance with this Part (including, unless it is exempt under section 159S, complying with the matters prescribed by the Commission under section 159R).
(2) A proposed plan must be prepared in consultation with— (a) the stakeholders that the organisation considers ought to be consulted; and (b) any other person or group of persons that the Commission stipulates.

(3) An organisation must develop the content of its proposed plan in collaboration with the Commission, including collaborating with the Commission about ways in which the organisation can implement the matters prescribed by the Commission under section 159R.
(4) After completing the requirements in subsections (1) to (3), an organisation must submit its proposed plan to the Commission.

Section 159X: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Assessment of proposed plans and giving of funding approval Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159Y Criteria for assessing proposed plans (1) The Commission must prescribe and give public notice of the criteria that the Commission will use to assess proposed plans to determine if they will receive funding approval.
(2) The prescribed criteria must include, without limitation, criteria for assessing— (a) (b) how an organisation contributes to the Government’s current and medi- um-term priorities described in the tertiary education strategy; and the tertiary education programmes and activities of an organisation in re- lation to which funding is sought under section 159YA; and 287 Part 13A s 159YA Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (c) (d) the performance indicators used in measuring whether the specified out- comes relating to those tertiary education programmes and activities are being or have been achieved; and the extent and nature of an organisation’s consultation over its proposed plan.
(3) When prescribing matters under subsection (1), the Commission may include standard criteria, as well as different criteria applying to different organisations, groups of organisations, or types of organisation.

(4) Notices given under subsection (1) may be— (a) (b) given at different times; and amended by the Commission.

(5) The Commission must give public notice of a significant amendment made under subsection (4)(b).
Section 159Y: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YA Commission’s assessment of proposed plans, giving of funding approval, and payment of funding (1) The Commission must assess whether a proposed plan will receive funding ap- proval by applying the assessment criteria prescribed under section 159Y.
(2) After applying the assessment criteria, the Commission may decide to— (a) (b) (c) fund (in whole or in part) all of the tertiary education programmes and activities described in the proposed plan under section 159P(d)(i) and (ii) in relation to which funding is sought; or fund (in whole or in part) some of the tertiary education programmes and activities described in the proposed plan under section 159P(d)(i) and (ii) in relation to which funding is sought; or not fund any of the tertiary education programmes or activities described in the proposed plan under section 159P(d)(i) and (ii) in relation to which funding is sought.
Before deciding not to fund some or any, or part of some or any, of the tertiary education programmes or activities described in the proposed plan under sec- tion 159P(d)(i) and (ii) in relation to which funding is sought, the Commission must— (a) (b) notify the organisation of its proposed decision; and give the organisation a reasonable opportunity to be heard.
The Commission must give its reasons to the affected organisation if it decides not to fund some or any, or part of some or any, of the tertiary education pro- grammes or activities described in the proposed plan under section 159P(d)(i) and (ii) in relation to which funding is sought.
(3) (4) 288 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159YC (5) In deciding to give funding approval, the Commission must— (a) (b) (c) specify the date from which that funding approval has effect; and determine the amount of funding payable to the organisation by applying the appropriate funding mechanism; and arrange for the payment to the organisation of the amount of funding de- termined under paragraph (b).
Section 159YA: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159YB Commission may decline to assess proposed plan (1) (2) (3) The Commission may decline to assess a proposed plan under section 159YA if the Commission is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the proposed plan does not adequately satisfy the requirements of this Part (including, unless the or- ganisation is exempt under section 159S, complying with the matters pre- scribed by the Commission under section 159R).
Before making a decision to decline to assess an organisation’s proposed plan, the Commission must discuss with the organisation why the proposed plan does not adequately satisfy the requirements of this Part.

The Commission must give its reasons to the affected organisation if it declines to assess the organisation’s proposed plan.

Section 159YB: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159YC Conditions on receiving funding under section 159YA (1) It is a condition of an organisation receiving funding under section 159YA that the organisation will supply to the Commission or Ministry, from time to time as required by the Commission or Ministry, and in a form specified by the Commission or Ministry, any financial, statistical, or other information that the Commission or Ministry requires the organisation to supply.
(2) The Commission may give funding approval subject to conditions, but only if the conditions are— (a) (b) conditions the Minister has determined the Commission must attach to funding under section 159L(3)(d); or conditions that the Commission considers necessary to ensure that the specified outcomes in a plan that relate to tertiary education programmes and activities in relation to which funding is being given are being ach- ieved or will be achieved.
(3) (4) The Commission may at any time (including during a funding period) amend any condition imposed under subsection (2).

The amendment to the condition takes effect when the organisation has been given reasonable notice of it.

289 Part 13A s 159YD Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 159YC: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159YD Accountability for funding received under section 159YA (1) An organisation (other than an institution) that receives funding under section 159YA must ensure that— (a) it keeps records, in a form consistent with that required by the Commis- sion, for the period to which the funding relates, that fully and fairly show— (i) the transactions, assets, liabilities, and funds of the organisation that are or were affected by the funding; and (ii) whether any conditions on which the funding approval was given have been complied with; and (b) the records are available for inspection by the Commission at all reason- able times.
(2) As soon as practicable after the end of any year in which an organisation (other than an institution) receives funding under section 159YA, the organisation must provide the Commission with— (a) (b) (c) a financial report of the organisation for that year, including a statement of financial performance, a statement of financial position, a statement of movements in equity, a statement of cash flows, and a statement of service performance that compares the performance of the organisation with the outcomes specified in the organisation’s plan as measured by the performance indicators specified in the organisation’s plan; and any financial reports, or statistical or other information, required by the Commission; and any information necessary to demonstrate compliance with any condi- tion attached to the funding.
(3) A report required under subsection (2)(a) must be prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice and must be audited by a qualified audi- tor (within the meaning of section 35 of the Financial Reporting Act 2013).

The Commission may exempt any organisation, group of organisations, or types of organisation from complying with 1 or more of the requirements set out in subsections (2) and (3).
In exercising the powers conferred on it by subsection (4), the Commission must have regard to— (a) (b) (c) (d) the amount of funding sought by the organisation; and the amount of funding received by the organisation; and the type and size of the organisation; and any other matters that the Commission considers relevant.

(4) (5) 290 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159YG (6) Section 203 sets out the accountability requirements for institutions.
Section 159YD: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159YD(3): amended, on 1 July 2015, by section 17 of the Financial Reporting Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 64).

Expiry of funding approval Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159YE Expiry of funding approval (1) Every plan that has funding approval must specify the date on which funding approval expires (the expiry date), which must be a date determined by the Commission that is no later than 3 years after the date on which the funding approval takes effect.

(2) Funding approval expires on the expiry date, unless funding approval is earlier revoked under this Part.
(3) Despite subsection (2), if, on the expiry date, an organisation is discussing a proposed plan with the Commission or the proposed plan is awaiting funding approval under this Part, the funding approval for the existing plan continues in effect until the earlier of the following dates: (a) the date that is 6 months after the expiry date of the existing funding ap- proval; or (b) the date that funding approval for the proposed plan comes into effect.
Section 159YE: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YF Effect of expiry of funding approval The effect of the expiry of funding approval is that— (a) (b) the plan to which funding approval relates expires; and the Commission must cease payment, or cease any or all further pay- ments, of funding under section 159YA in respect of that plan.
Section 159YF: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Suspension or revocation of funding given under section 159YA Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159YG Commission may suspend or revoke funding given under section 159YA (1) The Commission may suspend or revoke some or all funding given under sec- tion 159YA if it is satisfied on reasonable grounds that— (a) an organisation has not complied, or is not complying, with a condition on which funding has been given under section 159YA; or 291 Part 13A s 159YH Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) when measured against performance indicators, the organisation has not achieved, or is not achieving, an outcome anticipated in its plan for a ter- tiary education programme or activity in relation to which funding has been given under section 159YA; or (c) the organisation has not provided, or is not providing, adequate and timely information required by the Commission or Ministry under sec- tion 159YC.
(2) Before deciding whether to suspend or revoke some or all funding given under section 159YA, the Commission must— (a) (b) notify the organisation of the specific matters of concern; and give the organisation a reasonable opportunity to be heard.

(3) (4) The Commission must give its reasons to an organisation if it decides to sus- pend or revoke some or all funding given under section 159YA.
The Commission must advise an organisation of the following matters if it de- cides to suspend some or all funding given under section 159YA: (a) the date on which the suspension will end and, as a consequence, some or all funding will be revoked; and (b) what action the organisation must take in order to have the suspension lifted and avoid some or all funding being revoked.
(5) A suspension must be for a period that the Commission considers reasonable, having considered— (a) (b) the specific matters referred to in subsection (2)(a); and the action referred to in subsection (4)(b).

Section 159YG: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YH Extending suspension of funding (1) (2) The date on which a suspension ends under section 159YG(4)(a) may be exten- ded by the Commission.
The Commission must advise an organisation of the following matters if it de- cides to extend the date on which a suspension will end: (a) the date on which the extended suspension will end and, as a conse- quence, some or all funding for all or part of the plan will be revoked; and (b) what action the organisation must take in order to have the extended sus- pension lifted and avoid some or all funding for all or part of the plan being revoked.
(3) An extension of a suspension must be for a period that the Commission con- siders reasonable, having considered— (a) the specific matters referred to in section 159YG(2)(a); and 292 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159YK (b) the action referred to in section 159YG(4)(b).

Section 159YH: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159YI Effect of suspending or revoking funding given under section 159YA (1) The effect of suspending funding given under section 159YA is that the Com- mission must cease payment, or cease any or all further payments, of funding given under section 159YA in respect of the plan or part of the plan in relation to which funding has been suspended.
(2) The effect of revoking funding given under section 159YA is that— (a) (b) the plan or part of the plan to which the funding relates is revoked; and the Commission must cease payment, or cease any or all further pay- ments, of funding under section 159YA in respect of the plan or part of the plan in relation to which funding has been revoked.

Section 159YI: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159YJ Review of decision by delegate to suspend or revoke funding given under section 159YA (1) Subsection (2) applies to an organisation in relation to which a person has exer- cised any of the following powers under a delegation from the Commission under section 73 of the Crown Entities Act 2004: (a) (b) (c) suspending funding under section 159YG; or revoking funding under section 159YG; or extending the suspension of funding under section 159YH.
(2) An organisation to which this subsection applies may ask the Commission to review the decision of the delegate.

Section 159YJ: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Amending or replacing plans Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159YK Organisation may seek approval for significant amendment, or replacement, of plan (1) In this section and sections 159YL to 159YN, significant amendment means an amendment to a plan that relates to— (a) (b) a tertiary education programme or an activity in relation to which fund- ing has been given under section 159YA; or any of the performance indicators that an organisation uses to measure whether proposed outcomes for tertiary education programmes or activ- 293 Part 13A s 159YL Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 ities in relation to which funding has been given under section 159YA are being or have been achieved.
(2) An organisation may, at any time, ask the Commission to approve a significant amendment to, or the replacement of, a plan.

(3) An organisation that proposes to make a significant amendment to, or to re- place, a plan must consult with— (a) the stakeholders that the organisation considers ought to be consulted; and (b) any other person or group that the Commission stipulates.
(4) An organisation that proposes a significant amendment to, or replacement of, a plan must prepare the significant amendment or replacement in collaboration with the Commission, including collaborating with the Commission about ways in which the organisation can implement the matters prescribed by the Commission under subsection (5).
(5) The Commission may prescribe the requirements for the following in relation to a significant amendment to, or a replacement of, a plan: (a) (b) the content of the significant amendment or replacement (which may be the same as the matters prescribed by the Commission under section 159R): criteria for assessing the significant amendment or replacement (which may be the same as those prescribed by the Commission under section 159Y).
(6) In applying the requirements in subsection (5) in order to determine whether or not to approve a significant amendment to, or replacement of, a plan, the Com- mission must take into account— (a) (b) the extent of the significant amendment or replacement; and the impact of the significant amendment or replacement on the needs of the stakeholders and any other persons consulted by the organisation under subsection (3).
(7) The Commission may, at any time, require an organisation to review a plan with a view to amending or replacing it.

(8) Nothing in this section prohibits an organisation from making an amendment to a plan that is not a significant amendment.

Section 159YK: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159YL Effect of significant amendment or replacement of plan under section 159YK (1) If the Commission approves a significant amendment to a plan, the significant amendment— (a) forms part of the plan it amends; and 294 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159YO (b) takes effect on the date specified by the Commission.
(2) If the Commission approves a replacement plan under section 159YK, the re- placement plan— (a) (b) takes effect on the date specified by the Commission; and is treated as revoking the plan it replaces.

Section 159YL: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159YM Commission may make significant amendment to plan (1) (2) The Commission may, at any time, on its own initiative, propose a significant amendment to an organisation’s plan if it is satisfied that the significant amend- ment is reasonably necessary to ensure accountability for public funding.
If the Commission proposes a significant amendment to an organisation’s plan under subsection (1), it must prepare it in collaboration with the organisation (including giving the organisation a reasonable period to consult the stakehold- ers it considers ought to be consulted).
(3) After collaborating with the organisation on the proposed significant amend- ment, the Commission must, if it decides to proceed with the significant amendment, determine the content of the significant amendment and give the organisation a reasonable opportunity to make submissions on it.
(4) After considering any submissions made by the organisation, the Commission may— (a) approve the proposed significant amendment (with further amendment if necessary); or (b) abandon the proposed significant amendment.

Section 159YM: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159YN Effect of significant amendment made to plan under section 159YM A significant amendment made to a plan under section 159YM— (a) (b) forms part of the plan it amends; and takes effect on the date specified by the Commission.

Section 159YN: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Plan summary Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159YO Summary of plans (1) The Commission must prescribe and give public notice of the matters that an organisation that has a plan must include in a plan summary.
295 Part 13A s 159Z Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) An organisation that has a plan must ensure that— (a) (b) a plan summary is available for inspection by the public; and copies of that plan summary may be obtained either at no cost or no more than a reasonable cost; and (c) the plan summary contains the matters prescribed under subsection (1).

Section 159YO: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159Z Profiles must be publicly available [Repealed] Section 159Z: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Funding by Commission [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amend- ment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159ZA Minister must determine design of funding mechanisms [Repealed] Section 159ZA: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159ZB Approval of profiles for funding purposes [Repealed] Section 159ZB: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
Funding under this Part other than via plans Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159ZC Funding other than via plans (1) If a funding mechanism provides for funding for an organisation other than via plans, the Commission may, under this section, fund that organisation in ac- cordance with that funding mechanism.
(2) Nothing in subsection (1) limits the Commission’s powers to fund organisa- tions in other ways under a delegated authority or another enactment.

Section 159ZC: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159ZD Conditions on funding received under section 159ZC It is a condition of receiving funding under section 159ZC that the recipient will supply to the Commission or Ministry, from time to time as required by (1) 296 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 13A s 159ZE the Commission or Ministry, and in a form specified by the Commission or Ministry, any financial, statistical, or other information that the Commission or Ministry requires the organisation to supply.
(2) The Commission may impose conditions on funding received by an organisa- tion under section 159ZC, but only if the Minister has provided that, under the funding mechanism under which that funding is provided,— (a) (b) any or specified conditions may be imposed; or specified conditions must be imposed.

(3) The Commission may at any time (including during a funding period) amend any condition imposed under subsection (2).
(4) An amendment to a condition takes effect when the organisation has been given reasonable notice of it.

Section 159ZD: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159ZE Accountability for funding received under section 159ZC (1) An organisation (other than an institution) that receives funding under section 159ZC must ensure that— (a) it keeps records, in a form consistent with that required by the Commis- sion, for the period to which the funding relates, that fully and fairly show— (i) the transactions, assets, liabilities, and funds of the organisation that are or were affected by the funding; and (ii) whether any conditions on which the grant was made have been complied with; and (b) the records are available for inspection by the Commission at all reason- able times.
(2) As soon as practicable after the end of any year in which an organisation (other than an institution) receives funding under section 159ZC, the organisation must provide the Commission with— (a) (b) (c) a financial report of the organisation for that year, including a statement of financial performance, a statement of financial position, a statement of movements in equity, a statement of cash flows, and a statement of service performance that compares the performance of the organisation with the outcomes agreed with the Commission as measured by any per- formance indicators agreed with the Commission; and any financial reports, or statistical or other information, required by the Commission; and any information necessary to demonstrate compliance with any condi- tion attached to the funding.
297 Part 13A s 159ZF Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) A report required under subsection (2)(a) must be prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice and must be audited by a qualified audi- tor (within the meaning of section 35 of the Financial Reporting Act 2013).

(4) (5) The Commission may exempt any organisation, group of organisations, or type of organisation from complying with 1 or more of the requirements set out in subsections (2) and (3).
In exercising the powers conferred on it by subsection (4), the Commission must have regard to— (a) (b) (c) (d) the amount of funding sought by the organisation; and the amount of funding received by the organisation; and the type and size of the organisation; and any other matters that the Commission considers relevant.

(6) Section 203 sets out the accountability requirements for institutions.
Section 159ZE: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 159ZE(3): amended, on 1 July 2015, by section 17 of the Financial Reporting Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 64).
159ZF Commission may suspend or revoke funding given under section 159ZC (1) The Commission may suspend or revoke payment, or any or all further pay- ments, of any funding given to an organisation under section 159ZC if the Commission is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the organisation— (a) (b) has not complied, or is not complying, with a condition on which the funding was given; or is not providing, or has not provided, adequate and timely information required by the Commission or Ministry under section 159ZD.
(2) Before deciding whether to suspend or revoke payment under subsection (1), the Commission must— (a) (b) notify the organisation of the specific matters of concern; and give the organisation a reasonable opportunity to be heard.

The Commission must give its reasons to an organisation if it decides to sus- pend or revoke the organisation’s funding.
The Commission must specify the following matters if it decides to suspend funding under subsection (1): (a) the date on which the suspension will end and, as a consequence, the funding will be revoked; and (b) what action the organisation must take in order to have the suspension lifted and avoid funding being revoked.

Section 159ZF: replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
(3) (4) 298 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 14 s 160 159ZG Extending suspension of funding (1) (2) The date on which a suspension ends under section 159ZF(4)(a) may be exten- ded by the Commission.
The Commission must advise an organisation of the following matters if it de- cides to extend the date on which a suspension will end: (a) the date on which the extended suspension will end and, as a conse- quence, funding will be revoked; and (b) what action the organisation must take in order to have the extended sus- pension lifted and avoid funding being revoked.
(3) An extension of a suspension must be for a period that the Commission con- siders reasonable having considered— (a) (b) the specific matters referred to in section 159ZF(2)(a); and the action referred to in section 159ZF(4)(b).

Section 159ZG: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
159ZH Review of decision made by delegate to suspend or revoke funding under section 159ZC (1) Subsection (2) applies to an organisation in relation to which a person has exer- cised any of the following powers under a delegation from the Commission under section 73 of the Crown Entities Act 2004: (a) (b) (c) suspending the organisation’s funding under section 159ZF; or revoking the organisation’s funding under section 159ZF; or extending the suspension of the organisation’s funding under section 159ZG.
(2) An organisation to which this subsection applies may ask the Commission to review the decision of the delegate.

Section 159ZH: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Part 14 Establishment and disestablishment of tertiary institutions Part 14: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
160 Object The object of the provisions of this Act relating to institutions is to give them as much independence and freedom to make academic, operational, and man- agement decisions as is consistent with the nature of the services they provide, the efficient use of national resources, the national interest, and the demands of accountability.
299 Part 14 s 161 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 160: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

161 Academic freedom (1) (2) It is declared to be the intention of Parliament in enacting the provisions of this Act relating to institutions that academic freedom and the autonomy of institu- tions are to be preserved and enhanced.
For the purposes of this section, academic freedom, in relation to an institu- tion, means— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) the freedom of academic staff and students, within the law, to question and test received wisdom, to put forward new ideas and to state contro- versial or unpopular opinions: the freedom of academic staff and students to engage in research: the freedom of the institution and its staff to regulate the subject matter of courses taught at the institution: the freedom of the institution and its staff to teach and assess students in the manner they consider best promotes learning: the freedom of the institution through its chief executive to appoint its own staff.
(3) In exercising their academic freedom and autonomy, institutions shall act in a manner that is consistent with— (a) (b) the need for the maintenance by institutions of the highest ethical stand- ards and the need to permit public scrutiny to ensure the maintenance of those standards; and the need for accountability by institutions and the proper use by institu- tions of resources allocated to them.
(4) In the performance of their functions the Councils and chief executives of insti- tutions, Ministers, and authorities and agencies of the Crown shall act in all re- spects so as to give effect to the intention of Parliament as expressed in this section.

Section 161: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
162 Establishment of institutions (1) Upon the commencement of this section, this Act has effect as if— (a) (b) (c) each body specified in Part 1 of Schedule 13 was established as a univer- sity under subsection (2); and each body specified in Part 2 of that schedule was established as a col- lege of education under subsection (2); and each body that, immediately before that commencement, was established as a polytechnic, institute of technology, technical institute or commu- 300 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 14 s 162 nity college under the Education Act 1964, was established as a poly- technic under subsection (2),— and a reference in any other Act to an institution established under this Act shall be read as including a reference to a body referred to in paragraph (a), paragraph (b), or paragraph (c).
(2) Subject to subsections (3) to (5), the Governor-General may, by Order in Coun- cil made on the written recommendation of the Minister, establish a body as a college of education, a polytechnic, a specialist college, a university, or a wa- nanga, as the Governor-General considers appropriate.
(3) Before deciding whether or not to recommend to the Governor-General the making of an Order in Council under subsection (2), the Minister shall— (a) (ab) (b) give the Qualifications Authority a reasonable period in which to give advice to the Minister on the matter and consider any advice so given; and satisfy himself or herself that the establishment of the institution is in the interests of the tertiary education system and the nation as a whole; and consult with such institutions, organisations representing institutions, and other relevant bodies, as the Minister considers appropriate.
(4) In recommending to the Governor-General under subsection (2) that a body should be established as a college of education, a polytechnic, a specialist col- lege, a university, or a wananga, the Minister shall take into account— (a) that universities have all the following characteristics and other tertiary institutions have 1 or more of those characteristics: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) they are primarily concerned with more advanced learning, the principal aim being to develop intellectual independence: their research and teaching are closely interdependent and most of their teaching is done by people who are active in advancing knowledge: they meet international standards of research and teaching: they are a repository of knowledge and expertise: they accept a role as critic and conscience of society; and (b) that— (i) (ii) a college of education is characterised by teaching and research required for the pre-school, compulsory and post-compulsory sec- tors of education, and for associated social and educational service roles: a polytechnic is characterised by a wide diversity of continuing education, including vocational training, that contributes to the maintenance, advancement, and dissemination of knowledge and expertise and promotes community learning, and by research, par- 301 Part 14 s 163 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (iia) (iii) (iv) ticularly applied and technological research, that aids develop- ment: a specialist college is characterised by teaching and (if relevant) research of a specialist nature that maintains, enhances, dissemi- nates, and assists in the application of knowledge and expertise: a university is characterised by a wide diversity of teaching and research, especially at a higher level, that maintains, advances, disseminates, and assists the application of, knowledge, develops intellectual independence, and promotes community learning: a wananga is characterised by teaching and research that main- tains, advances, and disseminates knowledge and develops intel- lectual independence, and assists the application of knowledge re- garding ahuatanga Maori (Maori tradition) according to tikanga Maori (Maori custom).
(5) The Minister may, on the recommendation of the council of the institution con- cerned, change the name of an institution by notice published in the Gazette.

Section 162: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 162(2): amended, on 1 January 2003, by section 10(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Section 162(3)(ab): inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 10(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 162(4): amended, on 1 January 2003, by section 10(3) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 162(4)(b)(iia): inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 10(4) of the Education (Tertiary Re- form) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
163 Constitution of institutions (1) Each body referred to in paragraph (b) or paragraph (c) of section 162(1) shall consist of its governing body, the chief executive, the teaching staff, general staff, the graduates and students, and such other people as the governing body may from time to time determine.

(2) Each Order in Council establishing an institution shall make provision for de- termining the people who are to constitute the institution.
Section 163: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

164 Disestablishment of institutions Subject to this section, the Governor-General may, by Order in Council made on the written recommendation of the Minister, disestablish an institution.

The Governor-General shall not disestablish a university established under sec- tion 162 unless the House of Representatives has passed a resolution approving the disestablishment of the university.
(1) (2) 302 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 14 s 164 (3) The Minister shall not recommend the disestablishment of an institution unless the Minister— (a) (ab) is satisfied on reasonable grounds that there are good reasons to do so; and is satisfied that the disestablishment is in the interests of the tertiary edu- cation system and the nation as a whole; and (b) specifies the reasons in the recommendation.
(4) When an institution is, or 2 or more institutions are, disestablished, the Governor-General may, by Order in Council made on the written recommenda- tion of the Minister, incorporate the disestablished institution or any 1 or more of the disestablished institutions in another institution, whether the other insti- tution is— (a) (b) an existing institution or a new institution established for the purpose: an institution of the same class as the disestablished institution or institu- tions or an institution of a different class from it or them (for example, a disestablished polytechnic may be incorporated in a university).
(5) Before deciding whether or not to recommend the making of an Order in Coun- cil under subsection (1) or subsection (4), or both subsections (1) and (4), the Minister shall— (a) give to the council of the institution or the councils of the institutions concerned, and to every other body that the Minister considers is likely to be directly affected, written notice— (i) (ii) setting out the action that the Minister is considering whether to take and the reasons for that action; and inviting each council or other body to make a written submission to the Minister in relation to the matter; and publish such notices as the Minister considers appropriate inviting mem- bers of the public to make written submissions in relation to the matter; and consider any submissions made within a reasonable period in response to the notices referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b).
(b) (c) (6) If an Order in Council is made under subsection (1) or subsection (4), or both subsections (1) and (4), the Minister must present to the House of Representa- tives a copy of the Order in Council and a statement of the reasons for the mak- ing of the Order in Council.

Section 164: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 164(2): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 43 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 164(3)(ab): inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 11 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

303 Part 15 s 164A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 164(4): replaced, on 23 May 1998, by section 3(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

Section 164(5): amended, on 23 May 1998, by section 3(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).
Section 164(6): amended, on 23 May 1998, by section 3(3) of the Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

Part 15 Administration of tertiary institutions Part 15: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
164A Interpretation In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— Crown entity group has the meaning given by section 136 of the Crown En- tities Act 2004 financial product has the meaning given by section 7 of the Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013 related entity, in relation to an institution, means a person or body that is a re- lated party for the purpose of any financial reporting standard that applies to the institution under generally accepted accounting practice.
Section 164A: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 31 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Heading: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Councils 165 Institutions to be governed by councils (1) After the commencement of this section,— (a) (b) the governing body of each institution shall be a council constituted in accordance with this Part; and a reference in any law to the council or other governing body of an insti- tution shall be construed, except in relation to matters that occurred be- fore that commencement, as a reference to the council of that institution as so constituted.
(1A) On and after its reconstitution day,— (a) (b) subsection (1)(a) does not apply to a polytechnic; and except in relation to matters that occurred before the commencement of this section, a reference in any law to the council or other governing body of an institution must, in relation to the polytechnic, be construed as a reference to its council as constituted under this Part or Part 15A (as the case requires).
304 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 167 (2) Subject to section 193(2), all acts or things done in the name of, or on behalf of, an institution with the authority of, or of a delegate of, the council or the chief executive shall be deemed to have been done by the institution.

Section 165: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Section 165(1A): inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 5 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
166 Incorporation (1) Each body that is established as a university under section 162(2) after the commencement of section 162, and each college of education, polytechnic, specialist college, or wananga, is a body corporate with perpetual succession and a common seal; and is capable of— (a) (b) (c) holding real and personal property; and suing and being sued; and otherwise doing and suffering all that bodies corporate may do and suf- fer.

(2) This section does not limit the generality of section 192(1).
Section 166: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 166(1): amended, on 1 January 2003, by section 12 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
167 Affixing of council’s common seal (1) The council of an institution may, in writing under the institution’s common seal, authorise any member or members of the council, or any member or members of the staff of the institution, to execute documents, or documents of a specified class or description, or specified documents, on behalf of the insti- tution.
(2) Subject to subsection (6), an authority under subsection (1) may be given— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) unconditionally, or subject to any conditions the council thinks fit: to a specified member or members of the council or a specified member or members of the staff of the institution: to a member or members of the staff of the institution of a specified class or description: to the holder or holders for the time being of a specified office or offices of or in the institution: to the holder or holders for the time being of offices of a specified class or description of or in the institution.
(3) The institution’s common seal shall not be affixed to any document except— (a) pursuant to a resolution of the council; or 305 Part 15 s 168 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) by virtue of, and in accordance with, an authority under subsection (1).

(4) The affixing of the institution’s common seal pursuant to a resolution of the council shall be countersigned— (a) in the case of the affixing of the common seal to an award, by 1 member; or (b) in any other case, by at least 2 members.
(5) The affixing of the institution’s common seal by virtue of an authority under subsection (1) shall be countersigned in accordance with the authority.

(6) An authority under subsection (1) shall provide for the affixing of the institu- tion’s common seal to be countersigned by at least 2 people.

(7) The affixing of the institution’s common seal on a document is conclusive proof of the authority of the people who affixed it to do so.
Section 167: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Constitution of councils Heading: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

168 Constitutions of councils of existing institutions [Repealed] Section 168: repealed, on 18 December 2009, by section 6 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
169 Constitutions of councils of new institutions (1) (2) For the purpose of advising the Minister as to the constitution for the council of a body that is, or is to be, established under section 162(2), the Minister shall appoint a committee (in this section referred to as an establishment commit- tee) consisting of 3 persons.
The establishment committee shall recommend to the Minister a constitution for the council that is, in the opinion of that committee, appropriate for the in- stitution and complies with the requirements of section 171.

(3) When the establishment committee has recommended a constitution for the council in accordance with subsection (2), the Minister shall, by notice publish- ed in the Gazette, determine the constitution of the council in accordance with the recommendation.
(4) Subsections (1) to (3) do not apply to the constitution for the council of a body that is, or is to be, established under section 162(2) as a polytechnic (for which sections 222AA and 222AM provide).

Section 169: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 169(4): inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 7 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
306 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 171A 170 Amendment of constitution (1) If, after the constitution of a council has been determined, the council recom- mends to the Minister that the constitution be amended in a manner that com- plies with the requirements of section 171, the Minister shall, by notice pub- lished in the Gazette, amend the constitution in accordance with the recommen- dation.

(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to the council of a designated polytechnic.
Section 170: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 170(2): inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 8 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

170A Constitution to provide for membership of council (1) (2) The constitution of a council must provide that it has 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 mem- bers.

Subsection (1) does not apply to the constitution of the council of a designated polytechnic.
Section 170A: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
171 Membership of council (1) The council of an institution must have a total of 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 members, as provided in its constitution, comprising— (a) the following number of members appointed by the Minister by written notice to the council: (i) (ii) 4 members (in the case of a council comprising 10, 11, or 12 members): 3 members (in the case of a council comprising 8 or 9 members); and (b) enough members appointed by the council by resolution, in accordance with its statutes, to bring the membership up to that total number.
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to the membership of the council of a designated polytechnic (for which sections 222AA and 222AM provide).

Section 171: replaced, on 13 February 2015, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
171A Certain people disqualified from appointment (1) A person cannot be appointed as a member of the council of an institution if he or she— (a) has at any time after the commencement of section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 been removed as a member of the council of any institution of any kind; or 307 Part 15 s 171B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) (c) is subject to a property order under the Protection of Personal and Prop- erty Rights Act 1988; or is a person in respect of whom a personal order has been made under the Protection of Personal and Property Rights Act 1988 that reflects ad- versely on— (i) (ii) his or her competence to manage his or her own affairs in relation to his or her property; or his or her capacity to make or to communicate decisions relating to any particular aspect or aspects of his or her personal care and welfare; or (d) is a bankrupt— (i) who has not obtained his or her order of discharge; or (ii) whose order of discharge has been suspended for a term not yet expired or is subject to conditions not yet fulfilled.
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to the membership of the council of a designated polytechnic (for which section 222AA provides).

Section 171A: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
171B Matters to be considered when appointing members (1) It is desirable that the council of an institution should, so far as is reasonably practicable, reflect— (a) (b) the ethnic and socio-economic diversity of the communities served by the institution; and the fact that approximately half the population of New Zealand is male and half the population is female.
(2) When appointing members of a council, the Minister or council must have re- gard to subsection (1), but— (a) must ensure that at least 1 member of the council is Māori; and (b) must appoint people who (in the Minister’s or council’s opinion)— (i) (ii) (iii) have relevant knowledge, skills, or experience; and are likely to be able to fulfil their individual duties to the council; and together with the other members of the council, are capable of undertaking its responsibilities, duties, and functions.
(3) Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to the membership of the council of a des- ignated polytechnic (for which section 222AD provides).

Section 171B: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
308 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 171C 171C Statutes relating to appointment of members by councils of institutions (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) The council of an institution may make statutes relating to the appointment of members under section 171(1)(b) (or, as the case requires, section 222AA(1)(b)).
In respect of any of the appointments the council has power to make, the stat- utes— (a) may provide for direct appointment by the council of a member chosen by the council; or (b) may require the council to appoint a member— (i) (ii) (iii) of a stated description; or holding a stated office; or nominated by a stated institution or institutions, or an institution or institutions of a stated description; or (iv) elected by people of a stated description.
To the extent that the statutes require the council to appoint any member elected by people of a stated description, they must also provide for the pro- cesses by which elections must be held and their results must be determined.
To the extent that the statutes require the council to appoint any member nom- inated by a stated institution or institutions, or an institution or institutions of a stated description, they must also provide for the process by which nominations may be called for and must be considered.
In the case of an appointment pursuant to a statute providing for any of the matters stated in subsection (2)(b), it is a sufficient compliance with section 171B(2)(b) if, when making the statute concerned, the council— (a) had regard to section 171B(1); and (b) was satisfied that compliance with the statute would be likely to result in the appointment of a person who— (i) (ii) (iii) has relevant knowledge, skills, or experience; and is likely to be able to fulfil his or her individual duties to the coun- cil; and together with the other members of the council, is capable of undertaking its responsibilities, duties, and functions.
(6) Subsections (2) to (4) do not limit the generality of section 194.

Section 171C: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
309 Part 15 s 171D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 171D Limitations on number of occasions on which people may be appointed as members of councils (1) The constitution of the council of an institution must contain a provision limit- ing the number of occasions on which a person may be appointed as a member of the council.
(2) A person cannot be appointed as a member of the council of an institution if he or she has previously been appointed as a member of the council on the number of occasions, or more than the number of occasions, stated in the provision de- scribed in subsection (1).
(3) For the purposes of subsection (2), appointed means— (a) appointed, elected, or co-opted, (otherwise than to fill a casual vacancy) before the commencement of section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2015; or (b) appointed on or after that commencement.

(4) (5) Except as provided in subsection (2), a person is not ineligible for appointment as a member of the council of an institution just because he or she has previ- ously been a member of the council.
Subsections (1) to (3) do not apply to the council of a designated polytechnic (for which section 222AF provides).

Section 171D: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

171E Membership of more than 1 council A person who is a member of the council of an institution may be appointed as a member of the council of another institution (whether or not they are institu- tions of the same kind).
Section 171E: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
171F Certain acts and proceedings not invalidated by defects (1) No act or proceeding of a council of an institution, or of any committee of a council of an institution, is invalidated by— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) a defect in the appointment of a member of the council or committee; or a defect in the nomination of a member of the council or committee for appointment as a member of the council; or a defect in the election of a member of the council or committee for ap- pointment as a member of the council; or a disqualification of a member of the council or committee; or a vacancy or vacancies in the membership of the council or committee; or (f) a defect in the convening of any meeting.
310 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 174 (2) Subsection (1) does not apply to the council of a designated polytechnic (for which section 222AA provides).

Section 171F: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

172 Transitional provisions relating to an institution’s first council [Repealed] Section 172: repealed, on 18 December 2009, by section 10 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
173 Term of office (1) When appointing a member of the council of an institution, the Minister or council— (a) may appoint the member for any period of not more than 4 years; and (b) must state in the notice or resolution appointing him or her— (i) (ii) the day on which his or her appointment takes effect; and the term for which he or she is appointed.
(2) If the term of office of a member of a council expires before a successor is ap- pointed, he or she continues in office until his or her successor’s appointment takes effect.

Section 173: replaced, on 13 February 2015, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

174 Vacation of office (1) A member of a council may resign as a member by written notice signed by the member and given to the chief executive.
(1A) Subsection (1) does not apply to the chief executive of an institution who has been appointed by its council pursuant to a statute requiring it to appoint the chief executive as a member of the council.
(2) [Repealed] (2A) [Repealed] (3) The council may, by resolution, dismiss a member of a council (other than the chief executive) as a member if the member— (aa) (a) (b) has, after the commencement of section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 2015, been removed as a member of the council of some other insti- tution; or is declared bankrupt; or becomes subject to a property order under the Protection of Personal and Property Rights Act 1988 (other than an order under section 30 of that Act); or 311 Part 15 s 174 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ba) becomes subject to a personal order under that Act that reflects adverse- ly on his or her— (i) (ii) competence to manage his or her own affairs in relation to his or her property; or capacity to make or to communicate decisions relating to any par- ticular aspect or aspects of his or her personal care and welfare; or (c) fails to attend 3 consecutive meetings of the council without having given to the chief executive prior notice of his or her inability to attend the meeting concerned; or (d) without reasonable excuse, fails to comply with section 175.
(3A) The council may, by resolution, suspend a member of the council (other than the chief executive) as a member if the member becomes subject to a property order made under section 30 of the Protection of Personal and Property Rights Act 1988 (which relates to temporary orders).
(3B) If a member is suspended under subsection (3A),— (a) (b) (c) the suspension has effect as if the member had been granted leave of ab- sence; and the member is not capable of acting as a member during the period of suspension; and the suspension continues until the property order made under section 30 of the Protection of Personal and Property Rights Act 1988 ceases to be in force (but this does not affect any powers of the council under subsec- tion (3) in respect of the member).
(4) The chief executive shall send to the member concerned a letter setting out the terms of the resolution dismissing or suspending the member.

Section 174: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 174(1): amended, on 1 March 2010, by section 12(1) of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

Section 174(1A): replaced, on 13 February 2015, by section 8(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Section 174(2): repealed, on 13 February 2015, by section 8(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 174(2A): repealed, on 13 February 2015, by section 8(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 174(3)(aa): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 8(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Section 174(3)(b): replaced, on 10 September 2008, by section 4(5) of the Disability (United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities) Act 2008 (2008 No 64).

Section 174(3)(ba): inserted, on 10 September 2008, by section 4(5) of the Disability (United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities) Act 2008 (2008 No 64).
Section 174(3A): inserted, on 10 September 2008, by section 4(6) of the Disability (United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities) Act 2008 (2008 No 64).

312 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 176 Section 174(3B): inserted, on 10 September 2008, by section 4(6) of the Disability (United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities) Act 2008 (2008 No 64).
Section 174(4): amended, on 10 September 2008, by section 4(7) of the Disability (United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities) Act 2008 (2008 No 64).
175 Disclosure of interest (1) A member of, or of a committee of, a council who has an interest in a matter being considered or about to be considered by the council or committee, as the case may be, shall, as soon as possible after the relevant facts have come to the member’s knowledge, disclose the nature of the interest at a meeting of the council or committee.
(2) A disclosure under subsection (1) shall be recorded in the minutes of the meet- ing of the council or committee and the member shall not unless the council decides otherwise— (a) (b) be present during any deliberation of the council or committee with re- spect to that matter; or take part in any decision of the council or committee with respect to that matter.
(3) For the purposes of this section, a person has an interest in a matter if, and only if, the matter relates to the conditions of service of the person as the chief executive or a member of the staff of the institution concerned or the person has any other direct or indirect pecuniary interest in the matter.

Section 175: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
176 Casual vacancies (1) If the office of a member of the council of an institution becomes vacant before the end of the member’s term of office,— (a) (b) another person must be appointed to the office by the procedure by which the member became a member; but if the procedure is no longer available (or no longer applicable to the va- cant position), the council must consider whether it is necessary to ap- point another person under its constitution and, if so,— (i) determine the appropriate procedure for appointment of another person; and (ii) appoint another person using it.
(2) If the office becomes vacant within 3 months before the end of the member’s term of office, the Minister or council (as the case may be) may decide that the vacancy does not need to be filled under this section.

(3) Sections 173 and 174 apply to an appointment under this section.

Section 176: replaced, on 13 February 2015, by section 9 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
313 Part 15 s 176A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 176A Individual duties of members of councils (1) A member of the council of an institution, when acting as a member of the council in any circumstances,— (a) must— (i) (ii) (iii) act with honesty and integrity; and act in the interests of the institution as a whole; and act in a manner that promotes the performance of the functions characteristic of an institution of the kind to which he or she be- longs, and the duties of the council; and (iv) act in good faith, and not pursue his or her own interests at the ex- pense of the council’s interests; and (b) must exercise the care, diligence, and skill that a reasonable person would exercise in the same circumstances, taking into account— (i) (ii) (iii) the nature of the institution; and the nature of the action; and the position of the member as a member of the council of an insti- tution, and the nature of the responsibilities undertaken by him or her; and (c) must not disclose any information to which subsection (3) applies to any person, or make use of, or act on, that information, except— (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) in the performance of the council’s functions; or as required or permitted by law; or if he or she has earlier been authorised to do so by the council; or if disclosing, making use of, or acting on it will not, or will be un- likely to, prejudice the council or the institution; or (v) in complying with requirements for members to disclose interests.
(2) The fact that a member of the council of an institution was appointed by the council in accordance with a statute providing for the appointment of a member (or 2 or more members) to represent the interests of a stated institution or of people or institutions of a stated description does not displace or limit the member’s duty under subsection (1)(a)(ii) to act in the interests of the institu- tion as a whole.
(3) This subsection applies to information that— (a) a member of the council of an institution has in his or her capacity as a member of the council; and (b) would not otherwise be available to him or her.

Subparagraphs (i) to (iii) of paragraph (b) of subsection (1) do not limit the generality of that paragraph.

(4) 314 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 176C Section 176A: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
176B Accountability for individual duties (1) The duties of a member of the council of an institution (council member) under section 176A (individual duties) are duties owed to the Minister and the council.

(2) A council member who does not comply with his or her individual duties may be removed from office under section 176C or 222AJ (as the case requires).

(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) The council of an institution may bring an action against a council member for breach of any individual duty.
Except as provided in subsections (2) and (3), a council member is not liable for a breach of an individual duty.

This section does not affect any other ground for removing a council member from office.

Subsection (4) does not affect anything for which a council member may be liable under any other Act or rule of law arising from the act or omission that constitutes the breach concerned.
Subsection (4) does not affect anything for which a council member who is the chief executive of the institution concerned may, as chief executive, be liable under this Act or any other Act or rule of law, arising from the act or omission that constitutes the breach concerned.

Section 176B: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
176C Removal of members (1) If the council of an institution believes that the actions of a member may justify his or her removal from office, it must give the Minister a written report stat- ing— (a) (b) (c) its reasons for believing that the actions may justify his or her removal; and the information or grounds in support of those reasons; and its recommendation as to whether the member should be removed from office.
(2) After considering the report, the Minister may, if satisfied that there is just cause to do so, remove the member from office.

(3) The removal must be made by written notice to the member (with a copy to the council).

(4) The notice must state— (a) the day on which the removal takes effect, which must not be earlier than the day on which the notice is received; and 315 Part 15 s 176D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) the reasons for the removal.
(5) (6) (7) The Minister must notify the removal in the Gazette as soon as practicable after giving the notice.

This section does not limit or affect section 174.

For the purposes of subsection (2), just cause includes misconduct, inability to perform the functions of office, neglect of duty, and breach of any of the col- lective duties of the council or the individual duties of members (depending on the seriousness of the breach).
(8) Subsections (1) to (7) do not apply to the removal from office of a member of the council of a designated polytechnic (for which section 222AJ provides).

Section 176C: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
176D Process for removal The Minister may remove a member of the council of an institution under sec- tion 176C with as little formality and technicality, and as much expedition, as is permitted by— (a) (b) (c) the principles of natural justice; and a proper consideration of the matter; and the requirements of that section.

Section 176D: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
176E Application of Local Authorities (Members’ Interests) Act 1968 (1) A council of an institution is not a local authority for the purposes of the Local Authorities (Members’ Interests) Act 1968.

(2) Subsection (1) is for the avoidance of doubt.

Section 176E: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 10 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
177 Chairperson and deputy chairperson (1) At the first meeting of a council the council shall elect one of its members to be the chairperson, and another of its members to be the deputy chairperson, of the council.

(2) Whenever a vacancy subsequently occurs in the office of chairperson or deputy chairperson of the council, the council shall elect one of its members to fill the vacant office.
(2A) The election of a member to fill the vacant office of chairperson or deputy chairperson of the council must be for a stated period (not exceeding the term of the member’s current term as a member of the council).
316 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 177 (3) A member of the council who is the chief executive of the institution, a mem- ber of the staff of the institution, or a student enrolled at the institution is not eligible for election as the chairperson or deputy chairperson of the council.

(4) The chairperson or deputy chairperson of a council— (a) (b) holds office for the period for which he or she is elected; but is eligible for re-election.
(5) If the term of office of the chairperson or deputy chairperson of a council ex- pires before a successor is elected, he or she continues in office until a succes- sor is elected.

(5A) Subsection (5) overrides subsection (4).
(6) The chairperson or deputy chairperson of a council— (a) may resign as chairperson or deputy chairperson by written notice signed by him or her and given to the chief executive; and (b) ceases to hold office as chairperson or deputy chairperson if— (i) (ii) (iii) he or she ceases to be a member of the council; or he or she becomes the chief executive, a member of the staff or a student of the institution; or the council passes a resolution to the effect that it has no confi- dence in the chairperson or deputy chairperson, as the case may be.
(6A) Subsection (6) overrides subsections (4) and (5).

(7) (8) The chairperson of the council of a university may be referred to as the Chan- cellor or by such other title as the council determines and the chairperson of the council of an institution other than a university may be referred to by such title (other than Chancellor or another title that includes the word Chancellor) as the council determines.
The deputy chairperson of the council of a university may be referred to as the Pro-Chancellor or by such other title as the council determines and the deputy chairperson of the council of an institution other than a university may be re- ferred to by such title (other than Pro-Chancellor or another title that includes the word Chancellor) as the council determines.
(9) Subsections (1) to (8) do not apply to the chairperson and deputy chairperson of the council of a designated polytechnic (for which section 222AG provides).

Section 177: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 177(2A): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 11(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 177(3): replaced, on 13 February 2015, by section 11(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Section 177(4): replaced, on 13 February 2015, by section 11(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

317 Part 15 s 178 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 177(5): replaced, on 13 February 2015, by section 11(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 177(5A): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 11(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Section 177(6A): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 11(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 177(9): inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 13 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

178 Meetings of councils (1) (2) (3) (4) The chairperson of a council may convene meetings to be held at such places and times as he or she determines.
It is the duty of the chairperson of a council to convene such meetings as he or she thinks necessary for the efficient performance of the functions of the coun- cil.

If so requested by written notice by not fewer than 3 members of a council, the chairperson of the council shall convene a meeting.
If there is no chairperson of a council or for any reason the chairperson is not available, the deputy chairperson of the council has the powers and duties of the chairperson under subsections (1) to (3) and references in those subsections to the chairperson shall be construed as references to the deputy chairperson.

(5) No business shall be transacted at a meeting unless a majority of the members then holding office are present.
(6) (7) (8) (9) The chairperson shall preside at all meetings at which he or she is present.

If the chairperson is not present at a meeting but the deputy chairperson is present, the deputy chairperson shall preside.

If neither the chairperson nor the deputy chairperson is present at a meeting, the members present shall appoint one of their number to preside.

Every question before a meeting shall be decided by a majority of the votes cast on it by the members present.
(10) At a meeting the member presiding has a deliberative vote on every question, and on any question where the deliberative votes for and against are equal also has a casting vote.

(11) Except as provided by this section, a council shall determine its own proced- ures.

Section 178: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 178(3): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 12 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
318 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 179 Fees and allowances Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 180 (1) A member of a council other than the chief executive may be paid fees at such rates (not exceeding maximum rates fixed by the Minister in accordance with the fees framework) as the council determines.
(2) A member of a council of an institution is entitled, in accordance with the fees framework, to be reimbursed, out of the funds of the entity, for actual and reasonable travelling and other expenses incurred in carrying out his or her office as a member.
(3) For the purposes of this section, fees framework means the framework deter- mined by the Government from time to time for the classification and remuner- ation of statutory and other bodies in which the Crown has an interest, includ- ing statutory entities and their subsidiaries and tertiary education institutions.

Section 179: replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
Functions and duties of councils Heading: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
180 Functions of councils (1) The functions of the council of an institution are— (a) (b) to appoint a chief executive in accordance with the State Sector Act 1988, and to monitor and evaluate his or her performance: to prepare and submit a proposed plan if the institution is seeking fund- ing under a funding mechanism that provides for funding via plans: (c) if the institution has a plan,— (i) to ensure that the institution is managed in accordance with that plan; and (ii) to determine policies to implement that plan: (d) (e) to determine, subject to the State Sector Act 1988, the policies of the in- stitution in relation to the management of its affairs: to undertake planning relating to the institution’s long-term strategic di- rection.
(2) [Repealed] Section 180: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 180(1)(a): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 45 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 180(1)(b): replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 22(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 180(1)(c): replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 22(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
319 Part 15 s 181 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 180(1)(d): replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 22(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 180(1)(e): replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 22(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 180(2): repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 22(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
181 Duties of councils It is the duty of the council of an institution, in the performance of its functions and the exercise of its powers,— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) to strive to ensure that the institution attains the highest standards of ex- cellence in education, training, and research: to acknowledge the principles of the Treaty of Waitangi: to encourage the greatest possible participation by the communities served by the institution so as to maximise the educational potential of all members of those communities with particular emphasis on those groups in those communities that are under-represented among the stu- dents of the institution: to ensure that the institution does not discriminate unfairly against any person: to ensure that the institution operates in a financially responsible manner that ensures the efficient use of resources and maintains the institution’s long-term viability: (f) to ensure that proper standards of integrity, conduct, and concern for— (i) (ii) the public interest; and the well-being of students attending the institution— are maintained.
Section 181: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 181(e): replaced, on 25 October 2001, by section 46 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
182 Determination of policy In determining the policy of an institution with respect to any matter relating to the institution, the council of the institution shall consult with any board, com- mittee, or other body established within the institution that has responsibility for giving advice in relation to, or for giving effect to, the policy of the institu- tion with respect to that matter.
The council of an institution shall establish an academic board consisting of the institution’s chief executive, and members of the staff and students of the insti- tution, to— (1) (2) 320 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 184A (a) advise the council on matters relating to courses of study or training, awards, and other academic matters; and (b) exercise powers delegated to it by the council.
(3) The academic board shall be deemed for the purposes of section 222 to be a committee appointed by the council under section 193(2)(i).

(4) Without limiting the generality of subsection (1), the council of an institution shall not make any decision or statute in respect of any academic matter re- ferred to in subsection (2) unless it has requested the advice of the academic board and considered any advice given by the academic board.
(5) Without derogating from the duties of the council of an institution under sub- sections (1) and (4), a decision or statute made by the council is not invalid merely because of a failure of the council to comply with either of those sub- sections.

Section 182: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
183 Personal liability No member of the council of an institution is personally liable for any act done or omitted by the member or by the council— (a) (b) in good faith; and in pursuance or intended pursuance of the functions of the institution or of the council.

Section 183: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Charters [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 15 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
184 Each institution to have charter [Repealed] Section 184: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 15 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

184A Interim arrangements for charters [Repealed] Section 184A: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 15 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
321 Part 15 s 185 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 185 Consultations [Repealed] Section 185: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 15 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

186 Consideration of proposed charter or amendment [Repealed] Section 186: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 15 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
187 Power of Minister to initiate amendment of charter [Repealed] Section 187: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 15 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

188 Approval of charter or amendment [Repealed] Section 188: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 15 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
189 What happens if institution has no charter [Repealed] Section 189: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 15 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

190 Mandatory requirements for charter [Repealed] Section 190: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 15 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
191 Charter to be available for inspection [Repealed] Section 191: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 15 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Profiles [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 23 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amend- ment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

191A Each institution to have a profile [Repealed] Section 191A: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 23 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
322 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 192 Powers of institutions and councils Heading: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
192 Powers of institutions (1) Subject to subsection (2), an institution has— (a) (b) (c) the rights, powers, and privileges of a natural person; and the power to issue debentures; and the power to grant floating charges on the institution’s undertaking or property, or any of it; and (ca) the power to invest in the financial products of a related entity; and (d) the power to do any other thing it is authorised to do by this Act, by any other enactment, or by any rule of law.
(2) None of the rights, powers, or privileges of an institution shall be exercised ex- cept for the purpose of performing— (a) (aa) (ab) functions characteristic of institutions of the class to which the institu- tion belongs; or in the case of an institution that incorporates another institution or other institutions under section 164(4), functions characteristic of institutions of the class to which the incorporating institution belongs and functions characteristic of institutions of the class or classes to which the incorpor- ated institution or institutions belong; or in the case of an institution that is approved to be a sponsor of a partner- ship school kura hourua, functions characteristic of a body that is a spon- sor (including entering into, and performing functions in relation to, a partnership school contract); or (b) functions of a kind that, in the opinion of the institution’s council,— (i) (ii) may conveniently, and without disadvantage to the performance of those characteristic functions, be performed in association with those functions; and are appropriate for institutions of the class to which the institution belongs or, in the case of an institution that incorporates another institution or other institutions under section 164(4), are appropri- ate for institutions of the classes represented in the institution.
(3) (4) Paragraphs (b) to (d) of subsection (1) do not affect the generality of paragraph (a) of that subsection.
Subject to subsection (5), an institution shall not exercise any of the following powers without the written consent of the Secretary: (a) (b) the power to sell or otherwise dispose of assets or interests in assets: the power to mortgage or otherwise charge assets or interests in assets: 323 Part 15 s 192 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (c) (d) the power to grant leases of land or buildings or parts of buildings: the power to borrow, issue debentures, or otherwise raise money.
(5) Subsection (4) does not prohibit an institution, without the consent of the Sec- retary, from— (a) (b) (c) selling or otherwise disposing of, or mortgaging or otherwise charging, an asset or an interest in an asset, where the value of the asset or interest does not exceed an amount determined by the Minister or an amount as- certained in accordance with a formula determined by the Minister: granting a lease for a term that does not exceed, and when added to any term for which the lease may be renewed does not exceed, 15 years: borrowing, issuing debentures, or otherwise raising money, where the amount to be borrowed, the amount of the debentures, or the amount to be raised, does not exceed an amount determined by the Minister or as- certained in accordance with a formula determined by the Minister.
(6) A determination by the Minister under this section may relate to all institutions, institutions of a specified class or description, or a specified institution or insti- tutions, and shall be made after the Minister has consulted the institution or in- stitutions concerned.
(7) Where the Secretary consents under subsection (4) to the exercise of a power by an institution, the council shall comply with any conditions imposed by the Secretary and shall tell the Secretary when the transaction has been completed and how the proceeds, if any, of the transaction have been dealt with.
(8) Subject to subsection (11), the powers to grant awards conferred on an institu- tion by this Act or any other enactment— (a) (b) in the case of nationally recognised awards, are subject to any reasonable requirements made by the Qualifications Authority in the performance of its functions under this Act; and in any case, do not extend, without the consent of that Authority, to granting an award that is described as a degree or the description of which includes the words bachelor, master, or doctor.
(9) Subsection (8)(b) does not apply in relation to the granting of an award by a university.

(10) Any consent by the Qualifications Authority under subsection (8)(b) may be withdrawn, after consultation with the council of the institution concerned, with effect from a date not earlier than 1 January next following the giving of notice of the withdrawal to that institution.
(11) Nothing in this Act prevents an institution that was in existence immediately before the commencement of this section— (a) from granting during the 2 years following that commencement an award of a kind or description that the institution, or the governing body 324 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 193 of that institution, was entitled to grant immediately before that com- mencement; or (b) from granting after that period an award to a person in consequence of the person’s having completed a programme of study or training that the person commenced to undertake before the end of that period.
Section 192: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 192(1)(ca): inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 32(1) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 192(2)(aa): inserted, on 23 May 1998, by section 4(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

Section 192(2)(ab): inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 32(2) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
Section 192(2)(b)(ii): amended, on 23 May 1998, by section 4(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

Section 192(5)(b): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 24 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 192(11)(b): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 20 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
193 Powers of councils (1) (2) The council of an institution has all powers reasonably necessary to enable it to perform its functions efficiently and effectively.
Except where they are exercised by delegation under this Act, the following powers of an institution shall be exercised only by the institution’s council: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) to provide courses of study or training, admit students (including provi- sionally and ad eundem statum) and grant awards: to grant fellowships, scholarships, bursaries, or prizes: to authorise the making of grants or loans out of the money of the insti- tution to the chief executive, to members of the staff or students of the institution, or to any association of staff or students, on such terms and conditions as the council thinks fit and guarantee loans made by other persons to the chief executive or members of the staff of the institution for housing purposes: to accept gifts, devises, and bequests made to the institution, whether on trust or otherwise: to agree to the disestablishment of the institution and its incorporation in another institution of the same class or a different class (for example, the council of a polytechnic may agree to the disestablishment of the poly- technic and its incorporation in a university): (ea) to agree to the incorporation in the institution of another institution or other institutions, whether of the same class as itself or a different class 325 Part 15 s 194 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 from itself (for example, the council of a university may agree to the in- corporation of a polytechnic in the university): to arrange for the manufacture of, and distribute (whether by way of sale or otherwise), any article or thing bearing a mark, symbol or writing that is associated with the institution: to arrange for the provision of (whether by sale or otherwise) goods and services to staff or students of the institution or other persons using, or otherwise attending at, facilities of the institution: to prescribe fees payable by students of the institution or any of them: to establish boards or other bodies within the institution to give advice to the council: (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) to do anything incidental to the exercise of any of the preceding powers.
(3) The council of an institution has power to appoint committees consisting of such persons, whether or not members of the council, as the council determines to exercise such powers as are delegated to them under section 222 and such powers as are conferred on them by statutes made by the council, and to alter, discharge, and reconstitute committees so appointed.

Section 193: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Section 193(2)(e): replaced, on 23 May 1998, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

Section 193(2)(ea): inserted, on 23 May 1998, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).
194 Statutes (1) The council of an institution may make statutes, not inconsistent with this Act or the State Sector Act 1988, with respect to any of the following matters: the good government and discipline of the institution: the imposition, by or on behalf of the council, of penalties upon staff or students of the institution for contravention of or failure to comply with a statute with respect to a matter referred to in paragraph (a): [Repealed] [Repealed] subject to Part 16, the enrolment of persons in courses of study or train- ing of the institution or the admission of persons to examinations of the institution: subject to Part 16, the courses of study and training of the institution: subject to section 192(8), the awards that may be granted by the council and the requirements for those awards: the granting by the council of fellowships, scholarships, bursaries, and prizes: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) 326 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (i) (ia) (j) Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 195A the provision of superannuation or retirement benefits for, or in respect of, the chief executive or members of the staff of the institution: any of the matters stated in section 171C: any other matter required or permitted by this Act to be provided for by statutes.
(2) If the council of an institution makes a statute under subsection (1)(b) provid- ing for the imposition of penalties upon staff or students of the institution, the statute shall provide for the council, if so requested by a member of the staff or a student upon whom a penalty is imposed, to review, or arrange for the review of, the amount of the penalty, the imposition of the penalty, or both.

Section 194: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Section 194(1)(c): repealed, on 13 February 2015, by section 13(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 194(1)(d): repealed, on 13 February 2015, by section 13(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 194(1)(ia): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 13(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
195 Trust property Notwithstanding anything contained in this Act or any other enactment relating to the institution, any real or personal property held by an institution upon trust shall be dealt with in accordance with the powers and duties of the institution as trustee.

Section 195: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Institutions at risk Heading: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 47 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
195A Criteria for risk assessment of institutions (1) The Secretary must, after consulting institution councils, determine— (a) (b) criteria for assessing the level of risk to the operation and long-term via- bility of institutions; and criteria for assessing the level of risk to the education performance of the students enrolled at polytechnics.
(1A) In the case of criteria for assessing the level of risk to the education perform- ance of the students enrolled at polytechnics, the requirement to consult institu- tion councils applies to polytechnic councils only.
(1B) The Secretary may under subsection (1) determine criteria for assessing the level of risk to the operation and long-term viability of polytechnics only; and in that case,— 327 Part 15 s 195B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) (3) (a) (b) the requirement to consult institution councils applies to polytechnic councils only; and the criteria determined may be in addition to, or instead of, those deter- mined for other institutions.
The Secretary must publish criteria determined under subsection (1) in the Gazette.

Criteria determined under this section must be reviewed at least once in every 2 years following the date of their publication in the Gazette.

Section 195A: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 47 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 195A(1): replaced, on 18 December 2009, by section 14 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
Section 195A(1A): inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 14 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

Section 195A(1B): inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 14 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
195B Institutions to provide information if required (1) The chief executive of the Commission may, if he or she has reasonable grounds to believe that an institution may be at risk, by written notice to the council of an institution, require the council to provide either or both of the fol- lowing: (a) (b) specified information about the operation, management, or financial pos- ition of the institution at a given time: reports at specified intervals on specific aspects of the operation, man- agement, or financial position of the institution.
(2) If the chief executive of the Commission requires information under subsection (1), the information required must be information that relates to the risks to the institution that the chief executive of the Commission is concerned about.

(3) A council that receives a notice under subsection (1) must provide the chief executive of the Commission with the required information within or at the time or times specified in the notice.
The chief executive of the Commission may revoke or amend any notice given under subsection (1).

In this section, Commission means the Tertiary Education Commission estab- lished under section 159C.

Section 195B: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 47 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 195B(1): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 25(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
Section 195B(2): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 25(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

(4) (5) 328 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 195D Section 195B(3): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 25(3) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 195B(4): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 25(4) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
Section 195B(5): replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 25(5) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

195C Minister may appoint Crown observer (1) If the Minister considers on reasonable grounds that the operation or long-term viability of an institution is at risk, he or she may appoint a Crown observer to the council of the institution.
(2) A Crown observer may not be appointed to the council of an institution unless the Minister has first— (a) (b) consulted with the council; and advised the council that he or she is considering appointing a Crown ob- server; and (c) given the council an opportunity to comment on the proposal.

(3) Every appointment under this section must be in writing and must state the date on which it takes effect.
(4) A Crown observer may— (a) (b) (c) attend any meeting of the council or committee of the council of the in- stitution to which he or she is appointed; and offer advice to the council, or any committee or member of the council; and report to the Minister on any matter raised or discussed at any meeting that he or she attends as a Crown observer.

(5) A Crown observer must at all times maintain confidentiality with respect to council affairs, except as authorised by paragraph (c) of subsection (4).
(6) A Crown observer is not a member of the council or any committee of the council, and may not— (a) (b) vote on any matter; or exercise any of the powers, or perform any of the functions or duties, of a member of the council.

Section 195C: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 47 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
195D Minister may dissolve council and appoint commissioner (1) The Minister may, by written notice, dissolve the council of an institution and appoint a commissioner to act in place of the council if the Minister believes on reasonable grounds that— 329 Part 15 s 195D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) there is a serious risk to the operation or long-term viability of the insti- tution; and other methods of reducing the risk either have failed or appear likely to fail.
(2) For the purpose of subsection (1), there is a serious risk to the operation or long-term viability of an institution if— (a) (b) the institution is, or is at risk of being, unable to pay its debts as they become due in the normal course of business; and according to the criteria published under section 195A(2), there is a ser- ious level of risk to the operation or long-term viability of the institution.
(3) A notice under subsection (1) must specify— (a) (b) the date when the dissolution and appointment take effect; and the name of the person appointed as commissioner.
(4) The Minister may not exercise the power under subsection (1) in relation to an institution unless he or she has first— (a) (b) (c) (d) consulted with the council of the institution and any other interested par- ties over the possible need to dissolve the council and appoint a commis- sioner; and following that consultation, given the council written notice of his or her preliminary decision that the council should be dissolved and a commis- sioner appointed in its place; and allowed the council at least 21 days in which to respond to the prelimin- ary decision; and considered any submissions made by the council about why the prelim- inary decision should not be confirmed.
(5) As soon as practicable after giving a notice under subsection (1), the Minister must— (a) (b) publish a copy of it in the Gazette; and present a copy of it to the House of Representatives.

(6) When a commissioner is appointed under this section, the Minister must review the appointment at least once in every 12 months following the appointment.
(7) As soon as the Minister is satisfied (following an annual review or at any other time) that the risk that gave rise to the appointment of the commissioner has reduced to such an extent that it is appropriate that the institution be adminis- tered by a council, a new council must be appointed in accordance with the constitution of the council most recently notified in the Gazette.

(8) A commissioner’s appointment ends on the close of the day before a new coun- cil takes office.
330 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 195F Section 195D: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 47 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 195D(7): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 45 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
195DA Protection of commissioners A commissioner appointed under section 195D(1) is not personally liable for an act he or she has done or omitted to do, or for any loss arising from that act or omission, if he or she was acting— (a) (b) in good faith; and in the course of carrying out his or her powers, functions, or duties.

Section 195DA: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 26 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
195E Powers and functions of commissioner (1) A commissioner appointed under section 195D has all the powers, functions, and duties of the council that he or she is appointed to replace, and must exer- cise those powers and perform those functions and duties in accordance with this Act (having particular regard to sections 160 and 161) and, in the case of an institution that has a plan, that plan.
(2) A commissioner replaces all council members who serve on any committee of the council that he or she is appointed to replace.

(3) Anything that, if done by or on behalf of a council, is required to be signed by 2 or more members of the council, may be done by the commissioner’s signa- ture alone.

Section 195E: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 47 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
Section 195E(1): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 27 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

195F Minister to appoint advisory committee (1) (2) If the Minister appoints a commissioner under section 195D, the Minister must also appoint an advisory committee for the purpose of advising and supporting the commissioner in the exercise of the commissioner’s functions, duties, and powers.
The Minister may appoint up to 5 persons to be members of an advisory com- mittee and must ensure that the composition of the committee reasonably re- flects the community of the institution as represented by its council at the time of the council’s dissolution.

(3) Members of an advisory committee may be paid fees at the same rates as were paid to members of the council at the time of its dissolution.

(4) The commissioner must have regard to any advice given by an advisory com- mittee.
331 Part 15 s 195G Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (5) For the purposes of section 222(1) (which is about delegations by the council to committees), an advisory committee is deemed to be a committee appointed under section 193(3).

Section 195F: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 47 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
195G Review of operation of sections 195A to 195F No later than 5 years from the date on which sections 195A to 195F come into force, the Minister must— (a) (b) review, in consultation with interested parties, the operation of sections 195A to 195F; and prepare a report of the review that includes recommendations on whether any amendment to those sections is necessary or desirable; and (c) present a copy of the report to the House of Representatives.
Section 195G: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 47 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Chief executive and staff Heading: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

196 Duties of chief executive (1) The academic and administrative affairs of an institution shall be managed by the chief executive of the institution.
(2) A person who held office as chief executive of an institution immediately be- fore the commencement of this section (whether by virtue of an appointment made as required by section 35 of the State Sector Amendment Act (No 2) 1989 or otherwise) shall, unless the term of office of the person would, apart from this Act, have ended on that commencement, be deemed to have been ap- pointed to that office on that commencement by the council of the institution in accordance with section 180(a) for the unexpired portion of his or her term of office and on the same terms and conditions as those on which the person was employed immediately before that commencement.
(3) The chief executive of a university may be referred to as the Vice-Chancellor or by such other title as the council of the university determines and the chief executive of an institution other than a university may be referred to by such title (other than Vice-Chancellor or another title that includes the word “Chan- cellor”) as the council of the institution determines.

Section 196: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
197 Delegation by chief executive The chief executive of an institution may from time to time, either generally or particularly, by writing delegate to the academic board or to any member of the (1) 332 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 197 staff of the institution any of the functions or powers of the chief executive under this Act or any other Act including functions or powers delegated to the chief executive under an Act other than this Act.
(2) Where the chief executive of an institution has, pursuant to subsection (1), delegated any functions or powers to the academic board or to a member of the staff of the institution, that board or member may, with the prior approval in writing of the chief executive, by writing signed by at least 2 members of that board or by the member, as the case may be, delegate such of those functions or powers as the chief executive approves to any other member of the staff of the institution.
(3) Subject to any general or special directions given or conditions imposed by the chief executive, the person to whom any functions or powers are delegated under this section may perform those functions or exercise those powers in the same manner and with the same effect as if they had been conferred on that person directly by this Act and not by delegation.
(4) The power of a chief executive to delegate under this section— (a) (b) is subject to any prohibitions, restrictions, or conditions contained in any other Act in relation to the delegation of the chief executive’s functions or powers; but does not limit any power of delegation conferred on the chief executive by any other Act.
(5) A person purporting to act pursuant to a delegation under this section shall, in the absence of proof to the contrary, be presumed to be acting in accordance with the terms of the delegation.

(6) A delegation under subsection (1) to the academic board shall be deemed to be a delegation to the persons from time to time constituting that board.
(7) A delegation under this section to a member of the staff may be made to a spe- cified person or to persons of a specified class, or to the holder or holders for the time being of a specified office or specified class of offices.

(8) A delegation under this section does not affect or prevent the performance of any function or the exercise of any power by a chief executive, or affect the responsibility of a chief executive for the actions of any person acting under the delegation.
(9) A delegation under this section is revocable in writing at will and, until it is revoked, continues in force according to its tenor, notwithstanding that the per- son by whom it was made may have ceased to hold office, and continues to have effect as if made by the successor in office of that person.

Section 197: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
333 Part 15 s 198 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 198 Transitional provisions for employment of staff (1) A person who was a member of the staff of an institution immediately before the commencement of this section shall, after that commencement, unless the employment of the person would, apart from this Act, have ended on that com- mencement, be, by force of this subsection, in the employment of the chief executive of the institution, on the same terms and conditions as those on which the person was employed immediately before that commencement, until the person’s employment terminates or is terminated in accordance with those terms and conditions.
(2) (3) The terms and conditions of employment of a person to whom subsection (1) applies shall remain in force until varied either individually or through a col- lective agreement.

This section has effect subject to the Employment Relations Act 2000 and the State Sector Act 1988.

Section 198: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 198(2): amended, on 2 October 2000, by section 240 of the Employment Relations Act 2000 (2000 No 24).
Section 198(3): amended, on 2 October 2000, pursuant to section 241 of the Employment Relations Act 2000 (2000 No 24).

Bulk funding [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 17(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

199 Grants to institutions [Repealed] Section 199: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 17(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Finance Heading: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

200 Bank accounts (1) The council of an institution may establish, maintain and operate bank accounts in the name of the institution at any registered bank or any registered building society with which a Crown entity may establish, maintain, or operate a bank account under section 158 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.
(2) As soon as is practicable after receiving any money, the council shall pay it into one or other of the institution’s bank accounts.

The council shall properly authorise every withdrawal and payment of money from any of the institution’s bank accounts.

(3) 334 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 202 Section 200: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Section 200(1): amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

201 Proper accounts to be kept Section 168(1) and (2) of the Crown Entities Act 2004 applies to a council of an institution.

Section 201: replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
201A How institutions may use income and capital (1) An institution may, subject to the provisions of any enactment and the terms of any trust or endowment,— (a) apply its income and capital in doing whatever the council thinks will— (i) (ii) enable the institution to carry out the functions characteristic of an institution of the class to which the institution belongs; and in the case of an institution that has a plan, enable the institution to achieve the outcomes set out in that plan; and (b) create, maintain, or add to, out of income, a fund or funds for any 1 or more of the purposes for which the income may be applied.
(2) Subsection (1)(b) does not limit the generality of subsection (1)(a).

Section 201A: inserted, on 1 January 2004, by section 18 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 201A(1)(a): replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 28 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
201B Gifts (1) Any money or property that is gifted to an institution may be accepted or dis- claimed by the council of the institution in accordance with section 167 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

(2) A limitation in this Act or the Crown Entities Act 2004 (such as a limitation on the form in which property may be held) does not apply during a period that is reasonable in the circumstances.

Section 201B: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
202 Application of money The money of an institution shall be applied only— (a) (b) (c) in payment or discharge of the expenses, charges, obligations or liabil- ities incurred or undertaken by or on behalf of the institution; or [Repealed] [Repealed] 335 Part 15 s 203 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (d) (e) in payment of any remuneration or allowances payable to members of the council or of committees of the council or to the chief executive or members of the staff of the institution; or in making any other payments that are required or permitted by this Act or any other enactment to be made out of the money of the institution.
Section 202: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 202(b): repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 45(2)(a) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 202(c): repealed, on 1 February 2011, by section 18 of the Research, Science, and Technolo- gy Act 2010 (2010 No 131).

203 Institutions are Crown entities (1) Every institution is a Crown entity for the purposes of section 7 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.
(2) However, that Act applies to tertiary education institutions only to the extent that subsection (3) provides.

(3) The provisions of that Act set out in Schedule 4 of that Act and Schedule 13A of this Act apply to tertiary education institutions and their Crown entity sub- sidiaries (within the meaning of that Act).
(4) Section 65I(1) and (2) of the Public Finance Act 1989— (a) (b) applies, with all necessary modifications, to tertiary education institu- tions and, accordingly, every institution must invest in the same manner as the Treasury invests money under that section; but does not apply in respect of any investment made by an institution in the financial products of a related entity.
(5) No instruction issued by the Minister of Finance under section 80A of the Pub- (6) (7) lic Finance Act 1989 applies to an institution.

The financial year of an institution is an academic year.

The members of the council of an institution are the board for the purposes of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

Section 203: replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
Section 203(4): replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 33 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Miscellaneous provisions Heading: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
204 Transfer of assets and liabilities on commencement (1) In the case of an existing non-university institution,— 336 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 204 (a) (b) all real and personal property that, immediately before the commence- ment of this section, was vested in the then governing body of the insti- tution (including property held on trust) is, by force of this subsection, vested in the institution subject to all charges, encumbrances, estates, and interests, and the provisions of any enactment, affecting that proper- ty; and the institution becomes, by force of this subsection, liable to pay and dis- charge all the debts, liabilities and obligations of the previous governing body that existed immediately before that commencement.
(2) Where any land vests in an institution under this section, the District Land Registrar for the land registration district in which the land is situated, on the deposit with him or her of such plans and documents as he or she may require, shall make such entries in the register, and generally do all such other things, as may be necessary to give full effect to the provisions of this section.
(3) Any contract or other instrument subsisting, or any proceeding pending, imme- diately before the commencement of this section to which the then governing body of an existing non-university institution was a party has effect after that commencement as if— (a) (b) the institution is substituted for the previous governing body as a party to the contract, other instrument or proceeding; and any reference in the contract or other instrument, or in a pleading, affida- vit or other document in the proceeding, to the previous governing body in its capacity as a party to the contract, other instrument or proceeding is (except in relation to matters that occurred before that commence- ment) a reference to the institution.
(4) Any statutes, regulations, or bylaws made by the governing body, or the Sen- ate, Professorial Board or other board, committee or authority of an institution and in force immediately before the commencement of this section continue in force after that commencement, so far as they are capable of application and with any necessary modifications, as if they are statutes made by the council of the institution.
(5) Any rulings, decisions or other acts of authority of any relevant authority or person that, immediately before the commencement of this section, applied in relation to an institution but were capable of being repealed, replaced, or amended by an appropriate authority or officer of that institution continue to apply after that commencement, so far as they are capable of application and with any necessary modifications, but may be repealed, replaced, or amended after that commencement by the chief executive of the institution, subject to the State Sector Act 1988.
(6) All statutes or regulations of the Senate of the University of New Zealand or any committee or board of that Senate or University or of the Chancellor or Vice-Chancellor or any officer of that University, so far as they were subsisting 337 Part 15 s 205 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 immediately before the commencement of this section by virtue of section 53(1) of the Universities Act 1961 and were applicable in relation to a universi- ty that is an institution to which subsection (4) of this section applies, shall be deemed to be, in their application in relation to that university, statutes, or regu- lations to which that subsection applies.
(7) All rulings, decisions, or other acts of authority of the Senate of the University of New Zealand or any committee or board of that Senate or University or of the Chancellor or Vice-Chancellor or any officer of that University, so far as they were subsisting immediately before the commencement of this section by virtue of section 53(1) of the Universities Act 1961 and were applicable in rela- tion to a university that is an institution to which subsection (5) of this section applies, shall be deemed to be, in their application in relation to that university, rulings, decisions, or other acts of authority to which that subsection applies.
Section 204: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
205 Taxes and duties in relation to property of existing institutions (1) For the purposes of the Acts specified in the Schedule of the Tax Administra- tion Act 1994 and any other enactment that imposes, or provides for the collec- tion of, a tax, duty, levy, or other charge— (a) (b) the previous governing body of each existing non-university institution, and that existing non-university institution, shall be deemed to be the same person with effect on and from the date on which the real and per- sonal property of the previous governing body vests in that institution pursuant to section 204(1); and in respect of the liability under any such enactment for, and the assess- ment, determination, or imposition of, taxes, duties, levies, or other charges accruing on and from the day on which the real and personal property of the previous governing body of that institution so vests in that institution, all transactions entered into by, and acts of, the previous governing body before the vesting effected by section 204(1) shall be deemed to have been entered into by, or to be those of, that institution and to have been entered into or performed by that institution at the time when they were entered into or performed by the previous governing body.
(2) For the purposes of determining whether— (a) (b) (c) any taxpayer satisfies the requirements of section IA 5(2) of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any taxpayer is included in a group of companies or a wholly-owned group for the purposes of section IA 6 of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any debit arises to be recorded in a taxpayer’s imputation credit account under section OB 41 of the Income Tax Act 2007, or in a taxpayer’s FDP 338 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 206 account under section OC 24 of that Act, or in a taxpayer’s branch equivalent tax account under section OE 15 of that Act,— shares held by the previous governing body of an existing non-university insti- tution in any company (whether directly or through any 1 or more interposed companies) immediately before the vesting effected by section 204(1) shall be treated as having been acquired by that institution at the time when they were acquired by the previous governing body.
(3) The vesting of all the real and personal property of the previous governing body of an existing non-university institution in that institution pursuant to sec- tion 204(1) shall not be treated as a supply of any goods or services for the pur- poses of the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985, or as a disposition of property for the purposes of the Estate and Gift Duties Act 1968 or as a conveyance for the purposes of the Stamp and Cheque Duties Act 1971.
(4) Nothing in subsection (2) or subsection (3) limits the generality of subsection (1).

Section 205: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 205(1): amended, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995– 96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).
Section 205(2)(a): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 205(2)(a): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
Section 205(2)(b): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 205(2)(b): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
Section 205(2)(c): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 205(2)(c): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
206 Transfer of Crown assets and liabilities to institutions (1) Notwithstanding any Act, rule of law, or agreement, the Minister may, on be- half of the Crown, do any 1 or more of the following: (a) (b) (c) transfer to an institution assets and liabilities of the Crown (being assets and liabilities relating to the activities to be carried on by the institution): vest in an institution any rights conferred by designations under opera- tive district schemes applying to land transferred to the institution: grant to an institution leases, licences, easements, permits, or rights of any kind in respect of any assets or liabilities of the Crown,— 339 Part 15 s 206 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 on any terms and conditions the Minister agrees with the institution’s chief executive.
(2) The Minister shall, within 12 sitting days after taking any action under subsec- tion (1)(a) and (b), lay before the House of Representatives a copy of the docu- ment by which the action was taken.
(3) Assets that are fixed to, or are under or over, any land may be transferred to an institution pursuant to this section whether or not any interest in the land is also transferred; but, where any such asset is so transferred, the asset and the land shall be regarded as separate assets each capable of separate ownership.
(4) Any asset or liability of the Crown may be transferred to an institution pursuant to this section whether or not any Act or agreement relating to the asset or liability permits such a transfer or requires any consent to such a transfer.
(5) Where a transfer of the kind described in subsection (4) takes place,— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) the transfer does not entitle any person to terminate, alter, or in any way affect the rights or liabilities of the Crown or the institution under any Act or agreement: if the transfer is registrable, the person responsible for keeping the regis- ter shall register the transfer forthwith after written notice of the transfer is received by him or her from any person authorised for this purpose by the Minister: the laying before the House of Representatives of any document relating to the transfer shall be deemed to be notice of the transfer, and any third party shall after the date of the document deal with the institution in place of the Crown: the Crown remains liable to any third party as if the asset or liability had not been transferred: any satisfaction or performance by the institution in respect of the asset or liability shall be deemed to be also satisfaction or performance by the Crown: any satisfaction or performance in respect of the asset or liability by any third party to the benefit of the institution shall be deemed to be also to the benefit of the Crown.
(6) No provision in any agreement limiting the Crown’s right to sell any assets to third parties, or for determining the consideration for the sale of any assets to third parties, or obliging the Crown to account to any person for the whole or part of the proceeds of sale by the Crown of any assets to third parties, or ob- liging the Crown to pay a greater price than otherwise by reason of or as a con- sequence of the sale of any assets to third parties, shall have any application or effect in respect of any agreement or transfer entered into or effected pursuant to or under this section or pursuant to such an agreement or transfer.
(7) Where— 340 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 207 (a) (b) land, interests in land, licences, permits, or rights created on terms and conditions wholly or partly set out in any Act are transferred to an insti- tution pursuant to this section; and the Governor-General has by Order in council declared that this subsec- tion shall apply in respect of that land or those interests, licences, per- mits, or rights— then, whether or not the Act is repealed, such of the terms and conditions set out in the Act as are specified in the Order in Council (with all necessary modi- fications) shall continue to apply in respect of that land or those interests, licen- ces, permits, or rights after the transfer unless the institution and the holders of that land or those interests, licences, permits, or rights otherwise agree.
(8) (9) [Repealed] [Repealed] (10) Where any requirement has been made under section 43 or section 118 of the Town and Country Planning Act 1977, or under section 168 of the Resource Management Act 1991, in respect of any work which has been transferred to an institution pursuant to this Act, the procedures specified in the Town and Coun- try Planning Act 1977, or in the Resource Management Act 1991, (as the case may be) may be completed as if a Minister of the Crown continued to be finan- cially responsible for the work and as if the work were a public work.
Section 206: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 206(2): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 29 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 206(8): repealed, on 23 July 1993, by section 2 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1993 (1993 No 77).

Section 206(9): repealed, on 23 July 1993, by section 2 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1993 (1993 No 77).
Section 206(10): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 46(a) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 206(10): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 46(b) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
207 Provisions relating to transfer of land (1) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Act, Crown land within the mean- ing of the Land Act 1948 and any lands of the Crown other than lands regis- tered under the Land Transfer Act 1952 that are to be transferred to an institu- tion shall— (a) be identified by an adequate legal description, or on plans lodged in the office of the Chief Surveyor for the land district in which the land is situ- ated (being plans certified as correct for the purposes of this section by that Chief Surveyor); and 341 Part 15 s 208 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) be approved by the Governor-General in Council and vest in the institu- tion pursuant to and on a date specified in an Order in Council made for the purposes of this section.
(2) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Act, no land that is subject to— (a) (b) a lease or licence pursuant to section 66 or section 66AA of the Land Act 1948; or reservation from sale or disposition under section 58 of the Land Act 1948— shall be transferred to an institution pursuant to section 206(1) of this Act.
(3) All land that is subject to the Land Act 1948 or the Forests Act 1949 and that is transferred to an institution pursuant to this Act shall cease to be subject to the Land Act 1948 or the Forests Act 1949, as the case may be, from the date of that transfer, unless otherwise expressly provided by this Act or any other Act.
(4) Nothing in sections 40 to 42 of the Public Works Act 1981 shall apply to the transfer of land to an institution pursuant to this Act; but sections 40 and 41 of that Act shall after that transfer apply to that land as if the institution were the Crown and the land had not been transferred pursuant to section 206 of this Act.
(5) Nothing in this Act or in any transfer of land to an institution pursuant to sec- tion 206 shall derogate from the provisions of— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) section 3 of the Petroleum Act 1937: section 8 of the Atomic Energy Act 1945: section 3 of the Geothermal Energy Act 1953: sections 6 and 8 of the Mining Act 1971: sections 5 and 261 of the Coal Mines Act 1979: sections 10 and 11 of the Crown Minerals Act 1991: section 354 of the Resource Management Act 1991.
Section 207: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 207(5)(f): inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 47 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 207(5)(g): inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 47 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
208 Title to land (1) A District Land Registrar shall, on written application by any person authorised by the Minister and on payment of the prescribed fee,— (a) register an institution as the proprietor, in substitution for the Crown, of the estate or the interest of the Crown in any land that is incorporated in the register or otherwise registered in the land registry office of the land 342 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 209 registration district concerned and that is transferred to the institution pursuant to section 206; and (b) make such entries in the register and on any outstanding documents of title and generally do all such things as may be necessary to give effect to this section.
(2) The powers conferred by subsection (1) may be exercised in respect of an es- tate or interest that is incorporated in the register by virtue of a lease or licence that has expired or has been determined.
(3) A District Land Registrar shall, on written application by any person authorised by the Minister and on payment of the prescribed fee, issue a certificate of title for land vested in an institution pursuant to section 207(1) in form No 1 in Schedule 1 of the Land Transfer Act 1952, amended as appropriate.
(4) As soon as registration is accomplished in accordance with subsection (1) or a certificate of title is issued in accordance with subsection (3), the institution shall, except where the interest acquired is either an easement in gross or an estate as lessee or mortgagee, be deemed to be seised of an estate in fee simple in possession in respect of that land.
(5) Applications in accordance with subsections (1) and (3) shall specify the name of the institution and the date of the approval under section 207(1)(b) of the land to be transferred, together with a description of the land sufficient to iden- tify it and, in the case of applications under subsection (3), a certificate by the Chief Surveyor for the district concerned as to the correctness of the descrip- tion.
Section 208: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
209 Land certification (1) Before a District Land Registrar issues a certificate of title in respect of any land vested in an institution pursuant to section 207(1), the District Land Registrar shall either receive under the hand of or request from the Director- General within the meaning of section 2 of the Survey Act 1986 or any Chief Surveyor a certificate in the form set out in Schedule 2 of the Land Act 1948 as to the legal description of the land, any trusts, reservations, or restrictions af- fecting the land, and any other matters that the District Land Registrar con- siders appropriate.
(2) Where any land that has been vested in an institution pursuant to section 207(1) and for which no certificate of title has been issued in the name of that institu- tion, is to be transferred to any other person, the District Land Registrar shall, before issuing a certificate of title, either receive under the hand of or request from the Director-General within the meaning of section 2 of the Survey Act 1986 or any Chief Surveyor a certificate in the form set out in Schedule 2 of the Land Act 1948 as to the legal description of the land, any trusts, reserva- 343 Part 15 s 210 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 tions, or restrictions affecting the land, and any other matters that the District Land Registrar considers appropriate.
Section 209: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 209(1): amended, on 1 July 1996, by section 5 of the Survey Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 55).

Section 209(2): amended, on 1 July 1996, by section 5 of the Survey Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 55).
210 Maori land claims The submission in respect of any land or interest in land of a claim under sec- tion 6 of the Treaty of Waitangi Act 1975 does not prevent the transfer of that land or of any interest in that land or of that interest in land— (a) (b) by the Crown to an institution; or by an institution to any other person.

Section 210: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
211 District Land Registrar to register necessary memorial (1) Where any land or interest in land is transferred to an institution under section 206 or vested in an institution by an Order in Council made under section 215, the District Land Registrar shall, without fee, note on the certificate of title the words “Subject to section 212 of the Education Act 1989 (which provides for the resumption of land on the recommendation of the Waitangi Tribunal and which does not provide for third parties, such as the owner of the land, to be heard in relation to the making of any such recommendation)”.
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply in relation to any piece of land or interest in land that is excluded from section 212 by subsection (2) or subsection (3) of that section.

Section 211: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
212 Resumption of land on recommendations of Waitangi Tribunal (1) Where the Waitangi Tribunal has, under section 8A(2)(a) of the Treaty of Wai- tangi Act 1975, recommended the return to Maori ownership of any land or in- terest in land transferred to an institution under section 206 or vested in an in- stitution by an Order in Council made under section 215, that land or interest in land shall, if the recommendation has been confirmed with or without modifi- cations under section 8B of that Act, be resumed by the Crown in accordance with section 213 of this Act and returned to Maori ownership.
This section does not apply in relation to any piece of land that, at the date of its transfer to an institution under section 206 or the date of its vesting in an institution by an Order in Council made under section 215, was subject to— (a) a deferred payment licence issued under the Land Act 1948; or (2) 344 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 214 (b) a lease under which the lessee had the right of acquiring the fee simple.
(3) This section does not apply in relation to any piece of land or interest in land in respect of which a certificate issued under section 8E(1) of the Treaty of Wai- tangi Act 1975 has been registered.

Section 212: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
213 Resumption of land to be effected under Public Works Act 1981 (1) Where section 212 requires any land or interest in land to be resumed by the Crown, the Minister of Lands shall acquire that land or interest in land under Part 2 of the Public Works Act 1981 as if it were land or an interest in land required for both Government work and a public work and Parts 2, 4, 5, 6, and 7 of that Act and Schedules 1, 3, 4, and 5 of that Act shall, subject to any necessary modifications, apply accordingly.
(2) (3) The existence on the certificate of title to any land or interest in land acquired pursuant to subsection (1) of a memorial under section 211 shall not be taken into account in any assessment of compensation made under the Public Works Act 1981 in relation to the acquisition of that land or interest in land.
The power conferred by this section does not include the power to acquire or take and to hold under section 28 of the Public Works Act 1981 any interest in land described in section 8A(6) of the Treaty of Waitangi Act 1975.

Section 213: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
214 Resumption of Wahi Tapu (1) Where the Governor-General is satisfied that any land or interest in land held by an institution, being land or an interest in land transferred to that institution under section 206 or vested in that institution by an Order in Council made under section 215, is Wahi Tapu, being land of special spiritual, cultural, or his- torical tribal significance, the Governor-General may, by Order in Council pub- lished in the Gazette, declare— (a) (b) that that land or interest shall be resumed by the Crown on a date speci- fied in the Order in Council; and that, on the date of its resumption pursuant to the Order in Council, that land or interest in land shall be no longer liable to resumption under sec- tion 212.
(2) Where any land or interest in land is to be resumed pursuant to subsection (1)(a),— (a) (b) the institution shall transfer the land or interest in land to the Crown on the date specified in the Order in Council; and the Crown shall pay to the institution in respect of the land or interest in land the compensation that would have been payable to the institution if, 345 Part 15 s 215 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 on the date specified in the Order in Council made under subsection (1), the land or interest in land had, pursuant to section 213, been acquired by the Minister of Lands under Part 2 of the Public Works Act 1981.
(3) Every memorandum of transfer executed pursuant to an Order in Council made under subsection (1)— (a) (b) shall recite that it is so executed; and shall give both the date of the Order in Council and the date of its publi- cation in the Gazette.
(4) Upon its resumption pursuant to subsection (1), the land or interest in land shall be dealt with in accordance with an agreement made between the Crown and the relevant tribe or, if they fail to agree, in accordance with any recommenda- tion of the Waitangi Tribunal pursuant to an application made under section 6 of the Treaty of Waitangi Act 1975.
(5) A resumption of land or of an interest in land pursuant to subsection (1)(a) is not a subdivision of land within the meaning of section 218 of the Resource Management Act 1991.

Section 214: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 214(5): replaced, on 1 July 2003, by section 262 of the Local Government Act 2002 (2002 No 84).
215 Orders in Council relating to transfer of assets and liabilities (1) For the purpose of facilitating the transfer of assets and liabilities to an institu- tion pursuant to section 206, the Governor-General may from time to time, by Order in Council, do any 1 or more of the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) vest in or impose on an institution any asset or liability (other than land to which section 207(1) applies), or any class of any such asset or liabil- ity, that the institution has agreed to have transferred to it: vest land in an institution for the purposes of section 207(1): declare that a reference to the Crown or a Minister, officer, employee, department, or instrument of the Crown in any or all regulations, orders, notices, or documents shall be deemed to be or to include a reference to an institution specified in the order: declare that an institution shall assume or continue to have the rights and obligations of the Crown or a Minister, officer, employee, department, or instrument of the Crown in respect of applications for rights, objections, or proceedings before any court, authority, or other person, being rights and obligations that the institution has agreed to assume: declare that sections 294 to 294I of the Local Government Act 1974 (which relate to reserve contributions, development levies, and contribu- tions to certain regional works) shall not apply to specified develop- 346 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 216 ments, being developments that the Minister has
 agreed to transfer to an institution pursuant to section 206: declare, in respect of any assets or liabilities transferred to an institution pursuant to section 206, that the institution shall be deemed to have spe- cified rights or obligations in respect of those assets or liabilities, being rights or obligations that are required in respect of those assets or liabil- ities as a result of the change of ownership or responsibility from the Crown to the institution: declare that any Order in Council made under this section shall be deemed to be notice to all persons, and that specific notice need not be given to any authority or other person: direct any authority or other person to register or record any such vesting or declaration.
(f) (g) (h) (2) Every Order in Council made under this section may be made on such terms and conditions as the Governor-General thinks fit, and shall have effect accord- ing to its tenor.

Section 215: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
216 Interpretation relating to transfer of assets and liabilities (1) In this section and in sections 206 to 215, unless the context otherwise re- quires,— agreement includes a deed, a contract, an agreement, an arrangement, and an understanding, whether oral or written, express or implied, and whether or not enforceable at law assets means any real or personal property of any kind, whether or not subject to rights, and without limiting the generality of the above includes— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) any estate or interest in any land, including all rights of occupation of land or buildings: all buildings, vehicles, plant, equipment, and machinery, and any rights therein: all livestock, products from livestock, and crops: all financial products within the meaning of the Financial Markets Con- duct Act 2013: all rights of any kind, including rights under Acts, deeds, agreements, or licences, planning rights, water rights, and clean air licences, and all ap- plications for and objections against applications for such rights: all patents, trade marks, designs, copyright, and other intellectual proper- ty rights whether enforceable by Act or rule of law: goodwill, and any business undertaking: all natural gas, petroleum, and other hydrocarbons 347 Part 15 s 217 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 institution includes a subsidiary of an institution liabilities includes— (a) (b) liabilities and obligations under any Act or agreement; and deposits and other debt securities within the meaning of the
 Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013; and (c) contingent liabilities rights includes powers, privileges, interests, licences, approvals, consents, benefits, and equities of any kind, whether actual, contingent, or prospective transfer includes— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) assign and convey; and vest by Order in Council; and confer estates in fee simple of land held by the Crown, whether in allodi- um or otherwise; and grant leases, rights, and interests in any real or personal property; and in the case of liabilities, the assumption of the liabilities by an institu- tion.
(2) (3) In this section and in sections 206 to 215, a reference to transfer, authorise, or grant includes entering into an agreement to transfer, authorise, or grant, as the case may be.

This section and sections 206 to 215 shall have effect, and assets and liabilities may be transferred pursuant to those sections, notwithstanding any restriction, prohibition, or other provision contained in any Act, rule of law, or agreement that would otherwise apply.
Section 216: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 216(1) assets paragraph (d): amended, on 1 December 2014, by section 150 of the Financial Markets (Repeals and Amendments) Act 2013 (2013 No 70).

Section 216(1) liabilities paragraph (b): amended, on 1 December 2014, by section 150 of the Finan- cial Markets (Repeals and Amendments) Act 2013 (2013 No 70).
217 Effect of disestablishment (1) Where an institution is disestablished, the following provisions of this section have effect.

(2) The institution and the council of the institution cease to exist.
(3) A person who would, but for the disestablishment of the institution, have been entitled to be granted an award of the institution is entitled to be granted a like award,— (a) if the institution is incorporated in another institution, of the other insti- tution; or (b) otherwise, of such institution as the Secretary directs.
348 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 217 (4) A person who has partially completed a programme at the disestablished insti- tution leading to an award is entitled to enrol in a similar programme at,— (a) (b) if the institution is incorporated in another institution, the other institu- tion; or otherwise, such other institution as the Secretary directs to enrol the per- son,— and to be granted such status, and such credit for work performed at the dises- tablished institution, as the council of the other institution, after consulting the Qualifications Authority, considers appropriate.
(5) If the disestablished institution is, immediately upon its disestablishment, in- corporated in another institution,— (a) (b) all real and personal property that, immediately before the disestablish- ment, was vested in the disestablished institution (including property held on trust) is, by force of this subsection, vested in the other institu- tion subject to all charges, encumbrances, estates, and interests, and the provisions of any enactment, affecting that property; and the other institution becomes, by force of this subsection, liable to pay and discharge all the debts, liabilities, and obligations of the disestablish- ed institution that existed immediately before its disestablishment.
(6) If the disestablished institution is not, immediately upon its disestablishment, incorporated in another institution,— (a) (b) all real and personal property that, immediately before the disestablish- ment was vested in the council of the disestablished institution (includ- ing property held on trust) is, by force of this subsection, vested in the Minister subject to all charges, encumbrances, estates, or interests, and the provisions of any enactment, affecting that property; and the Minister becomes, by force of this subsection, liable to pay and dis- charge all the debts, liabilities, and obligations of the council of the dis- established institution that existed immediately before its disestablish- ment.
(7) Where any real or personal property that was held by a disestablished institu- tion on trust vests in the Minister under subsection (6)(a), the Minister may ap- point another institution to be the trustee of that property.
(8) Where any land vests in an institution or in the Minister under this section, the District Land Registrar for the land registration district in which the land is situated, on the deposit with him or her of such plans and documents as he or she may require, shall make such entries in the register, and generally do all such other things, as may be necessary to give full effect to the provisions of this section.
(9) Any contract or other instrument (other than a contract of, or instrument relat- ing to, employment) subsisting, or any proceeding pending, immediately before 349 Part 15 s 218 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 the disestablishment of an institution to which the institution was a party has effect after the disestablishment as if— (a) (b) the institution in which the disestablished institution is incorporated or the Minister, as the case may be, is substituted for the disestablished in- stitution as a party to the contract, other instrument or proceeding; and any reference in the contract or other instrument, or in a pleading, affida- vit or other document in the proceeding, to the disestablished institution in its capacity as a party to the contract, other instrument or proceeding is (except in relation to matters that occurred before the disestablish- ment) a reference to the institution in which the disestablished institution is incorporated or the Minister, as the case may be.
(10) Notwithstanding subsection (2), the council of the disestablished institution shall continue in existence for the purpose of complying, or facilitating compli- ance, with Part 4 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 and section 220 of this Act in relation to any academic year of the institution and,— (a) if the institution is incorporated in another institution, the council of the other institution; or (b) otherwise, the Secretary,— shall give to the council of the disestablished institution any assistance that that council requires for the purpose of complying with its obligations under those provisions and is responsible for paying any expenses incurred by that council (including remuneration and expenses of members of that council) in so com- plying.
Section 217: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 217(4): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 21 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 217(10): amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 37(1) of the Public Finance Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 113).
218 Taxes and duties where disestablished institution incorporated into other institution (1) For the purposes of the Acts specified in the Schedule of the Tax Administra- tion Act 1994 and any other enactment that imposes, or provides for the collec- tion of, a tax, duty, levy, or other charge— (a) (b) a disestablished institution referred to in section 217(5) and the other in- stitution referred to in that section shall be deemed to be the same person with effect on and from the date on which the real and personal property of the disestablished institution vests in the other institution pursuant to that section; and in respect of the liability under any such enactment for, and the assess- ment, determination, or imposition of, taxes, duties, levies, or other charges accruing on and from the day on which the real and personal 350 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 218 property of the disestablished institution so vests in the other institution, all transactions entered into by, and acts of, the disestablished institution before the vesting effected by section 217(5) shall be deemed to have been entered into by, or to be those of, the other institution and to have been entered into or performed by the other institution at the time when they were entered into or performed by the disestablished institution.
(2) For the purposes of determining whether— (a) (b) (c) any taxpayer satisfies the requirements of section IA 5(2) of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any taxpayer is included in a group of companies or a wholly-owned group for the purposes of section IA 6 of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any debit arises to be recorded in a taxpayer’s imputation credit account under section OB 41 of the Income Tax Act 2007, or in a taxpayer’s FDP account under section OC 24 of that Act, or in a taxpayer’s branch equivalent tax account under section OE 15 of that Act,— shares held by a disestablished institution in any company (whether directly or through any 1 or more interposed companies) immediately before the vesting effected by section 217(5) shall be treated as having been acquired by the other institution referred to in that section at the time when they were acquired by the disestablished institution.
(3) The vesting of all the real and personal property of a disestablished institution in another institution pursuant to section 217(5) shall not be treated as a supply of any goods or services for the purposes of the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985, or as a disposition of property for the purposes of the Estate and Gift Duties Act 1968.

(4) Nothing in subsection (2) or subsection (3) limits the generality of subsection (1).
Section 218: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 218(1): amended, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995– 96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 218(2)(a): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).
Section 218(2)(a): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).

Section 218(2)(b): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).
Section 218(2)(b): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).

Section 218(2)(c): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).
351 Part 15 s 219 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 218(2)(c): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).

Section 218(3): amended, on 20 May 1999, by section 7 of the Stamp Duty Abolition Act 1999 (1999 No 61).
219 Taxes and duties in other cases (1) For the purposes of the Acts specified in the Schedule of the Tax Administra- tion Act 1994 and any other enactment that imposes, or provides for the collec- tion of, a tax, duty, levy, or other charge— (a) (b) a disestablished institution referred to in section 217(6) and the Minister shall be deemed to be the same person with effect on and from the date on which the real and personal property of the disestablished institution vests in the Minister pursuant to that section; and in respect of the liability under any such enactment for, and the assess- ment, determination, or imposition of, taxes, duties, levies, or other charges accruing on and from the day on which the real and personal property of the disestablished institution so vests in the Minister, all transactions entered into by, and acts of, the disestablished institution be- fore the vesting effected by section 217(6) shall be deemed to have been entered into by, or to be those of, the Minister and to have been entered into or performed by the Minister at the time when they were entered in- to or performed by the disestablished institution.
(2) For the purposes of determining whether— (a) (b) (c) any taxpayer satisfies the requirements of section IA 5(2) of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any taxpayer is included in a group of companies or a wholly-owned group for the purposes of section IA 6 of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any debit arises to be recorded in a taxpayer’s imputation credit account under section OB 41 of the Income Tax Act 2007, or in a taxpayer’s FDP account under section OC 24 of that Act, or in a taxpayer’s branch equivalent tax account under section OE 15 of that Act,— shares held by a disestablished institution in any company (whether directly or through any 1 or more interposed companies) immediately before the vesting effected by section 217(6) shall be treated as having been acquired by the Min- ister at the time when they were acquired by the disestablished institution.
(3) The vesting of all the real and personal property of a disestablished institution in the Minister pursuant to section 217(6) shall not be treated as a supply of any goods or services for the purposes of the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985, or as a disposition of property for the purposes of the Estate and Gift Duties Act 1968.

(4) Nothing in subsection (2) or subsection (3) limits the generality of subsection (1).
352 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 220 Section 219: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 219(1): amended, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995– 96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).
Section 219(2)(a): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 219(2)(a): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
Section 219(2)(b): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 219(2)(b): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
Section 219(2)(c): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 219(2)(c): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).

Section 219(3): amended, on 20 May 1999, by section 7 of the Stamp Duty Abolition Act 1999 (1999 No 61).
220 Annual report (1) As soon as practicable after the end of each academic year of an institution ending after the commencement of this section the council of the institution shall give to the Minister a report on the operations of the institution during that year.

(2) A council must comply with sections 154 to 156B and 157A of the Crown En- tities Act 2004 in respect of the report.
(2AA) Despite subsection (2),— (a) the statement of responsibility referred to in section 155 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 is not required to be signed in accordance with that section, but must instead be signed by— (i) (ii) the chairperson of the council and the chief executive of the insti- tution; or if there is no chairperson, the chief executive of the institution and the chief financial officer: (b) a council of an institution that is a parent Crown entity must comply with section 154 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (even though the insti- tution is a member of a Crown entity group to which section 156A(1) of that Act would otherwise apply).
(2A) A council shall include in every annual report— (a) a summary of its equal employment opportunities programme for the year to which the report relates; and 353 Part 15 s 220 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) an account of the extent to which the council was able, during the year to which the report relates, to meet the equal employment opportunities programme for that year; and an account of the extent to which the council has eliminated unnecessary barriers to the progress of students; and an account of the extent to which the council has avoided the creation of unnecessary barriers to the progress of students; and an account of the extent to which the council has developed programmes to attract students from groups in the community— (i) (ii) under-represented in the institution’s student body; or disadvantaged in terms of their ability to attend the institution; and in the case of an institution that has a plan, a statement of service per- formance for that financial year reporting on the performance of the in- stitution as compared with the proposed outcomes described in that plan.
(2B) Section 156 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 applies to institutions and, for this purpose, is to be read as referring to a statement of service performance under subsection (2A)(f).

The Minister must present the report to the House of Representatives within 5 working days after receiving the report or, if Parliament is not in session, as soon as possible after the commencement of the next session of Parliament.
The first report by the council of an institution that is a body to which section 162(1) applied shall extend to operations during the part of the academic year before the council became the governing body of the institution.

In this section, parent Crown entity has the meaning set out in section 8 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

Section 220: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Section 220(2): replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 34(1) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 220(2AA): replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 34(1) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 220(2A): inserted, on 25 June 1993, by section 26(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

Section 220(2A)(e)(ii): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 48 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Section 220(2A)(f): replaced, on 1 January 2008, by section 30 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 220(2B): inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 220(3): replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 220(5): inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 34(2) of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
(3) (4) (5) 354 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15 s 222 220A Minister may require related entities to prepare statements or reports (1) (2) (3) If the Minister has reasonable grounds to believe that an institution may be at risk due to the institution’s investment in a related entity, the Minister may, by notice in writing, require the entity to prepare 1 or more statements or reports.
In considering whether an institution may be at risk, the Minister must apply the criteria (determined by the Secretary under section 195A) for assessing the level of risk to the operation and long-term viability of institutions.

Before issuing a notice under subsection (1), the Minister must consult the in- stitution, or institutions, to which the entity is related.
(4) The notice must specify— (a) (b) which statements and reports are required; and the financial years or other period (which may be until further notice) for which each statement or report is required.

(5) In this section, statement or report has the meaning given by section 156A(4) of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

Section 220A: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 35 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
221 Annual report to be available for inspection The council of an institution shall ensure that copies of its annual report are available at the office of the council for inspection during ordinary office hours by any person without charge.

Section 221: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
222 Delegation by council (1) The council of an institution may, from time to time, either generally or par- ticularly, by writing signed by at least 2 members of the council, delegate to the chief executive of the institution or to a committee appointed under section 193(3) any of its functions or powers under this Act (except the power to ap- point a chief executive) or any other Act.
(2) Where the council has, pursuant to subsection (1), delegated any functions or powers to the chief executive or a committee, the chief executive or committee may, with the prior approval in writing of the council, by writing signed by the chief executive or by at least 2 of the members of the committee, as the case may be, delegate such of those functions or powers as the council approves to a member of the staff of the institution.
(3) Subject to any general or special directions given or conditions imposed by the council, the person to whom any functions or powers are delegated under this section may perform those functions or exercise those powers in the same man- ner and with the same effect as if they had been conferred on that person direct- ly by this Act and not by delegation.
355 Part 15 s 222 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (4) The power of the council to delegate under this section— (a) (b) is subject to any prohibitions, restrictions, or conditions contained in any other Act in relation to the delegation of the council’s functions or powers; but does not limit any power of delegation conferred on the council by any other Act.
(5) A person purporting to act pursuant to a delegation under this section shall, in the absence of proof to the contrary, be presumed to be acting in accordance with the terms of the delegation.
(6) A delegation under subsection (1) to the chief executive shall,— (a) (b) subject to paragraph (b), if the chief executive to whom it was made ceases to hold office, continue to have effect as if made to the chief executive for the time being; and if there is no chief executive for the time being, or if the chief executive is absent from duty, continue to have effect as if made to the person for the time being acting in place of the chief executive.
(7) A delegation under subsection (1) to a committee shall be deemed to be a dele- gation to the persons from time to time constituting the committee.

(8) A delegation under this section to a member of the staff may be made to a spe- cified person or to persons of a specified class, or to the holder or holders for the time being of a specified office or specified class of offices.
(9) A delegation under this section does not affect or prevent the performance of any function or the exercise of any power by the council or affect the responsi- bility of the council for the actions of any person acting under the delegation.
(10) A delegation under this section is revocable at will— (a) (b) in the case of a delegation under subsection (1), in writing signed by at least 2 members of the council; or in the case of a delegation under subsection (2), in writing signed by the chief executive or by at least 2 of the members of the committee, as the case requires,— and until it is revoked continues in force according to its tenor.
(11) This section applies to the academic board of an institution (established under section 182(2)) as if— (a) (b) it is a committee of the institution’s council; and all its powers are powers of the council, conferred on the committee by the council by delegation.

Section 222: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
356 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15A s 222AA Part 15A Special provisions relating to polytechnics Part 15A: inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 15 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

Polytechnic councils Heading: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
222AA Constitution of polytechnic councils (1) The council of a designated polytechnic must comprise— (a) (b) 4 members appointed by the Minister: 4 members appointed by the council in accordance with its statutes.
(2) A person is not eligible for appointment or election as a member of the council of a designated polytechnic if— (a) (b) (c) (d) he or she is subject to a property order under the Protection of Personal and Property Rights Act 1988; or there has been made under that Act in respect of him or her a personal order that reflects adversely on his or her— (i) (ii) competence to manage his or her own affairs in relation to his or her property; or capacity to make or to communicate decisions relating to any par- ticular aspect or aspects of his or her personal care and welfare; or he or she is a bankrupt who has not obtained his or her order of dis- charge, or whose order of discharge has been suspended for a term not yet expired or is subject to conditions not yet fulfilled; or he or she has at any time been removed from office as a member of a polytechnic council under section 222AJ.
(3) No act or proceeding of, or of any committee of, the council of a designated polytechnic is invalid because of— (a) (b) (c) (d) a defect in the appointment or election of a member of the council or committee; or a disqualification of a member of the council or committee; or a defect in the convening of a meeting; or a vacancy or vacancies in the membership of the council or committee.
Section 222AA: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

357 Part 15A s 222AB Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 222AB Statutes relating to appointment of members by polytechnic councils [Repealed] Section 222AB: repealed, on 13 February 2015, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
222AC Membership of more than one polytechnic council [Repealed] Section 222AC: repealed, on 13 February 2015, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

222AD Matters to be considered when appointments made (1) It is desirable in principle— (a) (b) that the council of a designated polytechnic should include Māori; and that, so far as is possible, the council of a designated polytechnic should reflect the ethnic and socio-economic diversity of the community it serves.
(2) The Minister— (a) must have regard to the principles in subsection (1) when appointing members of the council of a designated polytechnic; but (b) must appoint people who (in the Minister’s opinion) have enough ex- perience of governance to fulfil their individual duties as members of the council and the functions, duties, and responsibilities of the council.
(3) The council of a designated polytechnic must appoint as members people who (in the council’s opinion)— (a) (b) have relevant knowledge, skills, or experience; and are likely to be able to fulfil their individual duties as members of the council and the functions, duties, and responsibilities of the council.

Section 222AD: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
222AE Term of office [Repealed] Section 222AE: repealed, on 13 February 2015, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

222AF Reappointment and re-election Any member of the council of a designated polytechnic can be reappointed for a second or later term.

Section 222AF: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
358 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15A s 222AG 222AG Chairperson and deputy chairperson (1) The Minister may at any time the council of a designated polytechnic has no chairperson or no deputy chairperson, by written notice to the member con- cerned stating the term for which the member is appointed, appoint as chair- person or deputy chairperson (as the case requires) of the council any member who is not one of the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) a student enrolled at the polytechnic: the chief executive of the polytechnic (or in the case of a combined council, of one of the polytechnics concerned): in the case of a council that is not a combined council, an employee of the polytechnic’s chief executive: in the case of a combined council, an employee of the chief executive of one of the polytechnics concerned.
The Minister may at any time, by written notice to the member concerned, dis- miss the chairperson or deputy chairperson of the council of a designated poly- technic from office as chairperson or deputy chairperson.

The Minister must not dismiss the chairperson or deputy chairperson without first consulting him or her on the proposed dismissal.

The Minister must give to the polytechnic council a copy of a notice under sub- section (1) or (2).
The chairperson or deputy chairperson of the council of a designated polytech- nic— (a) may by written notice to the Minister resign as chairperson or deputy chairperson; and (b) ceases to hold office as chairperson or deputy chairperson if he or she— (i) (ii) ceases to be a member of the council; or becomes the chief executive or a member of the staff of the poly- technic, or a student enrolled at the polytechnic.
The chairperson or deputy chairperson of the council of a designated polytech- nic who resigns must give a copy of the notice of resignation to the council.

The chairperson or deputy chairperson of the council of a designated polytech- nic holds office as chairperson or deputy chairperson for the term for which he or she was appointed (but may be reappointed), unless earlier he or she dies, is dismissed, resigns, or ceases to hold office by virtue of subsection (5)(b).
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Notwithstanding subsection (7), if the term of office of the chairperson or deputy chairperson of the council of a designated polytechnic expires before a successor is appointed, he or she continues in office until a successor is appoin- ted, unless earlier he or she dies, is dismissed, resigns, or ceases to hold office by virtue of subsection (5)(b).
359 Part 15A s 222AH Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (9) The chairperson or deputy chairperson of the council of a designated polytech- nic may be referred to by any title (other than Chancellor or Pro-Chancellor) the council determines.

Section 222AG: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
222AH Duties of members of polytechnic councils [Repealed] Section 222AH: repealed, on 13 February 2015, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

222AI Accountability for individual duties [Repealed] Section 222AI: repealed, on 13 February 2015, by section 14 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

222AJ Removal of members (1) (2) The Minister may at any time, for just cause, remove a member of the council of a designated polytechnic from office.
The removal must be made by written notice to the member (with a copy to the council).

(3) The notice must state— (a) the day on which the removal takes effect, which must not be earlier than the day on which the notice is received; and (b) the reasons for the removal.

(4) (5) (6) The Minister must notify the removal in the Gazette as soon as is practicable after giving the notice.

This section does not limit or affect section 174.


For the purposes of subsection (1), just cause includes misconduct, inability to perform the functions of office, neglect of duty, and breach of any of the col- lective duties of the polytechnic council or the individual duties of members (depending on the seriousness of the breach).

Section 222AJ: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
222AK Process for removal The Minister may remove a member of the council of a designated polytechnic under section 222AJ with as little formality and technicality, and as much ex- pedition, as is permitted by— (a) (b) (c) the principles of natural justice; and a proper consideration of the matter; and the requirements of that section.
360 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15A s 222AN Section 222AK: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

Combination of polytechnic councils Heading: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
222AL Voluntary combination of councils (1) The Minister may combine the polytechnic councils of 2 or more designated polytechnics if— (a) (b) each of them has (in a written report complying with subsection (2)) rec- ommended that they should be combined; and he or she is satisfied that each of them has consulted the constituents of its polytechnic on the desirability of the combination of the councils.
(2) Each report must recommend a constitution for any combined council that might be constituted, and state— (a) (b) the council’s reasons for wishing to combine; and the results of the council’s consultations.

Section 222AL: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
222AM Constitution of combined councils (1) The Minister combines polytechnic councils by notice in the Gazette, stating— (a) (b) a constitution for the resulting combined council; and the day on which the combination takes effect.

(2) The Minister must ensure that a combined council has an even balance between members appointed by the Minister and members appointed by the council.

Section 222AM: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
222AN Effect of combination (1) The combination of any polytechnic councils does not affect the individual status, identity, or character of the polytechnics concerned.
(2) On the combination of any polytechnic councils,— (a) the resulting combined council— (i) (ii) is the successor of each of them; and has all the obligations and rights each of them had immediately before their combination: (b) every statute of any of them (other than a statute relating to the appoint- ment of members under section 222AA(1)(b))— 361 Part 15A s 222AO Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (i) (ii) becomes a statute of the combined council (and may be amended or repealed accordingly); but until amended so as to apply to the others, applies only to the pol- ytechnic by whose council it was made: every member of any of the polytechnic councils combined goes out of office: the assets and liabilities of each of the polytechnics concerned immedi- ately before their combination continue to be assets and liabilities of that polytechnic: a person who immediately before their combination was the chief execu- tive of any of the polytechnics concerned is still the chief executive of that polytechnic, but (without having been made or otherwise become redundant) becomes an employee of the combined council.
(c) (d) (e) (3) Neither the Crown nor a combined council is liable to make a payment to, or otherwise compensate, a person in respect of the person’s going out of office as a member of a polytechnic council under subsection (2)(c).

Section 222AN: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

222AO Dissolution of combined council (1) The Minister may, on the recommendation of a combined council, dissolve it.
(2) A combined council must not recommend that the Minister dissolve it without first consulting the constituents of the polytechnics concerned.

(3) The Minister dissolves a combined council by notice in the Gazette stating the day on which the dissolution takes effect.
(4) After the publication of the notice, and before the day stated in it, the combined council may make in respect of any of the polytechnics concerned any statutes it thinks necessary or desirable to enable the swift and efficient establishment of a polytechnic council for it.

Section 222AO: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
222AP Effect of dissolution (1) On the dissolution of a combined council,— (a) each of the polytechnics concerned must have a polytechnic council, as required by this Act: (b) each polytechnic council has— (i) any of the obligations and rights the former polytechnic council of the polytechnic had immediately before the establishment of the combined council; and 362 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15A s 222AQ (c) (d) (e) (f) (ii) any of the obligations and rights the combined council had imme- diately before the dissolution that have arisen in relation to the polytechnic: every statute of the combined council that relates to all the polytechnics concerned (other than a statute relating to the appointment of members under section 222AA(1)(b)) becomes a statute of each of them: every statute of the combined council that does not relate to all the poly- technics concerned (other than a statute relating to the appointment of members under section 222AA(1)(b)) becomes a statute of the polytech- nic to which it does relate (or, as the case requires, of each of the poly- technics concerned to which it does relate): every member of the combined council goes out of office: a person who immediately before the dissolution was the chief executive of any of the polytechnics concerned is still the chief executive of that polytechnic, but (without having been made or otherwise become redun- dant) becomes an employee of the polytechnic council established or to be established for it.
(2) For the purposes of subsection (1)(b)(ii),— (a) (b) a combined council may, after the publication of the notice dissolving it, and before the day stated in the notice, determine that any of its obliga- tions or rights have arisen in relation to a particular polytechnic; and the combined council’s determination is binding on all the polytechnic councils established or to be established for the polytechnics concerned.
(3) Neither the Crown nor a polytechnic council is liable to make a payment to, or otherwise compensate, a person in respect of the person’s going out of office as a member of a combined council under subsection (1)(e).

Section 222AP: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
222AQ Initial membership of polytechnic councils after dissolution of combined council (1) Before the dissolution of a combined council, the Minister must appoint the members of each of the new polytechnic councils required by its constitution to be appointed by the Minister.

(2) Other members of a new polytechnic council— (a) may be appointed before the dissolution; and (b) must be appointed within 3 months after the dissolution.
(3) (4) The appointment of a member of a new polytechnic council takes effect on the later of the day on which it is made and the dissolution.

If on the dissolution there is a vacancy in a polytechnic’s new council, the Min- ister may, by written notice to any person who was a member of the combined 363 Part 15A s 222AR Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 council immediately before that day, authorise him or her to act as a member of the council until the vacancy is filled.
(5) The Minister must give a copy of every notice under subsection (4) to the council concerned.

(6) A person authorised under subsection (4) must for all purposes be treated as a member of the council concerned until the vacancy concerned is filled.

Section 222AQ: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
Combined academic boards Heading: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
222AR Polytechnic councils may establish combined academic boards (1) The councils of 2 or more designated polytechnics may, by written agree- ment,— (a) (b) establish a single, combined academic board for all the polytechnics concerned; or disestablish a combined academic board that (whether or not it was ori- ginally established for other polytechnics too) is now established for all the polytechnics concerned.
(2) A combined council may, by resolution,— (a) establish a single, combined academic board for all the polytechnics concerned; or (b) disestablish a combined academic board that it has established for them.

(3) A combined board must include— (a) (b) the chief executive of each of the polytechnics concerned; and at least one member of the staff of each of the polytechnics concerned; and (c) at least one student of each of the polytechnics concerned.
(4) The polytechnic council of a polytechnic for which a combined academic board has been established under subsection (1) may, by written notice to the other polytechnic council or councils concerned, opt out of the board (and if the board would then serve only one polytechnic, opting out disestablishes it).
(5) As soon as is practicable after a combined academic board established under subsection (1) has been disestablished, each of the polytechnic councils con- cerned must establish an academic board for itself.

(6) Section 182(1) applies to a combined academic board as if it were a board es- tablished within each of the polytechnics concerned.
(7) For the purposes of section 222,— 364 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 15A s 222B (a) (b) a combined academic board established under subsection (1) must, in re- lation to each of the polytechnic councils concerned, be treated as if it were a committee appointed by the council under section 193(2)(i): a combined academic board established under subsection (2) must be treated as if it were a committee appointed by the combined council con- cerned under section 193(2)(i).
(8) In relation to every polytechnic council for which a combined academic board is established (and to its polytechnic), a reference to the academic board of an institution in a provision of this Act other than this section is a reference to the combined academic board.

Section 222AR: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
Interventions Heading: inserted, on 1 March 2010, by section 16 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

222A Specialist help (1) If he or she believes on reasonable grounds that a polytechnic, or the education performance of the students at a polytechnic, may be at risk, the chief execu- tive of the Tertiary Education Commission may, by written notice to its poly- technic council, require the council to obtain specialist help.
(2) The notice must state— (a) (b) the help or kind of help to be obtained; and the person or organisation, or kind of person or organisation, from whom or which it is to be obtained.

(3) As soon as is reasonably practicable after receiving the notice, the council must comply with it.
(4) The council must— (a) (b) provide the information and access, and do all other things, reasonably necessary to enable the person or organisation engaged to provide the help; and to the extent that the help provided is advice, take the advice into ac- count in performing its functions and duties; and (c) pay the person or organisation’s reasonable fees and expenses.

Section 222A: inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 15 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
222B Performance improvement plans (1) If he or she believes on reasonable grounds that a polytechnic, or the education performance of the students at a polytechnic, may be at risk, the chief execu- tive of the Tertiary Education Commission may, by written notice to its poly- 365 Part 15A s 222C Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 technic council, require the council to prepare and give to him or her a draft performance improvement plan for the polytechnic.
(2) The notice must state— (a) (b) (c) (d) the matters to be addressed by the draft plan; and the outcomes that implementation of the draft plan is intended to ach- ieve; and the times by which those outcomes should be achieved; and the performance measures that will be used to determine whether those outcomes have been achieved; and (e) the day by which the draft plan must be given to him or her.
The council must prepare, and give to the chief executive of the Tertiary Edu- cation Commission by the stated day, a draft plan complying with subsection (2).

If the council complies with subsection (3), the chief executive of the Tertiary Education Commission may— (a) (b) approve the draft plan concerned; or after considering the draft plan, approve for the polytechnic some other plan complying with subsection (2) (whether a modified version of the draft plan or a different plan).
If the council does not comply with subsection (3), the chief executive of the Tertiary Education Commission may approve for the polytechnic any plan complying with subsection (2) the chief executive thinks appropriate.

The chief executive of the Tertiary Education Commission must not approve any plan other than a draft plan given to him or her by the council before dis- cussing it with the council.

The council must take all reasonably practicable steps to implement a plan ap- proved under this section.
Section 222B: inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 15 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 222C Crown manager (1) If he or she believes on reasonable grounds that there is a serious risk to the operation or long-term viability of a polytechnic, or that the education perform- ance of the students at a polytechnic is at risk, the Minister may, by written no- tice to its polytechnic council, appoint a Crown manager for the polytechnic.
(2) The Minister must not appoint the Crown manager without— (a) giving the polytechnic’s council written notice of— (i) (ii) his or her intention to do so; and his or her reasons for intending to do so; and 366 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) (c) Education Act 1989 Part 15A s 222C allowing the council a reasonable time to respond to the notice; and considering any written submissions received from the council within that time.
(3) Whether a time is reasonable in any particular case may depend (among other things) on the urgency of the matters the Crown manager will have to deal with.

(4) The notice must state— (a) (b) (c) the name of the Crown manager and the day on which his or her appoint- ment takes effect; and the functions of the council to be performed by the Crown manager; and any conditions subject to which the Crown manager may perform those functions; and (d) any matters the Crown manager may advise the council on.
(5) As soon as is practicable after appointing the Crown manager, the Minister must publish in the Gazette a notice stating that he or she has done so.
(6) While there is a Crown manager appointed for the polytechnic,— (a) the Crown manager may perform any of the functions stated in the no- tice appointing him or her; and— (i) (ii) for that purpose has all the powers of the council; but in performing any such function (and exercising any of those powers in order to do so) the Crown manager must comply with all relevant duties of the council; and (b) the council— (i) must not perform any of those functions; and (ii) must provide the information and access, and do all other things, reasonably necessary to enable the Crown manager to perform those functions and exercise those powers.
(7) (8) (9) (10) The Crown manager must perform any function under subsection (6)(a) (and exercise any power in order to do so) in accordance with this Act; and, in par- ticular, have regard to sections 160 and 161.

Subsection (7) does not limit the generality of subsection (6)(a)(ii).

The council must pay the Crown manager’s reasonable fees and expenses.
If the Crown manager’s appointment has not earlier been revoked, the Minister must consider whether the reasons for it still apply— (a) (b) no later than 12 months after it was made; and no later than 12 months after he or she last considered whether they still apply.
(11) For the purpose of subsection (1),— 367 Part 15A s 222D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) there is a serious risk to the operation or long-term viability of a poly- technic if, according to criteria determined under section 195A(1), there is or is likely to be a serious level of risk to its operation or long-term viability; and the education performance of the students at a polytechnic is at risk if, according to criteria determined under section 195A(1), their education performance is at risk.
(12) Subsection (11) does not limit or affect the generality of subsection (1).

Section 222C: inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 15 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

222D Protection of Crown managers A Crown manager is not personally liable for any act done or omitted by him or her, or for any loss arising out of any act done or omitted by him or her, if he or she did or omitted the act in good faith, in the course of performing his or her functions.
Section 222D: inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 15 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

222E Powers may be used concurrently (1) (2) Sections 222A to 222C do not limit or affect sections 195B to 195D.

To the extent that it is possible in practice, powers given by 2 or more of sec- tions 195B, 195C, and 222A to 222C may be exercised concurrently in respect of the same polytechnic or polytechnic council.
Section 222E: inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 15 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).
222F Polytechnic council may request intervention If a polytechnic council requests the Minister or chief executive of the Tertiary Education Commission (as the case requires) to act under any of sections 195C and 195D and 222A to 222C, he or she— (a) must consider any argument or evidence supplied by the council; and (b) must consider whether or not to act under that section; but (c) may then (if any necessary conditions are satisfied) act under another of those sections giving him or her power to act.
Section 222F: inserted, on 18 December 2009, by section 15 of the Education (Polytechnics) Amend- ment Act 2009 (2009 No 70).

368 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 16 s 224 Part 16 Programmes and students Part 16: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Part 16 heading: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 22 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
223 Programmes (1) (2) Subject to subsection (2) and Part 20, the council of each institution may deter- mine the programmes of study and training to be provided at the institution.
If the Minister believes on reasonable grounds that the provision or the con- tinued provision of a particular programme of study or training at a particular institution would have significant implications for the allocation of the national resources available for tertiary education or vocational training, and would be contrary to the efficient use of those resources, the Minister may, after consult- ing the council of the institution and such other persons as the Minister con- siders appropriate, by written notice to the council setting out the reasons for giving the direction, direct the council that the institution is not to provide, or to continue to provide, that programme.
(3) The power of the Minister under subsection (2) may be exercised only in rela- tion to a programme of study or training as a whole and that subsection does not entitle the Minister to give a direction limited to particular subjects or other constituent elements of a programme of study or training.

(4) The council of an institution shall comply with a direction given to it under subsection (2).

Section 223: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Section 223 heading: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 23(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 223(1): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 23(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 223(2): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 23(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 223(3): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 23(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
224 Enrolment of students (1) In this section,— eligible student, in relation to a programme or training scheme at an institu- tion, means a person who is eligible to be enrolled as a student in that pro- gramme or scheme by virtue of subsection (2) year means a period of 12 months commencing on 1 January.
369 Part 16 s 224 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) Subject to this section, a person is eligible to be enrolled as a student at any institution in a programme or training scheme provided by the institution if, and only if,— (a) either— (i) (ii) the person is a domestic student; or the council of the institution consents; and (b) the person holds the minimum entry requirements for the programme or scheme as determined by the council; and (c) the person has attained,— (i) (ii) if the institution has fixed a minimum age for enrolment at the in- stitution, the age so fixed; and if the institution has fixed a minimum age for enrolment in the programme or scheme, the age so fixed.
(3) Subsection (2)(b) and (c) do not apply to a person if— (a) (b) the person has attained the age of 20 years; or the council of the institution is satisfied that the person is capable of undertaking the programme or scheme concerned.

(4) An eligible student who applies for enrolment in a programme or training scheme at an institution is, subject to this section, entitled to be enrolled in that programme or scheme.
(5) If the council of an institution is satisfied that it is necessary to do so because of insufficiency of staff, accommodation, or equipment, the council may deter- mine the maximum number of students who may be enrolled in a particular programme or training scheme at the institution in a particular year.
(6) Where— (a) (b) the maximum number of students who may be enrolled at an institution in a particular programme or training scheme in a particular year is de- termined by the council of the institution under subsection (5); and the number of eligible students who apply for enrolment in that pro- gramme or training scheme in that year exceeds the maximum number so determined,— the council may, in the selection of the students to be enrolled, give preference to eligible persons who are included in a class of persons that is under-repre- sented among the students undertaking the programme or training scheme.
(7) The council of an institution must not permit the enrolment at the institution of an international student for all or part of a programme unless— (a) the programme is approved by the Qualifications Authority and the insti- tution is accredited to provide the programme; or (b) the programme is exempted under section 232B.
370 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 16 s 225 (8) (9) The council of an institution must not permit the enrolment at the institution of an international student for all or part of a training scheme unless the scheme is an approved training scheme or exempted under section 232B.
Except as provided in subsection (11), no international student may be enrolled at an institution if the student’s enrolment at the institution would have the ef- fect that a domestic student who is eligible to enrol at the institution and has applied for enrolment would not be able to be enrolled.
(10) Except as provided in subsection (11), no international student may be enrolled in any programme or training scheme at an institution if the student’s enrol- ment in that programme or scheme would have the effect that a domestic stu- dent who is eligible to enrol in the programme or scheme and has applied for enrolment in the programme or scheme would not be able to be enrolled in it.
(11) Although domestic students may not be able to be enrolled at an institution or in a programme or training scheme at an institution, an international student may be enrolled at the institution, or in that programme or scheme at the insti- tution, if the enrolment is in a vacant place— (a) that the council of the institution established for international students; and (b) whose continued availability is dependent on the fees payable by inter- national students enrolled in it.
(12) Nothing in this section prevents the council of an institution from refusing to permit, or from cancelling, the enrolment of a person as a student at the institu- tion, or in a particular programme or scheme at the institution, on the ground that— (a) (b) (c) (d) the person is not of good character; or the person has been guilty of misconduct or a breach of discipline; or the person is enrolled for full-time instruction in another institution or in a school; or the person has made insufficient progress in the person’s study or train- ing after a reasonable trial at the institution or at another institution.
(13) The chief executive of an institution that provides approved programmes of pre-service teacher training must ensure that the appropriate authorities of the institution liaise with the appropriate authorities of other institutions that pro- vide such programmes so as to establish common requirements to govern the selection of people for enrolment, and the enrolment of people, in those pro- grammes.

Section 224: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 24 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
225 Records relating to students (1) Each institution shall keep records that show— 371 Part 16 s 226 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) the progress of each student at the institution (including the principal re- sults achieved by the student) in his or her programme of study or train- ing; and particulars of any allowances, grants, or other payments received by each student at the institution in respect of his or her programme of study or training out of public money appropriated by Parliament.
(2) Without limiting the generality of subsection (1), the records to be kept by an institution under that subsection include such records as will enable the institu- tion to comply with any requirement that may be made by the Secretary under section 226.

Section 225: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 225(1)(a): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 25 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 225(1)(b): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 25 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

226 Secretary may require information The Registrar or other appropriate officer of an institution shall, if so required by the Secretary, provide to the Secretary, in such form as the Secretary speci- fies, such statistical information in the possession of the institution as the Sec- retary specifies in relation to students generally or a particular class of students.
Section 226: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
226A Disclosure of enrolment information by institutions (1) In this section, unless the context otherwise requires,— allowance means an allowance established by regulations made under section 303, or identified by Gazette notice under section 307AB benefit means jobseeker support under the Social Security Act 1964 chief executive means the chief executive of the department department means the department for the time being responsible for the ad- ministration of the Social Security Act 1964 and for the administration of Part 25 specified period means any period specified in a notice under subsection (3) student loan has the same meaning as in section 4(1) of the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011 student loan scheme has the same meaning as in section 4(1) of the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011.
(2) The purpose of this section is to facilitate the disclosure of information by in- stitutions to the department, in order to verify— 372 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 16 s 226A (3) (a) (b) the entitlement or eligibility of any person to or for any benefit or allow- ance or student loan; or the amount of any benefit or allowance or student loan to which any per- son is or was entitled or for which any person is or was eligible.
For the purpose of this section, the chief executive may from time to time, in accordance with arrangements under the Privacy Act 1993 previously agreed between the chief executive and any institution (or, where they are unable to agree, in accordance with arrangements under that Act settled by the Privacy Commissioner appointed under the Privacy Act 1993), by notice in writing or electronically require the institution to supply all or any of the information set out in subsection (6), in respect of people— (a) who are (or were in any specified period) enrolled as students at the in- stitution; or (b) whose name and date of birth (being the name and date of birth of any person who is, or was during any specified period, receiving a benefit or allowance or student loan) is supplied to the institution by the chief executive, together with the notice.
(4) A notice under subsection (3) may require the institution to supply the informa- tion specified in the notice either immediately or at specified times during the academic year, or both, and in the latter case may require the institution to sup- ply at those times only details of any changes to the information the institution has previously supplied under this section.
(5) A notice under subsection (3) may include— (a) (b) an identification number assigned by the chief executive to any person who is referred to in the notice; or an identification number assigned to any such person by the institution; or (c) both.
(6) The details referred to in subsection (3) are— (a) their— (i) (ii) full names and addresses; and their dates of birth: (b) (c) (d) their identification numbers (being either or both of the identification numbers referred to in subsection (5)): details of the education or training in which they are so enrolled, and de- tails of the fees for that education or training: if, during the specified period, they are enrolled for any such education or training or ceased to be so enrolled or ceased to be enrolled as stu- dents, the details of each such event and the respective dates on which the event occurred: 373 Part 16 s 226A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (e) (f) (g) (h) details of their academic performance in any such education or training: details of their citizenship or residency status in New Zealand: details of any allowances granted to the person by the institution on be- half of the Secretary in any academic year before the 1999 academic year: details reasonably required by the chief executive for the administration of the student loan scheme or for the determination or provision of an allowance or a benefit.
(7) As soon as possible after the time or times specified in a requirement under subsection (3), an institution must supply the information required to the chief executive or any employee or agent of the department authorised by the chief executive to receive such information.
Information supplied by an institution under subsection (7) must be in a form previously agreed between the institution and the chief executive under the Pri- vacy Act 1993 (or, where they are unable to agree, in a form settled by the Pri- vacy Commissioner appointed under the Privacy Act 1993), and may include coded information.
Section 104 of the Privacy Act 1993 applies as if subsection (1) of that section also provided that, in relation to the information matching programme in this section, the Commissioner, before seeking a report on any of the matters in sec- tion 104(2)(a), (d), or (e) from a tertiary institution, must first seek a report on the matter from the department for the time being responsible for the adminis- tration of the Social Security Act 1964.
Section 226A: replaced, on 1 October 1998, by section 11 of the Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

Section 226A(1) allowance: amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 44 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 226A(1) benefit: amended, on 15 July 2013, by section 114 of the Social Security (Benefit Categories and Work Focus) Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 13).
Section 226A(1) benefit: amended, on 15 July 2013, by section 129 of the Social Security (Benefit Categories and Work Focus) Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 13).

Section 226A(1) benefit: amended, on 20 August 2012, by section 28(2) of the Social Security (Youth Support and Work Focus) Amendment Act 2012 (2012 No 50).

Section 226A(1) student loan: replaced, on 1 April 2012, by section 223 of the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011 (2011 No 62).
Section 226A(1) student loan scheme: replaced, on 1 April 2012, by section 223 of the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011 (2011 No 62).

Section 226A(2)(a): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 2(2)(a) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 226A(2)(b): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 2(2)(a) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 226A(3)(a): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 2(2)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).
(8) (9) 374 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 16 s 226B Section 226A(3)(b): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 2(2)(c) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 226A(6)(c): replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 26(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 226A(6)(d): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 26(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 226A(6)(d): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 2(2)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 226A(6)(e): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 26(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 226A(6)(h): inserted, on 1 November 1999, by section 2(3) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 226A(6)(h): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 26(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 226A(9): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 49 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

226B Offences concerning information requests (1) Any institution that intentionally fails or refuses to comply with section 226A(7) commits an offence and is liable on conviction to the penalty specified in subsection (2).
(1A) An institution commits an offence and is liable on conviction to a penalty spe- cified in subsection (2) if, in response to any requirement to supply information under section 226A, the institution intentionally— (a) makes a false or misleading statement; or (b) makes a statement from which any material matter has been omitted; or (c) (d) provides any false or misleading paper, document, or record; or provides a paper, document, or record from which any material matter has been omitted.
(2) The maximum penalty for an offence against subsection (1) or (1A) is a fine not exceeding $5,000, and, where the offence is a continuing one, a fine not exceeding $500 for each day the offence continues.

Section 226B: inserted, on 1 October 1998, by section 11 of the Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

Section 226B(1): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).
Section 226B(1A): inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 27(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 226B(1A): amended, on 4 October 2013, by regulation 3(1) of the Criminal Procedure (Con- sequential Amendments) Regulations 2013 (SR 2013/409).

Section 226B(2): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 27(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
375 Part 16 s 227 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 227 Fees for domestic students (1) The council of an institution may fix, or specify a means by which there may be calculated or ascertained, a tuition fee for any programme of study or train- ing at the institution.
(1A) The council of an institution that receives funding under section 159YA or 159ZC must not fix, in relation to domestic students, a fee (or a fee of a par- ticular kind) that exceeds any maximum specified in a condition imposed under section 159YC or 159ZD(2) (whichever is applicable) as being the maximum fee (or fee of that kind) that can be charged to a domestic student.
(1B) The council of an institution may fix, or specify a means for calculating or as- certaining, a fee for the provision of student services that are provided by the institution or by another person or body on behalf of the institution.
(1C) If the Minister gives an institution a direction under section 227A(1)(a) listing the categories of student services that the institution may make available, the council of the institution must ensure that any fees fixed under subsection (1B) for the provision of student services relate only to the types of student services that fall within those categories.
(1D) If an institution is given a direction under section 227A(4), the council of the institution must not fix, in relation to the amount that students may be charged for student services, a fee that exceeds the maximum amount specified in the direction.
(2) No domestic student shall be or continue to be enrolled in a programme of study or training at an institution unless there have been paid to the council in respect of the student— (a) (ab) the tuition fee (if any) fixed, or calculated or ascertained in accordance with a means specified, under subsection (1); and the fee for the provision of student services (if any) determined under subsection (1B); and (b) all other fees (if any) prescribed by the council.
(3) Nothing in subsection (2) prevents a council’s accepting by instalments any fee required by that subsection to be paid.
(4) The council of an institution shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that before the procedures for enrolling a student at the institution for the first time in any year are complete the student is given written notice of the circumstances (if any) in which the student is or may be entitled to a refund of all or any part of fees under this section paid or to be paid to the council.
(5) The power of a council to refund to a student all or any part of any fees paid to it under this section is not limited or affected by— (a) any failure to comply with subsection (4); or 376 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 16 s 227A (b) (c) the fact that the circumstances fall outside those notified under that sub- section; or the fact that the refund is larger than a notice under that subsection pro- vides for.
Section 227: replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 24 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 227(1): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 28(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 227(1A): inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 227(1A): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 31(a) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).
Section 227(1A): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 31(b) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 227(1B): inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 28(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 227(1C): inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 28(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 227(1D): inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 28(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 227(2): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 28(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 227(2)(ab): inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 28(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
227A Ministerial direction to institutions relating to compulsory student services fees (1) For the purpose of ensuring accountability in the use of compulsory student services fees determined under section 227(1B), the Minister may give an insti- tution or institutions a written direction that— (a) (b) (c) lists the categories of student services that the institution or institutions may make available to students: requires the institution or institutions to hold the fees in a specified man- ner (for example, in a separate account to be used solely for the purpose of expenditure on student services) and, if the fees are to be held in an account, ensure that the account is audited: requires the institution or institutions to establish adequate arrangements for decisions to be made jointly or in consultation with the students en- rolled at the institution, or their representatives, on all or any of the fol- lowing matters: (i) (ii) the types of student services that, subject to subsection (2)(a), are to be made available to students: the categories of student services that, subject to subsection (2)(b), are to be made available to students: 377 Part 16 s 227A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (iii) (iv) (v) the maximum amount that students may be charged for the student services that are to be made available (the student services fee): the procurement of student services: the method for authorising expenditure on student services: (d) requires the institution or institutions to include in the institution’s annu- al report (under section 220) a description of the services funded out of the student services fee and a statement of the fee income and expend- iture for each type of student service.
(2) If the Minister lists under subsection (1)(a) categories of student services that may be made available to students (listed categories),— (a) (b) the types of student services described in subsection (1)(c)(i) must fall within the listed categories; and the categories of student services described in subsection (1)(c)(ii) must be listed categories.
(3) A direction given under subsection (1)— (a) may include all or any of the things specified in paragraphs (a) to (d) of that subsection: (b) must specify when the direction must be complied with.
(4) If an institution does not comply with a direction given under subsection (1), the Minister may give a written direction to that institution specifying— (a) (b) the types of student services that the institution may make available to students; and the maximum amount that students may be charged for those services; and (c) when the direction must be complied with.
(5) Before giving a direction under subsection (1) or (4), the Minister must,— (a) by notice in the Gazette,— (i) (ii) (iii) set out the proposed direction; and invite submissions on it; and state a final date for receipt of submissions (being a date no later than 21 days after the date of the Gazette notice); and (b) consider the submissions (if any) on the proposed direction.
(6) The council of an institution that is given a direction under subsection (1) or (4) may make statutes under section 194(1) for the purpose of giving effect to the direction.

Section 227A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 29 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
378 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 16 s 228 228 Fees for international students (1) The council of an institution shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that no person is enrolled at the institution until it has established whether the person is a domestic student or an international student.
(2) No international student shall be or continue to be enrolled in any programme of study or training at an institution unless there have been paid to the council in respect of the student— (a) an amount fixed by the council that is not less than the council’s best es- timate of— (i) (ii) the cost to the institution (including the institution’s marginal ad- ministrative and other general costs, and the appropriate portion of any initial or start-up costs of the programme) of providing tuition in the programme for 1 student, in the case of a programme in which no domestic student is enrolled: the marginal cost to the institution (including the institution’s mar- ginal administrative and other general costs, and any marginal ini- tial or start-up costs of the programme) of providing tuition in the programme for 1 student in addition to the domestic students re- ceiving tuition in the programme, in every other case; and (b) an amount fixed by the council that is not less than an amount that in the council’s opinion is an appropriate reflection of the use by 1 student re- ceiving tuition in the programme of the capital facilities (if any) whose provision at the institution is necessary by virtue only of the institution’s provision of tuition to international students in addition to domestic stu- dents; and (c) all other fees (if any) prescribed by the council.
(2A) Notwithstanding subsection (2), a council may accept from an international student in respect of any programme of study or training at an institution an amount that is less than the sum of the amounts referred to in that subsection by an amount that is no greater than the sum of— (a) (b) (c) (d) any amounts by which the council has decided to subsidise the student in respect of the programme; and the appropriate proportion of any amounts by which the council has de- cided to subsidise the student in respect of programmes of a kind or de- scription that include the programme; and the appropriate proportion of any amounts by which the council has de- cided to subsidise students of a kind or description that include the stu- dent in respect of the programme; and the appropriate proportion of any amounts by which the council has de- cided to subsidise students of a kind or description that include the stu- 379 Part 16 s 228 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 dent in respect of programmes of a kind or description that include the programme,— out of the general revenue of the council (not being funds provided under sec- tion 159YA or 159ZC) or out of any special supplementary grant under that section that may be used for the purpose.
(2B) Nothing in subsection (2) prevents a council’s accepting by instalments any fee required by that subsection to be paid.

(3) Where an international student has after 31 December 1989 received tuition in a programme of study or training at an institution without paying the full amounts required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of subsection (2) in respect of the programme, the institution may, in any court of competent jurisdiction, recover the underpayment from the student, as a debt to the institution.
(4) In any year, the amount of any grant for an institution may be reduced from what it would otherwise have been by any amount by which (in the Secretary’s opinion), by virtue of the fact that the full amount required by subsection (2)(a) in respect of a programme of study or training at the institution in which an international student was enrolled has not been paid to the institution, the stu- dent’s education has been subsidised by public money appropriated by Parlia- ment.
(5) No grant shall be reduced under subsection (4) unless the Secretary has given to the council of the institution written notice of the circumstances taken into account when the proposed reduction was decided on.
(6) Where the council of an institution disputes that a grant should be reduced under subsection (4), or disputes the amount by which it should so be reduced, the following provisions apply: (a) (b) (c) the council may, within 28 days of getting notice from the Secretary under subsection (5), by written notice to the Secretary giving the name and address of a proposed arbitrator, require the dispute to be settled by arbitration: if, within 14 days of getting the council’s notice, the Secretary has agreed an arbitrator with the council, the agreed arbitrator shall settle the dispute: if, within 14 days of getting the council’s notice, the Secretary has not agreed an arbitrator with the council, an arbitrator appointed jointly by the Secretary and by the arbitrator originally proposed by the council shall settle the dispute: (d) the arbitrator’s decision is final.
(7) The council of an institution shall— (a) when an international student enrols, or resumes attendance, at the insti- tution, give to the Secretary written notice (to the best of the council’s 380 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 16 s 228 knowledge) of the student’s name, nationality, and programme of study or training: (b) when an international student ceases to be enrolled at, or ceases to at- tend, the institution, notify the Secretary in writing: (c) comply with all accounting requirements relating to international stu- dents enrolled at institutions contained in any notice published by the Minister in the Gazette that is for the time being in force.
(8) The council of an institution shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that when a student enrols at the institution (whether for the first time or for a subsequent time) the student is given written notice of the circumstances (if any) in which the student is or may be entitled to a refund of all or any part of fees under this section paid or to be paid to the council.
(9) The power of a council to refund to a student all or any part of any fees paid to it under this section is not limited or affected by— (a) (b) (c) any failure to comply with subsection (8); or the fact that the circumstances fall outside those notified under that sub- section; or the fact that the refund is larger than a notice under that subsection pro- vides for.

Section 228: inserted, on 1 January 1991, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Section 228 heading: amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(1): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(2): replaced, on 1 January 1992, by section 25(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 228(2): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 228(2): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(4) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(2)(a)(i): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(2)(a)(ii): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(2)(b): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 228(2)(b): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(4) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(2A): inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 25(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 228(2A): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
381 Part 16 s 228A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 228(2A): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(2A): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 32 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Section 228(2A): amended, on 1 January 2004, by section 17(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Section 228(2A)(a): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(2A)(b): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(2A)(c): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(2A)(d): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 228(2B): inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 25(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 228(3): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(3): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(3): amended, on 1 January 1992, by section 25(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
Section 228(4): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(4): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(7)(a): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(7)(a): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 228(7)(b): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(7)(c): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 30(4) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228(8): inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 25(3) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 228(9): inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 25(3) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
228A Tertiary institutions to give prospective students information about fees An institution (as defined in section 159(1)) must ensure that prospective stu- dents receive, before enrolment is completed, full written details of— (a) (b) all fees associated with their programmes; and the class or lecture materials, books, special clothing, safety equipment, tools, and other items that are or may be required by the establishment to be bought or provided by students enrolled for each programme of study or training; and 382 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 16A s 229C (c) any fee fixed under section 227(1B) that must be paid to the institution for the provision of student services.
Section 228A: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 42 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 228A(a): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 31(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228A(b): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 31(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 228A(b): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 31(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 228A(c): inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 31(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

229 Fees payable to associations of students [Repealed] Section 229: repealed, on 11 August 1998, by section 4 of the Education (Tertiary Students Associ- ation Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90).
Part 16A Membership of associations of tertiary students Part 16A: inserted, on 11 August 1998, by section 5 of the Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90).

229A Membership of students association voluntary No student or prospective student at an institution is required to be a member of a students association.

Section 229A: replaced, on 1 January 2012, by section 6 of the Education (Freedom of Association) Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 80).
229B Undue influence A person must not exert undue influence on any student or prospective student with intent to make that student or prospective student— (a) (b) (c) become or remain a member of a students association; or cease to be a member of a students association; or not become a member of a students association.

Section 229B: replaced, on 1 January 2012, by section 6 of the Education (Freedom of Association) Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 80).
229C Complaints (1) A student or prospective student who, on reasonable grounds, considers that any person has exerted undue influence in breach of section 229B may lodge a complaint with the council of the institution.

(2) A complaint must be in writing, and must specify the grounds on which the person believes that undue influence has been exerted.
383 Part 16A s 229CA Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) A student or prospective student who lodges a complaint— (a) is entitled to be heard on the matter by the council; and (b) may represent himself or herself, or be represented by an advocate.

(4) A students association in respect of which a complaint has been lodged— (a) is entitled to be heard on the matter by the council; and (5) (6) (7) (b) may be represented by a member of the association or by an advocate.
The council may refuse to hear a complaint if it believes that no reasonable grounds exist for it to be made.

If the council hears a complaint, it must deal with that complaint in accordance with the principles of natural justice and the procedures (if any) prescribed by the council in statutes made under section 194.

The council may uphold, reject, or otherwise decide on the complaint as it con- siders appropriate in the circumstances, and its decision is final.
Section 229C: replaced, on 1 January 2012, by section 6 of the Education (Freedom of Association) Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 80).

229CA Students association membership fees (1) No person is required to pay a membership fee to a students association, or to pay money to any other person as an alternative to paying such a membership fee, unless that person chooses to become or remain a member of that associ- ation.
(2) A person who is not a member of a students association may not be required to pay a representation fee to that association for any services that the association provides generally to the institution’s student body.
(3) Subsections (1) and (2) do not prevent a students association— (a) (b) charging a person who is not a member of the association for the provi- sion of a specific service to that person, at that person’s request; or being contracted by an institution or any other person to provide services to students of an institution.
(4) The council of an institution must, if asked by a students association of the in- stitution, collect the membership fees of that association, but only if the associ- ation provides the council with— (a) (b) a copy of its current constitution; and an independently audited set of financial accounts of the association for the last financial year.

(5) The council must pay all membership fees collected on behalf of the students association to the association in a timely manner.
(6) Despite subsections (4) and (5), the council may decline a request to collect membership fees on behalf of a students association, or may withhold all or part of any membership fees collected, if the council believes that— 384 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) Education Act 1989 Part 17 s 231 the terms of the constitution of the association are being breached; or the accounts disclose financial irregularities.
(7) (8) The council may retain any membership fees that have been withheld under subsection (6) until the council is satisfied that all breaches of the terms of the association’s constitution, and all financial irregularities, have been appropri- ately addressed by the association.

The council may charge a students association for the actual and reasonable costs incurred by the council in collecting membership fees on behalf of that association.
Section 229CA: inserted, on 1 January 2012, by section 6 of the Education (Freedom of Association) Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 80).
229D Sections 229A to 229CA apply to private training establishments Sections 229A to 229CA apply to private training establishments; and, for the purpose of those sections,— (a) (b) every reference to an institution includes a reference to a private training establishment; and every reference to a council includes a reference to the governing body of the private training establishment.

Section 229D: replaced, on 8 July 2000, by section 25 of the Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).
Section 229D heading: amended, on 1 January 2012, by section 7(1) of the Education (Freedom of Association) Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 80).

Section 229D: amended, on 1 January 2012, by section 7(2) of the Education (Freedom of Associ- ation) Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 80).

Part 17 Education Review Office [Repealed] Part 17: repealed, on 25 June 1993, by section 26(4)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).
230 Review of institutions [Repealed] Section 230: repealed, on 25 June 1993, by section 26(4)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

231 Powers of Chief Review Officer [Repealed] Section 231: repealed, on 25 June 1993, by section 26(4)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).
385 Part 18 s 232 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Part 18 Private training establishments Part 18: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Interpretation Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
232 Interpretation In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— Authority means the Qualifications Authority code means the code of practice established under section 238F governing member, in relation to a private training establishment, means— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) any director: any member occupying a position equivalent to that of a director: if the establishment is a trust, any trustee: if the establishment is a partnership, any partner: any senior manager: any shareholder with a controlling interest in the establishment senior manager, in relation to a private training establishment, means— (a) (b) the chief executive officer or person occupying an equivalent position; or any member of staff in charge of academic issues, marketing, adminis- tration, finance, student fee trust funds, or student services.
Section 232: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Programmes and training schemes in which international students enrolled Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
232A Requirements that private training establishments must comply with before enrolling international students (1) A private training establishment must not enrol an international student in, or permit an international student to begin to undertake, all or part of a pro- gramme at the establishment unless— (a) the establishment is registered under section 233 and is a signatory to the code; and (b) either— 386 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18 s 232B (i) (ii) the programme is an approved programme and the establishment is accredited to provide the entire programme; or the programme is of less than 3 months’ duration and is exempted under section 232B; and (c) if standards from the Directory of Assessment Standards are included in the programme, the establishment has a consent to assess against stand- ards.
(2) A private training establishment must not enrol an international student to be- gin to undertake a training scheme at the establishment unless— (a) the establishment is a registered establishment and is a signatory to the code; and (b) either— (i) (ii) the training scheme is an approved training scheme; or the training scheme is of less than 3 months’ duration and is ex- empted under section 232B; and (c) if standards from the Directory of Assessment Standards are included in the training scheme, the establishment has a consent to assess against those standards.
(3) For the purposes of this section and section 232B, a programme or training scheme is of less than 3 months’ duration if the period starting on the day on which the programme or scheme starts and ending on the day on which it ends (or is likely to end) is less than 3 calendar months, irrespective of the number of days during that period on which the programme or training scheme is, or is proposed to be, provided.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 232 Section 232A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

232B Exemptions (1) The Authority may, by notice in the Gazette,— (a) (b) exempt programmes for the purposes of section 232A(1)(b)(ii); or exempt training schemes for the purposes of section 232A(2)(b)(ii).
(2) A notice under subsection (1)— (a) may exempt only programmes or training schemes that are, or are likely to be, of less than 3 months’ duration; and (b) may identify programmes or training schemes, or classes of programmes or training schemes, that are exempt; and (c) may identify programmes or training schemes by reference to a provider, or a class of providers, that offers them; and 387 Part 18 s 232C Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (d) may be in respect of programmes or training schemes that have been completed, are in progress, or have not yet started.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 232(2), (3) Section 232B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

232C Requirement to be registered before providing approved programmes or training schemes A private training establishment must be registered before it can provide an ap- proved programme or training scheme to a student.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 233 Section 232C: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Applications for registration Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

232D Applications for registration of private training establishments (1) A private training establishment that is a body corporate may apply to the Au- thority for registration of the establishment as a private training establishment for the purposes of this Act.
(2) The application must— (a) include a written statement setting out— (i) (ii) the kinds of education the establishment proposes to provide; and the outcomes it seeks to achieve through the provision of those kinds of education; and demonstrate how the establishment intends to meet the requirements of sections 233(1), 233A(1), and 233B(1) and (2); and contain a statutory declaration from each governing member of the es- tablishment in respect of— (i) (ii) any material conflicts of interest arising from the person’s role as a governing member of the establishment; and any interests that the person has in organisations in the education or immigration sector that provide goods or services to tertiary students; and contain a statutory declaration from each governing member of the es- tablishment in respect of the matters described in section 233A(1)(a) to (g); and describe the arrangements that the establishment has in place to manage conflicts of interest that may arise; and (b) (c) (d) (e) 388 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18 s 233 (f) (g) be in a form and contain any other information that the Authority re- quires; and be accompanied by an amount that the Authority requires as a deposit on the fee charged under section 254(2)(a)(vii).
(3) The Authority must not consider an application for registration if the applicant does not provide all the information required under subsection (2).

Compare: 1989 No 80 ss 234, 235 Section 232D: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
232E Authority may verify identity of governing members of private training establishment (1) The Authority may require a private training establishment to provide, to the satisfaction of the Authority, evidence of the identities of its governing mem- bers— (a) (b) before considering an application for registration from the establishment; or at any time there is a change in the membership of the governing mem- bers of the establishment.
(2) When acting under subsection (1), the Authority may interview any governing member of the establishment for the purpose of verifying his or her identity.

Section 232E: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Determination of application Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
233 Grant or refusal of application (1) The Authority must grant an application for registration of a private training establishment if it is satisfied that— (a) (b) (c) (d) every governing member of the establishment is a fit and proper person (after considering the criteria set out in section 233A); and the establishment has in place effective arrangements for managing any conflicts of interest that exist or may arise; and no governing member of the establishment has a material conflict of in- terest that the Authority considers is or is likely to be unmanageable; and no governing member of the establishment has an interest of a kind de- scribed in section 232D(2)(c)(ii) that the Authority considers is or is likely to be unmanageable; and 389 Part 18 s 233 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (e) the establishment has, or will at the relevant time have, adequate staff, equipment, and premises to provide its programmes or training schemes; and (f) the establishment,— (i) (ii) in the case of an establishment that is already operational, has ac- ceptable financial management practices and performance (for ex- ample, is able to pay its staff, taxes, and creditors); and in the case of an establishment that is not yet operational, is likely to have acceptable financial management practices and perform- ance (for example, is likely to be able to pay its staff, taxes, and creditors); and (g) (h) the establishment complies, or is capable of complying and likely to comply, with the conditions of registration
 under section 233B; and before accepting the enrolment of any prospective student, the establish- ment provides or will provide that student with a written statement of— (i) (ii) the total costs and other financial commitments associated with the programme or training scheme for which the student seeks en- rolment; and any material conflicts of interest of any of the governing members of the establishment; and (iii) any interests of a kind described in section 232D(2)(c)(ii); and (2) (3) (4) (i) in the case of an establishment that intends to enrol international stu- dents, the establishment will become a signatory to the code before en- rolling any international students.
Registration may be granted without limitation as to time or for a specified period.

The grant of registration does not entitle the establishment or any of its stu- dents to receive financial assistance out of public money appropriated by Par- liament.
The Authority may refuse to grant registration to a private training establish- ment or cancel the establishment’s registration (if already granted) if the Au- thority is satisfied that a governing member of the establishment has provided a false or misleading declaration under section 232D(2)(c).
(5) The Authority must give written notice to a private training establishment— (a) (b) when it grants, refuses to grant, or cancels registration; and if it refuses or cancels registration, give reasons for doing so.

Section 233: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 233(1): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 15(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
390 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18 s 233A Section 233(4): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 15(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 233(5)(a): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 233(5)(b): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 15(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
233A Criteria for determining whether governing member of private training establishment is fit and proper person (1) For the purpose of determining under section 233(1)(a) whether a governing member of a private training establishment is a fit and proper person for that position, the Authority must give any weight that it considers appropriate to all of the following matters: (a) the person’s experience in the provision of education services (for ex- ample, any previous involvement in a registered private training estab- lishment); and (b) whether the person was a governing member of a registered private training establishment that was closed, sold due to insolvency, or taken over; and (c) whether the person has been convicted of any offence involving fraud, violence, or dishonesty, or any offence under this Act or section 352 of the Immigration Act 2009; and (d) whether the person is a defendant in proceedings in respect of an offence described in paragraph (c); and (e) (f) whether the person was adjudicated bankrupt under the Insolvency Act 2006 or the Insolvency Act 1967; and whether the person is prohibited from being a director or promoter of, or from being concerned or taking part in the management of, a company under any of sections 382, 383, 385, and 386A of the Companies Act 1993; and (g) whether the person has failed to disclose any material conflict of interest as required under section 232D(2)(c)(i); and (h) any other matter that the Authority considers relevant.
(2) If the applicant has had direct involvement in the provision of education ser- vices that have failed, the Authority must give the applicant an opportunity to explain why the risk of this occurring again is unlikely.

Section 233A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
391 Part 18 s 233B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Conditions and other requirements of registration Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
233B Conditions of registration (1) (2) (3) It is a condition of registration of a private training establishment that it will at all times comply with the requirements in the rules made under section 253, ex- cept to the extent that the Authority exempts the establishment, by a condition on its registration, from compliance.

It is a condition of registration that a registered establishment will keep the written statement required under section 232D(2)(a) up to date.
It is a condition of registration that a registered establishment will ensure that— (a) (b) existing governing members keep the declarations required under section 232D(2)(c) and (d) up to date; and any new governing member submits the declarations required under sec- tion 232D(2)(c) and (d) before commencing as a governing member of the establishment.
(4) The Authority may impose conditions on the registration of an establishment that are specific to the establishment or a group or class of establishments.

(5) The Authority may at any time, with the agreement of the establishment,— (a) (b) impose new conditions on the establishment’s registration; or amend or revoke any existing conditions.
(6) The Authority may, without the agreement of an establishment, impose condi- tions on the establishment’s registration, or amend or revoke any existing con- ditions, but only if the Authority has first— (a) (b) (c) given written notice to the establishment of its intentions; and given the establishment a reasonable opportunity to respond to the no- tice; and considered any submissions made by the establishment in response to the notice.
(7) When conditions are imposed, amended, or revoked, the Authority must give written notice to the establishment of the new, amended, or revoked conditions.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 236AA Section 233B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

233C Annual fee Every registered private training establishment must pay the Authority an an- nual registration fee of an amount prescribed by or determined under rules made under section 253.
392 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18 s 233D Section 233C: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Cancellation and lapse of registration Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
233D Cancellation of registration (1) The Authority may cancel the registration of a registered private training estab- lishment— (a) if it is satisfied on reasonable grounds that— (i) (ii) the establishment no longer meets 1 or more of the criteria set out in section 233(1); or the establishment is not complying, or has not complied, with 1 or more of the conditions applying to it; or (b) (ba) if the establishment has provided false or misleading information in its application for registration; or if it is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the establishment has failed or refused to comply with any relevant duties or obligations under this Act, including, but not limited to, the obligations relating to student fee protection; or (c) at the written request of the establishment.
(2) The Authority must cancel the registration of a private training establishment if— (a) the establishment has been convicted of an offence against— (i) (ii) this Act; or section 352 of the Immigration Act 2009; or (b) a governing member of the establishment is convicted of any serious criminal activity or any offence referred to in paragraph (a), and the es- tablishment fails to comply with a written notice issued by the Authority on reasonable grounds requiring that the person be removed, within 2 months of receipt of the notice, from his or her position as a governing member and from every other position in the establishment.
(3) Before cancelling a registration under subsection (1)(a) or (b), the Authority must— (a) (b) (c) notify the establishment that it is considering cancelling the establish- ment’s registration, and give reasons; and give the establishment a reasonable opportunity to respond to the notice; and consider any submissions made by the establishment in response to the notice.
393 Part 18 s 233E Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (4) If the Authority cancels a registration under this section, it must give notice of its decision to both the establishment and the Commission, with reasons.

(5) Nothing in this section limits the Authority’s powers under section 255(7)(a) to cancel an establishment’s registration.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 237 Section 233D: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 233D(1)(ba): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 16(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 233D(4): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 16(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

233E Effect of cancellation (1) (2) Cancellation of registration under section 233D or 255(7)(a) takes effect on the date specified by the Authority in the notice given under section 233D(4) (the date of cancellation).
If the registration of a registered private training establishment is cancelled under section 233D or 255(7)(a), from the date of cancellation,— (a) (b) (c) all approved programmes or training schemes granted to the establish- ment are withdrawn; and all accreditations granted to the establishment are withdrawn; and all consents to assess against standards granted to the establishment are withdrawn.
(3) No notice is required to be given to a registered private training establishment for a withdrawal under subsection (2).

Section 233E: replaced, on 13 February 2015, by section 17 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
234 Lapse of registration (1) The registration of a registered private training establishment lapses— (a) on the date that is 1 year after registration is granted if,— (i) within that period, the establishment does not provide an approved programme that it is accredited to provide to enrolled students; and (ii) within that period, the establishment does not provide an approved training scheme to enrolled students: (b) on the date that is 1 year after the establishment has ceased to provide to enrolled students— (i) (ii) any approved programme it is accredited to provide; and any approved training scheme.
394 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18 s 234 (2) Subsection (1) does not affect the registration of a private training establish- ment if— (a) (b) the time for the lapse of the establishment’s accreditation is extended under section 250B(2) beyond either of the dates specified in subsection (1) of this section, in which case the establishment’s registration lapses when the accreditation lapses; or the time for the lapse of the establishment’s training scheme approval is extended under section 251C(2) beyond either of the dates specified in subsection (1) of this section, in which case the establishment’s registra- tion lapses when the training scheme approval lapses.
(2A) Despite anything in subsections (1) and (2), the registration of a registered pri- vate training establishment lapses on the date that the establishment ceases to be a body corporate.
(3) (4) (5) If a registered private training establishment is required under this Act to pay any fees to the Authority, and fails to pay those fees after receiving 2 reminder notices within 3 months, the registration of the establishment lapses on the date that is 1 calendar month after the date of the second reminder notice from the Authority.

The Authority must give written notice of the lapse of a registration to the es- tablishment.
If the registration of a registered private training establishment lapses under subsection (1) or (2A), any accreditation, approval, or consent associated with the registration is withdrawn on the date that the registration lapses.

(6) No notice is required to be given to a registered private training establishment for a withdrawal under subsection (5).

Section 234: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 234(2A): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 18(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 234(4): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 18(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 234(5): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 18(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 234(6): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 18(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
395 Part 18 s 234A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Fees for domestic students Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
234A Fees for domestic students must not exceed maximums set in conditions of funding (1) A registered private training establishment that receives funding under section 159YA or 159ZC must not exceed the maximum amount when fixing a tuition fee or a fee of a particular kind for any programme or training scheme at the establishment.
(2) (3) If a registered private training establishment is given a direction under section 235D(4), the establishment must not fix, in relation to the amount that students may be charged for student services, a fee that exceeds the maximum amount specified in the direction.
In subsection (1), the maximum amount means the maximum specified in a condition imposed under section 159YC or 159ZD(2) (whichever is applicable) as being the maximum fee (or fee of that kind) that can be charged to a domes- tic student.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 236C Section 234A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Information that must be given to prospective students Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
234B Information that private training establishments must give prospective students Every private training establishment must— (a) ensure that all printed and other information made available to prospect- ive students has full details of— (i) (ii) the total fees for each programme or training scheme, including fees for class or lecture materials, books, special clothing, safety equipment, tools, and any other items that are or may be provided to students enrolled for that programme or training scheme, and including any students association membership fees; and the class or lecture materials, books, special clothing, safety equipment, tools, and other items that are or may be required by the establishment to be bought or provided by students enrolled for each programme or scheme; and (b) before accepting the enrolment of any prospective student, give the stu- dent a written statement of— 396 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18 s 234C (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) the total costs of the programme or training scheme and all other financial commitments associated with the programme or training scheme; and the cost of fees charged for student services provided by the estab- lishment; and any material conflicts of interest of any of the governing members of the establishment; and any interests of a kind described in any statement required under section 232D(2)(c)(ii); and (c) give every prospective student a written statement of his or her entitle- ments under sections 235 and 235A, in the event that the student with- draws from a programme or training scheme.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 236A Section 234B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Protection of student fees Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
234C Interpretation (1) In sections 234D to 235C,— independent trustee, in relation to a private training establishment, means a trustee that does not provide any other service to the establishment other than that referred to in section 234E refund period means,— (a) in relation to a domestic student who, on or after 1 January 2015, is en- rolled in a programme or part of a programme, or enrolled in a training scheme, the period of time that begins when the student’s fees are paid to the private training establishment (or paid directly to the independent trustee) and ends on the later of 7 days after— (i) (ii) the first day of the programme or scheme for which the attendance of the student at the establishment is required; or any other day that the establishment permits the student to begin attendance: (b) in relation to a domestic student who, before 1 January 2015, is enrolled in a programme or part of a programme, or enrolled in a training scheme, the 7 days after the first day of the programme or scheme for which the attendance of the student at the establishment is required trustee means Public Trust, a trustee company under the Trustee Companies Act 1967, a qualified statutory accountant (within the meaning of section 5(1) 397 Part 18 s 234D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 of the Financial Reporting Act 2013) in public practice, or a lawyer whose practising certificate allows the holding of trust funds.
(2) In sections 234D to 235C, the requirement that funds paid by or on behalf of a student be deposited with an independent trustee applies to all components of any fee payable by the student (for example, it includes any component of the fee payable by the student in respect of accommodation costs or agent commis- sions).

Section 234C: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 234C(1) refund period: replaced, on 13 February 2015, by section 19 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 234C(1) trustee: amended, on 1 July 2015, by section 17 of the Financial Reporting Amend- ment Act 2014 (2014 No 64).
234D Application of rules relating to student fee protection (1) This section applies to a person who receives money from a student for the pur- pose of enrolling, or helping the student to enrol, in a programme or training scheme at a private training establishment.

(2) A person to whom this section applies must comply with the requirements of the rules made under section 253 that relate to student fee protection.
Section 234D: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
234E Student fees must be deposited with independent trustee (1) If a private training establishment receives any funds paid by or on behalf of a student in respect of a programme or training scheme provided by the estab- lishment, the establishment must— (a) (b) deposit those funds, as soon as practicable, with an independent trustee approved by the Authority; and hold those funds on trust for the student until they are deposited with the independent trustee.
(2) If a person to whom section 234D applies receives any funds paid by or on be- half of a student in respect of a programme or training scheme provided by the establishment, the person must— (a) (b) deposit those funds, as soon as practicable, with an independent trustee approved by the Authority unless the establishment has made alternative arrangements that are acceptable to the Authority; and hold those funds on trust for the student until they are deposited with the independent trustee or in accordance with the alternative arrangements referred to in paragraph (a).
(3) An independent trustee approved by the Authority must comply with the re- quirements of any rules made under section 253 relating to student fee protec- tion.
398 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (4) The Authority— Education Act 1989 Part 18 s 235 (a) may withdraw its approval of a particular trustee if satisfied that the trustee is not managing the trust funds in accordance with the require- ments of the rules; and (b) must, if approval for a trustee is withdrawn, appoint a new trustee in ac- cordance with the rules.
(5) The requirements specified in subsection (1) do not apply— (a) (b) in respect of any programme or training scheme that is exempt from those requirements by rules made under section 253(1)(pb); or in the case of a student or group of students for whom the private train- ing establishment has deposited, with an independent trustee approved by the Authority, an amount of money that is sufficient to make the necessary refunds to that student or those students under section 235 or 235A.
Section 234E: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 234E(5): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 20 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
235 Refund entitlements of domestic students (1) A domestic student who is enrolled at a private training establishment for all or part of a programme or training scheme that is of more than 3 months’ duration and who withdraws from that programme or scheme within the refund period is entitled to a refund, without deduction, of so much of any payment, or of the sum of any payments, made by the student in respect of the programme or scheme, and, if withdrawal from the programme or scheme also constitutes complete withdrawal from the establishment, in respect of enrolment at the es- tablishment, as exceeds $500 or 10% of the amount of that payment or of the sum of those payments, whichever is the lesser.
(2) If the student withdraws from a programme or training scheme within the re- fund period, the independent trustee must refund all payments made to it by the private training establishment in respect of the programme or scheme— (a) (b) to the trustee of the student’s new education provider; or if the fee has been paid for by student loan money, to the department de- fined in section 235F(1); or (c) to the student, if neither paragraph (a) nor (b) applies.
(3) When the refund period, in relation to any fees paid by or behalf of a student, has expired,— (a) the fees paid must continue to be held in trust by the independent trustee and the private training establishment must be paid from the trust in the manner prescribed in the rules made under section 253; or 399 Part 18 s 235A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) the private training establishment may, if the Authority approves, make alternative arrangements in relation to the fees paid.
Section 235: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
235A Refund entitlements of international students (1) A private training establishment must— (a) (b) (c) (d) allow every international student enrolled for a programme or training scheme that is of 3 months’ duration or more to withdraw from it at any time within the refund period; and refund to every international student who so withdraws, without deduc- tion, at least so much of any payment, or of the sum of any payments, made by the student to the establishment in respect of that programme or training scheme, and, if withdrawal from the programme or scheme also constitutes withdrawal from the establishment as a whole, in respect of enrolment at the establishment, as exceeds the percentage specified in the notice made under section 235B; and allow every international student enrolled for a programme or training scheme that is of less than 3 months’ duration to withdraw from it within a period (being less than 7 days) specified by the Authority; and refund to every international student who so withdraws a minimum amount or proportion, specified by the Authority, of any payments made by the student to the establishment in respect of the programme or train- ing scheme.
(2) For the purposes of subsection (1)(c), a programme or training scheme is of less than 3 months’ duration if the period starting on the day on which the pro- gramme or scheme starts and ending on the day on which it ends (or is likely to end) is less than 3 calendar months, irrespective of the number of days during that period on which the programme or training scheme is, or is proposed to be, provided.
(3) When the refund period, in relation to any fees paid by or on behalf of an inter- national student, has expired,— (a) (b) the fees paid must continue to be held in trust with the independent trustee and the private training establishment must be paid from the trust in the manner prescribed in the rules made under section 253; or the private training establishment may, if the Authority approves, make alternative arrangements in relation to the fees paid.
In this section, refund period means the period that begins when the student’s fees are paid to the private training establishment (or paid directly to the inde- pendent trustee) and ends on the date specified in the notice made under sec- tion 235B.

(4) 400 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18 s 235C Section 235A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 235A(4): replaced, on 13 February 2015, by section 21 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
235B Refund requirements set by Gazette notice (1) The Minister must specify, by notice in the Gazette, for the purposes of refunds under section 235A,— (a) either— (i) (ii) the end of the period within which an international student may withdraw from a programme or training scheme of 3 months’ du- ration or more and be entitled to a refund under that section; or a means by which the end of that period may be calculated or as- certained; and the maximum percentage of the payment or payments that an establish- ment may retain; and the cost components of the fee total on which the maximum percentage is determined; and the expenses or categories of expenses that the establishment must show that it has incurred in relation to an international student in order to de- duct the maximum percentage.
(b) (c) (d) (2) Before giving notice in the Gazette under subsection (1), the Minister must, as the Minister considers appropriate, consult with any 1 or more of the follow- ing: (a) (b) (c) private training establishments: sector and industry representative organisations: any other relevant bodies.
(3) A notice under this section is a legislative instrument and a disallowable instru- ment for the purposes of the Legislation Act 2012 and must be presented to the House of Representatives under section 41 of that Act.

Section 235B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 235B(1)(a): replaced, on 13 February 2015, by section 22 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Section 235B(3): replaced, on 5 August 2013, by section 77(3) of the Legislation Act 2012 (2012 No 119).

235C Rules apply if students withdraw because of programme or training scheme closure Any fees paid by or on behalf of any student who withdraws from a pro- gramme or training scheme because of the closure of the programme or scheme are subject to the protections set out in the rules made under section 253.
401 Part 18 s 235D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 235C: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
235D Ministerial direction to registered private training establishments relating to compulsory student services fees (1) For the purpose of ensuring accountability in the use of compulsory student services fees, the Minister may give a registered private training establishment or registered private training establishments a written direction that— (a) (b) (c) lists the categories of student services that the establishment or establish- ments may make available to students: requires the establishment or establishments to hold the fees in a speci- fied manner (for example, in a separate account to be used solely for the purpose of expenditure on student services) and, if the fees are to be held in an account, ensure that the account is audited: requires the establishment or establishments to establish adequate ar- rangements for decisions to be made jointly or in consultation with the students enrolled at the establishment, or their representatives, on all or any of the following matters: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) the types of student services that, subject to subsection (2)(a), are to be made available to students: the categories of student services that, subject to subsection (2)(b), are to be made available to students: the maximum amount that students may be charged for the student services that are to be made available (the student services fee): the procurement of student services: the method for authorising expenditure on student services: (d) requires the establishment or establishments to provide each year to stu- dents a written report describing the services that have been funded out of the student services fee and a statement of the fee income and expend- iture on each type of student service.
(2) If the Minister lists under subsection (1)(a) categories of student services that may be made available to students (listed categories),— (a) (b) the types of student services described in subsection (1)(c)(i) must fall within the listed categories; and the categories of student services described in subsection (1)(c)(ii) must be listed categories.
(3) A direction given under subsection (1)— (a) may include all or any of the things specified in paragraphs (a) to (d) of that subsection: (b) must specify when it must be complied with.
402 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18 s 235F (4) If a registered private training establishment does not comply with a direction given under subsection (1), the Minister may give a written direction to that es- tablishment specifying— (a) (b) the types of student services that the establishment may make available to students; and the maximum amount that students may be charged for those services; and (c) when the direction must be complied with.
(5) Before giving a direction under subsection (1) or (4), the Minister must,— (a) by notice in the Gazette,— (i) (ii) (iii) set out the proposed direction; and invite submissions on it; and state a final date for receipt of submissions (being a date no later than 21 days after the date of the Gazette notice); and (b) consider the submissions (if any) on the proposed direction.
(6) In subsection (1), compulsory student services fees are fees for the provision of student services that a student must pay to a registered private training estab- lishment as a condition of enrolment in a programme or training scheme at the establishment.

Section 235D: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Information sharing with other government departments Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
235E Private training establishment to notify immigration officer if student withdraws from programme or training scheme (1) A private training establishment must ensure that, within 7 days of the with- drawal of any student from a programme or training scheme at the establish- ment, an immigration officer (within the meaning of section 4 of the Immigra- tion Act 2009) is given written notice of the name of the student and the pro- gramme or training scheme, and the day on which the student withdrew.
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to a student if the establishment is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the student is a domestic student.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 236B Section 235E: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
235F Disclosure of enrolment information by private training establishments (1) In this section, unless the context otherwise requires,— 403 Part 18 s 235F Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 allowance means an allowance established by regulations made under section 303, or identified by Gazette notice under section 307AB benefit means jobseeker support under the Social Security Act 1964 chief executive means the chief executive of the department department means the department for the time being responsible for the ad- ministration of the Social Security Act 1964 and for the administration of Part 25 of this Act specified period means any period specified in a notice under subsection (3) student loan has the same meaning as in section 4(1) of the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011 student loan scheme has the same meaning as in section 4(1) of the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011.
(2) The purpose of this section is to facilitate the disclosure of information by gov- erning bodies of private training establishments to the department, in order to verify— (3) (a) (b) the entitlement or eligibility of any person to or for any benefit or allow- ance or student loan; or the amount of any benefit or allowance or student loan to which any per- son is or was entitled or for which any person is or was eligible.
For the purpose of this section, the chief executive may from time to time, in accordance with arrangements under the Privacy Act 1993 previously agreed between the chief executive and any institution (or, where they are unable to agree, in accordance with arrangements under that Act settled by the Privacy Commissioner appointed under the Privacy Act 1993), by notice in writing, or electronically, require the institution to supply all or any of the information set out in subsection (4), in respect of people— (a) who are (or were in any specified period) enrolled as students at the pri- vate training establishment; or (b) whose name and date of birth (being the name and date of birth of any person who is, or was during any specified period, receiving a benefit or allowance or student loan) is supplied to the private training establish- ment by the chief executive, together with the notice.
(4) A notice under subsection (3) may require the private training establishment to supply the information specified in the notice either immediately or at specified times during the academic year, or both, and in the latter case may require the private training establishment to supply at those times only details of any changes to the information the private training establishment has previously supplied under this section.
(5) A notice under subsection (3) may include— 404 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18 s 235F (a) (b) an identification number assigned by the chief executive to any person who is referred to in the notice; or an identification number assigned to any such person by the private training establishment; or (c) both.
(6) The details referred to in subsection (3) are— (a) their— (i) (ii) full names and addresses; and dates of birth: (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) their identification numbers (being either or both of the identification numbers referred to in subsection (5)): details of the education or training in which they are so enrolled, and de- tails of the fees for that education or training: if, during the specified period, they enrolled for any such education or training or ceased to be so enrolled or ceased to be enrolled as a student, the details of each such event and the respective dates on which the event occurred: details of their academic performance in any such education or training: details of their citizenship or residency status in New Zealand: details of any allowances granted to them by the private training estab- lishment on behalf of the Secretary in any academic year before the 1999 academic year: details reasonably required by the chief executive for the administration of the student loan scheme or for the provision or determination of a benefit or allowance.
(7) As soon as possible after the time or times specified in a requirement under subsection (3), a private training establishment must supply the information re- quired to the chief executive or any employee or agent of the department authorised by the chief executive to receive such information.
(8) (9) Information supplied by a private training establishment under subsection (7) must be in a form previously agreed between the private training establishment and the chief executive under the Privacy Act 1993 (or, where they are unable to agree, in a form settled by the Privacy Commissioner appointed under the Privacy Act 1993), and may include coded information.
Section 104 of the Privacy Act 1993 applies as if subsection (1) of that section also provided that, in relation to the information matching programme in sec- tion 226A of this Act, the Commissioner, before seeking a report on any of the matters in section 104(2)(a), (d), or (e) from a private training establishment, 405 Part 18 s 236 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 must first seek a report on the matter from the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Social Security Act 1964.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 238B Section 235F: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 235F(1) benefit: amended, on 15 July 2013, by section 114 of the Social Security (Benefit Categories and Work Focus) Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 13).

Section 235F(1) benefit: amended, on 15 July 2013, by section 129 of the Social Security (Benefit Categories and Work Focus) Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 13).
Section 235F(1) benefit: amended, on 20 August 2012, by section 28(2) of the Social Security (Youth Support and Work Focus) Amendment Act 2012 (2012 No 50).

Section 235F(1) student loan: replaced, on 1 April 2012, pursuant to section 223 of the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011 (2011 No 62).

Section 235F(1) student loan scheme: replaced, on 1 April 2012, pursuant to section 223 of the Stu- dent Loan Scheme Act 2011 (2011 No 62).
236 Offences concerning information requests (1) A private training establishment that intentionally fails or refuses to comply with section 235F(7) commits an offence and is liable on conviction to the pen- alty specified in subsection (3).
(2) A private training establishment commits an offence and is liable on conviction to the penalty specified in subsection (3) if, in response to any requirement to supply information under section 235F(7), the establishment intentionally— (a) makes a false or misleading statement; or (b) makes a statement from which any material matter has been omitted; or (c) (d) provides any false or misleading paper, document, or record; or provides a paper, document, or record from which any material matter has been omitted.
(3) The maximum penalty for an offence against subsection (1) or (2) is a fine not exceeding $5,000, and, if the offence is a continuing one, a fine not exceeding $500 for each day the offence continues.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 238C Section 236: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 236(1): amended, on 4 October 2013, by regulation 3(1) of the Criminal Procedure (Conse- quential Amendments) Regulations 2013 (SR 2013/409).
Section 236(2): amended, on 4 October 2013, by regulation 3(1) of the Criminal Procedure (Conse- quential Amendments) Regulations 2013 (SR 2013/409).

236AA Conditions on registration [Repealed] Section 236AA: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

406 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18 s 236AB Student records Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
236A Duties of private training establishments to maintain student records (1) Every private training establishment must— (a) keep accurate enrolment and academic records for each student enrolled in— (i) (ii) a programme or training scheme provided by the establishment; or standards-based study or training provided by the establishment through a consent to assess against standards granted under sec- tion 252; and (b) (c) (d) comply with rules made under section 253(1)(n) in respect of those re- cords; and ensure that the enrolment records required to be kept under this section are up to date; and ensure that the enrolment records are readily available, upon request, to— (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) the Authority: Immigration New Zealand: the administrator of the code (within the meaning of Part 18A): the department for the time being responsible for the administra- tion of the Social Security Act 1964 and for the administration of Part 25 of this Act: (v) Public Trust, if it is approved as an independent trustee for the pri- vate training establishment.
(2) If a private training establishment closes, the establishment must, in respect of each student, forward his or her records kept under this section to the student’s new education provider, or to the student if there is no new education provider.

Section 236A: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 236A(1)(a): replaced, on 13 February 2015, by section 23 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
236AB Refund requirements set by Gazette notice [Repealed] Section 236AB: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

407 Part 18 s 236B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 236B Establishment to notify immigration officer if student withdraws from course [Repealed] Section 236B: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
236C Fees for domestic students must not exceed maximums set in conditions of funding [Repealed] Section 236C: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

237 Cancellation of registration [Repealed] Section 237: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

238 Notice [Repealed] Section 238: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 25(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
238A Grants to private training establishments [Repealed] Section 238A: repealed, on 1 January 2004, by section 26 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

238B Disclosure of enrolment information by private training establishments [Repealed] Section 238B: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
238C Offences concerning information requests [Repealed] Section 238C: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

408 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18A s 238D Part 18A International students Part 18A: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 48 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Part 18A heading: amended, on 12 December 2002, by section 27 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
238D Interpretation In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— code means the code of practice established under section 238F code administrator means the person or agency appointed under section 238FA(1) DRS means the International Student Contract Dispute Resolution Scheme es- tablished by section 238J DRS operator means the person or agency appointed under section 238J(4)(a) DRS rules means the rules prescribed under section 238M international student— (a) (b) has the meaning given by section 2(1); and in relation to a provider, means an international student enrolled by the provider provider means a person or body that is— (a) (b) (c) (d) a registered school; or an institution within the meaning of section 159; or a registered private training establishment registered under section 233; or an organisation that provides adult and community education that re- ceives funding under section 159YA or 159ZC signatory provider means a provider that is a signatory to the code student claimant, in relation to a provider, means a person who— (a) (b) (c) is an international student enrolled by the provider; or is a former international student enrolled by the provider; or intends to be, or is in the process of being, enrolled by the provider as an international student.
Section 238D: replaced, on 1 July 2016, by section 24 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

409 Part 18A s 238E Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 238E Signatories to code may enrol persons as international students (1) A provider may enrol a person as an international student or continue to have an international student enrolled, so long as the provider is a signatory to the code.
(2) A provider must not enrol a person as an international student or continue to have an international student enrolled, or provide educational instruction for such a person, if— (a) (b) (c) the provider is not a signatory to the code; or the provider is removed as a signatory to the code under section 238G; or for any other reason provided in the code, the provider ceases to be a signatory to the code.
(3) A provider that is subject to a sanction under section 238G(1) may continue to have international students enrolled and may provide educational instruction to those students but only to the extent permitted by the sanction.

(4) Until 1 July 2003, nothing in subsection (1) or subsection (2) applies to provid- ers who enrol international students only on courses of less than 3 months’ du- ration (as that term is defined in section 232(4)).
Section 238E: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 48 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 238E(3): replaced, on 1 July 2016, by section 25 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 238E(4): inserted, on 12 December 2002, by section 29 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
238EA Obligation on provider to enrol person as international student A provider must enrol a person as an international student if the person is not a domestic student and the provider— (a) provides the person with educational instruction for more than 2 weeks; or (b) accepts tuition fees from the person.

Section 238EA: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 34 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
238F Code (1) The Minister may publish a code of practice that provides a framework for the pastoral care of international students.
(1A) The purpose of the code is to support the Government’s objectives for inter- national education by— (a) requiring providers to take all reasonable steps to protect international students; and 410 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18A s 238F (b) ensuring, so far as is possible, that international students have in New Zealand a positive experience that supports their educational achieve- ment.
(1B) The scope of the code is to prescribe, alongside other quality assurance pre- scribed by this Act,— (a) (b) outcomes sought from providers for their international students; and key processes required of providers to support the well-being, achieve- ment, and rights of international students.
(2) Without limiting subsections (1) to (1B), the code may include provisions for all or any of the following purposes: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) [Repealed] [Repealed] [Repealed] [Repealed] [Repealed] [Repealed] despite everything in the Public Finance Act 1989, requiring providers to indemnify the administrator: providing for such other matters as are contemplated by or necessary for giving full effect to this Part and for its due administration.
(3) (4) (5) The code of practice may make different provisions in relation to international students aged under 18 and in relation to international students aged 18 or over.

The code is binding on all parties who are signatories to the code.

The code is a legislative instrument and a disallowable instrument for the pur- poses of the Legislation Act 2012 and must be presented to the House of Rep- resentatives under section 41 of that Act.
Section 238F: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 48 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 238F(1A): inserted, on 1 July 2016, by section 26(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 238F(1B): inserted, on 1 July 2016, by section 26(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 238F(2): amended, on 1 July 2016, by section 26(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Section 238F(2)(a): repealed, on 1 July 2016, by section 26(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 238F(2)(b): repealed, on 1 July 2016, by section 26(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 238F(2)(c): repealed, on 1 July 2016, by section 26(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
411 Part 18A s 238FA Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 238F(2)(d): repealed, on 1 July 2016, by section 26(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 238F(2)(e): repealed, on 1 July 2016, by section 26(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 238F(2)(f): repealed, on 1 July 2016, by section 26(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Section 238F(5): replaced, on 1 July 2016, by section 26(4) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

238FA Appointment of code administrator (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, appoint a person or an agency to be responsible for administering the code.
(2) The functions of the code administrator are— (a) to receive applications from providers seeking to become signatories to the code; and (b) to assess those applications against— (i) (ii) the criteria stated in the code; and the purpose stated in section 238F(1A) and the scope stated in section 238F(1B); and (c) (d) (e) (f) to allow or decline to allow applicants to become signatories to the code in accordance with its assessments; and to monitor and investigate the extent to which signatory providers com- ply with the code— (i) (ii) following a process prescribed by the code; and in close collaboration with education quality assurance author- ities; and to issue to signatory providers notices under section 238FB; and to impose on signatory providers sanctions for breaches of the code and failure to comply with notices under section 238FB.
(3) The code administrator may allow an applicant to become a signatory to the code unconditionally, or subject to any conditions stated in writing to the appli- cant at the time the code administrator informs the applicant that the applicant is allowed to become a signatory to the code.

Section 238FA: inserted, on 1 July 2016, by section 27 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
238FB Code administrator may issue compliance notices (1) The code administrator may issue a compliance notice to a signatory provider requiring the signatory provider to do, or refrain from doing, a particular thing in relation to— (a) the signatory provider’s obligations as a signatory to the code; or 412 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18A s 238G (b) the signatory provider’s conditions of approval as a signatory to the code.
(2) A notice under subsection (1) may specify the manner in which a thing must be undone or the manner in which the consequences of a thing must be rectified.

(3) The notice must be in writing and must— (a) (b) (c) state the date on which it is issued; and if it requires the signatory provider to take any action, state a time on or before which, or a period within which, the signatory provider must take the action; and state the consequences or possible consequences of non-compliance with it.
(4) (5) The code administrator may publish the notice, or a summary of it, in a manner designed to give public notice of it.

The code administrator may, before the expiry of the time or period referred to in subsection (3)(b), extend the time or period, and in that case the time or period as extended becomes the time or period within or during which the no- tice must be complied with.

Section 238FB: inserted, on 1 July 2016, by section 27 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
238FC Signatory providers to comply with compliance notices (1) A signatory provider must comply with a notice under section 238FB (a com- pliance notice).

(2) If, in the code administrator’s opinion, the signatory provider does not comply with the compliance notice, the code administrator may (as the code adminis- trator sees fit) impose sanctions against the signatory provider under section 238G.
(3) The code administrator must not act under subsection (2) until the later of the following: (a) (b) 10 days after the date on which the compliance notice was issued: the expiry of any time or period of a kind referred to in section 238FB(3)(b).

(4) This section and section 238FB do not limit, or affect the generality of, section 238G.

Section 238FC: inserted, on 1 July 2016, by section 27 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
238G Sanctions (1) If satisfied that the signatory provider has breached the code or failed to com- ply with a notice under section 238FB, the code administrator may— 413 Part 18A s 238H Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) impose limitations on the signatory provider’s power to enrol inter- national students; or impose new, or amend or revoke any existing, conditions on the signato- ry provider’s approval as a code signatory.
(2) If satisfied that a signatory provider has not complied with a sanction imposed under subsection (1) or a notice under section 238FB, the code administrator may remove the signatory provider as a signatory to the code.

Section 238G: replaced, on 1 July 2016, by section 27 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
238H Export education levy (1) The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, in accordance with a recom- mendation of the Minister, make regulations imposing an export education levy on providers who receive tuition fees from international students enrolled with them.
(2) Without limiting subsection (1), regulations made under this section must— (a) (b) (c) (d) prescribe the amount, a method or methods for calculating the amount, or both, of export education levy payable by individual providers, and may prescribe different amounts, or different methods of calculating the amounts, payable by different classes of provider; and prescribe when the levy, or any part of the levy, is payable; and designate the agency that will administer the levy and, if that agency is the Ministry, the regulations may authorise the Ministry to delegate all or specified aspects of the levy’s collection and use to another body; and require that a provider supplies, on request by the agency responsible for the administration of the levy, information on student numbers or any other matter that is necessary to determine or verify the amount of levy payable by the provider.
(e) [Repealed] (3) The Minister must consult with providers before recommending that regula- tions be made under subsection (1) that prescribe or amend an export education levy.

(4) [Repealed] Section 238H: replaced, on 12 December 2002, by section 30 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 238H(2)(b): amended, on 30 August 2011, by section 36(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 238H(2)(d): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 51 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 238H(2)(e): repealed, on 31 August 2004, by section 3 of the Education (Export Education Levy) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 75).

414 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18A s 238I Section 238H(4): repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 36(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
238I Purpose and administration of export education levy (1) The purposes to which the funds of the levy may be put are as follows: (a) the development, promotion, and quality assurance of the export educa- tion sector, which may include (without limitation)— (i) professional and institutional development; and (ii) marketing; and (iii) (iv) (v) implementation of scholarship schemes; and research, and resource development; and support (financial or otherwise) of other bodies engaged in the de- velopment, promotion, or quality assurance of the export educa- tion sector: (ab) the making of payments as set out in subsections (1A) and (1B): (b) (ba) the administration and audit of the code: the funding of the operation of the International Student Contract Dis- pute Resolution Scheme provided for by section 238J: (c) the general administration of the levy and associated purposes.
(1A) Subsection (1B) applies if— (a) (b) (c) an international student is or was enrolled with a private training estab- lishment for a course of study or training; and at the time of the student’s enrolment the private training establishment held a current registration under Part 18; and the private training establishment has not, cannot, or will not provide, in whole or in part, the course of study or training.
(1B) If this subsection applies, the funds of the levy may be used for any of the fol- lowing: (a) to make payment to any person to ensure the reimbursement of the stu- dent, in whole or in part, for tuition fees or for any payment other than tuition fees made by or on behalf of that student to the private training establishment in respect of the student’s course of study or training if, and to the extent that,— (i) (ii) the private training establishment has not refunded the tuition fees or other payment; and the agency responsible for the administration of the levy approves the reimbursement of the student as necessary and appropriate in the circumstances: 415 Part 18A s 238I Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) with the approval of the Minister, to reimburse the Crown for any sum provided by the Crown and paid to any person to ensure the reimburse- ment of the student, in whole or in part, for tuition fees or for any pay- ment other than tuition fees made by or on behalf of that student to the private training establishment in respect of the student’s course of study or training if, and to the extent that,— (i) (ii) the private training establishment had not refunded the tuition fees or other payment; and the agency responsible for the administration of the levy approved the reimbursement of the student as necessary and appropriate in the circumstances: (c) with the approval of the Minister, to reimburse, in whole or in part, the agency responsible for the administration of the levy, or any Crown enti- ty, for— (i) (ii) costs incurred by that agency or Crown entity in placing the stu- dent with an alternative provider; or other costs incurred by that agency or Crown entity as a direct re- sult of the private training establishment not providing the course of study or training.
(2) The funds of the levy must be kept in a separate bank account that is used only for the purposes of the levy.

(3) As soon as practicable after 1 July in each year, the agency responsible for the administration of the levy must present to the Minister an annual report on the administration of the levy, which must include audited financial statements pre- pared in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice; and the Min- ister must present a copy of the report to the House of Representatives.
(4) The amount of levy payable by a provider under regulations made under this section is a debt due to the Crown and may be recovered in any court of com- petent jurisdiction.

(5) No later than 1 March 2006, the Minister must— (a) (b) (c) undertake, in consultation with providers, a review of the operation, ad- ministration, and effectiveness of the export education levy; and prepare a report on the findings of the review; and present a copy of the report to the House of Representatives.
Section 238I: inserted, on 12 December 2002, by section 30 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 238I(1)(ab): inserted, on 31 August 2004, by section 4(1) of the Education (Export Education Levy) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 75).

Section 238I(1)(ba): inserted, on 1 July 2016, by section 28 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Section 238I(1A): inserted, on 31 August 2004, by section 4(2) of the Education (Export Education Levy) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 75).

416 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 18A s 238K Section 238I(1B): inserted, on 31 August 2004, by section 4(2) of the Education (Export Education Levy) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 75).

238J International Student Contract Dispute Resolution Scheme (1) (2) (3) This section establishes the International Student Contract Dispute Resolution Scheme.
The purpose of the DRS is to resolve contractual and financial disputes be- tween international students (and former and prospective international stu- dents) and providers.

Every provider that enrols, intends to enrol, or has enrolled international stu- dents is subject to and must (in relation to any contractual or financial dispute with an international student or a former or prospective international student) comply with the rules of the DRS prescribed under section 238M.
(4) The Minister— (a) may, by notice in the Gazette, appoint a person or an agency to be re- sponsible for administering the DRS; and (b) must take reasonable steps to ensure that there is at all times a person appointed to be responsible for administering the DRS.
(5) A student claimant may lodge with the DRS operator for resolution under the DRS any contractual or financial dispute with a provider, but only if— (a) the provider has been given an opportunity to resolve the dispute, but the claimant is not satisfied with the process, the outcome, or both; or (b) the provider has failed to, or has refused to, try to resolve the dispute.
(6) The resolution of a dispute is binding on all parties to the dispute if— (a) (b) it is the outcome of an adjudication of the dispute by or on behalf of the DRS operator; or it is produced by a mediation undertaken by or on behalf of the DRS op- erator whose outcome the parties to the dispute have agreed will be bind- ing.
(7) The DRS operator— (a) may charge fees to a student claimant, the provider concerned, or both, according to the rules of the DRS prescribed under section 238M; but (b) (notwithstanding those rules) may in its absolute discretion partially or completely exempt any person, or persons of a particular description, from the payment of fees.

Section 238J: inserted, on 1 July 2016, by section 29 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
238K Cap of $200,000 on amount that can be required to be paid In resolving any dispute, the DRS operator— 417 Part 18A s 238L Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) must not require a provider to pay to a claimant in relation to any par- ticular claim any amount exceeding $200,000; but (b) may charge the provider fees in addition to any amount required to be paid.

Section 238K: inserted, on 1 July 2016, by section 29 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
238L District Court to enforce DRS (1) The District Court may,— (a) (b) on the application of the student claimant or the DRS operator, make an order requiring a provider to comply with the rules of the DRS or to give effect to any resolution that is binding under section 238J(6); or on the application of the provider or the DRS operator, make an order requiring a claimant to give effect to any resolution that is binding under section 238J(6).
(2) (3) If an order (or part of an order) requiring the provider to comply with the reso- lution requires the provider to pay any sum of money to any person, that order (or part) may be enforced as if it were a judgment by the District Court for the payment of that sum of money to that person.

If the District Court is satisfied that the terms of the resolution of a dispute by the DRS operator are manifestly unreasonable, the court may modify the reso- lution before giving effect to it.
(4) Subsection (3) overrides subsections (1) and (2) and section 238J(6).

Section 238L: inserted, on 1 July 2016, by section 29 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

238M Rules of International Student Contract Dispute Resolution Scheme The Governor-General may, by Order in Council made on the recommendation of the Minister, prescribe rules for the functioning and administration of the DRS.
The Minister must not recommend the making of an order without consulting any relevant bodies and sector representatives he or she thinks appropriate.

The rules may prescribe fees, or a means by which fees can be calculated or ascertained.

Section 238M: inserted, on 1 July 2016, by section 29 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
(1) (2) (3) 418 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 19 s 241 Part 19 Vice-Chancellors Committee Part 19: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 41 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

239 Definitions In this Part and Schedule 14, unless the context otherwise requires,— Committee means the New Zealand Vice-Chancellors Committee member means a member of the Committee.

Section 239: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 41 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
240 Establishment of Committee (1) A committee to be known as the New Zealand Vice-Chancellors Committee is established.

(2) (3) (4) (5) The Committee is the same body as the Vice-Chancellors Committee that was established immediately before the commencement of this section under sec- tion 46 of the Universities Act 1961 but shall be constituted in accordance with this section.

The Committee consists of the Vice-Chancellors of such of the institutions as are universities.
If an office of Vice-Chancellor of a university is vacant, the person for the time being acting in that office shall be deemed to be the Vice-Chancellor of that university for the purposes of this Act.

The Committee is a body corporate with perpetual succession and a common seal; and is capable of— (a) (b) (c) holding real and personal property; and suing and being sued; and otherwise doing and suffering all that bodies corporate may lawfully do and suffer.
(6) Sections 153 to 156 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 apply to the Committee as if it were a Crown entity within the meaning of that Act.

(7) Schedule 14 applies to the Committee.

Section 240: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 41 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 240(6): replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
241 Functions of Committee The functions of the Committee are— (a) to set up inter-university course approval and moderation procedures: 419 Part 19 s 242 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) to exercise in relation to universities in accordance with section 253A the powers of the Qualifications Authority under sections 249 to 251C, 254A(2)(b), and 255: (ba) to list university qualifications on the Qualifications Framework: (c) to grant scholarships to students enrolled or proposing to enrol at univer- sities out of money under its control on such terms as the Committee considers appropriate: (d) where another body has power to grant such scholarships— (i) (ii) (iii) to make recommendations to the person or authority having power to make appointments to that body as to the persons who should be appointed: if authorised to do so, to make appointments to that body: if requested by that body to do so, to advise that body on the grant of such scholarships: to make recommendations to the Qualifications Authority on criteria for entrance to universities for the purposes of the performance by that Au- thority of its functions under section 257: if requested by the councils of the universities to do so, to consider ap- plications by foreign students for enrolment at any of those universities and make recommendations to the councils in respect of those applica- tions: to liaise with the councils of institutions other than universities in respect of procedures for enrolling foreign students: to issue certificates relating to degrees and other academic qualifications and courses of, or examinations conducted by, the University of New Zealand as if that University had continued in existence and to charge such reasonable fees for the certificates as the Committee determines: (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) to perform any other functions conferred on it by this Act or any other enactment.
Section 241: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 41 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 241(b): replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 241(ba): inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
242 Powers of Committee The Committee has— (a) (b) the powers given to it by this Act or any other enactment; and all other powers reasonably necessary to enable it to perform its func- tions efficiently and effectively.

420 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 19 s 244 Section 242: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 41 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
243 Devolution of certain property (1) Upon the commencement of this section, all real and personal property that im- mediately before that commencement was vested in the University Grants Committee upon trust or as an endowment for any scholarship or any other pur- pose by virtue of section 52(1) of the Universities Act 1961 or otherwise is, by force of this subsection, vested in the Vice-Chancellors Committee for a like purpose.
(2) All real and personal property that, under any will or trust instrument would have vested in the University of New Zealand for any purpose after the com- mencement of this section if the University of New Zealand had continued in existence shall, unless the will or trust instrument expressly provides for the eventuality of the University of New Zealand not being in existence, vest in the Committee for a like purpose.
(3) All real and personal property that under any will or trust instrument would have vested in the University Grants Committee for any purpose after the com- mencement of this section if the University Grants Committee had continued in existence shall, unless the will or trust instrument expressly provides for the eventuality of the University Grants Committee not being in existence, vest in the Vice-Chancellors Committee for a like purpose.
(4) Where any land vests in the Committee under this section, the District Land Registrar for the land registration district in which the land is situated, on the deposit with him or her of such plans and documents as he or she requires, shall make such entries in the register, and generally do all such other things, as may be necessary to give full effect to the provisions of this section.
(5) The Committee may transfer any real or personal property that vests in the Committee under this section for a particular purpose to any university for a like purpose and, if any property is so transferred, no tax is payable in respect of the transaction.

Section 243: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 41 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 243(5): amended, on 20 May 1999, by section 7 of the Stamp Duty Abolition Act 1999 (1999 No 61).
244 Taxes and duties in relation to Vice-Chancellors Committee (1) For the purposes of the Acts specified in the Schedule of the Tax Administra- tion Act 1994 and any other enactment that imposes, or provides for the collec- tion of, a tax, duty, levy, or other charge— (a) the University Grants Committee and the Vice-Chancellors Committee shall be deemed to be the same person with effect on and from the date on which real and personal property of the University Grants Committee 421 Part 19 s 244 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) so vests in the Vice-Chancellors Committee pursuant to section 243(1); and in respect of the liability under any such enactment for, and the assess- ment, determination, or imposition of, taxes, duties, levies, or other charges accruing on and from the day on which real and personal proper- ty of the University Grants Committee so vests in the Vice-Chancellors Committee, all transactions entered into by, and acts of, the University Grants Committee in relation to that property before the vesting effected by section 243(1) shall be deemed to have been entered into by, or to be those of, the Vice-Chancellors Committee and to have been entered into or performed by the Vice-Chancellors Committee at the time when they were entered into or performed by the University Grants Committee.
(2) For the purposes of determining whether— (a) (b) (c) any taxpayer satisfies the requirements of section IA 5(2) of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any taxpayer is included in a group of companies or a wholly-owned group for the purposes of section IA 6 of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any debit arises to be recorded in a taxpayer’s imputation credit account under section OB 41 of the Income Tax Act 2007, or in a taxpayer’s FDP account under section OC 24 of that Act, or in a taxpayer’s branch equivalent tax account under section OE 15 of that Act,— shares held by the University Grants Committee in any company (whether di- rectly or through any 1 or more interposed companies) immediately before the vesting effected by section 243(1) shall, if the shares vest under that section in the Vice-Chancellors Committee, be treated as having been acquired by the Vice-Chancellors Committee at the time when they were acquired by the Uni- versity Grants Committee.
(3) The vesting of real and personal property of the University Grants Committee in the Vice-Chancellors Committee pursuant to section 243(1) shall not be treated as a supply of any goods or services for the purposes of the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985, or as a disposition of property for the purposes of the Estate and Gift Duties Act 1968 or as a conveyance for the purposes of the Stamp and Cheque Duties Act 1971.

(4) Nothing in subsection (2) or subsection (3) limits the generality of subsection (1).
Section 244: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 41 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 244(1): amended, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995– 96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 244(2)(a): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).
422 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 246 Section 244(2)(a): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).

Section 244(2)(b): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).
Section 244(2)(b): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).

Section 244(2)(c): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).
Section 244(2)(c): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
245 General saving of statutes, etc, of University of New Zealand All statutes, regulations, rulings, and decisions, and all other acts of authority, of the Senate of the University of New Zealand or any committee or board of that Senate or University or of the Chancellor or Vice-Chancellor or any officer of that University, so far as they were subsisting immediately before the com- mencement of this section by virtue of section 53(1) of the Universities Act 1961 and are capable of application to the Vice-Chancellors Committee, apply to that Committee except so far as they are repealed, replaced, or amended by any enactment, or by regulations, rulings, decisions, or other acts of authority of that Committee under powers conferred by this Act or any other enactment.
Section 245: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 41 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Part 20 New Zealand Qualifications Authority Part 20: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Interpretation Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
246 Interpretation In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— Authority means the Qualifications Authority chief executive means the chief executive of the Authority member means a member of the Authority relevant school means— (a) (b) a secondary school (as that term is defined in section 2(1)); or a composite school (as that term is defined in section 2(1)); or 423 Part 20 s 246A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ba) (c) (d) a partnership school kura hourua (as that term is defined in section 2(1)), other than a partnership school kura hourua that is only a primary part- nership school kura hourua (as that term is defined in section 2(1)); or a school that is registered under section 35A, but does not include any school registered under that section only as a primary school (as that term is defined in section 2(1)); or a special school (as that term is defined in section 2(2), except that a spe- cial school is not deemed to be a primary school for the purposes of this Part, despite the proviso to section 98(1) of the Education Act 1964) rules means rules made under section 253.
Section 246: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 246 relevant school paragraph (ba): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 32 of the Educa- tion Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Functions of Qualifications Authority Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
246A Functions of Authority (1) The Authority has the following functions: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) to oversee the setting of standards for qualifications in relevant schools and in tertiary education: to monitor and regularly review, and advise the Minister on, the stand- ards for qualifications in relevant schools and in tertiary education, either generally or in relation to a particular organisation (within the meaning of section 159B) or a particular programme or training scheme: to maintain mechanisms for the recognition of learning (for example, the recognition of learning through qualifications gained and standards met): to maintain the Qualifications Framework and Directory of Assessment Standards: to make rules, not inconsistent with this Act, under any provision of this Part that empowers the Authority to make rules: to ensure there are mechanisms in place to guarantee that relevant schools and tertiary education providers that provide programmes or training schemes that, in the view of the Authority, require national con- sistency have assessment and moderation procedures that are fair, equit- able, and consistent, and comply with the appropriate standards: (g) to assist overseas governments, and agencies of those governments, by— (i) (ii) conducting examinations and assessments: approving programmes and training schemes: 424 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 247 (iii) (iv) granting accreditations for the provision of approved programmes: assisting governments and agencies to develop and conduct exam- inations, and to develop and confer awards: to maintain effective liaison with overseas certifying and validating bod- ies, in order to recognise overseas educational and vocational qualifica- tions in New Zealand and to achieve recognition overseas of New Zea- land educational and vocational qualifications: to ensure that post-school educational and vocational qualifications maintain international comparability: to promote and monitor the delivery of inter-institutional programmes and training schemes: any other functions that are conferred on it by this Act or any other en- actment.
(h) (i) (j) (k) (2) The Authority may consult any persons, authorities, and bodies as it considers appropriate for the purposes of performing any of its functions.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 253 Section 246A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 246A(1)(f): amended, on 13 June 2013, by section 33 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
247 Certain functions of Authority in relation to entrance to universities (1) In addition to its other functions, the Authority has,— (a) (b) in relation to the rights of people who have not attained the age of 20 years to obtain entrance to universities, the function of establishing and maintaining by any means that it considers appropriate a common educa- tional standard as a prerequisite for entrance to a university, other than provisional entrance and entrance ad eundem statum; and the function of consulting the universities as to the criteria to be estab- lished for provisional entrance, or entrance ad eundem statum, to univer- sities.
(2) A person who is refused provisional entrance or entrance ad eundem statum to a university on grounds relating to the person’s educational qualifications may appeal to the Authority against the refusal.
(3) The Authority must consider the appeal and,— (a) if it is satisfied that the person meets the criteria established by the uni- versities, as mentioned in subsection (1)(b), must allow the appeal and direct the council of the university concerned to admit the person as a student and, where appropriate, to grant the person such status as the Au- thority determines; or (b) if it is not so satisfied, must dismiss the appeal.
425 Part 20 s 248 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (4) (5) The council of a university must comply with a direction given to it by the Au- thority under subsection (3)(a).

Before establishing standards for entrance to universities, the Authority must consult the council of each university and the Vice-Chancellors Committee.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 257 Section 247: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
New Zealand Qualifications Framework Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

248 New Zealand Qualifications Framework (1) The New Zealand Qualifications Framework— (a) (b) consists of all qualifications that have been approved and listed by the Authority in accordance with the rules made under section 253; and includes the rules relating to the Qualifications Framework made under that section.
(2) The Authority— (a) must list on the Qualifications Framework all qualifications that it has approved in accordance with the rules: (b) may, in accordance with the rules, amend, add to, remove, or alter the status of any qualification on the framework.

(3) If a qualification is removed from the Qualifications Framework,— (a) (b) any programme approval held by an institution in respect of the qualifi- cation lapses; and any accreditation granted to an institution in respect of the qualification lapses.
(4) To avoid doubt, qualifications includes university qualifications.

Section 248: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Directory of Assessment Standards Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
248A Directory of Assessment Standards (1) (2) In this section, institution includes institutions, government training establish- ments, registered establishments, relevant schools, and other bodies.

The Directory of Assessment Standards consists of all standards approved by the Authority for use by institutions as standards for the assessment of students.
(3) An application to have standards listed on the Directory— 426 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 249 (a) may only be made by an approved standard-setting body; and (b) must be made in accordance with the rules.

Section 248A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
248B Standard-setting bodies (1) An approved standard-setting body includes— (a) (b) (c) (d) an industry training organisation within the meaning of the Industry Training and Apprenticeships Act 1992; and the Ministry of Education; and the Authority; and any other body approved by the Authority under subsection (3).

(2) A body may apply, in accordance with the rules, to the Authority for approval as a standard-setting body.
(3) In deciding whether to approve a standard-setting body, the Authority must apply the criteria set out in the rules, and must be satisfied that the applicant is able to— (a) draft standards that meet the requirements in the rules; and (b) manage consistency across New Zealand in learning outcomes in the relevant subject areas; and (c) carry out national moderation of assessment of students.

Section 248B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 248B(1)(a): amended, on 23 April 2014, by section 23 of the Industry Training and Appren- ticeships Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 16).

Approval of programmes Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

249 Approval of programmes (1) In this section, institution includes any institution, government training estab- lishment, registered establishment, relevant school, industry training organisa- tion, or other body.
(2) An institution may apply to the Authority for approval of a programme.

(3) The Authority— (a) may grant or refuse to grant approval of the programme to the applicant; and (b) is required only to consider the programme as a whole; and (c) must give the applicant written notice of its decision to grant or refuse approval; and 427 Part 20 s 249A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (4) (5) (d) may grant approval without limitation as to time or for a specified period.
If 2 or more institutions have prepared a programme together, they may make a joint application for approval of the programme.
If the Authority considers that there may be grounds for withdrawing approval of a programme,— (a) (b) the Authority must give written notice to the institution concerned stat- ing the grounds on which the Authority is considering withdrawing ap- proval; and the Authority must give the institution a reasonable time (as specified in the notice) to make submissions on the matter; and (c) after considering those submissions, the Authority— (i) may withdraw approval if it considers there are reasonable grounds to do so; and (ii) must notify the institution of the withdrawal (if any) and the rea- sons for it.
(6) The Authority may withdraw approval of a programme at the written request of the institution concerned.

(7) This section— (a) (b) is subject to section 253A: does not limit the Authority’s power to withdraw an approval under sec- tion 255(7): (c) does not apply to secondary school qualifications.

Section 249: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
249A Conditions on programme approvals (1) Every programme approval is subject to the condition that the institution will at all times comply with the relevant rules, except to the extent that the Authority exempts the institution, by a condition on the approval, from compliance.

(2) When approving a programme, the Authority may impose conditions on the ap- proval that are specific to the programme or to a class of programmes.
(3) The Authority may at any time, with the agreement of the institution that holds the programme approval,— (a) (b) impose new conditions on the approval; or amend or revoke any existing conditions.
The Authority may, without the agreement of the institution, impose conditions on a programme approval, or amend or revoke any existing conditions, but only if the Authority has first— (4) 428 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 250 (a) (b) (c) given written notice to the institution of its intentions; and given the institution a reasonable opportunity to respond to the notice; and considered any submissions made by the institution in response to the notice.
(5) When conditions are imposed, amended, or revoked, the Authority must give notice in writing to the institution that holds the approval of the new, amended, or revoked conditions.

Section 249A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Accreditation to provide approved programmes Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
250 Accreditation to provide approved programmes (1) In this section, institution means an institution, government training establish- ment, registered establishment, or relevant school.

(2) An institution must not offer or provide all or part of an approved programme unless the institution is granted accreditation to provide the programme or part of the programme.

(3) An institution may apply to the Authority for a grant of accreditation to provide all or part of a programme.
(4) If the programme for which accreditation is sought incorporates standards from the Directory of Assessment Standards, the applicant must obtain consent to as- sess against those standards.

(5) The Authority— (a) may grant or refuse to grant accreditation to the institution to provide all or part of the programme; and (b) must give the institution written notice of its decision to grant or refuse accreditation; and (c) may grant accreditation without limitation as to time or for a specified period.
(6) This section— (a) (b) does not apply to any secondary school qualification or class of secon- dary school qualification that the Authority exempts, by notice in the Gazette, from the application of this section: does not apply to any workplace training components of any pro- grammes: (c) is subject to section 253A.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 261 429 Part 20 s 250A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 250: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

250A Conditions on accreditation (1) Every accreditation is subject to the condition that the institution will at all times comply with the relevant rules made under section 253, except to the ex- tent that the Authority exempts the institution, by a condition on the accredit- ation, from compliance.
(2) When granting accreditation to an institution to provide an approved pro- gramme, the Authority may impose conditions on the accreditation that are— (a) (b) specific to the programme or a particular class of programmes; or specific to the institution or a particular class of institutions.

(3) (4) The Authority may at any time, with the agreement of the accredited institu- tion, impose new conditions on the accreditation and may amend or revoke any existing conditions.
The Authority may, without the agreement of the institution, impose conditions on an accreditation, or amend or revoke any existing conditions, but only if the Authority has first— (a) (b) (c) given written notice to the institution of its intentions; and given the institution a reasonable opportunity to respond to the notice; and considered any submissions made by the institution in response to the notice.
(5) When conditions are imposed, amended, or revoked, the Authority must give notice in writing to the accredited institution of the new, amended, or revoked conditions.

Section 250A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 250A(1): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 30 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
250B Lapse of accreditation (1) An accreditation granted to an institution lapses when— (a) (b) (c) 12 months have passed since accreditation was granted and the institu- tion has not during that time provided all or part of the programme to which the accreditation relates; or 12 months have passed since the institution last provided all or part of the programme to which the accreditation relates; or the programme to which the accreditation relates ceases to be an ap- proved programme; or 430 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 251 (d) the status of the qualification to which the accreditation relates is discon- tinued on the Qualifications Framework.
(2) Despite subsection (1), the Authority may, if it considers that the circumstances so require, extend the time specified in subsection (1)(a) or (b).

(3) The Authority must give written notice of the lapse of an accreditation to the institution concerned.

Section 250B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
250C Withdrawal of accreditation (1) If the Authority considers that there may be grounds for withdrawing an ac- creditation from an institution, the Authority must give written notice to the in- stitution— (a) (b) setting out the grounds on which the Authority is considering withdraw- ing the accreditation; and giving the institution a reasonable period to make submissions on the matter.
(2) After that period, and having considered any submission made by the institu- tion, the Authority may, on any reasonable grounds, withdraw the accredit- ation.

(3) (4) (5) If the Authority withdraws an accreditation under subsection (2), it must give notice of the withdrawal, with reasons, to the institution concerned.

The Authority may withdraw an accreditation at the written request of the insti- tution concerned.
This section does not limit the Authority’s power to withdraw an accreditation under section 255(7).

Section 250C: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 250C(1)(a): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 31 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Training schemes and consents to assess against standards Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
251 Application for training scheme approval (1) In this section, institution includes any institution, government training estab- lishment, registered establishment, relevant school, industry training organisa- tion, or other body.

(2) An institution may apply to the Authority for a grant of approval to provide a training scheme under this section.
431 Part 20 s 251A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) An industry training organisation may apply jointly with an institution for a grant of approval to provide a training scheme if the scheme will be provided by the institution on behalf of the organisation.
(4) The Authority— (a) may grant or refuse to grant approval to the training scheme; and (b) must give the institution and any joint applicant written notice of its de- cision to grant or refuse approval; and (c) may grant approval without limitation as to time or for a specified period.
(5) If the training scheme incorporates assessment standards listed on the Directory of Assessment Standards, the Authority must not grant training scheme appro- val until the institution has obtained consent to assess against those standards.
(6) This section does not apply to— (a) any secondary school qualification or class of secondary school qualifi- cation that the Authority exempts, by notice in the Gazette, from the ap- plication of this section: (b) any workplace training component of any training scheme.

Section 251: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
251A Conditions of training scheme approval (1) (2) Every training scheme approval is subject to the condition that the institution will at all times comply with the relevant rules made under section 253 except to the extent that the Authority exempts the institution, by a condition on the approval, from compliance.
The Authority may impose conditions on a training scheme approval, and for that purpose, section 250A(2) to (5) apply as if each reference to accreditation were a reference to a training scheme approval under this section.

Section 251A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 251A(1): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 32 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
251B Withdrawal of training scheme approval (1) If the Authority considers that there may be grounds for withdrawing a training scheme approval from an institution, the Authority must give written notice to the institution— (a) (b) setting out the grounds on which the Authority is considering withdraw- ing the approval; and giving the institution a reasonable period to make submissions on the matter.
432 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 252 (2) After the period referred to in subsection (1)(b), and having considered any submission made by the institution, the Authority— (a) may, on reasonable grounds, withdraw the training scheme approval; and (b) must give notice of the withdrawal, with reasons, to the institution con- cerned.

(3) (4) This section does not limit the Authority’s power to withdraw training scheme approval under section 255(7).
The Authority may withdraw a training scheme approval at the written request of the institution concerned.

Section 251B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
251C Lapse of training scheme approval (1) A training scheme approval granted to an institution lapses when— (a) (b) 12 months have passed since approval was granted and the institution has not during that time provided all or part of the training scheme to which the approval relates; or 12 months have passed since the institution last provided all or part of the training scheme to which the approval relates.
(2) Despite subsection (1), the Authority may, if it considers that the circumstances so require, extend the time specified in subsection (1)(a) or (b).

(3) The Authority must give written notice of the lapse of a training scheme appro- val to the institution concerned.

Section 251C: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Consent to assess against standards Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

252 Consent to assess against standards (1) In this section, institution includes any institution, government training estab- lishment, registered establishment, relevant school, industry training organisa- tion, or other body.
(2) An institution that proposes to assess its students against standards listed on the Directory of Assessment Standards must apply to the Authority for a grant of consent to assess against those standards.

(3) (4) The Authority may grant or refuse consent to assess against those standards.

The Authority may withdraw a consent, but only after complying with subsec- tion (5).
(5) Before the Authority withdraws a consent, it must— 433 Part 20 s 252A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) (c) give written notice of its intentions to the institution; and give the institution a reasonable opportunity to respond to the notice; and consider any submissions made by the institution in response to the no- tice.

(6) The Authority must give the institution written notice of its decision under sub- section (4), and must give reasons for its decision.
(7) Despite subsection (4), the Authority may withdraw a consent at the written re- quest of the institution concerned.

Section 252: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
252A Conditions (1) (2) Every consent to assess against standards is subject to the condition that the in- stitution will at all times comply with the relevant rules made under section 253 except to the extent that the Authority exempts the institution, by a condi- tion on the consent, from compliance.
The Authority may impose conditions on a consent to assess against standards, and for that purpose section 250A(2) to (5) apply as if each reference to ac- creditation were a reference to a consent to assess against standards.

Section 252A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 252A(1): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 33(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Section 252A(1): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 33(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

252B When a consent expires or ceases to have effect (1) A consent to assess against standards expires— (a) when any training scheme approval or accreditation to which the consent relates is withdrawn, lapses, expires, or otherwise ceases to have effect: (b) when the status of all standards to which the consent relates is discon- tinued on the Directory of Assessment Standards.
(2) If the status of any standard to which the consent relates is discontinued on the Directory of Assessment Standards, the consent ceases to have effect in respect of that standard.

Section 252B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

434 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 253 Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Rules 253 Rules (1) The Authority may make rules— (a) prescribing the process for, and the information required in, an applica- tion for— (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) registration of a private training establishment: approval of a programme: approval of a training scheme: accreditation: consent to assess against standards: approval as a standard-setting body: (vii) the listing of a qualification on the Qualifications Framework: (viii) the listing of a standard on the Directory of Assessment Stand- ards: (b) prescribing criteria that the Authority must apply when considering— (i) (ii) each class of application described in paragraph (a); and different kinds of application within each class: (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) prescribing requirements that the applicant must meet in order to main- tain the registration, approval, accreditation, or consent granted by the Authority: prescribing the amount of, or the method for determining, the annual registration fee required under section 233C: prescribing the requirements for the protection of student fees that must be met by a private training establishment, any person to whom section 234D applies, any agent or person purporting to act as an agent for a stu- dent or private training establishment, and any independent trustee: prescribing matters relating to the general operation of the Qualifications Framework and the Directory of Assessment Standards: prescribing the quality assurance requirements that must be met by pro- viders of adult and community education: (ga)
 prescribing the amount of, or the method for determining, the annual registration fee required under section 11F of the Industry Training and Apprenticeships Act 1992, and when and how that fee is payable: (gb) prescribing quality assurance requirements for industry training organ- isations, including, without limitation, requirements relating to the mat- 435 Part 20 s 253 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) ters described in section 13B of the Industry Training and
 Apprentice- ships Act 1992: providing for the review, amendment, removal, or alteration of the status of qualifications and standards, including their components (including where amendments to titles occur, consequential amendments to pro- grammes of study or training titles, accreditations, and consents to assess against standards): providing any special requirements for NCEA and other secondary school qualifications or awards for the purposes of the Qualifications Framework: providing for the conduct of assessments and examinations relating to any qualifications or awards: prescribing the details for credits, cross credits, recognition of prior learning, and moderation: prescribing requirements for qualifications in respect of which the Au- thority is the qualifications developer: prescribing requirements relating to workplace training: providing for the following matters for the purposes of section 236A: (i) (ii) the kinds of enrolment and academic records that must be kept: the manner in which the records must be kept: (iii) the length of time for which the records must be kept: prescribing reporting requirements that institutions (within the meaning of section 254(1)) must comply with in relation to the student’s record of achievement that is maintained by the Qualifications Authority: for the purposes of rules made under paragraph (o), specifying the quali- fications or standards for which institutions are required to report the credits gained by students undertaking or who have undertaken study or training towards those qualifications or standards: (pa) prescribing the quality assurance requirements for tertiary education bodies in respect of whom the Authority grants approvals or consents under this Part: (pb) prescribing the types of programmes and training schemes that are ex- empt from the requirements specified in section 234E(1): (q) providing for any other matters contemplated by this Part or Part 18, necessary for their administration, or necessary for
 giving them full ef- fect.
(2) Without limiting any power to make rules under this section, restrictions on the use of standards may be included in any rules made under subsection (1)(b) that— 436 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 253 (a) (b) (c) prescribe criteria that the Authority must apply when considering appli- cations for approval of a programme leading to a degree or postgraduate qualification: prescribe criteria that the Authority must apply when considering appli- cations for the listing of a degree or postgraduate qualification on the Qualifications Framework: prescribe criteria that the Authority must apply when considering appli- cations for the listing of a standard on the Directory of Assessment Standards that relates to any programme leading to a degree or postgrad- uate qualification.
(3) Rules made under subsection (1)(n) may specify different requirements for dif- ferent qualifications.

(3A) Rules made under subsection (1)(pb) before the day 12 months after the day on which the Education Amendment Act 2015 received the Royal assent come in- to force— (a) on the day 12 months after the day on which the Education Amendment Act 2015 received the Royal assent; or (b) on a later day stated in those rules.
(4) Before making rules under this section that apply to a class of institutions, the Authority must consult,— (a) (b) (c) if the rules relate to universities, the Vice-Chancellors Committee; and if the rules relate to bodies that provide adult and community education, those bodies or a body that represents their interests; and if the rules relate to a class of institutions in respect of which there is a body whose function is to set up programme approval and moderation procedures, the representative bodies of those institutions, and any other bodies as the Authority considers appropriate.
(5) Any proposed rules under this section must be approved by the board of the Authority and the Minister before being made, but, if the rules relate to any matter described in subsection (1)(j), the approval of the Minister is not re- quired.

(6) Any rules made under this section must be— (a) published on an Internet site maintained by or on behalf of the Authori- ty; and (b) made available in printed form for purchase at a reasonable price on re- quest by members of the public.
(7) Rules made under this section are disallowable instruments, but not legislative instruments, for the purposes of the Legislation Act 2012 and must be presen- ted to the House of Representatives under section 41 of that Act.

437 Part 20 s 253A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 253: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 253(1)(ga): inserted, on 23 April 2014, by section 25 of the Industry Training and Appren- ticeships Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 16).

Section 253(1)(gb): inserted, on 23 April 2014, by section 25 of the Industry Training and Appren- ticeships Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 16).

Section 253(1)(pa): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 34(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Section 253(1)(pb): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 34(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 253(3A): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 34(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 253(7): replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 36 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Functions and powers of Authority in relation to universities Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
253A Exercise of certain powers of Authority by Vice-Chancellors Committee (1) (2) (3) (4) In this section, the powers of the Authority means the Authority’s powers under sections 249 to 251C, 254A(2)(b), and 255.

The powers of the Authority as far as they are applicable to universities may, subject to this section, be exercised by the Vice-Chancellors Committee in rela- tion to universities.

References to the Authority in the relevant sections must be read as references to the Vice-Chancellors Committee.
The Vice-Chancellors Committee in exercising the powers of the Authority must apply the relevant rules made under section 253.

The Vice-Chancellors Committee may charge fees to an institution for the grant of any approval or accreditation.

(5) The Vice-Chancellors Committee may— (a) (b) list or arrange for the listing of university qualifications on the Qualifica- tions Framework; and correct any errors or omissions in the listing of the qualification on the framework.
(6) To avoid doubt, this section does not limit the Authority’s power to delegate its functions or powers under the Crown Entities Act 2004.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 260 Section 253A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

438 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 253C Granting of awards Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
253B Powers of Authority in granting of awards (1) A person may apply to the Authority for its consent— (a) (b) to grant an award that is described as a degree or the description of which includes the word bachelor, master, or doctor: to grant an award that is described as a post-graduate qualification, for example, a post-graduate certificate or diploma.

The Authority may, in accordance with this section, grant or refuse its consent.
The Authority must not consent to the granting of an award of a kind referred to in subsection (1) unless it is satisfied that the award recognises the comple- tion of a programme of advanced learning that— (2) (3) (a) (b) is taught mainly by people engaged in research; and emphasises general principles and basic knowledge as the basis for self- directed work and learning.
(4) The Authority must not withhold its consent to the use of any particular term or the granting of an award that, or whose name or description, includes any par- ticular word, unless satisfied on reasonable grounds that it should do so.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 254 Section 253B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Use of certain terms in name of registered establishment Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

253C Minister may consent to registered establishments using certain terms in their names (1) In this section, institution means a college of education, a polytechnic, a spe- cialist college, a university, or a wananga.
(2) A registered establishment may apply to the Minister for consent to use the term university, college of education, polytechnic, or institute of technology to describe a registered establishment that is not an institution.
(3) Before deciding whether to grant consent under subsection (2), the Minister must— (a) take into account the characteristics of institutions as described in sec- tion 162(4); and (b) receive advice on the application from the Authority; and 439 Part 20 s 254 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (c) (d) be satisfied that consenting to the application is in the interests of the ter- tiary education system and the nation as a whole; and consult with the institutions, organisations representing institutions, and other relevant bodies that the Minister considers appropriate.
In deciding whether to grant consent under subsection (2) to the use of the term “institute of technology”, the relevant characteristics that the Minister must take into account are the characteristics of a polytechnic.

The Minister may audit any registered establishment that has been given con- sent to use one of the terms in subsection (2) for continuous compliance with the requirements for consent to use the term.
If the Minister is not satisfied that a registered establishment is continuing to comply with the requirements for consent to use the term for which consent has been given, the Minister may— (4) (5) (6) (a) (b) withdraw the consent; or suspend the consent for a specified period, at the expiry of which the Minister must either lift the suspension or withdraw the consent.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 264A Section 253C: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Fees Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

254 Fees (1) In this section, institution includes any institution, government training estab- lishment, registered establishment, relevant school, industry training organisa- tion, or other body.
(2) The Authority may— (a) charge fees to any person or institution for any of the following: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) programme approval: training scheme approval: accreditation: consent to assess against standards: approval to list qualifications on the Qualifications Framework: approval to list standards on the Directory of Assessment Stand- ards: (vii) registration of a private training establishment: (viii) approval to be a standard-setting body: (ix) consent to award a degree: 440 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 254A (x) (xi) consent for the use by a registered establishment of certain terms in its name: reporting credits for the purposes of rules made under section 253(1)(o) and (p): charge fees to any person or institution for any services provided by the Authority, including fees in relation to sitting for an examination con- ducted by the Authority, in relation to the making of any assessment by the Authority, or in relation to the granting to any person of an award certifying that the person had passed such an examination or been so as- sessed: charge fees to any person or institution for any quality assurance activ- ities undertaken by the Authority (including quality assurance activities undertaken in accordance with the Authority’s functions under the In- dustry Training and Apprenticeships Act 1992): charge an application fee to a body corporate applying for recognition as an industry training organisation under section 6 of the Industry Training and Apprenticeships Act 1992.
(b) (c) (d) (3) A fee may not be charged under subsection (2)(b) to a person who is a student at a relevant school unless the Minister has consented to the charging of the fee.

(4) All fees that are to be charged under subsection (2) must be— (a) published on an Internet site maintained by or on behalf of the Authori- ty; and (b) made available in printed form for purchase at a reasonable price on re- quest by members of the public.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 266 Section 254: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 254(2)(c): replaced, on 23 April 2014, by section 26 of the Industry Training and Apprentice- ships Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 16).

Section 254(2)(d): inserted, on 23 April 2014, by section 26 of the Industry Training and Apprentice- ships Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 16).
Enforcement powers of Authority Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

254A Power to obtain information (1) (2) In this section, institution includes any institution, government training estab- lishment, registered establishment, relevant school, industry training organisa- tion, or other body.
The chief executive or a person authorised by the chief executive may, subject to subsection (3),— 441 Part 20 s 254B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) by written notice to the Secretary, require the Secretary, within such period (being a reasonable period) as is specified in the notice, to supply to the Authority such information or documents relating to institutions, being information or documents in the possession of the Secretary, as are specified in the notice; and by written notice to the chief executive of an institution, require the chief executive, within such period (being a reasonable period) as is specified in the notice, to supply to the Authority such information or documents relating to the institution as are specified in the notice.
(3) The powers conferred by subsection (2) may be exercised only where the ob- taining of the information or documents is necessary for the purposes of the performance of the functions of the Authority.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 255 Section 254A: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

254B Chief executive [Repealed] Section 254B: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
254C Membership of Government Superannuation Fund [Repealed] Section 254C: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

254D Employees transferring from other government employment [Repealed] Section 254D: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

254E Taxation [Repealed] Section 254E: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
255 Compliance notices In this section, institution includes any institution, government training estab- lishment, registered establishment, relevant school, industry training organisa- tion, or other body.
The Authority may issue a compliance notice to an institution requiring the in- stitution to do, or refrain from doing, a particular thing in relation to— (a) the institution’s registration as a registered establishment; or (1) (2) 442 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 255 (b) (c) (d) (e) the institution’s programme approvals, training scheme approvals, or ac- creditation; or any consent that the institution has to assess against standards; or any quality assurance conditions on workplace training; or any notice issued under section 254A(2)(b).
(3) Every compliance notice must be in writing and must— (a) (b) (c) state the date on which it is issued; and state a time on or before which, or a period within which, the institution must comply with the notice; and state the consequences or possible consequences of non-compliance with the notice.

(4) The Authority may publish any compliance notice, or a summary of a compli- ance notice, in a manner designed to give public notice of the compliance no- tice.
(5) An institution that receives a compliance notice must comply with it within the time or during the period stated in the notice.

(6) The Authority may, before the expiry of the time or period referred to in sub- section (3)(b), extend that time or period, in which case the extended time or period is for all purposes the time or period within or during which the notice must be complied with.
(7) If the institution does not comply with the compliance notice, the Authority may immediately,— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) if the notice related to the registration of a registered establishment, can- cel the registration, or impose new conditions or amend or revoke any existing conditions on the registration; or if the notice related to a programme or training scheme approval, with- draw the approval, or impose new, or amend or revoke any existing, con- ditions on the approval; or if the notice related to an accreditation, withdraw the accreditation, or impose new conditions, or amend or revoke any existing conditions on the accreditation; or if the notice related to a consent to assess against standards, withdraw the consent, impose new conditions, or amend or revoke any existing conditions on the consent; or if the notice related to any quality assurance conditions on workplace training, withdraw the programme or training scheme approval to which the training relates, impose new conditions, or amend or revoke any existing conditions.
(8) The Authority may not do any of the things specified in subsection (7) until the later of— 443 Part 20 s 255A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) 10 days from the date of issue of the notice; or the expiry of the time or period referred to in subsection (3)(b).

(9) (10) If the Authority withdraws programme approval it must also withdraw any consent to assess against standards or any accreditation in respect of the pro- gramme approval.
If the Authority withdraws any training scheme approval it must also withdraw any consent to assess against standards in respect of the training scheme appro- val.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 255A Section 255: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 255(7)(d): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 35 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
255A Powers of entry and inspection (1) For the purpose of ensuring that a private training establishment (whether registered or not) and any agent of the establishment comply with the provi- sions of this Act, the rules, and any approval, consent, or other authorisation granted by the Authority, the chief executive may authorise any person to do, at any reasonable time, any 1 or more of the following things: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) enter and inspect any premises (other than a dwellinghouse) that are oc- cupied by the private training establishment or its agent: require any person to produce documents or information under the con- trol of the person: inspect, photocopy, print out, or copy any documents (whether held in electronic or paper form) produced under paragraph (b) or that the authorised person believes on reasonable grounds to belong to the estab- lishment: remove any document referred to in paragraph (c), whether in its original form or as an electronic or paper copy: require any employee or member of the establishment to make or pro- vide statements, in any form and manner that the authorised person spe- cifies: (f) inspect any education and training work and any related materials: (g) meet and talk with any person.
(2) A person authorised by the chief executive under subsection (1) must— (a) (b) provide evidence of his or her authorisation to the person in charge of the premises when the person first enters the premises, and at any later time, at the request of the person in charge; and give that person a list of all documents that have been removed (if any); and 444 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 256A (c) return any documents that have been removed unless to do so would prejudice any investigation.
(3) An authorisation under subsection (1) must be in writing and contain— (a) (b) (c) a reference to this section; and the full name of the person authorised; and a statement of the powers conferred on that person under this section.

(4) Every person commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not ex- ceeding $10,000, who obstructs, hinders, resists, or deceives any person exer- cising or attempting to exercise a power of entry conferred by subsection (1).
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 78A Section 255A: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 255A(4): inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Research 256 Research The Authority has power to carry out any research activities that it considers relevant to the performance of its functions.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 256 Section 256: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Provisions relating to continuation, constitution, and operation of New Zealand Qualifications Authority Heading: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
256A Continuation of New Zealand Qualifications Authority (1) (2) (3) (4) There continues to be a New Zealand Qualifications Authority, which is the same body as the body of that name existing immediately before the com- mencement of the Education Amendment Act 2011.

The Authority is a Crown entity for the purposes of section 7 of the Crown En- tities Act 2004.

The Crown Entities Act 2004 applies to the Authority except to the extent that this Act expressly provides otherwise.
The members of the Authority are the board for the purposes of the Crown En- tities Act 2004.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 248 445 Part 20 s 256B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 256A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

256B Constitution (1) (2) The Authority must consist of not fewer than 8 nor more than 10 members.
In appointing members, the Minister must consult such persons, authorities, and bodies as the Minister considers appropriate and must have regard to the interests of industry, the professions, and the authorities and bodies that are re- spectively responsible for providing compulsory and post-compulsory educa- tion.

(3) Subsection (2) does not limit section 29 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 249 Section 256B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

256C Chief executive The Authority must from time to time appoint a chief executive of the Authori- ty, on terms and conditions agreed by the Authority and the person appointed in accordance with section 117 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 254B Section 256C: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
256D Delegation by Authority (1) (2) The Authority must not delegate the power to appoint a chief executive.

Subsection (1) applies despite section 73 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

(3) A delegation under section 73 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 to the chief executive, if there is no chief executive for the time being, or if the chief executive is absent from duty, continues to have effect as if made to the person for the time being acting in place of the chief executive.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 251 Section 256D: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

256E Membership of Government Superannuation Fund Employment in the service of the Authority is Government service within the meaning of the Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956.

Section 256E: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
256F Child care allowances A member may be paid any allowances in respect of child care that the Author- ity determines.

446 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 20 s 260 Section 256F: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
256G Taxation (1) The Authority is deemed to be the agent of the Crown in respect of its property and the performance of its functions and is entitled accordingly to all the privil- eges the Crown enjoys in respect of exemption from taxation and the payment of fees or charges, and from other obligations.

(2) Subsection (1) does not exempt the Authority from— (a) the payment of goods and services tax under the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985; or (b) any obligation imposed by that Act.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 254E Section 256G: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

257 Entrance to universities [Repealed] Section 257: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

258 Approval of courses [Repealed] Section 258: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
258A Conditions on course approvals [Repealed] Section 258A: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

259 Accreditation to provide approved courses [Repealed] Section 259: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

259A Conditions on accreditation to provide approved courses [Repealed] Section 259A: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
260 Exercise of certain powers of Authority [Repealed] Section 260: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

447 Part 20 s 261 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 261 Only accredited institutions to provide approved courses [Repealed] Section 261: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
262 Notice [Repealed] Section 262: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

263 Awards for approved nationally recognised courses [Repealed] Section 263: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

264 Applications for consents by Authority [Repealed] Section 264: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
264A Minister may consent to registered establishments using certain terms in their names [Repealed] Section 264A: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

265 Examination and assessment [Repealed] Section 265: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

266 Fees [Repealed] Section 266: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
267 Saving of certain statutes, etc, of University of New Zealand [Repealed] Section 267: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

268 Powers of Minister [Repealed] Section 268: repealed, on 30 August 2011, by section 38 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
448 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 21 s 270 Part 21 Education New Zealand Part 21: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

269 Education New Zealand established (1) An organisation called Education New Zealand is established.

(2) (3) Education New Zealand is a Crown entity for the purposes of section 7 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.
The Crown Entities Act 2004 applies to Education New Zealand except to the extent that this Act expressly provides otherwise.

Section 269: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

269A Interpretation In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires, board means the board of Education New Zealand.

Section 269A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
270 Functions (1) In performing its functions under this Act or any other enactment, Education New Zealand must give effect to the Government’s policy on international edu- cation.
(2) The functions of Education New Zealand are— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) to deliver strategies, programmes, and activities for promoting, together with providers and other government agencies, New Zealand education overseas; and to promote New Zealand as an educational destination for international students; and to promote the provision of New Zealand education and training services overseas; and to manage, in collaboration with other government agencies, activities undertaken by representatives appointed to act on behalf of the New Zealand Government in relation to international education; and to carry out research on international education markets and marketing strategies; and to administer any international programmes or activities that are consis- tent with the Government’s policy on international education; and to provide information, advice, and assistance to providers on strategies to promote industry co-ordination and professional development; and 449 Part 21 s 271 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (h) (i) (j) (k) to provide information to international students about living and study- ing in New Zealand; and to work with other agencies to ensure that international students are ad- equately supported while living and studying in New Zealand; and to foster collaborative networks with former international students; and to perform any other function directed by the Minister under subsection (3).
(3) (4) The Minister may direct Education New Zealand to perform any function that the Minister considers consistent with the Government’s policy on international education.

In this section, providers means any organisation that provides education, training, or education-related services.

Section 270: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
271 International education strategy (1) The Minister may, from time to time, issue an international education strategy that sets out— (a) (b) the Government’s long-term strategic direction for international educa- tion; and the Government’s current and medium-term priorities for international education.
(2) Before issuing the Government’s international education strategy, the Minister must consult with organisations or people that, in the Minister’s opinion, have a substantial interest in international education and ought to be consulted.

Section 271: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
272 Membership of board of Education New Zealand (1) The board of Education New Zealand consists of at least 5 members and no more than 7 members appointed by the Minister under section 28 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.
(2) Before appointing any member to the board, the Minister must consult with— (a) (b) the bodies that represent the organisations involved in the provision of international education; and any organisations or people that, in the Minister’s opinion, have a sub- stantial interest in the board’s operations.

Section 272: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
272A Special advisers to the board (1) The Minister may appoint as special advisers to the board— 450 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) Education Act 1989 Part 21 s 272B the Secretary for Education; and the chief executive of the department responsible for the administration of the Immigration Act 2009; and (c) any other person as the Minister determines.

(2) The function of a special adviser is to assist the board to align its strategies and activities with government policy.
(3) A special adviser may attend any meeting of the board or any board commit- tees but may not vote.

(4) The board (including any board committee) must give the special advisers suf- ficient notice of its meetings and copies of all documents and materials to be considered at each meeting.
(5) A special adviser may delegate to any person his or her functions and powers conferred by this section, and the delegate may exercise those functions and powers in the same manner and with the same effect as if they had been con- ferred directly by this section and not by delegation.

(6) Every person purporting to act under a delegation under subsection (5) is, in the absence of proof to the contrary, presumed to be acting in accordance with the terms of the delegation.
Section 272A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

272B International education stakeholder advisory committee (1) (2) (3) The Minister may establish a stakeholder advisory committee to provide expert advice to the board on matters relating to the exercise of its functions.

The board must consider any advice it receives from the committee.
The members of the committee must be appointed by the Minister, on terms and conditions that the Minister determines, by written notice to each member.

(4) When appointing members of the committee, the Minister must ensure, as far as practicable, that— (a) (b) the committee’s membership is broadly representative of the internation- al education industry; and the members collectively have sufficient experience and knowledge of the international education industry to give appropriate advice to the board.
The Minister may give terms of reference on the topics or subject areas on which the committee may advise the board.

The committee must comply with any terms of reference given by the Minister.

The committee may determine its own procedure.

Section 272B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
(5) (6) (7) 451 Part 21 s 273 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 273 Chief executive (1) The board— (a) must appoint a chief executive of Education New Zealand; and (b) must act independently when appointing the chief executive; and (c) may not delegate its duty under paragraph (a).

(2) The chief executive must not be a member of the board.

Section 273: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
273A Responsibilities of chief executive The chief executive is responsible for— (a) (b) the effective and efficient management and administration of Education New Zealand; and the achievement of outcomes identified in the statement of intent of Edu- cation New Zealand.

Section 273A: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
273B Superannuation (1) Any person who, immediately before becoming an employee of Education New Zealand, is a contributor to the Government Superannuation Fund under Part 2 or 2A of the Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956 is deemed, for the purpose of that Act, to be employed in the Government service so long as he or she continues to be an employee of Education New Zealand.
(2) (3) (4) The Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956 applies to the person in all re- spects as if the person’s service as an employee of Education New Zealand were Government service.

Subsection (1) does not entitle a person to become a contributor to the Govern- ment Superannuation Fund if the person has ceased to be a contributor.

For the purpose of applying the Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956, the chief executive of Education New Zealand is the controlling authority.
Section 273B: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

273C Contents of documents [Repealed] Section 273C: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 41 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

452 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 21 s 274A 273D Amendments to documents [Repealed] Section 273D: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 41 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
273E Revocation of documents [Repealed] Section 273E: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 41 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

273F Board to comply with document of accountability [Repealed] Section 273F: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 41 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
273G Non-compliance with document [Repealed] Section 273G: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 41 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

273H Minister may dismiss Board where non-compliance not rectified [Repealed] Section 273H: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 41 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
273I Minister to publish certain documents and directions [Repealed] Section 273I: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 41 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

274 Application of Part 2 of Commerce Act 1986 (1) For the purposes of section 43 of the Commerce Act 1986, the Governor-Gen- eral may, by Order in Council, specifically authorise any act, matter, or thing, or kind of act, matter or thing, to be done or omitted to be done by Education New Zealand.
(2) Part 2 of the Commerce Act 1986 does not apply to any act, matter, or thing, or kind of act, matter, or thing that is specifically authorised under subsection (1).

Section 274: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
274A Transfer of Ministry employees to Education New Zealand (1) The chief executive of the Ministry of Education must identify the employees of the Ministry— (a) whose duties are overall more closely connected with the functions of Education New Zealand than with the Ministry; and 453 Part 21 s 274B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) whose positions will, as a result of the establishment of Education New Zealand, cease to exist within the Ministry.
(2) An employee who is identified under subsection (1) must be offered equivalent employment by Education New Zealand, being employment that is— (a) (b) (c) (d) in substantially the same position; and in the same general locality; and on terms and conditions that are no less favourable than those applying to the employee immediately before the date the offer of employment is made to that employee; and on terms that treat the period of service with the Ministry of Education (and every other period of service recognised by the Ministry of Educa- tion as continuous service) as if it were continuous service with Educa- tion New Zealand.
(3) The employee is not entitled to receive any payment or other benefit on the ground that the position held by the person in the Ministry of Education has ceased to exist if— (a) (b) the employee’s position ceases to exist because the duties of the position are more closely connected with the functions of Education New Zea- land; and the employee is offered employment in an equivalent position in Educa- tion New Zealand (whether or not the employee accepts the offer).
(4) This section overrides any provision to the contrary in Part 6A of the Employ- ment Relations Act 2000.

Section 274A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
274B No compensation for technical redundancy of employees of Education New Zealand Trust (1) An employee of Education New Zealand Trust is not entitled to receive any payment or other benefit on the ground that the position held by the person in the Trust has ceased to exist if the employee’s position ceases to exist because the duties of the position are more closely connected with the functions of Edu- cation New Zealand, and— (a) (b) the employee is offered employment in an equivalent position in Educa- tion New Zealand (whether or not the employee accepts the offer); or the employee is offered and accepts employment in Education New Zea- land.
(2) In subsection (1)(a), employment in an equivalent position means employ- ment that is— (a) (b) in substantially the same position; and in the same general locality; and 454 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 22 s 280 (c) (d) on terms and conditions that are no less favourable than those applying to the employee immediately before the date the offer of employment is made to that employee; and on terms that treat the period of service with Education New Zealand Trust (and every other period of service recognised by Education New Zealand Trust as continuous service) as if it were continuous service with Education New Zealand.
Section 274B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

275 Power of Secretary to obtain information [Repealed] Section 275: repealed, on 25 June 1993, by section 19 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

276 Powers of Board [Repealed] Section 276: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 41 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
277 Transitional provisions relating to Education and Training Support Agency [Repealed] Section 277: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 41 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Part 22 Careers New Zealand Part 22: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

278 Interpretation [Repealed] Section 278: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
279 Careers New Zealand is service for purposes of this Part [Repealed] Section 279: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

280 Functions of Service [Repealed] Section 280: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
455 Part 22 s 281 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 281 Continuation of Board [Repealed] Section 281: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

282 Duties of Board [Repealed] Section 282: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

283 Charter of Service [Repealed] Section 283: repealed, on 25 June 1993, by section 23 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).
283A Minister may require Board to negotiate document of accountability [Repealed] Section 283A: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

283B Minister may prepare document where no agreement reached [Repealed] Section 283B: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
283C Contents of statement of intent [Repealed] Section 283C: repealed, on 1 July 2014, by section 72 of the Crown Entities Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 51).

283D Amendments to documents [Repealed] Section 283D: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

283E Revocation of documents [Repealed] Section 283E: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
283F Board to comply with document of accountability [Repealed] Section 283F: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

456 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 22 s 286C 283G Non-compliance with document [Repealed] Section 283G: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
283H Minister may dismiss Board where non-compliance not rectified [Repealed] Section 283H: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

283I Minister to publish certain documents and directions [Repealed] Section 283I: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
284 Communication of government policy to the Board [Repealed] Section 284: repealed, on 25 June 1993, by section 23 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

285 Power of Secretary to obtain information [Repealed] Section 285: repealed, on 25 June 1993, by section 23 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

286 Powers of Board [Repealed] Section 286: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
286A Child care allowances [Repealed] Section 286A: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

286B Chief executive [Repealed] Section 286B: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

286C Membership of Government Superannuation Fund [Repealed] Section 286C: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
457 Part 22 s 286D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 286D Employees transferring from Ministry and education boards [Repealed] Section 286D: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

286E Board may not delegate power to appoint general manager [Repealed] Section 286E: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
286F Delegations to general manager [Repealed] Section 286F: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

286G Taxation [Repealed] Section 286G: repealed, on 1 July 2017, by section 136 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Part 23 Tertiary Research Board [Repealed] Part 23: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 45(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
287 Definitions [Repealed] Section 287: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 45(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

288 Establishment of Board [Repealed] Section 288: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 45(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

289 Constitution of Board [Repealed] Section 289: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 45(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
290 Functions of Board [Repealed] Section 290: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 45(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

458 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 291 Powers of Board [Repealed] Education Act 1989 Part 24 s 292 Section 291: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 45(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Part 24 Miscellaneous provisions Part 24: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 46 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
292 Offences relating to use of certain terms (1) A person commits an offence who— (a) uses the term university to describe an educational establishment or fa- cility unless the educational establishment and facility— (i) (ii) is a university; or is a registered establishment that has the Minister’s consent under section 253C to use the term; or (iii) was a university but, despite being incorporated under section 164(4) into another institution, retains the characteristics of a uni- versity as set out in section 162(4)(a) and (b)(iii): (b) uses the term college of education to describe an educational establish- ment or facility unless the educational establishment or facility— (i) (ii) is a college of education; or is a registered establishment that has the Minister’s consent under section 253C to use the term; or (iii) was a college of education but, despite being incorporated under section 164(4) into another institution, retains the characteristics of a college of education as set out in section 162(4)(b)(i): (c) uses the term polytechnic to describe an educational establishment or fa- cility unless the educational establishment or facility— (i) (ii) is a polytechnic or institute of technology; or is a registered establishment that has the Minister’s consent under section 253C to use the term; or (iii) was a polytechnic or institute of technology but, despite being in- corporated under section 164(4) into another institution, retains the characteristics of a polytechnic as set out in section 162(4)(b)(ii):
 (d) uses the term institute of technology to describe an educational establish- ment or facility unless the educational establishment or facility— (i) is an institute of technology or a polytechnic; or 459 Part 24 s 292A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ii) is a registered establishment that has the Minister’s permission under section 253C to use the term; or (iii) was an institute of technology or a polytechnic but, despite being incorporated under section 164(4) into another institution, retains the characteristics of a polytechnic as set out in section 162(4)(b)(ii).
(2) A person (other than a university) commits an offence who grants or purports to grant an award that is described as a degree, or the description of which in- cludes the word bachelor, master, doctor, or postgraduate, unless— (a) (b) the person has the consent of the Qualifications Authority; or as provided by section 192(11).
(3) A person commits an offence who, without the consent of the Qualifications Authority, grants or purports to grant an award which, or the name or descrip- tion of which, includes the word national or the words New Zealand.

(4) A person who commits an offence against this section is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding $10,000.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 292 Section 292: replaced, on 30 August 2011, by section 42 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 292(4): amended, on 4 October 2013, by regulation 3(1) of the Criminal Procedure (Conse- quential Amendments) Regulations 2013 (SR 2013/409).
292A Offences relating to false representations (1) A person commits an offence who falsely represents, expressly or by implica- tion, that— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) a qualification is listed on the Qualifications Framework; or a programme is an approved programme; or a training scheme is an approved training scheme; or a body is a registered establishment; or a programme or training scheme provided by a body— (i) (ii) is an approved programme or training scheme; or leads to a qualification listed on the Qualifications Framework; or a body has accreditation to provide an approved programme or training scheme; or a body is providing or purports to provide an approved training scheme; or a body is providing or purports to provide an approved programme; or a body has consent to assess against standards; or a standard is on the Directory of Assessment Standards; or 460 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 24 s 292B (k) the person is an agent of an institution (as that term is defined in section 249(1)) when the person is not.
(2) A person who commits an offence against this section is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding $10,000.

Section 292A: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 42 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 292A(2): amended, on 4 October 2013, by regulation 3(1) of the Criminal Procedure (Conse- quential Amendments) Regulations 2013 (SR 2013/409).
292B Liability of body corporate and directors in respect of false representations (1) If, in proceedings in respect of conduct engaged in by a body corporate, being conduct in relation to which section 292, 292A, 292C, 292D, 292E, 292F, or 292G applies, it is necessary to establish the state of mind of the body corpo- rate, it is sufficient to show that a director, an employee, or an agent of the body corporate, acting within the scope of that person’s actual or apparent au- thority, had that state of mind.
(2) For the purpose of section 292, 292A, 292C, 292D, 292E, 292F, or 292G, any conduct engaged in on behalf of a body corporate— (a) (b) by a director, an employee, or an agent of the body corporate, acting within the scope of that person’s actual or apparent authority; or by any other person at the direction or with the consent or agreement (whether express or implied) of a director, an employee, or an agent of the body corporate, given within the scope of the actual or apparent au- thority of the director, employee or agent,— is deemed to have been engaged in also by the body corporate.
(3) If a body corporate is convicted of an offence under section 292, 292A, 292C, 292D, 292E, 292F, or 292G, any director of the body corporate, and, if the body corporate is a private training establishment, any governing member of the establishment, is to be treated as having committed the same offence, if— (a) (b) the director or governing member approved of the act that constituted the offence; or the director or governing member knew the offence was to be or was be- ing committed and failed to take all reasonable steps to prevent it.
(4) A reference in this section to the state of mind of a person includes a reference to the knowledge, intention, opinion, belief or purpose of the person and the person’s reasons for that intention, opinion, belief, or purpose.

(5) In this section, governing member has the meaning given to it in section 232.

Compare: 1986 No 121 s 45(1), (2), (5) Section 292B: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 42 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
461 Part 24 s 292C Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 292B(1): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 37(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 292B(2): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 37(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 292B(3): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 37(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
292C Offence to issue false qualifications and falsify records (1) A person commits an offence who knowingly or recklessly issues an award that falsely represents, expressly or by implication, that a person has achieved a qualification listed on the Qualifications Framework.

(2) A person commits an offence who receives an award knowing that the award falsely represents, expressly or by implication, that he or she has achieved a qualification listed on the Qualifications Framework.
(3) A person commits an offence— (a) who enters or changes results on a student’s record of achievement, knowing that the results or changes have the effect of falsifying the stu- dent’s record: (b) who, without reasonable excuse or lawful authority, causes entries or changes to be made on a student’s record that have the effect of falsify- ing the student’s record.

(4) A person who commits an offence against this section is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding $10,000.
Section 292C: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 42 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

Section 292C(1): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 38(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 292C(2): amended, on 13 February 2015, by section 38(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 292C(4): amended, on 4 October 2013, by regulation 3(1) of the Criminal Procedure (Conse- quential Amendments) Regulations 2013 (SR 2013/409).
292D Offence to fail to comply with section 236A (student records) (1) A private training establishment commits an offence that fails, without reason- able excuse, to comply with the requirements of section 236A.

(2) A private training establishment that commits an offence against this section is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding $10,000.

Section 292D: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 42 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 292D(2): amended, on 4 October 2013, by regulation 3(1) of the Criminal Procedure (Conse- quential Amendments) Regulations 2013 (SR 2013/409).

462 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 24 s 292F 292E Offence to provide or advertise cheating services (1) A person commits an offence if the person provides any service specified in subsection (4) with the intention of giving a student an unfair advantage over other students.
(2) A person commits an offence if the person advertises any service described in subsection (4) knowing that the service has or would have the effect of giving a student an unfair advantage over other students.

(3) A person commits an offence who, without reasonable excuse, publishes an ad- vertisement for any service described in subsection (4).
(4) The services referred to in subsections (1) to (3) are as follows: (a) (b) (c) (d) completing an assignment or any other work that a student is required to complete as part of a programme or training scheme: providing or arranging the provision of an assignment that a student is required to complete as part of a programme or training scheme: providing or arranging the provision of answers for an examination that a student is required to sit as part of a programme or training scheme: sitting an examination that a student is required to sit as part of a pro- gramme or training scheme or providing another person to sit the exam in place of the student.
(5) A person who commits an offence against this section is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding $10,000.

(6) In this section,— programme has the meaning given to it in section 159(1) student means a student of a programme or training scheme training scheme has the meaning given to it in section 159(1).

Section 292E: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 42 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 292E(5): amended, on 4 October 2013, by regulation 3(1) of the Criminal Procedure (Conse- quential Amendments) Regulations 2013 (SR 2013/409).

292F Offences relating to enrolment of international students and registration of private training establishments (1) Where the Council of an institution contravenes section 224(7), the institution commits an offence.

(2) A private training establishment that contravenes section 232A(1), 232A(2), or 232C commits an offence.
(3) A body that commits an offence against this section is liable, on conviction, to a fine not exceeding $10,000.

Section 292F: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 42 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).

463 Part 24 s 292G Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 292F(3): amended, on 4 October 2013, by regulation 3(1) of the Criminal Procedure (Conse- quential Amendments) Regulations 2013 (SR 2013/409).
292G Offence to contravene requirements in section 234E relating to student fees (1) A private training establishment that contravenes section 234E(1) commits an offence.

(2) A person who contravenes section 234E(2) commits an offence.

(3) A private training establishment or person that commits an offence against this section is liable, on conviction, to a fine not exceeding $10,000.

Section 292G: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 42 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
Section 292G(3): amended, on 4 October 2013, by regulation 3(1) of the Criminal Procedure (Conse- quential Amendments) Regulations 2013 (SR 2013/409).
292H Injunctions and orders of High Court (1) If a person has engaged, is engaging, or proposes to engage, in conduct that contravenes section 224(7) or any of sections 292 to 292F, the High Court may, on application by the Qualifications Authority, grant an injunction or make any appropriate order— (a) (b) restraining the person from engaging in that conduct; or for the purpose of ensuring that the person does not engage in that con- duct.
(2) The court may grant an injunction or make an order under subsection (1) on any terms that it considers appropriate.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 292(12) Section 292H: inserted, on 30 August 2011, by section 42 of the Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66).
293 Transitional provisions consequential on repeal of Adult Education Act 1963 (1) Upon the commencement of this section,— (a) all real and personal property that, immediately before that commence- ment, was vested in the National Council of Adult Education that was constituted under the Adult Education Act 1963 is, by force of this sub- section, vested in the trustees from time to time of the trust known as the National Resource Centre for Adult Education and Community Learning subject to all charges, encumbrances, estates, and interests, and the pro- visions of any enactment, affecting that property; and (b) the Minister becomes, by force of this subsection, liable to pay and dis- charge all the debts, liabilities, and obligations of that Council that exis- ted immediately before that commencement.
464 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 24 s 294 (2) The District Land Registrar for the Wellington land registration district shall make such entries in the register, and generally do all such other things, as may be necessary to give full effect to the provisions of this section in relation to the land at 192 Tinakori Road, Wellington, contained in Register Book Volume 41 Folio 132.

Section 293: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 46 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
294 Taxes and duties in relation to property of former National Council of Adult Education (1) For the purposes of the Acts specified in the Schedule of the Tax Administra- tion Act 1994 and any other enactment that imposes, or provides for the collec- tion of, a tax, duty, levy, or other charge— (a) (b) the National Council of Adult Education referred to in section 293(1)(a) (in this section referred to as the National Council) and the trustees re- ferred to in that section (in this section referred to as the trustees) shall be deemed to be the same person with effect on and from the date on which the real and personal property of the National Council vests in the trustees pursuant to that section; and in respect of the liability under any such enactment for, and the assess- ment, determination, or imposition of, taxes, duties, levies, or other charges accruing on and from the day on which the real and personal property of the National Council so vests in the trustees, all transactions entered into by, and acts of, the National Council before the vesting ef- fected by section 293(1)(a) shall be deemed to have been entered into by, or to be those of, the trustees and to have been entered into or performed by the trustees at the time when they were entered into or performed by the National Council.
(2) For the purposes of determining whether— (a) (b) (c) any taxpayer satisfies the requirements of section IA 5(2) of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any taxpayer is included in a group of companies or a wholly-owned group for the purposes of section IA 6 of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any debit arises to be recorded in a taxpayer’s imputation credit account under section OB 41 of the Income Tax Act 2007, or in a taxpayer’s FDP account under section OC 24 of that Act, or in a taxpayer’s branch equivalent tax account under section OE 15 of that Act,— shares held by the National Council in any company (whether directly or through any 1 or more interposed companies) immediately before the vesting effected by section 293(1)(a) shall be treated as having been acquired by the trustees at the time when they were acquired by the National Council.
465 Part 24 s 295 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) The vesting of all the real and personal property of the National Council in the trustees pursuant to section 293(1)(a) shall not be treated as a supply of any goods or services for the purposes of the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985, or as a disposition of property for the purposes of the Estate and Gift Duties Act 1968 or as a conveyance for the purposes of the Stamp and Cheque Duties Act 1971.
(4) Nothing in subsection (2) or subsection (3) limits the generality of subsection (1).

Section 294: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 46 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 294(1): amended, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995– 96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).
Section 294(2)(a): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 294(2)(a): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
Section 294(2)(b): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 294(2)(b): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
Section 294(2)(c): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 294(2)(c): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
295 Transitional provisions consequential on repeal of Trades Certification Act 1966 (1) In this section,— Authority means the Qualifications Authority Board means the New Zealand Trades Certification Board that was constituted under the Trades Certification Act 1966.
(2) Upon the commencement of this section,— (a) (b) all real and personal property that, immediately before that commence- ment, was vested in the Board is, by force of this subsection, vested in the Authority subject to all charges, encumbrances, estates, and interests, and the provisions of any enactment, affecting that property; and the Authority becomes, by force of this subsection, liable to pay and dis- charge all the debts, liabilities and obligations of the Board that existed immediately before that commencement.
(3) Where any land vests in the Authority under subsection (2), the District Land Registrar for the land registration district in which the land is situated, on the 466 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 24 s 295 deposit with him or her of such plans and documents as he or she may require, shall make such entries in the register, and generally do all such other things, as may be necessary to give full effect to the provisions of that subsection.
(4) Any contract or other instrument (other than a contract of, or instrument relat- ing to, employment) subsisting, or any proceeding pending, immediately before the commencement of this section to which the Board was a party has effect after that commencement as if— (a) (b) the Authority is substituted for the Board as a party to the contract, other instrument, or proceeding; and any reference in the contract or other instrument, or in a pleading, affida- vit or other document in the proceeding, to the Board in its capacity as a party to the contract, other instrument or pleading is (except in relation to matters that occurred before that commencement) a reference to the Authority.
(5) A person who was an officer or employee of the Board immediately before the commencement of this section and becomes an employee of the Authority by virtue of clause 9(1) of Schedule 15 shall be employed by the Authority on the same terms and conditions as those on which the person was employed imme- diately before that commencement until the person’s employment terminates or is terminated in accordance with those terms and conditions, but nothing in this section prevents the variation of those terms and conditions in the same way as the terms and conditions of other employees may be varied.
(6) All regulations, rulings, decisions, and other acts of authority of the Board, so far as they were subsisting immediately before the commencement of this sec- tion, continue in force as if they were regulations, rulings, decisions, and other acts of authority, respectively, of the Authority.
(7) Notwithstanding the repeal of the Trades Certification Act 1966,— (a) (b) subsections (2) to (4) of section 19 of that Act continue to apply in rela- tion to each financial year in respect of which those subsections had not been complied with before the commencement of this section but so apply as if the period that commenced on 1 April 1990 and ended imme- diately before that commencement was a financial year; and the Board continues in existence for the purpose only of complying with section 19 of that Act as that section applies by virtue of paragraph (a) of this subsection.
(8) The Authority shall give to the Board any assistance that the Board requires for the purpose of complying with section 19 of the Trades Certification Act 1966 as that section applies by virtue of subsection (7)(a) of this section and is re- sponsible for paying any expenses incurred by the Board (including remuner- ation and expenses of members of the Board) in so complying.

Section 295: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 46 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
467 Part 24 s 296 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 296 Taxes and duties in relation to property of former New Zealand Trades Certification Board (1) For the purposes of the Acts specified in the Schedule of the Tax Administra- tion Act 1994 and any other enactment that imposes, or provides for the collec- tion of, a tax, duty, levy, or other charge— (a) (b) the Board referred to in section 295(2)(a) (in this section referred to as the Board) and the Qualifications Authority shall be deemed to be the same person with effect on and from the date on which the real and per- sonal property of the Board vests in that Authority pursuant to that sec- tion; and in respect of the liability under any such enactment for, and the assess- ment, determination, or imposition of, taxes, duties, levies, or other charges accruing on and from the day on which the real and personal property of the Board so vests in the Qualifications Authority, all trans- actions entered into by, and acts of, the Board before the vesting effected by section 295(2)(a) shall be deemed to have been entered into by, or to be those of, that Authority and to have been entered into or performed by that Authority at the time when they were entered into or performed by the Board.
(2) For the purposes of determining whether— (a) (b) (c) any taxpayer satisfies the requirements of section IF 1(1)(a) of the In- come Tax Act 2004; or any taxpayer is included in a group of companies or a wholly-owned group for the purposes of section IG 1 of the Income Tax Act 2004; or any debit arises to be recorded in a taxpayer’s imputation credit account under section ME 5(1)(i) of the Income Tax Act 2004, or in a taxpayer’s dividend withholding payment account under section MG 5(1)(i) of that Act, or in a taxpayer’s branch equivalent tax account under section MF 4(3)(d) of that Act,— shares held by the Board in any company (whether directly or through any 1 or more interposed companies) immediately before the vesting effected by section 295(2)(a) shall be treated as having been acquired by the Qualifications Au- thority at the time when they were acquired by the Board.
(3) The vesting of all the real and personal property of the Board in the Qualifica- tions Authority pursuant to section 295(2)(a) shall not be treated as a supply of any goods or services for the purposes of the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985, or as a disposition of property for the purposes of the Estate and Gift Duties Act 1968 or as a conveyance for the purposes of the Stamp and Cheque Duties Act 1971.

(4) Nothing in subsection (2) or subsection (3) limits the generality of subsection (1).
468 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 24 s 297 Section 296: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 46 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 296(1): amended, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995– 96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).
Section 296(2)(a): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 296(2)(a): amended, on 1 April 2005 (effective for 2005–06 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section YA 2 of the Income Tax Act 2004 (2004 No 35).
Section 296(2)(b): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 296(2)(b): amended, on 1 April 2005 (effective for 2005–06 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section YA 2 of the Income Tax Act 2004 (2004 No 35).
Section 296(2)(c): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 296(2)(c): amended, on 1 April 2005 (effective for 2005–06 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section YA 2 of the Income Tax Act 2004 (2004 No 35).
297 Transitional provisions consequential on repeal of Universities Act 1961 (1) Upon the commencement of this section,— (a) (b) all real and personal property that, immediately before that commence- ment, was vested in the University Grants Committee other than proper- ty to which section 243(1) applies, is, by force of this subsection, vested in the Minister subject to all charges, encumbrances, estates, and inter- ests, and the provisions of any enactment, affecting that property; and the Minister becomes, by force of this subsection, liable to pay and dis- charge all the debts, liabilities and obligations of the University Grants Committee that existed immediately before that commencement.
(2) Where any land vests in the Minister under subsection (1), the District Land Registrar for the land registration district in which the land is situated, on the deposit with him or her of such plans and documents as he or she may require, shall make such entries in the register, and generally do all such other things, as may be necessary to give full effect to the provisions of that subsection.
(3) The Minister may, by writing signed by the Minister, declare that a specified debt, liability, or obligation referred to in subsection (1)(b) is to be assumed by the Vice-Chancellors Committee or the Qualifications Authority and thereupon that debt, liability or obligation becomes a debt, liability or obligation of that Committee or Authority, as the case may be, and ceases to be a debt, liability or obligation of the Minister.
(4) Any contract or other instrument (other than a contract of, or instrument relat- ing to, employment) subsisting, or any proceeding pending, immediately before the commencement of this section to which the University Grants Committee was a party has effect after that commencement as if— 469 Part 24 s 297 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) the Minister is substituted for the Committee as a party to the contract, other instrument or proceeding; and any reference in the contract or other instrument, or in a pleading, affida- vit or other document in the proceeding, to the Committee in its capacity as a party to the contract, other instrument or proceeding is (except in relation to matters that occurred before that commencement) a reference to the Minister.
(5) Any rulings, decisions, or other acts of authority of the University Grants Com- mittee, or of any committee of the University Grants Committee, or of the Uni- versities Entrance Board, or of any committee of the Universities Entrance Board, to the extent to which they were subsisting immediately before the com- mencement of this section and are capable of being repealed, replaced, or amended by an appropriate body established under this Act, continue in force after that commencement, so far as they are capable of operation and with any necessary modifications, as if they had been duly made, given, or done by that body.
(6) Where, but for the repeal of the Universities Act 1961, the Chairman of the University Grants Committee would, by virtue of his or her office, have been— (a) (b) a trustee of any trust established by an Act, other than a trust of which a member of the Vice-Chancellors Committee is a trustee; or a member of any board, committee, authority, or other body, established by an Act, other than a board, committee, authority, or other body, of which a member of the Vice-Chancellors Committee is a member,— the Chairperson of the Vice-Chancellors Committee is, by force of this subsec- tion, a trustee of that trust or a member of that board, committee, authority or other body, as the case may be, in place of the Chairman of the University Grants Committee.
(7) Where, but for the repeal of the Universities Act 1961, the University Grants Committee would have had power to appoint a person to be— (a) (b) a trustee of any trust established by an Act, other than a trust of which a member of the Vice-Chancellors Committee is a trustee; or a member of any board, committee, authority, or other body, established by an Act, other than a board, committee, authority, or other body, of which a member of the Vice-Chancellors Committee is a member,— the Chairperson of the Vice-Chancellors Committee is, by force of this subsec- tion, a trustee of that trust or a member of that board, committee, authority, or other body, as the case may be, and, if a person was such a trustee or member immediately before the commencement of this section by virtue of such an ap- pointment, that appointment shall be deemed to have terminated upon that commencement.
(8) Notwithstanding the repeal of the Universities Act 1961,— 470 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 24 s 297 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) sections 18, 25, 32, and 37 of that Act continue to apply in respect of any financial year in respect of which those sections had not been complied with before the commencement of this section but so apply as if the period that commenced on 1 January 1990 and ended immediately be- fore that commencement was a financial year; and section 44 of that Act continues to apply in relation to the exercise of any functions of the Universities Entrance Board before the commence- ment of this section that have not been the subject of a report by the Board under that section; and the University Grants Committee continues in existence for the purpose only of complying with sections 18(3) and 25(1) of that Act as those sec- tions apply by virtue of paragraph (a); and the Curriculum Committee of the University Grants Committee con- tinues in existence for the purpose only of furnishing a report or reports in accordance with section 32 of that Act as that section applies by virtue of paragraph (a) but any such report shall be furnished to the Minister and not to the University Grants Committee; and the Research Committee of the University Grants Committee continues in existence for the purpose only of furnishing a report or reports in ac- cordance with section 37 of that Act as that section applies by virtue of paragraph (a) of this subsection but any such report shall be furnished to the Minister and not to the University Grants Committee; and the Universities Entrance Board continues in existence for the purpose only of furnishing a report in accordance with section 44 of that Act as that section applies by virtue of paragraph (b) of this subsection but any such report shall be furnished only to the Minister.
(9) The Secretary shall give to the University Grants Committee any assistance that is required for the purpose of complying with sections 18 and 25 of the Universities Act 1961 as those sections apply by virtue of subsection (8)(a) of this section and is responsible for paying any expenses incurred in respect of that compliance, including remuneration and expenses of members of the Uni- versity Grants Committee.
(10) The Qualifications Authority shall give to the Curriculum Committee of the University Grants Committee and to the Universities Entrance Board any as- sistance that is required for the purpose of complying with sections 32 and 44 of the Universities Act 1961 as those sections apply by virtue of paragraph (a) or paragraph (b) of subsection (8) of this section, as the case may be, and is responsible for paying any expenses incurred in respect of that compliance, in- cluding remuneration and expenses of members of the Curriculum Committee or of the Universities Entrance Board.
(11) [Repealed] 471 Part 24 s 298 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 297: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 46 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 297(11): repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 45(2)(b) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
298 Taxes and duties in relation to certain property of former University Grants Committee (1) For the purposes of the Acts specified in the Schedule of the Tax Administra- tion Act 1994 and any other enactment that imposes, or provides for the collec- tion of, a tax, duty, levy, or other charge— (a) (b) the University Grants Committee and the Minister shall be deemed to be the same person with effect on and from the date on which real and per- sonal property of that Committee vests in the Minister pursuant to sec- tion 297(1)(a); and in respect of the liability under any such enactment for, and the assess- ment, determination, or imposition of, taxes, duties, levies, or other charges accruing on and from the day on which real and personal proper- ty of the University Grants Committee so vests in the Minister, all trans- actions entered into by, and acts of, that Committee in relation to that property before the vesting effected by section 297(1)(a) shall be deemed to have been entered into by, or to be those of, the Minister and to have been entered into or performed by the Minister at the time when they were entered into or performed by that Committee.
(2) For the purposes of determining whether— (a) (b) (c) any taxpayer satisfies the requirements of section IA 5(2) of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any taxpayer is included in a group of companies or a wholly-owned group for the purposes of section IA 6 of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any debit arises to be recorded in a taxpayer’s imputation credit account under section OB 41 of the Income Tax Act 2007, or in a taxpayer’s FDP account under section OC 24 of that Act, or in a taxpayer’s branch equivalent tax account under section OE 15 of that Act,— shares held by the University Grants Committee in any company (whether di- rectly or through any 1 or more interposed companies) immediately before the vesting effected by section 297(1)(a) shall, if the shares vest under that section in the Minister, be treated as having been acquired by the Minister at the time when they were acquired by that Committee.
The vesting of real and personal property of the University Grants Committee in the Minister pursuant to section 297(1)(a) shall not be treated as a supply of any goods or services for the purposes of the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985, or as a disposition of property for the purposes of the Estate and Gift Duties Act 1968 or as a conveyance for the purposes of the Stamp and Cheque Duties Act 1971.
(3) 472 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 24 s 299 (4) Nothing in subsection (2) or subsection (3) limits the generality of subsection (1).

Section 298: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 46 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 298(1): amended, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995– 96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).
Section 298(2)(a): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 298(2)(a): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
Section 298(2)(b): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 298(2)(b): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
Section 298(2)(c): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 298(2)(c): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
299 Transitional provisions consequential on repeal of Vocational Awards Act 1979 (1) In this section, previous Authority means the Authority for Advanced Voca- tional Awards that was constituted under the Vocational Awards Act 1979.
(2) Upon the commencement of this section,— (a) (b) all real and personal property that, immediately before that commence- ment, was vested in the previous Authority is, by force of this subsec- tion, vested in the Qualifications Authority subject to all charges, en- cumbrances, estates, and interests, and the provisions of any enactment, affecting that property; and the Qualifications Authority becomes, by force of this subsection, liable to pay and discharge all the debts, liabilities and obligations of the previ- ous Authority that existed immediately before that commencement.
(3) Where any land vests in the Qualifications Authority under subsection (2), the District Land Registrar for the land registration district in which the land is situated, on the deposit with him or her of such plans and documents as he or she may require, shall make such entries in the register, and generally do all such other things, as may be necessary to give full effect to the provisions of that subsection.
(4) Any contract or other instrument (other than a contract of, or instrument relat- ing to, employment) subsisting, or any proceeding pending, immediately before the commencement of this section to which the previous Authority was a party has effect on and after that commencement as if— 473 Part 24 s 299A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) the Qualifications Authority is substituted for the previous Authority as a party to the contract, other instrument or proceeding; and any reference in the contract or other instrument, or in a pleading, affida- vit, or other document in the proceeding, to the previous Authority in its capacity as a party to the contract, other instrument, or proceeding is (ex- cept in relation to matters that occurred before the commencement) a ref- erence to the Qualifications Authority.
(5) All regulations, rulings, decisions, and other acts of authority of the previous Authority, so far as they were subsisting immediately before the commence- ment of this section, continue in force as if they were regulations, rulings, deci- sions, and other acts of authority, respectively, of the Qualifications Authority.
(6) Notwithstanding the repeal of the Vocational Awards Act 1979,— (a) (b) sections 21(2) and 22(2) of that Act continue to apply in respect of each financial year in respect of which those sections had not been complied with before the commencement of this section but so apply as if the period that commenced on 1 April 1990 and ended immediately before that commencement was a financial year; and every Course Committee that was established under section 4 of that Act shall, as soon as practicable after the commencement of this section, for- ward a report to the previous Authority on its activities for the period that commenced on 1 March 1990 and ended immediately before the commencement of this section; and (c) the previous Authority and each Course Committee continue in exis- tence for the purpose only of complying with paragraphs (a) and (b).
The Qualifications Authority shall give to the previous Authority and a Course Committee any assistance that the previous Authority or Course Committee re- quires for the purpose of complying with its obligations under or arising by vir- tue of subsection (6) and is responsible for paying any expenses incurred by the previous Authority or Course Committee (including remuneration and ex- penses of members of the previous Authority or Course Committee) in so com- plying.
Section 299: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 46 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

(7) 299A Transitional and savings provisions relating to councils of tertiary institutions consequential on enactment of Education Amendment Act 2015 The transitional and savings provisions relating to councils of tertiary institu- tions set out in Schedule 19 have effect for the purposes of the Education Amendment Act 2015.
Section 299A: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 39(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

474 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 24 s 300 299B Transitional and savings provisions relating to other matters consequential on enactment of Education Amendment Act 2015 The transitional and savings provisions relating to other matters set out in Schedule 20 have effect for the purposes of the Education Amendment Act 2015.
Section 299B: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 39(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
300 Taxes and duties in relation to property of former Authority for Advanced Vocational Awards (1) For the purposes of the Acts specified in the Schedule of the Tax Administra- tion Act 1994 and any other enactment that imposes, or provides for the collec- tion of, a tax, duty, levy, or other charge— (a) (b) the previous Authority referred to in section 299(1) (in this section re- ferred to as the previous Authority) and the Qualifications Authority shall be deemed to be the same person with effect on and from the date on which the real and personal property of the previous Authority vests in the Qualifications Authority pursuant to that section; and in respect of the liability under any such enactment for, and the assess- ment, determination, or imposition of, taxes, duties, levies, or other charges accruing on and from the day on which the real and personal property of the previous Authority so vests in the Qualifications Authori- ty, all transactions entered into by, and acts of, the previous Authority before the vesting effected by section 299(2)(a) shall be deemed to have been entered into by, or to be those of, the Qualifications Authority and to have been entered into or performed by that Authority at the time when they were entered into or performed by the previous Authority.
(2) For the purposes of determining whether— (a) (b) (c) any taxpayer satisfies the requirements of section IA 5(2) of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any taxpayer is included in a group of companies or a wholly-owned group for the purposes of section IA 6 of the Income Tax Act 2007; or any debit arises to be recorded in a taxpayer’s imputation credit account under section OB 41 of the Income Tax Act 2007, or in a taxpayer’s FDP account under section OC 24 of that Act, or in a taxpayer’s branch equivalent tax account under section OE 15 of that Act,— shares held by the previous Authority in any company (whether directly or through any 1 or more interposed companies) immediately before the vesting effected by section 299(2)(a) shall be treated as having been acquired by the Qualifications Authority at the time when they were acquired by the previous Authority.
475 Part 24 s 301 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) The vesting of all the real and personal property of the previous Authority in the Qualifications Authority pursuant to section 299(2)(a) shall not be treated as a supply of any goods or services for the purposes of the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985, or as a disposition of property for the purpose of the Estate and Gift Duties Act 1968 or as a conveyance for the purposes of the Stamp and Cheque Duties Act 1971.
(4) Nothing in subsection (2) or subsection (3) limits the generality of subsection (1).

Section 300: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 46 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 300(1): amended, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995– 96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).
Section 300(2)(a): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 300(2)(a): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
Section 300(2)(b): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 300(2)(b): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
Section 300(2)(c): replaced, on 1 April 1995 (applying with respect to tax on income derived in 1995–96 and subsequent income years), by section YB 1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

Section 300(2)(c): amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).
301 Regulations The Governor-General may, from time to time, by Order in Council, make regulations providing for such matters as are contemplated by or necessary for giving full effect to the provisions of Parts 13 to 24 and for the due administra- tion of those provisions.

Section 301: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 46 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
301A Change of names of education entities (1) The Governor-General may from time to time, by Order in Council made on the recommendation of the Minister, do either or both of the following: (a) (b) specify or change the name of any education entity whose name is to be specified under this section: amend any enactment by omitting from it the name of any such educa- tion entity and substituting some other name.
(2) An education entity established or continued by this Act does not cease to be such an entity merely because its name is changed under this section.

476 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 25 s 302 Section 301A: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 52 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Part 25 Student allowances and administration of student loans Part 25: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 48 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Part 25 heading: amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).
302 Interpretation In this Part of this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,— allowance includes award, bursary, grant, and scholarship Authority means the Student Allowance Appeal Authority established by sec- tion 304(1) member means the person who for the time being is the Authority Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being re- sponsible for the administration of this Part Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry student loan has the same meaning as in section 4(1) of the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011 student loan information means information held by the Ministry for the pur- poses of the administration of the student loan scheme under the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011.
Section 302: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 48 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 302 Minister: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(6) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 302 Ministry: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(6) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 302 Secretary: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 2(6) of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
Section 302 student loan: replaced, on 1 April 2012, by section 223 of the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011 (2011 No 62).

Section 302 student loan information: inserted, on 1 November 1999, by section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 302 student loan information: amended, on 1 April 2012, by section 223 of the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011 (2011 No 62).
477 Part 25 s 303 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 303 Student allowances (1) The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations establish- ing allowances to help people pursue courses of education or training (in the case of courses of secondary education, whether within or outside New Zea- land).
(2) Every allowance shall— (a) (b) be awarded in accordance with the regulations that established it; and have an annual or other value from time to time set out in those regula- tions.
(3) Regulations under subsection (1) may, in relation to the payment of allowances in respect of courses of study at registered private schools or private training establishments, apply to— (a) (b) all such schools or establishments; or registered private schools or private training establishments of a speci- fied class or description only; or (c) particular schools or establishments.
(3A) Regulations made under this section may be expressed to come into force, and may accordingly come into force, before the date on which they are made, but only if the regulations— (a) (b) increase the value or maximum value of any allowance, or the rate or maximum rate at which any allowance may be paid; or extend the class or classes of person entitled to receive an allowance, or entitled to be paid an allowance at any particular rate.
(3B) The rates of student allowances set under this section (except the rates of al- lowances provided in respect of accommodation expenses) must be adjusted, by regulations made under subsection (1), as at 1 April each year so that in each case the new rate (after the deduction of standard tax) is the rate at that date (after the deduction of standard tax and before the adjustment under this section is made) adjusted by an amount equal to the percentage movement up- wards in the CPI between the CPI for the quarter ended with 31 December 1 year before the immediately preceding 31 December and the CPI for the quar- ter ended with the immediately preceding 31 December.
(3BA) [Repealed] (3C) The adjustments (by any percentage movement upwards in the CPI) required under subsection (3B) as at 1 April in any year from 2011 to 2021 (inclusive) must, despite subsections (3B) and (3F), be calculated,— (a) if, and insofar as, they relate to movements during quarters that end be- fore 29 April 2010, using index numbers for those quarters of the con- sumers price index-all groups published by Statistics New Zealand; and 478 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 25 s 303 (b) if, and insofar as, they relate to movements during quarters that end after 28 April 2010, using index numbers for those quarters of the consumers price index-all groups excluding cigarettes and other tobacco products published by Statistics New Zealand.
(3D) An adjustment under subsection (3B) must not reduce the weekly amounts of student allowances payable.

(3E) Every adjustment made under subsection (3B) comes into force, or is consid- ered to have come into force, on 1 April of the calendar year in which it is made, and applies to student allowances payable on and after that date.
(3F) In this section,— CPI means the consumers price index-all groups published by Statistics New Zealand standard tax means the amount of tax reckoned on a weekly basis that would be withholdable in accordance with tax code “M” stated in section 24B of the Tax Administration Act 1994.
(4) The power to make regulations under subsection (1) includes (and is deemed always to have included) power to make regulations— (a) (b) authorising the Secretary, for the purposes of assessing the eligibility of any person for an allowance, to take into account the income of that per- son’s parents or spouse or partner: defining the terms parent, spouse, partner, and any related terms, for the purposes of the regulations: (c) stating when and to what extent that income is to be taken into account.
(5) Until regulations under this section set out the value of allowances established by the regulations, the allowances have the annual or other value prescribed by the Minister by notice in the Gazette.

(6) [Repealed] Compare: 1964 No 135 s 203(2) Section 303: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 48 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
Section 303(2)(b): amended, on 1 October 1998, by section 11 of the Employment Services and In- come Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

Section 303(3A): inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 47 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 303(3B): inserted, on 27 September 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 2010 (2010 No 103).

Section 303(3BA): repealed, on 30 April 2016, by section 303(6).
Section 303(3C): inserted, on 27 September 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 2010 (2010 No 103).

Section 303(3C): amended, on 31 May 2016, by section 7 of the Customs and Excise (Tobacco Prod- ucts—Budget Measures) Amendment Act 2016 (2016 No 25).

479 Part 25 s 304 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 303(3C): amended, on 24 October 2012, by section 3 of the Education (Student Allowances Indexation—Budget Measures) Amendment Act 2012 (2012 No 79).
Section 303(3D): inserted, on 27 September 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 2010 (2010 No 103).

Section 303(3E): inserted, on 27 September 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 2010 (2010 No 103).

Section 303(3F): inserted, on 27 September 2010, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 2010 (2010 No 103).
Section 303(4): inserted, on 1 October 1998, by section 11 of the Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

Section 303(4)(a): amended, on 26 April 2005, by section 7 of the Relationships (Statutory Referen- ces) Act 2005 (2005 No 3).

Section 303(4)(b): replaced, on 26 April 2005, by section 7 of the Relationships (Statutory Referen- ces) Act 2005 (2005 No 3).
Section 303(5): inserted, on 1 October 1998, by section 11 of the Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

Section 303(6): repealed, on 30 April 2016, by section 303(6).

304 Student Allowance Appeal Authority (1) (2) There is hereby established the Student Allowance Appeal Authority.
Subject to subsection (3), the Authority shall comprise 1 person, who shall be appointed by the Minister for a term of 3 years from the date of appointment, but shall be eligible for reappointment.

(2A) Despite the expiry of the member’s term of office, the member may remain in office until he or she is reappointed or a successor is appointed.
(3) The member may at any time be removed from office by the Minister by notice in the Gazette for inability to adequately perform the duties of office, bank- ruptcy, neglect of duty, or misconduct, proved to the Minister’s satisfaction, and may at any time resign office by written notice to the Minister.

(4) The Authority is a statutory Board within the meaning of the Fees and Travel- ling Allowances Act 1951.
(5) The member is entitled to receive— (a) (b) remuneration by way of fees, salary, or allowances, for the member’s services as the Authority: payment of travelling allowances or expenses in respect of time spent travelling as, or in connection with the member’s function as, the Au- thority.

The Authority’s function is to hear and determine appeals made to it in accord- ance with this section.

The Authority is the body formerly known as the Tertiary Assistance Grants Appeal Authority.
Section 304: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 48 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

(6) (7) 480 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 25 s 305 Section 304(2A): inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 48 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 304(3): amended, on 25 October 2001, by section 58 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
305 Appeals (1) This subsection applies to every decision under this Act (being a decision that the person or body making it had power to make in some other way)— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) fixing the amount of any allowance; or declining to award an allowance to any person; or approving as a full-time programme for any person in any year any spe- cified part of a course of study; or refusing to approve as a full-time programme in any year any part of a course of study for any person; or refusing to extend the period in respect of which any person may receive payments under any allowance; or refusing to recognise the amount of work passed in any year by any per- son as being sufficient to entitle the person to the reinstatement of any allowance; or refusing to recognise any qualification or amount of work gained or passed by any person as being equivalent to any other qualification or amount of work.
(2) Where any person enrolled or intending to enrol at a tertiary institution is ag- grieved by a decision to which subsection (1) applies, being a decision the making of which has been delegated to an employee of the Ministry by the Secretary, that person may request the Secretary to review that decision; and in that case the Secretary shall review that decision and shall either— (a) (b) confirm it; or substitute for it any other decision that the person or body that made it might have made.
(2A) An application for a review under subsection (2) must be brought within 3 months after the person receives notification of the decision, or (if the Secre- tary considers there is good reason for the delay) within such further period as the Secretary may allow on application made either before or after the expir- ation of that period of 3 months.
(3) Where any person is aggrieved by— (a) (b) the decision by the Secretary under subsection (2)(a) to confirm any de- cision relating to the person; or any decision relating to the person substituted by the Secretary under subsection (2)(b) for any other decision; or 481 Part 25 s 306 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (c) any decision relating to the person made by the Secretary (other than by an employee of the Ministry under delegation) to which subsection (1) applies— the person may appeal against the decision; and in that case the Authority shall consider the appeal and, in the light of all the circumstances it considers rele- vant, shall either— (d) (e) confirm the decision; or substitute for it any other decision that the Secretary might have made,— and the confirmation or decision shall have effect as if it were the decision of the Secretary.
(4) Every decision of the Authority shall be accompanied by written reasons for it.
(5) When substituting for any decision of the Secretary any other decision that the Secretary might have made, the Authority may (if it thinks that in all the cir- cumstances to do so would be appropriate) require the Secretary to pay a sum fixed by the Authority, being all or part of the costs incurred by the Authority in hearing the appeal; and in that case the Secretary shall cause that sum to be paid to the chief executive of the Ministry of Justice.
Section 305: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 48 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 305(2): amended, on 1 October 1998, by section 11 of the Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

Section 305(2A): inserted, on 1 October 1998, by section 11 of the Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).
Section 305(3)(c): amended, on 1 October 1998, by section 11 of the Employment Services and In- come Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

Section 305(5): amended, on 1 October 2003, pursuant to section 14(2) of the State Sector Amend- ment Act 2003 (2003 No 41).
306 Procedures to be prescribed (1) The Governor-General may from time to time, by Order in Council, make regulations prescribing how— (a) (b) appeals are to be made to the Authority; and the Authority is to deal with appeals and conduct its proceedings.

Subject to subsection (1), the Authority shall conduct its proceedings as it thinks fit.

The Ministry of Justice shall provide for the Authority all administrative and secretarial services necessary to enable it to perform its functions.
Section 306: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 48 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Section 306(3): amended, on 1 October 2003, pursuant to section 14(1) of the State Sector Amend- ment Act 2003 (2003 No 41).

(2) (3) 482 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 25 s 307 306A Disclosure of enrolment information by secondary schools The provisions of section 226A apply to any secondary school as if such a school were an institution within the meaning of that section.
Section 306A: inserted, on 1 October 1998, by section 11 of the Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).
307 Recipients of allowances or student loans, and other persons, may be required to provide information (1) In this section and sections 307AAA and 307AA,— change in the recipient’s circumstances includes a change in another person’s circumstances that— (a) (b) the recipient knows about; and the recipient knows materially affects his or her entitlement to a statutory allowance or student loan, or a particular rate of statutory allowance or a particular amount of a student loan non-recipient means a person who is not a recipient, and— (a) (b) includes a person who is acting in his or her official capacity as an offi- cer or employee of a department of State or public body; but does not include a person acting in his or her capacity as an officer of a court recipient means a person who holds, has at any time held, or has at any time applied for, a statutory allowance or a student loan statutory allowance means an allowance established by regulations under sec- tion 303.
(2) Regulations under section 303 may require officials of institutions at which any statutory allowance established by the regulations is or has at any time been tenable to give the Secretary either or both of the following: (a) (b) information about payments made under the regulations to or in respect of recipients enrolled or formerly enrolled at the institution: statistical or other information relating to payments made under the regulations to or in respect of recipients enrolled or formerly enrolled at the institution, whether— (i) (ii) in general; or in relation to recipients of a particular class or description; or (iii) in relation to a particular recipient or particular recipients.
(3) The Secretary (or any person authorised for the purpose by the Secretary) may, by written notice to any recipient, require the recipient to do all or any of the following things: 483 Part 25 s 307 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) produce to the Secretary (or authorised person) any papers, documents, records, or other things, relevant to the recipient’s entitlement at any time— (i) (ii) to a statutory allowance or student loan; or to be paid a statutory allowance at a particular rate or any amount of a student loan,— (b) (c) that are in the person’s possession or under the person’s control: allow copies of any such papers, documents, or records to be made: give the Secretary (or authorised person) any information or particulars relevant to the recipient’s entitlement at any time— (i) (ii) to a statutory allowance or student loan; or to be paid a statutory allowance at a particular rate or any amount of a student loan,— that is required by the Secretary (or the authorised person).
(4) The Secretary (or any person authorised for the purpose by the Secretary) may investigate the circumstances at any time of any recipient so far as they may relate to the recipient’s entitlement at any time— (a) (b) to a statutory allowance or student loan; or to be paid a statutory allowance at a particular rate or any amount of a student loan.

(5) A recipient or non-recipient who is asked questions during an investigation under subsection (4) must answer the questions.
(6) A recipient must notify the Secretary, as soon as practicable, of any change in the recipient’s circumstances that materially affects his or her entitlement at any time— (a) (b) to a statutory allowance or student loan; or to be paid a statutory allowance at a particular rate or a particular amount of a student loan.

(6A) [Repealed] (7) [Repealed] Section 307: replaced, on 19 December 1998, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 307 heading: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 64(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 307 heading: amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307(1): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 64(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 307(1) change in the recipient’s circumstances: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 64(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
484 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 25 s 307AAA Section 307(1) non-recipient: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 64(3) of the Education Amend- ment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 307(1) recipient: amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 6(1) of the Education Amend- ment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307(3)(a)(i): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 6(2)(a) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).
Section 307(3)(a)(ii): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 6(2)(b) of the Education Amend- ment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307(3)(c)(i): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 6(2)(a) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307(3)(c)(ii): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 6(2)(b) of the Education Amend- ment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307(4)(a): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 6(2)(a) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).
Section 307(4)(b): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 6(2)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307(5): replaced, on 1 November 1999, by section 6(3) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307(5): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 64(4) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 307(6): replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 64(5) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Section 307(6A): repealed, on 20 May 2010, by section 64(5) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 307(7): repealed, on 20 May 2010, by section 64(5) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
307AAA Suspension or refusal for not providing information (1) The Secretary may do whichever of the following the case requires, if he or she is satisfied that a recipient or non-recipient has, without reasonable cause, failed or refused to comply with a requirement under section 307(3) or to com- ply with section 307(5) and, in the case of a recipient, that the recipient has been warned of the consequence of the failure or refusal and given the oppor- tunity to show reasonable cause or answer the question: (a) (b) suspend any statutory allowance held by the recipient, whether granted before or after the failure or refusal: refuse to grant any statutory allowance, or refuse to advance any student loan, to the recipient, whether or not the recipient may appear to be en- titled to be granted the allowance or advanced the loan.
(2) Despite subsection (1), the recipient must be given an opportunity to provide the information sought before any action is taken in respect of him or her under subsection (1), if the failure or refusal to comply is by a non-recipient.

(3) Payments must not be made under a statutory allowance while it is suspended under subsection (1).

Section 307AAA: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 65 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
485 Part 25 s 307AA Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 307AA Offences concerning allowances and student loans (1) A person commits an offence against this Act, and is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding $2,000, who, in response to a requirement under subsection (3) or a question asked under subsection (5) of section 307, knowingly— (a) makes a false or misleading statement; or (b) makes a statement from which any material matter has been omitted; or (c) (d) provides any false or misleading paper, document, or record; or provides a paper, document, or record from which any material matter has been omitted.
(2) A recipient or non-recipient commits an offence against this Act and is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding $2,000 who refuses to comply with sec- tion 307(5).
(2A) A recipient commits an offence and is liable on conviction to imprisonment for a term not exceeding 12 months or a fine not exceeding $5,000 if he or she, for the purpose of receiving or continuing to receive a statutory allowance or stu- dent loan, or a statutory allowance at a particular rate or any amount of a stu- dent loan, other than that to which he or she is entitled,— (a) (b) knowingly makes a false or misleading statement in an application for a statutory allowance or student loan; or knowingly makes a false or misleading statement in a notification of a change in the recipient’s circumstances that materially affects his or her entitlement at any time— (i) (ii) to a statutory allowance or student loan; or to be paid a statutory allowance at a particular rate or a particular amount of a student loan; or (c) wilfully fails to comply with section 307(6).
(3) Despite anything to the contrary in section 25 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011, the limitation period in respect of an offence against this section ends on the date that is 12 months after the date on which the offence was brought to the Ministry’s attention.

Section 307AA: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 307AA heading: amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 7 of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).
Section 307AA(1): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

Section 307AA(1): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 66(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 307AA(2): replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 66(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 307AA(2): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).
486 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 25 s 307A Section 307AA(2A): replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 66(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 307AA(2A): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

Section 307AA(3): replaced, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).
307AB Allowances identified by Gazette notice (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, identify either or both of the fol- lowing as an allowance to which this section applies: (a) (b) any allowance paid to students otherwise than under an enactment: any money paid under any agreement entered into under section 139E.

(2) Subsection (1) applies whether the allowance or money referred to in that sub- section first became payable before or after 17 May 2006.
Section 307AB: replaced, on 20 September 2007, by section 6 of the Education Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 52).

307AC Bonded scholarships (1) (2) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, declare that any allowance to which section 307AB applies is a bonded scholarship.
The effect of declaring an allowance to be a bonded scholarship is that, under section 7 of the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011, the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011 applies to enable the recovery of money in accordance with the terms of the scholarship.

Section 307AC: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 50 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 307AC(1): replaced, on 20 September 2007, by section 7(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 52).
Section 307AC(2): amended, on 1 April 2012, by section 223 of the Student Loan Scheme Act 2011 (2011 No 62).

Section 307AC(2): amended, on 20 September 2007, by section 7(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 52).
307A Use of student allowance information for purposes of Social Security Act 1964 (1) In this section, unless the context otherwise requires,— allowance means an allowance established by regulations under section 303 or identified by Gazette notice under section 307AB allowance information means any information held by the Ministry about a person who has applied for or has been granted an allowance beneficiary means any person who is receiving, or has received, any benefit; and includes an applicant for a benefit beneficiary information means information held by the department about a beneficiary 487 Part 25 s 307A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 benefit has the same meaning as in section 3(1) of the Social Security Act 1964; and includes— (a) (b) a lump sum payable under section 61DB or section 61DC or section 61DD of that Act: any special assistance granted out of a Crown Bank Account from money appropriated by Parliament under section 124(1)(d) or (da)of that Act department means the department for the time being responsible for the ad- ministration of the Social Security Act 1964 tax file number has the same meaning as in section YA 1 of the Income Tax Act 2007.
(2) During any period in which the Ministry and the department are the same de- partment,— (a) (b) (c) allowance information, beneficiary information, and student loan infor- mation may be held on the same system or systems within that depart- ment: allowance information about any person and beneficiary information and student loan information about the same person may be held on the same file within that department: allowance information about any person may be used by the department for the purposes of verifying— (i) (ii) the entitlement or eligibility of any person to or for any benefit or student loan; or the amount of any benefit, or any amount of a student loan, to which any person is or was entitled or for which any person is or was eligible: (d) beneficiary information about any person may be used by the department for the purposes of verifying— (i) (ii) the entitlement or eligibility of any person to or for any allowance or student loan; or the amount of any allowance or student loan to which any person is or was entitled or for which any person is or was eligible: (da) student loan information about any person may be used by the depart- ment for the purposes of verifying— (i) (ii) the entitlement or eligibility of any person to or for any allowance or benefit; or the amount of any allowance or benefit to which any person is or was entitled or for which any person is or was eligible: (e) allowance information, beneficiary information, and student loan infor- mation about any person may be used by the department— 488 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 25 s 307B (i) (ii) (iii) for the purpose of recovering from that person any amount for which that person is indebted to the Crown; or for the purpose of prosecuting that person for any offence; or for the purpose of imposing any pecuniary penalty,— in respect of the payment to that person of an allowance or benefit, or the pay- ment to that person of an allowance or benefit at a rate, to which he or she was not entitled.
Section 307A: replaced, on 1 October 1998, by section 11 of the Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

Section 307A(1) allowance: amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 51 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 307A(1) benefit paragraph (b): amended, on 25 January 2005, pursuant to section 65R(3) of the Public Finance Act 1989 (1989 No 44).
Section 307A(1) tax file number: amended, on 1 April 2008 (effective for 2008–09 income year and later income years, except when the context requires otherwise), by section ZA 2(1) of the Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97).

Section 307A(2)(a): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 8(1)(a) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307A(2)(b): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 8(1)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).
Section 307A(2)(c)(i): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 8(1)(c) of the Education Amend- ment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307A(2)(c)(ii): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 8(1)(d) of the Education Amend- ment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307A(2)(d)(i): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 8(1)(e) of the Education Amend- ment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307A(2)(d)(ii): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 8(1)(e) of the Education Amend- ment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).
Section 307A(2)(da): inserted, on 1 November 1999, by section 8(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307A(2)(e): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 67 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 307A(2)(e): amended, on 1 November 1999, by section 8(1)(f) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).
307B Recovery of debts (1) This section applies to any person who is indebted to the Crown in respect of the payment to that person of an allowance, or the payment to that person of an allowance at a rate, or the payment to that person of any amount of a student loan or other money, to which he or she was not or is no longer entitled.
(2) The Secretary is entitled to recover the amount of the debt— (a) in the case of an allowance debt, by deduction from— (i) (ii) any allowance; or any benefit under the Social Security Act 1964 to which that per- son may become subsequently entitled; or 489 Part 25 s 307C Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (aa) in the case of a student loan debt, by deduction from— (i) (ii) any allowance (including any case where the living costs have al- ready been paid under the loan for the period to which the debt re- lates); or any benefit under the Social Security Act 1964 to which that per- son may become subsequently entitled; or in the case of a debt described in section 85A of the Social Security Act 1964, by deduction from any allowance; or at the suit of the Secretary; or by deduction notice under section 86A of the Social Security Act 1964.
(ab) (b) (c) (3) For the purposes of subsection (2)(c), sections 86A and 86B to 86J of the Social Security Act 1964 apply with any necessary modifications.

Section 307B: inserted, on 1 October 1998, by section 11 of the Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

Section 307B(1): replaced, on 1 November 1999, by section 9(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).
Section 307B(2)(a): replaced, on 1 November 1999, by section 9(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307B(2)(aa): inserted, on 1 November 1999, by section 9(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307B(2)(ab): inserted, on 1 November 1999, by section 9(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

Section 307B(2)(ab): amended, on 20 August 2012, by section 28(2) of the Social Security (Youth Support and Work Focus) Amendment Act 2012 (2012 No 50).
307C Ministry may carry out information matching of student loan information [Repealed] Section 307C: repealed, on 1 April 2007, by section 42 of the Student Loan Scheme Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 13).
307D Details of academic performance (1) The Ministry of Education may, on request by the Ministry (as defined in sec- tion 302), supply details of the academic performance of any person for the purpose of verifying— (a) (b) the entitlement or eligibility of the person to or for any benefit, allow- ance, or student loan (as those terms are defined in section 226A); or the amount of any benefit, allowance, or student loan (as so defined) to which any person is or was entitled or for which any person is or was eligible.
In this section, Ministry of Education means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of Part 13.

(2) 490 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 26 s 309 Section 307D: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 52(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Part 26 Early childhood education and care Part 26: replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Interpretation Heading: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
308 Overview This Part— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) requires the licensing of service providers who operate early childhood education and care centres; and allows, but does not require, the licensing of service providers who pro- vide a home-based education and care service or a hospital-based educa- tion and care service; and allows, but does not require, playgroups to be certificated; and provides for the funding of licensed early childhood services and certifi- cated playgroups; and provides for the regulation of licensed early childhood services and certi- ficated playgroups; and provides for a range of other matters generally in relation to early child- hood education and care, including administration, curriculum, Police vetting of employees, powers of entry, and offences.
Section 308: replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
309 Interpretation In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— early childhood education and care centre has the meaning set out in section 310 early childhood service means an early childhood education and care centre, home-based education and care service, or hospital-based education and care service foreign student has the same meaning as in section 2(1) home-based education and care service— (a) means the provision of education or care, for gain or reward, to children who are under the age of 5 years, or who are 5 years of age but not en- rolled in school, in— 491 Part 26 s 309 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (i) (ii) the children’s own home; or the home of the person providing the education or care; or (iii) any other home nominated by the parents of the children; and (b) includes the provision of education or care to any child of the person providing the service who is— (i) (ii) under the age of 5 years; or 5 years of age but not enrolled in school hospital-based education and care service means the provision of education or care to 3 or more children under the age of 6 who are receiving hospital care within the meaning of section 4(1) of the Health and Disability Services (Safety) Act 2001 licensed early childhood education and care centre means an early child- hood education and care centre in respect of which the service provider holds a current licence issued under regulations made under section 317 licensed early childhood service means an early childhood service in respect of which the service provider holds a current licence issued under regulations made under section 317 licensed home-based education and care service means a home-based educa- tion and care service in respect of which the service provider holds a current licence issued under regulations made under section 317 licensed hospital-based education and care service means a hospital-based education and care service in respect of which the service provider holds a cur- rent licence issued under regulations made
 under section 317 Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being re- sponsible for the administration of this Part Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part playgroup means a group that meets on a regular basis to facilitate children’s play and in respect of which— (a) no child attends for more than 4 hours on any day; and (b) more than half the children attending on any occasion have a parent or caregiver present in the same play area at the same time; and (c) the total number of children attending on any occasion is not greater than 4 times the number of parents and caregivers present in the same play area at the same time Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry service provider means each of the following: 492 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 26 s 310 (a) (b) (c) (d) in relation to an early childhood education and care centre, the body, agency, or person who or that operates the centre: in relation to a home-based education and care service, the body, agency, or person who or that arranges, or offers to arrange, that education or care: in relation to a hospital-based education and care service, the body, agency, or person who or that provides that education or care: in relation to a playgroup, the person or persons who operate the play- group unsupervised access to children, in relation to a licensed early childhood ser- vice, means access to any child that is not access by, or supervised by, or other- wise observed by, or able to be directed (if necessary) by, any 1 or more of the following: (a) (b) a registered teacher or holder of a limited authority to teach: an employee of the service on whom a satisfactory Police vet has been conducted within the last 3 years: (c) a parent of the child.
Section 309: replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 309 home-based education and care service: replaced, on 29 October 2016, by section 37 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Section 309 hospital-based education and care service: replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 68(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Section 309 playgroup: replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 68(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Section 309 unsupervised access to children: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 68(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
310 Meaning of early childhood education and care centre (1) In this Part, but subject to subsections (2) to (4), early childhood education and care centre means premises used regularly for the education or care of 3 or more children (not being children of the persons providing the education or care, or children enrolled at a school being provided with education or care be- fore or after school) under the age of 6— (a) (b) by the day or part of a day; but not for any continuous period of more than 7 days.
(2) Subject to subsections (3) and (4), premises of the following kind are not early childhood education and care centres: (a) (b) registered schools (within the meaning of section 2(1)): hostels (within the meaning of section 2(1)): 493 Part 26 s 310 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) residences (within the meaning of section 2(1) of the Oranga Tamariki Act 1989): institutions under the control of the Ministry of Health or a district health board established by or under section 19 of the New Zealand Public Health and Disability Act 2000: hospital care institutions (within the meaning of section 58(4) of the Health and Disability Services (Safety) Act 2001): children’s health camps operated by Children’s Health Camps—The New Zealand Foundation for Child and Family Health and Develop- ment: premises where all the children present are members of the same family in the care of a member of the family or members of the same family in the care of a caregiver who is not acting for gain or reward: any premises, during any period of use for the education or care of chil- dren for any period not exceeding 4 hours a week in circumstances where the children’s parents or caregivers are— (i) (ii) in close proximity to the children and are able to be contacted; and able to resume responsibility for the children at short notice: (ha) any premises, during any period of use for the education or care of 3 or more children under the age of 6, none of whom attends for any period exceeding 2 hours per day, in circumstances where the children’s parents or caregivers are— (i) (ii) in close proximity to the children and are able to be contacted; and able to resume responsibility for the children at short notice: (i) any premises, during any period of use for the operation of a playgroup, licensed home-based education and care service, or hospital-based edu- cation and care service.
(3) Despite subsection (2), premises are early childhood education and care centres if they are— (a) (b) within premises of a kind described in any of paragraphs (a) to (h) or paragraph (i) of subsection (2); and used regularly or principally for the education or care of 3 or more chil- dren under the age of 6 who are children of— (i) staff who work within premises of a kind described in any of para- graphs (a) to (h) or paragraph (i) of subsection (2); or (ii) persons attending premises of that kind as residents or students.
(4) An early childhood education and care centre may be operated within the premises of a registered school; and its status as an early childhood education and care centre is not affected by the fact of its being operated within those premises.

494 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 26 s 311 Section 310: replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 310(2)(c): amended, on 14 July 2017, by section 149 of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families (Oranga Tamariki) Legislation Act 2017 (2017 No 31).

Section 310(2)(ha): inserted, on 21 December 2010, by section 34(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Section 310(3)(a): amended, on 21 December 2010, by section 34(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).
Section 310(3)(b)(i): amended, on 21 December 2010, by section 34(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134).

Funding Heading: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
311 Funding of certain early childhood services and certificated playgroups (1) In each year, out of money appropriated by Parliament,— (a) the service provider for every licensed early childhood service— (i) must be paid general grants; and (ii) may be paid 1 or more discretionary grants; and (b) the service provider who operates a certificated playgroup— (i) may be paid general grants; and (ii) may be paid 1 or more discretionary grants; and (c) the management of any body corporate may be paid a discretionary grant for the purpose of establishing a licensed early childhood service or cer- tificated playgroup.
(2) (3) The amount of every grant must be determined by the Minister.
The Minister may from time to time determine the means by which the amounts of grants may be calculated or ascertained; and— (a) different means may be determined in respect of— (i) (ii) grants of different classes or descriptions; and licensed early childhood services of different classes or descrip- tions and certificated playgroups; and (b) (c) the amount of any grant may be determined accordingly; but nothing in this subsection limits or affects the Minister’s power under subsection (2) to determine the amount of any grant.
(4) Without limiting subsection (3), the Minister may determine that no grant is payable in respect of any foreign student attending a licensed early childhood service.
(5) Any grant— 495 Part 26 s 311A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) may be paid unconditionally, or subject to any conditions the Minister specifies in writing when the grant is paid or earlier; and (b) may be paid to be used for any purpose the service provider considers appropriate, or for only such purposes as the Minister specifies in writ- ing when the grant is paid or earlier; and (c) may be withheld in whole or in part if the service provider fails to com- ply with any regulations made under section 317 or section 319 or any conditions of the licence or certificate.
(6) The service provider must ensure that— (a) (b) where a grant has been paid subject to conditions, the conditions are complied with; and if a grant has been paid to be used only for purposes specified by the Minister under subsection (5)(b), the grant is used only for those pur- poses.

Section 311: replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
311A Grants to licence-exempt centres [Repealed] Section 311A: repealed, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

311B Reporting requirements if grant paid to licence-exempt centre [Repealed] Section 311B: repealed, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
312 Loans to licensed early childhood services The Minister may, on any terms and conditions the Minister considers appro- priate, lend to the service provider for any licensed early childhood service public money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose.

Section 312: replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Administration and curriculum Heading: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
313 Administrative requirements The service provider for every licensed early childhood service must keep, and make available to the Secretary on request,— (a) a register of the children who attend or have attended the service, speci- fying the date of birth of each; and 496 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 26 s 314 (b) (c) (d) (e) a record of the attendance of children at the service; and a record of all fees and other charges paid in respect of children’s attend- ance at the service; and evidence that parents of children attending the service have regularly examined the attendance record; and any other records that are necessary to enable the service’s performance to be monitored adequately.
Section 313: replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

314 Curriculum framework (1) The Minister may prescribe a curriculum framework for any or all of the fol- lowing: (a) (b) (c) all licensed early childhood services: all certificated playgroups: all licensed early childhood services and certificated playgroups.
(2) The Minister may not prescribe a curriculum framework or amend any pre- scribed curriculum framework, unless the Minister has consulted with those or- ganisations that appear to the Minister to be representative of persons likely to be substantially affected by the curriculum framework or the amendment, as the case may be.
(3) As soon as practicable after prescribing or amending a curriculum framework, the Minister must publish a notice in the Gazette — (a) (b) stating that a curriculum framework has been prescribed or, as the case requires, amended; and setting out the curriculum framework or the amendment to the curricu- lum framework in its entirety, or stating where or how a copy of the cur- riculum framework or the amendment to the curriculum framework can be obtained by members of the public.
(4) Without limiting the generality of subsection (1), a notice under subsection (3) may— (a) (b) specify different commencement dates for different provisions of the curriculum framework or for different purposes; and specify a transitional period during which service providers may elect to comply with another specified curriculum requirement and specify a date on which service providers must comply with the curriculum frame- work.
(5) If a curriculum framework is prescribed under this section, every service pro- vider for a licensed early childhood service or who operates a certificated play- group, and to whom that curriculum framework applies, must implement that 497 Part 26 s 315 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 curriculum framework in accordance with any requirements prescribed in regu- lations made under section 317 or section 319, as the case may be.
Section 314: replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 314(5): inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Licensing and certification provisions Heading: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
315 Service providers operating early childhood education and care centres to be licensed (1) No service provider may operate an early childhood education and care centre unless that service provider is licensed to operate the centre under regulations made under section 317.
(2) Every service provider who operates an early childhood education and care centre commits an offence if— (a) (b) (c) the service provider operates the early childhood education and care cen- tre without holding a current licence under regulations made under sec- tion 317 authorising the operation of the centre; or the service provider ceases to operate an early childhood education and care centre for which it holds a current licence under regulations made under section 317 authorising the operation of the centre, in circumstan- ces other than an emergency, without first telling the Secretary that it will stop operating the centre; or the service provider ceases to operate the early childhood education and care centre for which it holds a current licence under regulations made under section 317 authorising the operation of the centre, in circumstan- ces involving an emergency, and fails to tell the Secretary as soon as is reasonably practicable after the closure.
(3) An offence against subsection (2) is punishable on conviction,— (a) (b) in the case of an offence under subsection (2)(a), by a fine not exceeding $200 for every day or part of a day on which the offence took place; or in the case of an offence under subsection (2)(b) or (c), by a fine not ex- ceeding $200.

(4) This section is subject to section 319O.

Section 315: replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 315(3): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

498 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 26 s 317 315AA Police vetting of contractors and their employees who work at early childhood services [Repealed] Section 315AA: repealed, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
315AB Internal procedures relating to Police vets [Repealed] Section 315AB: repealed, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

315A Payment of fees for attendance of children at kindergartens [Repealed] Section 315A: repealed, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
316 Certain service providers may be licensed A service provider for a home-based education and care service or a hospital- based education and care service may, but need not, apply for a licence under regulations made under section 317 in respect of the home-based education and care service or hospital-based education and care service provided by the ser- vice provider.

Section 316: replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
317 Regulations relating to licensing (1) The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations providing for either or both of the following: (a) (b) the licensing of service providers to provide early childhood services of any kind, and the transfer of licences: regulating the management, operation, and control of licensed early childhood services of any kind, and imposing duties on service provid- ers.
(2) Regulations made under subsection (1) may (without limitation) do all or any of the following: (a) prescribe minimum standards relating to premises, facilities, pro- grammes of education, practices in relation to children’s learning and de- velopment, staffing and parental or caregiver participation (including adult:child ratios), health and safety, practices in relation to behaviour management and limits on the use of physical restraint, implementation of the curriculum framework, communication and consultation with pa- rents, the operation or administration of those services, or any of them, to be complied with to ensure the health, comfort, care, education, and safety of children attending licensed early childhood services: 499 Part 26 s 317 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) authorise the Minister, after consultation with those organisations that appear to the Minister to be representative of persons likely to be sub- stantially affected by these regulations, to prescribe criteria to be used by the Secretary to assess compliance with the minimum standards imposed by these regulations: (c) require the Secretary to publish a notice in the Gazette— (i) (ii) stating that criteria referred to in paragraph (b) have been pre- scribed; and setting out the criteria in their entirety, or stating where or how a copy of those criteria may be obtained by members of the public: limit or regulate the numbers of children who may attend licensed early childhood education and care centres or any premises used to provide a licensed home-based education and care service, or a licensed hospital- based education and care service: provide for the grant, duration, expiry, renewal, suspension, transfer, re- classification, and cancellation of licences of 1 or more specified kinds for service providers for each kind of early childhood service, and pre- scribe the conditions subject to which such licences may be granted, re- newed or transferred and the fees payable in respect of the grant, renew- al, and transfer
 of such licences, or do any of those things: prescribe conditions governing, or that may be imposed in respect of, li- censed early childhood services and the duties of their service providers: prescribe the records to be kept by service providers in respect of chil- dren attending licensed early childhood education and care centres, li- censed home-based education and care services, and licensed hospital- based education and care services: (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) regulate the qualifications to be held by any specified number or propor- tion of those persons carrying out the following: (i) (ii) the control and management of each licensed early childhood edu- cation and care centre, licensed home-based education and care service, or licensed hospital-based education and care service, or any of them: the education and care of children attending a licensed early child- hood education and care centre, licensed home-based education and care service, or licensed hospital-based education and care service, or any of them: (i) (j) provide for transitional matters not dealt with in this Act: prescribe offences punishable on conviction by a fine not exceeding $500 in respect of the contravention of, or non-compliance with, the regulations.
500 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 26 s 318 (3) Regulations made under subsection (1) may (without limitation) prescribe dif- ferent standards and other requirements— (a) (b) for early childhood services of different types or descriptions; and in respect of different kinds of licences.
(4) Criteria prescribed by the Minister for use in assessing compliance with the minimum standards imposed by regulations made under this section may differ in any way, including (without limitation), for— (a) (b) (c) early childhood services of different types or descriptions; and different kinds of licences; and different minimum standards.
(5) Criteria prescribed by the Minister for use in assessing compliance with min- imum standards imposed by regulations made under this section are a disallow- able instrument, but not a legislative instrument, for the purposes of the Legis- lation Act 2012 and must be presented to the House of Representatives under section 41 of that Act.

Section 317: replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 317(2)(a): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 137 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 317(2)(j): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

Section 317(5): replaced, on 5 August 2013, by section 77(3) of the Legislation Act 2012 (2012 No 119).
317A Requirements for licensed home-based education and care service (1) A licensed home-based education and care service may be provided to 1 or more children, up to a total of 4 in any 1 home.

(2) While children are participating in the service, the total number of children present in the home in which the service is provided (including those receiving the service) must not be more than 6.
(3) In this section,— children means children aged 13 years or younger (other than children of the educator who are enrolled in school) educator has the meaning given by regulation 3 of the Education (Early Child- hood Services) Regulations 2008.

Section 317A: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 38 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
318 Playgroups may be certificated A service provider who operates a playgroup may, but need not, apply for a certificate issued under regulations made under section 319 in respect of the playgroup.

501 Part 26 s 319 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 318: replaced, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
319 Regulations relating to certification of playgroups (1) The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations providing for the certification of playgroups and these regulations may do all or any of the following: (a) (b) prescribe minimum standards relating to premises, facilities, pro- grammes of education, practices in relation to children’s learning and de- velopment, parental or caregiver participation (including adult:child ra- tios), health and safety, practices in relation to behaviour management and limits on the use of physical restraint, implementation of the curricu- lum framework, communication and consultation with parents, the oper- ation and administration of playgroups, or any of them, to be complied with to ensure the health, comfort, care, education, and safety of children attending certificated playgroups: authorise the Minister, after consultation with those organisations that appear to the Minister to be representative of persons likely to be sub- stantially affected by these regulations, to prescribe criteria to be used by the Secretary to assess compliance with minimum standards imposed by these regulations: (c) require the Secretary to publish a notice in the Gazette— (i) (ii) stating that criteria referred to in paragraph (b) have been pre- scribed; and setting out the criteria in their entirety, or stating where or how a copy of those criteria may be obtained by members of the public: limit or regulate the numbers of children who may attend certificated playgroups:
 provide for the grant, duration, expiry, renewal, suspension, transfer, re- classification, and cancellation of certificates of 1 or more specified kinds for playgroups, and prescribe the conditions subject to which such certificates may be granted, renewed, or transferred and the fees payable in respect of the grant, renewal, or transfer of such certificates, or do any of these things: prescribe conditions governing, or that may be imposed in respect of, certificated playgroups and the duties of their service providers: prescribe the records to be kept by the service provider in respect of chil- dren attending certificated playgroups: regulate the qualifications to be held by any specified number or propor- tion of those persons responsible for either or both of the following: (i) the control and management of a certificated playgroup: (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) 502 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 26 s 319A (2) (3) (ii) the education and care of children attending a certificated play- group: (i) provide for transitional matters not dealt with in this Act.
Criteria prescribed by the Minister for use in assessing compliance with the minimum standards imposed by regulations made under this section may differ in any way, including (without limitation), for— (a) (b) different kinds of certificates; and different standards.
Criteria prescribed by the Minister for use in assessing compliance with min- imum standards imposed by regulations made under this section are a disallow- able instrument, but not a legislative instrument, for the purposes of the Legis- lation Act 2012 and must be presented to the House of Representatives under section 41 of that Act.

Section 319: replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 319(1)(a): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 138 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 319(3): replaced, on 5 August 2013, by section 77(3) of the Legislation Act 2012 (2012 No 119).

319AA Application of Legislation Act 2012 to certain material incorporated by reference (1) This section applies if section 49 of the Legislation Act 2012 is relied on to in- corporate material by reference in criteria prescribed under section 317(2)(b) or 319(1)(b) of this Act.
(2) When this section applies, subpart 2 of Part 3 of the Legislation Act 2012 (other than section 51) applies.

Section 319AA: inserted, on 5 August 2013, by section 77(3) of the Legislation Act 2012 (2012 No 119).

Powers of entry and inspection Heading: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
319A Parent’s right of entry The parent or guardian of a child has a right of entry to a licensed early child- hood education and care centre or to the premises where a licensed home-based education and care service is provided, whenever the child is there, except if the parent or guardian— (a) is subject to an order of a court that prohibits access to, or contact with, the child, either generally or with respect to the child while, or at a time when the child is, attending the centre or service; or 503 Part 26 s 319B Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) (c) (d) (e) is subject to a warning under section 4 of the Trespass Act 1980 to stay off the premises; or is suffering from a contagious or infectious disease likely to have a detri- mental effect on the children if passed on to them; or is, in the opinion of a person responsible for the operation of the centre or service, under the influence of alcohol or any other substance that has a detrimental effect on the functioning or behaviour of the person; or is, in the opinion of a person responsible for the operation of the centre or service, exhibiting behaviour that is or is likely to be disruptive to the effective operation of the centre or service.
Section 319A: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
319B Powers of entry and inspection without warrant (1) Any person holding an authorisation under subsection (3) may, for the purpose of ensuring that the provisions of this Act and any regulations made under this Act, or the conditions of any licence, certificate, or grant issued or made under any of those provisions, are being complied with, or for the purpose of con- ducting any audit, at any reasonable time, do all or any of the following: (a) (b) enter and inspect any premises that are or contain a licensed early child- hood education and care centre or that are used to provide a licensed home-based education and care service or a licensed hospital-based edu- cation and care service, or that are used by a certificated playgroup: inspect, photocopy, print out, or copy onto disk any documents (whether held in electronic or paper form) that the person believes on reasonable grounds to be those of the licensed early childhood service or certifica- ted playgroup: (c) remove any document described in paragraph (b), whether in its original form or as an electronic or paper copy.
(2) If any document is removed from premises under subsection (1)(c), the person who removes it must— (a) (b) leave at the premises a list of the documents removed; and return the documents, or a copy of them, to the premises as soon as prac- ticable, unless to do so would prejudice any investigation being or to be carried out by the Ministry.
(3) The Secretary may authorise in writing any person, who in the opinion of the Secretary is suitably qualified and trained in the exercise of powers under sub- section (1), to exercise those powers.

(4) Every authorisation under subsection (3) must contain— (a) (b) a reference to this section; and the full name of the person authorised; and 504 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 26 s 319C (c) a statement of the powers conferred on that person by this section.
(5) Every person exercising any power under subsection (1) must have the appro- priate written authorisation, and evidence of identity, and must produce them to the person in charge of the premises concerned (or, as the case may be, the per- son having possession or control of the documents concerned)— (a) on first entering the premises; and (b) whenever subsequently reasonably required to do so by the person in charge.
(6) For the purposes of this section and section 319C, inspection, in relation to any premises, includes observing any children present there.

Section 319B: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
319C Powers of entry and inspection with warrant (1) Any person authorised by section 319B(3) who has reasonable grounds to be- lieve that any premises are being used as an early childhood education and care centre in contravention of this Act or regulations made under section 317, may apply in writing on oath to a District Court Judge, Justice of the Peace, Com- munity Magistrate, or Registrar or Deputy Registrar of any court for a warrant.
(2) If the Judge or other person to whom the application is made is satisfied that there are reasonable grounds to believe that the premises are being so used, he or she may issue a warrant directed to the person by name authorising the per- son to enter the premises.
(3) Every warrant issued under subsection (2) must contain— (a) (b) (c) (d) a reference to this section; and the full name of the person authorised; and a description of the premises concerned; and the date on which it was issued and the date on which it expires.
(4) Every warrant issued under subsection (2) must authorise the person named in it, at any reasonable time within 4 weeks after the date on which it is issued, to— (a) (b) enter the premises described in the warrant; and do on those premises anything necessary to ascertain whether those premises are being used as an early childhood education and care centre, in contravention of this Act or any regulations made under section 317.
(5) Every person exercising any power under subsection (4) must have the appro- priate warrant and evidence of identity and must produce them to the occupier of the premises concerned— (a) on first entering the premises; and (b) whenever subsequently reasonably required to do so by that occupier.
505 Part 26 s 319D Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (6) Every warrant issued under subsection (2) expires on the earlier of the follow- ing dates: (a) (b) the date when the purpose for which it was issued has been satisfied; or the date specified as the date of expiry under subsection (3)(d).

Section 319C: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Police vetting of employees Heading: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
319D Police vetting of non-teaching and unregistered employees at licensed early childhood services The service provider of a licensed early childhood service must obtain a Police vet of every person— (a) whom the service provider appoints, or intends to appoint, to a position at the early childhood service; and (b) who is to work at the service during normal opening hours; and (c) who is not a registered teacher or holder of a limited authority to teach.
Section 319D: replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 69 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

319E Police vetting of contractors and their employees who work at licensed early childhood services (1) The service provider of a licensed early childhood service must obtain a Police vet of every contractor, or the employee of a contractor, who has, or is likely to have, unsupervised access to children at the service during normal opening hours.
(2) In this section, contractor means a person who, under contract (other than an employment contract), works at a licensed early childhood service.

Section 319E: replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 69 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
319F Police vet must be obtained before person has unsupervised access to children (1) A Police vet required under section 319D or 319E must be obtained before the person has, or is likely to have, unsupervised access to children at the service during normal opening hours.

(2) The service provider of a licensed early childhood service that is required under section 319D to obtain a Police vet of a person must apply for the vet no later than 2 weeks after the person begins work at the service.
Section 319F: replaced, on 20 May 2010, by section 69 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
506 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 26 s 319FD 319FA Procedures relating to Police vets under section 319D or 319E The service provider of a licensed early childhood service that applies for a Police vet of a person under section 319D or 319E— (a) must ensure that strict confidentiality is observed for Police vets; and (b) must not take adverse action in relation to a person who is the subject of a Police vet until— (i) (ii) the person has validated the information contained in the vet; or the person has been given a reasonable opportunity to validate the information, but has failed to do so within a reasonable period.
Section 319FA: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 69 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Police vetting of household members for home-based services Heading: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 69 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
319FB Police vetting of adult members of household where licensed home-based education and care service provided (1) The service provider of a licensed home-based education and care service must obtain a Police vet of every adult who lives in a home— (a) (b) where the service is being provided; but that is not the home of every child to whom the service is being provi- ded.

(2) In this section, adult means a person who is of or over the age of 17 years.
Section 319FB: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 69 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

319FC When Police vet under section 319FB must be obtained A Police vet required under section 319FB must be obtained before the adult is, or is likely to be, present when the service is being provided.

Section 319FC: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 69 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
319FD Procedures relating to Police vets under section 319FB The service provider of a licensed home-based education and care service that applies for a Police vet of a person under section 319FB— (a) must ensure that strict confidentiality is observed for Police vets; and (b) must not take adverse action in relation to the person providing the edu- cation or care until the person who is the subject of the Police vet has— (i) (ii) validated the information contained in the vet; or been given a reasonable opportunity to validate the information, but has failed to do so within a reasonable period.
507 Part 26 s 319FE Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 319FD: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 69 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Service provider to obtain further Police vets under this Part every 3 years Heading: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 69 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
319FE Further Police vets to be obtained every 3 years (1) The service provider of a licensed early childhood service must obtain a further Police vet of every person— (a) on whom a Police vet has already been obtained under this Part by that service provider; and (b) who still works at the service, or lives in the home, as the case may be.
(2) A further Police vet required under subsection (1) must be obtained on or about every third anniversary of any Police vet that has been previously conducted on the person.
(3) The requirement for a further Police vet under this section does not apply to a person on whom a Police vet under section 319D or 319E would not be re- quired if he or she were about to be appointed to a position at the licensed early childhood service or to work at the service at the time that the further Police vet would otherwise be required.

Section 319FE: inserted, on 20 May 2010, by section 69 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Miscellaneous Heading: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
319G Offence of insulting, abusing, or intimidating staff Every person commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not ex- ceeding $1,000, who intentionally insults, abuses, or intimidates a teacher or member of staff of an early childhood education and care centre— (a) within the presence or hearing of any child at the centre; and (b) while on centre premises or in any other place where children are assem- bled for purposes associated with the centre.
Section 319G: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 319G: amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).
319H Offence of obstructing power of entry Every person commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not ex- ceeding $2,000, who obstructs, hinders, resists, or deceives any person exercis- 508 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 26 s 319J ing or attempting to exercise a power of entry conferred by section 319A, 319B, or 319C.

Section 319H: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 319H: amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

319I Payment of fees for attendance of children at kindergartens (1) Fees may be charged in respect of the attendance of any child at any kinder- garten (whether or not it is, or is known or described as, a free kindergarten).
(2) Subsection (1) is not limited or affected by, and has effect despite,— (a) (b) (c) any enactment or rule of law; or anything in the constitution of any body corporate; or any contract or undertaking to the contrary entered into or given before the commencement of the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 1990.

Section 319I: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
319J Centres situated on property owned by, or leased to, the Crown (1) The continued operation of an early childhood education and care centre on land owned by, or leased to, the Crown, and the occupation by an early child- hood education and care centre of any building on any such land, may be gov- erned by— (a) (b) (c) (d) a lease or tenancy or licence between the Crown and the service provider who operates the centre under section 45 of the Public Works Act 1981; or a lease or licence between a board and the service provider under clause 36 of Schedule 6; or a lease between a third party (to whom a lease has been granted by the Crown) and the service provider; or an occupancy document notified to the service provider who operates the centre by the Secretary.
(2) If subsection (1)(d) applies to an early childhood education and care centre, the following provisions also apply: (a) the Secretary may direct the building of any capital works on that land that are intended for the centre’s use: (b) the service provider who operates the centre must— (i) (ii) pay to the Secretary the rent for the time being charged by the Secretary; and comply with standards of maintenance and capital works as deter- mined by the Secretary: 509 Part 26 s 319K Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (c) the service provider who operates the centre must not, without the Secre- tary’s approval,— (i) (ii) carry out any capital works on the land; or grant any lease or sublease of, or grant any licence or permit in respect of, or assign any rights in respect of, or part with posses- sion or control of, or allow any other person to share possession, control, or use of, the land or any other property of the Crown.
(3) The Secretary may from time to time amend an occupancy document by writ- ten notice to the service provider who operates the early childhood education and care centre.

(4) In this section, lease includes a sublease.

Section 319J: replaced, on 13 June 2013, by section 34 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 319J(1)(b): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 139 of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Transitional provisions Heading: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
319K Existing early childhood centres deemed to be licensed (1) Subject to subsections (2), (3), and (6), every early childhood centre that, im- mediately before the commencement of this section, was licensed as an early childhood centre is deemed to be licensed as an early childhood education and care centre under this subsection, and continues to be so licensed— (a) (b) for the relevant period, and in accordance with the regulations referred to in section 319N(1)(a) and (b); or if the service provider who operates that centre applies within the rele- vant period for a licence in accordance with regulations made under sec- tion 317, until that application is determined.
(2) Despite subsection (1), the Secretary may give written notice to the service provider of an early childhood education and care centre that is deemed to be licensed under subsection (1), requiring the service provider who operates that centre to apply for a licence under regulations made under section 317 within 3 months of the date of that notice, and— (a) (b) if that service provider fails to make such an application within the spe- cified period, the centre ceases to be licensed under subsection (1) at the end of that period; or if that service provider makes such an application within the required period, the centre continues to be licensed under subsection (1) until that application has been determined.
510 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 26 s 319K (3) Despite subsection (1), if subsection (4) applies, the Secretary may, by written notice to the service provider who operates an early childhood education and care centre that is deemed to be licensed under subsection (1), declare that the centre is no longer licensed under subsection (1) and the notice has effect ac- cordingly.
(4) The Secretary may give a notice under subsection (3) only if the Secretary is satisfied that the service provider or the centre— (a) does not comply with the regulations referred to in section 319N(1)(a) and (b); or (5) (6) (7) (8) (b) does not comply with any conditions of the licence.
The Secretary may, despite the fact that the centre concerned does not meet the minimum requirements for the issue of a licence under regulations made under section 317, issue to the service provider operating the centre a transitional licence under those regulations that— (a) expires on a date specified in the licence (being a date that is not later than 18 months after the date of issue); and (b) is subject to any conditions specified on it.
If the Secretary is not satisfied that the conditions specified in a licence issued in circumstances described in subsection (5) are being complied with, the Sec- retary may, by written notice to the service provider operating the centre, can- cel the licence.

Every notice under subsection (3) or subsection (6) must give reasons for the action taken.
Every early childhood centre must, while it is deemed to be licensed under sub- section (1), be treated for the purposes of this Act as an early childhood centre licensed under regulations made under section 317 (as inserted by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006).

(9) Subsections (1) to (6) do not limit any powers to cancel, suspend, or reclassify a licence conferred by the regulations referred to in section 319N(1)(a) and (b).
(10) In this section, relevant period means,— (a) in relation to an early childhood centre for which a probationary licence was in force immediately before the commencement of this section, the period expiring on— (i) (ii) the date specified in the probationary licence as the date on which it expires; or if a full licence is obtained under the regulations referred to in sec- tion 319N(1)(a) and (b) before the expiry of that probationary licence, the date that is 6 years after the commencement of this section: 511 Part 26 s 319L Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) in relation to an early childhood centre for which a provisional or full licence was in force immediately before the commencement of this sec- tion, the date that is 6 years after the commencement of this section.
Section 319K: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
319L Existing chartered care arrangers deemed to be licensed (1) Subject to subsections (2) and (3), every care arranger who, immediately be- fore the commencement of this section, was a chartered care arranger is deemed to be a service provider who is licensed to operate a home-based edu- cation and care service for— (a) (b) a period of 6 years after the commencement of this section; or if the service provider who provides that service applies within that period for a licence in accordance with regulations under section 317, until that application is determined.
(2) Despite subsection (1), the Secretary may give written notice to a service pro- vider that is deemed to be licensed under subsection (1), requiring the service provider to apply for a licence under regulations made under section 317 within 3 months of the date of that notice, and— (a) (b) if that service provider fails to make such an application within the spe- cified period, the home-based education and care service provided by that service provider ceases to be licensed under subsection (1) at the end of that period; or if that service provider makes such an application within the required period, the service continues to be licensed under subsection (1) until that application has been determined.
(3) Despite subsection (1), if subsection (4) applies, the Secretary may by written notice to the service provider who provides the home-based education and care service that is deemed to be licensed under subsection (1), declare that the ser- vice is no longer licensed under subsection (1) and the notice has effect accord- ingly.
The Secretary may give a notice under subsection (3) only if the Secretary is satisfied that the service is not provided in a way that complies with the code of practice set out in the order referred to in section 319N(1)(c).
The Secretary may, despite the fact that the service provider or service con- cerned does not meet the minimum requirements for the issue of a licence under regulations made under section 317 or the service concerned is not provi- ded in a way that complies with the code of practice set out in the order re- ferred to in section 319N(1)(c), issue to the service provider providing the ser- vice a transitional licence under those regulations that— (a) expires on a date specified in the licence (being a date that is not later than 18 months after the date of issue); and (4) (5) 512 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 26 s 319N (b) is subject to any conditions specified on it.
(6) (7) (8) If the Secretary is not satisfied that the conditions specified in a licence issued in circumstances described in subsection (5) are being complied with, the Sec- retary may, by written notice to the service provider providing the service, can- cel the licence.

Every notice under subsection (3) or subsection (6) must give reasons for the action taken.
Every home-based education and care service must, while it is deemed to be licensed under subsection (1), be treated for the purposes of this Act as a home- based education and care service licensed under regulations made under section 317 (as inserted by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006).

Section 319L: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
319M Funding conditions during transitional period (1) This section applies in respect of— (a) (b) a service provider who operates an early childhood education and care centre that immediately before the commencement of this section was a chartered early childhood centre, during the period while it is deemed to be licensed under section 319K(1); and a service provider who operates a home-based education and care ser- vice and who immediately before the commencement of this section was a chartered care arranger, during the period while the service provider is deemed to be licensed under section 319L(1).
(2) While this section applies in respect of a service provider who operates an ear- ly childhood education and care centre or a home-based education and care ser- vice, it is a condition of any grant paid to that provider under section 311 that the provider continues to comply with the relevant statement of desirable ob- jectives and practices published in the Gazette under section 312 (as that sec- tion read before the commencement of this section).
(3) The Minister may at any time, while this section applies in respect of any ser- vice provider, amend, revoke, or replace any statement of desirable objectives and practices referred to in subsection (2) by notice in the Gazette.

Section 319M: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
319N Existing regulations preserved (1) The following regulations are to be treated as regulations made under section 317 (as inserted by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006): (a) the Education (Early Childhood Centres) Regulations 1998 (SR 1998/85): 513 Part 26 s 319O Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) the Education (Early Childhood Centres) Fees Regulations 1990 (SR 1990/262): (c) the Education (Home-Based Care) Order 1992 (SR 1992/238).
(2) Despite subsection (1), the regulations referred to in subsection (1) are not to be treated as regulations made under section 317 (as inserted by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006) for the purposes of the following provi- sions: (a) (b) (c) section 319K(1)(b), (2), and (5); and section 319L(1)(b), (2), and (5); and section 319O(1).

(3) The regulations and order referred to in subsection (1) may be amended under section 317.
Section 319N: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

319O Licence-exempt centres may continue (1) The service provider for an early childhood education and care centre, that im- mediately before the commencement of this section was a licence-exempt cen- tre, may continue to operate that centre without a licence issued under regula- tions made under section 317 for a period that expires 6 years after the date of the commencement of this section.
(2) Despite the repeal of sections 311A and 311B by the Education Amendment Act 2006, grants may continue to be paid after the commencement of this sec- tion to a service provider operating any early childhood education and care centre that, immediately before the commencement of this section, was a licence-exempt centre, for any period that the Minister considers reasonable (not exceeding 6 years after the date of the commencement of this section).
(3) For the purposes of subsection (2), section 309 (as it read before the com- mencement of section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006) and sections 311A and 311B continue to apply as if— (a) (b) they were still in force; and every reference to the management of a centre were a reference to the service provider who operates the centre.

Section 319O: inserted, on 1 December 2008, by section 53 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
514 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 27 s 321 Part 27 Recognition and funding of other services Part 27: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 33 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
320 Interpretation In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— educational body, or body, means a body corporate that is recognised by the Minister as a body that provides any educational or developmental service or facility, including an organisation as defined in section 159B financial year, in relation to any body, means a year ending— (a) where the Minister has specified a day for the purpose, with that day; and (b) with 30 June in every other case Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being re- sponsible for the administration of this Part Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry.
Section 320: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 33 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 320 educational body, or body: inserted, on 1 January 2003, by section 42 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

321 Grants to educational bodies (1) An educational body may be paid grants out of public money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose on such conditions as the Minister thinks fit.
(2) However, a grant may not be paid under this section to a tertiary education pro- vider or an industry training organisation (as those terms are defined in section 159) unless the Minister is satisfied that payment under this section is in the national interest.

(3) (4) The amount of every grant and the conditions subject to which it will be paid shall be determined by the Minister.
Before a grant is paid, the Minister may give the body written notice that the grant, or a part or parts of the grants (specified as a particular sum or as a pro- portion of the total grant), is not to be used except for purposes specified in the notice.

(5) A body that has been given notice under subsection (4) shall ensure that no part of the grant to which the notice relates is used for purposes other than those specified for it in the notice.
515 Part 27 s 322 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (6) Subject to subsection (5), a body to which a grant is paid may apply the grant as it sees fit.
(7) During the financial year during which a grant was paid to a body under this section, and during the next financial year, the Secretary may by written notice to the body require it to give to the Secretary in writing any financial report, or statistical or other information, relating to the body specified in the notice, within a time specified in the notice; and the body shall take all reasonable steps to comply with the notice.
Section 321: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 33 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

Section 321 heading: amended, on 1 January 2003, by section 43(1) of the Education (Tertiary Re- form) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 321(1): replaced, on 1 January 2003, by section 43(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 321(2): replaced, on 1 January 2003, by section 43(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
322 Educational bodies to keep accounts (1) Where a grant under section 321 has been paid to a body subject to conditions, the body shall ensure that— (a) there are kept (in respect of the year in which the grant was made and the year after), in a manner approved by the Minister, all records neces- sary to show fully and fairly— (i) such of the body’s financial transactions, assets, liabilities, and funds, as relate to or are or were affected by the making of the grants; and (ii) that the conditions have been complied with: (b) the records are available for inspection at all reasonable times by any employee of the Ministry approved by the Secretary for the purpose.
(2) Every grant under section 321 to an educational body must be paid under a funding agreement that specifies— (a) (b) (c) the purpose of the grant; and any conditions attaching to it; and the reporting obligations of the recipient.

(3) (4) [Repealed] [Repealed] Section 322: inserted, on 1 January 1992, by section 33 of the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).
Section 322 heading: amended, on 1 January 2003, by section 44(1) of the Education (Tertiary Re- form) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Section 322(2): replaced, on 1 January 2003, by section 44(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

516 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 28 s 323 Section 322(3): repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 44(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
Section 322(4): repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 44(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Part 28 Review of educational services Part 28: inserted, on 25 June 1993, by section 25 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).
323 Interpretation In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— applicable organisation means an institution that provides an applicable ser- vice applicable person, in relation to an applicable organisation, means any body or person who or that administers, controls, governs, manages, operates, or owns, the organisation applicable service means an educational service to which section 324(1) and sections 325 to 328 apply Chief Review Officer means the chief executive of the Education Review Office hostel means a boarding establishment used mainly or solely for the accommo- dation of students enrolled at a registered school Minister means the Minister of State who, under any warrant or with the au- thority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the adminis- tration of this Part parent, in sections 328A to 328D, means the mother, father, or guardian of a person who has been exempted from the requirements of section 20 registered school has the same meaning as it has in section 2(1) review officer means a person for the time being designated under section 326; and includes the Chief Review Officer.
Section 323: inserted, on 25 June 1993, by section 25 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

Section 323 applicable service: amended, on 19 December 1998, by section 56(1) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 323 hostel: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 62(1) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Section 323 parent: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 56(2) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Section 323 registered school: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 62(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
517 Part 28 s 324 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 324 Educational services to which this Part applies (1) This Part applies to every educational service (other than a service provided only to or for people over 16 who are not enrolled at a State school within the meaning of section 2(1))— (a) that is provided by an organisation— (i) (ii) owned or operated by the Crown; or forbidden by law to provide that service (or a service of that kind) unless it holds a licence, permit, or other authority issued by or on behalf of the Crown; or (b) whose provision is (wholly or partly)— (i) (ii) funded by public money appropriated by Parliament; or regulated by or under statute.
(2) Sections 328A to 328D apply in relation to educational services provided to persons who are exempted from the requirements of section 20; and, for the purposes of this subsection and sections 328A to 328D, educational service is to be construed in that context and the meaning it has in the definition of the term applicable service in section 323 does not apply.

Section 324: inserted, on 25 June 1993, by section 25 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).
Section 324(2): inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 57 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
325 Chief Review Officer to perform certain functions The Chief Review Officer shall— (a) administer— (i) (ii) when directed by the Minister to do so; or notwithstanding section 32 of the State Sector Act 1988, of the Chief Review Officer’s own motion,— reviews, either general or relating to particular matters, of the perform- ance of applicable organisations in relation to the applicable services they provide; and administer the preparation of reports to the Minister on the undertaking and results of such reviews; and give the Minister such other assistance and advice on the performance of applicable organisations as the Minister from time to time requires.
(b) (c) Section 325: inserted, on 25 June 1993, by section 25 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

326 Review officers The Chief Review Officer may designate any suitably qualified person (wheth- er or not an employee of the Chief Review Officer) a review officer; and shall 518 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 28 s 328 ensure that every person for the time being so designated has a certificate to that effect, in a form approved by the Chief Review Officer.
Section 326: inserted, on 25 June 1993, by section 25 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).
327 Powers of entry and inspection For the purposes of enabling any functions of the Chief Review Officer to be performed, any review officer may, at any reasonable time and having given reasonable notice to an applicable organisation or any applicable person of the organisation, enter any place (other than a dwellinghouse) occupied by the or- ganisation or person, and— (a) (b) conduct inspections or inquiries: require any person to produce documents or information relating to— (i) (ii) an applicable service that the organisation provides; or people to whom such a service is (or has been) provided,— and permit the review officer to make copies or extracts of the docu- ments or information: (c) require any applicable person of the organisation, or any other person— (i) employed by the organisation or any applicable person of the or- ganisation; or (ii) involved in the management of the organisation,— to make or provide statements, in any form and manner the review offi- cer specifies, about any matters relating to an applicable service: (d) inspect the work of any person to whom an applicable service is (or has been) provided: (e) meet and talk with any person to whom an applicable service is being provided.
Section 327: inserted, on 25 June 1993, by section 25 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

328 Review officers to prove identity Every review officer who enters any place under the authority of section 327 shall, on first entering and, if requested, at any later time, produce to the person apparently in charge the review officer’s certificate of designation.

Section 328: inserted, on 25 June 1993, by section 25 of the Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).
519 Part 28 s 328A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Provisions concerning students with enrolment exemption Heading: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 58 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
328A Functions of Chief Review Officer The Chief Review Officer— (a) may carry out reviews (which may be general or in relation to particular matters) of the educational services provided to persons exempted from the requirements of section 20 and must carry out such reviews when di- rected by the Minister to do so; and (b) must administer the preparation of reports to the Minister on the under- taking and results of such reviews; and (c) must give the Minister such other assistance and advice on the educa- tional services provided to persons exempted from the requirements of section 20 as the Minister from time to time requires.
Sections 328A: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 58 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

328B Review officers Review officers designated under section 326 are also review officers for the purposes of section 328A, and sections 328C and 328D apply to them accord- ingly.

Sections 328B: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 58 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
328C Powers of review officers for purposes of sections 328A to 328D (1) For the purposes of enabling any functions of the Chief Review Officer to be performed for the purposes of section 328A, any review officer may, at any reasonable time and having given reasonable notice,— (a) (b) (c) conduct inspections or inquiries: require any parent or other person to produce documents or information relating to— (i) (ii) the educational service the parent or other person provides; or people to whom such educational service is (or has been) provi- ded,— and permit the review officer to make copies or extracts of the docu- ments or information: require any parent or other person to make or provide statements, in such form and manner as is reasonable in the circumstances, about any mat- ters relating to provision of the educational service provided by that parent or person: 520 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 28 s 328F (d) inspect the work of any person to whom the educational service con- cerned is (or has been) provided: (e) meet and talk with any person to whom the educational service con- cerned is being provided.
(2) Nothing in this section confers on a review officer the power to enter any dwellinghouse without the consent of the owner or occupier.

Sections 328C: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 58 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Section 328C(2): amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 70 of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
328D Review officers to prove identity before acting under section 328C Every review officer who exercises any power under section 328C must, before exercising that power and, if requested, at any later time, produce to the parent or other person providing the educational service concerned the review offic- er’s certificate of designation.

Sections 328D: inserted, on 19 December 1998, by section 58 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).
Provisions concerning hostels Heading: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 63 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
328E Functions of Chief Review Officer The Chief Review Officer— (a) may carry out reviews (which may be general or in relation to particular matters) of the provision of a safe physical and emotional environment that supports learning for students accommodated in hostels and must carry out those reviews when directed by the Minister to do so; and (b) must administer the preparation of reports to the Minister on the under- taking and results of the reviews; and (c) must give the Minister any other assistance and advice on the provision of a safe physical and emotional environment that supports learning for students accommodated at hostels that the Minister from time to time re- quires.
Section 328E: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 63 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

328F Review officers Review officers designated under section 326 are also review officers for the purposes of section 328E, and sections 328G and 328H apply to them accord- ingly.

Section 328F: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 63 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).
521 Part 28 s 328G Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 328G Powers of review officers for purposes of sections 328E to 328H (1) For the purposes of enabling any functions of the Chief Review Officer to be performed for the purposes of section 328E, any review officer may, at any reasonable time and having given reasonable notice to the management of the hostel, enter any hostel and do all or any of the following: (a) (b) conduct inspections or inquiries: require any person to produce documents or information relating to— (i) the provision of a safe physical and emotional environment that supports learning for the students accommodated in the hostel; or (ii) the students accommodated in the hostel: (c) make copies or extracts of any documents and information referred to in paragraph (b): (d) require any person to make or provide statements, in any form and man- ner that is reasonable in the circumstances, about any matters relating to the provision of a safe physical and emotional environment that supports learning for the students accommodated in the hostel: (e) meet and talk to any person who is accommodated at the hostel.
(2) Nothing in this section confers on a review officer the power to enter any room or sleeping area of a student accommodated at the hostel unless— (a) (b) the review officer believes on reasonable grounds that entry or inspec- tion is necessary for the purpose of review; and the review officer produces his or her certificate of designation to the student; and (c) the student is present during the inspection.

(3) This section does not limit any other powers of a review officer under this Act.
Section 328G: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 63 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

328H Review officers to prove identity before acting under section 328G Every review officer who exercises any power under section 328G must, be- fore exercising that power and, if requested, at any later time, produce to the person apparently in charge the review officer’s certificate of designation.
Section 328H: inserted, on 25 October 2001, by section 63 of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Part 29 Learning Media Limited [Repealed] Part 29: repealed, on 29 October 2016, by section 39 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

522 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 329 Interpretation [Repealed] Education Act 1989 Part 29 s 337 Section 329: repealed, on 29 October 2016, by section 39 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
330 Incorporation of company [Repealed] Section 330: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 5 of the State-Owned Enterprises Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 116).

331 Principal objective of company [Repealed] Section 331: repealed, on 29 October 2016, by section 39 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

332 Crown shareholding [Repealed] Section 332: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 5 of the State-Owned Enterprises Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 116).
333 Application of Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956 [Repealed] Section 333: repealed, on 29 October 2016, by section 39 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

334 Application of Public Finance Act 1989 [Repealed] Section 334: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 5 of the State-Owned Enterprises Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 116).

335 Auditor [Repealed] Section 335: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 5 of the State-Owned Enterprises Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 116).
336 Application of Companies Act 1955 [Repealed] Section 336: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 5 of the State-Owned Enterprises Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 116).

337 Personnel policy [Repealed] Section 337: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 5 of the State-Owned Enterprises Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 116).
523 Part 29 s 338 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 338 Equal employment opportunities programme [Repealed] Section 338: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 5 of the State-Owned Enterprises Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 116).

339 Consultation with State Services Commissioner [Repealed] Section 339: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 5 of the State-Owned Enterprises Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 116).
340 Existing rights, assets, liabilities, and debts [Repealed] Section 340: repealed, on 29 October 2016, by section 39 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Part 30 National student numbers Part 30: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 54 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
341 Purpose The purpose of this Part is to authorise the use by authorised users of national student numbers for specific purposes, in order to facilitate the accurate use and transfer, by authorised users, of information relating to individual students.

Section 341: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 54 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
342 Interpretation In this Part,— authorised user means— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) an education provider; and the Ministry; and the New Zealand Qualifications Authority; and the Tertiary Education Commission; and the Service continued by section 279; and any other agency or body declared by regulations made under section 347 to be an authorised user early childhood service means a licensed early childhood service (as defined in section 309) education provider means— (a) an early childhood service; and 524 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) (c) Education Act 1989 Part 30 s 344 a registered school as defined in section 2; and a tertiary education organisation, being an organisation as defined in sec- tion 159B(1) Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry.
Section 342: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 54 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 342 early childhood service: inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 35(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 342 education provider paragraph (a): amended, on 13 June 2013, by section 35(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
343 Assigning national student numbers (1) The Secretary may assign a national student number to any student who— (a) (b) is enrolled with an education provider; or has been granted an exemption under section 21 or section 22.
(1A) The Secretary may also assign a national student number to any child under the age of 6 years if the Secretary has reasonable grounds to believe that— (a) (b) the child is unlikely to attend an early childhood service; and the child is likely to benefit from attending such a service.

(2) On the date on which this Part comes into force, every national student number that is already assigned to a person is deemed to be a national student number assigned under this section to that person.
Section 343: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 54 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 343(1A): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 36 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

344 Use of national student numbers (1) (2) The Secretary may authorise or require an authorised user to use national stu- dent numbers.
The Secretary may authorise or require an authorised user to use national stu- dent numbers only for the purpose of, or for a specific purpose falling within, any 1 or more of the following: (a) monitoring and ensuring student enrolment and attendance: (ab) encouraging attendance at early childhood services: (b) (c) (d) ensuring education providers and students receive appropriate resourc- ing: statistical purposes: research purposes: 525 Part 30 s 345 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (e) (f) ensuring that students’ educational records are accurately maintained: establishing and maintaining student identities to support students’ par- ticipation in online learning.
(3) Every authorisation or requirement under this section must be made by notice in the Gazette, and— (a) takes effect on the date, specified in the notice, on or after the date of the notice; and (b) may be subject to conditions.

(4) An authorisation or requirement may be made generally (by reference to a class of authorised user) or specifically (by reference to a named authorised user).
(5) An authorised user to whom any 1 or more authorisations relates is authorised to use national student numbers in accordance with the terms of the authorisa- tions.

(6) An authorised user that is required to use national student numbers for a specif- ic purpose must use national student numbers for that purpose.

Section 344: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 54 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 344(2)(ab): inserted, on 13 June 2013, by section 37 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 344(2)(f): inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 40 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

345 Person may use or disclose own national student number Despite anything in this Part, a person may use or disclose his or her own na- tional student number for any purpose.

Section 345: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 54 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Section 345 heading: amended, on 13 June 2013, by section 38(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

Section 345: amended, on 13 June 2013, by section 38(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).

346 Offences (1) An authorised user commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding $15,000, who uses or discloses a person’s national student number otherwise than in accordance with the authorisations under section 344 that apply to that user.
(2) A person (person A) who is not an authorised user commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding $15,000, who, without reasonable excuse, keeps a record of, or requires the disclosure of, the national student number of another person (person B) if the number is, or is capable by person A of being, linked to any information that may lead person A to the identifica- tion of person B.
526 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 31 s 348 Section 346: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 54 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 346(1): amended, on 1 July 2013, by section 413 of the Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81).

Section 346(2): replaced, on 13 June 2013, by section 39 of the Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34).
347 Regulations (1) The Governor-General may from time to time, by Order in Council, make regulations identifying any agency or body as an authorised user for the pur- pose of this Part.

(2) A recommendation for an Order in Council to be made under this section may not be made unless the Privacy Commissioner has been consulted on the rec- ommendation.

Section 347: inserted, on 17 May 2006, by section 54 of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Part 31 Teacher registration Part 31: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
348 Interpretation In this Part and Schedule 21, unless the context otherwise requires,— authorisation, in relation to any person, means the entry of the person’s name on the list of authorised people, and authorised has a corresponding meaning early childhood education and care service means— (a) (b) a free kindergarten that is an early childhood service whose licence per- mits no child to attend for a period of more than 4 hours on any day; and any other early childhood service that is declared by regulations made under section 69(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 to be an early childhood education and care service for the purposes of this Part early childhood service means a licensed early childhood service (as defined in section 309) Education Council means the Education Council of Aotearoa New Zealand established under Part 32 employer means any one of the following who employs, or intends to employ, 1 or more teachers or authorised persons in a teaching position: (a) (b) (c) the board of trustees of a State school: the sponsor of a partnership school kura hourua: the managers of a school registered under section 35A: 527 Part 31 s 348 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (d) the person or body that appoints staff at an early childhood education and care service: (e) the Secretary, in his or her capacity as an employer under section 91N free kindergarten means an early childhood education and care centre (as de- fined in section 309) controlled by a free kindergarten association founded for the purpose of establishing and maintaining a kindergarten or kindergartens general education system means the system of education provided in— (a) (b) (c) registered schools; and early childhood services; and other educational institutions and services established or deemed to have been established, or provided, under this Act or the Education Act 1964 half-day has the meaning given by section 60 list of authorised people means the list kept under section 371(1) Minister means the Minister of the Crown
 who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being re- sponsible for the administration of this Part partnership school kura hourua has the meaning given by section 2(1) practising certificate means a certificate issued under section 361(2) or (6) professional leader means,— (a) (b) (c) (d) in the case of a school other than a partnership school kura hourua, the principal: in the case of a partnership school kura hourua, the person to whom the sponsor has assigned the role of supervising teaching practice: in the case of an early childhood service, the professional leader of the service: in the case of any other educational institution, the chief executive or person occupying an equivalent position register means the register kept under section 359 registration or registered, in relation to any person, means the entry of the person’s name on the register satisfactory recent teaching experience, in relation to any person at any time, means either of the following, satisfactorily completed by the person during the 5 years before that time: (a) an uninterrupted period of employment of 2 years (or some shorter period or periods approved by the Education Council for the person) in a teaching position or teaching positions in the general education system; or 528 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) Education Act 1989 Part 31 s 350 a period of employment of 2 years (or some shorter period or periods ap- proved by the Education Council for the person) in a position (or pos- itions) that (or each of which) in the Education Council’s opinion was equivalent to a teaching position, in an educational institution in New Zealand approved by the Education Council for the purposes of this Part teaching position means a position in the general education system that— (a) (b) (c) requires its holder to instruct students; or is the professional leader, deputy professional leader (however de- scribed), or assistant principal of a
 school; or is the professional leader of an early childhood service or other educa- tional institution.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 120 Section 348: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 348 half-day: inserted, on 29 October 2016, by section 41 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).

Restrictions on appointment and employment of teaching staff Heading: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
349 Restrictions on appointment of teachers (1) An employer may not appoint to a teaching position— (a) any person— (i) whose registration has been cancelled; and (ii) who has not since been registered again; or (b) (c) any person whose practising certificate is suspended under section 402 or 404(1)(d) or cancelled under section 404(1)(g); or any person whose authorisation has been cancelled and who has not since— (i) (ii) been authorised again; or been registered as a teacher; or (d) any person whose limited authority to teach is suspended under section 402 or 404(1)(d).
(2) No employer, other than a sponsor, may permanently appoint to any teaching position any person who does not hold a practising certificate.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 120A Section 349: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
350 Restrictions on continued employment of teachers (1) An employer may not continue to employ in a teaching position— 529 Part 31 s 350A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) any person— (i) whose registration has been cancelled; and (ii) who has not since been registered again; or (b) (c) any person whose practising certificate is suspended under section 404(1)(d); or any person whose authorisation has been cancelled and who has not since— (i) (ii) been authorised again; or been registered as a teacher; or (d) any person whose limited authority to teach is suspended under section 404(1)(d).
(2) No employer, other than a sponsor, may continue to employ in any teaching position any person who holds neither a practising certificate nor an authorisa- tion, if that person is not under the general supervision of a person who holds a practising certificate.
(3) No employer, other than a sponsor, may in any calendar year continue to em- ploy in any teaching position a person who holds neither a practising certificate nor an authorisation, if the sum of the following periods is not less than the period specified in subsection (4): (a) (b) (c) the period or periods for which that person has already during that year been employed by the employer in a teaching position or positions; and any period or periods (of which the employer is aware) for which that person has already during that year been employed by any other employ- er in a teaching position or positions; and any period or periods (of which the employer is aware) for which that person has during that year been employed as a teacher by the employer at an early childhood education and care service.
(4) The period referred to in subsection (3) is 20 half-days or any greater number of half-days the Education Council has allowed in any particular case, each be- ing a half-day on which the school or early childhood education and care ser- vice at which the person was then employed was open for instruction.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 120B Section 350: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
350A Special provision for chief executive of correspondence school The chief executive of a correspondence school is not required to be registered.

This section overrides sections 349 and 350.

Section 350A: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 141 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
(1) (2) 530 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 31 s 353 351 Restrictions on activities of teachers whose practising certificate or limited authority to teach is subject to interim suspension (1) This subsection applies to a person employed in a teaching position if— (a) (b) he or she holds a practising certificate that is suspended under section 402; or he or she has a limited authority to teach that is suspended under section 402.
(2) While subsection (1) applies to a person, his or her employer— (a) must ensure that he or she does not carry out any of the duties of the teaching position concerned; and (b) if the person is employed at a registered school or an early childhood education and care service, must take all reasonably practicable steps to ensure that he or she does not undertake any activities that might bring him or her into contact with students enrolled at the school or, as the case may be, children who attend the service.
(3) While subsection (1) applies to a person, he or she may not carry out any of the duties of the teaching position concerned.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 120C Section 351: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Heading: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Teacher registration 352 Applications for registration as teacher Any person may apply to the Education Council, on a form provided by the Education Council for the purpose and signed by the applicant, for registration as a teacher.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 121 Section 352: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
353 Registration The Education Council must register an applicant under section 352 if satisfied that the applicant— (a) (b) (c) is of good character; and is fit to be a teacher; and is satisfactorily trained to teach; and (d) meets the criteria for teacher registration established under section 382(1)(e); and (e) either— 531 Part 31 s 354 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (i) (ii) has not been convicted of a specified offence as defined in section 23(1) of the Vulnerable Children Act 2014; or has been granted an exemption under section 35 of the Vulnerable Children Act 2014 in respect of every conviction for a specified offence as defined in section 23(1) of that Act.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 122 Section 353: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

354 Determining whether training satisfactory (1) (2) In determining whether a person is satisfactorily trained to teach, the Education Council may take into account any relevant matters.
In determining whether a person is satisfactorily trained to teach, the Education Council must take into account— (a) the person’s qualifications; and (b) whether the person has satisfactorily completed training recognised by the Education Council as suitable for people who want to teach.

(3) Subsection (2) does not affect the generality of subsection (1).

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 124A Section 354: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
355 Determining good character and fitness to be teacher (1) (2) For the purpose of determining whether a person is of good character and fit to be a teacher, the Education Council must obtain a Police vet of the person.

Subsection (1) does not limit any other matters that the Education Council may take into account in determining character and fitness to be a teacher.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 124B Section 355: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
356 Appeals from decisions of Education Council (1) A person who is dissatisfied with all or any part of a decision of the Education Council under section 353, 357, or 361 (whether a decision to act or a decision to refuse to act) may, within 28 days after receiving notice of the decision from the Education Council or any longer period the court, on application made be- fore or after the end of the period, allows, appeal to the District Court against the decision.
The court must hear the appeal as soon as practicable, and may confirm, re- verse, or modify the decision concerned, or may refer the matter back to the Education Council in accordance with rules of court, or may give any decision that the Education Council could have given.

(2) 532 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 31 s 357 (3) Nothing in this section gives the court power to review any part of the Educa- tion Council’s decision that the appellant has not appealed against.
(4) Subject to any order of the court, every decision of the Education Council con- tinues in force and has effect pending the determination of an appeal against it.

(5) On any appeal under this section, the court may order the Education Council or the appellant to pay the costs incurred by the other party in respect of the ap- peal.
(6) The Education Council or the appellant may, with the leave of the High Court or the Court of Appeal, appeal to the Court of Appeal on a question of law against any decision made by the District Court on an appeal under this section.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 126 Section 356: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
357 Cancellation of registration as teacher (1) The Education Council must cancel a person’s registration if— (a) (b) (c) (d) the Education Council is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the person no longer satisfies the requirements for registration as a teacher (as set out in section 353); or the Education Council is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the regis- tration was effected by mistake or obtained by fraud; or the Disciplinary Tribunal has ordered, under section 404(1)(g), that the registration be cancelled; or the Competence Authority has ordered, under section 412(b), that the registration be cancelled.
(2) The Education Council may not cancel a person’s registration under subsection (1)(a) or (b) without first— (a) (b) taking all reasonable steps to ensure that the person is given notice of the reasons for the proposed cancellation; and giving the person a reasonable opportunity to make submissions and be heard, either in person or by counsel or other representative, on the pro- posed cancellation.
(3) (4) The fact that a person’s registration has been cancelled does not prevent the person from again being registered.

The Education Council must take all reasonable steps to ensure that employers are informed of, and may make public on its Internet site, the name of every person whose registration is cancelled under this section.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 129 Section 357: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
533 Part 31 s 358 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 357(1)(c): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 143(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 357(1)(d): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 143(2) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
358 Voluntary deregistration The Education Council must deregister a person if— (a) (b) the Education Council receives a written request from the person seeking deregistration; and the Education Council is satisfied that the person is not the subject of an investigation under Part 32.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 127A Section 358: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
359 Education Council to keep register of people registered as teachers (1) (2) For the purposes of this Part, the Education Council must keep a register of people who are registered as teachers.

If the Education Council is satisfied that any of the information contained in the register is incorrect, the Education Council must ensure that the information is corrected.
(3) The Education Council may annotate the register following— (a) (b) (c) an interim suspension under section 402(2); or an action by a disciplinary body under section 401 or 404; or an action by the Competence Authority under section 412.

(4) In the case where the register is annotated following an interim suspension, the annotation must be removed or corrected as soon as practicable after the matter is concluded (as specified in section 403(6)).
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 128 Section 359: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 359(3)(b): replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 144 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 359(3)(c): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 144 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
360 Matching of register information and information about payment of teacher salaries at payrolled schools (1) The purpose of this section is to facilitate the exchange of information between the Ministry and the Education Council for the purposes of enabling— (a) the Education Council, in regard to any person employed in a teaching position, to identify— (i) the person’s employer; and 534 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 31 s 360 (ii) (iii) the person’s registration status; and the status and currency of the person’s practising certificate; and (b) the Ministry, in regard to regular teachers and relieving teachers in re- ceipt of salaries at payrolled schools, to identify their salary entitlement or eligibility (if any) for an allowance on the basis of their registration or practising certificate (if any).
(2) For the purpose set out in subsection (1)(a), the Education Council may, in ac- cordance with arrangements under the Privacy Act 1993 previously agreed be- tween the Secretary and the Education Council,— (a) require the Secretary to supply all or any of the following information about all or any regular teachers and relieving teachers in receipt of sal- aries at payrolled schools: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) surname: first name: date of birth: gender: address: the school at which a teacher is employed: (vii) payroll number: (viii) registration number: (ix) number of half-days employed in a teaching position in any calen- dar year; and (b) compare the information supplied under paragraph (a) with the informa- tion contained in the register.
(3) For the purpose set out in subsection (1)(b), the Secretary may, in accordance with arrangements under the Privacy Act 1993 previously agreed between the Secretary and the Education Council,— (a) require the Education Council to supply all or any of the following infor- mation in regard to all or any people registered as teachers: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) surname: first name: date of birth: gender: address: the school at which a teacher is employed: (vii) registration number: (viii) registration or practising certificate expiry date: 535 Part 31 s 361 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ix) registration or practising certificate classification; and (b) compare the information supplied under paragraph (a) with the informa- tion held by the Ministry in regard to regular teachers and relieving teachers in receipt of salaries at payrolled schools.
(4) In this section, Ministry, payrolled school, regular teacher, relieving teach- er, school, and Secretary have the same meanings as in section 91A.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 128A Section 360: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

361 Practising certificates (1) Any person may apply to the Education Council, on a form provided by the Education Council, for a practising certificate.
(2) The Education Council must issue a practising certificate to every applicant who— (a) (b) is registered as a teacher; and has had a satisfactory Police vet within the past 3 years; and (c) meets the standards and criteria for the issue of practising certificates maintained by the Education Council under section 382(1)(h).

(3) A teacher’s practising certificate must show clearly that the teacher is regis- tered.
(4) Unless it is sooner cancelled or expires,— (a) a practising certificate issued to a teacher who already holds a current practising certificate expires— (i) (ii) on the third anniversary of the day on which the certificate already held expires; or at any earlier time that the Education Council specifies, by notice in the Gazette, in respect of all or any kinds of practising certifi- cate: (b) a practising certificate issued to a teacher who does not already hold a current practising certificate expires— (i) (ii) on the third anniversary of the day it is issued; or at any earlier time that the Education Council decides in accord- ance with the standards and criteria maintained under section 382(1)(h).
(5) A practising certificate expires when its holder’s registration is cancelled.
If a teacher applies to renew his or her practising certificate, the Education Council may issue a renewed practising certificate only if it is satisfied that the teacher— (a) has satisfactory recent teaching experience; and (6) 536 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) (c) Education Act 1989 Part 31 s 362 has had a satisfactory Police vet within the past 3 years; and has completed satisfactory professional development during the past 3 years; and (d) meets the standards and criteria maintained under section 382(1)(h).
(7) This subsection applies to a renewed practising certificate issued to a person if— (a) (b) the practising certificate he or she already holds when the renewed cer- tificate is issued is suspended under section 402; or he or she does not already hold a practising certificate when the renewed certificate is issued, but— (i) (ii) the practising certificate he or she last held was suspended under section 402 when it expired; and its suspension was not due to expire until a time after the issue of the renewed certificate.
(8) A renewed practising certificate to which subsection (7) applies must be treated as being suspended under section 402, and its suspension expires when the sus- pension of the previous practising certificate held by its holder would have ex- pired.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 130 Section 361: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
362 Cancellation of practising certificate (1) The Education Council must cancel a person’s practising certificate if— (a) (b) (c) (d) the Education Council is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the person no longer satisfies the requirements for holding a practising certificate (as set out in section 361(2)); or the Education Council is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the practis- ing certificate was issued by mistake or obtained by fraud; or the Disciplinary Tribunal has ordered, under section 404(1)(g), that the practising certificate be cancelled; or the Competence Authority has ordered, under section 412(b), that the practising certificate be cancelled.
(2) The Education Council may not cancel a person’s practising certificate under subsection (1)(a) or (b) without first— (a) (b) taking all reasonable steps to ensure that the person is given notice of the reasons for the proposed cancellation; and giving the person a reasonable opportunity to make submissions and be heard, either in person or by counsel or other representative, on the pro- posed cancellation.
537 Part 31 s 363 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) (4) The fact that a person’s practising certificate has been cancelled does not pre- vent the person from again holding a practising certificate.

The Education Council must take all reasonable steps to ensure that employers are informed of, and may make public on its Internet site, the name of every person whose practising certificate is cancelled under this section.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 129 Section 362: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 362(1)(d): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 145 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

363 Determining whether employment satisfactorily completed (1) (2) In determining whether a period of employment was satisfactorily completed by a person, the Education Council may take into account any relevant matters.
In determining whether a period of employment at a school, early childhood service, or other educational institution in New Zealand was satisfactorily com- pleted by a person, the Education Council may take into account— (a) (b) the views of the professional leader of the school, early childhood ser- vice, or other educational institution; or if the person was the professional leader of a school, early childhood ser- vice, or other educational institution, the views of his or her employer.
(3) Subsection (2) does not affect the generality of subsection (1).

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 125 Section 363: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
364 Fees and costs for registration and practising certificates (1) The Education Council may, by notice in the Gazette, fix fees for registration as a teacher or for the issue of practising certificates, and different fees may be fixed— (a) (b) in respect of registration effected in different circumstances; and for practising certificates of different kinds.
(2) A notice under subsection (1)— (a) is a disallowable instrument for the purposes of the Legislation Act 2012; and (b) must be published on a website maintained by the Education Council; and (c) must state where printed copies of it are available free.

(3) The Education Council must make printed copies of every notice under subsec- tion (1) that is in force available free at the place stated in it.
538 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 31 s 366 (4) Despite anything in this Act, the Education Council may refuse to register a person as a teacher or issue a practising certificate until the appropriate fee has been paid.
(5) If the Education Council cancels a teacher’s registration, it may, by written no- tice to the teacher, require the teacher to pay the Education Council any reason- able costs specified in the notice that were incurred by the Education Council in dealing with the proposal to cancel the registration or with the cancellation itself.

(6) The Education Council may recover from a teacher as a debt due to it costs re- quired under subsection (5) to be paid to the Education Council by the teacher.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 136 Section 364: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Heading: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Limited authority to teach 365 Purpose of limited authority to teach The purpose of granting a limited authority to teach is to enable employers to have access to skills that are in short supply and to enable those with specialist skills but not a teaching qualification to teach.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 130A Section 365: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

366 Limited authority to teach (1) Any person may apply to the Education Council, on a form provided by it for the purpose, for a limited authority to teach.
(2) The Education Council must grant a limited authority to teach if it considers that the applicant is of a suitable disposition and— (a) the applicant has the skills and experience appropriate to advance the learning of a student or group of students; or (b) the applicant has the skills that are in short supply.

(3) A person who has previously been authorised may be authorised again, wheth- er before or after the expiry or cancellation of the previous authorisation.
(4) In this section, suitable disposition, in relation to an applicant, means the ap- plicant— (a) (b) is of good character and fit to hold a limited authority to teach; and either— (i) has not been convicted of a specified offence as defined in section 23(1) of the Vulnerable Children Act 2014; or 539 Part 31 s 367 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ii) has been granted an exemption under section 35 of the Vulnerable Children Act 2014 in respect of every conviction for a specified offence as defined in section 23(1) of that Act.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 130B Section 366: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
367 Cancellation of limited authority to teach (1) The Education Council must cancel a person’s limited authority to teach if— (a) (b) (c) (d) the Education Council is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the person no longer satisfies the requirements for holding a limited authority to teach (as set out in section 366(2)); or the Education Council is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the author- isation was granted by mistake or obtained by fraud; or the Disciplinary Tribunal has ordered, under section 404(1)(g), that the limited authority to teach be cancelled; or the Competence Authority has ordered, under section 412(b), that the limited authority to teach be cancelled.
(2) The Education Council may not cancel a person’s limited authority to teach under subsection (1)(a) or (b) without first— (a) (b) taking all reasonable steps to ensure that the person is given notice of the reasons for the proposed cancellation; and giving the person a reasonable opportunity to make submissions and be heard, either in person or by counsel or other representative, on the pro- posed cancellation.
(3) (4) The fact that a person’s limited authority to teach has been cancelled does not prevent the person from again being given a limited authority to teach.
The Education Council must take all reasonable steps to ensure that employers are informed of, and may make public on its Internet site, the name of every person whose limited authority to teach is cancelled— (a) (b) under this section; or as a result of the Education Council refusing to grant a limited authority to teach on the ground that the person is not of good character or is not fit to hold a limited authority to teach.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 130G Section 367: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 367(1)(d): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 146 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
540 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 31 s 370 368 Determining character or fitness to hold limited authority to teach (1) In determining whether a person is of good character or is fit to hold a limited authority to teach, the Education Council— (a) must take into account and give due weight to— (i) (ii) any relevant skills and experience of the applicant; and any other relevant matters; and (b) (c) if the applicant is currently employed as the professional leader of a school, early childhood service, or other educational institution, must take into account and give due weight to the views of his or her employ- er; and if the applicant is currently employed at a school, early childhood ser- vice, or other educational institution, but not as its professional leader, must take into account and give due weight to the views of the professio- nal leader of the school, service, or institution.
(2) (3) For the purpose of determining whether a person is of good character and fit to hold a limited authority to teach, the Education Council must obtain a Police vet of the person.

Subsection (1) does not limit any other matters that the Education Council may take into account in determining good character and fitness to hold a limited authority to teach.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 130C Section 368: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
369 Appeals from decisions (1) Any person who is dissatisfied with all or any part of a decision of the Educa- tion Council under section 368 (whether a decision to act or a decision to re- fuse to act) may, within 28 days of receiving notice of the decision from the Education Council or any longer period the court (on application made before or after the end of the period) allows, appeal against the decision to the District Court.
(2) Section 356(2) to (6) applies to every appeal under subsection (1) of this sec- tion as if it were an appeal under section 356(1).

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 130D Section 369: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

370 Period of authorisation (1) Subject to subsection (2), a person’s authorisation expires after 3 years.

(2) Notwithstanding subsection (1), the Education Council may grant the author- isation for a period of less than 3 years.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 130E 541 Part 31 s 371 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 370: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

371 Education Council to keep list of persons who have limited authority to teach (1) (2) For the purposes of this Part, the Education Council must keep a list of persons who have a limited authority to teach.
If the Education Council is satisfied that any of the information contained in the list is incorrect, the Education Council must ensure that the information is corrected.

(3) The Education Council may annotate the list following— (a) (b) (c) an interim suspension under section 402(2); or an action by a disciplinary body under section 401 or 404; or an action by the Competence Authority under section 412.
(4) In the case where the list is annotated following an interim suspension, the an- notation must be removed or corrected as soon as practicable after the matter is concluded (as specified in section 403(6)).

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 130F Section 371: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 371(3)(b): replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 147 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 371(3)(c): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 147 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

372 Fees and costs for granting limited authority to teach (1) The Education Council may, by notice in the Gazette, fix fees for the granting of a limited authority to teach.
(2) A notice under subsection (1)— (a) is a disallowable instrument for the purposes of the Legislation Act 2012; and (b) must be published on a website maintained by the Education Council; and (c) must state where printed copies of it are available free.

(3) The Education Council must make printed copies of every notice under subsec- tion (1) that is in force available free at the place stated in it.
(4) Despite anything in this Act, the Education Council may refuse to grant any person a limited authority to teach until the appropriate fee has been paid.
If the Education Council cancels a limited authority to teach, it may, by written notice to the person concerned, require the person to pay the Education Council any reasonable costs specified in the notice that were incurred by the Education (5) 542 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 31 s 374 Council in dealing with the proposal to cancel the authorisation or with the cancellation itself.
(6) The Education Council may recover from any person as a debt due to it costs required by subsection (5) to be paid to the Education Council by that person.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 130H Section 372: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Heading: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Miscellaneous provisions 373 Education Council may disclose certain information If the management of any registered early childhood centre that is not an early childhood education and care service asks the Education Council for informa- tion about any person who is a prospective employee, the Education Council may— (a) make any inquiry about that person that it might have made if that per- son had applied for registration as a teacher; and (b) disclose to the management any information it holds or has obtained about that person.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 135A Section 373: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
374 Offences (1) Every person commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not ex- ceeding $2,000, who— (a) makes to the Education Council any statement as to any person’s qualifi- cations or experience that would amount to perjury if made on oath in judicial proceedings; or (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) not being a registered teacher, uses, or permits to be used, in connection with the person’s name or business, the words “registered teacher”, or any words or initials intended or likely to make any other person believe that the person is a registered teacher; or wilfully makes, or causes to be made, a false entry in or falsification of the register or a practising certificate; or falsely represents a document that is not a practising certificate to be a practising certificate; or falsely represents a document that is not a limited authority to teach to be a limited authority to teach; or is appointed to or continues to be employed in a position, knowing that the appointment or employment is contrary to section 349 or 350; or 543 Part 31 s 374 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) being the employer of a person to whom section 351(1) applies, fails or refuses to ensure that the person does not carry out any of the duties of the teaching position in which he or she is employed; or being the employer of a person to whom section 351(1) applies, fails or refuses to take all reasonably practicable steps to ensure that the person does not undertake any activities that might bring him
 or her into contact with students enrolled at the school or, as the case may be, children who attend the service; or being a person to whom section 351(1) applies, carries out any of the duties of the teaching position in which he or she is employed; or being a person who holds neither a practising certificate nor a limited au- thority to teach, in any calendar year continues in the employment of an employer (other than a sponsor) in a teaching position after the sum of the following periods is 20
 half-days, or any greater number of half-days the Education Council has allowed that person (each being a half-day on which a school or an early childhood education and care service at which the person was then employed was open for instruction): (i) (ii) (iii) the period or periods for which that person has already during that year been employed by the employer in a teaching position or teaching positions; and any period or periods for which that person has already during that year been employed by any other employer in a teaching pos- ition or teaching positions; and any period or periods for which that person has during that year been employed as a teacher by the employer at an early childhood education and care service; or being a person who holds neither a practising certificate nor a limited au- thority to teach, in any calendar year continues in the employment of the employer at an early childhood education and care service as a teacher after the sum of the following periods is 20 half-days, or any greater number of half-days the Education Council has allowed that person (each being a half-day on which an early childhood education and care service or a school at which the person was then employed was open for instruction): (i) (ii) (iii) the period or periods for which that person has already during that year been employed by the employer as a teacher; and any period or periods for which that person has already during that year been employed by an employer at any other early child- hood education and care service as a teacher; and any period or periods for which that person has during that year been employed in a teaching position by the employer at a State school.
544 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 32 s 378 (2) Every person commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not ex- ceeding $5,000, who appoints any person to a position, or continues to employ any person in a position, knowing that the appointment or employment is con- trary to section 349 or 350.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 137 Section 374: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
375 Periods of registration before commencement of this section This Part applies to any period of registration as a teacher under the Education Act 1964 before the commencement of this section as if it were a period of registration under this Part.

Section 375: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Part 32 Education Council Part 32: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
376 Purpose of Part The purpose of this Part is to establish an Education Council.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AA Section 376: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
377 Purpose of Education Council The purpose of the Education Council is to ensure safe and high quality leader- ship, teaching, and learning for children and young people in early childhood, primary, secondary, and senior secondary schooling in English medium and Māori medium settings through raising the status of the profession.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AA Section 377: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
378 Interpretation (1) In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— authorised person means the holder of an authority authority means a limited authority to teach granted under Part 31 Competence Authority means the Competence Authority established by rules made under section 388 Complaints Assessment Committee means the Complaints Assessment Com- mittee established by rules 545 Part 32 s 379 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 disciplinary body means either or both of the Complaints Assessment Com- mittee and the Disciplinary Tribunal Disciplinary Tribunal means the Disciplinary Tribunal established by rules rules means rules made under section 388 serious misconduct means conduct by a teacher— (a) that— (i) adversely affects, or is likely to adversely affect, the well-being or learning of 1 or more students; or (ii) reflects adversely on the teacher’s fitness to be a teacher; or (iii) may bring the teaching profession into disrepute; and (b) that is of a character or severity that meets the Education Council’s cri- teria for reporting serious misconduct teacher includes— (a) (b) (c) (d) a registered teacher; and a former registered teacher; and an authorised person; and a former authorised person.
(2) Terms used in this Part that are defined in section 348 have the meanings given to them by that section.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AB Section 378: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 378(1) Competence Authority: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 148 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Education Council Heading: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
379 Education Council of Aotearoa New Zealand established (1) (2) The Education Council of Aotearoa New Zealand (the Education Council) is established.

The Education Council is a body corporate with perpetual succession and is capable of— (a) (b) (c) holding real and personal property; and suing and being sued; and otherwise doing and suffering all that bodies corporate may lawfully do and suffer.

(3) Schedule 21 applies to the Education Council.


Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AC 546 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 32 s 382 Section 379: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

380 Composition of Education Council (1) (2) (3) The Education Council must have 9 members appointed in accordance with clause 1 of Schedule 21.
The Minister must appoint 1 of the members appointed under subsection (1) as chairperson, and that person holds office for the period specified in clause 5 of Schedule 21.

The term of office of every member is up to 3 years and members may be reap- pointed for 2 more terms of up to 3 years each.
(4) Despite subsection (3),— (a) (b) to provide for the staggered turnover of members, the Minister may spe- cify, when appointing members to hold office, different terms of office for members: every member continues in office until his or her successor comes into office.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AD Section 380: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
381 Duties of members of Education Council The collective and individual duties of members of the Education Council are set out in clauses 7 and 8 of Schedule 21.

Section 381: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
382 Functions of Education Council (1) The functions of the Education Council are as follows: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) to provide leadership to teachers and direction for the education profes- sion: to enhance the status of teachers and education leaders: to identify and disseminate best practice in teaching and leadership and foster the education profession’s continued development in light of re- search, and evidence of changes in society and technology: to carry out the functions under Part 31 relating to teacher registration: to establish and maintain any criteria for teacher registration under Part 31 that the Education Council considers necessary or desirable: to establish and maintain standards for qualifications that lead to teacher registration: to conduct, in conjunction with quality assurance agencies, approvals of teacher education programmes: 547 Part 32 s 383 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (h) to establish and maintain— (i) (ii) standards for ongoing practice; and criteria for the issue of practising certificates of different kinds: to ensure that appraisals made by professional leaders for the issue and renewal of practising certificates achieve a reasonable and consistent standard, by auditing and moderating the appraisals made for at least 10% of the practising certificates issued or renewed in each year: to establish and maintain a code of conduct for teachers under section 387: to monitor and enforce the requirements relating to mandatory reporting in this Part and Part 31: to perform the disciplinary functions in this Part relating to teacher mis- conduct and reports of teacher convictions: to set the criteria for reporting serious misconduct and for reporting on competence issues: to perform the functions in this Part relating to teacher competence: to co-ordinate a system providing for the vetting by the Police of all teachers: to perform any other functions conferred on it by this Act or any other enactment.
(i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (2) The functions specified in subsection (1)(e) and (h) must be performed as soon as practicable but no later than 2 years after the date of commencement of this section.

(3) When performing its functions and exercising its powers, the Education Coun- cil must act in accordance with the rules of natural justice.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AE Section 382: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
383 Powers of Education Council (1) The Education Council may, by notice in the Gazette, fix fees for all or any of the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) any addition or alteration to a person’s registration as a teacher: any addition or alteration to a person’s limited authority to teach: any addition or alteration to a person’s practising certificate: inspection of the register of registered teachers or any other register or any other documents kept by the Education Council that are open to in- spection: the supply of a copy of any entry in a register or other document referred to in paragraph (d): 548 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (f) (g) (h) Education Act 1989 Part 32 s 384 the provision of professional leadership: costs relating to the performance of disciplinary functions: any other matter for which this Act provides that the Education Council may charge fees.
(2) A notice under subsection (1)— (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (a) is a disallowable instrument for the purposes of the Legislation Act 2012; and (b) must be published on a website maintained by the Education Council; and (c) must state where printed copies of it are available free.

The Education Council must make printed copies of every notice under subsec- tion (1) that is in force available free at the place stated in it.
The Education Council may charge a fee for anything that it has fixed a fee for under subsection (1).

The Education Council may also charge for any goods or services it provides in accordance with its functions.
The Education Council may, by written notice to a governing body, require the governing body to give the Education Council, within a time specified in the notice, any information specified in the notice, and the governing body must within that time give the Education Council in writing all information so re- quired that is reasonably necessary or desirable for the Education Council to have for the proper administration of this Part and Part 31.
The Education Council has all other powers conferred by this Act or reason- ably necessary to enable it to perform its functions.

For the purposes of subsection (6), governing body means the board of any State school or the sponsor of any partnership school kura hourua or a service provider who operates any licensed early childhood service (within the mean- ing of section 309) or any certificated playgroup or managers of any school registered under section 35A.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AF Section 383: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

384 Ministerial powers (1) For the purpose of ascertaining whether the Education Council is complying, or has complied, with the provisions of this Part and Part 31, the Minister may commission an independent audit of the conduct of the Education Council’s functions.
(2) The Minister may, by written notice to the Education Council, require the Edu- cation Council to provide to the Minister any financial, statistical, or other in- 549 Part 32 s 385 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 formation, including information relating to the performance of the functions of the Education Council or any of its committees.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AG Section 384: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
385 Reports (1) At least every 3 years, following consultation with teachers, the Government, and the public, the Education Council must publish a report setting out its stra- tegic direction for the next 5 years.

(2) The Education Council must present to the House of Representatives an annual report on its operations, including, but not limited to, the audited financial statements of the Education Council.
Section 385: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

386 Advisory boards The Education Council may establish advisory boards for specific aspects of its operation or for particular issues as it sees fit.

Section 386: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
387 Code of conduct (1) The Education Council must, as soon as practicable but not later than 2 years after the date of commencement of this section, establish and maintain a code of conduct for teachers.
(2) When preparing the code of conduct (and any amendments to it), the Education Council— (a) must take all reasonable steps— (i) (ii) to consult those who will be bound by it; and to consult the State Services Commissioner; and (b) must have regard to any relevant minimum standards of integrity and conduct or code of conduct that the State Services Commissioner sets or issues under section 57 of the State Sector Act 1988.
(3) The code of conduct must be signed by the chairperson of the Education Coun- cil, and— (a) (b) (c) notice of it must be given in the Gazette; and the notice must say where copies of the code may be obtained free of charge; and the notice must give the date on which the code comes into force, which must be a date on or after the date of the Gazette notice; and 550 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 32 s 388 (d) the Education Council must take all reasonable steps to ensure that those bound by the code are aware of its existence and are able to obtain cop- ies of it, including (but not limited to) publishing the code on its Internet site.
(4) The Education Council may amend the code of conduct, and every amend- ment— (a) must be notified in the Gazette; and (5) (6) (7) (b) forms part of the code on the date specified in the notice as the date on which it will come into force.

The code of conduct, and every amendment of it, is a disallowable instrument for the purposes of the Legislation Act 2012.

The code of conduct prepared under this section is binding on all teachers who hold a practising certificate and on all authorised persons.
The code of ethics that the New Zealand Teachers Council prepared and that was in existence immediately before the commencement of this section is to be treated as the code of conduct prepared under this section until a code of con- duct is prepared in accordance with subsection (1).

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AI Section 387: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
388 Education Council to make rules (1) The Education Council must, as soon as practicable, make rules providing for— (a) a Complaints Assessment Committee to— (i) (ii) investigate complaints of misconduct about, and reports of con- victions of, teachers; and carry out any other function, and exercise any power, given under this Act or delegated to it by the Education Council; and (b) a Disciplinary Tribunal to conduct hearings relating to misconduct by, and convictions of, individual teachers, and to exercise the powers given under this Act; and (ba) a Competence Authority to consider reports and complaints about teach- er competence and to exercise the powers given under this Act; and (c) (d) the practices and procedures of the disciplinary bodies and the Compe- tence Authority; and the procedures of the Education Council for dealing with reports re- ceived under the mandatory reporting provisions in sections 392 to 395 and 397; and 551 Part 32 s 389 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (e) the procedures relating to Police vetting, and in particular the rights of persons who are vetted.
(2) The Education Council may make rules for any other purpose relating to the performance of its functions.

(3) When preparing rules (and any amendments to them), the Education Council must take all reasonable steps to consult with those affected by the rules.
(4) When rules are made under this section,— (a) (b) (c) (d) notice of them must be given in the Gazette; and the notice must say where copies of the rules may be obtained free of charge; and the notice must give the date on which the rules come into force, which must be a date on or after the date of the Gazette notice; and the Education Council must take all reasonable steps to ensure that those affected by the rules are aware of their existence and are able to obtain copies of them.
(5) Rules made under this section are a legislative instrument and a disallowable instrument for the purposes of the Legislation Act 2012 and must be presented to the House of Representatives under section 41 of that Act.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AJ Section 388: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 388(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 149(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 388(1)(ba): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 149(2) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 388(1)(c): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 149(3) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

389 Delegations (1) The Education Council may delegate any of its powers (other than this power of delegation), either generally or specifically, as it sees fit.
(2) Despite subsection (1), the Education Council may not delegate its powers— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) to appoint a chief executive: to make rules: relating to voluntary deregistration: relating to cancellation of registration, practising certificates, or limited authorities to teach: to establish and maintain a code of conduct for teachers under section 387.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AJA 552 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 32 s 392 Section 389: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

390 Chief executive and employees (1) The Education Council may appoint a chief executive and any other employees it thinks necessary for the efficient performance of its functions.

(2) No person appointed under subsection (1) may be a member of the Education Council.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AJB Section 390: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
391 Superannuation (1) Any person who, immediately before becoming an employee of the Education Council, is a contributor to the Government Superannuation Fund under Part 2 or 2A of the Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956 or to the State Sector Retirement Savings Scheme is for the purpose of that Act treated as being em- ployed in the Government service so long as he or she continues to be an employee of the Education Council.
(2) The Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956 applies to the person in all re- spects as if the person’s service as an employee of the Education Council were government service.

(3) Nothing in subsection (1) entitles a person to become a contributor to the Gov- ernment Superannuation Fund or to the State Sector Retirement Savings Scheme if the person has ceased to be a contributor.
(4) For the purpose of applying the Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956, the chief executive of the Education Council is the controlling authority.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AJC Section 391: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Mandatory reporting Heading: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
392 Mandatory reporting of dismissals and resignations (1) When an employer dismisses a teacher for any reason, the employer must im- mediately report the dismissal to the Education Council.
(2) If, within the 12 months before the resignation of a teacher from a teaching position (including a fixed-term position) or the expiry of the term of a teach- er’s fixed-term position, the teacher’s employer had advised the teacher that it was dissatisfied with, or intended to investigate, any aspect of the teacher’s conduct, or the teacher’s competence, the employer must, immediately after the resignation or expiry, report it to the Education Council.
553 Part 32 s 393 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) Every report under this section must be in writing and must include,— (a) (b) in the case of a report of dismissal, the reason for the dismissal; and in the case of a report of a resignation or expiry,— (i) (ii) a description of the conduct or competence issues that the employ- er was concerned about; and a report of what action (if any) the employer took with respect to the issues.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AK Section 392: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

393 Mandatory reporting of complaints received about former employees (1) The former employer of a teacher must immediately report to the Education Council if, within 12 months after a teacher ceases to be employed by the em- ployer, the employer receives a complaint about the teacher’s conduct or com- petence while he or she was an employee.
(2) Every report under this section must be in writing, and must include,— (a) (b) (c) in the case of an oral complaint, a description of aspects of the teacher’s conduct or competence complained of; and in the case of a written complaint, a copy of the complaint; and a report of what action (if any) the employer took with respect to the matters complained of.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AL Section 393: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
394 Mandatory reporting of possible serious misconduct (1) The employer of a teacher must immediately report to the Education Council if it has reason to believe that the teacher has engaged in serious misconduct.

(2) Every report under this section must— (a) (b) (c) be in writing; and include a description of the conduct of the teacher that the employer be- lieves to be serious misconduct; and include a description of what action (if any) the employer has taken in relation to it.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AM Section 394: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

554 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 32 s 397 395 Mandatory reporting of failure to reach required level of competence (1) The employer of a teacher must immediately report to the Education Council if it is satisfied that, despite undertaking competency procedures with the teacher, the teacher has not reached the required level of competence.
(2) Every report under this section must— (a) (b) (c) be in writing; and include a description of the competence issues leading to the report; and include a description of the action that the employer has taken in relation to it.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AN Section 395: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
396 Offence of failing to report (1) An employer or a former employer commits an offence and is liable on convic- tion to a fine not exceeding $25,000 if it fails without reasonable justification to report to the Education Council in relation to any matter of conduct as re- quired under section 392, 393, or 394.
(2) An employer or a former employer commits an offence and is liable on convic- tion to a fine not exceeding $5,000 if it fails without reasonable justification to report to the Education Council in relation to any matter of competence as re- quired under section 392, 393, or 395.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AO Section 396: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
397 Mandatory reporting of convictions (1) (2) (3) (4) Every holder of a practising certificate and every authorised person who is con- victed of an offence punishable by imprisonment for 3 months or more must, within 7 days of conviction, report the conviction to the Education Council.

Failure to report a conviction to the Education Council in accordance with sub- section (1) is misconduct that may give rise to disciplinary proceedings.
The Registrar of every court must, unless the court expressly orders otherwise, report to the Education Council when a person whom the Registrar believes to be, or to have been, a teacher is convicted of an offence punishable by impris- onment for 3 months or more.

If the Registrar has reported a conviction to the Education Council under sub- section (3), then, if that conviction is subsequently quashed, the Registrar must notify the Education Council of that fact.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AP Section 397: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

555 Part 32 s 398 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Heading: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Disciplinary functions 398 Disciplinary bodies (1) (2) (3) (4) The constitution of the disciplinary bodies must be set out in the rules, and those rules must be consistent with this section.
Both disciplinary bodies may operate in panels, and more than 1 panel of each body may operate at any one time.

The Disciplinary Tribunal must include at least 1 person who is selected from a list, prepared by the Minister after consultation with the Education Council, of people who are not teachers, employers, or members of an employing body.

The majority of members on the Disciplinary Tribunal, and on every panel of the Disciplinary Tribunal, must be registered teachers.
(5) No member of the Complaints Assessment Committee may be a member of the Disciplinary Tribunal.

(6) Rules must provide for the replacement of any member of a disciplinary body who, in relation to a particular complaint,— (a) made the complaint; or (b) is otherwise in a position of conflict of interest.

(7) When performing their functions and exercising their powers, the disciplinary bodies must act in accordance with the rules of natural justice.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AQ Section 398: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

399 Complaints about conduct (1) A person who wishes to make a complaint about the conduct of a teacher, in- cluding complaints about possible breaches of the code of conduct prepared by the Education Council under section 387, must first make the complaint to the teacher’s employer, unless one of the circumstances in subsection (2)(a) to (d) applies.
(2) Any person (including a parent, employer, or member of the Education Coun- cil) may, at any time, make a written complaint to the Education Council about the conduct of a teacher— (a) (b) if the complaint is about a teacher who is not currently employed by an employer; or if the complainant considers, on reasonable grounds, that the employer will not be able to deal with the complaint effectively because of an ac- tual or perceived conflict of interest; or 556 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 32 s 401 (c) if the complaint has been made to the employer, but the complainant is not satisfied with the way in which the complaint is being, or was, dealt with; or (d) in any other exceptional circumstance.
(3) A complaint under this section by an employer or former employer must in- clude a report of any action that the employer or former employer has taken in relation to it.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AR Section 399: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
400 Complaints and reports relating to teacher conduct (1) The Education Council may refer to the Complaints Assessment Committee— (a) any report received by it under any of sections 392 to 394 and 397 that relates to teacher conduct; and (b) any complaint received by it under section 399.

(2) (3) The Education Council may refer to the Complaints Assessment Committee any matters that relate to teacher conduct of its own motion as it sees fit.
In relation to a complaint received under section 399 from a person other than the current employer of the teacher concerned,— (a) (b) if the Complaints Assessment Committee considers that the complaint should have been sent first to the teacher’s employer or former employ- er, it must refer the matter to the employer or former employer; and if the teacher is currently employed by an employer and it has not al- ready referred the matter to the employer under paragraph (a), it must notify the employer that it has received a complaint about the teacher.
(4) An employer to whom a complaint is referred under subsection (3), or who is required to provide information in the course of an investigation by the Com- plaints Assessment Committee, must report to the Complaints Assessment Committee as required by it.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AS Section 400: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
401 Powers of Complaints Assessment Committee (1) (2) The Complaints Assessment Committee may investigate any report, complaint, or matter referred to it under section 400.
Following an investigation, the Complaints Assessment Committee may do 1 or more of the following: (a) (b) resolve to take the matter no further: refer the teacher concerned to a competency review: 557 Part 32 s 402 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (c) refer the teacher concerned to an impairment process, which may in- volve either or both of the following: (i) (ii) assessment of an impairment: assistance with an impairment: (d) if there has been made a finding of misconduct that is not serious mis- conduct, by agreement with the teacher and the person who made the complaint or report or referred the matter, do 1 or more of the following: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) censure the teacher: impose conditions on the teacher’s practising certificate or author- ity, such as (without limitation) requiring the teacher to undergo supervision or professional development: suspend the teacher’s practising certificate or authority for a speci- fied period, or until specified conditions are met: annotate the register or the list of authorised persons in a specified manner: direct the Education Council to impose conditions on any subse- quent practising certificate issued to the teacher.
(3) (4) The Complaints Assessment Committee may, at any time, refer a matter to the Disciplinary Tribunal for a hearing.

The Complaints Assessment Committee must refer to the Disciplinary Tribunal any matter that the Committee considers may possibly constitute serious mis- conduct.

(5) When a matter is referred to the Disciplinary Tribunal under subsection (4), a notice must be sent to the teacher concerned setting out the charge of miscon- duct against him or her.
(6) Any person authorised by the Complaints Assessment Committee may require an employer, a former employer, or a government agency to provide informa- tion that the person considers necessary for the purposes of an investigation under this section.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AT Section 401: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
402 Interim suspension until matter about or involving possible serious misconduct concluded (1) At any time between when the Complaints Assessment Committee receives a complaint or receives or becomes aware of a report that is about or involves a teacher’s possible serious misconduct and when the matter is concluded (as specified in section 403(6)), the Complaints Assessment Committee may apply to the chairperson of the Disciplinary Tribunal for an interim suspension of the teacher’s practising certificate or authority.
558 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 32 s 403 (2) On an application under subsection (1) for an interim suspension, the chair- person of the Disciplinary Tribunal may, having regard primarily to the safety of the children in the school or early childhood education and care service and to the reputation of the teaching profession, either with or without a hearing, suspend the teacher’s practising certificate or authority.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AU Section 402: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
403 Duration of interim suspension (1) The duration of an interim suspension under section 402 is initially until the earliest of the following occurs: (a) (b) (c) (d) the expiry of a period specified by the chairperson of the Disciplinary Tribunal at the time the interim suspension commences: the expiry of a period specified by the chairperson of the Disciplinary Tribunal after the interim suspension commences: any conditions specified by the chairperson of the Disciplinary Tribunal are met: the interim suspension is otherwise lifted or revoked, for example, as the result of a review under subsection (2).
(2) The chairperson of the Disciplinary Tribunal must review his or her initial in- terim suspension decision if the teacher— (a) requests him or her to do so at any time during the initial interim period of suspension; and (b) provides a written explanation or statement in support of the request.
(3) The Disciplinary Tribunal may renew an interim suspension under section 402 for further successive periods specified by the chairperson of the Disciplinary Tribunal, if, at the end of the relevant period of interim suspension,— (a) (b) the matter has not been concluded; and the interim suspension has not been otherwise lifted or revoked, for ex- ample, as the result of an appeal against it under subsection (4).
(4) A teacher whose practising certificate or authority is subject to an interim sus- pension under section 402 that is renewed under subsection (3) may, at any time during a further period of interim suspension, appeal the interim suspen- sion to the Disciplinary Tribunal at a hearing, if he or she believes that there is an unreasonable delay in concluding the matter.

(5) A hearing under subsection (4) is a hearing before the Disciplinary Tribunal, and sections 405 to 409 apply to it.
(6) For the purposes of this section and sections 359(4) and 402(1), a matter is concluded when the later of the following occurs in relation to the complaint or report: 559 Part 32 s 404 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) the Complaints Assessment Committee has carried out whatever action it decides to take under section 401(2): the Disciplinary Tribunal has carried out whatever action it decides to take under section 404(1), if the Complaints Assessment Committee has referred the matter to the Disciplinary Tribunal under section 401(3) or (4).
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AUA Section 403: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
404 Powers of Disciplinary Tribunal (1) Following a hearing of a charge of serious misconduct, or a hearing into any matter referred to it by the Complaints Assessment Committee, the Disciplin- ary Tribunal may do 1 or more of the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) any of the things that the Complaints Assessment Committee could have done under section 401(2): censure the teacher: impose conditions on the teacher’s practising certificate or authority for a specified period: suspend the teacher’s practising certificate or authority for a specified period, or until specified conditions are met: annotate the register or the list of authorised persons in a specified man- ner: impose a fine on the teacher not exceeding $3,000: order that the teacher’s registration or authority or practising certificate be cancelled: require any party to the hearing to pay costs to any other party: require any party to pay a sum to the Education Council in respect of the costs of conducting the hearing: direct the Education Council to impose conditions on any subsequent practising certificate issued to the teacher.
(2) Despite subsection (1), following a hearing that arises out of a report under sec- tion 397 of the conviction of a teacher, the Disciplinary Tribunal may not do any of the things specified in subsection (1)(f), (h), or (i).

(3) A fine imposed on a teacher under subsection (1)(f), and a sum ordered to be paid to the Education Council under subsection (1)(i), are recoverable as debts due to the Education Council.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AW Section 404: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
560 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 32 s 406 405 Evidence at Disciplinary Tribunal hearings (1) The Disciplinary Tribunal may— (a) (b) receive evidence on oath (and for that purpose an officer or employee of the Education Council may administer an oath); and permit a person appearing as a witness before it to give evidence by written statement and verify that statement by oath.
(2) A hearing before the Disciplinary Tribunal is a judicial proceeding for the pur- poses of section 109 of the Crimes Act 1961 (which relates to punishment for perjury).

(3) (4) (5) (6) Except as provided in subsections (4) to (6), every hearing of the Disciplinary Tribunal must be held in public.
If the Disciplinary Tribunal is of the opinion that it is proper to do so, having regard to the interest of any person (including (without limitation) the privacy of the complainant (if any)) and to the public interest, it may hold a hearing or part of a hearing in private.

The Disciplinary Tribunal may, in any case, deliberate in private as to its deci- sion or as to any question arising in the course of a hearing.
If the Disciplinary Tribunal is of the opinion that it is proper to do so, having regard to the interest of any person (including (without limitation) the privacy of the complainant (if any)) and to the public interest, it may make any 1 or more of the following orders: (a) (b) (c) an order prohibiting the publication of any report or account of any part of any proceedings before it, whether held in public or in private: an order prohibiting the publication of the whole or any part of any books, papers, or documents produced at any hearing: an order prohibiting the publication of the name, or any particulars of the affairs, of the person charged or any other person.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AX Section 405: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
406 Powers of Disciplinary Tribunal in relation to witnesses (1) The Disciplinary Tribunal may require a person to do either or both of the fol- lowing: (a) (b) attend and give evidence at a hearing of the Disciplinary Tribunal: produce any documents, records, or other information in his or her cus- tody or control that relate to the subject matter of the hearing, whether specified by the Disciplinary Tribunal or not.
(2) A requirement under subsection (1) must be in writing and signed by the chair- person of the Disciplinary Tribunal.
561 Part 32 s 407 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) A person required to attend a hearing is entitled to be paid, by the party calling the person (or, if called on the volition of the Disciplinary Tribunal itself, by the Education Council), witnesses’ fees, allowances, and travelling expenses according to the scales for the time being prescribed by regulations made under the Criminal Procedure Act 2011, and those regulations apply accordingly.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AY Section 406: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
407 Offences (1) A person commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not exceed- ing $500, who, without lawful justification, fails or refuses— (a) (b) (c) to attend and give evidence when required by the Disciplinary Tribunal; or to answer truthfully and fully any question put to him or her by a mem- ber of the Disciplinary Tribunal; or to produce any document, record, or other information as required by the Disciplinary Tribunal.
(2) A person commits an offence, and is liable on conviction to a fine not exceed- ing $1,000, if, without lawful excuse, he or she breaches an order made by the Disciplinary Tribunal under section 405(6).

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AZ Section 407: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
408 Privileges and immunities (1) Every person who does any of the following has the same privileges as wit- nesses have in a court: (a) (b) (c) provides documents, things, or information to a disciplinary body: produces documents or things to a disciplinary body: gives evidence to, or answers questions from, a disciplinary body.

Every counsel appearing before a disciplinary body has the same privileges and immunities as counsel in a court.
If a person is represented at a hearing before a disciplinary body by a person other than a barrister or solicitor,— (a) any communications between the person and the representative in rela- tion to the hearing are as privileged as they would have been if the repre- sentative had been a barrister or solicitor; and (b) the representative is treated as counsel for the purposes of subsection (2).
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AZA (2) (3) 562 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 32 s 410AA Section 408: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

409 Appeals from decisions of disciplinary bodies (1) (2) The teacher who is the subject of a decision by the Disciplinary Tribunal made under section 402(2) or 404 may appeal against that decision to the District Court.
The Complaints Assessment Committee may, with the leave of the Education Council, appeal to the District Court against a decision of the Disciplinary Tri- bunal made under section 402(2) or 404.

(3) An appeal under this section must be made within 28 days after receipt of writ- ten notice of the decision, or any longer period that the court allows.

(4) Section 356(3) to (6) applies to every appeal under this section as if it were an appeal under section 356(1).
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AZB Section 409: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 409 heading: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 150(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 409(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 150(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 409(1): amended, on 1 March 2017, by section 261 of the District Court Act 2016 (2016 No 49).
Section 409(2): amended, on 1 March 2017, by section 261 of the District Court Act 2016 (2016 No 49).

Review of competence Heading: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

410AA Competence Authority (1) (2) (3) (4) The constitution of the Competence Authority must be set out in rules made under section 388, and those rules must be consistent with this section.
The Competence Authority may operate in panels, and more than 1 panel may operate at any one time.

The Competence Authority must include at least 1 person who is selected from a list, prepared by the Minister after consultation with the Education Council, of people who are not teachers, employers, or members of an employing body.

The majority of members on the Competence Authority, and on every panel of the Competence Authority, must hold practising certificates.
(5) No member of the Competence Authority may be a member of the Complaints Assessment Committee or the Disciplinary Tribunal.

(6) The rules must provide for the replacement of any member of the Competence Authority who, in relation to a particular complaint,— 563 Part 32 s 410 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) made the complaint; or (b) is otherwise in a position of conflict of interest.
(7) The rules must also provide for the Competence Authority to co-opt up to 2 members onto the Authority for their specialist knowledge and expertise in re- lation to a particular complaint.

(8) Members co-opted onto the Competence Authority may be in addition to any limit on the number of members set in the rules.

(9) When performing its functions and exercising its powers, the Competence Au- thority must act in accordance with the rules of natural justice.
Section 410AA: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 151 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

410 Complaints about competence (1) A person who wishes to make a complaint about a teacher’s competence must first make the complaint to the teacher’s employer, unless one of the circum- stances in subsection (2)(a) to (d) applies.
(2) Any person (including a parent, an employer, or a member of the Education Council) may, at any time, make a written complaint to the Education Council about the competence of a teacher— (a) (b) (c) if the complaint is about a teacher who is not currently employed by an employer; or if the complainant considers, on reasonable grounds, that the employer will not be able to deal with the complaint effectively because of an ac- tual or perceived conflict of interest; or if the complaint has been made to the employer, but the complainant is not satisfied with the way in which the complaint is being, or was, dealt with; or (d) in any other exceptional circumstance.
(3) The Education Council may investigate any matters that relate to teacher com- petence of its own motion as it sees fit.

(3A) The Education Council may, after any investigation it decides to make, refer to the Competence Authority a complaint or other matter that relates to compe- tence for a decision as to whether the required level of competence has been attained.
(4) A complaint under this section by an employer or former employer must in- clude a description of the competence issues leading to the complaint and the actions (if any) that the employer or former employer has undertaken in rela- tion to them.
(5) If the Education Council considers that a complaint under this section should first have been sent to the teacher’s employer, it must refer it to the employer; 564 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 32 s 411 and, in any other case, it must notify the employer (if the teacher is currently employed by an employer) that— (a) it has received a complaint about the teacher’s competence; or (as the case may be) (b) it is investigating the teacher’s competence of its own motion.
(6) When the Education Council refers a complaint to an employer, the employer must report as required by the Education Council.

(7) If the Education Council is satisfied that the employer has not responded, or has not been able to respond, to the complaint in a satisfactory way, the Educa- tion Council may investigate the complaint.

(8) When a complaint about competence is made by a member of the Education Council, that member may not be involved in any investigation of the com- plaint.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AZC Section 410: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 410(3A): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 152 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
411 Investigation by Education Council of mandatory reports relating to competence and referral to Competence Authority for decision (1AA) The Education Council may, after any investigation it decides to make, refer to the Competence Authority a report received by it under section 392, 393, or 395 that relates to competence.
(1) When investigating a report that relates to competence under section 392, 393, or 395, the Education Council may require the teacher’s employer or former employer to supply information in addition to the information supplied in the report, and in that case, the employer or former employer must supply it.

(2) When a report that relates to competence is made under section 392, 393, or 395 by a member of the Education Council, that member must not be involved in any investigation of the report.
Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AZCA Section 411: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 411 heading: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 153(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 411(1AA): inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 153(2) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Section 411(1): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 153(3) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Section 411(2): amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 153(4) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
565 Part 32 s 412 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 412 Powers of Competence Authority after finding required level of competence not attained Following any investigation of a complaint or other matter by the Education Council under section 410, or of a report by the Education Council under sec- tion 411, and referral to the Competence Authority, the Competence Authority may, if satisfied that a teacher has not attained the required level of compe- tence,— (a) do any 1 or more of the following: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) impose conditions on the teacher’s practising certificate or author- ity: refer the teacher to an impairment process, which may involve either or both of the following: (A) (B) assessment of an impairment: assistance with an impairment: annotate the register or the list of authorised persons in a specified manner, in relation to any action taken under subparagraph (i): direct the Education Council to impose conditions on any subse- quent practising certificate or authority issued to the teacher; or (b) order the Education Council to cancel the teacher’s registration, practis- ing certificate, or authority.
Section 412: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 154 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

412A Appeals from decisions of Competence Authority (1) A teacher who is the subject of a decision by the Competence Authority made under section 412 may appeal against that decision to a District Court.

(2) An appeal under this section must be made within 28 days after receipt of writ- ten notice of the decision, or any longer period that the court allows.
(3) Section 356(3) to (6) applies to every appeal under this section as if it were an appeal under section 356(1).

Section 412A: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 154 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Police vetting Heading: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
413 Education Council must co-ordinate Police vetting (1) The Education Council must establish a system for co-ordinating Police vet- ting, in relation to— teacher registration and the issue of practising certificates; and the granting of authorities to teach.

(a) (b) 566 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 414 (2) A copy of the result of the Police vet of a person must be given to the person or body that requested it and the person who is the subject of the vet.
(3) The Education Council must establish internal procedures for dealing with the Police vet requested for its own purposes that must, in particular,— (a) identify the person or office holder within the Education Council to whom the results of the Police vet must be sent; and (b) ensure that strict confidentiality is observed for the Police vet.

Compare: 1989 No 80 s 139AZD Section 413: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Part 33 State integrated schools Part 33: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
414 Interpretation (1) In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,— board, in relation to a State integrated school, means its board of trustees es- tablished under Part 9 education with a special character means education within the framework of a particular or general religious or philosophical belief, and associated with ob- servances or traditions appropriate to that belief effective date, in relation to an integration agreement, means the date on which the integration of the school takes place integration has the same meaning as in section 2(1) integration agreement means an agreement entered into under section 421 land has the same meaning as in the Land Transfer Act 1952 proprietor means the body corporate that— (a) (b) has the primary responsibility for determining the special character of a school registered under section 35A and for supervising the maintenance of that special character; and owns, holds in trust, or leases the land and buildings that constitute the premises of the private school or a State integrated school State integrated school has the same meaning as in section 2(1).
(2) Unless the context otherwise requires,— (a) every reference in this Part to a State school is to be treated as excluding a State integrated school: 567 Part 33 s 415 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) every reference in the other Parts of this Act and in any other enactment or document to— (i) (ii) (iii) a State primary school is to be treated as including a State integra- ted school that is a primary school: a State secondary school is to be treated as including a State inte- grated school that is a secondary school: a State school is to be treated as including a reference to a State integrated school.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 2 Section 414: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

415 Part to bind the Crown This Part binds the Crown.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 2A Section 415: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Conditional integration Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
416 Preservation of special character of State integrated schools (1) A State integrated school must on integration continue to have the right to re- flect, through its teaching and conduct, the education with a special character provided by it.

Integration must not jeopardise the special character of a State integrated school.
The proprietor of a State integrated school must, subject to the provisions of the integration agreement,— (a) (b) continue to have the responsibility to supervise the maintenance and preservation of the education with a special character provided by the school: continue to have the right to determine what is necessary to preserve and safeguard the special character of the education provided by the school and described in the integration agreement.
If, in the opinion of a proprietor, the special character of the school as defined and described in the integration agreement has been or is likely to be jeopar- dised, or the education with a special character provided by the school as de- fined and described in the integration agreement is no longer preserved and safeguarded, the proprietor may invoke the powers conferred on the proprietor by this Part.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 3 (2) (3) (4) 568 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 418 Section 416: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
417 State integrated schools part of State system (1) Subject to subsection (2),— (a) (b) (c) on integration, a State integrated school becomes part of the State system of education in New Zealand; and a State integrated school is subject to all the provisions of this Act and of all regulations made under this Act; and a State integrated school is subject to all the provisions of the State Sec- tor Act 1988 as if service in the employment of the board of the school were education service within the meaning of that Act.
(2) In their application to State integrated schools, the enactments applied to State integrated schools by subsection (1) are subject to sections 416 and 475, and to the other provisions of this Part that relate to State integrated schools.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 4 Section 417: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Procedure for establishing, disestablishing, merging, and closing State integrated schools Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
418 Application to negotiate integration (1) (2) (3) The proprietor of a school that is registered under section 35A, and any person who proposes to establish a school with the intention that it become a State in- tegrated school, may apply to the Minister to enter into negotiations for inte- gration under this Part.

If the Minister accepts an application to negotiate, the applicant and the Minis- ter may enter into negotiations for an integration agreement under section 421.
If the Minister declines the application, the applicant may make a fresh appli- cation at any time.

(4) Without limiting the factors that the Minister may consider, the Minister must, in considering an application, consider the nature, character, and capacity of the existing network of schools.
(5) The Minister may, in the Minister’s absolute discretion,— (a) (b) accept applications to enter into negotiations for integration under this Part; and after giving any public notice that the Minister considers appropriate, de- cide not to consider applications from particular areas.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 5 569 Part 33 s 419 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 418: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
419 Applications relating to proposed schools If a person who proposes to establish a school with the intention that it become a State integrated school makes an application under section 418, this Part ap- plies to the application and to any subsequent negotiations and agreements pri- or to integration as if— (a) (b) the applicant were a proprietor; and the school were a school registered under section 35A.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 6 Section 419: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

420 Negotiation of integration agreements (1) The Minister and an applicant may commence negotiations for an integration agreement under section 421 at any time after the Minister has accepted an ap- plication under section 418.

(2) During the course of negotiations, the Minister may consult any interested per- sons or groups that the Minister considers appropriate.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 6A Section 420: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

421 Integration agreements (1) (2) The Minister (and only the Minister) may approve the establishment of a pri- vate school as a State integrated school.

The Minister must signify his or her approval by entering into an integration agreement with the proprietor.
(3) No proprietor is competent to execute an integration agreement unless the pro- prietor is constituted as a body corporate.
(4) Every integration agreement must record the agreement of the proprietor that no persons employed at the school and paid for their services in whole or in part out of money appropriated by Parliament may be— (a) (b) paid by the proprietor or the proprietor’s agents any remuneration addi- tional to that provided for by this Act; or granted or permitted any condition of service more favourable than that permitted in the case of a person employed in a State school.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 7(1)–(5) Section 421: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
570 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 423 422 Other matters that may be included in integration agreements (1) Without restricting the provisions that may be included in an integration agree- ment, any integration agreement may include provisions for all or any of the following matters: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) specifying the land and buildings that constitute the school to which the integration agreement refers: specifying any part of the land or buildings owned or leased by the pro- prietor and used in conjunction with the school before integration that do not constitute part of the school: describing the education with a special character for which the school is or was originally established: prescribing the religious or philosophical instruction and observances that are to form part of the school programme after integration: providing for the determination of the maximum number of students who may be enrolled in the school: permitting limitation of the number of children not given preference of enrolment under the provisions of section 442 who are required to be en- rolled if places are available: any other particular matter that is relevant to the education with a special character for which the school was originally established: (h) any other matter that is not contrary to the provisions of this Part.
(2) Despite anything in subsection (1)(e), when determining the basis of the limita- tion under subsection (1)(f), regard must be had only to the necessity of pre- serving and safeguarding the education with a special character that the school provides.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 7(6) Section 422: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
423 Integration agreements: machinery matters (1) Any proprietor may enter into integration agreements for the integration of more than 1 school.

(2) (3) There must be a separate integration agreement for each school that is to be- come a State integrated school.

If the Minister and the proprietor agree, the terms of an integration agreement may be varied by a supplementary agreement.
(4) Despite section 421, the Minister’s power to enter into a supplementary agree- ment may be delegated under section 28 of the State Sector Act 1988.

571 Part 33 s 424 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (5) An integration agreement is, for all purposes, a binding agreement between the proprietor and the Crown.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 7(7)–(10) Section 423: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
424 Effective date of integration agreement (1) Every integration agreement must specify an effective date.

(2) A State integrated school’s board must take office on the effective date.

(3) In any case where the requirements of this section are not met, the Minister may give notice to the proprietor of a new effective date as the Minister thinks fit, and the integration agreement must be interpreted accordingly.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 8 Section 424: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

425 Notification of integration agreement Every integration agreement must be notified in the Gazette, and a copy of every integration agreement must be retained by the Secretary and must be available for inspection without charge by any member of the public on an Internet site maintained by the Secretary.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 10 Section 425: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
426 Minister may require information to be provided (1) This section applies in any of the following situations: (a) (b) (c) a proprietor or a potential proprietor has applied to integrate a school: the Minister holds reasonable concerns about the ability of a proprietor or potential proprietor to meet any obligation under an integration agree- ment or under this Part: a proprietor or potential proprietor has submitted a specific funding re- quest to the Minister or the Secretary.
(2) If this section applies, the Minister may require the relevant proprietor or po- tential proprietor to provide all or any of the following: (a) all of the information needed to assess the financial and managerial cap- acity of the proprietor or potential proprietor: (b) any other information that the Minister considers relevant to assessing— (i) (ii) an application to integrate a school: any concerns about the ability of a proprietor or potential proprie- tor to meet any obligation under an integration agreement or under this Part: 572 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 429 (iii) any funding request that a proprietor or potential proprietor has submitted.
Section 426: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

427 Cancellation of integration agreement (1) An integration agreement may be cancelled— (a) (b) (c) by the Minister, in which case section 428 applies; or by the proprietor, in which case section 429 applies; or by agreement between the Minister and the proprietor, in which case sec- tion 430 applies.
(2) On the cancellation of an integration agreement,— (a) (b) (c) the school ceases to be a State integrated school; and the respective rights and obligations of the parties that arise by virtue of the integration agreement cease to have effect; and in the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the school is to be treated as provisionally registered as a school under section 35A.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 11 Section 427: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
428 Cancellation by Minister The Minister may cancel an integration agreement under section 427(1)(a) if— (a) it appears to the Minister on reasonable grounds that the proprietor or the board of the State integrated school is not sufficiently carrying out the functions and obligations accepted by it under this Act or under the inte- gration agreement; and (b) the Minister has consulted the proprietor, the board, and other interested persons or groups as the Minister considers appropriate.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 11A Section 428: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
429 Cancellation by proprietor (1) A proprietor may give notice of an intention to cancel an integration agreement under section 427(1)(b) if— (a) it appears to the proprietor on reasonable grounds that— (i) the special character of the State integrated school has been or is likely to be jeopardised; or 573 Part 33 s 430 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (ii) the Minister or any board is not carrying out the functions and ob- ligations accepted by the Minister or the board under this Act or the integration agreement; and (b) the proprietor has consulted the Minister, the board, and any other inter- ested persons or groups as the proprietor considers appropriate.
(2) The notice of intention to cancel takes effect as a cancellation of the integration agreement under section 427(1)(b) on the date that is 4 months after the date of the notice.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 11B Section 429: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
430 Cancellation by agreement between parties The Minister and the proprietor may cancel an integration agreement under section 427(1)(c) by mutual agreement, after consultation with other interested persons or groups as they consider appropriate.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 11C Section 430: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
431 Mergers (1) A State integrated school may merge with another State integrated school (the merging schools) if— (a) (b) (c) (d) each school has the same proprietor; and each school has the same or a similar special character; and the proprietor has consulted the Minister; and the Minister determines that the schools may merge.
(2) Before determining whether the State integrated schools may merge, the Minis- ter must— (a) be satisfied that— (i) (ii) (iii) the proprietor has made reasonable efforts to consult its adult stu- dents or the parents of its full-time students (other than adult stu- dents) about the proposed merger; and the consultation that has taken place for each school is adequate in the circumstances; and the creation of a single school by the proposed merger (the con- tinuing school) is appropriate in the circumstances; and (b) consult the boards of all the other schools whose rolls might, in the opin- ion of the Minister, be affected by the proposed merger.
574 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 432 (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) If the Minister determines that the State integrated schools may merge, the pro- prietor must apply under section 418 to negotiate an integration agreement for the school that is to be created by the merger.

If an integration agreement is negotiated, the Minister must give notice of the merger in the Gazette.
The notice takes effect on a day specified in the notice, and has effect as fol- lows: (a) (b) the merging schools are part of the continuing school: if the continuing school and each merging school are not already admin- istered by a single board,— (i) (ii) the board of each merging school is dissolved; and all rights, assets, liabilities, and debts of each merging school are vested in the board of the continuing school: (c) the continuing school is a school of the class specified in the notice and provides education for the student class levels specified in the notice.
The notice does not affect the name of the continuing school.
Before a notice given under subsection (4) takes effect, the Minister must give notice in the Gazette of whether,— (a) during the period between a date specified in the notice and the date on which new trustees take office, the board of the continuing school is to be— (i) the board of the continuing school plus at least 1 co-opted trustee representing each of the merging schools; or (ii) a board appointed by the Minister; or (b) the board of the continuing school is to have an alternative constitution approved under section 98A.
(8) The board of the continuing school must have no more than 4 members appoin- ted by the proprietor.

Section 431: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

432 Closure of State integrated school If it appears to the Minister that for the reason set out in section 428(a) a State integrated school should be closed, the Minister may, after the consultation re- ferred to in section 428(b), disestablish and close the school.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 12 Section 432: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

575 Part 33 s 433 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 433 Notification of cancellation or of closing of State integrated school When an integration agreement is cancelled under section 427, or when a State integrated school is closed under section 432, the Minister must give notice of the cancellation or closure in the Gazette.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 15 Section 433: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
434 Disposal of assets on cancellation of integration agreement or closing of State integrated school (1) (2) This section applies if expenses or capital expenditure appropriated by Parlia- ment has been used to meet all or part of the cost of supplying a State integra- ted school with furniture, or equipment, or other chattels, and the integration agreement for that school is cancelled, or the school is closed.
If this section applies, the furniture, equipment, or chattels may be disposed of by the Secretary at his or her sole discretion, whether by sale or otherwise, and the disposition has effect as if the Secretary were the owner.

(3) However, any sale must be by way of public auction or public tender.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 16(1) Section 434: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
435 Repayment of moneys advanced (1) This section applies if— (a) expenses or capital expenditure appropriated by Parliament has been ad- vanced otherwise than by way of loan to be used to meet all or part of the cost of erecting any building or supplying or installing any fixture as part of a State integrated school; and (b) the integration agreement for that school is cancelled, or the school is closed.
The current value of the contribution to the building or fixture from the money appropriated must be assessed by the Minister.

The amount assessed is to be treated as a debt due by the proprietor to the Crown, and is to be treated as a charge on the land of the State integrated school.

That charge may be registered without the payment of a fee against the land under the provisions of the Statutory Land Charges Registration Act 1928.
(2) (3) (4) (5) However, the Minister may, with the agreement of the Minister of Finance, ap- prove the writing off of all or part of the debt.

576 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 439 (6) For the purposes of the Statutory Land Charges Registration Act 1928, notice of any charge under subsection (3), and any certificate releasing the charge, may be signed by the Secretary.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 16(2), (3) Section 435: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

436 Moneys to be paid into Crown Bank Account (1) (2) In the case of any sale made under section 434(2), the money received must be credited to a Crown Bank Account.
In the event of the cancellation of an integration agreement, or the closing of a State integrated school, any unspent money granted to the board of that school for that school under this Act or under regulations made under this Act or under any other Act must be credited to a Crown Bank Account.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 16(4), (5) Section 436: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
437 Certain assets remain vested in proprietors Subject to sections 434 to 436, if an integration agreement is cancelled, or a State integrated school is closed, any land, buildings, chattels, and other inter- ests relating to the school that are vested in the proprietor remain vested in the proprietor.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 16(8) Section 437: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
438 Restriction on cancellation of integration agreement or closure of State integrated schools No integration agreement may be cancelled in accordance with section 427, and (despite anything in section 154) no State integrated school may be closed under section 432, solely on the ground that adequate accommodation for the students exists in an adjacent State school.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 17 Section 438: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
439 Compensation If an integration agreement is cancelled, or a State integrated school is closed, no compensation of any kind is due or payable to the proprietor.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 18 Section 439: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

577 Part 33 s 440 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Administration Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
440 Administration of State integrated schools (1) (2) (3) (4) Except as provided in this Part, all the provisions of this Act and of any other enactment relating to the education of the people of New Zealand in State schools apply to a State integrated school.

Subject to sections 416 and 417, when a private school is integrated it must be controlled and managed and operate in all respects as if it were a State school.
The powers of control and management of the board of a State integrated school must be exercised subject to the provisions of sections 416 and 417.

To give effect to subsection (3), the board of a State integrated school must make provision for adequate consultation between the board and the proprietor of that school.

Compare: 1975 No 129 ss 19, 25(6) Section 440: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Enrolment, conditions of attendance, and instruction of students at State integrated schools Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

441 Free education Every student enrolled at a State integrated school must be given free education on the same terms and in accordance with the same conditions as students en- rolled at a State school.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 35(1) Section 441: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

442 Preference of enrolment The children of parents who have a particular or general philosophical or reli- gious connection with a State integrated school must be preferred to other chil- dren for enrolment at the school.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 29 Section 442: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
578 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 446 443 Participation in general school programmes By enrolling a student at a State integrated school, the parent is taken to have accepted as a condition of enrolment that the student is to participate in the general school programme that gives the school its special character.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 30 Section 443: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
444 Instruction of students (1) Each State integrated school must instruct its students in accordance with the curricula and syllabuses prescribed under this Act or any regulations made under this Act.

(2) However, the general school programme must reflect the education with a spe- cial character provided by the State integrated school, and religious and other examples may be used to reinforce teaching throughout the school day.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 31 Section 444: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
445 Religious observances and religious instruction (1) Subject to the provisions of section 444, if religious observances and religious instruction form part of the education with a special character provided by a State integrated school, these must continue to form part of the general school programme in accordance with the terms and conditions prescribed in the inte- gration agreement relating to that school.
(2) If religious observances and religious instruction form part of the education with a special character provided by a State integrated school, that school— (a) must be responsive to the sensitivities of students and parents of differ- ent religious or philosophical affiliations; and (b) may not require a student of a different religious or philosophical affilia- tion to participate in religious observances and religious instruction con- cerned with particular observances if the parents of the student state at any time that they do not wish that student to participate.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 32 Section 445: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

446 School transport assistance In providing school transport assistance for students enrolled at a State integra- ted school, the Secretary must have reasonable regard to the preference of pa- rents to enrol their children at a State integrated school or at a State school.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 34 579 Part 33 s 447 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 446: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
447 Attendance dues (1) (2) (3) The proprietor of a State integrated school may, if the integration agreement for the school so provides, enter into an agreement with the parents or other per- sons accepting responsibility for the education of a child providing that the pa- rents or other persons must pay attendance dues as a condition of the child’s enrolment at the school.
The dues must be established for the State integrated school or group of State integrated schools at the rates, and subject to the conditions, that are approved by the Minister by notice in the Gazette.
Revenue received by the proprietor from attendance dues must be used solely for the following: (a) paying, in respect of the school or group of schools in respect of which it is received, for improvements to the State integrated school or schools’ buildings and associated facilities that are required by any integration agreement or integration agreements under section 456(2)(c): (b) any capital works that may be required by the Minister under section 456(2)(d): (c) meeting debts, mortgages, liens, or other charges associated with the land and the buildings that constitute the premises of the State integrated school or schools.
(4) No revenue received by the proprietor from attendance dues may be used to provide or improve the State integrated school buildings and associated facil- ities to a standard higher than that approved by the Secretary as appropriate for a comparable State school.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 36(1)–(4) Section 447: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
448 Withdrawal and reinstatement of right to charge attendance dues (1) Should any proprietor use any revenue from attendance dues for any purpose other than one permitted by section 447, the Minister may, despite anything in the integration agreement, by notice in the Gazette, withdraw the right to charge attendance dues, and the board must, while the withdrawal continues, permit the attendance of children without the payment of attendance dues.
(2) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, cancel any withdrawal at any time.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 36(5) Section 448: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
580 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 451 449 Consequences of failure to pay attendance dues (1) If a parent, or other person who has accepted the responsibility for the educa- tion of a child, has entered into an agreement to pay attendance dues and fails to make a payment, the payment not made may be recoverable from that parent or person in any court of competent jurisdiction as a debt due to the proprietor.
(2) Any failure to make payment constitutes grounds for the principal of the State integrated school to suspend the child from attendance at that school and to re- move the child’s name from the school register.

(3) However, no child may be suspended and have his or her name removed from the school register until arrangements have been made to the satisfaction of the Secretary for the child to be enrolled at some other school.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 36(6), (7) Section 449: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

450 Accounts for attendance dues (1) Each proprietor who is permitted to charge attendance dues must keep accounts in a manner approved by the Secretary showing— (a) (b) the total amount of attendance dues received; and how the attendance dues have been spent.
(2) The accounts must be— (a) (b) balanced at a date each year approved by the Secretary; and audited by a qualified auditor (within the meaning of section 35 of the Financial Reporting Act 2013).

(3) The proprietor must send a copy of the accounts, together with the auditor’s re- port on them, to the Secretary by a date to be approved by the Secretary.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 36(8) Section 450: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
451 Financial contributions (1) In addition to the power to collect attendance dues under section 447, the pro- prietor of a State integrated school may— (a) (b) (c) conduct fund-raising activities within the school; and inform the parents of the financial obligations of the proprietor in the prospectus and in other ways; and request the parents of students attending the school to make regular fi- nancial contributions to the proprietor for the benefit of the proprietor in meeting any debt, mortgage, lien, and other charge associated with the land and buildings that constitute the school premises or are associated with the school.
581 Part 33 s 452 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) Financial contributions other than attendance dues must be made on a volunta- ry basis and no student may be refused enrolment because of the unwillingness of the parents to contribute in this way.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 37(1), (2) Section 451: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
452 Restrictions on fund-raising No board of any State integrated school, nor the principal nor any member of the staff (whether employed or retained as a teacher or in any other capacity), nor any student of the school may take part during normal school hours in any school activity directed to raising funds for the benefit of the proprietor in meeting any debt, mortgage, lien, or other charge associated with the land and buildings that constitute the school premises or are associated with the school.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 37(3) Section 452: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
453 Accounts of money raised under section 451 The proprietor must— (a) (b) keep accounts of money raised by it and by a board, principal, staff member, or student under this section; and have the accounts audited by a qualified auditor (within the meaning of section 35 of the Financial Reporting Act 2013) at least once in every period of 12 months; and (c) make a copy of the accounts and of the auditor’s report on them avail- able on request to the parents of students attending the State integrated school and to other contributors.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 37(4) Section 453: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

454 Fund-raising Subject to the provisions of section 451, the board, the principal, staff mem- bers, and students of a State integrated school may take part in fund-raising ac- tivities in the same manner and for the same purposes for the benefit of the stu- dents of the school that are permitted in the case of State schools.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 38 Section 454: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

455 Use of school office The school office of a State integrated school may be used for the purpose of communication between the proprietor of the school and the parents of students 582 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 456 enrolled at the school, and for other purposes related to the benefit of the school and the students.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 39 Section 455: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Proprietors of State integrated schools Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

456 Powers and responsibilities of proprietors (1) The proprietor of a State integrated school must exercise its powers under an integration agreement in a manner that is consistent with section 416.
(2) Subject to subsection (1), the proprietor of a State integrated school— (a) owns, holds upon trust, or leases the land and buildings that are specified in the integration agreement as constituting the school premises; and (b) must accept and meet the liability for all mortgages, liens, and other charges upon the land and buildings; and (c) must plan, pay for, and implement, over the period that may be specified in the integration agreement, the improvements to the school buildings and associated facilities that are required in accordance with the integra- tion agreement to bring the buildings and associated facilities up to the minimum standard laid down by the Secretary for State schools; and (d) must plan, implement, and pay for the capital works that are approved or required by the Minister, with a view to replacing, improving, or enlarg- ing the school, its buildings, and its associated facilities to maintain the school, its buildings, and its associated facilities at the minimum stand- ard laid down by the Secretary for comparable State schools; and (e) may own, hold upon trust, or lease and control, and maintain any land, buildings, and associated facilities that, although not part of the school in terms of the integration agreement, are regarded by the proprietor as ap- propriate to maintain the special character of the school; and (f) may, in conjunction with the board, make provision for the accommoda- tion of students living away from home; and (g) must insure all the buildings, chattels, and
 other assets owned, held upon trust, or leased by the proprietor for the purposes of the school against risks normally insured against with some reputable insurance company; and (h) must arrange with its insurers that the policy of the insurance is endorsed to the effect that the benefit of the indemnity provided by the policy ex- tends to the Minister for the buildings, chattels, and other assets paid for 583 Part 33 s 457 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 in whole or in part by a loan or grant made out of money appropriated by Parliament; and (i) must, together with the proprietor’s agents and licensees, have at all reasonable times access to the school to ensure that the special character of the school is being maintained.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 40 Section 456: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
457 Decision-making criteria for proprietors (1) When making a decision under a provision of this Part, a proprietor must take into account— (a) (b) (c) (d) the ability of the proprietor’s State integrated school or schools to con- tinue to provide the level of education required; and the average per student cost of the continued operation of the proprie- tor’s State integrated school or schools relative to the average per student cost for other State schools; and the extent to which the proprietor’s State integrated school or schools provide for students whose needs are not met by other State schools; and the ability of the proprietor to meet any obligations regarding the pro- prietor’s State integrated school or schools over the next 7 years.
(2) A proprietor must assess the proprietor’s compliance with subsection (1) at least once every 5 years.

(3) However, the Secretary may direct a proprietor to carry out an assessment at any time if the Secretary considers it appropriate in the circumstances.

(4) The proprietor must, as soon as practicable,— (a) (b) complete any assessment begun under subsection (2) or (3); and provide the Secretary with a copy of the assessment.
Section 457: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
458 Consequences of failure to arrange insurance Despite section 456(2)(h), in any case where the proprietor has not arranged with the proprietor’s insurers for the benefit of any policy of insurance to ex- tend to the Minister,— (a) no money appropriated by Parliament may be used to pay any part of the cost of repairing or replacing any buildings, chattels, or other assets that have been destroyed or damaged from any cause whatsoever; and 584 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 462 (b) any additional charges by way of premium made by the insurer for the extension of the benefit of any policy of insurance to the Minister may not be met out of money appropriated by Parliament.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 40(2)(h) Section 458: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

459 Proprietors not to question curriculum or teaching methods The right of access specified in section 456(2)(i) does not give a proprietor the right to question the curriculum or the teaching methods adopted by the teach- ers, both of which are, subject to the provisions of this Act, controlled by the principal of the State integrated school.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 40(2)(i) Section 459: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

460 Leases of land (1) (2) The proprietor of a State integrated school must obtain the prior consent of the Minister before entering into a lease relating to land that is used, or to be used, for the school.
If the proprietor fails to obtain the prior consent of the Minister to a lease, the lease is not affected but the Minister may cancel the integration agreement under section 427.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 40A Section 460: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
461 Assistance to proprietors (1) (2) The Minister may, with the concurrence of the Minister of Finance, approve the granting of loans from capital expenditure that may be appropriated by Parlia- ment for the purpose to the proprietor of any State integrated school.

The loans are to be made for the purposes and subject to the terms and condi- tions, including the writing off of any amount repayable, that the Minister, with the concurrence of the Minister of Finance, determines.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 42 Section 461: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

462 Proprietors unable to meet obligations (1) (2) In the event of the proprietor of a State integrated school becoming unable to meet the financial or other commitments accepted by them under the integra- tion agreement, they must notify the Minister.
If the Minister is notified, the Minister may, after any consultation with the pro- prietor that the Minister thinks necessary,— 585 Part 33 s 463 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) (c) cancel the integration agreement in accordance with section 427; or close the State integrated school under section 432; or arrange for the acquisition by the Crown, in accordance with the Public Works Act 1981, of any land, buildings, and chattels relating to the State integrated school that are owned or leased by the proprietor and that the Minister considers appropriate for the purpose of establishing a State school.
(3) When the Minister acts in accordance with subsection (2)(a) or (b), the provi- sions of this Act relating to the cancellation of an integration agreement or to the closure of a State integrated school apply.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 44 Section 462: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Appointment and employment of teachers Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
463 Requirements in respect of appointments of teachers (1) The board of a State integrated school must appoint teachers in that school in accordance with the provisions of the State Sector Act 1988.

(2) When a board delegates to a committee the power to appoint a teacher or to recommend the appointment of a teacher, that committee must contain at least 1 of the persons appointed to the board by the proprietor.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 63 Section 463: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
464 Religious instruction: appointments to special positions relating to character of State integrated school Subject to the provisions of this section, where religious instruction forms part of the special character of a State integrated school,— (a) if provided for by the integration agreement, an advertisement for the position of principal of that school must state that a willingness and an ability to take part in religious instruction appropriate to that school is a condition of appointment: (b) if provided for by the integration agreement, the board of that school must— (i) (ii) designate a position at that school as director of religious studies; and state in any advertisement for that position that a willingness and an ability to take part in religious instruction appropriate to that school is a condition of appointment (a director of religious stud- 586 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 466 ies must be a member of the normal staffing entitlement of the school, as established by regulations made under this Act; and (iii) carry out the teaching duties, if any, that may be provided for in the integration agreement): (c) the board must— (i) (ii) designate any other proportion of teaching positions in that school that may be provided for in the integration agreement as positions of importance carrying a responsibility for religious instruction; and state in advertisements for the positions that a willingness and an ability to take part in religious instruction appropriate to that school is a condition of appointment: (d) the board must state in any advertisement for a position at that school that a willingness and an ability to take part in religious instruction ap- propriate to that school is a condition of appointment if— (i) (ii) that school is a primary school; and the person holding the position of deputy principal of that school or a position of assistant principal at that school has responsibility for supervising the junior classes at that school; and (iii) it is provided for by the terms of the integration agreement of that school.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 65(1) Section 464: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
465 Effect of religious instruction requirements in advertisements If, in accordance with section 464, an advertisement for a position states a re- quirement that a willingness and an ability to take part in religious instruction is a condition of appointment, any person appointed to that position must ac- cept that requirement as a condition of the person’s appointment.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 65(2) Section 465: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

466 Restrictions on requirement for teacher to take part in religious instruction Except as provided in section 464, the appointment of a teacher to a position in a State integrated school may not be conditional on the willingness and ability of that teacher to take part in religious instruction, and no appointed teacher may be required to take part.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 65(3) 587 Part 33 s 467 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 466: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
467 Other special positions (1) If an integration agreement records that any teaching position in the State inte- grated school concerned is a special position that requires particular capabil- ities on the part of the teacher holding it, an advertisement for that position must require an appointee to possess those capabilities as a condition of ap- pointment to that position.
(2) Without limiting the generality of subsection (1), if any integration agreement relating to a State integrated primary school requires the person holding a pos- ition as assistant principal at that school (being a position the holder of which has responsibility for supervising senior classes at that school) to maintain pro- grammes and activities that reflect the special character of that school, an ad- vertisement for that position must require an appointee to maintain those pro- grammes and activities as a condition of appointment to that position.
(3) If, in accordance with subsection (1) or (2), an advertisement for a position makes any requirement a condition of appointment to that position, any person appointed to that position must accept that requirement as a condition of the person’s appointment to it.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 66 Section 467: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
468 Selection for appointment In the case of a State integrated primary school, the person to be appointed to any of the positions specified in section 464 or to any position specified in sec- tion 467 must be selected in accordance with the provisions of section 469.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 67 Section 468: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
469 Requirements in respect of appointments (1) Before appointing any person to a position in a State integrated primary school, being a position specified in section 464 or 467, the board must consult the proprietor, who must report to the board the names of those applicants (if any) who, in terms of the special character of the school or in terms of the advertise- ment calling for applicants with particular capabilities, are acceptable for ap- pointment.
(2) On receipt of the report required by subsection (1), the board may consider for appointment only those applicants who are stated in the report to be acceptable for appointment.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 68 588 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 471 Section 469: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
470 Employment for special purposes (1) With the consent of the board, any retired teacher may undertake, in any State integrated school, voluntary tasks relating to the beliefs and instruction that are the foundation of that school’s special character.
(2) (3) (4) If religious instruction forms part of the education with a special character pro- vided by a State integrated school, the proprietor of that school may employ any person, whether as a chaplain or otherwise, for duties relating to that in- struction.

The salary of a person employed under subsection (2) must not be paid by the board or be in any way a charge on money appropriated by Parliament.

The proprietor must notify the board of the name of any person employed under subsection (2).
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 69 Section 470: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
471 Appointment of teachers on integration (1) If, in accordance with sections 421 and 424, an integration agreement is imple- mented in respect of any private school,— (a) (b) (c) the contract of service of every teacher at that school is to be treated as being determined from the effective date of integration; and each of those teachers, if the teacher so wishes, is to be treated as being in the employment of the board of the State integrated school until the teacher is formally appointed to a teaching position under subsection (4), and the provisions of subsection (6) apply accordingly from the effective date of integration; and each teaching position at that school must, within 60 days after the ef- fective date of integration, be advertised as required by the State Sector Act 1988.
(2) (3) Every advertisement must state that the teacher appointed to the position as at the effective date of integration, if the teacher so wishes, has an absolute right of appointment to that position irrespective of the qualifications of any other applicant.

The teacher previously appointed to the position advertised under subsection (1) must, if the teacher wishes to continue in that appointment, apply in the manner prescribed by the State Sector Act 1988 for appointment to that pos- ition.
(4) A teacher who applies must be appointed to the position.

589 Part 33 s 472 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (5) A teacher who does not so apply is to be treated as having relinquished the pos- ition.
(6) A teacher who is appointed to a teaching position must— (a) (b) be paid out of expenses appropriated by Parliament for the purpose the same salary that a teacher with comparable service and qualifications would be paid for a comparable teaching position in a State school; and continue to be paid no less than the same salary, and to be accorded the same status, as the teacher received or was accorded on the day before the effective date of integration.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 71 Section 471: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

472 Other employees (1) (2) The contract of service of every person employed in a State integrated school in a capacity other than that as a teacher, is to be treated as being determined from the effective date of integration.
If the position in which that person was employed has a parallel or close paral- lel in a State school, that person may— (a) (b) be re-employed by the board in such parallel position; and be paid out of expenses appropriated by Parliament for the purpose the same salary as that person would be paid for comparable service in a State school.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 72 Section 472: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
473 No compensation for determination of employment When a contract of employment of a teacher is treated as being determined under section 471(1)(a), or when the contract of employment of a person other than a teacher is treated as being determined under section 472, no compensa- tion of any kind is payable to the teacher or to any person employed otherwise than as a teacher in respect of the determination of the contract of employment.
Compare: 1975 No 129 s 73 Section 473: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

590 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Part 33 s 476 General provisions Heading: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
474 Grants to private schools before integration Any obligation or other commitment entered into by the managers of a private school before the integration of that school as a condition of a grant under this Act binds the proprietor of that school, whether or not the obligation or com- mitment is specified in the integration agreement.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 78 Section 474: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
475 Relationship between this Part and other Parts and other enactments (1) If this Part deals with the same or a similar subject matter as other Parts of this Act, the State Sector Act 1988, or any regulations made under any of those Acts or under any enactment repealed by any of those Acts,— (a) (b) express provisions in this Part prevail in respect of State integrated schools; but this Part must be interpreted in a way that is consistent with the other Parts of this Act or any other enactments concerned whenever this con- struction is appropriate and reasonable.
(2) Subject to sections 416 and 417, where any matter concerning State integrated schools is not dealt with by express provision in this Part, the appropriate pro- visions of other Parts of this Act, the State Sector Act 1988, and all regulations made under any of those Parts or Acts or under any enactment repealed by any of those Acts apply.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 80 Section 475: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
476 Regulations relating to State integrated schools (1) The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations for the fol- lowing purposes: (a) (b) prescribing a form of integration agreement: providing for the control, management, organisation, finance, and con- duct of State integrated schools.
(2) Where there is a conflict between regulations made under this section and regu- lations made under another section of this Act or under the Education Act 1964 or any enactment repealed by this Act or the Education Act 1964, the regula- tions made under this section apply.

Compare: 1975 No 129 s 82 591 Part 33 s 476 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section 476: inserted, on 19 May 2017, by section 155 of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
592 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 1 Schedule 1 Transitional, savings, and related provisions Schedule 1: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 156(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
s 2A Part 1 Provision relating to use of off-site locations by schools 1 Off-site locations for schools Any existing use of an off-site location by a school to provide education to 1 or more students on a long-term or full-time basis before section 71A comes into force must cease at the latest by the day that is 1 year after the date on which the section comes into force, unless continued use has been approved under that section.
Schedule 1 clause 1: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 156(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Part 2 Provisions relating to Competence Authority 2 (1) (2) (3) (4) Transitional provision relating to Competence Authority This clause applies on and after the date that the Competence Authority is es- tablished by rules under section 388(1)(ba) (in this clause called the new Com- petence Authority).
The Competence Authority operating immediately before the establishment of the new Competence Authority (in this clause called the previous Competence Authority) is dissolved.

The members of the previous Competence Authority are to be treated as mem- bers of the new Competence Authority.
The Education Council Rules 2016 (LI 2016/122) relating to the previous Competence Authority that are in force immediately before the establishment of the new Competence Authority— (a) (b) are to be treated as rules made under section 388(1)(ba) for the new Competence Authority, subject to any necessary modifications; and expire 12 months after the commencement of this clause, unless replaced earlier by rules made under section 388(1)(ba).
(5) All proceedings and matters relating to competence that involve the Education Council or the previous Competence Authority and that are yet to be deter- mined or completed on the commencement of this clause are to be determined or completed as if this clause had not come into force.

593 Schedule 1 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Schedule 1 clause 2: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 156(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Part 3 Provisions relating to integration agreements 3 (1) Treatment of certain integration agreements The integration agreement between Her Majesty the Queen and Te Aute Trust Board Incorporated and any integration agreement that was made under the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975 and that is in force immedi- ately before the commencement of this clause is to be treated as having been made under Part 33 of this Act.
(2) However, all proceedings or any other matters that involve an integration agreement made under the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975 and that are yet to be determined or completed on the commencement of this clause are to be determined or completed in accordance with the provisions of the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975 that are in force immedi- ately before the commencement of this clause.
Schedule 1 clause 3: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 156(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Part 4 Provisions relating to Careers New Zealand Schedule 1 Part 4: inserted, on 1 July 2017, by section 156(2) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
4 Interpretation In this schedule, unless the context otherwise requires,— assets has the same meaning as in clause 2 of Schedule 20 Careers New Zealand means the Service that was continued under section 279 (as it read immediately before the commencement of this clause) Commission means the Tertiary Education Commission established under sec- tion 159C liabilities has the same meaning as in clause 2 of Schedule 20.

5 Dissolution Careers New Zealand is dissolved.


Assets and liabilities The assets and liabilities of Careers New Zealand vest in the Commission.

6 (1) (2) All money payable to or by Careers New Zealand becomes payable to or by the Commission.
594 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 1 (3) Anything done, omitted to be done, or to be done by, or in relation to, Careers New Zealand is to be treated as having been done, having been omitted to be done, or having to be done by, or in relation to, the Commission.

(4) However, any individual or collective employment agreement with Careers New Zealand ceases to apply.

7 Transfer of information (1) All information held by Careers New Zealand is transferred to the Commis- sion.
(2) The transfer does not constitute an action that is an interference with the priva- cy of an individual under section 66 of the Privacy Act 1993.
8 Proceedings (1) All proceedings or any other matters involving Careers New Zealand that are yet to be determined or completed on the commencement of this clause are to be determined or completed by the Commission in accordance with the provi- sions of this Act as in force immediately before the commencement of this clause as if the Commission were Careers New Zealand.
(2) No action may be taken in relation to any breach of contract, lease, or licence arrangement arising from— (a) (b) the vesting of assets or liabilities in the Commission: the cessation of any individual or collective employment agreement.
9 (1) (2) (3) 10 (1) (2) References to Careers New Zealand This clause applies to— (a) (b) things that are in force or existing immediately before the commence- ment of this clause; and references in any thing, including (without limitation) enactments, rules, bylaws, deeds, agreements, proceedings, instruments, documents, and notices.
If this clause applies, every reference in any thing specified in subclause (1) to Careers New Zealand is, on or after the commencement of this clause, to be treated as a reference to the Commission unless the context otherwise requires.

This clause does not apply to any collective employment agreement with Ca- reers New Zealand.

Repeal of clauses 6 to 9 and this clause Clauses 6 to 9 are repealed on 1 January 2018.

This clause is repealed on 2 January 2018.


595 Schedule 2 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Part 5 Provision relating to cohort entry Schedule 1 Part 5: inserted, on 3 July 2017, by section 156(3) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

11 (1) (2) Determining mid-term dates under cohort entry policy for 2018 This clause applies for the 2018 school year.

The Minister may, before 1 August 2017, prescribe the mid-term dates for 2018.
(3) This clause overrides section 5B(3) and (4).

Schedule 2 Administrative provisions applying to Board continued by section 37 [Repealed] Schedule 2: repealed, on 28 February 2002, by section 86(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

s 37(2) Schedule 3 Administrative provisions applying to Board continued by section 43 [Repealed] Schedule 3: repealed, on 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) of the Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).
s 43(2) Schedule 4 Administrative provisions applying to Parent Advocacy Council [Repealed] Schedule 4: repealed, on 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).
s 49(2) 596 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 5 Schedule 5 Specified institutions Blind and Low Vision Education Network NZ, Auckland Central Regional Health School, Wellington Halswell Residential College, Christchurch Kelston Deaf Education Centre, Auckland Kimi Ora School, Hastings Northern Health School, Auckland Salisbury School, Nelson Southern Regional Health School, Christchurch Van Asch Deaf Education Centre, Christchurch Westbridge Residential School, Auckland Schedule 5 Blind and Low Vision Education Network NZ, Auckland: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(2) of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).
Schedule 5 Central Regional Health School, Wellington: inserted, on 1 July 2000, by clause 3 of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2000 (SR 2000/44).

Schedule 5 Felix Donnelly College, Tuakau: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(1) of the Educa- tion (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).

Schedule 5 Glenburn Centre School, Auckland: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(1) of the Edu- cation (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).
Schedule 5 Halswell Residential College, Christchurch: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(2) of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).

Schedule 5 Hogben School, Christchurch: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(1) of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).

Schedule 5 Homai Vision Education Centre, Auckland: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(1) of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).
Schedule 5 Kelston Deaf Education Centre, Auckland: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(2) of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).

Schedule 5 Kelston School for the Deaf, Auckland: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(1) of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).

Schedule 5 McKenzie Residential School, Christchurch: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(1) of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).
Schedule 5 Northern Health School, Auckland: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(2) of the Educa- tion (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).

Schedule 5 Northern Hospitals School, Auckland: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(1) of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).

Schedule 5 Southern Regional Health School, Christchurch: inserted, on 1 July 2000, by clause 3 of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2000 (SR 2000/44).
Schedule 5 Van Asch College, Christchurch: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(1) of the Educa- tion (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).

Schedule 5 Van Asch Deaf Education Centre, Christchurch: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(2) of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).
597 Schedule 5 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Schedule 5 Waimokoia School, Auckland: repealed, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(1) of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).

Schedule 5 Westbridge Residential School, Auckland: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by clause 4(2) of the Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78).
598 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 5A Schedule 5A Application of Crown Entities Act 2004 to school boards of trustees Schedule 5A: inserted, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Section 5A heading: amended, on 19 May 2017, by section 157 of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Schedule 6 cl 26 Section Sections 3 to 8 Section 10 Section 99 Section 102 Section 107 Section 113 Section 114 Section 115 Section 119 Section 131(2) Section 133 Section 134 Section 135 Section 136 Section 137 Section 155, with the variation speci- fied in section 87(4) of the Education Act 1989 Section 157 Section 158 Section 159 Sections 160 to 164 Brief description Crown entities and categories Interpretation Application to multi-parent subsidiaries Interface with Companies Act 1993 and other Acts Directions under section 107 Safeguarding independence of Crown entities Crown entity must comply with directions given under statutory power of direction Procedure for all Ministerial directions Cross reference to State Sector Act 1988, sections 84 to 84B Application of Ombudsmen Act 1975 and Official Information Act 1982 Minister’s power to request information Reasons for refusing to supply information Officials for the purposes of sections of the Crimes Act 1961 Interpretation for Part 4 Application of subpart 2 of Part 4 Statement of responsibility for financial statements Variation of reporting requirements of multi-parent subsidiaries Bank accounts Application of acquisition of securities, borrowing, guarantees, indemnities, and derivative transactions rules Restrictions on acquisition of securities, borrowing, guarantees, indemnities, and derivative transactions Section 167 Gifts 599 Schedule 5A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section Section 168(1) and (2), except that the reference to
 section 154 must be read as a reference to section 87(3) of the Education Act 1989 Brief description Accounting records Section 173 Section 176 Section 178 Section 179 Section 180 Regulations Application of provisions of the Public Finance Act 1989 Application of Archives Act 1957 Public Bodies Contracts Act 1959 does not apply Local Authorities (Members’ Interests) Act 1968 does not apply Sections 181, 188, 191, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 200 Transitional and savings provisions and associated consequential amendments Schedule 5A: amended, on 18 July 2013, by section 42 of the Crown Entities Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 51).
Schedule 5A: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 71(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

600 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 6 Schedule 6 Boards of trustees Schedule 6: replaced, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
s 117 Contents Interpretation Things board can do [Repealed] Validity of Acts [Repealed] Acts in breach of statute are invalid [Repealed] Some natural person acts protected [Repealed] Acts that are not in best interests of board [Repealed] Dealings between boards and other persons [Repealed] Interpretation Directions under section 107 of Crown Entities Act 2004 [Repealed] Directions under section 107 of Crown Entities Act 2004 [Repealed] Part 1 Status and name of board Status of board Names of boards Part 2 Powers and functions of boards Functions of board Board is governing body of school Board’s objectives in governing school Staff One trustee to preside at meetings [Repealed] Meetings [Repealed] Validation and invalidation of elections of boards [Repealed] Functions and powers generally Board has complete discretion Things board can do Work for other boards or educational or social services Cultural diversity, Treaty of Waitangi, tikanga Māori, and te reo Māori 1 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 1G Page 602 603 603 603 603 603 603 604 604 604 604 604 605 605 605 605 605 605 606 606 601 Schedule 6 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Delegations Bylaws Validity of acts and liability Interpretation Acts in breach of statute are invalid Some natural person acts protected Acts that are not in best interests of board Dealings between boards and other persons Trustees not personally liable Part 3 Financial and
 property matters and application of Crown Entities Act 2004 Board to be financially responsible Application of Crown Entities Act 2004 Directions under section 107 of Crown Entities Act 2004 Restrictions on acquisition of securities Restrictions on borrowing No delegation of power to borrow Restrictions on giving of guarantees and indemnities Restrictions on use of derivatives Gifts Real property Occupancy of property and buildings Leases and licences granted by boards Other agreements to occupy school land or
 buildings Boards exempt from taxation Part 4 Meetings and procedure Affixing of board’s seal Meetings One trustee to preside at meetings 606 608 608 608 608 609 609 610 610 610 610 610 611 611 611 611 612 612 612 613 614 614 615 615 616 1 Interpretation In this schedule, unless the context otherwise requires,— annual implementation plan has the meaning given in clause 7 school, in relation to a board, means the school or institution for which the board is constituted school community, in relation to a school, means— (a) (b) the parents, families, and whānau of the school’s students; and the Māori community associated with the school; and 602 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 6 (c) any other person, or group of persons, who the board considers is part of the school community for the purposes of the relevant provision strategic plan has the meaning given in clause 7.
1A Things board can do [Repealed] Schedule 6 clause 1A: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Validity of Acts [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

1B Acts in breach of statute are invalid [Repealed] Schedule 6 clause 1B: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
1C Some natural person acts protected [Repealed] Schedule 6 clause 1C: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

1D Acts that are not in best interests of board [Repealed] Schedule 6 clause 1D: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
1E Dealings between boards and other persons [Repealed] Compare: 1993 No 105 s 18 Schedule 6 clause 1E: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

1F Interpretation Schedule 6 clause 1F: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Directions under section 107 of Crown Entities Act 2004 [Repealed] Heading: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

603 Schedule 6 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 1G Directions under section 107 of Crown Entities Act 2004 [Repealed] Schedule 6 clause 1G: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
Part 1 Status and name of board 2 Status of board (1) A board (and not the school) is a body corporate.

(2) A board— (a) is accordingly a legal entity separate from its members, office holders, employees, and the Crown; and (b) continues in existence until it is dissolved in accordance with this Act.

3 Names of boards The name of a board is “The [name of school or institution] Board of Trustees”.
Part 2 Powers and functions of boards Functions of board 4 Board is governing body of school (1) A board is the governing body of its school.

(2) A board is responsible for the governance of the school, including setting the policies by which the school is to be controlled and managed.

(3) Under section 76, the school’s principal is the board’s chief executive in rela- tion to the school’s control and management.
5 Board’s objectives in governing school (1) A board’s primary objective in governing the school is to ensure that every stu- dent at the school is able to attain his or her highest possible standard in educa- tional achievement.
(2) To meet the primary objective, the board must— (a) ensure that the school— (i) is a physically and emotionally safe place for all students and staff; and (ii) is inclusive of and caters for students with differing needs; and 604 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 6 (b) (c) (d) have particular regard to any statement of National Education and Learn- ing Priorities issued under section 1A; and comply with its obligations under sections 60A (in relation to curriculum statements and national performance measures), 61 (in relation to teach- ing and learning programmes), and 62 (in relation to monitoring of stu- dent performance); and if the school is a member of a community of learning that has a commu- nity of learning agreement under section 72, comply with its obligations under that agreement as a member of that community; and (e) comply with all of its other obligations under this or any other Act.
Staff Subject to Parts 8A and 31, a board may, in accordance with the State Sector Act 1988, appoint, suspend, or dismiss school staff.

One trustee to preside at meetings [Repealed] Schedule 6 clause 7: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

6 7 8 Meetings [Repealed] Schedule 6 clause 8: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).
9 Validation and invalidation of elections of boards [Repealed] Schedule 6 clause 9: repealed, on 19 May 2017, by section 158(1) of the Education (Update) Amend- ment Act 2017 (2017 No 20).

Functions and powers generally 13 Board has complete discretion A board has complete discretion to perform its functions and exercise its powers as it thinks fit, subject to this and any other enactment and the general law of New Zealand.
14 Things board can do (1) A board may do anything that it is authorised to do by this Act.

(2) A board may do anything that a natural person of full age and capacity may do.

(3) Subclause (2) applies except as provided in this Act or another enactment or rule of law.

605 Schedule 6 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (4) A board may do an act under this clause only for the purpose of performing its functions.
(5) References in this clause to this Act include the provisions of the Crown En- tities Act 2004 that are applied by Schedule 5A of this Act.

15 Work for other boards or educational or social services (1) Two boards may agree in writing— (a) for one of them (board A) to do either or both of the following: (i) (ii) acquire materials for, and supply them to, the other: do work for the other; and (b) for the other board to pay board A for doing so.
(2) An agreement under subclause (1) does not absolve a board from any responsi- bilities imposed by this Act.

(3) A board may resolve to do work for other educational services and social ser- vices if— (a) (b) the board is a member of a community of learning; and the other members of the community of learning agree that the work will benefit— (i) (ii) the members of the community of learning; or the children or young people who are enrolled at a member of the community of learning.
16 Cultural diversity, Treaty of Waitangi, tikanga Māori, and te reo Māori (1) A board must take all reasonable steps to ensure that the policies and practices for its school reflect New Zealand’s cultural diversity and the unique position of the Māori culture.

(2) In performing its functions and exercising its powers, a board must take all reasonable steps to act in a manner that is consistent with the principles of the Treaty of Waitangi.
(3) Without limiting subclauses (1) and (2), a board must take all reasonable steps to provide instruction in tikanga Māori (Māori culture) and te reo Māori (the Māori language) for full-time students whose parents ask for it.
17 Delegations (1) A board may delegate any of the functions or powers of the board or the trustees, either generally or specifically, to any of the following persons by resolution and written notice to the person or persons: a trustee or trustees: the principal or any other employee or employees, or office holder or holders of the board: (a) (b) 606 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 6 (c) (d) (e) a committee consisting of at least 2 persons at least 1 of whom is a trustee: any other person or persons approved by the Minister: any class of persons that comprises any of the persons listed in para- graphs (a) to (d).
(2) Subclause (1) does not apply to any functions or powers specified in this Act as not being capable of delegation.

(3) The board must not delegate the general power of delegation.
(4) A delegate to whom any function or power is delegated may,— (a) unless the delegation provides otherwise, perform the function or exer- cise the power in the same manner, subject to the same restrictions, and with the same effect as if the delegate were the board or the trustees; and (b) delegate the function or power only— (i) (ii) with the prior written consent of the board; and subject to the same restrictions, and with the same effect, as if the subdelegate were the delegate.
(5) A delegate who purports to perform a function or exercise a power under a delegation— (a) is, in the absence of proof to the contrary, presumed to do so in accord- ance with the terms of that delegation; and (b) must produce evidence of his or her authority to do so if reasonably re- quested to do so.
(6) No delegation in accordance with this Act— (a) (b) (c) affects or prevents the performance of any function or the exercise of any power by the board or the trustees; or affects the responsibility of the board for the actions of any delegate acting under the delegation; or is affected by any change in the membership of the board or of any com- mittee or class of persons.
(7) A delegation may be revoked at will by— (a) (b) resolution of the board and written notice to the delegate; or any other method provided for in the delegation.

(8) A delegation under subclause (4)(b) may be revoked at will by written notice of the delegate to the subdelegate.
(9) The board may, by resolution, appoint committees— (a) to advise it on any matters relating to the board’s functions and powers that are referred to the committee by the board; or 607 Schedule 6 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) to perform or exercise any of the board’s functions and powers that are delegated to the committee.
(10) A person must not be appointed as a member of a committee unless, before ap- pointment, he or she discloses to the board the details of any financial interest that would disqualify the person from being a trustee under section 103A.

(11) This clause applies to each member of a committee who is not a trustee with any necessary modifications.

18 Bylaws A board may make bylaws that the board thinks necessary or desirable for the control and management of the school.
Validity of acts and liability 19 Interpretation In this clause and clauses 20 to 24, unless the context otherwise requires,— act includes a transfer of property, rights, or interests to or by a board do includes— (a) (b) (c) to do an act; and to have a capacity; and to have or exercise a power, right, or privilege person dealing— (a) means the other party to the transaction, if the act of the board is a trans- action; and (b) includes a person who has acquired property, rights, or interests from a board.
20 Acts in breach of statute are invalid (1) An act of a board is invalid, unless clause 21 applies, if it is— (a) (b) an act that is contrary to, or outside the authority of, an Act; or an act that is done otherwise than for the purpose of performing its func- tions.

Subclause (1) does not limit any discretion of a court to grant relief in respect of a minor or technical breach.
Some natural person acts protected Clause 20, or any rule of law to similar effect, does not prevent a person deal- ing with a board from enforcing a transaction that is a natural person act unless the person dealing with the board knew, or ought reasonably to have known,— (a) that an express restriction in an Act makes the act contrary to, or outside the authority of, the Act; or (2) 21 (1) 608 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 6 (b) that the act was done otherwise than for the purpose of performing the board’s functions.
(2) In this clause, natural person act— (a) means an act that a natural person of full age and capacity can do (whether or not the act is something that is also authorised by an Act); and (b) includes entry into a contract for, or relating to,— (i) (ii) acquisition of financial products (within the meaning of section 7 of the Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013) or borrowing of money; or the purchase, leasing, or sale of, or other dealings with, property; or (iii) the employment, or engagement of the services, of a person.
(3) A person who relies on subclause (1) has the onus of proving that that person did not have, and ought not reasonably to have had, the knowledge referred to in that subclause.

(4) A board must report, in its annual report, each transaction that the board has performed in the year to which the report relates that was invalid under clause 20 but enforced in reliance on subclause (1).
(5) To avoid doubt, this clause does not affect any person’s remedies (for example, remedies in contract) under the general law.

22 Acts that are not in best interests of board It is irrelevant to the validity of an act that the act is not, or may not be, in the best interests of a board.
23 Dealings between boards and other persons (1) A board may not assert against a person dealing with the board that— (a) a person held out by the board to be a member, office holder, chief executive, employee, or agent of the board (as the case may be)— (i) (ii) has not been duly appointed in that capacity or has ceased to be appointed in that capacity; or does not have the authority to exercise a power that, given the nature of the board, a person appointed to that capacity customari- ly has authority to exercise; or (iii) does not have the authority to exercise a power that the board holds him or her out as having; or (b) a document issued on behalf of the board by a member, office holder, chief executive, employee, or agent of the board who has actual or usual authority to issue the document is not valid or genuine.
609 Schedule 6 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) However, a board may assert any of those matters if the person dealing with the board has, or ought reasonably to have had, knowledge of the matter.

(3) Nothing in this clause affects a person’s right to apply, in accordance with the law, for judicial review.
24 Trustees not personally liable (1) A trustee is not personally liable for— (a) (b) any act done or omitted by the board; or any loss to the board arising out of any act done or omitted by the trustee.

(2) However, subclause (1) applies only if the act or omission was (so far as the trustee’s involvement is concerned) in good faith in carrying out or intending to carry out the functions of the board.
Part 3 Financial and property matters and application of Crown Entities Act 2004 25 Board to be financially responsible A board must perform its functions and exercise its powers in a way that is fi- nancially responsible.

26 (1) Application of Crown Entities Act 2004 Every board is a Crown entity for the purposes of section 7 of the Crown En- tities Act 2004.

(2) However, that Act applies to boards only to the extent that subclause (3) pro- vides.
(3) The provisions of the Crown Entities Act 2004 set out in Schedule 3 of that Act and Schedule 5A of this Act apply to boards and their Crown entity subsidia- ries (within the meaning of the Crown Entities Act 2004).

27 Directions under section 107 of Crown Entities Act 2004 (1) A board must comply with any direction given under section 107 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

(2) 28 (1) If the board does not comply with a direction, it may be dissolved under sec- tion 78I(1)(e).
Restrictions on acquisition of securities Sections 160 and 161 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 apply.
(2) Under section 161 of that Act, a board must not acquire securities— (a) other than— 610 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 6 (i) a debt security denominated in New Zealand dollars that is issued by a registered bank, or by any other entity, that satisfies a credit- rating test that is specified in either regulations made under Part 4 of that Act or a notice in the Gazette published by the Minister of Finance; or (ii) a public security; or (b) otherwise than as provided in— (i) (ii) any regulations made under Part 4 of that Act; or any approval given jointly by the Minister of Education and the Minister of Finance; or (iii) this Act.
Restrictions on borrowing Sections 160 and 162 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 apply.

29 (1) (2) Under sections 160 and 162 of that Act, a board must not borrow from any per- son, or amend the terms of any borrowing, otherwise than as provided in— (a) (b) any regulations made under Part 4 of that Act; or any approval given jointly by the Minister of Education and the Minister of Finance; or (c) this Act.
30 No delegation of power to borrow A board must not delegate any power to borrow money that it may have under section 160 or 162 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

31 (1) Restrictions on giving of guarantees and indemnities Sections 160 and 163 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 apply.
(2) Under sections 160 and 163 of that Act, a board must not, with or without se- curity, give a guarantee to, or indemnify, another person otherwise than as pro- vided in— (a) (b) any regulations made under Part 4 of that Act; or any approval given jointly by the Minister of Education and the Minister of Finance; or (c) this Act.

Restrictions on use of derivatives Sections 160 and 164 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 apply.
32 (1) (2) Under sections 160 and 164 of that Act, a board must not enter into an agree- ment constituting a derivative, or amend the terms of that agreement, otherwise than as provided in— 611 Schedule 6 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) any regulations made under Part 4 of that Act; or any approval given jointly by the Minister of Education and the Minister of Finance; or (c) this Act.
33 Gifts (1) Any money or property that is gifted to a school may be accepted or disclaimed by the board in accordance with section 167 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

(2) A limitation that is provided in this Act or that applies under the Crown En- tities Act 2004 (such as a limitation on the form in which property may be held) does not apply during a period that is reasonable in the circumstances.
(3) Subclauses (1) and (2) apply to any gift that is received by the board for fund- ing scholarships or bursaries, or for other educational purposes in connection with a school.

(4) A board must hold every such gift for the specific purpose declared by the giv- er.

(5) Unless the giver has created a special trust, scholarships and bursaries from a gift must be open to every student at the school.
(6) If the school for which a gift was given closes, the Minister must direct that the gift should apply to another school.

34 Real property Except as provided in clause 33, a board must not acquire an interest in land, or any licence to occupy any land or premises, without the consent of the Minis- ter.
35 (1) Occupancy of property and buildings The Secretary may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, specify terms and conditions applying generally to land and buildings occupied by boards, and may from time to time, by written notice to a particular board, specify terms and conditions applying to land and buildings occupied by that board.
(2) A notice under subclause (1)— (a) may apply to any land and buildings occupied by a board (regardless of who owns the property); but (b) to the extent that it applies to the board of a State integrated school, is subject to Part 33 and to the integration agreement for the time being in force between the Minister and the proprietor of the school.
(3) Terms and conditions under subclause (1) may include such matters as stand- ards of maintenance, standards of capital works, and minimum safety and health requirements.

(4) Subclause (3) does not limit the generality of subclause (1).
612 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 6 (5) Terms and conditions may be specified under subclause (1) in respect of— (a) (b) (c) a particular school or institution or particular schools or institutions; or schools or institutions of particular classes or descriptions; or all schools and institutions.
(6) A notice published in the Gazette under subclause (1) may contain the terms and conditions in their entirety or provide a general description of those terms and conditions and indicate where the full text can be obtained.
(7) Terms and conditions specified under subclause (1) apply to boards or a board (as the case may be) as if— (a) (b) (c) the land and buildings were owned by the Crown and the Crown has leased them to the board; and the terms and conditions were part of the lease; and the Crown had empowered the Secretary to exercise the Crown’s powers concerning the lease.
36 Leases and licences granted by boards (1) A board may, with the written consent of the Secretary, grant a lease or a licence to occupy to any person in respect of any land, buildings, or facilities occupied by the board.
(2) The Secretary may agree to the grant of a lease or a licence by the board only if satisfied that— (a) (b) (c) the land, building, or facilities are not needed or used for the purposes of the school during the time covered by the lease or licence; and the lease or licence is in the public interest; and the lease or licence— (i) (ii) is for a purpose associated with educational outcomes and will bring educational benefit to the school or its community, or to any other school; or is for a community purpose, and will bring no educational disad- vantage to the school.
(3) The Secretary must determine the terms and conditions of any lease or licence granted by a board by doing either or both of the following: (a) publishing a notice in the Gazette that specifies the general terms and conditions that apply to all, or specified classes of, leases or licences: (4) (5) (b) giving written notice to the board.

Clause 35(6) applies to a Gazette notice under subclause (3)(a).
In relation to a State integrated school, this clause applies subject to Part 33 and to any integration agreement in force between the Minister and the proprie- tor of the school.
613 Schedule 6 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 37 (1) Other agreements to occupy school land or buildings In this clause, agreement means an agreement, other than a lease or a licence to occupy under clause 36, between a board and any other person for the use of land, buildings, or facilities occupied by the board.
(2) A board may not enter into an agreement unless— (a) (b) the agreement is of a type permitted by Gazette notice under subclause (5); and the agreement is consistent with this clause and any conditions specified by Gazette notice under subclause (5).

(3) It is a condition of every agreement that the board has the right to enter, at any time, the land, buildings, or facilities that are the subject of the agreement.
(4) No person has the right under an agreement to use or occupy any land, build- ings, or facilities in such a way as to unduly interfere with the use, by the board for school purposes, of that land or those buildings or facilities, or any other land, buildings, or facilities of the school.
(5) The Secretary may, by notice in the Gazette,— (a) (b) identify the kinds of agreements (for example, agreements for the use of playing fields) that boards may enter into; and specify conditions to which agreements, or specified types of agree- ments, are subject.

Clause 35(6) applies to a Gazette notice under subclause (5)(b).
In relation to a State integrated school, this clause applies subject to Part 33 and to any integration agreement in force between the Minister and the proprie- tor of the school.

Boards exempt from taxation Every board is taken to be the agent of the Crown in respect of its property and the exercise of its functions, and is accordingly entitled to all the privileges the Crown enjoys in respect of exemption from taxation and the payment of fees or charges, and from other obligations.
(6) (7) 38 (1) (2) Nothing in subclause (1) exempts a board from— (a) the payment of goods and services tax under the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985; or (b) any obligation imposed by that Act.

614 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 6 Part 4 Meetings and procedure 39 Affixing of board’s seal (1) A board’s common seal must not be affixed to a document except pursuant to a resolution of the board.
(2) The affixing of a board’s common seal to a document must be countersigned by at least 2 trustees.

40 Meetings (1) A board must hold a meeting not later than 3 months after its previous meeting, at a time and place determined at the previous meeting.
(2) If, at any meeting of the board, the board does not determine a time and place for its next meeting, the time and place of its next meeting must be deter- mined— (a) (b) by the presiding trustee for the time being appointed under clause 41; or if no trustee is for the time being appointed to preside and a trustee who presided at the board’s previous meeting is still a trustee, by that trustee; and (c) in any other case, by the principal.
(3) When a casual vacancy occurs, the person for the time being appointed under clause 41, or, where there is no such person, the principal, must fix a place for a meeting of the board to deal with the vacancy on a day that is— (a) within 28 days of the vacancy occurring, if it occurs during any period of 6 months commencing on 1 October in a year before an election year; or (b) within 8 weeks of the vacancy occurring, if it occurs at any other time.
(4) No business may be transacted at any meeting of the board unless more than half the trustees then holding office are present.

(5) At a meeting of the board,— (a) (b) the person for the time being appointed under clause 41 must preside if present; or if that person is not present, a trustee (not being the principal or a staff or student representative) appointed by the board at the meeting must pre- side.
(6) Every question before a board must be decided by a majority of the votes cast on it by the trustees who are present.

(7) At a meeting of the board, the person presiding has a deliberative vote on every question and, on any question where deliberative votes for and against are equal, also has a casting vote.
615 Schedule 6 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (8) (9) Subject to subclause (11), a trustee who has a pecuniary interest in any matter or any interest that may reasonably be regarded as likely to influence a trustee in carrying out his or her duties and responsibilities as a trustee must be exclu- ded from any meeting of the board while it discusses, considers, considers any- thing relating to, or decides the matter.
Subject to subclause (11), a trustee who is a member of the board staff must be excluded from any meeting of the board while it discusses, considers, considers anything relating to, or decides any matter relating to the trustee’s employment by the board, or to the course of action to be taken following the hearing of a complaint against the trustee (being a complaint against the trustee in the trust- ee’s capacity as a member of the board staff).
(10) Subject to subclause (11), a trustee who is a student enrolled at the school or institution must be excluded from any meeting of the board while it discusses, considers, considers anything relating to, or decides any matter relating to the trustee as an individual student.

(11) A trustee may attend any meeting of the board to give evidence, make submis- sions, or answer questions.
(12) A meeting of the board may be held— (a) (b) by more than half the trustees then holding office being assembled to- gether at the time and place appointed for the meeting; or by means of audio, audiovisual, or electronic communication, but only if— (i) (ii) all of the trustees who wish to participate in the meeting have ac- cess to the technology needed to participate in the meeting; and a quorum of members can simultaneously communicate with each other throughout the meeting.
(13) A resolution signed or assented to in writing (whether sent by post, courier, or electronic communication) by all members is as valid and effectual as if it had been passed at a meeting of the board correctly called and constituted.

(14) The resolution may consist of several documents containing the same reso- lution, each signed or assented to in writing by 1 or more members.

(15) Except as provided in this Act, every board must determine its own procedures.
41 (1) One trustee to preside at meetings Every board must appoint a trustee (not being the principal or a staff or student representative) to preside at meetings of the board.
(2) The appointment must be made— (a) at the board’s first meeting in any year, unless it is an election year, in which case it must be at the first meeting held after the election; and 616 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 7 (b) (c) if the board has resolved that it has no confidence in the person for the time being appointed; and if the person for the time being appointed ceases to be a trustee, or re- signs the task by notice in writing to the board.
Schedule 7 New Zealand Teachers Council and members [Repealed] Schedule 7: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

s 139AC(3) 617 Schedule 8 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Schedule 8 Consequential amendments to Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975 s 141 Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).
618 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 9 Schedule 9 Consequential amendments to Education Act 1964 s 142(1) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

619 Schedule 10 Education Act 1989 Schedule 10 Other consequential amendments Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 s 142(2) Civil Defence Act 1983 (1983 No 46) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Education Lands Act 1949 (1949 No 24) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).
Local Government Official Information and Meetings Act 1987 (1987 No 174) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Official Information Act 1982 (1982 No 156) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Ombudsmen Act 1975 (1975 No 9) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

State Sector Act 1988 (1988 No 20) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Schedule 10: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 73(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
Schedule 10: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 73(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Schedule 10: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 73(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Schedule 10: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 73(4) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Schedule 10: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 73(5) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
620 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 11 Schedule 11 Consequential repeals Schedule 11 heading: amended, on 23 July 1990, by section 34 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

s 142(3) Education Act 1964 (1964 No 135) (Reprinted 1975, Vol 3, p 1699) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Education Amendment Act 1932–33 (1932–33 No 49) Education Amendment Act 1967 (1967 No 136) (Reprinted 1975, Vol 3, p 1880) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).
Education Amendment Act 1968 (1968 No 11) (Reprinted 1975, Vol 3, p 1881) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Education Amendment Act 1972 (1972 No 34) (Reprinted 1975, Vol 3, p 1886) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1974 (1974 No 136) (Reprinted 1975, Vol 3, p 1888) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s) Education Amendment Act 1975 (1975 No 26) (Reprinted 1975, Vol 3, p 1895) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).
Education Amendment Act 1976 (1976 No 42) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1976 (1976 No 70) Education Amendment Act 1977 (1977 No 91) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Education Amendment Act 1978 (1978 No 79) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Education Amendment Act 1979 (1979 No 148) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).
621 Schedule 11 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1982 (1982 No 155) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Education Amendment Act 1983 (1983 No 57) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1987 (1987 No 177) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

Local Government Amendment Act 1979 (1979 No 59) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

School Trustees Act 1989 (1989 No 3) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).
622 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 12 Schedule 12 Consequential revocations s 142(4) Education Amending Regulations 1945 (SR 1945/59) Education Board Administration Regulations 1979 (SR 1979/86) Education Board Administration Regulations 1979, Amendment No 1 (SR 1980/92) Education Board Administration Regulations 1979, Amendment No 2 (SR 1980/40) Education Board Grants Regulations 1973 (SR 1973/5) Education Board Grants Regulations 1973, Amendment No 1 (SR 1977/229) Education (Committees of Management) Regulations 1981 (SR 1981/3) Education (Forms 1 to 7) Schools’ Regulations 1976 (SR 1976/325) Education (School Committees’ Incidental Expenses) Regulations 1956 (SR 1956/218) Education (School Committees’ Incidental Expenses) Regulations 1956, Amendment No 4 (SR 1972/174) Gisborne High Schools’ Board Administration Regulations 1967 (SR 1967/122) Manual and Technical Instruction Regulations 1925 (Gazette Vol III 1925, p 3245) Manual and Technical Instruction Regulations 1925, Amendment No 1 (Gazette Vol II 1927, p 2743) Manual and Technical Instruction Regulations 1925, Amendment No 5 (Gazette Vol I 1931, p 1047) Manual and Technical Instruction Regulations 1925, Amendment No 8 (Gazette Vol III 1932, p 2781) Manual and Technical Instruction Regulations 1925, Amendment No 10 (Gazette Vol II 1934, p 1448) Manual and Technical Instruction Regulations 1925, Amendment No 13 (Gazette Vol I 1935, p 287) Manual and Technical Instruction Regulations 1925, Amendment No 14 623 Schedule 12 Education
 Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Manual and Technical Instruction Regulations 1925, Amendment No 18 (SR 1973/68) Organisation and Inspection of State Primary Schools’ Regulations 1963 (SR 1963/46) Organisation and Inspection of State Primary Schools’ Regulations 1963, Amendment No 1 (SR 1981/161) Organisation and Inspection of State Primary Schools’ Regulations 1963, Amendment No 2 (SR 1986/157) Private Schools’ Conditional Integration Agreement Regulations 1976 (SR 1976/175) School Committees’
 Administration Regulations 1965 (SR 1965/149) School Committees’ Administration Regulations 1965, Amendment No 1 (SR 1967/60) School Committees’ Administration Regulations 1965, Amendment No 2 (SR 1969/97) School Committees’ Administration Regulations 1965, Amendment No 3 (SR 1973/173) School Committees’ Administration Regulations 1965, Amendment No 4 (SR 1976/310) School Committees’ Administration Regulations 1965, Amendment No 5 (SR 1979/63) School Committees’ Administration Regulations 1965, Amendment No 6 (SR 1981/270) School Committees’ Administration Regulations 1965, Amendment No 7 (SR 1982/79) 624 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 13 Schedule 13 Existing institutions Schedule 13: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 47 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).
s 162(1) Part 1 Universities University of Auckland University of Canterbury Lincoln University Massey University University of Otago University of Waikato Victoria University of Wellington Part 2 Colleges of Education Auckland College of Education Christchurch College of Education Dunedin Teachers College Hamilton Teachers College Palmerston North Teachers College Wellington College of Education 625 Schedule 13A Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Schedule 13A Application of Crown Entities Act 2004 to tertiary education institutions Schedule 13A: replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
Schedule 13A heading: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 74(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
s 203 Section Section 3 to 8 Section 10 Section 119 Section 131(2) Section 135 (but only in respect of office holders and employees of tertiary education institutions and Crown entity subsidiaries) Section 136 Section 137 Section 154, as amended by the Education Act 1989 section 220(2) to (2B), in Schedule 6 Brief description Crown entities and categories Interpretation Cross reference to State Sector Act 1988, sec- tions 84 to 84B Application of Official Information Act 1982 and Ombudsmen Act 1975 Officials for the purposes of sections of the Crimes Act 1961 Interpretation for Part 4 Application of subpart 2 of Part 4 Financial statements Section 155, as modified by the Education Act 1989, section 220(2AA)(a) Statement of responsibility for financial state- ments Section 156, as modified by the Education Act 1989, section 220(2B) Audit report Section 156A, as modified by the Education Act 1989, section 220(2AA)(b) Section 156B Section 157A Section 157 Section 220 Education Act 1989 Section 220 Education Act 1989 Application of subpart 2 of Part 4 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 to Crown entity groups Minister of Finance may require additional re- porting Other multi-parent subsidiaries Allows for variation of reporting requirements of multi-parent subsidiaries Inclusion of financial statements in annual re- port Laying before House of Representatives of fi- nancial statements Section 167 Gifts 626 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Section Section 168(1), (2) Education Act 1989 Schedule 13A Brief description
 Accounting records Sections 171(1)(b), (2), 172 Offences and penalties Section 176 Section 178 Application of provisions of the Public Fi- nance Act 1989 Application of Archives Act 1957 Sections 181, 188, 191, 193, 194, 198, 199, 200 Transitional and savings provisions and asso- ciated consequential amendments Schedule 13A: amended, on 29 October 2016, by section 42 of the Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72).
Schedule 13A: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 74(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Schedule 13A: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 74(3)(a) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).

Schedule 13A: amended, on 20 May 2010, by section 74(3)(b) of the Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25).
627 Schedule 14 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Schedule 14 Administrative provisions applying to Vice-Chancellors Committee s 240(7) Schedule 14: inserted, on 23 July 1990, by section 47 of the Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

1 (1) (2) (3) (4) Meetings of Committee The Committee shall meet as and when the Vice-Chancellors consider appro- priate.
If the Vice-Chancellor of a university is unable to attend a meeting, a person nominated by that Vice-Chancellor may attend in place of that Vice-Chancellor and, when so attending, shall be deemed to be the Vice-Chancellor of that uni- versity.

The Committee shall appoint a member to be the Chairperson of the Commit- tee.

The Chairperson holds office as Chairperson, subject to this clause, for such period as the Committee determines.
(5) The Chairperson ceases to hold office as Chairperson if he or she— (a) (b) ceases to be a member; or tells the members at a meeting of the Committee or otherwise that he or she resigns from office as Chairperson.

(6) (7) The Chairperson shall preside at all meetings at which he or she is present.

If the Chairperson is not present at a meeting, the members present shall ap- point one of their number to preside at that meeting.

(8) Subject to this clause, the Committee may determine its own procedures.
2 Staff and expenses The Councils of the universities are responsible for providing a secretary and other staff to assist the Committee in the performance of its functions and for paying the remuneration and allowances of those staff and meeting any other costs and expenses of the Committee.
3 (1) Affixing of Committee’s common seal The Committee may, in writing under its common seal, authorise any member or members, or any member or members of the staff of the Committee, to exe- cute documents, or documents of a specified class or description, or specified documents, on the Committee’s behalf.

(2) Subject to subclause (6), an authority under subclause (1) may be given uncon- ditionally, or subject to any conditions the Committee thinks fit.
(3) The Committee’s common seal shall not be affixed to any document except— 628 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) Education Act 1989 Schedule 14 pursuant to a resolution of the Committee; or by virtue of, and in accordance with, an authority under subclause (1).

(4) (5) The affixing of the Committee’s common seal pursuant to a resolution of the Committee shall be countersigned by at least 2 members.
The affixing of the Committee’s common seal by virtue of an authority under subclause (1) shall be countersigned in accordance with the authority.

(6) An authority under subclause (1) shall provide for the affixing of the Commit- tee’s common seal to be countersigned by at least 2 people.

(7) The affixing of the Committee’s common seal on a document is conclusive proof of the authority of the people who affixed it to do so.
4 Personal liability No member, or member of the staff, of the Committee is personally liable for any act done or omitted by the member, or members of the staff, or by the Committee— (a) (b) in good faith; and in pursuance or intended pursuance of the Committee’s functions.

5 (1) Committee may establish sub-committees The Committee may from time to time establish and abolish sub-committees.

(2) A sub-committee may include people who are members of the Committee, people who are not, or both.
(3) (4) (5) 6 (1) (2) (3) Every sub-committee shall appoint a person to preside at its meetings.

If the person so appointed is not present at a meeting of the sub-committee, the members of the sub-committee present shall appoint one of their number to preside at that meeting.

Subject to this clause, a sub-committee may determine its own procedures.
Delegations The Committee may delegate to any of its sub-committees or members, or any member of its staff, any of its powers under this Act or any other enactment.

Every delegation shall be made in writing.

Every delegation is revocable at will in writing.

(4) No delegation prevents or affects the exercise of any power by the Committee.

(5) No delegation affects the Committee’s responsibility for the actions of a sub- committee, member, or member of its staff, acting under it.
(6) Delegations may be made subject to instructions or conditions.

(7) Delegations may be made generally, or in relation to a particular case or cases of a particular class or description.

629 Schedule 14 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (8) A delegation continues in force until revoked.
(9) In the absence of proof to the contrary, a sub-committee, a member, or a mem- ber of the staff of the Committee, purporting to act under a delegation shall be deemed to be acting in accordance with its terms.

7 Power of Committee to borrow money The Committee may borrow money for the purposes only of any trust of which the Committee is a trustee.

8 (1) Bank accounts The Committee may establish, maintain and operate bank accounts at any registered bank.
(2) As soon as is practicable after receiving any money, the Committee shall pay it into one or other of its bank accounts.

(3) The Committee shall properly authorise every withdrawal and payment of money from any of its bank accounts.

9 Investment Subject to any other enactment, the Committee may invest any of its money in any manner in which the Treasury may invest public money under section 65I(1) and (2) of the Public Finance Act 1989.
Schedule 14 clause 9: amended, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

10 Annual report (1) As soon as is practicable after the end of every financial year, the Committee shall give to the Minister a report on its operations for the year.
(2) The Committee must include in every annual report of the Committee the fi- nancial statements and statement of service performance prepared by the Com- mittee, in accordance with sections 153 to 156 of the Crown Entities Act 2004, in respect of the financial year to which the report relates, together with the audit report and the statement of responsibility under section 155 of that Act relating to those financial statements.
(3) The Minister must present a copy of the report to the House of Representatives in accordance with section 150 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

Schedule 14 clause 10(2): replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Schedule 14 clause 10(3): replaced, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).
630 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 18 Schedule 15 Administrative provisions applying to New Zealand Qualifications Authority [Repealed] Schedule 15: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

s 248(4) Schedule 16 Administrative provisions applying to the Agency continued by section 270 [Repealed] Schedule 16: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 41 of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amend- ment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
s 270(5) Schedule 17 Administrative provisions applying to the Service continued by section 279 [Repealed] Schedule 17: repealed, on 25 January 2005, by section 200 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

s 279(5) Schedule 18 Administrative provisions applying to Tertiary Research Board [Repealed] Schedule 18: repealed, on 1 January 2003, by section 45(2)(c) of the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).
s 288(5) 631 Schedule 19 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Schedule 19 Transitional and savings provisions relating to councils of tertiary institutions Schedule 19: inserted, on 13 February 2015, by section 41(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
s 299A 1 Interpretation For the purposes of this schedule, unless the context otherwise requires,— (a) (b) council means the council of an institution that is not a designated poly- technic: transition period, in relation to a council, means the period commenc- ing on the commencement of this schedule, and ending on— (i) (ii) the close of 30 June 2016; or if the council fixes an earlier day for its successor council to take office, the close of the day before the day fixed: (c) terms defined in section 159(1) have the meanings given by that section.
2 (1) (2) Existing councils to prepare draft constitutions Every council must, in accordance with this Act,— (a) (b) prepare a draft constitution for a new council for its institution; and give a copy to the Minister.

The copy must be given to the Minister at least 2 months before the end of the transition period, and the draft constitution must be prepared early enough for this to be done.
3 Draft constitutions to be approved by Minister The Minister must, by notice in the Gazette setting out the constitution, con- firm a draft constitution for a new council of an institution if— (a) the council has given a copy to the Minister at least 2 months before the end of the transition period; and (b) he or she is satisfied that it complies with the requirements of this Act.
4 Minister may establish new constitution if council does not act in time The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette setting out the constitution, estab- lish a constitution for a new council if the council has not given a copy of a draft constitution to the Minister at least 2 months before the end of the transi- tion period.
5 When new constitution established A constitution of an institution— 632 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 19 (a) (b) is established when a notice under clause 3 or 4 is published; and comes into effect at the close of the council’s transition period.
6 New councils to be appointed (1) As soon as practicable after a constitution for a new council of an institution is established, the Minister and the existing council must, in accordance with this Act, appoint members of a new council.

(2) (3) The Minister must make appointments before the close of the council’s transi- tion period.

The council must make appointments no later than 3 months after the close of that period.
7 New councils to replace existing councils at close of transition period (1) At the close of its transition period,— (a) (b) the members of every council go out of office and are replaced by mem- bers appointed pursuant to clause 6(1); and the chairperson and deputy chairperson of every council go out of office as chairperson or deputy chairperson (even if they are members appoin- ted pursuant to clause 6(1)).
(2) Neither the Crown nor the council is liable to make a payment to, or otherwise compensate, a person in respect of the person’s going out of office as a member of the council under subclause (1).

(3) At the first meeting of a council after the close of its transition period, a council must elect one of its members to be the chairperson, and another of its mem- bers to be the deputy chairperson, of the council.
8 Council continues to be same body (1) After the close of its transition period, a council— (a) (b) is the same body it was immediately before that close; and continues to have the rights and obligations it then had.

(2) 9 (1) Subclause (1) is subject to clause 9.
Temporary power of direction Before the close of a council’s transition period, the Minister may, by written notice to the chief executive of the institution concerned, give any directions he or she thinks reasonably necessary to ensure that the council as reconstituted can deal effectively with the business before it after the close of that period, and— (a) the chief executive must give the council notice of the directions as soon as practicable after the close of that period; and (b) the council must comply with the directions.
633 Schedule 19 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) The Minister must consult the council before giving the directions.

634 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 20 Schedule 20 Transitional and savings provisions relating to other matters s 299B Schedule 20: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 41(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Provision disestablishing International Education Appeal Authority and review panel 1 (1) International Education Appeal Authority and review panel disestablished but must dispose of existing complaints The International Education Appeal Authority and review panel established by the code of practice established under section 238F of the principal Act— (a) (b) are disestablished; but continue in existence for the purpose of dealing with all complaints made before the commencement of section 29 of the Education Amend- ment Act 2015.
(2) This Act applies to complaints made before the commencement of section 29 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 as if sections 24 to 29 of that Act had not been enacted.
Provisions relating to New Zealand Teachers Council 2 Interpretation For the purposes of this schedule, unless the context otherwise requires,— assets means any real or personal property of any kind, whether or not subject to rights, and includes (but is not limited to)— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) any estate or interest in any land, including all rights of occupation of land or buildings: all buildings, vehicles, plant, equipment, and machinery, and any rights in them: all securities within the meaning of the Securities Act 1978: all rights of any kind, including rights under Acts and agreements, and all applications, objections, submissions, and appeals in respect of those rights: all patents, trade marks, designs, copyright, plant variety rights, and other intellectual property rights of any kind whether enforceable by Act or rule of law: goodwill, and any business undertaking: interests of any kind in any of the foregoing liabilities includes (but is not limited to)— 635 Schedule 20 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) (c) (d) liabilities and obligations under any Act or agreement; and debt securities within the meaning of the Securities Act 1978; and contingent liabilities; and interests of any kind in any of the foregoing New Zealand Teachers Council means the New Zealand Teachers Council es- tablished under Part 10A of this Act.
3 (1) Dissolution of New Zealand Teachers Council The New Zealand Teachers Council is dissolved.

(2) On the commencement of this clause, subject to subclauses (3) to (5), every employee of the New Zealand Teachers Council, except the chief executive, becomes an employee of the Education Council on the terms and conditions as applied immediately before he or she became an employee of the Education Council.
(3) For the purposes of every enactment, law, determination, contract, and agree- ment relating to the employment of a transferred employee,— (a) (b) the employment agreement of that employee is to be treated as unbroken; and the employee’s period of service with the New Zealand Teachers Coun- cil, and every other period of service of that employee that is recognised by the New Zealand Teachers Council as continuous service, is to be treated as a period of service with the Education Council.
(4) To avoid doubt, the employment of a transferred employee by the Education Council does not constitute new employment for the purposes of the KiwiSaver Act 2006.
(5) A transferred employee is not entitled to receive any payment or benefit from the New Zealand Teachers Council or the Education Council on the grounds that the person’s position in the New Zealand Teachers Council has ceased to exist or the person has ceased to be an employee of the New Zealand Teachers Council as a result of the transfer to the Education Council.

(6) This clause overrides Part 6A of the Employment Relations Act 2000.
4 5 Vesting of assets and liabilities of New Zealand Teachers Council The assets and liabilities of the New Zealand Teachers Council vest in the Edu- cation Council.
Proceedings commenced before this clause comes into force (1) All proceedings or any other matters involving the New Zealand Teachers Council that are yet to be determined or completed on the commencement of this clause are to be determined or completed by the Education Council in ac- cordance with the provisions of this Act as in force immediately before the 636 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 20 commencement of this clause as if the Education Council were the New Zea- land Teachers Council.
(2) Every application to the New Zealand Teachers Council for registration, a prac- tising certificate, or a limited authority to teach that had not been determined or completed on the commencement of this clause must be determined or comple- ted by the Education Council in accordance with the provisions of this Act as amended by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015.

(3) Subclause (2) overrides subclause (1).
6 Certain matters to be treated as having been done under this Act as amended by Education Amendment Act 2015 Despite anything in clause 3 of Schedule 20,— (a) (b) (c) any teacher who is registered immediately before the commencement of this clause is to be treated as being registered under this Act as amended by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015; and any teacher who, immediately before the commencement of this clause, holds a practising certificate is to be treated as holding a practising cer- tificate under this Act as amended by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015, but that practising certificate expires on the earlier of the following: (i) the date on which the practising certificate would have expired under this Act before it was amended by section 40 of the Educa- tion Amendment Act 2015; or (ii) 24 months after the commencement of this clause; and any person who, immediately before the commencement of this clause, holds a limited authority to teach is to be treated as holding a limited au- thority to teach under this Act as amended by section 40 of the Educa- tion Amendment Act 2015; but that limited authority to teach expires when it would have expired under this Act if this Act had not been amended by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015; and (d) where, immediately before the commencement of this clause, a person was provisionally registered under section 123, or registered subject to confirmation under section 124(3), the person’s practising certificate must include a statement to that effect; and (e) (f) every register of teachers or list of holders of limited authorities to teach made by the New Zealand Teachers Council under this Act that is in ex- istence immediately before the commencement of this clause is to be treated as a register or list made by the Education Council under this Act as amended by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015; and any rules made under this Act that are in force immediately before the commencement of this clause (other than the
 New Zealand Teachers Council Election Rules 2002) are to be treated as rules made under this 637 Schedule 20 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) Act as amended by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015, but expire 12 months after the commencement of this clause if they are not replaced by rules made under this Act after the commencement of this clause; and any system for co-ordinating Police vetting established under this Act that is in existence immediately before the commencement of this clause is to be treated as being established under this Act as amended by sec- tion 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015; and any arrangement to facilitate the matching of register information and in- formation about payment of teacher salaries established under this Act that is in existence immediately before the commencement of this clause is to be treated as an arrangement established under this Act as amended by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015); and any person who was a member of a disciplinary body immediately be- fore the commencement of this clause is to be treated as a person ap- pointed as a member of that disciplinary body under this Act as amended by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015; and any rules described in paragraph (f) that are inconsistent with any provi- sion of this Act after this Act is amended by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015 are to be treated as expired and do not apply; and all standards made under this Act for teacher registration or the issue of practising certificates that were in force immediately before the com- mencement of this clause are to be treated as standards and criteria for ongoing practice or (as the case may be) the issue of practising certifi- cates made under this Act as amended by section 40 of the Education Amendment Act 2015, but expire on the earlier of— (i) their replacement by standards and criteria made under this Act after the commencement of
 this clause: (ii) the day 24 months after the commencement of this clause.
7 No compensation for loss of office A member of the New Zealand Teachers Council is not entitled to any compen- sation or other payment or benefit relating to his or her ceasing, for any reason, to hold office as a member, including (but not limited to) by reason of the dis- solution of the New Zealand Teachers Council.
8 Employment in registered schools before commencement of this clause For the purposes of section 363, employment before the commencement of this clause in a registered school (within the meaning of this Act or the Education Act 1964) is to be treated as employment in the general education system.
638 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 21 Schedule 21 Governance provisions of Education Council Schedule 21: inserted, on 1 July 2015, by section 41(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

ss 348, 379, 380, 381 1 (1) Appointment as member The Minister must appoint all 9 members of the Education Council.

(2) At least 5 of the members must be people who are registered under section 353, and hold a practising certificate under section 361.
(3) At least 5 members must be appointed by the Minister from nominations re- ceived following notification of the Education Council vacancy in the Gazette.

(4) The Gazette notice must specify the appointment process and must list the cri- teria for appointment specified in subclause (5).
(5) In making an appointment, the Minister must— (a) (b) have regard to the collective skills, experience, and knowledge making up the overall composition of the Education Council; and take into account each candidate’s ability to carry out the duties of a member of the Education Council, including (but not limited to) the can- didate’s— (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) knowledge of education; and experience of governance; and leadership experience and skills; and financial skills; and understanding of the partnership principles of the Treaty of Wai- tangi.
(6) (7) The Minister must appoint each member by written notice to the member.

The notice of appointment must state— (a) (b) the date on which the appointment takes effect; and the term for which the member is appointed.
2 Disqualification from office The following persons are disqualified from being members: (a) (b) (c) a person who is an undischarged bankrupt: a person who is prohibited from being a director or promoter of, or being concerned or taking part in the management of, an incorporated or unin- corporated body under any enactment other than this Act: a person who is subject to a property order under the Protection of Per- sonal and Property Rights Act 1988: 639 Schedule 21 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (d) a person in respect of whom a personal order has been made under that Act that reflects adversely on the person’s— (i) (ii) competence to manage his or her own affairs in relation to his or her property; or capacity to make or to communicate decisions relating to any par- ticular aspect or aspects of his or her personal care and welfare: (e) a person who has been convicted of an offence punishable by imprison- ment for a term of 2 years or more, or who has been sentenced to impris- onment for any other offence, unless that person has obtained a pardon, served the sentence, or otherwise suffered the penalty imposed on the person: (f) a member of Parliament.
Removal from office The Minister may revoke the appointment of a member of the Education Coun- cil at any time for just cause.

The revocation must be made by written notice to the member with a copy to the Education Council.

3 (1) (2) (3) The written notice must state— (a) the date on which the removal takes effect, which must not be earlier than the date on which the notice is received; and (b) the reasons for the removal.
(4) In this clause, just cause— (a) includes misconduct, inability to perform the functions of office, neglect of duty, and breach of any of the collective duties of the board or the in- dividual duties of members (depending on the seriousness of the breach); and (b) in the case of a member who held a practising certificate under section 361 when appointed, includes— (i) (ii) ceasing to hold the certificate; and the suspension of the certificate.
(5) The Minister may remove a member with as little formality and technicality, and as much expedition, as is permitted by— (a) (b) the principles of natural justice; and a proper consideration of the matter.
(6) A Judge may be removed as a member in accordance with the removal provi- sions of this Act for a breach of the Education Council’s collective duties, but only if all of the other members are being removed for the same breach at the same time (and the removal does not affect his or her tenure as a Judge).
640 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 21 (7) A member of the Education Council is not entitled to any compensation or other payment or benefit relating to his or her ceasing, for any reason, to hold office as a member.

4 (1) Continuation in office Each member of the Education Council continues in office (unless he or she ceases to hold office under subclause (4)) until a successor is appointed.
(2) A member may resign from office by written notice to the Minister (with a copy to the Education Council) signed by the member.

(3) The resignation is effective on receipt by the Minister of the notice or at any later time specified in the notice.

(4) A member of the Education Council ceases to hold office if he or she— (a) (b) (c) resigns; or is removed from office; or becomes disqualified from being a member.
Chairperson The Minister must appoint one of the members as chairperson by notice in writing stating the date on which the appointment takes effect.

5 (1) (2) The chairperson holds that office until— (a) (b) (c) (d) he or she resigns from that office; or he or she is removed from it by the Minister; or he or she ceases to hold office as a member; or the term of office specified on appointment expires.

(3) A person may be reappointed as chairperson for a further term.
(4) (5) (6) (7) 6 (1) (2) The chairperson may, without resigning as a member, resign from that office by written notice to the Minister (with a copy to the Education Council).

The notice of resignation must state the date on which the resignation takes ef- fect.

The Minister may, after consultation with the person concerned, remove a chairperson of the Education Council from that office by written notice to the person (with a copy to the Education Council).
The notice of removal must state the date on which the removal takes effect.

Administrative provisions The powers of the Education Council are not affected by any vacancy in its members.

The Education Council may appoint committees to advise it on any matters re- lating to the Education Council’s functions and powers.
641 Schedule 21 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (3) All questions arising at any meeting must be decided by a majority of those members present with the chairperson having a casting vote.

(4) 7 (1) (2) (3) Except as otherwise provided under this or another Act, the members may regulate their own procedure.

Collective duties The Education Council must act in a manner consistent with its functions, duties, and powers.
The Education Council must ensure that it performs or exercises its functions, duties, and powers efficiently and effectively.

The Education Council must ensure that it operates in a financially responsible manner and, for this purpose, that it prudently manages its assets and liabilities.

8 Individual duties (1) A member of the Education Council must not contravene, or cause the contra- vention of, or agree to the Education Council contravening, this Act.
(2) A member of the Education Council must, when acting as a member, act with honesty and integrity.

(3) A member of the Education Council must, when acting as a member, act in good faith and not pursue his or her own interests at the expense of the Educa- tion Council’s interests.
(4) A member of the Education Council must, when acting as a member, exercise the care, diligence, and skill that a reasonable person would exercise in the same circumstances, taking into account (without limitation)— (a) (b) (c) the nature of the Education Council; and the nature of the action; and the position of the member and the nature of the responsibilities under- taken by him or her.
(5) A member of the Education Council who has information in his or her capacity as a member that would not otherwise be available to him or her must not dis- close that information to any person, or make use of, or act on, that informa- tion, except— (a) (b) (c) in the performance of the Education Council’s functions; or as required or permitted by law; or when the member is first authorised to do so by the Education Council and the disclosure, use, or act in question will not, or will be unlikely to, prejudice the Education Council.
9 Members not personally liable No member of the Education Council is personally liable for any act done or omitted to be done by the body or any loss to the Education Council arising out 642 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Schedule 21 of any act done or omitted to be done by the member if the act or omission was (so far as the member’s involvement is concerned) in good faith and in pursu- ance or intended pursuance of the functions of the Education Council.
10 Conflicts of interest (1) A person is interested in a matter if he or she— (a) may derive a financial benefit from the matter; or (b) is the spouse, civil union partner, de facto partner, child, or parent of a person who may derive a financial benefit from the matter; or (c) may have a financial interest in a person to whom the matter relates; or (d) is a partner, director, officer, board member, or trustee of a person who may have a financial interest in a person to whom the matter relates; or (e) is otherwise directly or indirectly interested in the matter.
(2) A member who is interested in a matter relating to the Education Council must disclose to the Education Council details of the interest as soon as practicable after the member becomes aware that he or she is interested.

(3) The details that must be disclosed are— (a) (b) the nature of the interest and the monetary value of the interest (if the monetary value can be quantified); or the nature and extent of the interest (if the monetary value cannot be quantified).
(4) A member who is interested in a matter— (a) must not vote or take part in any discussion or decision of the board or any committee relating to the matter, or otherwise participate in any ac- tivity of the Education Council that relates to the matter; and (b) must not sign any document relating to the entry into a transaction or the initiation of the matter.
(5) In this clause, matter means— (a) (b) the Education Council’s performance of its functions or exercise of its powers; or an arrangement, agreement, or contract made or entered into, or pro- posed to be entered into, by the Education Council.
643 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 Public Act 1991 No 136 Date of assent 18 December 1991 Commencement see section 1(2) 1 (1) (2) Short Title and commencement This Act may be cited as the Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991, and shall be read together with and deemed part of the Education Act 1989 (hereinafter referred to as “the principal Act”).
Except as provided in sections 5(5), 16(2), 17(2), 18(2), and 34, this Act shall come into force on 1 January 1992.

9 National education guidelines (1)–(4) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).

(5) All national education guidelines under section 60 of the principal Act that were in force immediately before the commencement of this Act shall continue in force as if they are national administration guidelines; but may be amended or revoked accordingly.

(6) Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).


644 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 Public Act 1998 No 118 Date of assent 18 December 1998 Commencement see section 1(2), (3) 1 (1) (2) (3) Short Title and commencement This Act may be cited as the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998, and is part of the Education Act 1989 (“the principal Act”).
Except as provided in subsection (3), this Act comes into force on the day after the date on which it receives the Royal assent.

Sections 7 and 64 come into force on a date to be appointed by the Governor- General by Order in Council.
Repeals, amendments, and transitional and savings provisions 62 Transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes (1) Despite anything in the principal Act or in the enrolment schemes concerned, every enrolment scheme in place under the principal Act when this section comes into force (an old scheme) continues in force and ceases to have effect on a date to be appointed by the Governor-General by Order in Council; and 1 or more orders may be made under this subsection appointing different dates for different classes of schools or different locations.
(2) A new enrolment scheme (whether or not it is to have effect in place of an old scheme) may be prepared in accordance with Part 2 of the principal Act (as amended by this Act) at any time after this section comes into force.
63 Saving of syllabuses in force under Education Act 1964 Every statement (such as a syllabus) corresponding to a national curriculum statement under section 60A of the principal Act that was issued in the form of a notice and was, immediately before the commencement of this section, in force under the Education Act 1964 continues in force until revoked under sec- tion 60A(2) of the principal Act.
645 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Standards Act 2001 Public Act 2001 No 88 Date of assent 24 October 2001 Commencement see section 2 Title This Act is the Education Standards Act 2001.

In this Act, the Education Act 1989 is called “the principal Act”.

Commencement This Act, other than the sections listed in subsection (2), comes into force on the day after the date on which it receives the Royal assent.
The following sections come into force on a date or dates to be appointed by the Governor-General by Order in Council, and 1 or more Orders in Council may be made appointing different dates for different provisions: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) section 18: sections 25 to 37: section 60: sections 69 to 77: section 82(2): section 83.

Section 2(2)(d): brought into force, on 1 February 2002, by the Education Standards Act Commence- ment Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).
Part 2 Transitional and miscellaneous provisions, and consequential amendments Transitional provisions relating to school planning and reporting Transition to new planning regime In this section,— new national administration guidelines means national administration guide- lines issued under section 60A(1)(c) of the principal Act as substituted by sec- tion 12 old national administration guidelines means national administration guide- lines that were issued under section 60A(1)(c) of the principal Act, as it read immediately before the date of commencement of section 12, and had effect immediately before that date.
1 (1) (2) 2 (1) (2) 65 (1) 646 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 (2) 66 (1) The provisions of old national administration guidelines continue to have effect until replaced or superseded by new national administration guidelines.

Transition to new annual reporting requirements In this section,— new section 87 means section 87 of the principal Act as amended by section 23 old section 87 means section 87 of the principal Act as it read immediately be- fore the commencement of section 23.
(2) A Board must make its first annual report under new section 87 in relation to the 2003 school year.

(3) Until a Board’s first annual report has to be made under new section 87, it must make its annual reports in accordance with old section 87.
Transitional provision relating to intervention in poorly performing schools 67 (1) Transitional arrangements for financial managers This section applies to every person who, at the close of the day before the commencement of this section, is a financial manager appointed under section 81B of the principal Act (before its repeal by this Act).
(2) On the date of commencement of this section, a person to whom this section applies is deemed to be a limited statutory manager appointed under section 78M of the principal Act by a notice that states— (a) (b) that the person has and may exercise all the functions, powers, and duties of the board that are necessary to enable him or her to manage the board’s financial management system; and that no cheque drawn on the board’s accounts is valid unless signed by the person.
(3) The conditions in a notice under subsection (2) may be amended under section 78M(6) of the principal Act as if they were contained in a notice issued under section 78M(1).

68 Transitional arrangements for commissioners (1) On the date of commencement of this section, a commissioner appointed under section 106 of the principal Act (before its repeal by this Act) is deemed to be a commissioner appointed under section 78N(3) of the principal Act (as inserted by this Act).
(2) On the date of commencement of this section, a commissioner appointed under section 107 of the principal Act (before its repeal by this Act) is deemed to be a commissioner appointed under section 78N(2) of the principal Act (as inserted by this Act).
647 69 (1) (2) Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Transitional provisions relating to teacher registration Delayed application of teacher registration provisions Part 31 of the principal Act does not apply to, or apply in relation to, Kura Kaupapa Maori or any person employed in a teaching position at a Kura Kau- papa Maori, except in accordance with regulations made under subsection (2).
The Governor-General may, by Order in Council made on the recommendation of the Minister, make regulations setting out 1 or more transition plans for bringing Kura Kaupapa Maori and early childhood services (as defined in sec- tion 348 of the principal Act) under Part 31 of the principal Act, including regulations— (a) (b) declaring specified early childhood services, or early childhood services of 1 or more specified types or descriptions, to be early childhood educa- tion and care services for the purpose of Part 31 of the principal Act: setting a date or dates on which, or a period or periods within which, specified provisions of Part 31 of the principal Act apply to— (i) (ii) Kura Kaupapa Maori, or persons employed in teaching positions at Kura Kaupapa Maori: early childhood services or persons employed in teaching pos- itions at those early childhood services: (c) modifying the definition of teaching position in section 348 of the prin- cipal Act for the purposes of applying it to Kura Kaupapa Maori, or ear- ly childhood services, or both.
Section 69(1): amended, on 1 July 2015, by section 43(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 69(2): amended, on 1 July 2015, by section 43(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 69(2): amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 56(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 69(2)(a): amended, on 1 July 2015, by section 43(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).
Section 69(2)(b): amended, on 1 July 2015, by section 43(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 69(2)(b)(ii): replaced, on 17 May 2006, by section 56(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Section 69(2)(c): amended, on 1 July 2015, by section 43(4) of the Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1).

Section 69(2)(c): amended, on 17 May 2006, by section 56(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).
Transitional provisions relating to New Zealand Teachers Council 70 Interpretation In this section and sections 71 to 76,— 648 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Teacher Registration Board means the Teacher Registration Board establish- ed under section 131 of the principal Act (as repealed by this Act) Teachers Council means the New Zealand Teachers Council established under Part 10A of the principal Act (as inserted by this Act).
71 Teacher Registration Board to be absorbed into Teachers Council (1) On the date of commencement of this section, the Teacher Registration Board ceases to exist and— (a) (b) the term of every member of the Teacher Registration Board expires; and the assets and liabilities of the Teacher Registration Board vest in the Teachers Council.

(2) No member of the Teacher Registration Board is entitled to compensation as a result of the expiry under this section of his or her term of office.
(3) On and from the date of commencement of this section, every reference in an enactment (other than this Act), or in any instrument or register, to the Teacher Registration Board (or Registration Board) must, if the context requires, be construed as a reference to the Teachers Council.
(4) An application for teacher registration, a practising certificate, or a limited au- thority to teach that was properly made before this section commences must be treated as if it were properly made under Part 10 of the principal Act as amended by this Act.
72 Final annual report and final accounts (1) As soon as practicable after the commencement of this section, the Teachers Council must, unless the Teacher Registration Board has already done so, pre- pare and forward to the Minister an annual report on the operations of the Teacher Registration Board for the year ended 30 June 2001.
(2) The annual report must include— (a) (b) financial statements prepared in accordance with Part 5 of the Public Fi- nance Act 1989; and the audit report and the statement of responsibility relating to those fi- nancial statements.

(3) The Minister must present a copy of the annual report to the House of Repre- sentatives.
(4) As soon as practicable after the commencement of this section, the Teachers Council must prepare and forward to the Auditor-General financial statements of the Teacher Registration Board to the end of the month preceeding the com- mencement of this section.
649 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 73 (1) (2) (3) 74 (1) Transfer of employees Every person who is employed by the Teacher Registration Board immediately before the date of commencement of this Act transfers to the Teachers Council on that date of commencement.

The transfer of an employee by this section is subject to any relevant transfer provisions in the employment agreement or contract applying to that employee.
For the purpose of any provisions of a transferred employee’s employment agreement or contract relating to continuity of service, the employee’s transfer to the Teachers Council is insufficient by itself to break his or her employment.

Protection of terms and conditions for transferred employee The employment of a transferred employee must be on terms and conditions no less favourable than those applying to the employee immediately before the date of the person’s transfer to the Teachers Council.
(2) Subsection (1)— (a) (b) continues to apply to the terms and conditions of employment of a trans- ferred employee until those terms and conditions are varied by agree- ment between the transferred employee and the Teachers Council; but does not apply to a transferred employee who, after the transfer, receives any subsequent appointment within the Teachers Council.
75 No compensation for technical redundancy A transferred employee is not entitled to receive any compensation for redun- dancy or any severance payment solely on the ground that the person has ceased to be an employee of the Teacher Registration Board as a result of his or her transfer to the Teachers Council.
76 (1) Delayed application of certain provisions relating to Teachers Council The Teachers Council must give notice in the Gazette of the date on which the first elected members to the Council take office.
(2) Until the date on which the first elected members take office, the Teachers Council may not— (a) exercise its functions under section 139AE(g), (h), (i), or (j) of the prin- cipal Act; and (b) prepare a code of ethics under section 139AI of the principal Act; and (c) make the rules referred to in section 139AJ(1)(b) to (e) of the principal Act (which relate to disciplinary functions and mandatory reporting).
(3) After the date on which the elected members take office, the Teachers Council may do any of the things specified in subsection (2), except exercise its func- tions under section 139AE(h) of the principal Act (which relates to disciplinary functions).

650 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 (4) (5) The Teachers Council must advise the Minister when it has made rules under section 139AJ(1)(b) to (e) of the principal Act.
The Governor-General must make an Order in Council bringing the following provisions into force as soon as practicable after the date on which the Teachers Council advises the Minister that it has made rules under section 139AJ(1)(b) to (e) of the principal Act: (a) (b) (c) (d) section 29 (which substitutes a new section 129 of the principal Act dealing with deregistration) and section 32 (which repeals section 130G of the principal Act (cancellation of authorisation)): sections 35 and 36 (which repeal sections of the principal Act relating to deregistration and mandatory reporting): sections 139AK to 139AZB of the principal Act (as inserted by section 37) (which relate to mandatory reporting and disciplinary provisions): section 139AZC of the principal Act (as inserted by section 37) (which relates to complaints about competence).
(6) On and from the date on which the provisions listed in subsection (5) come into force, the Teachers Council may exercise its functions under section 139AE(h) of the principal Act.
77 Transitional provision relating to inquiries (1) Until the disciplinary bodies of the Teachers Council are established, the Teachers Council may continue or commence, and may complete,— (a) (b) any inquiries into notifications received under sections 138A or 138B of the principal Act, whether the notification is received by the Teacher Registration Board before the commencement date, or by the Teachers Council after the commencement date; and any inquiry in connection with the possible deregistration of a teacher under section 129 of the principal Act or the possible cancellation of an authorisation under section 130G of the principal Act, whether the inquiry is commenced by the Teacher Registration Board before the commencement date, or by the Teachers Council after the commence- ment date.
(2) Before the disciplinary bodies are established, when doing any of the things de- scribed in subsection (1), the Teachers Council must (as far as reasonably prac- ticable) follow the procedures, and apply the standards, that were used by the Teacher Registration Board for those purposes.
(3) After the disciplinary bodies of the Teachers Council are established, those bodies must deal with any matter arising under any of sections 139AK to 139AP, section 139AR, or section 139AZC of the principal Act in accordance with the relevant rules.
651 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (4) However, in relation to an inquiry referred to in subsection (1) that is incom- plete on the date when the disciplinary bodies are established,— (a) the Teachers Council must continue and complete the inquiry in the manner described in subsection (2); or (b) with the agreement in writing (which is not revocable) of the teacher or authorised person concerned, the matter may be continued and comple- ted by the disciplinary bodies in accordance with the relevant rules, as if the matter arose under the relevant equivalent provision specified in sub- section (3).
Transitional provision relating to pastoral care of international students 78 (1) Transitional provisions relating to code This section applies to providers that enrol international students.

(2) Until the close of 6 months after the date the code takes effect, a provider may enrol persons as international students and continue to have international stu- dents enrolled even though the provider is not a signatory to the code.
(3) At the close of the period stated in subsection (2), the authority conferred by subsection (2) lapses.

This section applies despite the provisions of section 238E of the principal Act.

Terms used in this section and defined in section 238D of the principal Act have the same meanings as in that section.
Validation Validation of accommodation grant payments to Te Kohanga Reo National Trust Board This section applies to the payments made by the Crown to Te Kohanga Reo National Trust Board that— (a) were capital accommodation grants under section 309(1)(a)(ii) of the principal Act for the period beginning on 1 July 1996 and ending with the close of 30 June 2000; and (b) were advanced to the constituent kohanga reo by way of loans.
The payments to which this section applies are validated and are to be treated for all purposes as if they were capital accommodation grants made in accord- ance with section 309 of the principal Act.
Specialist Education Services Interpretation In sections 86 to 97, unless the context otherwise requires,— assets has the same meaning as in section 216 of the principal Act (4) (5) 84 (1) (2) 85 (1) 652 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 collective agreement means an employment agreement that is binding on 1 or more employers and 2 or more employees effective date means 28 February 2002, unless an earlier date is appointed as the effective date by the Governor-General by Order in Council under subsec- tion (2) employment agreement, in relation to a transferred employee,— (a) (b) has the same meaning as in section 5 of the Employment Relations Act 2000; and to avoid doubt, includes an employment contract that took effect before the commencement of that Act and covers the transferred employee’s employment with the Specialist Education Services Board liabilities has the same meaning as in section 216 of the principal Act Ministry means the Ministry of Education rights has the same meaning as in section 216 of the principal Act Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry transferred employee means an employee of the Specialist Education Services Board who transfers to the Ministry under section 88 before or on the effective date.
The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, appoint an effective date for the purposes of this section and sections 86 to 97 that is earlier than 28 Febru- ary 2002.

Specialist Education Services Board abolished and undertaking transferred on effective date (2) 86 (1) On the effective date,— (a) (b) the Specialist Education Services Board ceases to exist; and all assets, liabilities, and rights of the Specialist Education Services Board, by virtue of this section, become those of the Crown.
(2) On the effective date, Part 4 and Schedule 2 of the principal Act are consequen- tially repealed.

(3) On the effective date, the following enactments are consequentially repealed: (a) (b) (c) section 13(1) of the Education Amendment Act 1990: sections 3 and 4 of the Education Amendment Act 1993: sections 14 and 15 and the heading above section 14 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998.
87 Effect of reorganisation on employees Despite section 95, the abolition of the Specialist Education Services Board and the transfer of its undertaking and functions to the Crown does not transfer the chief executive or an employee of the Specialist Education Services Board.
653 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 88 Transfer of employees (1) An employee of the Specialist Education Services Board transfers to the Minis- try under this section if— (a) (b) (c) his or her position ceases to exist as a result of the transfer of the func- tions of the Board to the Ministry; and the Secretary agrees to his or her transfer under this section; and he or she is appointed to a position in the Ministry, whether before or on the effective date.
(2) Nothing in sections 60, 61, and 65 of the State Sector Act 1988 applies to that appointment.

(3) The transfer of the employee under this section is subject to any relevant provi- sions of the employee’s employment agreement (but this subsection does not limit the operation of sections 89 to 92).
89 Application of employment agreements of transferred employees (1) Unless a transferred employee’s employment agreement otherwise provides, and subject to subsection (2), the transferred employee’s employment agree- ment continues to apply to that employee, on and from the date that the employee transfers to the Ministry, on the same terms and conditions (includ- ing the period of the agreement)— (a) (b) as if it were an agreement that had been made in respect of the Ministry; and as if it were binding on both that employee and on the Secretary, and on any other party to that agreement.
If there is a change to an employee’s duties or location arising out of his or her transfer to the Ministry, the conditions of employment of that employee may be varied by agreement to reflect that change, but the conditions of employment (as so varied) must be no less favourable than those that the employee was en- titled to receive under the employment agreement that applied to the employee at the date of the transfer.
Subsections (1) and (2) continue to apply to the conditions of employment of each transferred employee to whom this section applies until the time that any of the conditions of employment that apply under the employment agreement applying to that employee at the date of the transfer are subsequently varied (otherwise than for the purpose referred to in subsection (2)).
The conditions of employment of each such transferred employee must, on and from the date of any subsequent variation to which subsection (3) applies, be determined in accordance with the employment agreement that applies to that employee in the Ministry.

(2) (3) (4) 654 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 (5) Nothing in subsection (1) or subsection (2) continues to apply to any transfer- red employee who receives any subsequent appointment, whether within the Ministry or any other department.
90 (1) Application of collective agreements of transferred employees This section limits the employees who may be bound by a collective agreement that binds the chief executive of the Specialist Education Services Board before the effective date and, as a consequence of sections 86 and 95, binds the Secre- tary and transferred employees after the effective date.
(2) After the effective date, the only employees of the Ministry who are entitled to be bound by or enforce that collective agreement are transferred employees who are appointed to a position in the Ministry that has been established (whether or not previously existing in the Ministry) to enable the Ministry to perform the functions of the Specialist Education Services Board.
(3) (4) (5) (6) Subsection (2) does not bind an employee to a collective agreement, or entitle an employee to be bound by or enforce a collective agreement, if the employee would not otherwise be bound by, or be entitled to be bound by or enforce, that agreement.

Sections 62 and 64 of the Employment Relations Act 2000 do not apply to a transferred employee in relation to the transfer.
This section limits the employees who may be bound by a collective agreement and the coverage of that agreement under Part 6 of the State Sector Act 1988 and sections 56(1), 57, 63(3), and 243 of the Employment Relations Act 2000.

This section does not apply to a collective agreement to the extent that the par- ties agree otherwise.
91 Employment of transferred employees continuous For the purposes of any provisions of a transferred employee’s employment agreement relating to continuity of service, that employee’s transfer from the Specialist Education Services Board to the Ministry is insufficient by itself to break his or her employment.
92 Restriction of compensation for technical redundancy for transferred employees An employee of the Specialist Education Services Board who transfers to the Ministry under section 88 is not entitled to receive any payment or other bene- fit on the ground that his or her position in the Specialist Education Services Board has ceased to exist.
93 (1) Restriction of compensation for technical redundancy for other employees This section applies to an employee of the Specialist Education Services Board who is not transferred to the Ministry under section 88.
655 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (2) An employee is not entitled to receive any payment or other benefit on the ground that his or her position in the Specialist Education Services Board has ceased to exist if— (a) the position ceases to exist as a result of the transfer of the functions of the Board to the Ministry; and (b) in connection with that transfer of functions,— (i) (ii) the employee is offered equivalent employment in the Ministry (whether or not the employee accepts the offer); or the employee is offered, and accepts, other employment in the Ministry.
(3) Equivalent employment to the employee’s employment in the Specialist Edu- cation Services Board is employment in the Ministry— (a) (b) (c) (d) in substantially the same position; and in the same general locality; and on terms and conditions of employment that are no less favourable than those that apply to the employee immediately before the offer of equiva- lent employment (including any service-related, redundancy, and super- annuation conditions); and on terms that treat the period of service with the Specialist Education Services Board (or any other period of service recognised by that Board as continuous service) as if it were continuous service with the Ministry.
94 Consequential amendments to other enactments On the effective date,— (a) (b) (c) (d) Schedule 1 of the Official Information Act 1982 is consequentially amended by omitting the item relating to the Specialist Education Ser- vices Board; and Schedule 1 of the Ombudsmen Act 1975 is consequentially amended by omitting from Part 2 the item relating to the Specialist Education Ser- vices Board; and Schedules 4, 5, 6, and 7 of the Public Finance Act 1989 are amended by omitting the item relating to the Specialist Education Services Board; and the Education (Change of Name of Education Entities) Order 2000 (SR 2000/117) is consequentially amended by revoking clause 3(4) and so much of the Schedule as relates to the Specialist Education Services Board.
Consequential changes to other references If any other enactment or other thing refers to the Specialist Education Services Board (or to the Special Education Service Board) and that reference is no 95 (1) 656 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 longer appropriate because the Board has been abolished, the reference must be read as a reference to the Ministry.
If any other enactment or other thing refers to the chief executive of the Spe- cialist Education Services Board (or of the Special Education Service Board) and that reference is no longer appropriate because the Board has been abolish- ed, the reference must be read as a reference to the Secretary.
Application of consequential changes to references Section 95— (2) 96 (1) (a) (b) applies to things that are in force or existing on the effective date (whether coming into force, entered into, or created before or after the commencement of this section); and applies to references in anything, including (without limitation) deeds, agreements, proceedings, instruments, documents, and notices.

(2) Section 95 applies to an employment agreement only in accordance with sec- tions 87 and 89.
97 Effect of reorganisation (1) On and from the effective date, anything done or omitted to be done by, or in relation to, the Specialist Education Services Board must be treated as having been done or omitted by, or in relation to, the Crown.
(2) The abolition of the Specialist Education Services Board and the transfer of its undertaking and functions to the Crown does not affect— (a) (b) the assets, liabilities, or rights of the Crown or the Board (other than by transferring them); or the commencement or continuation of proceedings by or against the Board; those proceedings may instead be commenced or continued by or against the Crown.
(3) If a transfer of an asset or liability under section 86 is registrable, the person responsible for keeping the register must register the transfer immediately after written notice of the transfer is received by him or her from any person author- ised for this purpose by the Minister.

(4) Subsection (2) does not limit sections 86 to 96.
657 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 Public Act 2002 No 50 Date of assent 11 December 2002 Commencement see section 2 1 (1) (2) 2 (1) (2) (3) (4) Title This Act is the Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002.

In this Act, the Education Act 1989 is called “the principal Act”.

Commencement This Act, other than the sections referred to in subsections (2) to (4), comes in- to force on 1 January 2003.
Section 21 comes into force on 1 July 2003.

Sections 15, 17, 18, and 26 come into force on 1 January 2004.

Sections 27 to 31 come into force on the day after the date on which this Act receives the Royal assent.

Amendments to Part 15 (Administration of tertiary institution) of principal Act 19 (1) Application of Public Finance Act 1989 Amendment(s) incorporated in the Act(s).
(2) Despite subsection (1), section 203(2) of the principal Act, as it read immedi- ately before 1 January 2003, continues to apply after that date to every institu- tion that does not have a profile.
Amendments to Part 18A (Code of practice for providers who enrol international students) of principal Act 31 Money for annual fee to transfer into export education levy account The money held for the purpose of the annual fee for the administration of the code in the trust account established under section 238H of the principal Act (as it was immediately before the commencement of section 30 of this Act) must be transferred to the export education account referred to in section 238I(2) of the principal Act as soon as practicable after the establishment of that account.
Transitional provisions 48 Interpretation In sections 49 to 57, unless the context otherwise requires,— assets has the same meaning as in section 216(1) of the Education Act 1989 658 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Commission means the Tertiary Education Commission established under sec- tion 159C of the Education Act 1989 (as inserted by section 9 of this Act) liabilities has the same meaning as in section 216(1) of the Education Act 1989 Ministry means the Ministry of Education Skill New Zealand means the agency that was continued by section 270 of the Education Act 1989 as in force immediately before the commencement of this section transferred employee means an employee of Skill New Zealand or of the Ministry who transfers to the Commission.
Absorption of Skill New Zealand into Commission 49 Skill New Zealand absorbed into Commission (1) On the date of commencement of this section, Skill New Zealand ceases to exist and— (a) the term of office of every member of the Board of Skill New Zealand expires; and (b) all assets and liabilities of Skill New Zealand vest in the Commission.

(2) No member of the Board of Skill New Zealand is entitled to compensation as a result of the expiry under this section of his or her term of office.
(3) On and from the date of commencement of this section, every reference to Skill New Zealand in any enactment (other than this Act), or in any instrument, register, agreement, deed, lease, application, notice, or other document in force at the effective date, must, unless the context otherwise requires, be read as a reference to the Commission.
50 Final report and accounts (1) As soon as reasonably practicable after the commencement of this section, the Commission must arrange for the final report of Skill New Zealand to be deliv- ered to the Minister.
(2) The report must— (a) describe Skill New Zealand’s operations for the period beginning on 1 July 2002 and ending immediately before the commencement of this section; and (b) include— (i) financial statements of Skill New Zealand prepared, in accordance with Part 5 of the Public Finance Act 1989, for that period; and (ii) an audit report prepared by the Auditor-General.

(3) The Minister must present a copy of the report to the House of Representatives under section 44A of the Public Finance Act 1989.
659 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 51 Transfers of contracts and leases do not give rise to claims (1) No person has any claim against the Crown for breach of any contract merely because the administration of the contract or the benefit of the contract is ves- ted in the Commission by section 49.
(2) Subsection (1) applies whether or not the vesting involves the Commission and its employees gaining access to any information, data, programme, intellectual property right, know-how, chattel, equipment, transmission device, or facility of the claimant or any other person.
52 Effect of absorption of Skill New Zealand into Commission (1) On and from the date of commencement of this Act, anything done or omitted to be done by, or in relation to, Skill New Zealand must be treated as having been done or omitted by, or in relation to, the Commission.
(2) The disestablishment of Skill New Zealand and the transfer of its undertaking and functions to the Commission does not affect— (a) (b) the assets, liabilities, or rights of the Crown or Skill New Zealand (other than by transferring them); or the commencement or continuation of proceedings by or against Skill New Zealand; those proceedings may instead be commenced or con- tinued by or against the Commission.
(3) If the transfer of an asset or liability under section 49 is registrable, the person responsible for keeping the register must register the transfer immediately after written notice of the transfer is received by him or her from any person author- ised for this purpose by the Minister.

(4) Subsection (2) does not limit section 49, section 51, or sections 53 to 57.
Transfer of employees to Commission Transfer of employees of Skill New Zealand Every person who is employed by Skill New Zealand immediately before the commencement of this Act transfers to the Commission on that date of com- mencement.

The transfer of an employee by this section is subject to any relevant transfer provisions in the employment agreement or contract applying to that employee.

Subsection (2) is subject to section 57.


Transfer of employees of Ministry Employees of the Ministry may be transferred to the Commission under section 61A of the State Sector Act 1988 as if their duties were no longer to be carried out by the Ministry and the Commission were a department.
53 (1) (2) (3) 54 660 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 55 Transfer does not break continuity of employment For the purpose of any provisions of a transferred employee’s employment agreement or contract relating to continuity of service, the employee’s transfer to the Commission from Skill New Zealand or the Ministry is insufficient, by itself, to break his or her employment.
56 (1) Protection of terms and conditions for transferred employees The employment of a transferred employee must be on terms and conditions no less favourable than those applying to the employee immediately before the date of the person’s transfer to the Commission.
(2) Subsection (1)— (a) (b) continues to apply to the terms and conditions of employment of a trans- ferred employee until those terms and conditions are varied by agree- ment between the transferred employee and the Commission; but does not apply to a transferred employee who, after the transfer, receives any subsequent appointment within the Commission.
57 No compensation for technical redundancy (1) An employee who has transferred, or will transfer, to the Commission under section 53 or section 54 is not entitled to receive any payment or other benefit solely on the ground that the person has ceased, or will cease, to be an employee of Skill New Zealand or the Ministry as a result of his or her transfer to the Commission.
(2) An employee of the Ministry is not entitled to receive any payment or other benefit on the ground that his or her position in the Ministry has ceased to exist if— (a) the position ceases to exist as a result of a transfer of functions of the Ministry to the Commission; and (b) in connection with that transfer of functions,— (i) (ii) the employee is given the opportunity, under section 54, to trans- fer to the Commission, to employment that complies with section 56, but he or she declines to transfer; or the employee is offered, and accepts, other employment in the Ministry.
(3) This section overrides an employee’s employment agreement to the extent that it is inconsistent with that agreement.

Miscellaneous 58 Chief executive may be called general manager For the first 3 years after the Tertiary Education Commission is established, the person appointed as its chief executive officer under clause 36 of Schedule 13A 661 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 of the principal Act (as inserted by section 47 of this Act) may be called the general manager.
662 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 Public Act 2004 No 14 Date of assent 5 April 2004 Commencement see section 2 1 (1) Title This Act is the Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004.

(2) In this Act, the Education Act 1989 is called “the principal Act”.
Part 1 Preliminary provisions 2 3 Commencement This Act comes into force on the day after the date on which it receives the Royal assent.
Purpose The purpose of this Act is— (a) (b) to provide for the Early Childhood Development Board, a Crown entity continued under Part 5 of the principal Act, to be disestablished and for its functions, assets, liabilities, and rights to be transferred to the Minis- try of Education; and to provide for other matters related to the reorganisation, such as a new funding mechanism for certain early childhood centres to enable grants to be paid by the Ministry rather than through the Early Childhood De- velopment Board.
4 Interpretation In this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,— assets has the same meaning as in section 216(1) of the principal Act Board means the Early Childhood Development Board collective agreement means an employment agreement that is binding on 1 or more employers and 2 or more employees effective date means the date on which this Act comes into force (as set out in section 2) employment agreement, in relation to an employee,— 663 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (a) (b) has the same meaning as in section 5 of the Employment Relations Act 2000; and to avoid doubt, includes an employment contract that took effect before the commencement of that Act and covers the employee’s employment with the Board liabilities has the same meaning as in section 216(1) of the principal Act Ministry means the Ministry of Education rights has the same meaning as in section 216(1) of the principal Act Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry.
Part 2 Disestablishment of Board and associated matters 5 Early Childhood Development Board disestablished and functions, assets, etc, transferred to Ministry on effective date (1) On the effective date,— (a) (b) the Board ceases to exist; and all functions, assets, liabilities, and rights of the Board, by virtue of this section, become those of the Crown.

(2) On the effective date, Part 5 and Schedule 3 of the principal Act are consequen- tially repealed.
(3) On the effective date, the following enactments are consequentially repealed: (a) (b) (c) section 13(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1990; and sections 5 and 6 of the Education Amendment Act 1993; and sections 16 and 17 and the heading above section 16 of the Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998.
8 (1) (2) Consequential changes to other references If any other enactment or other thing refers to the Board and that reference is no longer appropriate because the Board has been disestablished, the reference must be read as a reference to the Ministry.

If any other enactment or other thing refers to the chief executive of the Board and that reference is no longer appropriate because the Board has been dises- tablished, the reference must be read as a reference to the Secretary.
9 Application of consequential changes to references Section 8— (a) applies to things that are in force or existing on the effective date (whether coming into force, entered into, or created before or after the commencement of this section); and 664 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 (b) (c) (d) applies to references in anything, including (without limitation) deeds, agreements, proceedings, instruments, documents, and notices; and does not apply to collective employment agreements (if any); and does not apply to individual employment agreements (if any).
10 Effect of reorganisation (1) On and from the effective date, anything done or omitted to be done by, or in relation to, the Board must be treated as having been done or omitted by, or in relation to, the Crown.
(2) The disestablishment of the Board, and the transfer of its functions, assets, liabilities, and rights to the Crown, does not affect— (a) (b) the assets, liabilities, or rights of the Crown or the Board (other than by transferring them); or the commencement or continuation of proceedings by or against the Board; those proceedings may instead be commenced or continued by or against the Crown.
(3) If the transfer of an asset or liability under section 5 is registrable, the person responsible for keeping the register must register the transfer immediately after written notice of the transfer is received by him or her from any person author- ised for this purpose by the Minister.

(4) Subsection (2) does not limit sections 5 to 9.


11 Final report and accounts (1) As soon as reasonably practicable after the commencement of this Act, the Ministry must arrange for the final report of the Board to be delivered to the Minister.
(2) The report must— (a) (b) describe the Board’s operations for the period beginning on 1 July 2003 and ending immediately before the effective date; and if the Board has not already prepared and forwarded to the Minister an annual report on the operations of the Board for the year ended 30 June 2003 under Part 5 of the Public Finance Act 1989, describe the Board’s operations for that year; and (c) include— (i) financial statements of the Board prepared, in accordance with Part 5 of the Public Finance Act 1989, for that period and, if para- graph (b) applies, that year; and (ii) an audit report prepared by the Auditor-General.
(3) The Minister must present a copy of the report to the House of Representatives under section 44A of the Public Finance Act 1989.

665 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 Public Act 2007 No 106 Date of assent 14 December 2007 Commencement see section 2 1 2 Title This Act is the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007.

Commencement This Act comes into force on 1 January 2008.
Part 1 Amendments to Education Act 1989 40 Transitional provision: institutions and organisations with approved charters and approved profiles (1) Subsection (2) applies to— (a) (b) an institution that, immediately before this Act comes into force, has an approved charter and approved profile under the Education Act 1989; and an organisation (other than an institution) that, immediately before this Act comes into force, has an approved charter and approved profile under the Education Act 1989.
(2) On the coming into force of this Act, an institution or organisation to which this subsection applies is to be treated as an institution or organisation that has a plan that has been given funding approval under the Education Act 1989 (as amended by this Act) that takes effect from the date on which this Act comes into force.
41 (1) Transitional provision: organisations with approved charters that are exempt from need to have profile Subsection (2) applies to an organisation that, immediately before this Act comes into force,— (a) (b) has an approved charter under the Education Act 1989; but is exempt from the need to have a profile under the Education Act 1989.
(2) On the coming into force of this Act, an organisation to which this subsection applies is to be treated as an organisation that the Commission has exempted, under section 159U (as substituted by section 20 of this Act), from being re- quired to submit a proposed plan in order to receive funding under a funding 666 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 mechanism that provides for funding via plans, until the Commission decides that the organisation is no longer exempt under section 159U.
42 (1) Transitional provision: organisations with approved profile and exempt from need to have charter Subsection (2) applies to an organisation that, immediately before this Act comes into force,— (a) (b) has an approved profile under the Education Act 1989; but is exempt from the need to have a charter under the Education Act 1989.
(2) On the coming into force of this Act, an organisation to which this subsection applies is to be treated as an organisation that the Commission has exempted, under section 159U (as substituted by section 20 of this Act), from being re- quired to submit a proposed plan in order to receive funding under a funding mechanism that provides for funding via plans, until the Commission decides that the organisation is no longer exempt under section 159U.
43 (1) Transitional provision: organisations exempt from need to have profile and charter Subsection (2) applies to an organisation that, immediately before this Act comes into force,— (a) is exempt from the need to have a profile under the Education Act 1989; and (b) is exempt from the need to have a charter under the Education Act 1989.
(2) On the coming into force of this Act, an organisation to which this subsection applies is to be treated as an organisation that the Commission has exempted, under section 159U (as substituted by section 20 of this Act), from being re- quired to submit a proposed plan in order to receive funding under a funding mechanism that provides for funding via plans, until the Commission decides that the organisation is no longer exempt under section 159U.
44 (1) Transitional provision: organisations funded under section 159ZC(3) Subsection (2) applies to an organisation that immediately before this Act comes into force is funded under section 159ZC(3) of the Education Act 1989.
(2) On the coming into force of this Act, an organisation to which this subsection applies is to be treated as an organisation that the Commission has decided to fund under section 159ZC(1) of the Education Act 1989 (as amended by this Act) for the remainder of the funding period to which the section 159ZC(3) funding relates.
667 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 45 (1) Transitional provision: tertiary education strategy and statement of tertiary education priorities Subsection (2) applies to the tertiary education strategy and the statement of tertiary education priorities in existence immediately before this Act comes in- to force.
(2) On the coming into force of this Act, the documents to which this subsection applies must, when read together, be treated as if they are a tertiary education strategy made under section 159AA of the Education Act 1989 (as substituted by section 7 of this Act).
46 (1) Transitional provision: funding mechanisms Subsection (2) applies to funding mechanisms that fund organisations that have approved profiles that are determined and implemented under the Education Act 1989 immediately before this Act comes into force.

(2) On the coming into force of this Act, a funding mechanism to which this sub- section applies is treated as a funding mechanism that provides for funding via plans determined and implemented under the Education Act 1989 (as amended by this Act).
(3) Subsection (4) applies to funding mechanisms that, immediately before this Act comes into force, fund organisations that do not have profiles.

(4) On the coming into force of this Act, a funding mechanism to which this sub- section applies must be treated as if it is a funding mechanism to fund organisa- tions other than via plans determined and implemented under the Education Act 1989 (as amended by this Act).
47 Validation of determination of design of funding mechanism for student component fund (1) In this section,— consequences, in relation to any action, or any failure or refusal to act, in- cludes the availability of any power (on the part of any person) to take action in respect of, or because of, the action, failure, or refusal Minister means the Minister for Tertiary Education SCF funding determination means the determination of the Minister, commu- nicated to the chair of the Tertiary Education Commission by a letter dated 23 January 2007, specifying amendments to the design of the funding mechanism for the student component fund.
The SCF funding determination must be treated as being, and having always been, as valid and effectual as it would have been if the Minister had taken the actions described in subsection (4).
The validity or invalidity, and the consequences, of any action (and of any fail- ure or refusal to act) of any person, whether occurring before or after the com- (2) (3) 668 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 mencement of this section, must be determined as if the Minister had taken the actions described in subsection (4).
(4) The actions referred to in subsections (2) and (3) are— (a) more than 2 months before 23 January 2007, publishing in the Gazette a notice, complying in all respects with former section 159ZA of the prin- cipal Act, relating to all the new or amended conditions setting limits on the fees that organisations may charge domestic students that were in fact specified in the SCF determination (whether directly, or by the modification of the application of existing conditions); and (b) before making the SCF determination, considering all submissions re- ceived before the specified date.
669 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009 Public Act 2009 No 70 Date of assent 17 December 2009 Commencement see section 2 1 Title This Act is the Education (Polytechnics) Amendment Act 2009.

2 (1) (2) Commencement Sections 5, 7 to 9, 11 to 13, and 16 come into force on 1 March 2010.

The rest of this Act comes into force on the day after the date on which it re- ceives the Royal assent.
Part 2 Transitional matters 18 Interpretation In this Part,— (a) (b) (c) principal Act means Education Act 1989; and reconstituted polytechnic council means a polytechnic council as con- stituted for a polytechnic on its reconstitution day; and terms defined in section 159 of the principal Act have the meanings given by that section.
19 (1) Initial membership of reconstituted councils Before its reconstitution day, the Minister must appoint the number of members of each reconstituted polytechnic council required by its constitution to be ap- pointed by the Minister.

(2) Other members of a reconstituted polytechnic council— (a) may be appointed before its reconstitution day; and (b) must be appointed within 3 months after that day.
(3) Every member of a reconstituted polytechnic council who is before 1 May 2011 appointed under section 222AA(1)(b) of the principal Act must be ap- pointed for a term ending no later than the close of 30 April 2011.
(4) A reconstituted polytechnic council must ensure that every vacancy of either of the following kinds is filled no later than 11 June 2011: (a) a vacancy that arises at the close of 30 April 2011 because a member ap- pointed under section 222AA(1)(b) of the principal Act goes out of office at that time: 670 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 (b) a vacancy that— (i) arises at a time before the close of 30 April 2011 because a mem- ber appointed under section 222AA(1)(b) of the principal Act goes out of office at that time; and (5) (6) (7) (ii) has not been filled before the close of 30 April 2011.
Subsection (3) overrides section 222AE(2) of the principal Act.

The appointment of a member of a reconstituted polytechnic council takes ef- fect on the later of the day on which it occurs and its reconstitution day.

If on its reconstitution day there is a vacancy in a polytechnic’s council, the Minister may, by written notice to any person who was a member of the coun- cil immediately before that day, authorise him or her to act as a member of the council until the vacancy is filled.
(8) The Minister must give a copy of every notice under subsection (7) to the council concerned.

(9) A person authorised under subsection (7) must for all purposes be treated as a member of the council concerned until the vacancy concerned is filled.

(10) A council may, before its reconstitution day, make the statutes required by sec- tion 222AB of the principal Act.
20 Members of existing polytechnic councils to go out of office (1) On its reconstitution day,— (a) (b) all members of a polytechnic council immediately before that day go out of office; and all people appointed or elected a member of the council before that day under section 19 take up office.

(2) Subsection (1)— (a) (b) is subject to section 19(7); and overrides section 222AE(4) of the principal Act.
(3) Neither the Crown nor a polytechnic council is liable to make a payment to, or otherwise compensate, a person in respect of the person’s going out of office as a member of the council under subsection (1)(a).

21 Council continues to be same body (1) On and after its reconstitution day, a polytechnic council— (a) is the same body as the council of the polytechnic concerned that existed immediately before that day; and (b) continues to have the obligations and rights it then had.
(2) Subsection (1) is subject to section 22.
671 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 22 Temporary power of direction Before its reconstitution day, the Minister may, by written notice to the chief executive of a polytechnic, give any directions he or she thinks reasonably necessary to ensure that its council as reconstituted can deal effectively with the business before it on and after that day; and— (a) the chief executive must give the notice to the council as soon as is prac- ticable after that day; and (b) the council must comply with the directions.
672 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Education Amendment Act 2010 Public Act 2010 No 25 Date of assent 19 May 2010 Commencement see section 2 1 2 Title This Act is the Education Amendment Act 2010.

Commencement This Act comes into force on the day after the date on which it receives the Royal assent.
Part 2 Transitional provision, validations, and consequential amendments Transitional provision in relation to Police vetting 75 Transitional provision in relation to Police vetting Despite sections 78C, 78CA, 319D, and 319E of the Education Act 1989 (as substituted by sections 21 and 69 of this Act), and section 319FB of the Educa- tion Act 1989 (as inserted by section 69 of this Act), the board of a State school, or the management of a school registered under section 35A, or a ser- vice provider of a licensed early childhood service (as the case may be) must, within 4 weeks after the date on which this Act comes into force, apply for a Police vet of any person in respect of whom— (a) (b) a Police vet is required under section 78C, 78CA, 319D, or 319E of the Education Act 1989 (as substituted by this Act) or under section 319FB of the Education Act 1989 (as inserted by this Act); and no Police vet has been obtained within a period of 3 years immediately before the commencement of this Act, by— (i) (ii) that board, management, or service provider; or the New Zealand Teachers Council, at the request of that board, management, or service provider.
76 Validation in respect of Part 20 Validations The validity of any action of the Authority must be determined as if at all ma- terial times— (a) section 246 of the Education Act 1989— 673 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (i) (ii) contained the definition of relevant school inserted by section 52 of this Act; and did not contain the definition of secondary school, as repealed by section 52 of this Act; and (b) every other reference in Part 20 of the Education Act 1989 to a secon- dary school were a reference to a relevant school, within the meaning of that term as inserted in section 246 of that Act by section 52 of this Act.
77 (1) Validation in respect of change of proprietor of integrated school For the purposes of the Education Act 1989, actions done under that Act or under the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975 before the com- mencement of this Act are not invalid solely because of a defect or error in the processes relating to a change of proprietor of an integrated school.
(2) In this section, integrated school and proprietor have the same meanings as in section 2(1) of the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975.

674 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 Public Act 2010 No 134 Date of assent 20 December 2010 Commencement see section 2 1 Title This Act is the Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010.

2 (1) (2) Commencement Sections 31 to 33 come into force 6 months after the date on which this Act receives the Royal assent.
The rest of this Act comes into force on the day after the date on which it re- ceives the Royal assent.

Transitional provision 37 Continuation of registration if school registered under repealed section 35A (1) In this section,— (a) (b) old section 35A means the section 35A of the Education Act 1989 re- pealed by section 11 of this Act; and new section 35A means the section 35A of the Education Act 1989 sub- stituted by section 11 of this Act.
(2) A school that, immediately before new section 35A comes into force, is or is deemed to be fully registered as a school of a particular description or descrip- tions under old section 35A, is to be regarded as fully registered as a school of that description or those descriptions under new section 35A.
(3) Despite subsection (2), the managers of a school to which that subsection ap- plies must comply with the criteria for registration as a private school under new section 35A as if it had been registered under that section.
(4) A school that, immediately before new section 35A comes into force, is provi- sionally registered as a school of a particular description or descriptions under old section 35A, is to be regarded as provisionally registered as a school of that description or those descriptions under new section 35A when that section comes into force.
(5) Despite subsection (4), when the Secretary is deciding whether to fully register a school to which that subsection applies, he or she must do so as if— (a) old section 35A had not been repealed by section 11 of this Act, but con- tinued in force; and 675 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 (b) he or she were considering under old section 35A whether to fully regis- ter a provisionally registered school.
676 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Education Amendment Act 2011 Public Act 2011 No 66 Date of assent 29 August 2011 Commencement see section 2 1 2 Title This Act is the Education Amendment Act 2011.

Commencement This Act comes into force on the day after the date on which it receives the Royal assent.
Part 2 Transitional arrangements and amendments to other enactments Transitional provisions 43 Qualifications and standards existing before commencement of this Act On the commencement of this Act,— (a) (b) all qualifications listed on the Qualifications Framework immediately before the commencement of this Act are deemed to be qualifications listed on the Qualifications Framework under section 248 of the princi- pal Act; and all standards listed on the Directory of Assessment Standards immedi- ately before the commencement of this Act are deemed to be standards listed under section 248A of the principal Act.
44 Policies and criteria under former section 253 and rules under former section 265 (1) On the commencement of this Act,— (a) (b) all policies and criteria made under former section 253 of the principal Act and in force immediately before the commencement of this Act are deemed to be rules made under section 253 of the principal Act; and all rules made under former section 265 of the principal Act and in force immediately before the commencement of this Act are deemed to be rules made under section 253 of the principal Act.
(2) All policies and criteria that exist by the operation of subsection (1)(a) and all rules that exist by the operation of subsection (1)(b) expire on the close of 31 December 2012.
677 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 45 Course approvals, accreditations, consents, etc (1) On the commencement of this Act,— (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) a course approval granted under former section 258 of the principal Act and that existed immediately before commencement is deemed to be a programme approval granted under section 249 of the principal Act: a course approval granted under former section 258 of the principal Act that does not lead to a qualification on the New Zealand Qualifications Framework is deemed to be a training scheme approval granted under section 251 of the principal Act: an accreditation granted under former section 259 of the principal Act and that existed immediately before commencement is deemed to be an accreditation granted under section 250 of the principal Act: a consent to assess against standards granted by the Qualifications Au- thority and that existed immediately before commencement is deemed to be a consent to assess against standards granted under section 252 of the principal Act: a consent granted under former section 254 of the principal Act and that existed immediately before commencement is deemed to be a consent granted under section 253B of the principal Act: fees charged under former section 266 of the principal Act that, immedi- ately before commencement, were owed to the Authority are deemed to be fees charged under section 254 of the principal Act.
(2) If, immediately before commencement, an institution provided study or train- ing under a consent to assess against standards,— (a) (b) the institution must, within 12 months of commencement, apply for training scheme approval for the study or training; and if it fails to apply for training scheme approval within that period, the consent to assess against standards that it holds by the operation of sub- section (1)(d) lapses on the date that is 12 months after commencement.
(3) Subsection (2) does not apply where the institution had a course approval or an accreditation to provide the study or training.

(4) In this section, commencement means commencement of this Act.
Transitional provisions relating to private training establishments 46 Transitional arrangements for private training establishments (1) A registered private training establishment that existed immediately before the commencement of this Act must, in order to maintain its registration,— (a) do the following things within 6 months of the commencement of this Act: 678 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 (i) (ii) give the Authority a statutory declaration from each governing member of the establishment that satisfies the requirements of section 232D(2)(c)(i) and (ii); and satisfy the Authority that it complies with the requirements of sec- tion 233(1)(h) relating to the provision of certain information; and (b) (c) provide, within 6 months of receiving a request from the Authority, any application or information required by the Authority for the purpose of determining whether each governing member of the establishment is a fit and proper person; and satisfy the Authority, within 3 years of the commencement of this Act, that each governing member of the establishment is a fit and proper per- son.
(2) A failure to comply with subsection (1) is a failure to meet the relevant criteria set out in section 233(1), and section 233D applies accordingly.

(3) In subsection (1), a registered private training establishment means a private training establishment that was granted registration by the Authority under sec- tion 236 of the principal Act before it was amended by this Act.
679 Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education (Freedom of Association) Amendment Act 2011 Public Act 2011 No 80 Date of assent 30 September 2011 Commencement see section 2 1 2 9 (1) Title This Act is the Education (Freedom of Association) Amendment Act 2011.

Commencement This Act comes into force on 1 January 2012.
Transitional provision This section applies to any student who on 1 January 2012— (a) (b) is enrolled at an institution or private training establishment; and is a member of that institution’s or that private training establishment’s students association.
(2) Despite sections 229A to 229CA of the principal Act (as inserted by this Act),— (a) (b) a student to whom this section applies continues to be a member of the students association until the expiry of his or her current term of enrol- ment; and the provisions of the constitution of the students association that existed when the student last joined or rejoined the association continue to apply until the expiry of that period.
680 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Reprints notes Education Act 1989 Notes 1 2 General This is a reprint of the Education Act 1989 that incorporates all the amend- ments to that Act as at the date of the last amendment to it.

Legal status Reprints are presumed to correctly state, as at the date of the reprint, the law enacted by the principal enactment and by any amendments to that enactment.
Section 18 of the Legislation Act 2012 provides that this reprint, published in electronic form, has the status of an official version under section 17 of that Act.

A printed version of the reprint produced directly from this official elec- tronic version also has official status.

3 Editorial and format changes Editorial and format changes to reprints are made using the powers under sec- tions 24 to 26 of the Legislation Act 2012.

See also http://www.pco.parlia- ment.govt.nz/editorial-conventions/.
4 Amendments incorporated in this reprint Children, Young Persons, and Their Families (Oranga Tamariki) Legislation Act 2017 (2017 No 31): section 149 Education (Update) Amendment Act 2017 (2017 No 20) Education Legislation Act 2016 (2016 No 72): Part 1 District Court Act 2016 (2016 No 49): section 261 Customs and Excise (Tobacco Products—Budget Measures) Amendment Act 2016 (2016 No 25): section 7 Legislation (Confirmable Instruments) Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 120): section 14 Education (Extension of Application Period) Order 2015 (LI 2015/191): clause 3 Education (Specified Institutions) Order 2015 (LI 2015/78) Education Amendment Act 2015 (2015 No 1) Financial Reporting Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 64): section 17 Industry Training and Apprenticeships Amendment Act 2014 (2014 No 16): sections 23, 25, 26 Financial Markets (Repeals and Amendments) Act 2013 (2013 No 70): section 150 Criminal Procedure (Consequential Amendments) Regulations 2013 (SR 2013/409): regulation 3(1) Crown Entities Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 51): sections 42, 72 Education Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 34) Holidays (Full Recognition of Waitangi Day and ANZAC Day) Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 19): section 8 Social Security (Benefit Categories and Work Focus) Amendment Act 2013 (2013 No 13): sections 114, 129 Legislation Act 2012 (2012 No 119): section 77(3) Education (Student Allowances Indexation—Budget Measures) Amendment Act 2012 (2012 No 79) 681 Notes Education Act 1989 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Social Security (Youth Support and
 Work Focus) Amendment Act 2012 (2012 No 50): section 28(2) Criminal Procedure Act 2011 (2011 No 81): section 413 Education (Freedom of Association) Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 80) Education Amendment Act 2011 (2011 No 66) Student Loan Scheme Act 2011 (2011 No 62): section 223 Education Amendment Act (No 3) 2010 (2010 No 134) Research, Science, and Technology Act 2010 (2010 No 131): section 18 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 2010 (2010 No 103) Education Amendment Act 2010 (2010 No 25) Education (Polytechnics)
 Amendment Act 2009 (2009 No 70) Immigration Act 2009 (2009 No 51): section 406(1) Education (National Standards) Amendment Act 2008 (2008 No 108) Policing Act 2008 (2008 No 72): section 116(a)(ii) Disability (United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities) Act 2008 (2008 No 64): section 4 Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106) Income Tax Act 2007 (2007 No 97): section ZA 2(1) Education Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 52) Crimes (Substituted Section 59) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 18): section 6(2) Student Loan Scheme Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 13): section 42 Securities Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 46): section 25 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) Public Records Act 2005 (2005 No 40): section 67(1) Relationships (Statutory References) Act 2005 (2005 No 3): section 7 State-Owned Enterprises Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 116): section 5 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115): section 200 Public Finance Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 113): section 37(1) Education (Export Education Levy) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 75) Building Act 2004 (2004 No 72): section 414 Income Tax Act 2004 (2004 No 35): section YA 2 State Sector Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 15): section 6 Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14) Health Practitioners Competence Assurance Act 2003 (2003 No 48): section 175(1) State Sector Amendment Act 2003 (2003 No 41): section 14 Local Government Act 2002 (2002
 No 84): section 262 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100): section 170(1) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) Health and Disability Services (Safety) Act 2001 (2001 No 93): section 58(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) Employment Relations Act 2000 (2000 No 24): sections 240, 241 682 Reprinted as at 14 July 2017 Education Act 1989 Notes Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) Education (Specified Institutions)
 Order 2000 (SR 2000/44) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107) Department of Child, Youth and Family Services Act 1999 (1999 No 82): section 13 Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79) Stamp Duty Abolition Act 1999 (1999 No 61): section 7 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96): sec- tion 11 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90) Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21) Survey Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 55): section 5 Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164): section YB 1 Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1993 (1993 No 77) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51) Foreign Affairs Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 48): section 9(2) Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142): section 42 Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107) Building Act 1991 (1991 No 150): section 92(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156) Education Act 1989 (1989 No 80): sections 9(8), 303(6) Public Finance Act 1989 (1989 No 44): section 65R(3) Wellington, New Zealand: Published under the authority of the New Zealand Government—2017 683